Manual Shop Acura TSX 2009 PDF

08/04/14 13:35:11 61TL2000_000_0002
2009 TSX - P/NO. 61TL200

INTRODUCTION
How to Use This Manual General Information

This manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover. Specifications
You can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. The symbols printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick
reference system. Maintenance
Each section includes:
1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing:
• Parts disassembly sequence.
• Bolt torques and thread sizes. *Engine Electrical
• Page references to descriptions in text.
2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and tools.
3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubleshooting. Engine Mechanical
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
Engine Cooling
Safety Messages
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed decisions, we have provided safety Fuel and Emissions
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use
your own good judgment. *Transaxle
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms
including:
• Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
• Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and *Steering
one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
Suspension
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.
(Including TPMS)
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions. Brakes
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
(Including VSA)
• Instructions − how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.
*Body
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the time of printing. We reserve
the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of *Heating, Ventilation,
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic,
and Air Conditioning
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text,
figures, and tables. *Body Electrical
As you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a symbol. The purpose of this message is *Audio, Navigation,
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment.
and Telematics
First Edition 06/2008 HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD. *Restraints

All Rights Reserved Service Publication Office
Specifications apply to USA and Canada
As sections with * include SRS components;

special precautions are required when servicing.
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＢＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:58 61TL2000_010_0001
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes .................................. 1-2

Identification Number Locations .................... 1-4
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations .... 1-5

Under-hood Emission Control Label ............... 1-7
Lift and Support Points .................................... 1-8

Towing .............................................................. 1-9
Parts Marking .................................................... 1-11
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０１０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:58 61TL2000_010_0002
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes

Vehicle Identification Number ＊０２
＊０１
JH4 CU2 6 6 * 9 C 000001
a b c de f g h
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

JH4: Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
Acura passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body and Engine Type Vehicle Identification
CU2: Acura TSX/K24Z3 Number. Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety
c. Body Type and Transmission Type Standard Certification,
5: 4-door Sedan/6-speed Manual and Paint Code Label.
6: 4-door Sedan/5-speed Automatic Vehicle Identification Number,
d. Vehicle Grade (Series) Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
USA models Standard Certification, and
Paint Code Label.
6: TSX, TECH
Canada models
4: TSX
6: PREMIUM, TECH
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
V.I.N
9: ’09
g. Factory Code
C: Saitama Factory in Japan
h. Serial Number
000001−: USA models PAINT CODE INTERIOR COLOR CODE
800001−: Canada models
1-2
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＢＡＡＴ９６
08/04/09 12:39:58 61TL2000_010_0003
Engine Number Paint Code

Code Color USA Canada models
＊０３ models TSX PREMIUM
K24Z3 - 2000001
NH-624P Premium ○ ○ ○
White
Pearl
a b NH-731P Crystal ○ ○ ○
Black
a. Engine Type Pearl
K24Z3: 2.4 L DOHC i-VTEC Sequential Multiport NH-736M Grigio ○ ○
Fuel-injected engine Metallic
b. Serial Number NH-737M Polished ○ ○ ○
Metal
Metallic
Transmission Number NH-743M Palladium ○ ○ ○
Silver
＊０４ Metallic
SM5M - 1000001 B-538M Glacier ○ ○
Blue
Metallic
B-553P Vortex ○ ○ ○
a b Blue Pearl
R-530P Basque ○ ○ ○
a. Transmission Type Red Pearl
SM5M: 6-speed Manual
MM7A: 5-speed Automatic
b. Serial Number
1-3
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 12:39:59 61TL2000_010_0004
General Information
Identification Number Locations

＊０５＊０６
Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) Number (VIN)
Engine Number Automatic Manual

Transmission Transmission
Number Number
1-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＢＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:40:00 61TL2000_010_0005
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations

Front Passenger’s Compartment:
＊０７
SRS WARNING SRS INFORMATION
INFORMATION USA models
PASSENGER AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER
SRS WARNING
INFORMATION
FRONT PASSENGER
AIRBAG WARNING
TAG (CHILD SEAT)
USA models
SIDE AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER
STEERING COLUMN
NOTICE
MONITOR NOTICE FRONT SEAT BELT

TENSIONER CAUTION
＊０８
Steering Wheel: Rear Passenger’s Compartment:
DRIVER AIRBAG ROOF-SIDE

MODULE DANGER MODULE DANGER
CABLE REEL
CAUTION
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-5
ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＢＡＡＴ４０
08/04/09 12:40:00 61TL2000_010_0006
General Information
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont’d)

＊０９＊１０
SERVICE INFORMATION
SRS WARNIG and ENGINE COOLANT
INFORMATION
SIDE AIRBAG
CAUTION
Located on driver’s
and passenger’s
doorjamb
TIRE INFORMATION
AIR CONDITIONING RADIATOR CAP BATTERY

INFORMATION DANGER DANGER
1-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:40:01 61TL2000_010_0007
Under-hood Emission Control Label

Emission Group Identification Test Group and Evaporative Family
Example: Test Group:
＊１１＊１２
INFORMATION VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
THE FACTORY INSTALLED LONG − LIFE
COOLANT MUST BE REPLACED ACCORDING TO
MAINTENANCE MINDER SUB CODE 5. CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS : 2009MY 9 HNX V 02.4 4B9
OR AT 10 YEARS WHICHEVER COMES FIRST.
THEREAFTER EVERY 5 YEARS.
WHEN ADDING OR REPLACING THE COOLANT, U. S. EPA : T2B5 LDV OBD : CA OBD I I FUEL : GASOLINE
ALWAYS USE ACURA RECOMMENDED GENUINE
LONG − LIFE ANTI − FREEZE/COOLANT TYPE 2. ARB : LEV I I ULEV PC OBD : CA OBD I I FUEL : GASOLINE
THIS COOLANT IS PRE − MIXED WITH 50 %
DISTILLED WATER. IT DOES NOT REQUIRE
ANY ADDITIONAL MIXING.
NEVER DILUTE THE COOLANT,
OR THE LIFE OF THE ENGINE MAY BE
WU−TWC, TWC, A/F SENSOR, HO2S, SFI ab c d e
SERIOUSLY SHORTENED. 9HNXV02. 44B9
CHECK OR ADD THE COOLANT
AT THE RESERVE TANK, NOT THE RADIATOR. 9HNXR0151VEA
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON THE COOLING
8• K
SYSTEM, READ THE OWNER’S MANUAL HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD. RL5−A00 2. 4L
OR CHECK WITH YOUR ACURA DEALER.
a. Model Year
9: ’09
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
d. Displacement Group
e. Sequence Characters
Evaporative Family:
＊１３
9 HNX R 0151 VEA
ab c d e
a. Model Year
9: ’09
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
R: Refueling
d. Canister Working Capacity Group
e. Sequence Characters
-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-7
ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＢＡＡＴ５０
08/04/09 12:40:01 61TL2000_010_0008
General Information
Lift and Support Points

NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components Floor Jack
such as suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the
vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking
safety stands. When substantial weight is removed brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the
from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can shift lever in reverse for manual transmission, or in
change, causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift. the P position for automatic transmission.
Vehicle Lift 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
1. Position the lift blocks (A) under the vehicle’s front 3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking
support points (B) and rear support points (C). bracket (A) or the rear jacking bracket (B). Center
＊１４ the jacking bracket on the jack lift platform (C), and
jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety
stands under it.
＊１５
A C
C
B
A
2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle

gently to be sure it is firmly supported.
3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the

vehicle support points for solid contact with the lift B C
blocks.
Safety Stands 4. Position the safety stands under the support points,
and adjust them so the vehicle is level.
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same
support points (B and C) as for a vehicle lift. Always use 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
safety stands when working on or under any vehicle
that is supported only by a jack.
1-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＢＡＡＴ６０
08/04/09 12:40:02 61TL2000_010_0009
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional Rear:
towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another ＊１７
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.
Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle.
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator loads the vehicle

on the back of a truck. This is the best way of
transporting the vehicle.
To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is

equipped with front towing hooks (A), front tie down
C
hook slots (B), rear towing hook (C), and rear tie down
hook slots (D).
The towing hooks can be used with a winch to pull the

vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down hook slots can
be used to secure the vehicle to the truck.
Front:
＊１６
A
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-9
ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＢＡＡＴ７０
08/04/09 12:40:02 61TL2000_010_0010
General Information
Towing (cont’d)
Wheel Lift Equipment − The tow truck uses two
pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and • Improper towing preparation will damage the
lifts them off the ground. The other two wheels remain transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If
on the ground. This is an acceptable way of towing the you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine
vehicle. (automatic transmission), the vehicle must be
transported on a flat-bed.
Sling-type Equipment − The tow truck uses metal • Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will
cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around cause serious damage. The bumpers are not
parts of the frame or suspension, and the cables lift that designed to support the vehicle’s weight.
end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle’s
suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this
method of towing is attempted. This method of towing
the vehicle is unacceptable.
If the vehicle cannot be transported by a flat-bed, it

should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If
the vehicle is damaged, and must be towed with the
front wheels on the ground, or with all four wheels on
the ground, do this:
Manual Transmission
• Release the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission in neutral.
• Leave the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I) so the
steering wheel does not lock.
• Make sure all accessories are turned off to minimize
battery current draw.
Automatic Transmission
• Release the parking brake.
• Start the engine.
• Shift to D, then to the N.
• Turn off the engine.
• Leave the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I) so the
steering wheel does not lock.
• Make sure all accessories are turned off to minimize
battery current draw.
It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles

(80 km), and keep the vehicle speed below 35 mph
(55 km/h).
1-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:40:06 61TL2000_010_0011
Parts Marking
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN). Original
parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. These labels should not be
removed. The original engine or transmission VIN plates are not transferable to the replacement engine or
transmission.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the part.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-11
ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＢＡＡＴ７５
08/04/09 12:41:19 61TL2000_020_0001
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits

Engine Electrical ........................................................... 2-2
Engine Assembly .......................................................... 2-2
Cylinder Head ............................................................... 2-3
Engine Block ................................................................. 2-4
Engine Lubrication ....................................................... 2-5
Cooling System ............................................................ 2-5
Fuel and Emissions ...................................................... 2-6
Clutch ............................................................................. 2-6
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential ............... 2-7
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential ........... 2-9
Steering ......................................................................... 2-15
Suspension ................................................................... 2-15
Brakes ............................................................................ 2-16
Air Conditioning ........................................................... 2-16
Design Specifications
Dimensions ................................................................... 2-17
Weight ........................................................................... 2-17
Engine ............................................................................ 2-17
Starter ............................................................................ 2-17
Clutch ............................................................................. 2-18
Manual Transmission .................................................. 2-18
Automatic Transmission .............................................. 2-18
Steering ......................................................................... 2-18
Suspension ................................................................... 2-18
Tires ............................................................................... 2-18
Wheel Alignment ......................................................... 2-18
Brakes ............................................................................ 2-19
Air Conditioning ........................................................... 2-19
Electrical Ratings .......................................................... 2-20
Body Specifications ...................................................... 2-21
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０２０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:41:20 61TL2000_020_0002

Engine Electrical
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Ignition coil Rated voltage 12 V
Firing order 1−3−4−2
Spark plug Type NGK: ILZKR7B-11S
DENSO: SXU22HCR-11S
Gap 1.0−1.1 mm (0.039−0.043 in.) ―――
Ignition timing At idle M/T (in neutral), 8±2 ° BTDC
Check the red mark A/T (in N or P)
Drive belt Tension Auto-tensioner
Alternator Output At 13.5 V and 105 A
normal engine
temperature
Coil (rotor) resistance At 68 °F (20 °C) 3.4 −3.8
Slip ring O.D. 14.4 mm (0.57 in.) 14.0 mm (0.55 in.)
Brush length 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Brush spring tension 3.2 N (0.33 kgf, 0.7 lbf) ―――
Starter Output 1.6 kW
Commutator mica depth 0.40−0.50 mm (0.016−0.020 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Commutator runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Commutator O.D. 28.0−28.1 mm (1.10−1.11 in.) 27.5 mm (1.08 in.)
Brush length 11.1−11.5 mm (0.440−0.450 in.) 4.3 mm (0.17 in.)
Brush spring tension 9.8−12.8 mm (1.0−1.3 kgf, 2.2−2.9 lbf)
Engine Assembly
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New
Compression Pressure Minimum 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi)
Check the engine with the starter Maximum 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi)
cranking variation
2-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＮＤＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:41:20 61TL2000_020_0003
Cylinder Head
Head Warpage ――― 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Height 103.95−104.05 mm (4.093−4.096 in.) ―――
Camshaft End play 0.05−0.20 mm (0.002−0.008 in.) 0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance No. 1 journal 0.030−0.069 mm (0.001−0.003 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
No. 2, 3, 4, 5 0.060−0.099 mm (0.002−0.004 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
journals
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height Intake, primary 33.744 mm (1.3285 in.) ―――
Intake, mid 35.456 mm (1.3959 in.) ―――
Intake, 33.744 mm (1.3285 in.) ―――
secondary
Exhaust 34.291 mm (1.3500 in.) ―――
Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.21−0.25 mm (0.008−0.010 in.) ―――
Exhaust 0.25−0.29 mm (0.010−0.011 in.) ―――
Stem O.D. Intake 5.475−5.485 mm (0.2156−0.2159 in.) 5.445 mm (0.214 in.)
Exhaust 5.450−5.460 mm (0.2146−0.2150 in.) 5.42 mm (0.213 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.030−0.055 mm (0.0012−0.0022 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Valve seat Width Intake 1.25−1.55 mm (0.049−0.061 in.) 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
Stem installed height Intake 44.0−44.5 mm (1.73−1.75 in.) 44.7 mm (1.76 in.)
Valve spring Free length Intake NIPPON HATSUJO: ―――
47.57 mm (1.8728 in.)
Intake CHUO HATSUJO: ―――
47.58 mm (1.8732 in.)
Exhaust 48.42 mm (1.906 in.) ―――
Valve guide I.D. Intake 5.515−5.530 mm (0.2171−0.2177 in.) 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
Installed height Intake 15.2−16.2 mm (0.598−0.638 in.) ―――
Exhaust 15.5−16.5 mm (0.610−0.650 in.) ―――
Rocker arm Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0.018−0.059 mm (0.0007−0.0023 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-3

08/04/09 12:41:20 61TL2000_020_0004

Engine Block
Block Warpage of deck 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Bore diameter A or I 87.010−87.020 mm (3.4256−3.4260 in.) 87.070 mm (3.4279 in.)
B or II 87.000−87.010 mm (3.4252−3.4256 in.) 87.070 mm (3.4279 in.)
Bore taper ――― 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Reboring limit ――― 0.25 mm (0.01 in.)
Piston Skirt O.D. at 11 mm (0.4 in.) from No letter or A 86.980−86.990 mm (3.4244−3.4248 in.) 86.930 mm (3.4224 in.)
bottom of skirt Letter B 86.970−86.980 mm (3.4240−3.4244 in.) 86.920 mm (3.4220 in.)
Clearance in cylinder 0.020−0.040 mm (0.0008−0.0016 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Ring groove width Top 1.245−1.255 mm (0.0486−0.0494 in.) 1.265 mm (0.050 in.)
Second 1.230−1.240 mm (0.0484−0.0488 in.) 1.26 mm (0.050 in.)
Oil 2.005−2.025 mm (0.0789−0.0797 in.) 2.55 mm (0.100 in.)
Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0.060−0.085 mm (0.0024−0.0033 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Second 0.040−0.065 mm (0.0016−0.0026 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0.20−0.35 mm (0.008−0.014 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second 0.50−0.65 mm (0.020−0.026 in.) 0.75 mm (0.030 in.)
Oil NIPPON PISTON RING: 0.75 mm (0.030 in.)
0.20−0.70 mm (0.008−0.028 in.)
RIKEN: 0.55 mm (0.022 in.)
0.20−0.50 mm (0.008−0.020 in.)
Piston pin O.D. 21.961−21.965 mm (0.8646−0.8648 in.) 21.953 mm (0.8643 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance −0.005 to ＋0.002 mm 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.)
(−0.00020 to ＋0.00008 in.)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance 0.005−0.015 mm (0.0002−0.0006 in.) 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)
Small-end bore diameter 21.970−21.976 mm (0.8650−0.8652 in.) ―――
Large-end bore diameter 51.0 mm (2.01 in.) ―――
End play installed on crankshaft 0.15−0.35 mm (0.006−0.014 in.) 0.40 mm (0.016 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter No. 1, 2, 4, 5 54.984−55.008 mm (2.1647−2.1657 in.) ―――
journals
No. 3 journal 54.976−55.000 mm (2.1644−2.1654 in.) ―――
Rod journal diameter 47.976−48.000 mm (1.8888−1.8898 in.) ―――
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
End play 0.10−0.35 mm (0.004−0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Runout 0.03 mm (0.0012 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance No. 1, 2, 4, 5 0.017−0.041 mm (0.0007−0.0016 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
bearing journals
No. 3 journal 0.025−0.049 mm (0.0010−0.0019 in.) 0.055 mm (0.0022 in.)
Rod bearing clearance 0.032−0.066 mm (0.0013−0.0026 in.) 0.077 mm (0.0030 in.)
2-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:41:20 61TL2000_020_0005
Engine Lubrication
Engine oil Capacity Engine overhaul 5.1 L (5.4 US qt)
Oil change 4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
including filter
Oil change 3.8 L (4.0 US qt)
without filter
Oil pump Inner-to-outer rotor clearance 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.19 mm (0.0075 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor 0.15−0.21 mm (0.006−0.008 in.) 0.23 mm (0.009 in.)
radial clearance
Pump housing-to-rotor axial 0.035−0.070 mm (0.0013−0.0028 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
clearance
Balancer shafts, journal diameter No. 1 journal, front 19.938−19.950 mm (0.7850−0.7854 in.) 19.92 mm (0.784 in.)
shaft
No. 1 journal, rear shaft 23.938−23.950 mm (0.9424−0.9429 in.) 23.92 mm (0.942 in.)
No. 2 journal, front and 32.949−32.961 mm (1.2972−1.2977 in.) 32.93 mm (1.296 in.)
rear shafts
Balancer shafts, journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. ―――
Balancer shafts, end play Front 0.063−0.108 mm (0.0025−0.0043 in.) 0.14 mm (0.006 in.)
Rear 0.063−0.108 mm (0.0025−0.0043 in.) 0.14 mm (0.006 in.)
Balancer shafts, shaft-to-bearing No. 1 journal, front 0.050−0.082 mm (0.0020−0.0032 in.) 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
clearance shaft
rear shafts
Balancer shaft bearings, I.D. No. 1 journal, front 20.000−20.020 mm (0.7874−0.7882 in.) 20.03 mm (0.789 in.)
shaft
rear shafts
Relief valve, oil pressure with oil At idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min.
temperature at 176 °F (80 °C) At 3,000 rpm 300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 psi) min.
Cooling System
Radiator Coolant capacities (including M/T: engine overhaul 8.3 L (2.19 US gal)
engine, heater, hoses, and M/T: coolant change 6.2 L (1.63 US gal)
reservoir) A/T: engine overhaul 8.2 L (2.16 US gal)
Use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/ A/T: coolant change 6.1 L (1.61 US gal)
Coolant Type 2
NOTE: If the vehicle is regularly
driven in very low temperatures
(under −31 °F ( −35 °C)), a higher
concentration of coolant should be
used (see page 10-6).
Coolant Coolant capacity 0.74 L (0.196 US gal)
reservoir
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93−123 kPa (0.95−1.25 kgf/cm2, 14−18 psi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 169−176 °F (76 −80 °C)
Fully open 194 °F (90 °C)
Valve lift at fully open 8.0 mm (0.31 in.) min.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-5

08/04/09 12:41:20 61TL2000_020_0006

Fuel and Emissions
Fuel pressure Pressure with regulator vacuum hose 333−382 kPa (3.4−3.9 kgf/cm2, 48−55 psi)
regulator disconnected
Fuel tank Capacity 70.0 L (18.5 US gal)
Engine idle Idle speed without load M/T (in neutral) 750±50 rpm
A/T (in N or P) 800±50 rpm
Idle speed with high electrical load M/T (in neutral) 750±50 rpm
(A/C switch ON, temperature set to A/T (in N or P) 800±50 rpm
max cool, blower fan on High, rear
window defogger ON, and headlights
on high beam)
Clutch
Clutch pedal Height from floor 170.5 mm (6.71 in.) ―――
Stroke 130−140 mm (5.12−5.51 in.) ―――
Flywheel Runout on clutch mating surface 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) max. 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Clutch disc Rivet head depth 1.15−1.75 mm (0.045−0.069 in.) 0.7 mm (0.03 in.)
Thickness 7.30−7.90 mm (0.287−0.311 in.) 6.0 mm (0.24 in.)
Pressure plate Warpage 0.08 mm (0.003 in.) max. 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Evenness of the height of the 0.6 mm (0.02 in.) max. 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
diaphragm spring fingers
2-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:41:21 61TL2000_020_0007
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential

Manual Capacity Fluid change 1.9 L (2.0 US qt)
transmission Use Acura MTF Overhaul 2.0 L (2.1 US qt)
fluid
Mainshaft End play 0.11−0.17 mm (0.004−0.007 in.) Adjust
Diameter of ball bearing contact area 27.987−28.000 mm (1.1019−1.1024 in.) 27.93 mm (1.100 in.)
(transmission housing side)
Diameter of 4th/5th gear distance 31.984−32.000 mm (1.2592−1.2598 in.) 31.93 mm (1.257 in.)
collar contact area
Diameter of needle bearing contact 38.984−39.000 mm (1.5348−1.5354 in.) 38.93 mm (1.533 in.)
area
Diameter of ball bearing contact area 27.977−27.990 mm (1.1015−1.1020 in.) 27.92 mm (1.099 in.)
(clutch housing side)
Diameter of bushing contact area 20.80−20.85 mm (0.819−0.821 in.) 20.75 mm (0.817 in.)
Mainshaft I.D. 44.009−44.025 mm (1.7326−1.7333 in.) 44.08 mm (1.735 in.)
3rd, 4th, and 5th Clearance 2nd−3rd 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)
gear End play (distance collar side) 4th, 5th 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)
6th gear End play (ball bearing side) 0.15−0.25 mm (0.006−0.010 in.) 0.34 mm (0.013 in.)
4th and 5th gear O.D. 38.989−39.000 mm (1.5350−1.5354 in.) 38.94 mm (1.533 in.)
distance collar Length A 51.95−52.05 mm (2.045−2.049 in.) ―――
＊０１
B 24.03−24.08 mm (0.946−0.948 in.) ―――

A

6th gear distance O.D. 34.989−35.000 mm (1.3775−1.3780 in.) 34.940 mm (1.3756 in.)
collar Length 24.03−24.08 mm (0.946−0.948 in.) ―――
Countershaft Diameter of ball bearing contact area 30.020−30.033 mm (1.1819−1.1824 in.) 29.97 mm (1.180 in.)
(transmission housing side)
Diameter of 1st gear distance collar 39.937−39.950 mm (1.5723−1.5728 in.) 39.883 mm (1.5702 in.)
contact area
Diameter of needle bearing contact 35.000−35.015 mm (1.3780−1.3785 in.) 34.95 mm (1.376 in.)
area (clutch housing side)
35 mm shim-to-bearing inner race 0.04−0.10 mm (0.0016−0.0039 in.) Adjust
clearance
Countershaft 1st I.D. 52.010−52.029 mm (2.0476−2.0484 in.) 52.08 mm (2.050 in.)
and 2nd gear End play (distance collar side) 1st 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)
Clearance 2nd−3rd 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)
Thickness 1st 22.92−22.97 mm (0.902−0.904 in.) 22.87 mm (0.900 in.)
2nd 27.92−27.97 mm (1.099−1.101 in.) 27.87 mm (1.097 in.)
Countershaft 1st I.D. 39.95−39.96 mm (1.5728−1.5732 in.) 39.97 mm (1.574 in.)
and 2nd gear O.D. 46.989−47.000 mm (1.8500−1.8504 in.) 46.94 mm (1.848 in.)
distance collar Length 1st 23.03−23.08 mm (0.907−0.909 in.) ―――
2nd 28.03−28.08 mm (1.104−1.106 in.) ―――
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-7
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７００００００００００００ＮＤＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:41:21 61TL2000_020_0008

Manual Transmission and M/T Differential (cont’d)
Reverse idler I.D. 20.016−20.043 mm (0.7880−0.7891 in.) 20.90 mm (0.823 in.)
gear Gear-to-reverse idler gear shaft 0.036−0.084 mm (0.0014−0.0033 in.) 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
clearance
Synchro ring Ring-to-gear clearance Ring pushed 0.70−1.49 mm (0.028−0.059 in.) 0.4 mm (0.016 in.)
against gear
Double cone Outer synchro ring-to-synchro cone Ring pushed 0.70−1.19 mm (0.028−0.047 in.) 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)
synchro and clearance against gear
triple cone Synchro cone-to-gear clearance Ring pushed 0.50−1.04 mm (0.020−0.041 in.) 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)
synchro against gear
Outer synchro ring-to-gear clearance Ring pushed 0.95−1.68 mm (0.037−0.066 in.) 0.6 mm (0.024 in.)
against gear
Shift fork Finger thickness 7.4−7.6 mm (0.29−0.30 in.) ―――
Fork-to-synchro sleeve clearance 0.35−0.65 mm (0.014−0.026 in.) 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
Reverse shift Finger width 13.4−13.7 mm (0.528−0.539 in.) ―――
fork Fork-to-reverse idler gear clearance 0.20−0.59 mm (0.008−0.023 in.) 1.3 mm (0.051 in.)
Shift arm I.D. 13.973−14.000 mm (0.5501−0.5512 in.) ―――
Finger width 16.9−17.0 mm (0.665−0.669 in.) ―――
Shift arm-to-shift fork clearance 0.2−0.5 mm (0.008−0.020 in.) 0.62 mm (0.024 in.)
Select lever Finger width 14.85−14.95 mm (0.585−0.589 in.) ―――
Change lever Shaft-to-select lever clearance 0.05−0.25 mm (0.002−0.010 in.) 0.50 mm (0.020 in.)
Groove width 15.00−15.10 mm (0.591−0.594 in.) ―――
Shaft-to-shift arm clearance 0.013−0.070 mm (0.0005−0.0028 in.) 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
M/T differential Backlash (measured with final driven 0.8−1.3 mm (0.031−0.051 in.) ―――
carrier gear)
M/T differential 80 mm shim-to-bearing outer race 0−0.10 mm (0−0.0039 in.) Adjust
80 mm shim clearance in transmission housing
2-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:41:21 61TL2000_020_0009
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential

Automatic Capacity Fluid change 2.5 L (2.6 US qt)
transmission Use Acura ATF-Z1 Overhaul 6.5 L (6.9 US qt)
fluid
ATF pressure Line pressure At 2,000 rpm in 927−985 kPa 877 kPa
N or P (9.45−10.05 kgf/cm2, 134−143 psi) (8.95 kgf/cm2, 127 psi)
1st clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 917−995 kPa 867 kPa
1st gear in S (9.35−10.15 kgf/cm2, 132−144 psi) (8.85 kgf/cm2, 126 psi)
2nd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 917−995 kPa 867 kPa
2nd gear in S (9.35−10.15 kgf/cm2, 132−144 psi) (8.85 kgf/cm2, 126 psi)
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 917−995 kPa 867 kPa
3rd gear in S (9.35−10.15 kgf/cm2, 132−144 psi) (8.85 kgf/cm2, 126 psi)
4th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 917−995 kPa 867 kPa
4th gear in S (9.35−10.15 kgf/cm2, 132−144 psi) (8.85 kgf/cm2, 126 psi)
5th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 917−995 kPa 867 kPa
5th gear in S (9.35−10.15 kgf/cm2, 132−144 psi) (8.85 kgf/cm2, 126 psi)
Torque converter Stall speed 2,100 rpm 1,950−2,250 rpm
Check with vehicle on level ground
Clutch Clearance between clutch end-plate 1st 1.38−1.58 mm (0.054−0.062 in.) ―――
and top disc 2nd 1.14−1.34 mm (0.045−0.053 in.) ―――
3rd 1.23−1.43 mm (0.048−0.056 in.) ―――
4th, 5th 0.93−1.13 mm (0.037−0.044 in.) ―――
Clutch return spring free length 1st, 2nd, 3rd 45.1 mm (1.78 in.) 43.1 mm (1.70 in.)
4th, 5th 33.5 mm (1.32 in.) 31.5 mm (1.24 in.)
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ―――
Clutch plate thickness 1st, 3rd 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) When discolored
2nd, 4th, 5th 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) When discolored
Clutch wave-plate phase difference 1st 0.15−0.20 mm (0.006−0.008 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
＜2PLCS＞＜2PLCS＞
0.01−0.25 mm (0.0004−0.010 in.)
＜1PLC＞
2nd−5th 0.10−0.20 mm (0.004−0.008 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
＜2PLCS＞＜2PLCS＞
0.01−0.20 mm (0.0004−0.008 in.)
＜1PLC＞
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-9
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１００００００００００００ＮＤＡＴ０３
08/04/09 12:41:21 61TL2000_020_0010

Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont’d)
Clutch (cont’d) 1st clutch end-plate thickness Mark 1 2.6 mm (0.102 in.) When discolored
Mark 2 2.7 mm (0.106 in.) When discolored
2nd clutch end-plate thickness Mark 10 2.4 mm (0.094 in.) When discolored
3rd, 4th, 5th clutch end-plate thickness Mark 1 2.1 mm (0.083 in.) When discolored

08/04/09 12:42:01 61TL2000_020_0011

Mainshaft Diameter of needle bearing contact At stator shaft 22.984−23.000 mm (0.905−0.906 in.) When worn or damaged
area At 5th gear 51.975−51.991 mm (2.046−2.047 in.) When worn or damaged
At 4th gear collar 33.975−33.991 mm (1.3376−1.3382 in.) When worn or damaged
I.D. of gears 5th gear 57.000−57.019 mm (2.2441−2.2448 in.) When worn or damaged
4th gear 40.000−40.016 mm (1.5748−1.5754 in.) When worn or damaged
End play of gears 5th gear 0.04−0.10 mm (0.016−0.040 in.) ―――
4th gear 0.1−0.22 mm (0.004−0.009 in.) ―――
41 x 68 mm thrust washer thickness No. 1 4.450 mm (0.1752 in.) When worn or damaged
No. 2 4.475 mm (0.1762 in.) When worn or damaged
4th gear collar length 66.3−66.4 mm (2.610−2.614 in.) ―――
Length of 4th gear collar flange from 19.15−19.30 mm (0.754−0.760 in.) When worn or damaged
end
Sealing ring thickness 1.91−1.97 mm (0.075−0.078 in.) 1.86 mm (0.073 in.)
Width of sealing ring groove 2.025−2.060 mm (0.0797−0.0811 in.) 2.080 mm (0.0819 in.)
Clutch feed pipe O.D. 7.97−7.98 mm (0.3138−0.3142 in.) 7.95 mm (0.313 in.)
Clutch feed pipe bushing I.D. 8.000−8.015 mm (0.3150−0.3156 in.) 8.030 mm (0.3161 in.)
Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact At torque 36.005−36.015 mm (1.4175−1.4179 in.) When worn or damaged
area converter
housing
At 4th gear 34.982−34.998 mm (1.3772−1.3779 in.) When worn or damaged
At reverse gear 39.979−40.000 mm (1.5740−1.5748 in.) When worn or damaged
I.D. of gears 4th gear 41.000−41.016 mm (1.6142−1.6148 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse gear 46.000−46.016 mm (1.8110−1.8116 in.) When worn or damaged
End play of gears 5th gear 0.00−0.48 mm (0.000−0.019 in.) ―――
4th gear 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) ―――
Reverse gear 0.10−0.25 mm (0.004−0.010 in.) ―――
Collar, 35 x 47 x 7.8 mm thickness 7.8 mm (0.31 in.) ―――
Collar, 37 x 41 x 54.3 mm length 54.25−54.30 mm (2.136−2.138 in.) ―――
Reverse selector hub width 25.45−25.65 mm (1.002−1.010 in.) ―――
Reverse selector hub O.D. 55.87−55.90 mm (2.200−2.201 in.) When worn or damaged
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:42:01 61TL2000_020_0012

Secondary shaft Diameter of needle bearing contact At 1st gear 39.986−39.999 mm (1.5742−1.5748 in.) When worn or damaged
area At 2nd gear 39.986−39.999 mm (1.5742−1.5748 in.) When worn or damaged
At 3rd gear collar 36.975−36.991 mm (1.4557−1.4563 in.) When worn or damaged
I.D. of gears 1st gear 47.000−47.016 mm (1.8504−1.8510 in.) When worn or damaged
2nd gear 46.000−46.016 mm (1.8110−1.8116 in.) When worn or damaged
3rd gear 43.000−43.016 mm (1.6929−1.6935 in.) When worn or damaged
End play of gears 1st gear 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) ―――
2nd gear 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) ―――
3rd gear 0.10−0.22 mm (0.004−0.009 in.) ―――
37 x 58 mm thrust washer thickness No. 1 3.900 mm (0.154 in.) When worn or damaged
40 x 51.5 mm thrust washer thickness No. 1 4.80 mm (0.189 in.) When worn or damaged
3rd gear collar length 43.9−44.0 mm (1.728−1.732 in.) ―――
Length of 3rd gear collar flange from 5.25−5.40 mm (0.207−0.213 in.) When worn or damaged
end
Sealing ring thickness 1.91−1.97 mm (0.0752−0.0776 in.) 1.86 mm (0.0732 in.)
Width of sealing ring groove 2.025−2.060 mm (0.0797−0.0811 in.) 2.080 mm (0.0819 in.)
Clutch feed pipe O.D. 3rd clutch feed 11.47−11.48 mm (0.4516−0.4520 in.) 11.45 mm (0.4508 in.)
pipe
1st clutch feed 6.97−6.98 mm (0.2744−0.2748 in.) 6.95 mm (0.2736 in.)
pipe
Clutch feed pipe bushing O.D. 3rd clutch feed 11.500−11.518 mm (0.4528−0.4535 in.) 11.530 mm (0.4539 in.)
pipe
1st clutch feed 7.018−7.030 mm (0.2763−0.2768 in.) 7.045 mm (0.2774 in.)
pipe
ATF guide collar of sealing ring contact 29.000−29.021 mm (1.1417−1.1426 in.) 29.05 mm (1.144 in.)
I.D.

08/04/09 12:42:01 61TL2000_020_0013

Idler gear shaft Diameter of needle bearing contact End cover side 32.003−32.013 mm (1.2600−1.2604 in.) When worn or damaged
area
Thickness of cotters 1.39−1.42 mm (0.055−0.056 in.) ―――
Reverse idler Reverse idler gear shaft diameter at 14.99−15.00 mm (0.590−0.591 in.) When worn or damaged
gear needle bearing contact area
I.D. 20.007−20.020 mm (0.7877−0.7882 in.) When worn or damaged
I.D. of reverse idler gear shaft contact 14.800−14.818 mm (0.5827−0.5834 in.) ―――
area on transmission housing
I.D. of reverse idler gear shaft holder 14.800−14.824 mm (0.5827−0.5836 in.) When worn or damaged
ATF pump ATF pump thrust clearance 0.03−0.06 mm (0.001−0.002 in.) 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
Clearance between ATF pump gear Drive gear 0.210−0.265 mm (0.0083−0.0104 in.) ―――
and body Driven gear 0.070−0.125 mm (0.0028−0.0049 in.) ―――
ATF pump driven gear I.D. 14.016−14.034 mm (0.5518−0.5525 in.) When worn or damaged
ATF pump driven gear shaft O.D. 13.980−13.990 mm (0.5504−0.5508 in.) When worn or damaged
Stator shaft Needle bearing contact I.D. Torque converter 27.000−27.021 mm (1.0630−1.0638 in.) When worn or damaged
side
ATF pump side 29.000−29.021 mm (1.1417−1.1426 in.) ―――
Sealing ring contact area I.D. 29.000−29.021 mm (1.1417−1.1426 in.) 29.05 mm (1.144 in.)
Reverse shift Fork finger thickness 5.90−6.00 mm (0.232−0.236 in.) 5.40 mm (0.213 in.)
fork
Park gear and ――― When worn or damaged
pawl
Servo body Shift fork shaft bore I.D. 14.000−14.010 mm (0.5512−0.5516 in.) ―――
Shift fork shaft valve bore I.D. 37.000−37.039 mm (1.4567−1.4582 in.) 37.045 mm (1.4585 in.)
Regulator valve Sealing ring contact I.D. 29.000−29.021 mm (1.1417−1.1426 in.) 29.05 mm (1.144 in.)
body

Wire Diameter O.D. Free Length No. of Coils
Main valve body Shift valve A spring 0.8 mm 5.6 mm 28.1 mm 15.9
spring (see page (0.031 in.) (0.220 in.) (1.106 in.)
14-352) Shift valve B spring 0.8 mm 5.6 mm 28.1 mm 15.9
(0.031 in.) (0.220 in.) (1.106 in.)
Shift valve C spring 0.8 mm 5.6 mm 28.1 mm 15.9
(0.031 in.) (0.220 in.) (1.106 in.)
Relief valve spring 1.0 mm 9.6 mm 34.1 mm 10.2
(0.039 in.) (0.378 in.) (1.343 in.)
Lock-up control valve spring 0.65 mm 7.1 mm 23.1 mm 12.7
(0.026 in.) (0.280 in.) (0.909 in.)
Cooler check valve spring 0.85 mm 6.6 mm 27.0 mm 11.3
(0.034 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.063 in.)
Servo control valve spring 0.7 mm 6.6 mm 35.7 mm 17.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.406 in.)
Shift valve E spring 0.8 mm 5.6 mm 28.1 mm 15.9
(0.031 in.) (0.220 in.) (1.106 in.)
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:42:01 61TL2000_020_0014

Regulator valve Stator reaction spring 4.5 mm 35.4 mm 30.3 mm 1.92
body spring (0.177 in.) (1.394 in.) (1.193 in.)
(see page Regulator valve spring A 1.85 mm 14.7 mm 83.0 mm 14.9
14-354) (0.073 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.268 in.)
Regulator valve spring B 1.6 mm 9.2 mm 44.0 mm 12.5
(0.063 in.) (0.362 in.) (1.732 in.)
Torque converter check valve spring 1.2 mm 8.6 mm 33.8 mm 12.2
(0.047 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.331 in.)
Lock-up shift valve spring 1.0 mm 6.6 mm 35.5 mm 18.2
(0.039 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.398 in.)
3rd accumulator spring 2.5 mm 14.6 mm 29.4 mm 4.9
(0.098 in.) (0.575 in.) (1.157 in.)
1st accumulator spring A 2.4 mm 18.6 mm 49.0 mm 7.1
(0.094 in.) (0.732 in.) (1.929 in.)
1st accumulator spring B 2.3 mm 12.2 mm 31.5 mm 6.6
(0.091 in.) (0.480 in.) (1.240 in.)
Servo body Shift valve D spring 0.8 mm 5.6 mm 28.1 mm 15.9
spring (see page (0.031 in.) (0.220 in.) (1.106 in.)
14-355) 4th accumulator spring B 2.3 mm 12.2 mm 31.5 mm 6.6
(0.091 in.) (0.480 in.) (1.240 in.)
4th accumulator spring A 2.4 mm 18.6 mm 49.0 mm 7.1
(0.094 in.) (0.732 in.) (1.929 in.)
2nd accumulator spring B 2.1 mm 10.8 mm 34.0 mm 8.2
(0.083 in.) (0.425 in.) (1.339 in.)
2nd accumulator spring A 2.1 mm 16.6 mm 48.7 mm 8.4
(0.083 in.) (0.654 in.) (1.917 in.)
5th accumulator spring 2.5 mm 14.6 mm 29.9 mm 4.9
(0.098 in.) (0.575 in.) (1.177 in.)

A/T differential Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.000−18.025 mm (0.7087−0.7096 in.) ―――
carrier Clearance between carrier and pinion 0.013−0.054 mm (0.0005−0.0021 in.) 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
shaft
Driveshaft contact area I.D. 28.021−28.051 mm (1.1032−1.1044 in.) ―――
Clearance between carrier and 0.071−0.117 mm (0.0028−0.0046 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
driveshaft
Carrier bearing starting torque For new bearing 2.7−3.9 N·m Adjust
(preload) (28−40 kgf·cm, 24−35 lbf·in.)
For used bearing 2.5−3.6 N·m Adjust
(25−37 kgf·cm, 22−32 lbf·in.)
Final driven gear backlash 0.086−0.142 mm (0.0034−0.0056 in.) 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
A/T differential Backlash 0.05−0.15 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) ―――
pinion gear I.D. 18.042−18.066 mm (0.7103−0.7113 in.) ―――
Clearance between pinion gear and 0.055−0.095 mm (0.0022−0.0037 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
pinion shaft

08/04/09 12:42:02 61TL2000_020_0015
Steering
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside 0−10 mm (0−0.39 in.)
edge with engine running
Initial turning load measured at 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 lbf)
outside edge with engine running
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened 10±5 °
from locked position
Suspension
Wheel alignment Camber Front 0 °00 ’ ±30 ’
Rear −1 °00 ’ ±30 ’
Caster Front 3 °47 ’ ＋10 ’−50 ’
Total toe-in Front 0±2 mm (0±0.08 in.)
Rear 2±2 mm (0.08±0.08 in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inward 38 °58 ’ ±2 °
Outward 31 °28 ’
(reference)
Wheel Runout Axial 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Wheel bearing End play Front 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
Rear 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＮＤＡＴ０４
08/04/09 12:42:02 61TL2000_020_0016

Brakes
Parking brake Distance traveled when lever pulled 6 to 8 clicks
with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf) of force
Brake pedal Pedal height (carpet moved aside) M/T 164 mm (8 7/16 in.)
A/T 173 mm (8 13/16 in.)
Free play 1−5 mm (1/16−3/16 in.)
Brake disc Thickness Front 27.9−28.1 mm (1.10−1.11 in.) 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
Rear 8.9−9.1 mm (0.35−0.36 in.) 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Runout ――― 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
Parallelism ――― 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.)
Brake pad Thickness Front 10.5−11.5 mm (0.41−0.45 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Rear 8.3−9.0 mm (0.33−0.35 in.) 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity of system 450−500 g (15.9−17.7 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01AH)
Capacity of components Condenser 50 mL (1 2/3 fl·oz)
Evaporator 40 mL (1 1/3 fl·oz)
Each line and 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz)
hose
Reserver/Dryer 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz)
Compressor 75−80 mL (2 1/2−2 5/6 fl·oz)
Compressor Field coil resistance At 68 °F (20 °C) 3.15 −3.45
Pulley-to-armature-plate clearance 0.35−0.65 mm (0.014−0.026 in.)

08/04/09 12:42:02 61TL2000_020_0017
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
DIMENSIONS Overall length 4,726 mm (186.1 in.)
Overall width 1,840 mm (72.4 in.)
Overall height Except TSX Canada models 1,440 mm (56.7 in.)
TSX Canada models 1,439 mm (56.7 in.)
Wheelbase 2,705 mm (106.5 in.)
Track Front 1,580 mm (62.2 in.)
Rear 1,580 mm (62.2 in.)
Seating capacity Five (5)
WEIGHT Gross Vehicle Weight Rating A/T 2,030 kg (4,475 lbs)
(GVWR) M/T 1,995 kg (4,398 lbs)
ENGINE Type Water cooled, 4-stroke DOHC i- VTEC gasoline engine
Cylinder arrangement Inline 4-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke 87 x 99 mm (3.43 x 3.90 in.)
Displacement 2,354 cm3 (144 cu in.)
Compression ratio 10.6
Valve train Chain drive, DOHC i-VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
Lubrication system Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Oil pump displacement At 6,000 rpm 54.3 L (57.4 US qt)/minute
Water pump displacement At 6,000 rpm 82 L (87 US qt)/minute
Fuel required Premium UNLEADED gasoline with 91 Pump Octane
Number or higher
STARTER Type Gear reduction
Normal output 1.6 kW
Normal voltage 12 V
Hour rating 30 seconds
Rotation of direction Clockwise as viewed from drive end
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＮＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:42:02 61TL2000_020_0018
CLUTCH Type Single plate dry, diaphragm spring
MANUAL Type Synchronized, six-speed forward, one reverse
TRANSMISSION Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 3.266
2nd 2.040
3rd 1.428
4th 1.073
5th 0.869
6th 0.686
Reverse 3.583
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.389
AUTOMATIC Type Electronically-controlled automatic, five-speed forward,
TRANSMISSION one reverse, three-element torque converter with lock-up
clutch
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 2.652
2nd 1.614
3rd 1.082
4th 0.773
5th 0.566
Reverse 2.000
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.438
STEERING Type Electrical power-assisted rack and pinion
Overall ratio 13.4
Turns, lock-to-lock 2.61
Steering wheel diameter 370 mm (14.6 in.)
SUSPENSION Type Front Independent double wishbone, with stabilizer, coil spring
Rear Independent multilink with stabilizer, coil spring
Shock absorber Front and rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
TIRES Size Front and rear P225/50R17 93V
Spare T135/80D16 101M
WHEEL Camber Front 0 °00 ’
ALIGNMENT Rear −1 °00 ’
Caster Front 3 °47 ’
Total toe-in Front 0 mm (0 in.)
Rear 2 mm (0.08 in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inward 38 °58 ’
Outward (reference) 31 °28 ’

08/04/09 12:42:02 61TL2000_020_0019

BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake Mechanical actuating, rear wheels
Pad friction surface area Front 50.6 cm2 (7.84 sq in.) x 2
Rear 27.3 cm2 (4.23 sq in.) x 2
AIR Compressor Type Scroll
CONDITIONING Capacity 97.9 mL (5.97 cu in.)/rev.
Maximum speed 12,000 rpm
Lubricant capacity 75 mL (2 1/2 fl·oz)
Lubricant type SP-10
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Stabilized swirling flow
Motor type 216 W/12 V
Speed control Infinitely variable
Maximum capacity 505 m3 (17,834 cu ft)/h
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, poly V-belt drive
Electrical power consumption 42 W maximum at 12 V
at 68 °F (20 °C)
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity 450−500 g (15.9−17.7 oz)
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:42:02 61TL2000_020_0020
ELECTRICAL Battery 12 V−45 Ah/20 HR (12 V−36 Ah/5 HR)
RATINGS 12 V−65 Ah/20 HR (12 V−52 Ah/5 HR)
Fuse Under-hood fuse/relay box 100 A, 70 A, 60 A, 50 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
Driver’s under-dash fuse/relay 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
box
Passenger’s under-dash fuse/ 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
relay box
Light bulbs Headlight high beam 12 V−60 W (HB3)
Headlight low beam 12 V−55 W (H1)
Headlight low beam (HID) 12 V−35 W (D2H)
Front turn signal/parking/side 12 V−21/5 W
marker lights
Fog lights 12 V−55 W
Side turn signal lights LED
Rear turn signal lights 12 V−21 W
Brake/taillights 12 V−21 W/5 W
High mount brake light 12 V−21 W
Back-up lights 12 V−21 W
License plate lights 12 V−5 W
Ceiling light 12 V−8 W
Trunk light 12 V−5 W
Front individual map lights 12 V−8 W
Ambient light LED
Vanity mirror lights 12 V−2 W
Glove box light 12 V−3.4 W
Door courtesy lights 12 V−2 CP
Gauge lights LED
Indicator lights LED
Washer reservoir Capacity (USA models) 2.5 L (2.64 US qt)
Capacity (Canada models) 4.5 L (4.75 US qt)

08/04/09 12:42:02 61TL2000_020_0021
Body Specifications
＊０１
1,440 mm (56.7 in.) *1

1,439 mm (56.7 in.) *2
1,580 mm (62.2 in.)
1,840 mm (72.4 in.)
2,705 mm (106.5 in.) 1,580 mm (62.2 in.)

4,726 mm (186.1 in.)
*1: Except TSX Canada models

*2: TSX Canada models
ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＮＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:42:35 61TL2000_030_0001
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids ....................................... 3-2

Maintenance Minder
General Information ..................................................... 3-4
Maintenance Main Items ............................................. 3-8
Maintenance Sub Items ............................................... 3-9
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０３０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:42:36 61TL2000_030_0002
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of the lubrication points and the type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and the
various work procedures (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each
section.
Application Lubricant or Fluid

A Engine Acura Motor Oil:
American Honda P/N 08798-9023A (5W-20)
Honda Canada P/N CA66808 (5W-20)
Look for the API certification seal on the oil container. Make
sure it says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’ SAE viscosity: See chart.
B Manual transmission Acura Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF):
American Honda P/N 08798-9031A
Honda Canada P/N 08798-9033C
Always use Acura MTF. Using motor oil can cause stiffer
shifting because it does not contain the proper additives.
Automatic transmission Acura Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1):
American Honda P/N 08200-9001A
Honda Canada P/N CA66704
Always use Acura ATF-Z1. Using a non-Acura ATF can affect
shift quality.
C Brake system (including VSA lines) Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008A
D Clutch system (manual transmission) Always use Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Acura brake
fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system.
E Brake booster clevis pin Multipurpose Grease
F Clutch master cylinder clevis pin
(manual transmission)
G Release fork (manual transmission)
H Battery terminals
I Fuel fill door
J Hood hinges and hood latch
K Trunk hinges
L Shift cable ends (manual transmission) Honda Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M
M Caliper piston boot and seal, caliper pins
and boots
N Air conditioning compressor Compressor Oil: SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01AH) for refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a)
O Cooling system Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2: P/N OL999-9011A
Honda Extreme Cold Weather Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2:
P/N OL999-9020
＊１８
API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recommended Engine Oil
Engine oil viscosity for ambient temperature ranges
3-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＢＡＡＴ８０
08/04/09 12:42:36 61TL2000_030_0003
NOTE:
• Lubricate the following areas using the recommended lubricants and fluids.
• In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
＊１９
A E J K
B M C D F M I
-DYNOMITE 2009- 3-3

08/04/09 12:42:37 61TL2000_030_0004
Maintenance Minder
General Information
Maintenance Display
The maintenance minder is an important feature of the multi-information display. Based on engine and transmission
operating conditions, operating conditions and accumulated engine revolutions, the Acura TSX’s onboard computer
(ECM/PCM) calculates the remaining engine oil and the transmission fluid life. The system also displays the remaining
engine oil life along with the code for other scheduled maintenance items needing service.
Meter:
＊２０
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY MESSAGE INDICATOR
Steering Wheel:
＊２１
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO BUTTONS
3-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＢＡＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:42:37 61TL2000_030_0005
Service Information 2. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and the

remaining engine oil life is 6 % to 15 %, the
1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is shown as a remaining engine oil life and other scheduled
percentage in the multi-information display. To see maintenance item(s) needing service are displayed.
the current engine oil life, turn the ignition switch to The maintenance system message ‘‘SERVICE DUE
ON (II) then push and release the SEL/RESET SOON’’ (A) also comes on. To cancel the message,
button repeatedly until the engine oil life displays. press the INFO button. The display continues to
＊２２ show the remaining engine oil life (B) and the
message indicator (C) until it is reset.
• Complete list of maintenance main items (D)

(see page 3-8).
• Complete list of maintenance sub items (E)
(see page 3-9).
＊２３
A
A
E
D
＊２４
C
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 3-5

08/04/09 12:42:38 61TL2000_030_0006
Maintenance Minder
General Information (cont’d)

3. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and the 5. If the indicated maintenance is not done, the
remaining engine oil life is 1 % to 5 %, the ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message shows a negative
maintenance system message ‘‘SERVICE DUE mileage, for example ‘‘10,’’ on the display. If the
NOW’’ is displayed along with the same negative mileage is between 0 and 9, the message
maintenance item code(s). If the maintenance is displayed for only a few seconds when the
system message display is canceled, a ‘‘SERVICE’’ ignition switch is turned to ON (II). The negative
message appears. mileage (A) remains displayed after the vehicle is
＊２５ driven more than 10 miles (for USA models) or
10 km (for Canada models) after 0 % oil life is
reached, and the display cannot be canceled. This
means the indicated maintenance item(s) should
have been done more than 10 miles (or 10 km) ago.
＊２７
4. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and the

A
remaining engine oil life is 0 %, the maintenance
system message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ is
displayed along with the same maintenance item
code(s).
＊２６
3-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:42:38 61TL2000_030_0007
Resetting the Maintenance Information 5. Press the INFO button to select ‘‘RESET,’’ then
Display press the SEL/RESET button. The maintenance item
code(s) will disappear, and the engine oil life will
NOTE: reset to ‘‘100’’.
• The vehicle must be stopped to reset the display. ＊２９
• If a required service is done and the display is not
reset, or if the maintenance display is reset without
doing the service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance timing. This can lead to serious
mechanical problems because there will be no
accurate record of when the required maintenance is
needed.
• The engine oil life and maintenance item(s) can be
independently reset with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. If system message(s) are displayed, press the INFO

button to cancel the display.
3. Push and release the SEL/RESET button repeatedly Resetting Individual Maintenance Items
until the engine oil life indicator is displayed.
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
4. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for about data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
10 seconds, the ‘‘OIL LIFE RESET’’ mode display
appears. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle

• If you are resetting the display when the engine and the engine control module/powertrain control
oil life is more than 15 %, make sure any module (ECM/PCM). If it doesn’t communicate,
maintenance item(s) requiring service are done troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
before resetting the display.
• To cancel the ‘‘OIL LIFE RESET’’ mode, press the 4. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.
INFO button repeatedly until the ‘‘CANCEL’’
indicator is displayed, then press the SEL/RESET 5. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with
button. the HDS.
＊２８
6. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with
the HDS.
7. Select the individual maintenance item you wish to

reset.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 3-7

08/04/09 12:42:38 61TL2000_030_0008
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items

If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
NOTE:
• Replace the brake fluid every 3 years (independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information display).
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
Symbol Maintenance Main Items

A Replace engine oil (see page 8-10).
Engine oil capacity without oil filter: 3.8 L (4.0 US qt).
B Replace engine oil and oil filter (see page 8-11).
Engine oil capacity with oil filter: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt).
Check front and rear brakes (see page 19-3).
• Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
• Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mounting bolts.
Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-7).
Check the number of clicks (6 to 8) when the parking brake lever is pulled with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf)
of force.
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gearbox boots (see page 17-3).
• Check rack grease and steering linkage.
• Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
• Check fluid lines for damage or leaks.
Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3).
• Check bolts for tightness.
• Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4).
Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness.
Inspect brake hoses and lines including VSA lines (see page 19-34).
Check the master cylinder and VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leakage.
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids.
• Engine coolant (see page 10-6).
• Manual transmission fluid (MTF) (see page 13-13).
• Automatic transmission fluid (ATF-Z1) (see page 14-254).
• Clutch fluid (see page 12-6).
• Brake fluid (see page 19-9).
• Windshield washer fluid (see page 22-286).
Inspect exhaust system (see page 9-7).
Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Inspect fuel lines (see page 11-343) and connections (see page 11-345).
Check for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damaged parts.
NOTE: According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( ) will
not void the client’s emissions warranties. However, Acura recommends that all maintenance services be done at the
recommended interval, to ensure long-term reliability.
3-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＪＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:42:39 61TL2000_030_0009
Maintenance Sub Items

Number Maintenance Sub Items
1 Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition.
Follow the pattern shown in the Owner’s Manual.
2 Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-364).
If the vehicle is driven primarily in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter (see page 21-100).
• If the vehicle is driven mostly in areas that have high concentrations of dust, pollen, or soot in the air,
replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
• Replace the filter whenever airflow from the heating and air conditioning system is less than normal.
Inspect drive belt (see page 4-28).
Look for cracks and damage, then check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator.
3 Replace manual transmission fluid (see page 13-13).
Capacity: 1.9 L (2.0 US qt); use Acura MTF.
Replace automatic transmission fluid (see page 14-255).
Capacity: 2.5 L (2.6 US qt); use Acura ATF-Z1.
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher
transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the maintenance minder. If the vehicle is regularly driven under these conditions,
change the transmission fluid, at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
4 Replace spark plugs (see page 4-19).
Use ILZKR 7B-11S (NGK) or SXU22HCR-11S (DENSO).
Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-9).
Intake: 0.21−0.25 mm (0.008−0.010 in.), Exhaust: 0.25−0.29 mm (0.010−0.011 in.).
5 Replace engine coolant (see page 10-6).
Capacity (including the reservoir)
M/T: 6.2 L (1.63 US gal), A/T: 6.1 L (1.61 US gal); use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 and
add Honda Extreme Cold Weather Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 in severe cold temperatures.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 3-9
ＴＬ２９Ａ００００００００００００００ＪＡＡＴ３１
08/04/09 12:43:36 61TL2000_040_0002
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special Tools ............................ 4-2 Alternator Control
Circuit Troubleshooting ....... 4-26
Starting System Drive Belt Inspection ............... 4-28
Component Location Index .... 4-3 Drive Belt Removal/
Symptom Troubleshooting Installation ............................ 4-28
Index ...................................... 4-4 Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-5 Inspection ............................. 4-29
Starter System Circuit Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Troubleshooting ................... 4-6 Removal/Installation ............ 4-30
Clutch Interlock Switch Test ... 4-8 Tensioner Pulley
Clutch Interlock Switch Replacement ......................... 4-30
Replacement ......................... 4-8 Idler Pulley Base Removal/
Starter Performance Test ........ 4-9 Installation ............................ 4-31
Starter Removal and Idler Pulley Replacement ........ 4-31
Installation ............................ 4-10 Alternator Removal and
Starter Overhaul ...................... 4-11 Installation ............................ 4-32
Alternator Overhaul ................. 4-33
Ignition System
Component Location Index .... 4-16 Cruise Control
Ignition Timing Inspection ...... 4-17 Component Location Index .... 4-38
Ignition Coil Removal/ Symptom Troubleshooting
Installation ............................ 4-18 Index ...................................... 4-39
Spark Plug Inspection .............. 4-19 Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-41
Cruise Control Input Test ........ 4-42
Charging System Cruise Control Combination
Component Location Index .... 4-20 Switch Test/Replacement .... 4-44
Symptom Troubleshooting Clutch Pedal Position
Index ...................................... 4-21 Switch Test ........................... 4-45
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-22 Clutch Pedal Position
Charging System Indicator Switch Replacement ............ 4-45
Circuit Troubleshooting ....... 4-23
Alternator and Regulator Engine Mount Control System
Circuit Troubleshooting ....... 4-25 Component Location Index .... 4-46
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-47
Troubleshooting ...................... 4-48
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０４０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:37 61TL2000_040_0003
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty
07746-0010300 Bearing Driver Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 1
０１
０１
4-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０４０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:40 61TL2000_040_0004
Starting System
Component Location Index
＊０１
STARTER CUT RELAY
Test, page 22-80
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH (M/T model)

Test, page 4-8
Pedal Height Adjustment, page 12-7
＊０２
STARTER TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-6 (A/T model)
Performance Test, page 4-9 Test, page 14-304
Removal and Installation, page 4-10 Replacement, page 14-306
Overhaul, page 4-11
-DYNOMITE 2009- 4-3
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ４６５００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:40 61TL2000_040_0005
Starting System
Symptom Troubleshooting Index

Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Engine does not start 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections. Poor ground at G101
(does not crank) 2. Test the battery for a low state of charge (see page (A/T model) or G302
22-77). (M/T model)
3. Check the starter (see page 4-6).
4. Check the starter cut relay (see page 22-80).
5. Check the transmission range switch (A/T model)
(see page 14-304).
6. Check the clutch interlock switch (M/T model) (see page
4-8).
7. Check the ignition switch or related circuits (see page
22-83).
Engine cranks, but does 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
not start 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-342).
3. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-343).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-354).
5. Check the throttle body (see page 11-362).
6. Check for low engine compression (see page 6-6).
7. Check for a damaged or broken cam chain.
8. Do the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control
module (PCM) reset function with the Honda Diagnostic
System (HDS) to cancel the ALL INJECTORS STOP
function.
Engine is hard to start 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-342).
3. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-343).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-354).
Engine cranks slowly 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
2. Test the battery for a low state of charge (see page
22-77).
3. Check the starter for binding (see page 4-11).
4. Check for excessive drag in the engine.
4-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ４６５００００００００ＨＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:43:40 61TL2000_040_0006
Circuit Diagram
＊０１
UNDER−HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) No. 3−1 (50 A) 2 BAT
WHT
ST
ST HOT in START (III)
1
YEL
DRIVER’S UNDER−DASH
C2 FUSE/RELAY BOX
2 4
STARTER
CUT
RELAY
1 3
F33 F3
LT GRN
11
C101
11
BLK/WHT RED/GRN BLU/WHT
B S
1 4
CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
INTERLOCK RANGE SWITCH
SWITCH (ON: P, N)
2 (ON: 10
Pedal pressed)
STARTER
BLK BLK
G302 G101
(M/T model) (A/T model)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 4-5
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ４６５００００００００ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:41 61TL2000_040_0007
Starting System
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting

Special Tools Required 3. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
Alternator, Regulator, Battery & Starter tester OTC3131 data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
Available through the Acura Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: 5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle

• Air temperature must be within 59−100 °F and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn’t communicate,
(15−38 °C) during this procedure. troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
• After this inspection, you must reset the engine
control module (ECM)/powertrain control module 6. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS
(PCM). Otherwise, the ECM/PCM will continue to stop STOP on the HDS.
the fuel injectors from operating.
• The battery must be in good condition and fully 7. Set the parking brake, then with the shift lever in N
charged. or P (A/T model) or the clutch pedal pressed (M/T
model), turn the ignition switch to START (III).
1. Connect the alternator, regulator, battery & starter
tester (OTC3131) to the battery as shown. Does the starter crank the engine normally?
NOTE: The probe is not used for battery testing. YES−The starting system is OK. Go to step 15.
＊０１
OTC3131
NO−Go to step 8.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9. Check the electrical connections at the battery, the

negative battery cable to the body, the engine
ground cables, and the starter for looseness and
corrosion. Then try cranking the engine again.
Does the starter crank the engine normally?
YES−Repairing the loose connection corrected the

problem. The starting system is OK. Go to step 15.
NO−Based on the following symptoms, take the

2. Do the BATTERY TEST. appropriate action:
Does the display indicate GOOD or LOW • If the starter does not crank the engine at all, go
CHARGE? to step 10.
• If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too
YES−The battery is OK. Go to step 3. slowly, go to step 12.
• If the starter does not disengage from the
NO−If the tester indicates BAD BATTERY, replace flywheel ring gear (M/T model) or torque
the battery, then retest. If the tester indicates converter ring gear (A/T model) when you
CHARGE & RETEST, charge the battery, then retest. release the key, replace the starter, or remove
and disassemble it, and check for the
following:
– Starter solenoid and switch malfunction
– Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning
clutch
4-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ４６５００００００００ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:41 61TL2000_040_0008
10. Make sure the shift lever is in N or P (A/T model) or 12. Connect the alternator, regulator, battery & starter
neutral (M/T model), then disconnect the starter tester (OTC 3131) to the battery.
subharness 1P connector (A) from the left engine ＊０３
OTC3131
compartment wire harness 1P connector (B).
Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive
terminal to the starter subharness 1P connector.
＊０２
13. Do the STARTING TEST.

A B
Does the display indicate cranking voltage greater
Does the starter crank the engine? than or equal to 8.5 V and is the current draw less
than or equal to 380 A?
YES−Go to step 11.
NO−Check the BLK/WHT wire between the starter
subharness 1P connector and the starter. If the wire NO−Replace the starter, or remove and
is OK, remove the starter, and repair or replace it as disassemble it, and check for these problems:
necessary.
• Drag in the starter armature
11. Check the following items in the order listed until • Short in the armature winding
you find the open circuit: • Excessive drag in the engine
• Open circuit in starter armature commutator
• The YEL wire and connectors between the driver’s segments
under-dash fuse/relay box and the ignition switch. • Excessively worn starter brushes
• The BLK/WHT wire and connectors between the • Open circuit in the starter brushes
driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box and the left • Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
engine compartment wire harness 1P connector. • Faulty over running clutch
• The ignition switch (see page 22-83).
• The clutch interlock switch (M/T model) or the 14. Remove the starter, and inspect its drive gear and
transmission range switch (A/T model) and the flywheel ring gear (M/T model) or the torque
connector. converter ring gear (A/T model) for damage.
• The starter cut relay (see page 22-80). Replace any damaged parts.
15. Select ECM/PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel

ALL INJECTORS STOP on the HDS.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 4-7

08/04/09 12:43:42 61TL2000_040_0009
Starting System
Clutch Interlock Switch Test Clutch Interlock Switch

Replacement
M/T model
1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch connector (A). M/T model
＊０１
A
1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch connector (A).
＊０１
A C
Terminal side of
male terminals
2. Check for continuity between the terminals

according to the table.
2. Loosen the locknut (B), then remove the clutch
• If the continuity is not as specified, replace the interlock switch (C).
clutch interlock switch.
• If OK, install the clutch interlock switch and 3. Install the clutch interlock switch, and adjust the
adjust the pedal height (see page 12-7). pedal height (see page 12-7).
＊０２
Terminal
1 2
Position
Clutch Pedal (PRESSED)
Clutch Pedal (RELEASED)
4-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ａ４６５０００１７０２１ＦＥＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ａ４６５０００１７０２１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:42 61TL2000_040_0010
Starter Performance Test

1. Remove the starter (see page 4-10). 5. Firmly clamp the starter in a vise.
2. Make a connection for this test using the thickest 6. Connect the starter to the battery as shown, and
(gauge) wire possible (preferably the same gauge confirm that the motor runs.
as used on the vehicle). ＊０３
NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave B

the battery connected for more than 10 seconds.
S
＊０１
S B
STARTER
STARTER
7. If the electric current meets the specification when

the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is
working properly.
3. Connect the battery as shown, and check for
continuity between the B terminal and the starter Specification
body. If there is continuity, it is working properly. Electric Current: 80 A or less
4. Disconnect the battery from the body, and check for

continuity between the B terminal and the starter
body. If there is no continuity, it is working properly.
＊０２
S B
STARTER
-DYNOMITE 2009- 4-9
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ４６５０００５６９０１ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:43 61TL2000_040_0011
Starting System
Starter Removal and Installation

Removal Installation
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure 1. Install the starter, then tighten the two bolts.
(see page 22-78). ＊０３
2. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
3. Disconnect the starter cable (A) from the B terminal,

and disconnect the BLK/WHT wire (B) from the
solenoid S terminal.
＊０１
A
B
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) 12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
(6.5 kgf·m, 48 lbf·ft)
2. Install the harness clamp (A).

＊０４
C 8 x 1.25 mm
9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
B
4. Remove the harness clamp (C). C
5. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the starter, then

remove the starter.
＊０２
3. Install the starter cable (B) to the B terminal and

connect the BLK/WHT wire (C) to the solenoid S
A terminal. Make sure the crimped side of the ring
terminal faces away from the starter when you
connect it.
4. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-5).
5. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure

(see page 22-78).
6. Start the engine to make sure the starter works

properly.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ４６５０００５６９０１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:44 61TL2000_040_0012
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly/Reassembly
＊０１
RING GEAR HOLDER
SWITCH PLUNGER
GEAR PLUNGER
GEAR COVER ASSEMBLY
9 N·m
PUSH NUT
CONTACT SPRING
SWITCH SHAFT
MOVING CONTACT
BRUSH HOLDER
ASSEMBLY
BRUSH SPRING
END COVER
DRIVE PLATE
PLANETARY GEARS
Apply molybdenum
disulfide.
7.5 N·m
(0.76 kgf·m, 5.5 lbf·ft)
ARMATURE HOUSING
ARMATURE
Apply molybdenum disulfide.
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ４６５０００５６９０１ＬＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:45 61TL2000_040_0013
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont’d)

Armature Inspection and Test 5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is
below the service limit, replace the armature.
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-10).
Commutator Diameter
2. Disassemble the starter as shown in the Exploded Standard (New): 28.0−28.1 mm (1.102−1.106 in.)
View. Service Limit: 27.5 mm (1.083 in.)
＊０４
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from
contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear
or damage, replace the armature.
＊０２
6. Measure the commutator (A) runout.
4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is • If the commutator runout is within the service
dirty or burnt, resurface it with an emery cloth or a limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
lathe to the specifications in step 5, or recondition brass chips between the segments.
with ＃500 or ＃600 sandpaper (B). • If the commutator runout is not within the service
＊０３ limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
A
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
＊０５

08/04/09 12:43:46 61TL2000_040_0014
7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), 9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B).
undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while
the commutator segments. The undercut should the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D). the armature.
＊０８
Commutator Mica Depth
C
Standard (New): 0.40−0.50 mm (0.016−0.020 in.)
Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) B
＊０６
D
C
B
10. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between

8. Check for continuity between the segments of the the commutator (A) and the armature coil core (B),
commutator. If there is an open circuit between any and between the commutator and the armature
of the segments, replace the armature. shaft (C). If there is continuity, replace the armature.
＊０７＊０９
C B
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:43:46 61TL2000_040_0015
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont’d)

Starter Brush Inspection Planetary Gear Inspection
11. Measure the brush length. If it is shorter than the 13. Check the planetary gears (A) and internal ring gear
service limit, replace the brush holder assembly. (B). Replace them if they are worn or damaged.
＊１２
Brush Length
B
＊１０
Starter Brush Holder Test A
12. Check for continuity between the (＋) brushes (A)

and (−) brushes (B). If there is continuity, replace
the brush holder assembly.
＊１１
A

08/04/09 12:43:47 61TL2000_040_0016
Overrunning Clutch Inspection Starter Reassembly
14. While holding the drive gear (A), turn the gear 17. Install the brush into the brush holder, and set the
shaft (B) counterclockwise. Check that the drive armature (A) in the brush holder (B).
gear comes out to the other end. If the drive gear
does not move smoothly, replace the gear cover NOTE: To seat the new brushes, slip a strip of ＃500
assembly. or ＃600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between
＊１３ the commutator and each brush, and smoothly turn
B the armature. The contact surface of the brushes
will be sanded to the same contour as the
A
commutator.
＊１４
E A D
C
F
15. While holding the drive gear, turn the gear shaft
clockwise. The gear shaft should turn freely. If the
gear shaft does not turn freely, replace the gear
cover assembly.
16. If the starter drive gear is worn or damaged,

replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear 18. While squeezing a spring (C), insert it in the hole on
is not available separately. the brush holder, and push it until it bottoms.
Check the condition of the flywheel ring gear (M/T Repeat this for the other three springs (D, E, and F).
model) or the torque converter ring gear (A/T
model) to see if the starter drive gear teeth are 19. Install the armature and brush holder assembly
damaged. into the housing.
NOTE: Make sure the armature stays in the holder.

08/04/09 12:43:48 61TL2000_040_0017
Ignition System
＊０１
SPARK PLUG IGNITION COIL

Inspection, page 4-19 Ignition Timing Inspection, page 4-17
Removal/Installation, page 4-18

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２６１００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:48 61TL2000_040_0018
Ignition Timing Inspection

1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 8. Aim the light toward the pointer (A) on the cam
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). chain case. Check the ignition timing under a no
load condition (headlights, blower fan, rear window
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). defogger, and air conditioner are turned off).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle Ignition Timing:
and the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain M/T model: 8 ° ±2 ° BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in
control module (PCM). If it doesn’t communicate, neutral
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210). A/T model: 8 ° ±2 ° BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in
N or P
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at ＊０２
3,000 rpm with no load (in N or P (A/T model) or A
neutral (M/T model)) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
5. Check the idle speed (see page 11-323).
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Connect the timing light to the service loop (white

tape).
B
＊０１
9. If the ignition timing differs from the specification,

check the cam timing. If the cam timing is OK,
update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
system works properly, and the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-234).
10. Disconnect the HDS and the timing light.
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２６１００００００００ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:49 61TL2000_040_0019
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Removal/Installation

1. Remove the ignition coil cover (A), disconnect the
ignition coil connectors (B), then remove the
ignition coils (C).
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
C
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.8 lbf·ft)
2. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of

removal.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２６１０００３４１０１ＫＤＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:43:49 61TL2000_040_0020
Spark Plug Inspection

1. Remove the spark plugs, and inspect the electrodes 3. Do not adjust the gap (A) of iridium tip plugs;
and ceramic insulator. replace the spark plug if the gap is out of
specification.
• Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by
these conditions: Electrode Gap
– Advanced ignition timing Standard (New): 1.0−1.1 mm (0.039−0.043 in.)
– Loose spark plug ＊０２
– Plug heat range too hot
– Insufficient cooling A
• Fouled plugs may be caused by these conditions:

– Retarded ignition timing
– Oil in combustion chamber
– Incorrect spark plug gap
– Plug heat range too cold
– Excessive idling/low speed running
– Clogged air cleaner element
– Deteriorated ignition coils
＊０１
Worn or deformed
electrodes 4. Replace the plug at the specified interval or when
• Improper gap the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the
• Oil-fouling listed spark plugs.
• Carbon deposits
• Cracked center
electrode insulator Spark Plugs
Damaged
gasket NGK: ILZKR7B-11S
DENSO: SXU22HCR11S
＊０３
A
Cracked
insulator
5. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to

the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated, cylinder head, finger-tight. Then torque them to
clean the electrode with a plug cleaner. 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft).
NOTE:
• Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium
electrode since this will damage the electrode.
• When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do
not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid
damaging the electrode.
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２６１０００５５９０１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:40 61TL2000_040_0021
Charging System
＊０１
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
(In the gauge control module)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

(Has built-in ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD))
AUTO-TENSIONER BATTERY
Inspection, page 4-29 Test, page 22-77
Removal and Installation,
page 4-30
ALTERNATOR
DRIVE BELT Removal and Installation, page 4-32
Inspection, page 4-28 Overhaul, page 4-33

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:40 61TL2000_040_0022

Charging system Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
indicator does not come (see page 4-23).
on with the ignition
switch in ON (II)
Charging system 1. Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
indicator stays on (see page 4-23).
2. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-29).
3. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-28).
4. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Battery discharged 1. Check for a poor connection at the battery terminal.
2. Test the battery (see page 22-77).
3. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-25).
6. Check for excessive parasitic electrical current, draw
with the ignition switch in LOCK (0), and the key
removed. The multiplex control unit may take up to 10
minutes to turn off (sleep mode) for some models.
Battery overcharged 1. Test the battery (see page 22-77).
2. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-25).
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１００００００００ＨＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:44:41 61TL2000_040_0023
Charging System
Circuit Diagram
＊０１
BATTERY DRIVER’S
No. 1 (100 A) No. 3−1 (50 A) 2 BAT 5 UNDER−DASH
WHT BLU C5 FUSE/RELAY BOX
IG1
ELD IG1 HOT in ON (II) and No. 7 No. 5

START (III) (15 A) (7.5 A)
A1
BLK/RED F14 P20
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE BRN

A2 A3
22
15
21 CPU
DRIVER
BLK BLU/BLK WHT RED CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
ECM/PCM A3 A4
CANH CANL
5V
BLK/RED
A24 ELD
G301 22
ALTF ALTL ALTC C101
B47 B46 B45
7
BLK WHT/RED WHT/BLU WHT/GRN BLK/YEL
B 4 3 2 1
FR L C IG
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
RECTIFIER
ALTERNATOR

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１００００００００ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:41 61TL2000_040_0024
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Does the charging system indicator come on? 8. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Go to step 14.
10. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at and the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain
2,000 rpm for 1 minute. control module (PCM). If it doesn’t communicate,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
Does the charging system indicator go of f ?
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the
YES−Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go ignition switch to LOCK (0).
to the alternator and regulator circuit
troubleshooting (see page 4-25). NOTE: This step must be done to protect the ECM/
PCM from damage.
NO−Go to step 3.
12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P).
3. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function procedure (see page 22-292). 13. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B46 and body ground.
Does the charging system indicator f lash? ＊０１
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Replace the gauge control module (see page

22-313).

ALTL (WHT/BLU)
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.

Terminal side of female terminals
NOTE: The charging system indicator may come on
and then go off.
Is there continuity?
Does the charging system indicator go of f ?
YES−Repair short in the wire between the
YES−Replace the alternator (see page 4-32), or alternator and the ECM/PCM.
repair the alternator (see page 4-33).
NO−Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
NO−Go to step 7. latest software (see page 11-233), or substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with
a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/
PCM (see page 11-234).
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００１６８０２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:41 61TL2000_040_0025
Charging System
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

14. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic 19. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page
function procedure (see page 22-292). 11-3).
Does the charging system indicator f lash? 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES−Go to step 15. 21. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn’t communicate,
NO−Replace the gauge control module (see page troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
22-313).
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ignition switch to LOCK (0).
16. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the ECM/
PCM from damage.
17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3 to
body ground with a jumper wire. 23. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P).
＊０２
24. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
terminal B46 and alternator 4P connector terminal
No. 3.
＊０３
L
(WHT/BLU)
JUMPER
WIRE
Wire side of female terminals ALTL (WHT/BLU)
Does the charging system indicator come on?

L (WHT/BLU)
YES−Replace the alternator (see page 4-32), or ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
repair the alternator (see page 4-33). Wire side of female terminals
NO−Go to step 19. Is there continuity?
YES−Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the

latest software (see page 11-233), or substitute a
NO−Repair open in the wire between the

alternator and the ECM/PCM.

08/04/09 12:44:42 61TL2000_040_0026
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting

Special Tools Required 6. Check the alternator, regulator, battery & starter
Alternator, Regulator, Battery & Starter tester OTC3131 tester display.
Program 888-424-6857 Is the amperage 87 .5 A or more?
1. Make sure the battery connections are good and YES−The charging system is OK.
the battery is sufficiently charged.
NOTE: If the charging system indicator is still on,
2. Connect the alternator, regulator, battery & starter replace the alternator (see page 4-32).
tester (OTC3131) to the battery as shown.
＊０１ NO−Replace the alternator (see page 4-32) or
OTC3131 repair the alternator (see page 4-33).
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at

3,000 rpm with no load (in N or P (A/T model) or
neutral (M/T model)) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
4. Do the charging system test.
5. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it

there.
Is the voltage within 13.5 −15.1 V ?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Based on the following symptoms, take the

appropriate action:
• If the voltage less than 13.5 V, go to alternator

control circuit troubleshooting (see page 4-26).
• If the voltage over 15.1 V, go to replace the
alternator (see page 4-32) or rear housing
assembly (see page 4-33).
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００１２９０３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:42 61TL2000_040_0027
Charging System
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). terminal B45 and body ground.
＊０２
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

and the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain
control module (PCM). If it doesn’t communicate,
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present, ALTC (WHT/GRN)
diagnose and repair the cause before continuing
with this test.
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the Terminal side of female terminals
alternator.
6. Start the engine, and turn on the headlights to high Is there continuity?
beam.
YES−Repair short in the wire between the
7. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P alternator and the ECM/PCM.
connector terminal No. 2 and the positive terminal
of the battery. NO−Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
＊０１ latest software (see page 11-233), or substitute a
BATTERY known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
ignition switch to LOCK (0).
C (WHT/GRN)
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the ECM/

PCM from damage.
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR 12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P).

Wire side of female terminals
Is there 1 V or less?
NO−Go to step 8.
ignition switch to LOCK (0).

PCM from damage.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００１２９０５ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:42 61TL2000_040_0028

terminal B45 and alternator 4P connector terminal
No. 2.
＊０３
ALTC (WHT/GRN)
C (WHT/GRN)
YES−Replace the alternator (see page 4-32), or

repair the alternator (see page 4-33).

alternator and the ECM/PCM.

08/04/09 12:44:43 61TL2000_040_0029
Charging System
Drive Belt Inspection Drive Belt Removal/Installation

1. Inspect the belt for cracks or damage. If the belt is Special Tools Required
cracked or damaged, replace it (see page 4-28). Belt tension release tool Snap-on YA9317 or equivalent,
commercially available
2. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator’s
pointer (A) is within the standard range (B) as 1. Move the tensioner (A) with the belt tension release
shown. If it is out of the standard range, replace the tool (B) in the direction shown to relieve tension
drive belt (see page 4-28). from the drive belt (C), then remove the drive belt.
＊０１＊０１
B
A YA9317
2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００２２２０１ＭＡＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００２２２０１ＫＤＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:44:44 61TL2000_040_0030
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Inspection

Special Tools Required 6. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-30).
Belt tension release tool Snap-on YA9317 or equivalent,
commercially available 7. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using two 8 mm
bolts (B) and a vise (C) as shown. Do not clamp the
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure to auto-tensioner itself.
turn the A/C switch off. Turn the ignition switch to ＊０３
LOCK (0).
A
2. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator’s
pointer (A). Start the engine then check the position B
again with the engine idling. If the position of the C
indicator moves or fluctuates very much, replace
F
the auto-tensioner (see page 4-30).
＊０１
A
＊０４
30 ° 30 °
3. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley.

If you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner
pulley (see page 4-30).
4. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-28).
5. Move the auto-tensioner within its limit with the

belt tension release tool in the direction shown.
Check that the tensioner moves smoothly and
without any abnormal noise. If the tensioner does 8. Set the torque wrench (D) on the pulley bolt, and
not move smoothly, or if you hear abnormal noise, align it as shown.
replace the auto-tensioner (see page 4-30).
＊０２ 9. Align the indicator (E) on the tensioner base with
YA9317
Max. belt position mark (F) on the tensioner arm by
using the torque wrench, and measure the torque.
If the torque value is out of specification, replace
the auto-tensioner (see page 4-30).
NOTE: If the indicator exceeds the Max. belt

position mark, recheck the torque.
Auto-tensioner Spring Torque:

33.1−40.5 N·m (3.38−4.13 kgf·m, 24.4−29.9 lbf·ft)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００２２２０５ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:44 61TL2000_040_0031
Charging System
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Removal/ Tensioner Pulley Replacement

Installation
1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-28). 2. Remove the idler pulley base (see page 4-31).
2. Remove the idler pulley base (see page 4-31). 3. Remove the tensioner pulley.
＊０１
10 x 1.25 mm
3. Remove the auto-tensioner. 56 N·m (5.7 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft)
＊０１
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
4. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of

removal. 4. Install the tensioner pulley in the reverse order of
removal.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００２２２０５ＫＤＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００２２２０８ＫＢＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:44:45 61TL2000_040_0032
Idler Pulley Base Removal/ Idler Pulley Replacement

Installation
1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-28). 2. Remove the idler pulley.
＊０１
2. Remove the idler pulley base.
＊０１
10 x 1.25 mm
10 x 1.25 mm 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
33 lbf·ft)
3. Install the idler pulley in the reverse order of

removal.
3. Install the idler pulley base in the reverse order of
removal.
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００２２２０４ＫＤＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００２２２０３ＫＢＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:44:46 61TL2000_040_0033
Charging System
Alternator Removal and Installation

1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure 1. Connector the alternator connector (A), BLK wire
(see page 22-78). (B), and harness clamp (C) to the alternator. Make
sure the crimped it side of the ring terminal faces
2. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-28). away from the alternator when you connect it.
＊０３
3. Remove the two bolts securing the alternator.
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
8 N·m
A C (0.8 kgf·m, 6 lbf·ft)
2. Tighten the two bolts securing the alternator.

＊０４
4. Disconnect the alternator connector (A), BLK wire

8 x 1.25 mm
(B), and harness clamp (C) from the alternator, then 22 N·m
remove the alternator. (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
＊０２
10 x 1.25 mm
B 44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
3. Install the drive belt (see page 4-28).
A C 4. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure

(see page 22-78).

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００１２９０１ＫＤＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:44:46 61TL2000_040_0034
Alternator Overhaul
Exploded View
＊０１
2.3 N·m
(0.23 kgf·m, 1.7 lbf·ft)
FRONT BEARING RETAINER
FRONT BEARING
DRIVE END HOUSING
PULLEY
PULLEY LOCKNUT
BRUSH HOLDER 110 N·m
ASSEMBLY (11.2 kgf·m,
81.0 lbf·ft)
1.8 N·m
(0.18 kgf·m, 1.3 lbf·ft)
WASHER
5.9 N·m
(0.61 kgf·m, 4.4 lbf·ft)
6.2 N·m
(0.63 kgf·m, 4.6 lbf·ft)
REAR HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
8 N·m ROTOR
(0.8 kgf·m,
6 lbf·ft)
TERMINAL
INSULATOR
4.5 N·m
(0.46 kgf·m, 3.3 lbf·ft)
END COVER
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４１０００１２９０１ＬＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:47 61TL2000_040_0035
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont’d)

Special Tools Required 5. Remove the end cover.
• Driver handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 ＊０４
• Bearing driver attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during

this procedure.
1. Test the alternator and regulator before you

remove them (see page 4-25).
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-32).
3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the

pulley locknut with a 10 mm wrench (A) and a
22 mm wrench (B). If necessary, use an impact
wrench.
＊０２
A B
6. Remove the brush holder.
＊０５
4. Remove the harness stay and the three flange nuts

from the alternator.
＊０３

08/04/09 12:44:48 61TL2000_040_0036
7. Remove the four bolts, then remove the rear 9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the
housing assembly (A), and washer (B). bearing journal surface in the drive end housing for
＊０６ seizure marks.
• If the rotor is damaged, replace the rotor

assembly.
• If the rotor is OK, go to step 10.
10. Remove the front bearing retainer.

＊０８
8. If you are not replacing the front bearing, go to

step 13. Remove the rotor from the drive end
housing.
＊０７
11. Drive out the front bearing with a brass drift and
hammer.
＊０９
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:44:49 61TL2000_040_0037
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont’d)

12. Install a new front bearing in the driver-end Rotor Slip Ring Test
housing with a hammer, the handle driver, and the
attachment. 14. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A).
＊１０
• If there is continuity, go to step 15.
• If there is no continuity, replace the rotor
07749-0010000
assembly.
＊１２
C
07746-0010300
Alternator Brush Inspection 15. Check for continuity between each slip ring and the
rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C).
13. Measure the length of both brushes (A) with a
vernier caliper (B). • If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing
assembly, and go to step 16.
• If either brush is shorter than the service limit, • If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
replace the brush holder assembly.
• If brush length is OK, go to step 14.
Alternator Brush Length

Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in.)
＊１１

08/04/09 12:44:49 61TL2000_040_0038
Alternator Reassembly
16. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the drive
end housing, then tighten its locknut to 110 N·m
(11.2 kgf·m, 81.0 lbf·ft).
17. Remove any grease or oil from the slip rings.
18. Put the rear housing assembly and drive end

housing/rotor assembly together, and tighten the
four through bolts.
19. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit
(B) (about 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) diameter) to hold them
there.
＊１３
20. Install the brush holder, and pull out the pin or drill
bit.
＊１４
21. Install the end cover.
22. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by

hand to make sure the rotor turns smoothly and
without noise.
23. Install the alternator (see page 4-32) and drive belt
(see page 4-28).

08/04/09 12:44:51 61TL2000_040_0039
Cruise Control

＊０１
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
(Built into gauge control module)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

(Built into gauge control module)
CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
Test/Replacement, page 4-44
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH (M/T model) BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Test, page 4-45 Test, page 22-210
Pedal Height Adjustment, page 12-7 Pedal Height Adjustment, page 19-6
＊０２
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)/ TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (A/T model)

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Test, page 14-304
Cruise Control Input Test, page 4-42 Replacement, page 14-306

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４５００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:52 61TL2000_040_0040

Cruise control cannot be 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Poor ground G101
set 2. Check the No. 10 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ (A/T model) or G302
relay box, and the No. 7 (15 A) fuse in the driver’s (M/T model)
under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-44).
4. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42).
Cruise control can be set, 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Faulty gauge control
but the cruise main 2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function module
indicator does not come procedure (see page 22-292).
on 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42).
Test the cruise control main switch signal input.
Cruise control can be set, 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Faulty gauge control
but the cruise control 2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function module
indicator does not come (see page 22-292).
on 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42).
Test the cruise control indicator signal input.
Vehicle does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Open circuit, loose or
accelerate accordingly 2. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page disconnected
when the resume/accel 4-44). terminals: LT BLU, GRY
switch is pressed 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42). wire
Test the cruise control resume/accel switch signal input.
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). • Short to power on
cancel when the brake 2. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page 19-6). the ORN wire
pedal is pressed 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42). • Faulty brake pedal
Test the brake pedal position switch signal input. position switch
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Short to ground in the
cancel (engine rpm stays 2. Do the clutch pedal position switch test (see page 4-45). BRN wire
high) when the clutch 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42).
pedal is pressed (M/T Test the clutch pedal position switch signal input.
model)
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Short to power on the
cancel when the cruise 2. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page LT GRN, YEL wire
control main switch is 4-44).
pressed 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42).
Test the cruise control main switch signal input.
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Open circuit, loose or
cancel when the cancel 2. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page disconnected
switch is pressed 4-44). terminals: GRY,
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42). LT GRN or LT BLU,
Test the cruise control cancel switch signal input. GRY wire
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４５００００００００ＨＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:45:29 61TL2000_040_0041
Cruise Control
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d)

Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). • Faulty brake pedal
resume when the 2. Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment position switch
resume/accel switch is (see page 19-6). • Open circuit, loose or
pressed (with the cruise 3. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page disconnected
control main switch 4-44). terminals: LT BLU,
turned on, and set speed 4. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42). GRY wire
temporarily canceled by Test the cruise control resume/accel switch signal input.
pressing the brake pedal) Test the brake pedal position switch signal input.
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). • Open circuit, loose or
resume when the 2. Check the clutch pedal position switch adjustment disconnected
resume/accel switch is (see page 12-7). terminals:
pressed (with the cruise 3. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page LT BLU, GRY wire
control main switch 4-44). • Faulty clutch pedal
turned on, and set speed 4. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42). position switch
temporarily canceled by Test the resume/accel switch signal input.
pressing the clutch pedal) Test the clutch pedal position switch signal input.
(M/T model)
With the ignition switch Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
in ON (II), and the lighting 4-44).
switch turned on, the
cruise control
combination switch
illumination does not
come on

08/04/09 12:45:30 61TL2000_040_0042
Circuit Diagram
＊０１
UNDER−HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER’S
UNDER−DASH No. 6 (7.5 A) FUSE
HORN RELAY FUSE/RELAY BOX (PASSENGER’S
No. 10 (10 A) 4 3 F23 Q12 UNDER−DASH
GRY FUSE/RELAY BOX)
1 2
BATTERY BLU/RED HORN
No. 1 (100 A) No. 18 (15 A) ORN GRY
1 10
No. 17 (15 A)
4 1 4 1 CABLE
STEERING STEERING REEL
WHEEL WHEEL
PGM−FI ETCS UPSHIFT DOWNSHIFT
No. 12 No. 3−1 MAIN CONTROL SWITCH (＋) SWITCH (−)
(15 A) (50 A) RELAY 1 RELAY HORN 11 3
SWITCH ORN GRN/RED
3 2 3 2 2 1
BLK BLK BLK ORN

11 10 9 4 3
2
BAT LIGHTS
IGNITION
IG1 SWITCH
CRUISE
CONTROL CRUISE
IG1 HOT in CONTROL SET/ CAN− RESUME/
5 ON (II) and COMBINATION
SWITCH MAIN DECEL CEL ACCEL
START (III)
C5
No. 7 8 5 12 6 7 1
(15 A)
BLK LT GRN GRY LT BLU RED RED GRN/RED
12 10 8 9 4 12 11 5 6
F14 DRIVER’S
UNDER−DASH
FUSE/RELAY CABLE
BOX REEL
AUDIO REMOTE
SWITCH
2 3 5 4 9
No. 5 (7.5 A) FUSE
RED/BLU BLK/RED BLU BRN YEL LT GRN GRY RED (DRIVER’S
30 14 13 2 UNDER−DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
1 3
BRAKE CPU
PEDAL 10 G501
POSITION 15
SWITCH C101
DRIVER DIMMING CIRCUIT BRN
22
2 4 10
21
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

LT GRN ORN RED/BLK YEL/BLK WHT YEL/GRN WHT RED
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

ECM/PCM A42 A41 A7 A9 A2 C1 A3 A4 GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
BKSW BKSWNC MRLY IGP1 ETCSRLY IG1ETCS CANH CANL
5V
12 V
5V
NC ATPFWD CRMTCLS ETCSM＋ ECTSM− VCC3 TPSA TPSB SG3

B38 B29 A43 C4 C3 C12 C20 C21 C43
BLK/WHT BLU/YEL BRN BLU/RED GRN/YEL BLU RED/BLK RED/BLU GRN
2 6 5 2 1 3 4
CLUTCH
PEDAL
POSITION
3 SWITCH
(ON : Pedal
BLK released)
OUTPUT SHAFT THROTTLE

TRANSMISSION ACTUATOR
(COUNTERSHAFT) RANGE SWITCH TP SENSOR A/B
SPEED SENSOR G302
THROTTLE BODY
(A/T model) (M/T model)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４５００００００００ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:30 61TL2000_040_0043
Cruise Control
Cruise Control Input Test

NOTE: Always make sure that you have latest HDS software.
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control
module (PCM). If it doesn’t communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
4. Go to PGM-FI, and check for DTCs (see page 11-3).
5. Do the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control inputs,
flex the circuits, and note if any of the test results change.
Signal to be tested Test condition Parameter: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
Brake pedal Brake pedal pressed, CRUISE BRAKE SW • Faulty brake pedal position switch
position then released should indicate OFF • Blown No. 7 (15 A) fuse in the driver’s
switch signal when the brake pedal is under-dash fuse/relay box
pressed and ON when • An open in the wire between the ECM/
the brake pedal is PCM and the brake pedal position switch
released. • A wire shorted to ground between the
ECM/PCM and the brake pedal position
switch
Clutch pedal Clutch pedal pressed, SHIFT/CLUTCH SW • Faulty clutch pedal position switch
position then released should indicate ON • An open in the wire between the ECM
switch signal when the clutch pedal and the clutch pedal position switch
(M/T model) is pressed and OFF • A wire shorted to ground between the
when the clutch pedal ECM and the brake pedal position switch
is released. • Poor ground G302
Transmission Shift lever in D and S SHIFT/CLUTCH SW • Faulty transmission range switch
range switch should indicate ON in P, • An open in the wire between the PCM
signal (A/T R, and N and OFF in D and the transmission range switch
model) and S. • A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the transmission range switch
• Poor ground G101
Cruise control Cruise control main CRUISE CONTROL • Faulty cruise control main switch
main switch switch ON and OFF MAIN SW should • An open in the wire between the gauge
signal indicate ON when the control module and the cruise control
cruise control main main switch
switch is turned ON • A wire shorted to ground between the
and OFF when the gauge control module and the cruise
cruise control main control main switch
switch is turned OFF.
Set switch Set/decel switch CRUISE CONTROL SET • Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal pressed and released SW should indicate ON • An open in the wire between the gauge
when the set/decel control module and the cruise control
switch is pressed and combination switch
OFF when the set/decel • A wire shorted to ground between the
switch is released. gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４５００００００００ＦＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:31 61TL2000_040_0044
Signal to be tested Test condition Parameter: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
Resume Resume/accel switch CRUISE CONTROL • Faulty cruise control combination switch
switch signal pressed and released RESUME SW should • An open in the wire between the gauge
indicate ON when the control module and the cruise control
resume/accel switch is combination switch
pressed and OFF when • A wire shorted to ground between the
the resume/accel gauge control module and the cruise
switch is released. control combination switch
Cancel switch Cancel switch CRUISE CONTROL • Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal pressed and released CANCEL SW should • An open in the wire between the gauge
indicate ON when the control module and the cruise control
cancel switch is combination switch
pressed and OFF when • A wire shorted to ground between the
the cancel switch is gauge control module and the cruise
released. control combination switch
Cruise control Start the engine, turn CRUISE INDICATOR Faulty gauge control module
indicator the cruise control should indicate ON
signal main switch on, and when the cruise control
drive the vehicle is set and OFF when
above 25 mph the cruise control is
(40 km/h). Set and canceled.
cancel the cruise
control.

08/04/09 12:45:31 61TL2000_040_0045
Cruise Control
Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the switch position according to the table.
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before
doing repairs or service. • If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but
switch failure occurred on the cruise control
1. Remove the driver’s airbag (see page 24-150). input test, check and repair the wire harness on
the switch circuit.
2. Remove the steering trim (see page 17-7). • If there is no continuity in one or more positions,
replace the switch.
3. Remove the cruise control combination switch. ＊０２
＊０１ Terminal
3 8 5 6 12
Position
Cruise control
main switch (ON)
Cruise control
main switch (OFF)
Set/decel
(PRESSED)
Resume/accel
(PRESSED)
Cancel
(PRESSED)
＊０３
Terminal side of
male terminals

• If there is continuity, and it matches the table,

check and repair the wire harness on the switch
circuit.
• If there is no continuity in one or more positions,
replace the switch.
＊０４
1 7

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４５０００１７６２５ＦＨＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:32 61TL2000_040_0046
Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test Clutch Pedal Position Switch

Replacement
M/T model
1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch M/T model
connector.
＊０１ 1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch
connector (A).
＊０１
C
Terminal side of
male terminals
B

2. Loosen the locknut (B), then remove the clutch
• If the continuity is not as specified, replace the pedal position switch (C).
clutch pedal position switch.
• If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch and 3. Install the clutch pedal position switch, and adjust
adjust the pedal height (see page 12-7). the pedal height (see page 12-7).
＊０２
Terminal
1 2 3
Position
Clutch Pedal
(PRESSED)
Clutch Pedal
(RELEASED)
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ａ１４５０００１７０４５ＦＥＡＴ０２ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ａ１４５０００１７０４５ＫＢＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:45:33 61TL2000_040_0047
Engine Mount Control System
＊０１
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)/
Troubleshooting, page 4-48 POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
FRONT ENGINE MOUNT
Replacement, page 5-22

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８２２３２０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:33 61TL2000_040_0048
Circuit Diagram
＊０１
UNDER−HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) No. 3−1 (50 A)
WHT
BAT IGNITION
IG1 SWITCH
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

5 and START (III)
BLU
C5
No. 7 DRIVER’S
(15 A) UNDER−DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
F14
BLK/RED
22
C101
BLK/YEL
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
BLU/YEL
ECM/PCM C40
MCS
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８２２３２０００００ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:33 61TL2000_040_0049
Troubleshooting
Special Tools Required 10. Measure the voltage between engine mount
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2
Snap-on YA4000A or equivalent, commercially and body ground.
available ＊０１
NOTE: Check the vacuum hoses and lines for damage SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
and proper connections before troubleshooting.
Follow this procedure if the engine vibrates excessively

when idling. IG1
(BLK/YEL)
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).

control module (PCM). If it doesn’t communicate, Is there battery voltage?
4. Check the idle speed (see page 11-323).
NO−Repair open in the wire between engine
5. Raise the engine speed from idling to 2,000 rpm. mount control solenoid valve 2P connector
terminal No. 2 and No. 7 (15 A) fuse in the driver’s
6. Check the MOUNT CTRL SOL in the PGM-FI DATA under-dash fuse/relay box.
LIST with the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
11. Start the engine, and let it idle.
Is ON indicated at idling and OF F indicated at
2,000 rpm?
YES−Go to step 7.

recheck. If the engine mount control system works
properly, and the ECM/PCM was updated, the
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
(see page 11-234).
8. Disconnect the engine mount control solenoid

valve 2P connector from the engine mount control
solenoid valve.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８２２３２０００００ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:34 61TL2000_040_0050
12. Measure the voltage between engine mount 13. Raise the engine speed above 1,000 rpm.
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2 with the engine at idle. 14. Measure the voltage between engine mount
＊０２ control solenoid valve 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR ＊０３
SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
MCS IG1
(BLU/YEL) (BLK/YEL)
MCS IG1
(BLU/YEL) (BLK/YEL)

Is there battery voltage?
YES−Go to step 13. Is there battery voltage?
NO−Repair open in the wire between ECM/PCM YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
(C40) and the engine mount control solenoid valve between ECM/PCM (C40) and the engine mount
2P connector. If the wire is OK, update the ECM/ control solenoid valve. If the wire is OK, update the
PCM if it does not have the latest software ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-233), or substitute a known-good (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. If the ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. If the
engine mount control system works properly, and engine mount control system works properly, and
the ECM/PCM was updated, the troubleshooting is the ECM/PCM was updated, the troubleshooting is
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234).
NO−Go to step 15.
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:45:34 61TL2000_040_0051
Troubleshooting (cont’d)
16. Disconnect the upper vacuum hose (A) from the 17. Release the vacuum, then apply vacuum again.
engine mount control solenoid valve (B), and
connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg, to the Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness
hose. Apply about 20 in.Hg of vacuum, and wait with and without vacuum applied?
20 seconds.
＊０４ YES−Go to step 18.
NO−Replace the front engine mount.

B
18. Connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg, to the
engine mount control solenoid valve (A).
＊０５
Does the engine mount hold vacuum?
NO−Either the vacuum hose or the engine mount

has a vacuum leak. Repair as needed.
Is there manif old vacuum at idle, and a decrease
in manif old vacuum when you raise the engine
speed above 1,000 rpm?
YES−The system is OK.
NO−Replace the engine mount control solenoid

valve.

08/04/09 12:29:15 61TL2000_050_0002
Engine Assembly
Special Tools
07AAK-SNAA120 Universal Eyelet 1
070AG-SJAA10S Subframe Alignment Pin 1
０１
０１
5-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０５０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:29:16 61TL2000_050_0003
Engine Removal
Special Tools Required 6. Remove the harness clamps (A).
• Universal eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120 ＊０２
• Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000015 A
• Front subframe adapter VSB02C000016
A
• Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256
: These special tools are available through the Acura
Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted C
surfaces.
• To avoid damaging the wiring and terminals, unplug
the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
• Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or B
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Secure the hood in the wide open position (support

rod in the lower hole).
＊０１
7. Disconnect the engine control module (ECM)/

powertrain control module (PCM) connectors (B).
8. Remove the ECM/PCM bracket assembly (C).
9. Remove the battery cables (A) from the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
＊０３
2. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-339).
3. Remove the battery (see page 22-79).

D
4. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly
(see page 11-364).
B
5. Remove the strut brace (see page 20-230).
10. Remove the harness clamps (B).
11. Disconnect the starter subharness connector (C),

then remove the connector from the bracket.
12. Disconnect the engine wire harness connector (D).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 5-3
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８２２３８０００００ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:29:16 61TL2000_050_0004
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont’d)

13. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) 15. M/T model: Remove the shift cable (see step 11 on
canister hose (A) and brake booster vacuum hose page 13-17).
(B).
＊０４ 16. M/T model: Remove the clutch slave cylinder, and
clutch line bracket mounting bolt (see step 9 on
page 13-16).
A 17. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-28).
18. Remove the radiator cap.

B
19. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
20. Remove the front wheels.
21. Remove the splash shield.

＊０６
14. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then

disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-346).
＊０５
A
22. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, and drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-6).
23. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-10).
24. Drain the transmission fluid:
• Manual transmission (see page 13-13)

• Automatic transmission (see page 14-255)
5-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:29:17 61TL2000_050_0005
25. Remove exhaust pipe A. 31. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
＊０７
32. Remove the bolts securing the steering gearbox.
＊０９
Replace.
Replace. Replace.
26. A/T model: Remove the shift cable (see page

14-295).
27. Remove the damper fork (see step 4 on page 18-25).

33. A/T model: Disconnect the automatic transmission
28. Separate the knuckles from the lower arms (see fluid (ATF) cooler hose, then plug the line and hose.
step 6 on page 18-21). ＊１０
29. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-4). Coat all

precision-finished surfaces with clean engine oil.
Tie a plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
30. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector

(A), then remove the A/C compressor (B) without
disconnecting the A/C hoses.
＊０８
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 5-5

08/04/09 12:29:17 61TL2000_050_0006
Engine Assembly

34. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A) and heater 37. Attach the engine hanger adapter (VSB02C000015)
hoses (B). to the threaded hole in the cylinder head.
＊１１＊１３
VSB02C000015
35. Clean any dirt off the quick connector, the

thermostat cover, and the lower radiator hose. Pull
out the lock by hand, then wiggle the quick
connector loose, and remove it from the thermostat
cover. Do not use any tools to remove the quick 38. Remove the grille cover (see page 20-202).
connector (see step 2 on page 10-8).
39. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256),
36. Remove the ignition coil cover (A) and the brake then attach the hook to the slotted hole in the
booster vacuum line mounting bolts (B). engine hanger adapter. Tighten the wing nut (A) by
＊１２ hand to lift and support the engine/transmission.
＊１４
A
AAR-T1256
A
5-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:29:18 61TL2000_050_0007
40. Remove the vacuum hose (A), front engine mount 43. A/T model: Remove the rear engine mount (A), then
stop (B), and vacuum hose bracket (C), then remove remove the rear engine mount upper bracket (B).
the front engine mount bolt (D). ＊１７
＊１５ Replace.
B
Replace. B
C
A
A E
Replace.
D
Replace. E
41. A/T model: Remove the ATF line mounting bolts (E).
42. M/T model: Remove the rear engine mount.

＊１６
Replace. 44. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
Replace.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 5-7

08/04/09 12:29:18 61TL2000_050_0008
Engine Assembly

45. Remove the transmission lower mount. 46. Remove the front subframe middle mounts.
＊２０
M/T model
＊１８
Replace. Replace.
Replace.
47. Attach the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016)

to the subframe and hang the belt of the subframe
adapter over the front of the subframe, then secure
A/T model the belt with its stop.
＊１９＊２１
Replace.
VSB02C000016
48. Raise the jack and line up the slots in the front
subframe adapter arms with the bolt holes on the
jack base, then securely attach them with four bolts.
5-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:29:19 61TL2000_050_0009
49. Remove the front subframe (A), stiffeners (B), and 52. Install the 15 mm spacer (A) and universal eyelet
steering gearbox washers (C). (B).
＊２２＊２４
B
07AAK-SNAA120
C C
A
53. Attach a chain hoist (A) to the universal eyelet (B),

and the transmission hook (C), then lift the engine/
B B transmission until it is securely supported by the
chain hoist, and remove the engine support hanger.
＊２５
Replace. Replace. A/T model
B
A
50. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
51. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side
engine mount bracket (B).
＊２３
Replace. B
C
A
C
M/T model
(cont’d)
5-9
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 12:29:19 61TL2000_050_0010
Engine Assembly

54. Remove the ground cables (A), then remove the 55. Check that the engine/transmission is completely
upper transmission mount bracket mounting bolts free of vacuum hoses, fuel hoses, coolant hoses,
(B). and electrical wiring.
NOTE: Do not remove the TORX bolt (C) from the 56. Slowly lower the engine/transmission about
upper transmission mount. If the TORX bolt is 150 mm (6 in.). Check once again that all hoses and
removed, the upper transmission mount must be electrical wiring are disconnected and free from the
replaced as an assembly. engine/transmission, then lower it all the way.
M/T model 57. Disconnect the chain hoist from the engine/
＊２６ transmission.
B
Replace. C
58. Raise the vehicle, and remove the engine/
transmission from under the vehicle.
A/T model
＊２７
B
Replace.

08/04/09 12:29:20 61TL2000_050_0011
Engine Installation
Special Tools Required
• Universal eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120
• Subframe alignment pin 070AG-SJAA10S
• Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000015
: These special tools are available through the Acura Tool and Equipment Program, 1-888-424-6857
1. Install the accessory brackets and tighten their bolts to the specified torques.
＊０１
TRANSMISSION MOUNT
REAR ENGINE MOUNT BRACKET (M/T model)
BRACKET
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
88 N·m
(9.0 kgf·m, 65 lbf·ft) FRONT ENGINE MOUNT
Replace. BRACKET (A/T model)
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
FRONT ENGINE MOUNT

BRACKET (M/T model)
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
(6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
REAR ENGINE MOUNT 44 N·m
BRACKET (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
A/C COMPRESSOR
BRACKET
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８２２３８０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:29:20 61TL2000_050_0012
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont’d)

2. Raise the vehicle on the lift, and position the 3. Attach the engine hanger adapter (VSB02C000015)
engine/transmission under the vehicle. Lower the to the threaded hole in the cylinder head.
vehicle, and attach the universal eyelet (A) and ＊０３
VSB02C000015
chain hoist to the engine, then lift the engine into
position in the vehicle.
NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts and support

nuts in the sequence given in the following steps.
Failure to follow this sequence may cause
excessive noise and vibration, and reduce engine
mount life.
＊０２
A/T model
A
07AAK-SNAA120
M/T model
4. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256),

then attach the hook to the slotted hole in the
engine hanger adapter. Tighten the wing nut (A) by
hand to lift and support the engine/transmission.
＊０４
A
AAR-T1256

08/04/09 12:29:21 61TL2000_050_0013
5. Tighten the new upper transmission mount bracket 7. Remove the chain hoist.
mounting bolts to the specified torque.
8. Remove the universal eyelet.
M/T model ＊０７
07AAK-SNAA120
＊０５
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft)
Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
9. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), and

tighten the new bolts (B), then tighten the bolt (C).
＊０８
B
6 x 1.0 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
9.8 N·m 54 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 6 x 1.0 mm (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
7.2 lbf·ft) 9.8 N·m Replace.
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
A/T model
＊０６
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm Replace.
9.8 N·m D
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
A
C
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
10. Install the ground cable (D).
6. Install the ground cables.
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:29:21 61TL2000_050_0014
Engine Assembly

11. Raise the vehicle on the lift. 15. Remove the jack and the front subframe adapter.
12. Support the front subframe (A) with the front 16. Insert the subframe alignment pin (070AG-
subframe adapter (VSB02C000016). Position the SJAA10S) through the positioning slot (A) on the
steering gearbox washers (B) on the front subframe, right rear stiffener, through the positioning hole (B)
and raise the subframe up to body. on the subframe, and into the positioning hole (C)
＊０９ on the body, then loosely tighten the subframe
right rear mounting bolt.
＊１１
C
B B
A
A
F
F
070AG-SJAA10S
C NOTE: Use 15.7 mm side.
E
E F 12 x 1.25 mm
D C 54 N·m 17. Insert the subframe alignment pin through the
C C (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) positioning slot on the left rear stiffener, through
14 x 1.5 mm D the positioning hole on the subframe, and into the
103 N·m 12 x 1.25 mm
(10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft) 93 N·m (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft) positioning hole on the body, then loosely tighten
Replace. Replace. the subframe left rear mounting bolt.
13. Loosely install the new front subframe mounting 18. With the subframe alignment pin in place, tighten
bolts (C), the rear stiffener mounting bolts (D), the the subframe right rear mounting bolt.
front stiffener mounting bolts (E), and the stiffeners
(F). 19. With the subframe alignment pin in place, tighten
the subframe left rear mounting bolt.
14. Install the subframe middle mount (A), then loosely
tighten the new subframe middle mount mounting 20. Tighten the stiffener mounting bolts to the
bolts (B). specified torque.
＊１０
A
21. Tighten the subframe mounting bolts to the
B specified torque.
Replace.
22. Check that the positioning slots on the right/left
rear stiffener, the positioning holes on the
subframe, and the positioning holes on the body
are aligned using the subframe alignment pin.
B
Replace.

08/04/09 12:29:22 61TL2000_050_0015
23. Tighten the bolts securing the subframe middle 24. Install the transmission lower mount.
mounts.
＊１２ M/T model
12 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m ＊１３
10 x 1.25 mm
(4.5 kgf·m, 54 N·m
33 lbf·ft) (5.5 kgf·m,
40 lbf·ft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
49 N·m
(5.0 kgf·m,
36 lbf·ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
A/T model
＊１４
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
(5.5 kgf·m,
40 lbf·ft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:29:22 61TL2000_050_0016
Engine Assembly

25. Lower the vehicle on the lift. 29. A/T model: Install the rear engine mount upper
bracket (A). Install the rear engine mount (B), then
26. Tighten the new front engine mount bolt (A), then tighten the new rear mount mounting bolts in the
install the front engine mount stop (B), vacuum numbered sequence shown.
hose bracket (C), and the vacuum hose (D). ＊１７
10 x 1.25 mm
＊１５ 12 x 1.25 mm 54 N·m
12 x 1.25 mm
B 78 N·m (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft) 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) (5.5 kgf·m,
Replace. 40 lbf·ft)
E A B Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.8 lbf·ft)
C
12 x 1.25 mm
78 N·m
(8.0 kgf·m,
58 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A 12 x 1.25 mm
10 x 1.25 mm 54 N·m
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Replace. 30. Remove the engine support hanger and the engine
hanger adapter.
27. A/T model: Install the ATF line mounting bolts (E).
31. Loosen the mounting bolts for the side engine
28. M/T model: Install the rear engine mount (A), then mount bracket, then retighten the bolts.
tighten the new rear mount mounting bolts in the ＊１８
numbered sequence shown.
＊１６ 12 x 1.25 mm
12 x 1.25 mm 54 N·m
78 N·m (5.5 kgf·m,
58 lbf·ft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
78 N·m (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft)
Replace.

08/04/09 12:29:23 61TL2000_050_0017
32. Loosen the mounting bolts for the upper 33. Make sure the steering gearbox washers are set
transmission mount bracket, then retighten the securely. Tighten the steering gearbox mounting
bolts. bolts.
＊２１
M/T model 14 x 1.5 mm
74 N·m
＊１９ (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft)
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m
A/T model
＊２０
12 x 1.25 mm 34. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft)
35. Install a new set ring on the end of each driveshaft,

then install the driveshafts. Make sure each ring
‘‘clicks’’ into place in the differential and the
intermediate shaft.
36. Connect the lower arms to the knuckles (see step 6

on page 18-21).
37. Install the damper fork (see step 4 on page 18-27).
38. A/T model: Install the shift cable (see page 14-295).
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:29:23 61TL2000_050_0018
Engine Assembly

39. Install exhaust pipe A. Use new gaskets (B) and 42. Install the splash shield.
new self locking nuts (C). ＊２４
＊２２
B
Replace.
B
Replace.
C
10 x 1.25 mm
33 N·m
8 x 1.25 mm (3.4 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft) 43. Install the front wheels.
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) Replace.
40. Install the A/C compressor (A), then connect the
A/C compressor clutch connector (B). 45. A/T model: Install the automatic transmission fluid
＊２３ (ATF) cooler hoses (A) to the transmission, and
B
secure the hoses with the clips (B) (see page
14-283).
＊２５
B
A
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
B
A

08/04/09 12:29:24 61TL2000_050_0019
46. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and heater hoses 52. Push the lock (A) down, then push the quick
(B). connector (B) onto the thermostat cover until you
＊２６ hear it click.
＊２８
A
47. Check the quick connector (A) and set ring (B) for
cracks or damage. If the connector and/or set ring 53. M/T model: Install the clutch slave cylinder, and
are cracked or damaged, replace the connector. clutch line bracket mounting bolt (see step 57 on
＊２７ page 13-33).
D B
C 54. M/T model: Install the shift cable (see step 55 on
page 13-32).
55. Install the ignition coil cover (A) and the brake
booster vacuum line mounting bolts (B).
＊２９
A
E A
48. Make sure the set ring is in place inside the quick
connector. If the set ring is off the connector,
replace the quick connector.
49. Install a new O-ring (C) in the quick connector.
50. Check the lock (D). If the lock is damaged or

deformed, replace it. When installing the new lock
on the connector, push it straight down along the
groove.
B
51. Clean the connecting surface of the thermostat
cover (E), then apply clean engine coolant around
the connecting surface.
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:29:24 61TL2000_050_0020
Engine Assembly

56. Connect the fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11-349), 58. Connect the engine wire harness connector (A).
then install the quick-connect fitting cover (B). ＊３２
＊３０
B
B
A
A
57. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister C

hose (A) and brake booster vacuum hose (B).
＊３１ 59. Install the starter subharness connector (B) to the
bracket, then connect the connector.
60. Install the harness clamps (C).

A
61. Install the battery cables (D) to the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
B

08/04/09 12:29:33 61TL2000_050_0021
62. Install the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain 71. Refill the engine with engine oil (see step 5 on page
control module (PCM) bracket assembly (A). 8-10).
＊３３
6 x 1.0 mm 72. Refill the transmission with fluid:
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
C
73. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed

air from the cooling system with the heater valve
C open (see step 6 on page 10-6).
A 74. Do the ECM/PCM reset procedure (see page 11-4).
75. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page

11-324).
76. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP

B pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
77. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-323).
78. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-17).
63. Connect the ECM/PCM connectors (B).
64. Install the harness clamps (C).
65. Install the strut brace (see page 20-230).
66. Install the air cleaner housing assembly (see page

11-364).
67. Do the battery installation procedure (see page

22-79).
68. A/T model: Move the shift lever to each gear, and
verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows
the transmission range switch.
69. M/T model: Check that the transmission shifts into

all gear smoothly.
70. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to

ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel
line. Repeat this operation three times, then check
for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.

08/04/09 12:29:34 61TL2000_050_0022
Engine Assembly
Engine Mount Replacement

＊０１
12 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm Do not remove.
78 N·m REAR ENGINE MOUNT 59 N·m
(8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft) (M/T model) (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft)
Replace. Replace. TRANSMISSION MOUNT
(A/T model)
12 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
78 N·m 54 N·m
(8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft) (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Replace. Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
Replace.
TRANSMISSION MOUNT
(M/T model)
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
(5.5 kgf·m,
REAR ENGINE MOUNT 40 lbf·ft)
(A/T model) Replace.
Do not remove.
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
12 x 1.25 mm (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
Replace.
TRANSMISSION
SIDE ENGINE LOWER MOUNT
MOUNT (A/T model)
FRONT ENGINE
MOUNT
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
12 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m 54 N·m
Replace. Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
(6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft) TRANSMISSION
LOWER MOUNT
(M/T model)
10 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm

64 N·m 10 x 1.25 mm 78 N·m 44 N·m
(6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft) 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft) (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
Replace. Replace. Replace.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８２２４００００００ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:27:40 61TL2000_060_0001
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special Tools ................................................................. 6-2
Component Location Index ......................................... 6-3
Engine Compression Inspection ................................. 6-6
VTEC Rocker Arm Test ................................................. 6-7
VTC Actuator Inspection .............................................. 6-8
Valve Clearance Adjustment ....................................... 6-9
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation .............. 6-12
Cam Chain Removal ..................................................... 6-13
Cam Chain Installation ................................................. 6-15
Auto-tensioner Removal and Installation .................. 6-21
Chain Case Oil Seal Installation .................................. 6-23
Cam Chain Inspection .................................................. 6-23
Cylinder Head Cover Removal .................................... 6-25
Cylinder Head Cover Installation ................................ 6-26
Cylinder Head Removal ............................................... 6-27
CMP Pulse Plate A Replacement ................................. 6-30
CMP Pulse Plate B Replacement ................................. 6-30
VTC Actuator, Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket
Replacement ............................................................. 6-31
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage ...................... 6-32
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal ................................. 6-33
Rocker Arm and Shaft
Disassembly/Reassembly ........................................ 6-34
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection ............................... 6-35
Camshaft Inspection .................................................... 6-36
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal ..................... 6-38
Valve Inspection ........................................................... 6-39
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection ............... 6-39
Valve Guide Replacement ........................................... 6-40
Valve Seat Reconditioning .......................................... 6-42
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation ................. 6-44
Rocker Arm Assembly Installation .............................. 6-45
Cylinder Head Installation ........................................... 6-46
Sealing Bolt Installation ............................................... 6-49
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０６０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:41 61TL2000_060_0002
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
07AAB-RWCA120 Camshaft Lock Pin Set 1
07AAJ-PNAA101 Air Pressure Regulator 1
07AAJ-RWCA100 Cam Chain Inspection Gauge 1
07HAH-PJ7A100 Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
07JAA-001020A Socket, 19 mm 1
07JAB-001020B Holder Handle 1
07MAA-PR70110 Adjuster 1
07MAA-PR70120 Locknut Wrench 1
07PAD-0010000 Stem Seal Driver 1
07ZAJ-PNAA101 VTEC Air Adapter 2
07ZAJ-PNAA200 VTEC Air Stopper 1
07ZAJ-PNAA300 Air Joint Adapter 1
07AAB-RJAA100 Crankshaft Pulley Holder 1
07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 1
07757-PJ1010A Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 1
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
6-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０６０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:43 61TL2000_060_0003

＊０１
IGNITION COIL COVER
CYLINDER HEAD COVER

Removal, page 6-25
Installation, page 6-26
CAM CHAIN
Removal, page 6-13
Inspection, page 6-23
CAM CHAIN GUIDE B
CAM CHAIN GUIDE A
O-RING
VARIABLE VALVE
TIMING CONTROL
(VTC) OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
TENSIONER ARM CRANKSHAFT PULLEY

Removal/Installation,
page 6-12
SPACER
AUTO-TENSIONER
CHAIN CASE
CRANKSHAFT
PULLEY BOLT
page 6-12
CHAIN CASE COVER
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 6-3
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:45 61TL2000_060_0004
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont’d)
＊０２
CAMSHAFT HOLDERS
CAM CHAIN GUIDE B
DOWEL PINS
INTAKE CAMSHAFT
CMP PULSE PLATE B EXHAUST CAMSHAFT SPROCKET

Replacement, Replacement, page 6-31
page 6-30
CMP PULSE PLATE A

Replacement,
page 6-30
CMP SENSOR B VTC ACTUATOR

(EXHAUST) Replacement, page 6-31
EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) SENSOR A
(INTAKE)
DOWEL PINS
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY

VTEC Rocker Arm Test, page 6-7
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal,
page 6-33
Rocker Arm Assembly Installation,
page 6-45
Rocker Arm and Shaft
Disassembly/Reassembly,
page 6-34
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection,
page 6-35
6-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:27:47 61TL2000_060_0005
＊０３
VALVE COTTERS CYLINDER HEAD BOLT
SPRING RETAINER
INTAKE VALVE SPRING

EXHAUST
VALVE SEAL
EXHAUST VALVE SPRING
VALVE
SPRING SEAT
INTAKE VALVE SEAL
Removal, page 6-38
EXHAUST VALVE GUIDE

INTAKE VALVE GUIDE
LOST MOTION ASSEMBLY
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL

SOLENOID FILTER
HEAT SHIELD VTC STRAINER
VTC FILTER
CYLINDER HEAD
Removal, page 6-27
EXHAUST VALVE
Removal, page 6-38
INTAKE VALVE
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
COOLANT SEPARATOR
-DYNOMITE 2009- 6-5

08/04/09 12:27:47 61TL2000_060_0006
Cylinder Head
Engine Compression Inspection

NOTE: After this inspection, you must reset the engine 11. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with
control module (ECM)/powertrain control module the starter motor and measure the compression.
(PCM), otherwise the ECM/PCM will continue to stop
the fuel injectors from functioning. Compression Pressure:
Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi)
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating
temperature (cooling fan comes on). 12. Measure the compression on the remaining
cylinders.
Maximum Variation:
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi)
(see step 2 on page 11-3).
13. If the compression is not within specifications,
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). check the following items, then remeasure the
compression.
and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn’t communicate, • Damaged or worn valves and seats
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210). • Damaged cylinder head gasket
• Damaged or worn piston rings
6. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS • Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
OFF on the HDS.
14. Remove the compression gauge from the spark
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). plug hole.
8. Remove the four ignition coils (see page 4-18). 15. Install the four spark plugs.
9. Remove the four spark plugs. 16. Install the four ignition coils (see page 4-18).
10. Attach a compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 17. Select the ECM/PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel
＊０１ the ALL INJECTORS OFF on the HDS.
6-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６００００００００ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:47 61TL2000_060_0007
VTEC Rocker Arm Test

Special Tools Required 5. Repeat step 4 on the remaining secondary rocker
• Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA101 arms with each piston at TDC. When all the
• VTEC air adapter 07ZAJ-PNAA101 secondary rocker arms pass the test, go to step 6.
• VTEC air stopper 07ZAJ-PNAA200
• Air joint adapter 07ZAJ-PNAA300 6. Check that the air pressure on the shop air
compressor gauge indicates over 400 kPa
1. Start the engine, and let it run for 5 minutes, then (4 kgf/cm2, 57 psi).
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-9).
2. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-25).
8. Remove the sealing bolt (A) from the relief hole,
3. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC) (see and install the VTEC air stopper (B).
step 2 on page 6-9). ＊０２
E D
07AAJ-PNAA101 07ZAJ-PNAA300
4. Move the secondary rocker arm (A) for the No. 1
cylinder. The secondary rocker arm should move
independently of the mid rocker arm (B).
• If the secondary rocker arm does not move,

remove the mid, primary, and secondary rocker
arms as an assembly, and check that the pistons
A
in the rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker
arm needs replacing, replace the mid, primary,
and secondary rocker arms as an assembly, then
retest. B
• If the secondary rocker arm moves freely, go to 07ZAJ-PNAA200
step 5. C
07ZAJ-PNAA101
＊０１
9. Remove the No. 2 and No. 3 camshaft holder bolts,
and install the VTEC air adapters (C) finger-tight.
10. Connect the air joint adapter (D) and the air
pressure regulator (E).
11. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the

specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:

290 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 42 psi)
B
A NOTE: If the rocker arm piston does not move after
applying air pressure; move the rocker arm up and
down manually by rotating the crankshaft
clockwise.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 6-7
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０３５１５１１ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:48 61TL2000_060_0008
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test (cont’d) VTC Actuator Inspection

12. With the specified air pressure applied, move the 1. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13).
secondary rocker arm (A) for the No. 1 cylinder.
The mid rocker arm (B), primary rocker arm (C), 2. Loosen the rocker arm adjusting screws (see step 2
and secondary rocker arm should move together. on page 6-33).
If the mid and primary rocker arms do not move 3. Remove the camshaft holder (see step 3 on page
together with the secondary rocker arm, remove 6-33).
the mid, primary, and secondary rocker arms as an
assembly, and check that the pistons in the rocker 4. Remove the intake camshaft.
arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs
replacing, replace the mid, primary, and secondary 5. Check that the variable valve timing control (VTC)
rocker arms as an assembly, then retest. actuator is locked by turning the VTC actuator
＊０３ counterclockwise. If it is not locked, turn the VTC
actuator clockwise until it stops, then recheck it. If it
is still not locked, replace the VTC actuator.
6. Seal the advance holes (A) and retard holes (B) in

the No. 1 camshaft journal with tape.
＊０１
C
B
A
13. Repeat step 12 on the remaining secondary rocker

arms with each piston at TDC. When all the
secondary rocker arms pass the test, go to step 14.
B
14. Remove the special tools.
7. Punch a hole in the tape over one of the advance
15. Tighten the camshaft holder mounting bolts to holes.
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft).
16. Tighten the sealing bolt to 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,

7.4 lbf·ft).
17. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-26).
6-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０４６３３５１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:48 61TL2000_060_0009
Valve Clearance Adjustment

8. Apply air to the advance hole to release the lock. Special Tools Required
＊０２ • Adjuster 07MAA-PR70110
• Locknut wrench 07MAA-PR70120
NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head

temperature is less than 100 °F (38 °C).
2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The

punch mark (A) on the variable valve timing control
(VTC) actuator and the punch mark (B) on the
exhaust camshaft sprocket should be at the top.
Align the TDC marks (C) on the VTC actuator and
the exhaust camshaft sprocket.
＊０１
B A
9. Check that the VTC actuator moves smoothly. If the
VTC actuator does not move smoothly, replace the
VTC actuator.
＊０３
10. Remove the tape and adhesive residue from the

camshaft journal.
11. Make sure the punch marks on the VTC actuator

and the exhaust camshaft sprocket are facing up,
then set the camshafts in the head (see step 6 on
page 6-45).
12. Set the camshaft holders and chain guide B in place

13. Tighten the camshaft holder bolts to the specified

torque (see step 8 on page 6-45).
14. Hold the camshaft, and turn the VTC actuator

clockwise until you hear it click. Make sure to lock
the VTC actuator by turning it.
15. Install the cam chain (see page 6-15).
16. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-9).

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 6-9
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０２０００００ＭＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:48 61TL2000_060_0010
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont’d)

3. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the 5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the
valves you are going to check. locknut with the locknut wrench and adjuster, and
turn the adjusting screw until the drag on the feeler
Valve Clearance gauge is correct.
Intake: 0.21−0.25 mm (0.008−0.010 in.) ＊０４
07MAA-PR70110
Exhaust: 0.25−0.29 mm (0.010−0.011 in.)
＊０２
EXHAUST
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 07MAA-PR70120

INTAKE
6. Tighten the locknut to the specified torque, and
4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment if
screw (B) and the end of the valve stem, and slide it necessary.
back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of
drag. Specified Torque
＊０３ 7 x 0.75 mm
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
Apply new engine oil to the nut threads.
A B

08/04/09 12:27:49 61TL2000_060_0011
7. Rotate the crankshaft 180 ° clockwise (camshaft 11. Rotate the crankshaft 180 ° clockwise (camshaft
pulley turns 90 °). pulley turns 90 °).
＊０５＊０７
8. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance 12. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on the No. 3 cylinder. on the No. 2 cylinder.
9. Rotate the crankshaft 180 ° clockwise (camshaft 13. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-26).
pulley turns 90 °).
＊０６
10. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance

on the No. 4 cylinder.

08/04/09 12:27:49 61TL2000_060_0012
Cylinder Head
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation

Special Tools Required Installation
• Holder handle 07JAB-001020B
• Crankshaft pulley holder 07AAB-RJAA100 1. Clean the crankshaft pulley (A), the crankshaft (B),
• Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or a commercially the bolt (C), and the washer (D). Lubricate with new
available 19 mm socket engine oil as shown.
＊０２
: Clean
Removal
: Lubricate
1. Remove the front wheels. A
2. Remove the splash shield (see step 21 on page 5-4).
4. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and the
holder attachment (B).
＊０１
B C B
07AAB-RJAA100 D
2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and hold the pulley

with the holder handle (A) and the holder
attachment (B).
＊０３
A B
07JAB-001020B 07AAB-RJAA100
C
07JAA-001020A
(or commercially available) A
07JAB-001020B
5. Remove the bolt with a 19 mm socket (C) and a

breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft pulley.
C
07JAA-001020A
(or commercially available)
3. Tighten the bolt to 49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft) with

a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). Do not use
an impact wrench. If the pulley bolt or crankshaft
are new, tighten the bolt to 177 N·m (18.0 kgf·m,
130 lbf·ft), then remove the bolt and tighten it to
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft).
4. Tighten the pulley bolt an additional 90 °.
6. Install the splash shield (see step 42 on page 5-18).
7. Install the front wheels.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３１６６１７５３１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:50 61TL2000_060_0013
Cam Chain Removal

NOTE: Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields. 7. Remove the VTC oil control solenoid valve
(see page 11-305).
8. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
9. Support the engine with a jack and a wood block
3. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-28). under the oil pan.
4. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-25). 10. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side
engine mount bracket (B).
5. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The ＊０３
punch mark (A) on the variable valve timing control Replace.
＊０１
B A
B
C
11. Remove the side engine mount bracket.
6. Disconnect the VTC oil control solenoid valve ＊０４
connector (A).
＊０２
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６７４３０００００ＫＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:27:50 61TL2000_060_0014
Cylinder Head
Cam Chain Removal (cont’d)

12. Remove the cam chain case (A) and the spacer (B). 15. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the auto-
＊０５ tensioner (B), then insert a 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
diameter pin or lock pin (P/N 14511-PNA-003) (C)
into the holes. Turn the crankshaft clockwise to
A
secure the pin.
＊０７
C
13. Loosely install the crankshaft pulley.
B
14. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise to compress
the auto-tensioner. 16. Remove the auto-tensioner.
＊０６＊０８

08/04/09 12:27:51 61TL2000_060_0015
Cam Chain Installation

17. Remove cam chain guide B. Special Tools Required
＊０９ Camshaft lock pin set 07AAB-RWCA120
NOTE:
• Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields.
• Before doing this procedure, check that the variable
valve timing control (VTC) actuator is locked by
turning the VTC actuator counterclockwise. If not
locked, turn the VTC actuator clockwise until it stops,
then recheck it. If it is still not locked, replace the VTC
actuator.
1. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align

the TDC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with
the pointer (B) on the engine block.
＊０１
B
18. Remove cam chain guide A and the tensioner

arm (B).
＊１０
2. Set the camshafts to TDC. The punch mark (A) on

the VTC actuator and the punch mark (B) on the
＊０２
B A
19. Remove the cam chain.
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６７４３０００００ＫＣＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:27:51 61TL2000_060_0016
Cylinder Head
Cam Chain Installation (cont’d)

3. To hold the intake camshaft, insert a camshaft lock 6. Install the cam chain on the VTC actuator and the
pin set (A) into the maintenance hole in camshaft exhaust camshaft sprocket with the punch marks
position (CMP) pulse plate A (B) and through the (A) aligned with the center of the two colored link
No. 5 rocker shaft holder (C). plates (B).
＊０３＊０５
B B
D
A
A
A
07AAB-RWCA120
C 7. Install cam chain guide A and the tensioner arm (B).

＊０６
4. To hold the exhaust camshaft, insert a camshaft
lock pin set (A) into the maintenance hole in CMP A
6 x 1.0 mm
pulse plate B (D) and through the No. 5 rocker shaft 12 N·m
holder (C). (1.2 kgf·m,
8.8 lbf·ft)
5. Install the cam chain on the crankshaft sprocket
with the colored link plate (A) aligned with the mark
(B) on the crankshaft sprocket.
＊０４
B 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)

08/04/09 12:27:52 61TL2000_060_0017
8. Compress the auto-tensioner when replacing the 9. Install the auto-tensioner.

cam chain. Remove the pin (P/N 14511-PNA-003) ＊０８
(A) from the auto-tensioner that was installed
during removal. Turn the plate (B)
counterclockwise, to release the lock, then press
the rod (C), and set the first cam (D) to the edge of
the rack (E). Insert the 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) diameter
pin or lock pin into the holes (F).
NOTE: If the chain tensioner is not set up as

described, the tensioner will become damaged.
＊０７
D E C
6 x 1.0 mm
B 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
10. Install cam chain guide B.

＊０９
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
F
A
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:27:52 61TL2000_060_0018
Cylinder Head

11. Remove the pin or lock pin (P/N 14511-PNA-003) 16. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
from the auto-tensioner. 08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to the engine block
＊１０ mating surface of the chain case and to the inside
edge of the bolt holes. Install the component within
5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
• Apply liquid gasket about 3 mm (0.12 in.)
diameter bead along the broken line (A).
• If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
• If too much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
＊１２
B B
12. Remove the camshaft lock pin set.

＊１１
C
C
A
11 mm
3 mm (0.43 in.)
(0.12 in.)
3 mm
(0.12 in.)
07AAB-RWCA120
A B, C
13. Check the chain case oil seal for damage. If the oil 17. Apply liquid gasket to the engine block upper
seal is damaged, replace the chain case oil seal surface contact areas (B) and the lower block upper
(see page 6-23). surface contact areas (C) on the chain case.
14. Remove the old liquid gasket from the chain case NOTE: Apply about 11 mm (0.43 in.) diameter and
mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes. about 3 mm (0.12 in.) thickness of liquid gasket to
the areas (B) and (C).
15. Clean and dry the chain case mating surfaces.

08/04/09 12:27:53 61TL2000_060_0019
18. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 19. Install the spacer (A), then install the new O-ring (B)
08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to the oil pan mating on the chain case. Set the edge of the chain case (C)
surface of the oil pump. Install the component to the edge of the oil pan (D), then install the chain
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket. case on the engine block (E). Wipe off the excess
liquid gasket on the oil pan and chain case mating
NOTE: area.
diameter bead along the broken line (A). NOTE:
• If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the • When installing the chain case, do not slide the
component must be installed within 4 minutes. bottom surface onto the oil pan mounting surface.
• If too much time has passed after applying the • Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and with oil.
residue, then reapply new liquid gasket. • Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
＊１３ installing the chain case.
＊１４
A
A
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm B 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft) (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
＊１５
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:27:53 61TL2000_060_0020
Cylinder Head

20. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten 23. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
the side engine mount bracket mounting bolts.
＊１６ 24. Install the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see page
11-305).
10 x 1.25 mm 25. Connect the VTC oil control solenoid valve

44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) connector (A).
＊１８
21. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), and

tighten the new bolts (B), then tighten the bolt (C).
＊１７
6 x 1.0 mm B
9.8 N·m 12 x 1.25 mm
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 54 N·m 26. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-26).
Replace.
D 29. Install the front wheels.
30. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP

pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
A
C
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
22. Install the ground cable (D).

08/04/09 12:28:16 61TL2000_060_0021
Auto-tensioner Removal and Installation

Removal 3. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the auto-
tensioner (B), then insert a 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
1. Remove the chain case cover. diameter pin or lock pin (P/N 14511-PNA-003) (C)
＊０１ into the holes. Turn the crankshaft clockwise to
secure the pin.
＊０３
C
B
4. Remove the auto-tensioner.

2. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise to compress ＊０４
the auto-tensioner.
＊０２
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６７４３５９５２５ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:16 61TL2000_060_0022
Cylinder Head
Auto-tensioner Removal and Installation (cont’d)

Installation 5. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to the chain case
1. Install the auto-tensioner. mating surface of the chain case cover and to the
＊０５ inside edge of the bolt holes. Install the component
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
＊０７
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
2. Remove the pin or lock pin (P/N 14511-PNA-003)

from the auto-tensioner.
＊０６
A
3 mm
(0.12 in.)
6. Install the chain case cover.
NOTE:
• Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
with oil.
• Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
3. Remove the old liquid gasket from the chain case installing the chain case cover.
cover mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes. ＊０８
4. Clean and dry the chain case cover mating surfaces.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)

08/04/09 12:28:17 61TL2000_060_0023
Chain Case Oil Seal Installation Cam Chain Inspection

Special Tools Required Special Tools Required
• Driver handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 Cam chain inspection gauge 07AAJ-RWCA100
• Bearing driver attachment, 52 x 55 mm
07746-0010400 1. Remove the front wheels.
1. Use the handle driver and attachment to drive a 2. Remove the splash shield (see step 21 on page 5-4).
new oil seal squarely into the chain case to the
specified installed height. 3. Remove the four spark plugs.
＊０１
5. Rotate the crankshaft pulley two turns clockwise.

07749-0010000
6. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The
punch mark (A) on the variable valve timing control
＊０１
B A
07746-0010400
2. Measure the distance between the chain case

surface and the oil seal.
Oil Seal Installed Height:

32.4−33.1 mm (1.28−1.30 in.)
＊０２
C
32.4−33.1 mm
(1.28−1.30 in.)
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６７４３５９５２８ＫＣＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６７４３０００００ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:17 61TL2000_060_0024
Cylinder Head
Cam Chain Inspection (cont’d)

7. Measure the clearance between the cam chain and 12. Measure the oil pump chain auto-tensioner rod
the tensioner arm with the cam chain inspection length.
gauge.
Oil Pump Chain Auto-Tensioner Rod Length
• If the clearance is OK, go to step 18. Service Limit: 13 mm (0.5 in.)
• If the clearance is more than the service limit, go ＊０３
to step 8.
Chain-to-Arm Clearance
Service Limit:
MIL on with P0341:4.3 mm (0.17 in.)
Without MIL: 5.5 mm (0.22 in.)
＊０２
07AAJ-RWCA100
13. If the length is over the service limit, replace the oil
pump chain (see page 8-24). When replacing, check
the teeth on the crankshaft sprocket and oil pump
8. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11). sprocket for wear and damage. If any of them are
worn or damaged, replace if necessary.
9. Support the engine with a jack and a wood block
under the engine block. 14. Check the oil passage on the oil pump chain auto-
tensioner for clogs. If the auto-tensioner is clogged,
NOTE: Do not hit the oil pump and the baffle plate replace it.
when placing the jack on the edge of the engine
block. 15. Install the new cam chain (see page 6-15).
10. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13), and check 16. Remove the jack and a wood block.
the teeth on the crankshaft sprocket, the VTC
actuator, and the exhaust camshaft sprocket for 17. Install the oil pan (see page 7-31).
wear and damage. If any of them are worn or
damaged, replace if necessary. 18. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-26).
11. Check the oil passage on the auto-tensioner for 19. Install the four spark plugs.
clogs. If the auto-tensioner is clogged, replace it.

08/04/09 12:28:17 61TL2000_060_0025
Cylinder Head Cover Removal

1. Remove the engine cover. 5. Remove the cylinder head cover.
＊０１＊０３
2. Remove the dipstick (A), the breather hose (B).

＊０２
A
B
C
3. Remove the two bolts (C) securing the evaporative

emission (EVAP) canister purge valve bracket.
4. Remove the four ignition coils (see page 4-18).
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６０００１７８１１ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:18 61TL2000_060_0026
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Installation

1. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the 5. Set the spark plug seals (A) on the spark plug tubes.
groove. Place the cylinder head cover (B) on the cylinder
head, then slide the cover slightly back and forth to
2. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of seat the head cover gasket.
the cylinder head cover (B). ＊０３
C
＊０１
A
A B
3. Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry.

6. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer
4. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, that is damaged or deteriorated.
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, on the chain case and
the No. 5 rocker shaft holder mating areas. Install 7. Tighten the bolts in three steps. In the final step
the component within 5 minutes of applying the tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
liquid gasket. 8.8 lbf·ft).
NOTE: NOTE:
• If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the • Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
component must be installed within 4 minutes. with oil.
• If too much time has passed after applying the • Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and installing the head cover.
residue, then reapply new liquid gasket. ＊０４
＊０２
Apply liquid gasket Apply liquid gasket

to these points. to these points.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６０００１７８１１ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:18 61TL2000_060_0027
Cylinder Head Removal

8. Install the four ignition coils (see page 4-18). NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
9. Install the two bolts (A) securing the evaporative surfaces.
emission (EVAP) canister purge valve bracket. • To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors
＊０５ carefully while holding the connector portion.
C • To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
engine coolant temperature drops below 100 °F
(38 °C) before loosening the cylinder head bolts.
• Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
2. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-339).
3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
B 4. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-28).
A 5. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
6. Remove the catalytic converter (see page 11-373).
10. Install the breather hose (B) and the dipstick (C).
7. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
11. Install the engine cover. hose (A).
＊０６＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm A
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６００００００００ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:19 61TL2000_060_0028
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont’d)

8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then 10. Remove the four bolts securing the EVAP canister
disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-346). purge valve bracket.
＊０２＊０４
A
9. Disconnect the four fuel injector connectors (A), the

engine mount control solenoid connector (B), and
remove the ground cables (C).
＊０３ 11. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A), the heater
A
hoses (B), and the water bypass hose (C).
＊０５
B
C B

08/04/09 12:28:19 61TL2000_060_0029
12. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the connecting 15. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13).
pipe.
＊０６ 16. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-33).
B
17. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent
warpage, loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a
time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are
loosened.
＊０７
A
13. Remove the water bypass hose (B).
14. Remove the following engine wire harness

connectors and wire harness clamps from the 18. Remove the cylinder head.
cylinder head:
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1

connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor A (Intake)
connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B (Exhaust)
connector
• Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector
• Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
• EVAP canister purge valve connector
• Variable valve timing control (VTC) oil control
solenoid valve connector
• Engine oil pressure switch connector

08/04/09 12:28:20 61TL2000_060_0030
Cylinder Head
CMP Pulse Plate A Replacement CMP Pulse Plate B Replacement

1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-25). 1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-25).
2. Remove camshaft position (CMP) sensor A 2. Remove camshaft position (CMP) sensor B
(see page 11-306). (see page 11-228).
3. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then 3. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then
loosen the bolt. loosen the bolt.
＊０１＊０３
4. Remove CMP pulse plate A. 4. Remove CMP pulse plate B.

＊０２＊０４
14 x 1.0 mm 14 x 1.0 mm
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
Apply new engine oil to Apply new engine oil to
the bolt threads. the bolt threads.
5. Install CMP pulse plate A in the reverse order of 5. Install CMP pulse plate B in the reverse order of
removal. removal.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６１６７１６０９１ＫＢＡＴ１０ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６１６７１６０９１ＫＢＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:28:20 61TL2000_060_0031
VTC Actuator, Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Replacement

1. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13). 1. Install the VTC actuator and the exhaust camshaft
sprocket.
2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then
loosen the variable valve timing control (VTC) NOTE: Install the VTC actuator while in the
actuator mounting bolt and the exhaust camshaft unlocked position.
sprocket mounting bolt.
＊０１ 2. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the VTC
actuator mounting bolt and the exhaust camshaft
mounting bolt, then install them.
3. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then

tighten the bolts.
Specified Torque
VTC Actuator Mounting Bolt:
12 x 1.25 mm
113 N·m (11.5 kgf·m, 83 lbf·ft)
Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Mounting Bolt:
10 x 1.25 mm
72 N·m (7.3 kgf·m, 53 lbf·ft)
＊０２
3. If the VTC actuator will be reused, do these steps.
–1 Remove the intake camshaft, and seal the

advance holes and retard holes in the No. 1
camshaft journal with tape (see step 6 on page
6-8).
–2 Punch a hole in the tape over one of the
advance holes (see step 7 on page 6-8).
–3 Apply air to the advance hole to release the
lock (see step 8 on page 6-9).
–4 Remove the tape and adhesive residue from
the camshaft journal.
4. Remove the VTC actuator and the exhaust 4. Hold the camshaft, and turn the VTC actuator
camshaft sprocket. clockwise until you hear it click. Make sure to lock
the VTC actuator by turning it.
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０４６３３５１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:20 61TL2000_060_0032
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage

1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-27).
2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-36).
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure

along the edges, and three ways across the center.
• If warpage is less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)

cylinder head resurfacing is not required.
• If warpage is between 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and
0.2 mm (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
• The maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
based on a height of 104 mm (4.09 in.).
Cylinder Head Height

Standard (New): 103.95−104.05 mm
(4.093−4.096 in.)
＊０１
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
＊０２

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６０００１７８０１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:21 61TL2000_060_0033
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal

1. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13). 4. Remove cam chain guide B, the camshaft holders,
and the camshafts.
2. Loosen the rocker arm adjusting screws (A).
＊０１ 5. Insert the bolts (A) into the rocker shaft holder, then
A
remove the rocker arm assembly (B).
＊０３
A
A
3. Remove the camshaft holder bolts. To prevent

damaging the camshafts, loosen the bolts, in
sequence, two turns at a time.
NOTE: Bolt is not on all engines.

＊０２
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６６６３０００００ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:21 61TL2000_060_0034
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly

NOTE:
• Identify each part as it is removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position.
• Inspect the rocker arm shaft and rocker arms (see page 6-35).
• If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in their original location.
• When removing, or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep
the holders and rocker arms on the shaft.
• Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact points.
• Bundle the intake rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set.
• When replacing the intake rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from the new intake rocker arm
assembly.
＊０１
EXHAUST ROCKER
SHAFT
EXHAUST ROCKER ARM

ASSEMBLY
No. 1 No. 5
ROCKER ROCKER
SHAFT HOLDER SHAFT HOLDER
RUBBER BAND
No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 INTAKE ROCKER

ROCKER SHAFT ROCKER SHAFT ROCKER SHAFT ARM ASSEMBLY
HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６６６３５１５１１ＭＦＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:22 61TL2000_060_0035
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection

1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-33). 5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-34). Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
Standard (New):
3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker Intake: 0.018−0.059 mm
location. (0.0007−0.0023 in.)
＊０１ Exhaust: 0.018−0.056 mm
(0.0007−0.0022 in.)
＊０３
4. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.

＊０２ 6. Repeat for all rocker arms and both shafts. If the
clearance is beyond the service limit, replace the
rocker shaft and all out of service limit rocker arms.
If any VTEC rocker arm needs replacement, replace
A the rocker arms (primary, mid, and secondary), as a
set.
7. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push on each

piston manually. If it does not move smoothly,
replace the rocker arm set.
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the rocker arm

pistons when reassembling.
＊０４
8. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-45).
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６６６３５１５１１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:22 61TL2000_060_0036
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection
NOTE: Do not rotate the camshaft during inspection. 3. Seat the camshaft by pushing it away from the
camshaft pulley end of the cylinder head.
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-33).
4. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
2. Put the rocker shaft holders, camshaft, and camshaft, then push the camshaft back and forth,
camshaft holders on the cylinder head, then tighten and read the end play. If the end play is beyond the
the bolts, in sequence, to the specified torque. service limit, replace the cylinder head and recheck.
If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the
NOTE: If the engine does not have bolt , skip it camshaft.
and continue the torque sequence.
Camshaft End Play
Specified Torque Standard (New): 0.05−0.20 mm
8 x 1.25 mm (0.002−0.008 in.)
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) Service Limit: 0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
6 x 1.0 mm ＊０２
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm Bolts: , ,
＊０１

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６１６７０００００ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:22 61TL2000_060_0037
5. Loosen the camshaft holder bolts two turns at a 10. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported
time, in a crisscross pattern. Then remove the on V-blocks.
camshaft holders from the cylinder head.
• If the total runout of the camshaft is within the
6. Lift the camshafts out of the cylinder head, wipe service limit, replace the cylinder head.
them clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the • If the total runout is beyond the service limit,
camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or replace the camshaft and recheck the camshaft-
excessively worn. to-holder oil clearance. If the oil clearance is still
beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder
7. Clean the camshaft journal surfaces in the cylinder head.
head, then set the camshafts back in place. Place a
plastigage strip across each journal. Camshaft Total Runout
8. Install the camshaft holders, then tighten the bolts Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
to the specified torque as shown in step 2. ＊０４
9. Remove the camshaft holders. Measure the widest

portion of plastigage on each journal.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within

limits, go to step 11.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit, and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head. 11. Measure cam lobe height.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit, and the camshaft has not been Cam Lobe Height Standard (New):
replaced, go to step 10. INTAKE EXHAUST
PRI 33.744 mm 34.291 mm
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance (1.3285 in.) (1.3500 in.)
Standard (New): MID 35.456 mm
No. 1 Journal: 0.030−0.069 mm (1.3959 in.)
(0.001−0.003 in.) SEC 33.744 mm
No. 2, 3, 4, 5 Journals: 0.060−0.099 mm (1.3285 in.)
(0.002−0.004 in.) PRI: Primary MID: Mid SEC: Secondary
Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) C/C: Cam Chain
＊０３＊０５
INTAKE
PRI MID SEC
C/C

08/04/09 12:28:23 61TL2000_060_0038
Cylinder Head
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal

Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve guide seal remover.
Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A ＊０３
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are

removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
2. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic

mallet (B), lightly tap the spring retainer to loosen
the valve cotters.
＊０１
B
6. Remove the valve seal.

＊０４
3. Install the valve spring compressor and the

attachment. Compress the spring, and remove the
valve cotters.
＊０２
07757-PJ1010A
4. Remove the valve spring compressor and the

attachment, then remove the spring retainer and
the valve spring.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０２０００００ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:23 61TL2000_060_0039
Valve Inspection Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

Inspection
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-38).
2. Measure the valve in these areas. 1. Remove the valves (see page 6-38).
Intake Valve Dimensions 2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with
A Standard (New): 35.85−36.15 mm a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide,
(1.411−1.423 in.) measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
B Standard (New): 108.5−109.1 mm Take the measurements in three places along the
(4.272−4.295 in.) valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
C Standard (New): 5.475−5.485 mm The difference between the largest guide
(0.2156−0.2159 in.) measurement and the smallest stem measurement
C Service Limit: 5.445 mm (0.214 in.) should not exceed the service limit.
Exhaust Valve Dimensions Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

A Standard (New): 30.85−31.15 mm Standard (New): 0.030−0.055 mm
(1.215−1.226 in.) (0.0012−0.0022 in.)
B Standard (New): 108.4−109.0 mm Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
(4.268−4.291 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.450−5.460 mm Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
(0.2146−0.2150 in.) Standard (New): 0.055−0.080 mm
C Service Limit: 5.42 mm (0.213 in.) (0.0022−0.0031 in.)
＊０１ Service Limit: 0.11 mm (0.004 in.)
＊０１
B
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０２０００００ＭＡＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０２６３００１ＭＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:28:24 61TL2000_060_0040
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement

Special Tools Required 5. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and
• Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100 an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm
• Valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100 (0.1 in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
1. Inspect the valve stem-to-guide clearance easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line with the
(see page 6-39). valve guide to prevent damaging the driver.
2. As illustrated, use a commercially available air- 6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward
impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the the camshaft side of the head.
diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the ＊０３
same procedure can be done using the special tool
and a conventional hammer.
＊０１
A
5.3 mm
(0.21 in.)
87 mm 57 mm
(3.43 in.) (2.24 in.) 10.8 mm
(0.42 in.)
3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill

them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for
about an hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder ＊０４

head to 300 °F (150 °C). Monitor the temperature
with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300 °F (150 °C); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
＊０２
7. If a valve guide won’t move, drill it out with a 8 mm

(5/16 in.) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in
extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder
head if the guide breaks.
8. Take out the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a

time, as you need them.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０２６３００１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:36 61TL2000_060_0041
9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of 10. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide with
the new valve guide. Install the guide from the cutting oil.
camshaft side of the head; use the 5.5 mm valve
guide driver to drive the guide in to the specified 11. Rotate the reamer clockwise to the full length of the
installed height (A) of the guide (B). If you have all valve guide bore.
16 guides to do, you may have to reheat the head. ＊０６
07HAH-PJ7A100
Valve Guide Installed Height
Intake: 15.2−16.2 mm (0.598−0.638 in.)
Exhaust: 15.5−16.5 mm (0.610−0.650 in.)
＊０５
07742-0010100
12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while

removing it from the bore.
13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water

to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearances with a valve (see page 6-39).

B
Verify that a valve slides into the intake and
A exhaust valve guides without sticking.
15. Inspect the valve seating. If necessary renew the

valve seat using a valve seat cutter (see page 6-42).

08/04/09 12:28:36 61TL2000_060_0042
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning

1. Inspect the valve stem-to-guide clearance 5. Make one more very light pass with the 45 ° cutter
(see page 6-39). If the valve guides are worn, to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
replace them (see page 6-40) before cutting the cutters.
valve seats.
Valve Seat Width
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a Standard (New): 1.25−1.55 mm (0.049−0.061 in.)
valve seat cutter. Service Limit: 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
＊０１
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve
seating. Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
seat several times.
＊０３
B
3. Carefully cut a 45 ° seat, removing only enough

material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
4. Bevel the upper and lower edges at the angles

shown in the illustration. 7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
Check the width of the seat and adjust accordingly. the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.
＊０２
INTAKE: 35 °
EXHAUST: 30 ° • If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you
must make a second cut with the 67.5 ° cutter to
45 ° move it down, then one more cut with the 45 °
67.5 ° cutter to restore seat width.
• If it is too low (close to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 35 ° cutter (intake
side) or the 30 ° cutter (exhaust side) to move it
up, then make one more cut with the 45 ° cutter
to restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with

the 45 ° cutter.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０２６３０４１ＬＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:37 61TL2000_060_0043
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head,

and measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height

Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height

＊０４
9. If valve stem installed height is beyond the service

limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still
beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder head;
the valve seat in the head is too deep.

08/04/09 12:28:37 61TL2000_060_0044
Cylinder Head
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation

Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve spring and the spring retainer.
• Stem seal driver 07PAD-0010000 Place the end of the valve spring with the closely
• Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A wound coils toward the cylinder head.
1. Coat the valve stems with new engine oil. Install 6. Install the valve spring compressor and the
the valves in the valve guides. attachment. Compress the spring, and install the
valve cotters.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly. ＊０２
07757-PJ1010A
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the stem seal
driver (B).
NOTE: The exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring

(D), and the intake valve seal (E) has a white spring
(F). They are not interchangeable.
＊０１
F D
7. Remove the valve spring compressor and the

attachment.
E C
8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three
B times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
07PAD-0010000 seating of the valve and the valve cotters. Tap the
NOTE: Use the 5.5 mm side.
valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend
the stem.
＊０３
A A

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０２０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:38 61TL2000_060_0045
Rocker Arm Assembly Installation

1. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page 6. Make sure the punch marks on the variable valve
6-33). timing control (VTC) actuator and the exhaust
camshaft sprocket are facing up, then set the
2. Clean and dry the No. 5 rocker shaft holder mating camshafts (A) in the holder.
surface. ＊０３
3. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,

B
08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to the cylinder head
mating surface of the No. 5 rocker shaft holder and C
to the inside edge of the bolt holes. Install the A
component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
gasket.
NOTE:
＊０１
7. Set the camshaft holders (B) and cam chain guide B
(C) in place.
8. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
NOTE: If the engine does not have bolt , skip it

A
and continue the torque sequence.
3 mm
(0.12 in.)
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm
A 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
4. Insert the bolts (A) into the rocker shaft holder, then 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
install the rocker arm assembly (B) on the cylinder 6 x 1.0 mm Bolts: , ,
head. ＊０４
＊０２ A
A
9. Install the cam chain (see page 6-15), then adjust

the valve clearance (see page 6-9).
5. Remove the bolts from the rocker shaft holder.
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６６６３０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:39 61TL2000_060_0046
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation

1. Install a new coolant separator (A) in the engine 4. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align
block whenever the engine block is replaced. the TDC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with
＊０１ the pointer (B) on the engine block.
＊０３
B
A
A
5. Install the cylinder head on the engine block.
2. Clean the cylinder head and engine block surface. 6. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at
point A and point B.
3. Install the new cylinder head gasket (A) and dowel ＊０４
50 mm (2.0 in.)
pins (B) on the engine block. Always use a new
cylinder head gasket. 45 mm (1.8 in.)
＊０２
A
B A
7. If either diameter is less than 10.6 mm (0.42 in.),

replace the cylinder head bolt.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６００００００００ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:28:39 61TL2000_060_0047
8. Apply new engine oil to the threads and under the 11. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-45).
bolt heads of all cylinder head bolts.
9. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence to
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft). Use a beam-type 13. Connect the following engine wire harness
torque wrench. When using a preset click-type connectors, and install the wire harness clamps to
torque wrench, be sure to tighten slowly and do not the cylinder head:
overtighten. If a bolt makes any noise while you are
torquing it, loosen the bolt and retighten it from the • Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1
first step. connector
＊０５ • Camshaft position (CMP) sensor A (Intake)
connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B (Exhaust)
connector
• Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector
• Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
• Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge
valve connector
• Variable valve timing control (VTC) oil control
solenoid valve connector
• Engine oil pressure switch connector
14. Install the two bolts (A) securing the connecting

pipe.
＊０７
A
10. After torquing, tighten all cylinder head bolts in two 6 x 1.0 mm
steps (90 ° per step). If you are using a new cylinder 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
head bolt, tighten the bolt an extra 90 °.
B
NOTE: Remove the cylinder head bolt if you
tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
back to step 6 of the procedure. Do not loosen it
back to the specified angle.
＊０６
FIRST STEP
A
8 x 1.25 mm
SECOND STEP 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
THIRD STEP
(New bolt)
15. Install the water bypass hose (B).
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:28:40 61TL2000_060_0048
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont’d)

16. Install the upper radiator hose (A), the heater hoses 18. Connect the four fuel injector connectors (A), the
(B), and the water bypass hose (C). engine mount control solenoid connector (B), and
＊０８ install the ground cables (C).
＊１０
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
C A
17. Install the four bolts securing the EVAP canister

purge valve bracket. C
＊０９
19. Connect the fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11-349),
then install the quick-connect fitting cover (B).
＊１１
B
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)

08/04/09 12:28:40 61TL2000_060_0049
Sealing Bolt Installation

20. Install the EVAP canister hose (A). NOTE: When installing the sealing bolt, always use a
＊１２ new washer.
A
＊０１
22 x 1.5 mm
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft)
21. Install the catalytic converter (see page 11-373).
22. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-5).
25. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and

connectors are installed correctly.
26. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to

ON (II) (do not operate the starter ) so the fuel pump
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel
line. Repeat this operation three times, then check
for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.

open (see step 6 on page 10-6).
28. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-323).
29. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-17).
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６０００１７８４１ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:46 61TL2000_070_0001
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special Tools ................................................................. 7-2
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play
Inspection .................................................................. 7-5
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-6
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-8
Oil Pan Removal ........................................................... 7-11
Crankshaft and Piston Removal .................................. 7-13
Crankshaft Inspection .................................................. 7-15
Block and Piston Inspection ........................................ 7-16
Cylinder Bore Honing ................................................... 7-18
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement ......... 7-19
Piston Ring Replacement ............................................. 7-22
Piston Installation ......................................................... 7-24
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection .................................. 7-25
Crankshaft Installation ................................................. 7-26
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement ..................................... 7-30
Oil Pan Installation ....................................................... 7-31
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal
Installation - In Car .................................................... 7-34
Sealing Bolt Installation ............................................... 7-35
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０７０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:47 61TL2000_070_0002
Engine Block
Special Tools
07ZAD-PNAA100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 96 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 1
０１
０１
０１
7-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０７０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:49 61TL2000_070_0003
＊０１
BAFFLE PLATE
LOWER BLOCK
DOWEL PINS
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL,

TRANSMISSION END
Installation, step 22 on page 7-29
Installation - in Car, page 7-34
MAIN BEARINGS
Oil Clearance, page 7-6
Selection, page 7-7 CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) PULSE PLATE
CRANKSHAFT THRUST WASHERS

End Play, page 7-5
Runout, page 7-15
Out-of-Round, page 7-15
Removal, page 7-13
ENGINE BLOCK
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 7-3
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:53 61TL2000_070_0004
Engine Block
＊０２
PISTON RINGS
PISTON PIN
Removal, page 7-19
PISTON Inspection, page 7-20
Removal, page 7-13 Installation, page 7-21
Measurement, page 7-16
CONNECTING ROD
End Play, page 7-5
Small End Measurement,
page 7-20
ENGINE BLOCK
Cylinder Bore Inspection, page 7-16
Warpage Inspection, page 7-16
Cylinder Bore Honing, page 7-18
Ridge Removal, step 19 on page 7-14
CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS

Oil Clearance, page 7-8
Selection, page 7-9
CONNECTING ROD
BEARING CAP
CONNECTING ROD BOLTS

7-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:44:53 61TL2000_070_0005
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection

1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-16). 5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial
indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 10 on page 7-13). crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
toward the indicator; the dial reading should not
3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler exceed the service limit.
gauge between the connecting rod and the
crankshaft. Crankshaft End Play
Connecting Rod End Play Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Standard (New): 0.15−0.35 mm (0.006−0.014 in.) ＊０２
＊０１
4. If the connecting rod end play is beyond the service 6. If the end play is beyond the service limit, replace
limit, install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it the thrust washers and recheck, if it is still beyond
is still beyond the service limit; replace the the service limit, replace the crankshaft (see page
crankshaft (see page 7-13). 7-13).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 7-5
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３１６２０００００ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:54 61TL2000_070_0006
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement

Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. Remove the lower block and bearings again, and
measure the widest part of the plastigage.
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance,
remove the lower block and bearing halves Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance
(see page 7-13). No. 1, 2, 4, 5 Journals:
Standard (New): 0.017 − 0.041 mm
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a (0.0007 − 0.0016 in.)
clean shop towel. Service Limit: 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
No. 3 Journal:
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main Standard (New): 0.025 − 0.049 mm
journal. (0.0010 − 0.0019 in.)
4. Reinstall the bearings and lower block, then torque ＊０２
the bolts to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft).
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during

inspection.
＊０１
7. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,

remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half
of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with
the appropriate color code(s), and recheck the
clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings
or the caps to adjust clearance.
8. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still

incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
5. Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 48 °. color listed above or below the current one), and
check again. If the proper clearance cannot be
obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over.
7-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３１６６１７５０２ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:54 61TL2000_070_0007
Main Bearing Selection Main Journal Code Location
Crankshaft Bore Code Location 2. The main journal codes are stamped on the
crankshaft in either location.
1. Numbers, letters, or bars have been stamped on ＊０４
the end of the block as a code for the size of each of
the five main journal bores. Write down the crank
bore codes.
If you can’t read the codes because of accumulated
dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush
or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or
detergent.
＊０３
＊０５
No. 1 JOURNAL
No. 1 JOURNAL No. 5 JOURNAL

(PULLEY END) (TRANSMISSION END)
No. 5 JOURNAL
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 7-7

08/04/09 12:44:55 61TL2000_070_0008
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Connecting Rod Bearing

Replacement (cont’d) Replacement
3. Use the crank bore codes and crank journal codes Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection
to select the appropriate replacement bearings
from the following table. 1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-16).
NOTE: 2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 10 on page 7-13).

• The color code is on the edge of the bearing.
• When using bearing halves of different colors, it 3. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half.
does not matter which color is used in the top or
bottom. 4. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half
＊０６ with a clean shop towel.
Larger crank bore
Crank
bore 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5. Place plastigage across the rod journal.
Main code A or I B or II C or III D or IIII
journal
code Smaller bearing (Thicker) 6. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the
bolts to 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft) ＋ 90 °
Red Red/ Pink Yellow
1 Pink
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during
Red/ Yellow/ inspection.
2 Pink Yellow Green
Pink
Pink Yellow Yellow/ 7. Remove the rod cap and bearing half, and measure
3 Green Green the widest part of the plastigage.
Yellow/
4 Yellow Green Green Brown Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance
Yellow/ Green Brown/
5 Green
Brown Black (0.0013−0.0026 in.)
6 Green Brown Brown/ Black ＊０１
Black
Smaller Smaller
main bearing
journal (Thicker)
7-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３１６２１７２０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:55 61TL2000_070_0009
8. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, Rod Bearing Selection
remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new,
complete bearing with the appropriate color 1. Inspect each connecting rod for cracks and heat
code(s), and recheck the clearance. Do not file, damage.
shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust
clearance. Connecting Rod Big End Bore Code Locations
9. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still 2. Each rod has a tolerance range from 0 to 0.024 mm
incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the (0.0009 in.), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.) increments,
color listed above or below the current one), and depending on the size of its big end bore. It’s then
check clearance again. If the proper clearance stamped with a number or bar (1, 2, 3, or 4/l, ll, lll,
cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or llll) indicating the range. You may find any
or smaller bearing, replace the crankshaft and start combination of numbers and bars in any engine.
over. (Half the number or bar is stamped on the bearing
cap, the other half is on the rod.)
If you can’t read the code because of an
accumulation of oil and varnish, do not scrub it
with a wire brush or scraper. Clean it only with
solvent or detergent.
Normal Bore Size: 51.0 mm (2.01 in.)

＊０２
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 7-9

08/04/09 12:44:56 61TL2000_070_0010
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement (cont’d)

Connecting Rod Journal Code Location 4. Use the big end bore codes and rod journal codes
to select appropriate replacement bearings from
3. The connecting rod journal codes are stamped on the following table.
the crankshaft in either location.
＊０３ NOTE:
• The color code is on the edge of the bearing.
• When using bearing halves of different colors, it
does not matter which color is used in the top or
bottom.
＊０５
Big end Larger big end bore
bore
code
1 or I 2 or II 3 or III 4 or IIII
Rod
journal
code Smaller bearing (Thicker)
A Red Pink Pink/ Yellow

Yellow
＊０４
B Pink Yellow Yellow/ Green
Green
C Yellow Green Green/ Brown

Brown
D Brown/
Green Brown Black Black
Smaller Smaller
rod bearing
journal (Thicker)
No. 4 JOURNAL No. 1 JOURNAL

08/04/09 12:44:56 61TL2000_070_0011
Oil Pan Removal

1. If the engine is already out of the vehicle, go to 10. Remove the transmission lower mount.
step 13.
M/T model
2. Remove the vacuum hose (A), front engine mount ＊０２
stop (B), and vacuum hose bracket (C), then remove Replace.
the front engine mount bolt (D).
＊０１
C Replace.
B
A
A/T model
＊０３
D Replace.
Replace.
4. Remove the left front wheel.
6. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-10).
7. Remove the left side damper fork (see step 4 on

page 18-25).
8. Separate the left side knuckle from the lower arm

9. Remove the left side driveshaft (see step 9 on page

16-5). Coat all precision-finished surface with new
engine oil. Tie a plastic bag over the driveshaft end.
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３０００４３４０１ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:44:57 61TL2000_070_0012
Engine Block
Oil Pan Removal (cont’d)

11. A/T model: Remove the shift cable cover. 13. Remove the clutch cover/torque converter cover (A)
＊０４ and transmission mounting bolts (B).
＊０６
B
12. Use a transmission jack to lift the transmission

30−40 mm (1.2−1.6 in.).
＊０５
14. Remove the bolts securing the oil pan.
15. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the oil pan

from the block in the places shown.
＊０７
16. Remove the oil pan.

08/04/09 12:44:58 61TL2000_070_0013
Crankshaft and Piston Removal

1. Remove the engine/transmission (see page 5-3). 10. Remove the baffle plate.
＊０２
2. Remove the transmission:

3. M/T model: Remove the pressure plate (see step 1

on page 12-18), clutch disc (see step 8 on page
12-19), and flywheel (see step 16 on page 12-21).
4. A/T model: Remove the drive plate (see page

14-280).
5. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor cover

(A), then disconnect the CKP sensor connector (B).
＊０１
11. Remove the 8 mm bolts.

＊０３
6. Remove the harness holder (C).
7. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).
8. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-16).
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３１６６０００００ＫＡＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:44:59 61TL2000_070_0014
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal (cont’d)

12. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To prevent warpage, 14. Remove the rod caps/bearings. Keep all the caps/
loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; bearings in order.
repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened.
＊０４ 15. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the engine. Be careful
not to damage the journals and the CKP pulse plate
(B).
＊０６
A
B
13. Remove the lower block and the bearings. Keep all
the bearings in order.
＊０５ 16. Remove the CKP pulse plate.
17. Remove the thrust washers (C).
18. Remove the upper bearing halves from the

connecting rods, and set them aside with their
respective caps.
19. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon

around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a
ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer’s
instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may
damage the pistons as they are pushed out.
＊０７

08/04/09 12:44:59 61TL2000_070_0015
Crankshaft Inspection
20. Use the wooden handle of a hammer (A) to drive Out-of-Round and Taper
out the piston/connecting rod assembly (B).
＊０８ 1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block
A
(see page 7-13).
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe

cleaners or a suitable brush.
3. Clean the keyway and threads.
4. Measure the out-of-round at the middle of each rod

and the main journal in two places. The difference
between measurements on each journal must not
be more than the service limit.
B
Journal Out-of-Round
21. Reinstall the lower block and the bearings on the Service Limit: 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
engine block in the proper order. ＊０１
22. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and the caps

after removing each piston/connecting rod
assembly.
23. Mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its

cylinder number to make sure they are reinstalled
in the original order.
NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod

does not indicate its position in the engine, it
indicates the rod bore size.
5. Measure the taper at the edges of each rod and the

main journal. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more
than the service limit.
Journal Taper
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３１６６０００００ＭＡＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:45:00 61TL2000_070_0016
Engine Block
Crankshaft Inspection (cont’d) Block and Piston Inspection

Straightness 1. Remove the crankshaft and the pistons (see page
7-13).
6. Place the engine block on a flat surface, crankshaft
side up. 2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks.
7. Clean and install the bearings on the No. 1 and 3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 13 mm
No. 5 journals of the engine block. (0.5 in.) from the bottom of the skirt. There are two
standard-size pistons (No Letter or A, and B). The
8. Lower the crankshaft into the engine block. letter is stamped on the top of the piston. Letters
are also stamped on the engine block as the
9. Measure the runout on all main journals. Rotate the cylinder bore sizes.
crankshaft two complete revolutions. The
difference between measurements on each journal Piston Skirt Diameter
must not be more than the service limit. Standard (New):
No Letter (or A): 86.980−86.990 mm
Crankshaft Total Runout (3.4244−3.4248 in.)
Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.0012 in.) max. B: 86.970−86.980 mm
Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.) (3.4240−3.4244 in.)
＊０２ Service Limit:
No Letter (or A): 86.930 mm (3.4224 in.)
B: 86.920 mm (3.4220 in.)
Oversize Piston Skirt Diameter

0.25: 87.230−87.240 mm (3.4342−3.4346 in.)
＊０１
Piston Skirt Diameter
13 mm
(0.5 in.)
＊０２

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３０００２４７５１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:01 61TL2000_070_0017
4. Measure the wear and taper in direction X and Y at 5. Scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed.
three levels inside each cylinder as shown. If the
measurements in any cylinder are beyond the 6. Check the top of the engine block for warpage.
Oversize Bore Service Limit, replace the engine Measure along the edges and across the center as
block. If the engine block is being rebored, refer to shown.
step 7 after reboring.
Engine Block Warpage
Cylinder Bore Size Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max.
Standard (New): Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
A or I: 87.010−87.020 mm ＊０４
(3.4256−3.4260 in.)
B or II: 87.000−87.010 mm
(3.4252−3.4256 in.)
Oversize Bore
0.25: 87.250−87.260 mm (3.4350−3.4354 in.)
Reboring Limit: 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) max.
Bore Taper
Limit (Difference between first
and third measurement): 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
＊０３
6 mm (0.2 in.)
＊０５
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
First Measurement
Second Measurement
Third Measurement
6 mm (0.2 in.)
No. 4 No. 1
X
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:45:01 61TL2000_070_0018
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection (cont’d) Cylinder Bore Honing

7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore Only a scored or scratched cylinder bore must be honed.
diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance
is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the 1. Measure the cylinder bores (see page 7-16).
piston and cylinder bore for excessive wear. If the engine block is to be reused, hone the
cylinders, and remeasure the bores.
Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance
Standard (New): 0.020−0.040 mm 2. Remove the oil jets (see page 8-14).
(0.0008−0.0016 in.)
Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) 3. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine
＊０６ (400 grit) stone in a 60 degree cross-hatch pattern
SERVICE LIMIT (A). Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
stone such as Sunnen, Ammco, or equivalent. Do
not use stones that are worn or broken.
＊０１
60 °
4. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the

engine block of all metal particles. Wash the
cylinder bores with hot soapy water, then dry and
oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use
solvent, it will only redistribute the grit on the
cylinder walls.
5. If scoring or scratches are still present in the

cylinder bores after honing the engine block to the
service limit, rebore the engine block. Some light
vertical scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is
not deep enough to catch your fingernail, and does
not run the full length of the bore.
6. Install the oil jets (see page 8-14).

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３０００２４７５１ＬＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:01 61TL2000_070_0019
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement

Disassembly 4. Heat the piston and the connecting rod assembly to
about 158 °F (70 °C), then remove the piston pin.
1. Remove the piston from the engine block (see page ＊０３
7-13).
2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings

(A), and turn them in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin
bores (B).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.

＊０１
3. Remove both snap rings. Start at the cutout in the

piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings carefully so
they do not go flying or get lost. Wear eye
protection.
＊０２
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３６０２０００００ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:02 61TL2000_070_0020
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont’d)

Inspection 3. Check the difference between the piston pin
diameter and the piston pin hole diameter in the
NOTE: Inspect the piston, the piston pin, and the piston.
connecting rod when they are at room temperature.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Standard (New): −0.005 to ＋0.002 mm
(−0.00020 to ＋0.00008 in.)
Piston Pin Diameter Service Limit: 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.)
Standard (New): 21.961−21.965 mm ＊０６
(0.8646−0.8648 in.)
＊０４
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance
＊０５ Standard (New): 0.005−0.015 mm
(0.0002−0.0006 in.)
＊０７

08/04/09 12:45:26 61TL2000_070_0021
Reassembly 4. Assemble the piston (A) and the connecting rod (B)
with the arrow (C) and the embossed mark (D) on
1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A). the same side. Install the piston pin (E).
＊０８＊１０
D
A
F
E
2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in
the connecting rod, and the piston pin with new
engine oil.
3. Heat the piston to about 158 °F (70 °C).

＊０９
5. Install the remaining snap ring (F).
6. Turn the snap rings in the ring grooves until the

end the gaps are positioned at the bottom of the
piston.

08/04/09 12:45:27 61TL2000_070_0022
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement

1. Remove the piston from the engine block (see page 4. Using a piston that has its rings removed, push a
7-13). new ring (A) into the cylinder bore 15−20 mm
(0.6−0.8 in.) from the bottom.
2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston ＊０２
rings (B).
＊０１
15−20 mm
A (0.6−0.8 in.)
A B
5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler

gauge:
3. Clean all ring grooves thoroughly with a squared- • If the gap is too small, check to see if you have
off broken ring or ring groove cleaner with a blade the proper rings for your engine.
to fit the piston grooves. • If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
The top and 2nd ring grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) diameter against the wear limits (see page 7-16).
wide. The oil ring groove is 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) wide. If the bore is beyond the service limit, the engine
File down a blade if necessary. block must be rebored.
Do not use a wire brush to clean the ring grooves,
or cut the ring grooves deeper with the cleaning Piston Ring End-Gap
tools.
Top Ring:
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the Standard (New): 0.20−0.35 mm
connecting rod, do not install the new rings yet. (0.008−0.014 in.)
Second Ring:
(0.020−0.026 in.)
Oil Ring (RIKEN):

(0.008−0.020 in.)
Oil Ring (NIPPON PISTON RING):

(0.008−0.028 in.)

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３６０２４５６１１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:27 61TL2000_070_0023
6. Install the top ring and the second ring as shown. 8. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
The top ring (A) has a 1R or 1N mark, and the ＊０４
second ring (B) has a 2RN or 2N mark. The About 90 °
OIL RING GAP SECOND RING GAP
manufacturing marks (C) must face upward. (UPPER)
＊０３
A About 45 °
TOP RING GAP and OIL RING GAP

SPACER RING GAP (LOWER)
PISTON PIN
9. After installing a new set of rings, measure the

A ring-to-groove clearances:
C C
Top Ring Clearance
(0.0024−0.0033 in.)
B
Second Ring Clearance
(0.0016−0.0026 in.)
＊０５
Piston Ring Dimensions

Top Ring (Standard):
A: 2.7 mm (0.11 in.)
B B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
Second Ring (Standard):
A: 3.4 mm (0.13 in.)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
A
7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they

do not bind.

08/04/09 12:45:28 61TL2000_070_0024
Engine Block
Piston Installation
If the Crankshaft is Already Installed 7. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with
plastigage (see page 7-8).
1. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for
each cylinder as its piston is installed. 8. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see page 7-25).
2. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the 9. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads, then install
ring compressor. Check that the bearing is securely the rod caps with bearings. Torque the bolts to
in place. 41 N·m (4.2 kgf·m, 30 lbf·ft).
3. Apply new engine oil to the piston, the inside of the 10. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 120 °.
ring compressor, and the cylinder bore, then attach
the ring compressor to the piston/connecting rod NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you
assembly. tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
4. Position the mark (A) to face the cam chain side of back to the specified angle.
the engine. ＊０３
＊０１
120 °
5. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in

using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
Push down on the ring compressor (B) to prevent
the rings from expanding before entering the
cylinder bore.
＊０２
A
B
6. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and

check the connecting rod-to-crank journal
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
7-24
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３６０２０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:28 61TL2000_070_0025
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection

If the Crankshaft is Not Installed 1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt
at point A and point B.
1. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the ＊０１
ring compressor, and check that the bearing is 35 mm (1.38 in.)
securely in place.
2. Apply new engine oil to the piston, the inside of the B A

ring compressor, and the cylinder bore, then attach
the ring compressor to the piston/connecting rod
assembly. 20 mm (0.79 in.)
3. Position the mark (A) to face the cam chain side of

the engine.
＊０４
2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point

A and point B.
Point A−Point B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter
Specification: 0−0.1 mm (0−0.004 in.)
4. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in
using the wooden handle of a hammer (A). 3. If the difference in diameter is out of specification,
Push down on the ring compressor (B) to prevent replace the connecting rod bolt.
the rings from expanding before entering the
cylinder bore.
＊０５
A
B
5. Position all pistons at top dead center (TDC).
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３１６２１７２０２ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:29 61TL2000_070_0026
Engine Block
Crankshaft Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and
• Driver handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 the connecting rods.
• Oil seal driver attachment 96 mm 07ZAD-PNAA100 5. Apply a coat of new engine oil to the main bearings
and the rod bearings.
1. M/T model: Install the crankshaft end bushing
when replacing the crankshaft. Using the handle 6. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) pulse plate (A).
driver and the attachment, drive in the crankshaft ＊０２
A
end bushing until the handle driver and the
attachment bottom against the crankshaft.
＊０１ B
07749-0010000
8 x 1.0 mm
22 N·m
Apply new engine
oil to the bolt
threads.
07746-0010700
7. Hold the crankshaft (B) so rod journal No. 2 and rod

2. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with journal No. 3 are straight up, and lower the
plastigage (see page 7-8). crankshaft into the engine block. Be careful not to
damage the journals and the CKP pulse plate.
3. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage
(see page 7-6).

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３１６６０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:29 61TL2000_070_0027
8. Apply new engine oil to the thrust washer surfaces. 13. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 41 N·m
Install the thrust washers (A) in the No. 4 journal of (4.2 kgf·m, 30 lbf·ft).
the engine block.
＊０３ 14. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 120 °.
B
NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you
tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
back to the specified angle.
＊０４
120 °
9. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see page 7-25).
10. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the

connecting rod bolts. 15. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the lower
block mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
11. Seat the rod journals into connecting rod No. 1 and
connecting rod No. 4. Line up the mark (B) on the 16. Clean and dry the lower block mating surfaces.
connecting rod and the cap, then install the caps
and bolts finger-tight.
12. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and seat the

journals into connecting rod No. 2 and connecting
rod No. 3. Line up the mark on the connecting rod
and the cap, then install the caps and bolts finger
tight.
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:45:30 61TL2000_070_0028
Engine Block
Crankshaft Installation (cont’d)

17. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 18. Put the lower block on the engine block.
08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to the engine block
mating surface of the lower block and to the inside 19. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the bearing
edge of the bolt holes. Install the component within cap bolts. Tighten the bearing cap bolts in
5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket. sequence, to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft).
＊０６
NOTE:
＊０５
20. Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 48 °.

＊０７
A 48 °
3 mm
(0.12 in.)

08/04/09 12:45:31 61TL2000_070_0029
21. Tighten the 8 mm bolts in sequence to 22 N·m 23. Measure the distance between the engine block (A)
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft). and the crankshaft oil seal (B).
＊０８
Crankshaft Oil Seal Installed Height:
0.2−1.2 mm (0.001−0.047 in.)
＊１０
0.2−1.2 mm
(0.001−0.047 in.)
22. Use the handle driver and the oil seal driver A
attachment to drive a new crankshaft oil seal
squarely into the engine block to the specified
installed height. 24. Install the baffle plate.
＊０９＊１１
07749-0010000 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
07ZAD-PNAA100
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:45:31 61TL2000_070_0030
Engine Block
Crankshaft Installation (cont’d) CKP Pulse Plate Replacement

25. Install the oil pump (see page 8-22). 1. Remove the crankshaft (see page 7-13).
26. Install the oil pan (see page 7-31). 2. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) pulse plate
(A).
27. Install the cylinder head (see page 6-46). ＊０１
A
28. M/T model: Install the flywheel (see step 16 on
page 12-21), clutch disc (see step 24 on page 12-22),
B
and pressure plate (see step 24 on page 12-22).
29. A/T model: Install the drive plate (see page 14-280).
8 x 1.0 mm
22 N·m
30. install the harness holder (A). (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
＊１２ Apply new engine
oil to the bolt
threads.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
3. Install the CKP pulse plate to the crankshaft (B).
4. Install the crankshaft (see page 7-26).

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft) B
31. Connect the CKP sensor connector (B), then install

the CKP sensor cover (C).
32. Install the transmission:

33. Install the engine/transmission (see page 5-11).
NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod

bearing is replaced, run the engine at idle speed
until it reaches normal operating temperature, then
continue to run it for about 15 minutes.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３１６６１７５１９ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:32 61TL2000_070_0031
Oil Pan Installation

1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil pan 5. Tighten the bolts in three steps. In the final step,
mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes. tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
8.8 lbf·ft). Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the
2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces. each side of crankshaft pulley and the flywheel/
drive plate.
08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to the engine block NOTE:
mating surface of the oil pan and to the inside edge • Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
of the bolt holes. Install the component within 5 with oil.
minutes of applying the liquid gasket. • Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the oil pan.
NOTE: ＊０２
＊０１
6. Install the clutch cover/torque converter cover (A)

and transmission mounting bolts (B).
＊０３
B
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
A
3 mm
(0.12 in.)
4. Install the oil pan.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３０００４３４０１ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:33 61TL2000_070_0032
Engine Block
Oil Pan Installation (cont’d)

7. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do steps 8 10. Install the lower transmission mount.
through 18.
M/T model
8. Lower the transmission jack from the transmission. ＊０５
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
9. A/T model: Install the shift cable cover. (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
＊０４ Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
12 N·m 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
A/T model
＊０６
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)

08/04/09 12:45:33 61TL2000_070_0033
11. Install a new set ring on the end of driveshaft, then

install the driveshaft. Make sure the ring ‘‘clicks’’
into place in the differential.
12. Install the left side damper fork (see step 4 on page
18-27).
13. Connect the lower arm to the left side knuckle (see
step 6 on page 18-21).
15. Install the left front wheel.
17. Tighten the front engine mount bolt (A), then install
the front engine mount stop (B), vacuum hose
bracket (C), and the vacuum hose (D).
＊０７
12 x 1.25 mm
78 N·m (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft)
Replace.
C
B
D
A
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Replace.
18. Refill the engine with engine oil (see step 5 on page
8-10).

08/04/09 12:45:33 61TL2000_070_0034
Engine Block
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car

Special Tools Required 6. Measure the distance between the engine block (A)
• Driver handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 and the crankshaft oil seal (B).
• Oil seal driver attachment 96 mm 07ZAD-PNAA100
Oil Seal Installed Height: 0.2−1.2 mm
1. Remove the transmission: (0.001−0.047 in.)
＊０２
• Manual transmission (see page 13-16) 0.2−1.2 mm
(0.001−0.047 in.)
2. M/T model: Remove the flywheel (see step 16 on

page 12-21).
3. A/T model: Remove the drive plate (see page

14-280).
4. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
5. Use the handle driver and the oil seal driver B

attachment to drive a new crankshaft oil seal
squarely into the engine block to the specified
installed height.
＊０１ A
07749-0010000
7. M/T model: Install the flywheel (see step 16 on

page 12-21).
8. A/T model: Install the drive plate (see page 14-280).
9. Install the transmission:

07ZAD-PNAA100

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３１６６１７５１３ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:45:33 61TL2000_070_0035
Sealing Bolt Installation

NOTE: When installing the sealing bolt (A), always use
a new washer.
＊０１
A
28 x 1.5 mm
98.1 N·m
18 x 1.0 mm (10.0 kgf·m, 72.3 lbf·ft)
34 N·m
20 x 1.0 mm
34 N·m
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８３０００２４７５９ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:16 61TL2000_080_0001
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools ................................................................. 8-2
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............................... 8-4
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram ............... 8-5
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting (Open) ............................................ 8-6
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting (Short) ............................................ 8-7
Oil Pressure Switch Test .............................................. 8-8
Oil Pressure Switch Replacement ............................... 8-8
Oil Pressure Test ........................................................... 8-9
Engine Oil Level Check ................................................. 8-9
Engine Oil Replacement .............................................. 8-10
Engine Oil Filter Replacement ..................................... 8-11
Oil Filter Base Replacement ........................................ 8-12
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement ................................ 8-13
Engine Oil Gallery Cap Replacement .......................... 8-13
Oil Jet Replacement ..................................................... 8-14
Oil Jet Inspection .......................................................... 8-14
Oil Pump Overhaul ....................................................... 8-15
Oil Pump Chain Inspection .......................................... 8-23
Oil Pump Chain Replacement ..................................... 8-24
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０８０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:16 61TL2000_080_0002
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
07AAA-PLCA100 Oil Filter Wrench 1
０１
8-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０８０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:20 61TL2000_080_0003

＊０１
OIL PAN
Removal, page 7-11
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
OIL PUMP
Overhaul, page 8-15
OIL PUMP CHAIN
TENSIONER
OIL CONTROL ORIFICE
BAFFLE PLATE
OIL PUMP CHAIN

Inspection,
page 8-23
Replacement,
page 8-24
OIL FILTER
OIL JETS Replacement,
Inspection, page 8-14 page 8-11
OIL FILTER FEED PIPE

Replacement,
page 8-13
OIL FILTER BASE

OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

OIL PUMP CHAIN Circuit Diagram, page 8-5
GUIDE Test, page 8-8
Replacement, page 8-8 OIL GALLERY CAP
Oil Pressure Test, page 8-9 Replacement, page 8-13
-DYNOMITE 2009- 8-3
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:20 61TL2000_080_0004
Engine Lubrication

Excessive engine oil 1. Verify that the engine oil filler cap, oil drain bolt,
consumption and oil filter are tight.
2. Check for oil leaks.
3. Check for worn valve guide(s) (see page 6-39) or
worn valve stem seal(s) (see page 6-38).
4. Check for damaged or worn piston ring(s)
(see page 7-22).
5. Check for damaged or worn engine internal parts
(cylinder wall, pistons, etc.) (see page 7-16).
Low oil pressure indicator does 1. Do the low oil pressure indicator circuit An open in the wire
not come on with the ignition troubleshooting (Open) (see page 8-6). between the engine
switch in ON (II) 2. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). control module (ECM)/
powertrain control
module (PCM) and the
oil pressure switch
Low oil pressure indicator stays 1. Check the engine oil level. A wire shorted to
on 2. Do the low oil pressure indicator circuit ground between the
troubleshooting (Short) (see page 8-7). ECM/PCM and the oil
3. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). pressure switch
4. Check the engine oil pressure (see page 8-9).
5. Check the oil filter for clogging.
6. Check the oil screen for clogging.
7. Check the relief valve (see page 8-15).
8. Test the oil pump (see page 8-17).
8-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２００００００００ＨＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:43:20 61TL2000_080_0005
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram

＊０１
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) No. 3−1 (50 A) 2 BAT 5
WHT BLU
IG1
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and

START (III) C5
No. 5 DRIVER’S
(7.5 A) UNDER−DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
P20
BRN
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 15

22
21 CPU
DRIVER
LOW OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
WHT RED
A3 A4 ECM/PCM
CANH CANL
5V
12 V
OPSW
B7
YEL/RED
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

(Closed : Lost pressure)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 8-5
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００３７５０１ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:21 61TL2000_080_0006
Engine Lubrication
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open)

1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). terminal B7 and the oil pressure switch connector.
＊０１
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle OPSW (YEL/RED)
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,

diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing OPSW (YEL/RED)
with this test.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), select PGM-FI, OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR
and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA Wire side of female terminal
LIST with the HDS.
Is ON indicated?
YES−Replace the gauge control module (see page latest software (see page 11-233), or substitute a
22-313). known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
NO−Go to step 6. a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original
ECM/PCM (see page 11-234).
NO−Repair open in the wire between the oil
7. Check the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). pressure switch and the ECM/PCM.
Is the oil pressure switch OK ?
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Replace the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8).
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and jump the

SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch
to LOCK (0).

PCM from damage.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P) and the oil

pressure switch connector.
8-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００３７５０３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:21 61TL2000_080_0007
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short)

1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and jump the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch
to LOCK (0).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle PCM from damage.
control module (PCM). If it doesn’t communicate, 11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P) and the oil
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210). pressure switch connector.
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present, 12. Check for continuity between the oil pressure
diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing switch connector and body ground.
with this test. ＊０２
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR
5. Start the engine, select PGM-FI, and check the OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is OF F indicated?
OPSW
YES−Replace the gauge control module (see page (YEL/RED)
22-313).
NO−Go to step 6.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Terminal side of female terminal
7. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector.

8. Start the engine and check the OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. YES−Repair short in the wire between the oil
pressure switch and the ECM/PCM.
Is OF F indicated?
YES−Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then go latest software (see page 11-233), or substitute a
to step 9. known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
NO−Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then go a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original
to step 10. ECM/PCM (see page 11-234).
9. Check the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8).
Is the oil pressure switch OK ?
YES−Do the oil pressure test (see page 8-9).
NO−Replace the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 8-7
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００３７５０３ＦＡＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:43:21 61TL2000_080_0008
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Switch Test Oil Pressure Switch Replacement

1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A) 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A),
from the oil pressure switch (B). then remove the oil pressure switch (B).
＊０１＊０１
A
B
A
B
18 N·m
2. Check for continuity between the oil pressure (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
switch terminal and the engine (ground). There
should be continuity with the engine stopped. 2. Remove any old liquid gasket from the switch and
There should be no continuity with the engine switch mounting hole.
running.
3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the
oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil
pressure switch.
NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause

liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of
the new oil pressure switch.
8-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３４６１ＦＥＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３４６１ＫＢＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:43:22 61TL2000_080_0009
Oil Pressure Test Engine Oil Level Check

NOTE: If the low oil pressure warning indicator stays on 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and start the
with the engine running, check the engine oil level. If engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm with no
the oil level is correct, do the following test: load (in Neutral) until the radiator fan comes on,
then turn off the engine, and wait a few minutes.
1. With the engine stopped, remove the oil pressure
switch, and install an oil pressure gauge (A). 2. Remove the dipstick, and wipe off the dipstick, then
＊０１ reinstall the dipstick.
3. Remove the dipstick, and check the engine oil level.

It should be between the upper mark (A) and lower
mark (B).
＊０１
A
2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the

gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem
before continuing.
3. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature 4. If the engine oil level is near or below the lower
(fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should mark, add the recommended engine oil (see page
be: 3-2) to bring it between the upper and lower marks.
Engine Oil Temperature: 176 °F (80 °C)

Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min.
At 3,000 rpm: 300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 psi) min.
4. If the oil pressure is out of specifications, inspect

these items:
• Replace the oil filter (see page 8-11).

• Inspect the oil pressure relief valve (see page
8-15).
• Check the oil screen for clogging.
• Inspect the oil pump (see page 8-17).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 8-9
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２００００００００ＦＥＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３７０１ＭＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:43:22 61TL2000_080_0010
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Replacement

1. Warm up the engine. 5. Refill the engine with the recommended oil
(see page 3-2).
2. Remove the engine undercover.
＊０１ Capacity
At Oil Change:
3.8 L (4.0 US qt)
At Oil Change Including Filter:
4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
After Engine Overhaul:
5.1 L (5.4 US qt)
＊０３
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
3. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil. data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
＊０２

9. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.
10. Select ADJUSTMENT in GAUGE MENU with the

HDS.
B A
Replace. 40 N·m
Do not overtighten.
4. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３７０１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:43:23 61TL2000_080_0011
Engine Oil Filter Replacement

11. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with Special Tools Required
the HDS. Oil filter wrench 07AAA-PLCA100
12. Select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE with the 1. Remove the engine undercover (see step 2 on page
HDS. 8-10).
NOTE: If you changed the automatic transmission 2. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-10).
fluid (ATF) at the same time with the engine oil,
select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE AND ATF 3. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench.
with the HDS instead.
4. Make sure the rubber seal from the oil filter is not
13. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine.
the oil level and oil leaks.
5. Inspect the threads (A) and the rubber seal (B) on
the new filter. Clean the seat on the engine block,
then apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter
rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass
system.
＊０１
6. Install the oil filter by hand.
7. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter

clockwise with the oil filter wrench.
Tighten: 3/4 Turn Clockwise

Tightening Torque: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
＊０２
07AAA-PLCA100
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３３０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:23 61TL2000_080_0012
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement Oil Filter Base Replacement

(cont’d)
1. Remove the oil filter (see page 8-11).
8. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or ▼ to ▼▼▼▼) 2. Remove the exhaust pipe bracket (A), then remove
are printed around the outside of the filter, use the the oil filter base (B).
following procedure to tighten the filter. ＊０１
• Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against 8 x 1.25 mm
the block, and note which number or mark is at 22 N·m
the bottom.
• Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise three
numbers or marks from the one you noted. For
example, if number 2 is at the bottom when the
seal is seated, tighten the filter until the number 1
comes around the bottom.
＊０３
B
A
C 10 x 1.25 mm
Replace. 44 N·m
3. Clean the O-ring grooves and mating surface with

the oil filter base.
4. Install the oil filter base with new O-rings (C).

Number when rubber Number after tightening.
seal is seated.
5. Install the oil filter (see page 8-11).
Number or 1 2 3 4
Mark when or or or or
rubber seal ▼ ▼▼ ▼▼▼ ▼▼▼▼
is seated
Number or 4 1 2 3
Mark after or or or or
tightening ▼▼▼▼ ▼ ▼▼ ▼▼▼
9. Refill with new engine oil (see page 8-10), run the
engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil
leaks.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３２４１ＫＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:43:24 61TL2000_080_0013
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement Engine Oil Gallery Cap Replacement
1. Remove the oil filter base (see page 8-12). 1. Remove the harness bracket (A), then remove the
engine oil gallery cap (B).
2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe. ＊０１
B
＊０１ A
C
Replace.
8 x 1.25 mm 22 x 1.5 mm
3. Install the two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the new oil 22 N·m 41 N·m
filter feed pipe. Hold one nut with a wrench, then
use a second wrench to tighten the other nut. 2. Clean the O-ring groove and mating surface with
＊０２ the engine oil gallery cap.
A
3. Apply new engine oil to new O-rings (C). Install the
engine oil gallery cap with O-rings, then install the
harness bracket.
4. Tighten the oil filter feed pipe to the oil filter base to
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft), then remove the nuts
from the oil filter feed pipe.
5. Install the oil filter base (see page 8-12).
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３３１１ＫＢＡＴ０２ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００２４９１９ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:24 61TL2000_080_0014
Engine Lubrication
Oil Jet Replacement Oil Jet Inspection

1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-16). 1. Remove the oil jet (see page 8-14), and inspect it as
follows.
2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 10 on page 7-13).
• Make sure that a 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) diameter drill
3. Remove the oil jet bolts (A), then remove the oil jets will go through the nozzle hole (A) (1.31 mm
(B). (0.052 in.) diameter).
＊０１ • Insert the other end of a 1.9 mm (0.07 in.) drill
into the oil intake (2.0 mm (0.08 in.) diameter).
Make sure the check ball (B) moves smoothly and
A has a stroke of about 2.0 mm (0.08 in.).
8 x 0.75 mm • Check the oil jet operation with an air nozzle. It
16 N·m
(1.6 kgf·m, 12 lbf·ft) should take at least 325 kPa (3.3 kgf/cm2, 47 psi)
to unseat the check ball.
B
NOTE: Replace the oil jet assembly, if the nozzle is
damaged or bent.
＊０１
1.31 mm (0.052 in.)
4. Carefully install the oil jets, and tighten the oil jet
bolts.
5. Install the baffle plate (see step 24 on page 7-29).

2. Carefully install the oil jet. The mounting torque is
6. Install the oil pump (see page 8-22). critical.
Specified Torque: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf·m, 12 lbf·ft)

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３３５１ＫＢＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３３５１ＭＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:43:25 61TL2000_080_0015
Oil Pump Overhaul

Exploded View
＊０１
8 x 1.25 mm
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
BAFFLE PLATES
10 x 1.25 mm DOWEL PIN

44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) O-RING
Apply new engine oil Replace.
to the bolt threads. OIL PUMP
SPROCKET
PUMP HOUSING
DOWEL PIN
6 x 1.0 mm UPPER BALANCER
12 N·m SHAFT HOLDER
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
REAR BALANCER
SHAFT
FRONT BLANCER
SHAFT
BALANCER SHAFT
BEARINGS
INNER ROTOR
SPRING OUTER ROTOR

SEALING BOLT RELIEF VALVE
39 N·m Valve must slide freely
(4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) in housing bore.
Replace if scored.
LOWER BALANCER
DOWEL PIN SHAFT HOLDER
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３５０２ＬＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:26 61TL2000_080_0016
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont’d)

Oil Pump Removal 5. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the oil pump
chain auto-tensioner (B), then insert a 3.0 mm
1. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its top dead center (0.1 in.) diameter pin (C) into the holes. Turn the
(TDC) mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B). crankshaft clockwise to secure the pin.
＊０２＊０４
B
C
A
6. Use a transmission jack to lift the transmission
2. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11). 30−40 mm (1.2−1.6 in.), then remove the oil pump
chain auto-tensioner.
3. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert a 6 mm long ＊０５
pin punch (A) (Snap-on PPC108LA or equivalent)
into the maintenance hole in the balancer shaft
holder and through the rear balancer shaft.
＊０３

the oil pump chain auto-tensioner.

08/04/09 12:43:27 61TL2000_080_0017
7. Loosen the oil pump sprocket mounting bolt. Oil Pump Inspection
＊０６
1. Remove the pump housing.
＊０８
8. Remove the oil pump sprocket (A), then remove the 2. Align the tip of the inner rotor tooth (A) with the
oil pump (B). mark (B) on the outer rotor, then check the inner-to-
＊０７ outer rotor radial clearance between the inner rotor
and the outer rotor. If the inner-to-outer rotor radial
clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil
pump.
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance

(0.002−0.006 in.)
＊０９
A
A
B
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:43:28 61TL2000_080_0018
Engine Lubrication

3. Check the pump housing-to-rotor axial clearance Balancer Shaft Inspection
between the rotor (A) and the pump housing (B). If
the pump housing-to-rotor axial clearance exceeds 1. Seat the balancer shaft by pushing it away from the
the service limit, replace the oil pump. oil pump sprocket end of the oil pump.
Pump Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance 2. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
Standard (New): 0.035−0.070 mm balancer shaft, then push the balancer shaft back
(0.0014−0.0028 in.) and forth and read the end play.
＊１０ Balancer Shaft End Play
B
(0.0025−0.0043 in.)
＊１２
4. Check the pump housing-to-outer rotor radial

clearance between the outer rotor (A) and the
pump housing (B). If the pump housing-to-outer
rotor radial clearance exceeds the service limit,
replace the oil pump.
3. Remove the pump housing.
Pump Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance ＊１３
(0.006−0.008 in.)
＊１１
A
B

08/04/09 12:43:29 61TL2000_080_0019
4. Remove the upper balancer shaft holder (with 5. Measure the inner diameter of the No. 1 bearing for
bearings) (A) and baffle plates (B), then remove the the front balancer shaft hole and the rear balancer
front balancer shaft (C) and the rear balancer shaft shaft hole.
(D).
＊１４ Bearing Inner Diameter
Front:
(0.7874−0.7882 in.)
B
Rear:
A (0.9449−0.9457 in.)
Front
＊１５
Rear
＊１６
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:43:29 61TL2000_080_0020
Engine Lubrication

6. Measure the diameters of the No. 1 journals on the 7. Clean both balancer shaft No. 2 journals and the
front balancer shaft and the rear balancer shaft. bearing halves with a clean shop towel, then place
both balancer shafts into the balancer holder.
Journal Diameter
Front: 8. Place one strip of plastigage across each No. 2
Standard (New): 19.938−19.950 mm journal.
(0.7850−0.7854 in.)
Service Limit: 19.92 mm (0.784 in.) 9. Reinstall the bearings and the upper balancer shaft
Rear: holder, then tighten the bolts.
(0.9424−0.9429 in.) NOTE: Do not rotate the balancer shafts during
Service Limit: 23.92 mm (0.942 in.) inspection.
Front Specified Torque

＊１７ 8 x 1.25 mm
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
10. Remove the upper balancer shaft holder and the

bearings again, and measure the widest part with
the plastigage. If balancer shaft No. 2 journal oil
clearance is out-of-tolerance, install new bearings,
and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance, replace the
balancer shafts.
No. 2 Journal Oil Clearance

(0.0024−0.0047 in.)
Rear Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
＊１８＊１９

08/04/09 12:43:47 61TL2000_080_0021
11. Align the punch mark on the rear balancer shaft in 14. Install the pump housing.
the center of the two punch marks on the front ＊２２
balancer shaft, then install the balancer shafts on
the lower balancer shaft holder.
＊２０
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.8 lbf·ft)
12. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the 8 mm

bolts (A).
＊２１
A
8 x 1.25 mm
27 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm (2.8 kgf·m,
12 N·m 20 lbf·ft)
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.8 lbf·ft)
C
C
B
13. Install the upper balancer shaft holder (B) and

baffle plates (C).
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:43:48 61TL2000_080_0022
Engine Lubrication

Oil Pump Installation 3. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert a 6 mm long
1. Make sure the No. 1 piston top dead center (TDC) into the maintenance hole in the balancer shaft
mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B). holder and through the rear balancer shaft.
＊２３＊２５
B
A
2. Align the dowel pin (A) on the rear balancer shaft

with the mark (B) on the oil pump. 4. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the oil pump
＊２４ mounting bolts (A) and oil pump sprocket
B mounting bolt (B), then loosely install the oil pump
A
(C) with a new O-ring (D), then install the oil pump
sprocket (E).
＊２６
B
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
D (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
Replace.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
A F (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
5. Tighten the oil pump mounting bolts and the oil

pump sprocket mounting bolt.
6. Remove the 6 mm pin punch (F).

08/04/09 12:43:49 61TL2000_080_0023
Oil Pump Chain Inspection

7. Install the oil pump chain auto-tensioner. 1. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).
NOTE: If the 3.0 mm (0.1 in.) diameter pin come off 2. Measure the oil pump chain auto-tensioner rod
the auto-tensioner. Compress the auto-tensioner length. If the length is over the service limit, replace
(see step 8 on page 8-26), then install the auto- the oil pump chain (see page 8-24).
tensioner.
＊２７ Oil Pump Chain Auto-Tensioner Rod Length
Service Limit: 13 mm (0.51 in.)
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
8. Remove the 3.0 mm (0.1 in.) diameter pin (A) from

＊２８
A
3. Install the oil pan (see page 7-31).
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３５１３ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:50 61TL2000_080_0024
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Chain Replacement

NOTE: Keep the oil pump chain away from magnetic 6. Use a transmission jack to lift the transmission
fields. 30−40 mm (1.2−1.6 in.), then remove the oil pump
chain auto-tensioner.
Removal ＊０３
2. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).
3. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert a 6 mm long

＊０１
7. Remove a transmission jack.
8. Support the engine with a jack and wood block

under the edge of the engine block.
NOTE: Do not hit the oil strainer when placing the

jack on the edge of the engine block.
9. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13).
10. Loosen the oil pump sprocket mounting bolt.

＊０４
A

5. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the oil pump
chain auto-tensioner (B), then insert a 3.0 mm
(0.1 in.) diameter pin (C) into the holes. Turn the
crankshaft clockwise to secure the pin.
＊０２
C

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ３２２０００４３５１３ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:43:50 61TL2000_080_0025
11. Remove the oil pump sprocket (A) and the oil pump Installation
chain guide (B).
＊０５ 1. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align
B the TDC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with
A the pointer (B) on the engine block.
＊０６
A
12. Remove the oil pump chain (C).
2. Install the oil pump chain on the crankshaft

sprocket with the colored link plate (A) aligned with
the TDC mark (B) on the crankshaft sprocket.
＊０７
A
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:43:51 61TL2000_080_0026
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Chain Replacement (cont’d)

3. Set the oil pump chain on the oil pump chain 8. Turn the plate (A) counterclockwise, to release the
sprocket (A) with the punch mark (B) aligned with lock, then push the oil pump chain auto-tensioner
the center of the two colored link plates (C), then arm (B), and set the first cam (C) to the first edge of
install the oil pump chain sprocket to the oil pump. the rack (D). Insert a 3.0 mm (0.1 in.) diameter pin
＊０８ (E) into the hole (F).
8 x 1.25 mm
F 22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, NOTE: If the chain tensioner is not set up as
16 lbf·ft) described, the tensioner will become damaged.
E ＊０９
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
D E
A
B
C
A F
D C 9. Use a transmission jack to lift the transmission

30−40 mm (1.2−1.6 in.), then install the oil pump
4. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert a 6 mm long chain auto-tensioner.
pin punch (D) (Snap-on PPC108LA or equivalent) ＊１０
5. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the oil pump

sprocket mounting bolt (E), then install the oil
pump sprocket mounting bolt and oil pump chain
guide (F).

6 x 1.0 mm
7. Remove the jack. 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)

08/04/09 12:43:51 61TL2000_080_0027
10. Remove the 3.0 mm (0.1 in.) diameter pin (A) from
＊１１
A

08/04/09 12:42:07 61TL2000_090_0001
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System

Intake Manifold Removal and Installation ................. 9-2
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement ..................... 9-7
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ０９０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:42:08 61TL2000_090_0002
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation

Exploded View
＊０１
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL 6 x 1.0 mm
SOLENOID VALVE 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m INJECTOR BASE
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) Replace if cracked or
if mating surface is
damaged.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
GASKET
Replace.
GASKET
Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
GASKET
O-RING Replace.
Replace. 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
THROTTLE BODY
INTAKE MANIFOLD
5 x 0.8 mm Replace if cracked or
3.4 N·m if mating surface is
(0.35 kgf·m, 2.5 lbf·ft) damaged.
O-RING 6 x 1.0 mm
Replace. 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE (MAP)
SENSOR INTAKE MANIFOLD
BRACKET
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
9-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６３３５００１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:42:09 61TL2000_090_0003
Removal 3. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

hose (A) and the brake booster vacuum hose (B).
1. Remove the intake manifold cover. ＊０４
＊０２
A C
4. Remove the water bypass hoses (C), then plug the

water bypass hoses.
5. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP)

2. Disconnect the breather pipe (A), then remove the sensor connector (A) and throttle actuator
intake air duct (B). connector (B), then remove the wire harness
＊０３ clamps (C).
B
＊０５
B
A
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 9-3

08/04/09 12:42:10 61TL2000_090_0004
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont’d)

6. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 9. Remove the intake manifold mounting bolts/nuts,
＊０６ then remove the intake manifold from the cylinder
head.
＊０８
7. Remove the vacuum hoses (A) from the intake

manifold.
＊０７ 10. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV)
hose, then remove the intake manifold from the
vehicle.
＊０９
B A
8. Remove the vacuum hoses from the clamps (B).
9-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:42:11 61TL2000_090_0005
Installation 3. Install the vacuum hoses (A) to the intake manifold.

＊１２
1. Install the PCV hose (A) to the intake manifold (B)
and the clamp (C).
＊１０
A
B
A
4. Install the vacuum hoses to the clamps (B).
5. Install the intake manifold bracket.

C
＊１３
2. Install the intake manifold (A) with new gaskets (B),

and tighten the bolts and nuts in a crisscross
pattern in two or three steps, beginning with the
inner bolt.
＊１１
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 9-5

08/04/09 12:42:12 61TL2000_090_0006
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont’d)

6. Connect the MAP sensor connector (A) and throttle 9. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the
actuator connector (B), then install the wire harness breather pipe (B).
clamps (C).
＊１４ NOTE: When torquing the screw of the hose band
B
(C), align the edge of the hose band (D) with the
mark (E) painted on the hose band. If you tighten
C the screw over the mark, replace the hose band.
＊１６
C
D
A
E
C
A
7. Install the water bypass hoses (A).
＊１５
A
10. Install the intake manifold cover.
＊１７
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
C
8. Install the EVAP canister hose (B) and the brake

booster vacuum hose (C).
11. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
12. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and

connectors are installed correctly.

the air from the cooling system with the heater
valve open (see step 6 on page 10-6).
9-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:42:13 61TL2000_090_0007
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement

NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm HEAT SHIELD
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
GASKET
Replace.
MUFFLER
MUFFLER
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 mm
33 N·m (3.4 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUT
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) 10 x 1.25 mm
SENSOR 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
8 x 1.25 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
31 N·m 9.8 N·m
(3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft) (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
GASKET
Replace.
GASKET
Replace.
UNDER-FLOOR THREE
WAY CATALYTIC
WARM-UP CONVERTER
THREE WAY (UNDER-FLOOR TWC)
CATALYTIC
(WU-TWC) GASKET
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUT
SECONDARY HEATED GASKET 10 x 1.25 mm
OXYGEN SENSOR Replace. 33 N·m (3.4 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
(SECONDARY HO2S) Replace.
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
10 x 1.25 mm Tighen the bolts in steps,
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) alternating side-to-side.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 9-7
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１８４０００２５６０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:41:12 61TL2000_100_0001
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Radiator Cap Test ......................................................... 10-3
Radiator Test ................................................................. 10-3
Fan Motor Test .............................................................. 10-4
Thermostat Test ........................................................... 10-4
Water Pump Inspection ............................................... 10-5
Water Pump Replacement ........................................... 10-5
Coolant Check ............................................................... 10-6
Coolant Replacement ................................................... 10-6
Thermostat Replacement ............................................ 10-8
Water Passage Replacement ....................................... 10-9
Water Outlet Removal and Installation ...................... 10-12
Connecting Pipe Replacement .................................... 10-13
Fan, Fan Motor, and Shroud Removal
and Installation ......................................................... 10-14
Radiator Replacement .................................................. 10-15
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 10-20
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１００１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:41:15 61TL2000_100_0002
Cooling System
＊０１
COOLANT SEPARATOR
WATER PUMP
WATER PASSAGE
Replacement,
page 10-9
WATER OUTLET
page 10-12
CONNECTING PIPE
A/C CONDENSER FAN

ASSEMBLY THERMOSTAT
Replacement, page 10-14 Test, page 10-4
Fan Motor Test, page 10-14 Replacement, page 10-8
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY

Replacement, page 10-14 RADIATOR
Fan Motor Test, page 10-14 Replacement, page 10-15
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 2
Replacement,page 11-230

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:41:16 61TL2000_100_0003
Radiator Cap Test Radiator Test

1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
the radiator cap (A). Wet the radiator cap seal with the radiator cap and fill the radiator with engine
engine coolant, then install it on a commercially coolant to the base of the filler neck.
available pressure tester (B).
＊０１ 2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A)
B to the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93−123 kPa
(0.95−1.25 kgf/cm2, 14−18 psi).
A ＊０１
A
2. Apply a pressure of 93−123 kPa

(0.95−1.25 kgf/cm2, 14−18 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the radiator cap.
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in

pressure.
4. Remove the tester, and reinstall the radiator cap.
5. Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in

the engine oil.
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００４９２０１ＦＥＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００４９００１ＦＥＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:41:16 61TL2000_100_0004
Cooling System
Fan Motor Test Thermostat Test

1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan Replace the thermostat if it is stuck in the open position
motor and the A/C condenser fan motor. at room temperature.
＊０１
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.

Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
＊０１
B
Teminal side of
male teminals
2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 2 and ground to terminal No. 1.
3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly, A

replace it (see page 10-14).
2. Heat the water, and check the temperature with the
thermometer. Check the temperature when the
thermostat first opens, then check the temperature
again when the thermostat is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is

fully open. If the thermostat is not within the
specification, replace it.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height: Above 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Starts Opening: 169−176 °F (76 −80 °C)
Fully Open: 194 °F (90 °C)

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００４９４０１ＦＥＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００５９３０１ＦＥＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:41:17 61TL2000_100_0005
Water Pump Inspection Water Pump Replacement

1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-28). 1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-28).
2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise, and 2. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
make sure it turns freely. If it doesn’t, replace the
water pump (see page 10-5). 3. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page
4-30).
NOTE: When you check the water pump pulley, you
may see a small amount of ‘‘weeping’’ from the 4. Remove the water pump pulley (A).
bleed holes (A). This is normal. ＊０１
＊０１ C
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm B
14 N·m
A
A
5. Remove the six bolts securing the water pump,
then remove the water pump (B).
6. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and the mating

surface of the water passage.
7. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (C) and

the water pump pulley in the reverse order of
removal.
9. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-30).

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００６５１０１ＭＡＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００６５１０１ＫＢＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:41:17 61TL2000_100_0006
Cooling System
Coolant Check Coolant Replacement

1. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. 1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control
Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN dial to maximum heat, then turn the ignition switch
mark (B). to LOCK (0). Make sure the engine and radiator are
＊０１ cool to the touch.
2. Remove the radiator cap.
3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.

＊０１
A
2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or

below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it up to
the MAX mark, then inspect the cooling system for
leaks.
4. After the coolant has drained, tighten the radiator
drain plug securely.
5. Remove, drain, and reinstall the coolant reservoir.
6. Fill the coolant reservoir to the MAX mark (A) with

Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
(P/N OL999-9011).
＊０２

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００１７３０１ＭＡＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００１７３０１ＫＢＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:41:17 61TL2000_100_0007
7. Pour Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 8. Loosely install the radiator cap.
into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
9. Start the engine, and let it run until it warms up (the
NOTE: radiator fan comes on at least twice).
• Always use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2 (P/N OL999-9011A). Using a non-Acura 10. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
coolant can result in corrosion, causing the and add Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2,
cooling system to malfunction or fail. if needed.
• Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do 11. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then start the engine
not add water. again, and check for leaks.
• If the vehicle is regularly driven in very low
temperatures (under −31 °F, −35 °C) a 60 % 12. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
concentration of coolant should be used. To
accomplish this, pour 1.6 L (0.4 US gal) of Honda 13. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
Extreme Cold Weather Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
(P/N OL999-9020) into the radiator first, then add
Acura Long Life antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 until 14. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
the radiator is full. and the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain
Engine Coolant Capacities (Including the coolant troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
reservoir capacity of 0.74 L (0.19 US gal,
0.16 lmp gal)) 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
M/T model: 16. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.

At Coolant Change:
6.2 L (1.63 US gal) 17. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGE MENU with
After Engine Overhaul: the HDS.
8.3 L (2.19 US gal)
A/T model: 18. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with
At Coolant Change: the HDS.
6.1 L (1.61 US gal)
After Engine Overhaul: 19. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 5 RESET with the
8.2 L (2.16 US gal) HDS.
＊０３

08/04/09 12:41:18 61TL2000_100_0008
Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 6. Check the quick connector (A) and set ring (B) for
cracks or damage. If the connector and/or set ring
2. Clean any dirt off the quick connector (A), the are cracked or damaged, replace the connector.
thermostat cover, and the lower radiator hose. ＊０３
D B
＊０１ C
E A

B
3. Pull out the lock (B) by hand, then wiggle the quick 8. Replace the O-ring (C) in the quick connector.
connector loose, and remove it from the thermostat
cover. Do not use any tools to remove the quick 9. Check the lock (D). If the lock is damaged or
connector. deformed, replace it. When installing the new lock
to the connector, push it straight down along the
4. Remove the thermostat (A). groove.
＊０２
A
11. Push the lock (A) down, then push the quick
connector (B) onto the thermostat cover until you
hear it click.
＊０４
B
B
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
5. Install a new thermostat with a new O-ring (B).


ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００５９３０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:41:19 61TL2000_100_0009
Water Passage Replacement

1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 9. Remove the connecting pipe mounting bolts (A)
securing the connecting pipe (B).
2. Remove the splash shield (see step 21 on page 5-4). ＊０２
3. Clean any dirt off the quick connector (A), the C

thermostat cover, and the lower radiator hose.
＊０１
A
A
D B
10. Remove the connecting pipe, the water bypass

hose (C), and the positive crankcase ventilation
(PCV) hose (D).
B
11. Remove the water passage (A).
＊０３
4. Pull out the lock (B) by hand, then wiggle the quick
connector loose, and remove it from the thermostat A
cover. Do not use any tools to remove the quick
connector.
5. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting

the A/C hoses. Take care to not bend the hoses
excessively (see step 30 on page 5-5).
6. Remove the alternator (see page 4-32).
7. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page B

4-30).
12. Remove the thermostat housing (B).
13. Remove the water pump (see page 10-5).
(cont’d)
10-9
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００６５０９１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:41:20 61TL2000_100_0010
Cooling System
Water Passage Replacement (cont’d)

14. Install the water pump (see page 10-5). 18. Install the water passage (A) with a new O-ring (B).
15. Install the thermostat housing (A) with a new O-ring NOTE:
(B). • Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
＊０４ with coolant.
• Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the water passage.
＊０６
B
A Replace.
B
Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
16. Clean and dry the water passage mating surfaces.

10 x 1.25 mm
17. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to the engine block
mating surface of the water passage and to the 19. Install the water bypass hose (A) and the PCV hose
inside edge of the bolt holes. Install the component (B).
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket. ＊０７
E
6 x 1.0 mm
NOTE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
• Apply liquid gasket about 3 mm (0.12 in.) A
＊０５
B D C E
22 N·m
20. Install the connecting pipe (C) with a new O-ring (D),
then tighten the connecting pipe mounting bolts (E)
securing the connecting pipe.
A
3 mm
(0.12 in. )
10-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:41:20 61TL2000_100_0011
21. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-5). 31. Push the lock (A) down, then push the quick
connector (B) onto the thermostat cover until you
22. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-30). hear it click.
＊０９
23. Install the alternator (see page 4-32).
24. Install the A/C compressor (see step 40 on page

5-18).

B
26. Check the quick connector (A) and set ring (B) for
cracks or damage. If the connector and/or set ring
are cracked or damaged, replace the connector.
＊０８
D B
C
Replace.

E A
28. Replace a new O-ring (C) in the quick connector.
29. Check the lock (D). If the lock is damaged or

deformed, replace it. When installing the new lock
on the connector, push it straight down along the
groove.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 10-11

08/04/09 12:41:21 61TL2000_100_0012
Cooling System
Water Outlet Removal and Installation

1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 4. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
2. Remove the breather pipe (A), then remove the 5. Remove the connecting pipe mounting bolts (A),
intake air duct (B). then remove the connecting pipe (B).
＊０３
A
NOTE: When torquing the screw of the hose band 6 x 1.0 mm
(C), align the edge of the hose band (D) with the 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
mark (E) painted on the hose band. If you tighten
the screw over the mark, replace the hose band.
＊０１
C
D
E B
Replace.
B A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
6. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT)

sensor 2 connector (A), then remove the water
outlet (B).
＊０４
A
3. Remove the upper radiator hose (A), the heater 8 x 1.25 mm
hose (B), and the water bypass hose (C). 22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
＊０２ 16 lbf·ft)
C
Replace.
B
7. Install the water outlet with a new gasket (C).

B
8. Install the other parts in the reverse order of
removal.
A
open (see step 6 on page 10-6).
10-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００６５０８１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:41:22 61TL2000_100_0013
Connecting Pipe Replacement

1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
3. Remove the connecting pipe mounting bolts (A),

then remove the connecting pipe (B).
＊０１
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
C
Replace.
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
4. Install the connecting pipe with a new O-ring (C).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 10-13
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００４９５０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:41:23 61TL2000_100_0014
Cooling System
Fan, Fan Motor, and Shroud Removal and Installation

1. Disconnect the fan motor connectors (A), then 1. Assemble the fan shrouds.
remove the harness clamp (B). ＊０３
3.9 N·m 6.0 N·m
＊０１ (0.4 kgf·m, 2.9 lbf·ft) (0.61 kgf·m, 4.4 lbf·ft)
3.9 N·m
(0.4 kgf·m, 2.9 lbf·ft)
2. Install the radiator fan shroud assembly (A).

A ＊０４
B A
6 x 1.0 mm
2. Remove the condenser fan shroud assembly (C). 7 N·m B
(0.7 kgf·m,
5 lbf·ft)
3. Remove the radiator fan shroud assembly (D) from
right side of the engine compartment. A
4. Disassemble the fan shrouds.

＊０２
D C
3. Install the condenser fan shroud assembly (B).
4. Connect the fan motor connectors (C), then remove

the harness clamp (D).
10-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４２６１１２０３１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:41:23 61TL2000_100_0015
Radiator Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 9. Remove the clips (A) securing the intake air duct
cover.
2. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height. ＊０２
A
3. Remove the splash shield (see step 21 on page 5-4). B
4. Remove the lower radiator hose (A).

＊０１
B
E 10. Remove the upper radiator hose (B).
11. Remove the coolant reservoir hose (A) and the

C
D C E
radiator upper brackets (B).
＊０３
B B
5. A/T model: Remove the automatic transmission
fluid (ATF) cooler hoses (B), then plug the hose and A
the line. C
6. Disconnect the fan motor connectors (C) and

engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 2
connector (D), then remove the harness clamps (E).
8. Remove the grille cover (see page 20-202).
12. Remove the A/C condenser upper mounting bolts

(C) and loosen the A/C condenser lower mounting
bolts (D).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 10-15
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４０００４９００１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:41:24 61TL2000_100_0016
Cooling System
Radiator Replacement (cont’d)

13. Pull up the radiator, then remove the radiator fan 16. Set the A/C condenser in place, then tighten the
shroud assembly (A), the A/C condenser fan shroud upper mounting bolts (A) and the A/C condenser
assembly (B), the radiator cap (C), ETC sensor 2 (D), lower mounting bolts (B).
and the drain plug (E). ＊０５
6 x 1.0 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
＊０４ 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 9.8 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm C
7 N·m (0.7 kgf·m, 5 lbf·ft) (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
A
F C 6 x 1.0 mm
7 N·m
D D
A
G
F
B E
G
D
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
B
6 x 1.0 mm
17. Install the coolant reservoir hose (C) and the

radiator upper brackets (D).
18. Install the upper radiator hose (A).

＊０６
B
14. Reassemble the radiator with new O-rings (F).
A
15. Install the radiator. Make sure the lower cushions
(G) are set securely.
19. Install the clips (B) securing the intake air duct
cover.
10-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:41:24 61TL2000_100_0017
20. Install the grille cover (see page 20-202).
22. Connect the fan motor connectors (A) and ECT

sensor 2 connector (B), then install the harness
clamps (C).
＊０７
E
A
B A C
23. Install the lower radiator hose (D).
24. A/T model: Install the automatic transmission fluid

ATF cooler hoses (E).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 10-17

08/04/09 12:41:26 61TL2000_100_0018
Fan Controls
＊０１
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
Test, page 22-80
FAN CONTROL RELAY AND A/C UNDER-HOOD

CONDENSER FAN RELAY FUSE/RELAY BOX
(Built into the relay circuit board)
Test, page 22-80
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

(ECT) SENSOR 1
A/C CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
Motor Test, page 10-4 Motor Test, page 10-4 (ECT) SENSOR 2
10-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４２６１０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:41:27 61TL2000_100_0019

Engine overheats 1. Check the coolant level. Proper radiator and
2. Check for coolant leaks (from gaskets, hoses, condenser fan
O-rings, etc.). control and
3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on radiator and operation
condenser.
6. Check for deteriorated coolant.
7. Check for damaged or deformed fan shroud.
8. Inspect the fan motors (see page 10-4) or fan relays
(see page 22-80).
9. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3).
10. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
11. Inspect the water pump (see page 10-5).
12. Check for plugged or deteriorated radiator hoses.
13. Check for plugged heater core or hoses.
14. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
The A/C condenser fan runs at low speed, but it does not A/C condenser fan high speed circuit troubleshooting Cleanliness and
run at high speed when the engine coolant temperature (see page 21-81). tightness of all
is above 199 °F (93 °C) connectors
With the A/C off and the engine coolant temperature at Remove the relay circuit board, and test the fan control Cleanliness and
199 °F (93 °C) or below, the radiator fan runs at high relay (see page 22-80). tightness of all
speed and the A/C condenser fan does not run. When • If the relay is faulty, replace the circuit board. connectors
the engine coolant temperature is above 199 °F (93 °C), • If the relay is OK, check for a short in the wire between
both fans run at high speed the under-hood fuse/relay box terminal B11 and radiator
fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 1.
Both the radiator fan and the A/C condenser fan run at Check for a short in the wire between the under-hood fuse/ Cleanliness and
high speed with the ignition switch to ON (II), the A/C off, relay box terminal D10 and ECM/PCM connector terminal tightness of all
and the engine coolant temperature below 194 °F (90 °C) A6. connectors
Both the radiator fan and the A/C condenser fan run at Check for a short in the wire between radiator fan relay 4P Cleanliness and
low speed with the ignition switch in ON (II) and the A/C socket terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal tightness of all
off A5. connectors
Both the radiator fan and the A/C condenser fan do not Radiator and A/C condenser fans low speed circuit Cleanliness and
run at low speed with the A/C on troubleshooting (see page 21-76). tightness of all
connectors
Both the radiator fan and the A/C condenser fan run at Remove the relay circuit board, and test the fan control • Poor ground at
low speed, but the radiator fan does not run at high relay (see page 22-80). G301
speed when the engine coolant temperature is above • If the relay is faulty, replace the circuit board. • Cleanliness and
199 °F (93 °C) • If the relay is OK, check for an open in the wire between tightness of all
the under-hood fuse/relay box terminal B1 and body connectors
ground.
Both the radiator fan and the A/C condenser fan do not Check for an open in the wire between the under-hood Cleanliness and
run at high speed when the engine coolant temperature fuse/relay box terminal D10 and ECM/PCM connector tightness of all
is above 199 °F (93 °C) terminal A6. connectors
10-19
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４２６１０００００ＨＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:41:27 61TL2000_100_0020
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram
＊０１
BATTERY
No .1 (100 A) No. 3−1 (50 A) 2 BAT 3
WHT ORN C4
IG2
DRIVER’S
IG2 HOT in ON (II) No. 16 UNDER−DASH
(7.5 A) FUSE/RELAY
BOX
F26
LT GRN
B2
PGM−FI
SUBRELAY
No. 14 (15 A) 4 3
1 2 No. 21 (7.5 A)
RELAY
No. 5 (20 A) No. 3−6 (30 A) CIRCUIT
BOARD
1 4
A/C FAN RADIATOR

CONDENSER CONTROL FAN
FAN RELAY RELAY RELAY
RELAY 2 3
CIRCUIT
BOARD
D4 B1 D10 B11
BLU/YEL BLK PNK BLU/BLK
2 2
A/C RADIATOR
CONDENSER FAN
FAN MOTOR MOTOR
1 1
BLK
YEL/RED GRN/RED RED/YEL
G301 G301
ECM/PCM A6 A5 A22
FANH FANL SUBRLY
5V
ECT1 SG2 SG6 ECT2

B24 B34 A10 A34
RED/WHT GRN/BLK BLK YEL/RED
1 2 2 1
ENGINE COOLANT ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR 1 (ECT) SENSOR 2
10-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４４２６１０００００ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:09:03 61TL2000_110_0001
Fuel and Emissions

Fuel and Emissions Systems Fuel Supply System
Special Tools ................................................... 11-2 Component Location Index ........................... 11-325
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 11-3 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-327
DTC Troubleshooting Index .......................... 11-10 Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting .............. 11-333
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 11-14 Fuel Pressure Relieving ................................. 11-339
System Description ........................................ 11-16 Fuel Pressure Test .......................................... 11-342
How to Set Readiness Codes ........................ 11-63 Fuel Tank Draining ......................................... 11-342
Fuel Line Inspection ....................................... 11-343
PGM-FI System Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Component Location Index ........................... 11-66 Precautions .................................................. 11-345
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-68 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting ..................... 11-199 Removal ....................................................... 11-346
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 11-209 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting ......................... 11-210 Installation ................................................... 11-349
Injector Replacement ..................................... 11-225 Fuel Tank Unit
A/F Sensor Replacement ............................... 11-227 Removal and Installation ........................... 11-352
Secondary HO2S Replacement ..................... 11-227 Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement ......... 11-354
CMP Sensor B Replacement ......................... 11-228 Fuel Filter Replacement ................................. 11-354
CKP Sensor Replacement .............................. 11-228 Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
MAP Sensor Replacement ............................. 11-229 Replacement ............................................... 11-355
MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement ......... 11-229 Fuel Tank Replacement ................................. 11-356
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ........................... 11-230 Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation ................ 11-358
ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ........................... 11-230 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test ...................... 11-359
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Low Fuel Indicator Test .................................. 11-360
Replacement ............................................... 11-231
Knock Sensor Replacement .......................... 11-231 Intake Air System
ELD Replacement ........................................... 11-232 Component Location Index ........................... 11-361
ECM/PCM Update ........................................... 11-233 Throttle Body Test .......................................... 11-362
ECM/PCM Replacement ................................. 11-234 Throttle Body Cleaning .................................. 11-363
Air Cleaner Removal/Installation .................. 11-364
Electronic Throttle Control System Air Cleaner Element
Component Location Index ........................... 11-237 Inspection/Replacement ............................ 11-364
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-238 Intake Air Resonator
APP Sensor Signal Inspection ....................... 11-279 Removal/Installation .................................. 11-365
Accelerator Pedal Module Throttle Body Removal/Installation .............. 11-367
Removal and Installation ........................... 11-280 Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly ..... 11-369
VTEC/VTC Catalytic Converter System

Component Location Index ........................... 11-281 Component Location Index ........................... 11-370
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-282 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-371
VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter
Removal/Test/Installation .......................... 11-305 Removal/Installation .................................. 11-373
CMP Sensor A Replacement ......................... 11-306 Under-floor Three Way Catalytic Converter
Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Removal/Installation .................................. 11-375
Removal/Installation .................................. 11-307
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch PCV System
Removal/Installation .................................. 11-308 Component Location Index ........................... 11-376
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-377
Idle Control System PCV Valve Inspection ..................................... 11-379
Component Location Index ........................... 11-309 PCV Valve Replacement ................................ 11-379
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-310
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting .............. 11-319 EVAP System
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Component Location Index ........................... 11-380
Troubleshooting ......................................... 11-320 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-381
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Fuel Cap Warning Message System
Troubleshooting ......................................... 11-321 Troubleshooting ......................................... 11-408
Idle Speed Inspection ..................................... 11-323 EVAP Canister Replacement ......................... 11-410
ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure .................... 11-324 FTP Sensor Replacement .............................. 11-412
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Replacement ............................................... 11-413
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
Replacement ............................................... 11-413
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１１０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:09:04 61TL2000_110_0002
Fuel and Emissions Systems
Special Tools
07AAA-S0XA100 Fuel Sender Wrench 1
07AAJ-S6MA150 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set 1
07JAZ-001000B Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0−4 in.Hg 1
07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 1
07ZAJ-S5AA200 Oil Pressure Hose 1
-1 07406-0020201 A/T Pressure Hose 1
-2 07406-0070301 A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 1
-3 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 1
-4 07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose, Adapter 1
07406-004000B Fuel Pressure Gauge 1
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
-1, -2, -3, -4

０１

ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１１０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:09:05 61TL2000_110_0003
General Troubleshooting Information

Intermittent Failures 2. If the MIL stays on, connect the HDS to the data link
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver’s side
The term intermittent failure means a system may have of the dashboard.
had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the malfunction ＊０２
indicator lamp (MIL) on the dash does not come on,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at all
connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting. If the MIL was on but then went out,
the original problem may have been intermittent.
Service Information
Periodically, new ECM/PCM software or new service
procedures may become available. Always check
online for the latest software or service information
related to the DTCs or symptoms you are
troubleshooting.
Opens and Shorts A
Open and short are common electrical terms. An open 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an
accidental connection of a wire to ground or to another 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/
wire. In simple electronics, this usually means PCM and other vehicle systems. If it doesn’t, go to
something won’t work at all. With complex electronics the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-210).
(such as ECMs or PCMs) this can sometimes mean
something works, but not the way it’s supposed to. 5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the freeze data and/or on-board
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic snapshot data, and download any data found. Then
System) refer to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting, and
begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
If the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) has come on
NOTE:
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A). • Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when
the first system malfunction, misfire, or fuel trim
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), and malfunction that activated the MIL was detected.
the engine is not started, the MIL stays on for • The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, on-board
15−20 seconds (see page 11-63). snapshot, current data, and other engine control
＊０１ module (ECM) or powertrain control module
(PCM) data.
A • For specific operations, refer to the user’s
manual that came with the HDS.
6. If no DTCs are found, go to MIL troubleshooting

(see page 11-209).
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１００００００００ＢＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:09:05 61TL2000_110_0004
General Troubleshooting Information (cont’d)

If the MIL did not stay on DTC Clear
If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability
problem, do the symptom troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
If you can’t duplicate the DTC
Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
ECM/PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is
intermittent and you can’t duplicate the code, do not 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
continue through the procedure. To do so will only 30 seconds.
result in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced
ECM/PCM. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and
disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
HDS Clear Command
ECM/PCM Reset
The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the
system even if there is no electrical power such as 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine
when the battery negative terminal is disconnected. is stopped.
Stored data based on failed parts should be cleared by
using the CLEAR COMMAND of the HDS, if parts are 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
replaced.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet 30 seconds.
this purpose. They are DTC clear, ECM/PCM reset, and
CKP pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and
DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after
reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting. 5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
The ECM/PCM reset command erases all stored DTC 11-324).
codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes,
and all specific data to correct the system except CKP
pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was
cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure.
The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP
pattern data. This command is for repair of a misfire or
the CKP sensor.
Scan Tool Clear Command

If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands,
be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the
ECM/PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time
(CKP pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze
data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all
commands, you then need to do these procedures, in
this order: ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324); CKP pattern learn procedure; test-drive to set
readiness codes to complete (see page 11-63).

08/04/09 12:09:06 61TL2000_110_0005
CKP Pattern Clear/CKP Pattern Learn Learn Procedure (without the HDS)
Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
(A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
＊０３ 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed
of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2,
or the M/T in 2nd.
3. Repeat step 2 several times.

30 seconds.
How to End a Troubleshooting Session

(required after any troubleshooting)
A 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/
PCM and other vehicle systems. If it doesn’t, go to 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-210).
4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT
MENU with the HDS. NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer
system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a
5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS, different immobilizer code. In order for the engine
and follow the screen prompts. to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with
the HDS (immobilizer system section).
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:09:07 61TL2000_110_0006

How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/ 4. Connect one side of the patch cords (A) terminals to
PCM Connectors a commercially available digital multimeter (B),
and connect the other side of the patch cord
NOTE: The ECM/PCM overwrites data and monitors the terminals to a commercially available banana jack
EVAP system for up to about 30 minutes after the (Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent)
ignition switch is turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line (C).
after turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) cancels this ＊０６
function. Disconnecting the ECM/PCM during this
function, without jumping the SCS line first, can
damage the ECM/PCM. A
2. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C.
NOTE: Canada model: When disconnecting the

ECM/PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM B
subbracket (D). C
＊０４
C 5. Gently contact the pin probe (male) at the terminal

test port from the terminal side. Do not force the
B tips into the terminals.
• For accurate results, always use the pin

probe (male).
• To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
A they can damage the terminals. Damaged
terminals cause a poor connection and an
9.8 N·m incorrect measurement.
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) • Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
D Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
3. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the electrical connections.
ECM/PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A)
above the terminal you need to check.
＊０５

08/04/09 12:09:07 61TL2000_110_0007
Substituting the ECM/PCM 5. USA, Canada models: Select the ETCS TEST, then
select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the
Special Tools Required screen prompts.
Use any one of these update tools:
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the TP POSITION
• Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure.
with HDS and CM update software
• HDS pocket tester 6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
• GNA600 and an iN workstation with HDS and CM
update software 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Use this procedure when you have to substitute 8. Remove the ECM/PCM cover (A).
a known-good ECM/PCM during troubleshooting ＊０８
procedure.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)

＊０７
9. Remove the battery setting plate (B), and reposition

the battery away from the ECM/PCM.
A
NOTE: Do not disconnect the battery terminals.

PCM and other vehicle systems. If it doesn’t, go to
the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-210). If
you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting,
skip steps 4 and 5, and the clean the throttle body
after substituting the ECM/PCM (see page 11-363).
4. USA, Canada models: Select the INSPECTION

MENU with the HDS.
(cont’d)
11-7
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 12:09:08 61TL2000_110_0008

10. Remove the bolts (D). 17. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
＊０９ software (see page 11-233).
18. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
19. USA, Canada models: If the TP POSITION CHECK

failed in step 5, clean the throttle body (see page
C 11-363).
B 20. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page

11-324).
A
21. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure.
E
D
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C, then

remove the ECM/PCM (E).
NOTE:
• ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
(A=□, B=△, C=○) embossed on them for
identification.
• Canada model: When disconnecting the ECM/
PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM
subbracket (F).
12. Install a known-good ECM/PCM in the reverse

order of removal.
NOTE: DTC P0630 (VIN Not Programmed or

Mismatch) may be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it,
and continue this procedure.
14. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the

HDS.
15. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
16. Enter the immobilizer code that you obtained from

iN or ISIS using the ECM/PCM replacement
procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the
engine.

08/04/09 12:09:08 61TL2000_110_0009
OBD Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of
each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the repair was successfully completed.
The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed
as:
• PASSED: The on board diagnosis is successfully

finished.
• FAILED: The on board diagnosis has finished but
failed.
• EXECUTING: The vehicle is in enable criteria
conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is
running.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions for the
DTC.
• OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of
the enable conditions for the DTC.

08/04/09 12:09:08 61TL2000_110_0010
DTC Troubleshooting Index

DTC Two Drive Cycle Detection Item MIL Note
(MIL indication ) Detection
P0010 (56) ――― Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) Oil Control Solenoid Valve ON (see page 11-282)
Malfunction
P0011 (56) ○ Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) System Malfunction ON (see page 11-285)
P0101 (50) ○ Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-68)
P0102 (50) ――― Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-70)
P0103 (50) ――― Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-73)
P0107 (3) ――― Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-75)
P0108 (3) ――― Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-77)
P0111 (10) ○ Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 11-80)
Problem
P0112 (10) ○ Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-81)
P0113 (10) ○ Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-83)
P0116 (86) ○ Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Range/Performance ON (see page 11-86)
Problem
P0117 (6) ――― Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-87)
P0118 (6) ――― Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-89)
P0122 (7) ――― Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-238)
P0123 (7) ――― Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-240)
P0125 (86) ○ Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow ON (see page 11-92)
Response
P0128 (87) ○ Cooling System Malfunction ON (see page 11-93)
P0133 (61) ○ Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slow Response ON (see page 11-95)
P0134 (41) ○ Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction ON (see page 11-96)
P0135 (41) ○ Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 11-97)
P0137 (63) ○ Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2)) ON (see page 11-102)
Circuit Low Voltage
Circuit High Voltage
Slow Response
Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0171 (45) ○ Fuel System Too Lean ON (see page 11-112)
P0172 (45) ○ Fuel System Too Rich ON (see page 11-112)
P0222 (7) ――― Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-243)
P0223 (7) ――― Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-246)
P0300 (75) ○ Random Misfire Detected ON (see page 11-114)
any combination
of the following
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0301 (71) ○ No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see page 11-118)
P0325 (23) ○ Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 11-124)
P0335 (4) ――― Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No Signal ON (see page 11-126)
P0339 (4) ――― Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption ON (see page 11-129)
P0340 (57) ○ Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor A No Signal ON (see page 11-287)
NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected with the HDS. Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to
come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
SCS line is jumped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.
11-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３００００００００ＧＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:09:08 61TL2000_110_0011

P0341 (57) ○ Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor A and Crankshaft Position (CKP) ON (see page 11-290)
Sensor Incorrect Phase Detected
P0344 (57) ○ Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor A Circuit Intermittent Interruption ON (see page 11-292)
P0351 (71) ――― No. 1 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 11-130)
P0365 (8) ――― Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor B Circuit No Signal ON (see page 11-134)
P0369 (8) ――― Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor B Circuit Intermittent Interruption ON (see page 11-137)
P0420 (67) ○ Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold ON (see page 11-371)
P0443 (92) ○ Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve Circuit ON (see page 11-381)
Malfunction
P0451 (91) ○ Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-385)
P0452 (91) ○ Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-386)
P0453 (91) ○ Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-389)
P0455 (90) ○ Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Large Leak Detected ON (see page 11-392)
P0456 (90) ○ Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Very Small Leak Detected ON (see page 11-392)
P0457 ――― Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detected/Fuel Fill Cap OFF (see page 11-395)
Loose or Missing
P0461 ――― Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Range/ OFF (see page 11-327)
Performance Problem
P0462 ○ Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-328)
P0463 ○ Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage OFF (see page 11-330)
P0496 (92) ○ Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System High Purge Flow Detected ON (see page 11-397)
P0497 (90) ○ Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Low Purge Flow Detected ON (see page 11-398)
P0498 (117) ○ Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit Low ON (see page 11-401)
Voltage
P0499 (117) ○ Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit High ON (see page 11-404)
Voltage
P0506 (14) ○ Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected ON (see page 11-310)
P0507 (14) ○ Idle Control System RPM Higher Than Expected ON (see page 11-312)
P050A (167) ○ Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance Problem ON (see page 11-138)
P050B (167) ○ Cold Start Ignition Timing Control System Performance Problem ON (see page 11-140)
P0532 ○ A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-314)
P0533 ○ A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage OFF (see page 11-316)
P0562 ――― Charging System Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-143)
P0563 ○ Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) OFF (see page 11-144)
Power Source Circuit Unexpected Voltage
P0602 (196) ――― Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) ON (see page 11-147)
Programming Error
Processor Malfunction
1
P060A (131) ――― Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (A/T System) Internal Control ON (see page 11-148)
Module Malfunction
P062F (131) ――― Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) ON (see page 11-148)
Internal Control Module Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error
P0630 (139) ――― VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch ON (see page 11-149)
P0685 (135) ○ Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) ON (see page 11-150)
Power Control Circuit/Internal Circuit Malfunction
1: A/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-11

08/04/09 12:09:09 61TL2000_110_0012
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont’d)

P0720 (122) 2 ○ Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 11-151)
P1009 (56) ――― Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) Advance Malfunction ON (see page 11-293)
P1109 (13) ○ Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Out of Range High ON (see page 11-155)
P1116 (86) ○ Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Range/ ON (see page 11-156)
Performance Problem
P1128 (5) ○ Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Lower Than ON (see page 11-158)
Expected
P1129 (5) ○ Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Higher Than ON (see page 11-159)
Expected
P1157 (48) ○ Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-161)
P1172 (61) ○ Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High ON (see page 11-164)
P1297 ○ Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-165)
P1298 ○ Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit High Voltage OFF (see page 11-167)
P1454 (91) ○ Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-405)
P145C (90) ○ Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Purge Flow Malfunction ON (see page 11-407)
P1549 ――― Charging System High Voltage OFF (see page 11-169)
P1658 (40) ――― Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay ON ON (see page 11-249)
Malfunction
P1659 (40) ――― Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay OFF ON (see page 11-251)
Malfunction
P1683 (40) ――― Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance Problem ON (see page 11-255)
P1684 (40) ――― Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance Problem ON (see page 11-256)
P16BB ――― Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-170)
P16BC ――― Alternator FR Terminal Circuit/IGP Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-171)
P2101 (40) ――― Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Malfunction ON (see page 11-257)
P2118 (40) ――― Throttle Actuator Current Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-259)
P2122 (37) ――― Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-263)
Sensor D) Circuit Low Voltage
P2123 (37) ――― Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-266)
Sensor D) Circuit High Voltage
P2127 (37) ――― Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-268)
Sensor E) Circuit Low Voltage
P2128 (37) ――― Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-271)
Sensor E) Circuit High Voltage
P2135 (7) ――― Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage Correlation ON (see page 11-273)
P2138 (37) ――― Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A/B (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-275)
Sensor D/E) Incorrect Voltage Correlation
P2176 (40) ――― Throttle Actuator Control System Idle Position Not Learned ON (see page 11-277)
P2183 (192) ○ Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Range/Performance ON (see page 11-174)
Problem
P2184 (192) ○ Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-176)
P2185 (192) ○ Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-178)
P2195 (48) ○ Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean ON (see page 11-181)
P2227 (13) ○ Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-183)
P2228 (13) ○ Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-184)
P2229 (13) ○ Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-185)
P2238 (48) ○ Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS＋ Line Low Voltage ON (see page 11-185)
P2252 (48) ○ Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS− Line Low Voltage ON (see page 11-187)
P2279 (109) ○ Intake Air System Leak Detected ON (see page 11-377)
2: M/T
11-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:09:09 61TL2000_110_0013

P2422 (117) ○ Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Stuck Closed ON (see page 11-405)
Malfunction
Ignition Off Internal Timer Malfunction
P2646 (22) ――― Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-294)
P2647 (22) ――― Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-297)
P2648 (21) ――― Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-300)
P2649 (21) ――― Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-302)
P2A00 (61) ○ Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-190)
U0029 (126) ――― F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF (Engine Control Module (ECM)/ ON (see page 11-191)
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)))
U0122 ――― F-CAN Malfunction (Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain OFF (see page 11-192)
Control Module (PCM)-VSA Modulator-Control Unit)
U0131 ――― F-CAN Malfunction (Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain OFF (see page 11-194)
Control Module (PCM)-EPS Control Unit)
U0155 (126) ――― F-CAN Malfunction (Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain ON (see page 11-196)
Control Module (PCM)-Gauge Control Module)
1
U0300 (131) ――― PGM-FI System and A/T System Program Version Mismatch ON (see page 11-198)
1: A/T
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-13

08/04/09 12:09:09 61TL2000_110_0014

When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

Engine will not start 1. Test the battery (see page 22-77). • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Test the starter (see page 4-9). • No ignition spark
3. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-342). • Intake air leaks
4. Troubleshoot the fuel pump circuit (see page 11-333). • Locked up engine
• Broken cam chain
• Fuel contamination
Engine will not start Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210). • Low compression
(MIL comes on and stays on, • No ignition spark
no DTCs set) • Intake vacuum
leaks
• Locked up engine
• Broken cam chain
• No power to ECM/
PCM
• No ground to ECM/
PCM
• Shorted reference
voltage
MIL comes on and stays on, Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-209).
or never comes on at all, no
DTCs set
Engine will not start Check the immobilizer system (see page 22-386).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine starts but stalls Check the immobilizer system (see page 22-386). • Camshaft timing
immediately • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set, • Intake air leaks
immobilizer indicator stays • Fuel contamination
on or flashes) • Low fuel pressure
• Weak spark
Engine is hard to start 1. Test the battery (see page 22-77). • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-342). • Intake air leaks
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363). • Fuel contamination
• Weak spark
Cold fast idle too low 1. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page • Incorrect valve
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 11-324). adjustment
2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-323). • Fuel contamination
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363).
Cold fast idle too high 1. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page • Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 11-324). • Incorrect valve
2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-323). adjustment
3. Do the throttle position learning check (see page
11-362).
11-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３００００００００ＨＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:09:09 61TL2000_110_0015

Idle speed fluctuates 1. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page • Incorrect valve
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 11-324). timing or clearance
2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-323). adjustment
3. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-362). • Intake air leaks
4. Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit (see page 11-319).
After warming up, idle speed 1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit
is below specification without (see page 11-320).
load 2. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-362).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
After warming up, idle speed 1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit
is above specification without (see page 11-320).
load 2. Inspect the APP sensor (see page 11-279).
Low power Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-342). • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) • Incorrect camshaft
timing
• Incorrect engine oil
level
• Exhaust restriction
Engine stalls 1. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page • Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 11-324). • Faulty harness and
2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-342). sensor
3. Check the idle speed (see page 11-323). connections
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal • Fuel contamination
circuit (see page 11-321).
Difficult to refuel 1. Check the fuel vent tube between the EVAP canister Malfunctioning gas
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) and the fuel tank. station filling nozzle.
2. Check the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube between
the fuel pipe and the fuel tank.
3. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-356).
Fuel overflows during Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-356). Malfunctioning gas
refueling station filling nozzle.
(No DTCs set)
Fuel cap warning message Troubleshoot the fuel cap warning message system
stays on (see page 11-408).
HDS does not communicate Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
with the ECM/PCM or the
vehicle
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-15

08/04/09 12:09:10 61TL2000_110_0016
System Description
Electronic Control System
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the engine control module (ECM) on vehicles
with manual transmissions or the powertrain control module (PCM) on vehicles with automatic transmissions.
Self-diagnosis
The ECM/PCM detects the failure of a signal from a sensor or from another control unit and stores a Temporary DTC or
a DTC. Depending on the failure, a DTC is stored in either the first or the second drive cycle. When a DTC is stored, the
ECM/PCM turns on the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by a signal sent to the gauge via F-CAN.
• One Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the ECM/PCM stores a DTC for
the failure and turns on the MIL immediately.
• Two Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit in the first drive cycle, the
ECM/PCM stores a Temporary DTC. The MIL does not come on at this time. If the failure continues in the second
drive cycle, the ECM/PCM stores a DTC and turns on the MIL.
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the ECM/PCM ignores that signal
and substitutes a pre-programmed value for them that allows the engine to continue running. This causes a DTC to be
stored and the MIL to come on.
MIL Bulb Check and Readiness Code Condition

When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the ECM/PCM turns on the MIL via the F-CAN circuit for about 15 to
20 seconds to check the bulb condition. If any readiness codes are not set to complete, the MIL flashes five times. If all
readiness codes are set to complete, the MIL goes off.
Self Shut Down (SSD) Mode

After the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the ECM/PCM stays on (about 30 minutes). If the ECM/PCM connector is
disconnected during this time, the ECM/PCM may be damaged. To cancel this mode, disconnect the negative cable
from the battery or jump the SCS line with the HDS after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
11-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３００００００００ＣＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:09:10 61TL2000_110_0017
ECM/PCM Electrical Connections

＊０１
IGNITION COIL
RELAY
ELD
P FUEL PUMP
PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 2
A B
A/C COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 1
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
BATTERY
A/C CONDENSER
FAN RELAY CIRCUIT IG1
＋B
IG2
ST
IGNITION SWITCH
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
To and START (III)
FAN CONTROL RELAY
CIRCUIT
STARTER CUT
C RELAY
P
UNDER-HOOD *1
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
No. 1 BATTERY (100 A) D
No. 17 FI MAIN (15 A)
No. 3-1 IG MAIN (50 A)
No. 15 BACK UP (10 A)
No. 12 STOP (15 A) E F G H I
No. 13 IG COIL (15 A)
ECM/PCM
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH PGM-FI
FUSE/RELAY BOX: A9 IGP IMOFPR A16 SUBRELAY
No. 7 ACG (15 A)
No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) PG1 B10 J
No. 16 A/C (7.5 A)
No. 10 VB SOL (10 A)
C10 IG1 PG2 B1
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX: MRLY A7
No. 21 OIL LVL (7.5 A)
No. 14 FI SUB (15 A) A24 ELD SUBRLY A22 ETCS CONTROL
No. 18 DBW (ETCS) RELAY
(15 A)
A15 ACC ETCSRLY A21
*1: M/T A6 FANH PGMETCS C2 *1

*2: A/T
A5 FANL
A1 VBSOL IG1ETCS C1 CLUTCH

INTERLOCK
SWITCH
*2 K
*2
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-17

08/04/09 12:09:11 61TL2000_110_0018
System Description (cont’d)

ECM/PCM Electrical Connections (cont’d)
＊０２
D MAP SENSOR
No. 1 INJECTOR VCC1 C13
C5 INJ1 MAP C11
SG1 C14
No. 2 INJECTOR
C6 INJ2
NC B38
No. 3 INJECTOR
C7 INJ3 OUTPUT SHAFT

(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
No. 4 INJECTOR E
C8 INJ4 MAF SENSOR
VG＋ B31
VG− B33
IAT B32
SG2 B34 IAT SENSOR
ECT SENSOR 1
ECT1 B24
BARO SENSOR *2
(Built into
the ECM/PCM)
L M
KNOCK SENSOR
KS C46
C31 CMPB
N
CMP SENSOR B
OPSW B7
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
C32 CKP
CKP SENSOR
*2: A/T
11-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:09:11 61TL2000_110_0019
＊０３
G J
EVAP CANISTER AFSHTC C9

VENT SHUT VALVE
AFS＋ C29
A11 VSV
F AFS− C30
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE A/F SENSOR
(SENSOR 1)
L
B3 PCS
SHO2S B36
SO2SHTC B4
SECONDARY
N HO2S
ALTERNATOR
(SENSOR 2)
B46 ALTL LG1 C44
B47 ALTF LG2 C48

O
B45 ALTC
CMP SENSOR A
B CMPA C45
To
SPARK C15 IGPLS1
PLUG ICM
VTC OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
No. 1 IGNITION COIL
VTC C23
To
SPARK
PLUG C16 IGPLS2
ICM ROCKER ARM
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
No. 2 IGNITION COIL
VTPSW C22
To
SPARK C17 IGPLS3
PLUG ICM
No. 3 IGNITION COIL ROCKER ARM

OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID
To
SPARK C18 IGPLS4 VTS B35
PLUG ICM
No. 4 IGNITION COIL
To MICU,
S-NET5V A46 IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-19

08/04/09 12:09:12 61TL2000_110_0020

＊０４
FTP SENSOR
A20 VCC6 C H
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
A27 FTP
A10 SG6 BKSW A42
BKSWNC A41
ECT SENSOR 2
A34 ECT2
VSSOUT A30 To
NAVIGATION UNIT
NEP A29 To EPS
CONTROL UNIT
A17 ACPD
A/C PRESSURE
SENSOR *1
CRMTCLS A43
CLUTCH PEDAL
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE POSITION SWITCH
A3 CANH
A4 CANL
To SRS UNIT,
TPMS CONTROL UNIT,
VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT,
EPS CONTROL UNIT,
NAVIGATION UNIT,
YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR I
A O
MCS C40
ENGINE MOUNT
A44 WEN CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
DATA LINK A32 SCS
CONNECTOR
To MICU,
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT,
VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT,
TPMS CONTROL UNIT,
EPS CONTROL UNIT
*1: M/T
11-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:09:12 61TL2000_110_0021
＊０５
TP SENSOR
C12 VCC3
B A C20 TPSA VCC4 A26
C21 TPSB APSA A18
SG4 A36 A
C43 SG3
C4 ETCSM＋ VCC5 A25
C3 ETCSM− APSB A19 B

THROTTLE
ACTUATOR APP SENSOR A/B
SG5 A35
THROTTLE
BODY
*2
PADDLE SHIFTER＋
(UPSHIFT SWITCH)
A47 SUPP
A48 SDNP
*1
PADDLE SHIFTER−
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
RVS C27
REVERSE LOCK
SOLENOID
VALVE
*1: M/T
*2: A/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-21

08/04/09 12:09:13 61TL2000_110_0022

＊０６
M
VCC2 B19
NM B18
*2
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
K SPEED SENSOR
ATFT B28
B14 ATPP
B15 ATPR ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR

P SHA B11
B13 ATPN
R
SHIFT SOLENOID
N B22 ATPD VALVE A
D SHB B12
B16 ATPS
S SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
SHC B21
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
SHD B27
B29 ATPFWD
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
TRANSMISSION B23 ATPRVS
RANGE SWITCH SHE B25
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE E
LSA B48 A/T CLUTCH

PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
2ND CLUTCH VALVE A
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH LSB B40 A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
B8 OP2SW SOLENOID
VALVE B
3RD CLUTCH LSC B26 A/T CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
PRESSURE SWITCH CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE C
B9 OP3SW
To A28 SLS
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
*2: A/T
ECM/PCM A (□) (49P) ECM/PCM B (△) (49P) ECM/PCM C (○) (49P)
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
11-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:09:14 61TL2000_110_0023
Vacuum Hose Routing
＊０７
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL To
SOLENOID VALVE BRAKE BOOSTER
To
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER
To
FRONT
ENGINE
MOUNT
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE
VALVE
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-23

08/04/09 12:09:14 61TL2000_110_0024

Vacuum Distribution
＊０８
20
2 ATMOSPHERE
21
ATMOSPHERE
3 5
1 4 22
10
17
12
18
11 23
19
6
13
14 ENGINE 24
COOLANT
7
25
15
16
FUEL TANK KNOCK SENSOR

FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV)
FULE PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE
FUEL PUMP CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
FUEL FILTER EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1) PURGE VALVE
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER MAINFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
(WU-TWC) THROTTLE BODY
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
(SECONDARY HO2S) (SENSOR 2) VENT SHUT VALVE
UNDER FLOOR THREE WAY CATALYTIC FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
CONVERTER (TWC) EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
INJECTOR MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR/INTAKE AIR
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR B TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR A AIR CLEANER
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) INTAKE AIR RESONATOR
SENSOR 1
11-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:09:15 61TL2000_110_0025
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (□) (49P)

＊０９
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about 12 V.
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
1 1 WHT/RED VBSOL (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valves
3 WHT CANH (CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): pulses (about 2.5 V)
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL signal
HIGH)
4 RED CANL (CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): pulses (about 2.5 V)
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL signal
LOW)
5 GRN/RED FANL (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay With radiator fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With radiator fan stopped: battery voltage
6 YEL/RED FANH (RADIATOR FAN Drives A/C condenser fan With radiator A/C condenser fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) relay With radiator A/C condenser fan stopped:
battery voltage
7 RED/BLK MRLY (PGM-FI MAIN Drives PGM-FI main relay 1 With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
RELAY 1) With ignition switch OFF: battery voltage
9 YEL/BLK IGP (POWER SOURCE) Power source for ECM/PCM With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
circuit
10 BLK SG6 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
11 RED VSV (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister vent With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
EMISSION (EVAP) shut valve
CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE)
15 PUR ACC (A/C COMPRESSOR Drives A/C compressor With compressor ON: about 0 V
CLUTCH RELAY) clutch relay With compressor OFF: battery voltage
16 GRY/BLK IMOFPR (IMMOBILIZER Drives PGM-FI main relay 2 About 0 V for 2 seconds after turning ignition switch
FUEL PUMP RELAY) ON (II), then battery voltage
With engine running: about 0 V
1: A/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-25

08/04/09 12:09:15 61TL2000_110_0026

＊１０

number
17 BLU ACPD (A/C PRESSURE Detects A/C pressure With A/C switch ON: about 1.4−4.8 V
SENSOR) sensor signal (depending on A/C pressure)
18 YEL/BLK APSA (ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor A signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) pressed: about 4.8 V
SENSOR A) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: about 1.0 V
19 BLK APSB (ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor B signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) pressed: about 2.4 V
SENSOR B) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
20 YEL VCC6 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
21 WHT ETCSRLY (ELECTRONIC Drives electronic throttle With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
THROTTLE CONTROL control system (ETCS)
SYSTEM (ETCS) CONTROL control relay
RELAY)
22 RED/YEL SUBRLY (PGM-FI Drives PGM-FI subrelay With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SUBRELAY) relay
24 BLU/BLK ELD (ELECTRICAL LOAD Detects ELD signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1−4.8 V
DETECTOR (ELD)) (depending on electrical load)
11-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:09:15 61TL2000_110_0027

＊１１

number
25 BRN/WHT VCC5 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
26 RED/BLK VCC4 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
27 LT GRN FTP (FUEL TANK Detects FTP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap
PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR) removed: about 2.5 V
1
28 PNK SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in P, brake pedal
SOLENOID) pressed, and accelerator released: about 0 V
29 BLK NEP (ENGINE SPEED Outputs engine speed With engine running: pulses
SIGNAL) signal
30 BLU VSSOUT (VEHICLE SPEED Sends vehicle speed signal Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SIGNAL OUTPUT)
32 ORN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With service check signal shorted using the HDS:
SIGNAL) about 0 V
With service check signal opened: about 5.0 V
34 YEL/RED ECT2 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 2 signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1−4.8 V
TEMPERATURE (ECT) (depending on engine coolant temperature)
SENSOR 2)
35 GRN SG5 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
36 BLU/RED SG4 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
1: A/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-27

08/04/09 12:09:16 61TL2000_110_0028

＊１２

number
41 ORN BKSWNC (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal released: battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
pressed: about 0 V
42 LT GRN BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: about 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
2
43 BRN CRMTCLS (CRUISE Detects clutch pedal With ignition switch ON (II) and clutch pedal
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION position switch signal released: about 0 V
SWITCH SIGNAL) With ignition switch ON (II) and clutch pedal
pressed: battery voltage
44 RED WEN (WRITE ENABLE Detects write enable signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SIGNAL)
46 LT GRN S-NET5V (SERIAL Sends serial With ignition switch ON (II): pulses (about 4.4 V)
COMMUNICATION FOR communication signal With key removed from the ignition switch:
IMMOBILIZER) about 1.4 V
1
47 LT BLU SUPP (PADDLE SHIFTER＋ Detects (paddle shifter＋ With paddle shifter＋ (upshift switch) pressed:
(UPSHIFT SWITCH)) (upshift switch)) signal about 0 V
With paddle shifter＋ (upshift switch) released:
battery voltage
1
48 PUR SDNP (PADDLE SHIFTER− Detects (paddle shifter− With paddle shifter− (downshift switch) pressed:
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)) (downshift switch)) signal about 0 V
With paddle shifter− (downshift switch) released:
battery voltage
1: A/T
2: M/T
11-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:09:16 61TL2000_110_0029
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (△) (49P)

＊１３

number
1 BLK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for ECM/ Less than 0.5 V at all times
PCM
3 YEL/BLU PCS (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister purge With engine running, engine coolant below 131 °F
EMISSION (EVAP) valve (55 °C): battery voltage
CANISTER PURGE VALVE) With engine running, engine coolant above 131 °F
(55 °C): duty controlled
4 BLK/WHT SO2SHTC (SECONDARY Drives secondary HO2S With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR heater (sensor 2) With fully warmed up engine running:
(SECONDARY HO2S) duty controlled
HEATER (SENSOR 2))
7 YEL/RED OPSW (OIL PRESSURE Detects engine oil pressure With ignition switch ON: about 0 V
SWITCH) signal With engine running: battery voltage
1
8 BLU/RED OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH Detects 2nd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure Without 2nd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch input With 2nd clutch pressure: about 0 V
1
9 BLU/WHT OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH Detects 3rd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure Without 3rd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch input With 3rd clutch pressure: about 0 V
10 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for ECM/ Less than 0.5 V at all times
PCM
1
11 BLU/BLK SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in R, D (in 1st, 4th, and 5th
VALVE A) valve A gears) D3 (in 1st), and 1: battery voltage
With engine running in P, N, D, and D3 (in 2nd and
3rd gears) and 2: about 0 V
1
12 GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in P, R, N, D, and D3 (in 1st and
VALVE B) valve B 2nd gears), 2, and 1: battery voltage
With engine running in D (in 3rd, 4th, 5th gears), D3
(in 3rd gear), 2 and 1: about 0 V
1
13 RED/BLK ATPN (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In N: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH N) switch N position signal In any position other than N: around battery voltage.
input But can be between 5 V and battery voltage
1
14 BLU/BLK ATPP (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In P: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH P) P position signal input In any position other than P: around battery voltage.
But can be between 5 V and battery voltage
1
15 WHT ATPR (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R) switch R position signal In any position other than R: around battery voltage.
input But can be between 5 V and battery voltage
1
16 RED ATPS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In S: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH S) switch S position signal In any position other than S: battery voltage
input
1: A/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-29

08/04/09 12:09:17 61TL2000_110_0030

＊１４

number
18 1 WHT/RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor With engine idling in N position: about 2.5 V
SENSOR) signal
1
19 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
1
21 GRN SHC (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in N, D (in 1st,
VALVE C) valve C 3rd, and 5th gears), D3 (in 1st and 3rd gears), and 1:
battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, D (in 2nd and 4th
gears), D3 (in 2nd gear), and 2: about 0 V
1
22 YEL/GRN ATPD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D) switch D position signal In any position other than D: battery voltage
input
1
23 RED/WHT ATPRVS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH RVS) switch RVS signal input In any position other than R: battery voltage
24 RED/WHT ECT1 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 1 signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1−4.8 V
TEMPERATURE (ECT) (depending on engine coolant temperature)
SENSOR 1)
1
25 YEL SHE (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in P and R: battery voltage
VALVE E) valve E With engine running in R (Reverse inhibit in R), N, D,
D3, 2, and 1 (in 1st gear): about 0 V
1
26 BLU/YEL LSC (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C
SOLENOID VALVE C)
1
27 GRN/RED SHD (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in P, R, N, D (in 1st, 3rd and 4th
VALVE D) valve D gears), D3 (in 1st and 3rd gears), and 1: about 0V
With engine running in D (in 2nd and 5th gears), D3
(in 2nd gear), and 2: battery voltage
1
28 RED/YEL ATFT (ATF TEMPERATURE Detects ATF temperature With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.2−4.8 V
SENSOR) signal (about 1.8 V at operating temperature)
(depending on ATF temperature)
1
29 BLU/YEL ATPFWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D and S: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH FWD) switch FWD position signal In any position other than D and S:
battery voltage
1: A/T
11-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:09 61TL2000_110_0031

＊１５

number
31 RED/BLK VG＋ (MASS AIR FLOW Detects MAF sensor signal At idle: about 1.3 V
(MAF) SENSOR ＋SIDE)
32 RED/YEL IAT (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1−4.0 V
TEMPERATURE (IAT) (about 1.8 V at normal operating temperature)
SENSOR)
33 BLK/BLU VG− (MASS AIR FLOW Ground for MAF sensor Less than 0.5 V at all times
(MAF) SENSOR −SIDE) signal
34 GRN/BLK SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
35 GRN/YEL VTS (ROCKER ARM OIL Drives rocker arm oil At idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID) control solenoid
36 WHT/RED SHO2S (SECONDARY Detects secondary HO2S With throttle fully opened from idle with fully
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (sensor 2) signal warmed up engine: above 0.8 V
(SECONDARY HO2S) While throttle quickly closed: below 0.1 V
SENSOR 2)
38 BLK/WHT NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V or 5.0 V
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor While driving: pulses
SENSOR) signal
1
40 BRN LSB (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B)
45 WHT/GRN ALTC (ALTERNATOR Sends alternator control With fully warmed up engine running: about 7.5 V
CONTROL) signal
46 WHT/BLU ALTL (ALTERNATOR L Detects alternator L signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SIGNAL) With engine running: battery voltage
47 WHT/RED ALTF (ALTERNATOR FR Detects alternator FR signal With engine running: about 0.5−3.0 V
SIGNAL) (depending on electrical load)
1
48 RED/BLK LSA (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve A
SOLENOID VALVE A)
1: A/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-31

08/04/09 12:10:10 61TL2000_110_0032

ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (○) (49P)
＊１６

number
1 YEL/GRN IG1ETCS (IGNITION Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SIGNAL ETCS)
2 BLK PGMETCS (POWER Ground circuit for ECM/ Less than 0.5 V at all times
GROUND ETCS) PCM
3 GRN/YEL ETCSM− (THROTTLE Ground for throttle actuator With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
ACTUATOR −SIDE) released: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
pressed: about 2.0 V
4 BLU/RED ETCSM＋ (THROTTLE Drives throttle actuator With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
ACTUATOR ＋SIDE) released: about 0 V
pressed: about 0.5 V
5 BRN INJ1 (No. 1 INJECTOR) Drives No. 1 injector With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
6 RED INJ2 (No. 2 INJECTOR) Drives No. 2 injector At idle: duty controlled
7 BLU INJ3 (No. 3 INJECTOR) Drives No. 3 injector
8 YEL INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR) Drives No. 4 injector
9 GRN AFSHTC (AIR FUEL RATIO Drives A/F sensor heater With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
(A/F) SENSOR HEATER (sensor 1) With fully warmed up engine running: pulses
CONTROL (SENSOR 1))
10 BLK/RED IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
11 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 3.0 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
(MAP) SENSOR)
12 BLU VCC3 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
13 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
14 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
15 YEL/GRN IGPLS1 (No. 1 IGNITION Drives No. 1 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
COIL PULSE) With engine running: pulses
16 BLU/RED IGPLS2 (No. 2 IGNITION Drives No. 2 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
17 WHT/BLU IGPLS3 (No. 3 IGNITION Drives No. 3 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
18 BRN IGPLS4 (No. 4 IGNITION Drives No. 4 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
20 RED/BLK TPSA (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor A signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
POSITION (TP) SENSOR A) pressed: about 3.9 V
21 RED/BLU TPSB (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor B signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
POSITION (TP) SENSOR B) pressed: about 4.1 V
11-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:10 61TL2000_110_0033
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (○) (49P)

＊１７

number
22 BLU/BLK VTPSW (ROCKER ARM OIL Detects rocker arm oil At idle: about 0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) pressure switch signal
23 BLU/WHT VTC (VTC OIL CONTROL Drives VTC oil control With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve
2
27 GRN/BLK RVS (REVERSE LOCK Drives reverse lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SOLENOID VALVE) valve
29 RED AFS＋ (AIR FUEL RATIO Detects A/F sensor At idle: about 2.2 V
(A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1) (sensor 1) signal
＋SIDE)
30 RED/YEL AFS− (AIR FUEL RATIO Detects A/F sensor At idle: about 1.8 V
(A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1) (sensor 1) signal
−SIDE)
31 GRN CMPB (CAMSHAFT Detects CMP sensor B With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CMP) SENSOR signal
B)
32 BLU/YEL CKP (CRANKSHAFT Detects CKP sensor signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CKP) SENSOR)
40 BLU/YEL MCS (ENGINE MOUNT Drives engine mount At idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID control solenoid Above idle: battery voltage
VALVE) With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
43 GRN SG3 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
44 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for ECM/ Less than 0.5 V at all times
PCM circuit
45 BLU/WHT CMPA (CAMSHAFT Detects CMP sensor A With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CMP) SENSOR signal
A)
46 RED/BLU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects knock sensor signal With engine knocking: pulses
48 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for ECM/ Less than 0.5 V at all times
PCM circuit
2: M/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-33

08/04/09 12:10:12 61TL2000_110_0034

PGM-FI System Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by
The programmed fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing, timing for
sequential multiport fuel injection system. the fuel injection of each cylinder, and engine misfire
detection.
Alternator Control ＊２０
The alternator signals the ECM/PCM during charging. TERMINAL O-RING
The ECM/PCM then controls the voltage generated at
the alternator according to the electrical load MAGNET
determined by the Electrical Load Detector (ELD) and
driving mode. This reduces engine load to improve fuel
economy.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay

When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling
from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from
being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure
smooth transition to the A/C mode.
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensors 1 and 2
The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent
A/F sensor is installed upstream of the warm up three resistors (thermistors). The resistance decreases as the
way catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals engine coolant temperature increases.
to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel
injection accordingly. ECT sensor 1
＊１８＊２１
ZIRCONIA SENSOR
ELEMENT TERMINALS
THERMISTOR
HEATER
TERMINALS
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor TERMINAL

The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts O-RING O-RING
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that
modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection
discharge. ECT sensor 2
＊２２
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor B
CMP sensor B detects the position of the No. 1 cylinder
as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each
cylinder.
＊１９ TERMINAL
O-RING
TERMINAL THERMISTOR
O-RING
MAGNET
11-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:12 61TL2000_110_0035
Ignition Timing Control Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation
The ECM/PCM contains the memory for basic ignition to Readiness Codes)
timing at various engine speeds and manifold absolute The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of
pressures. It also adjusts the timing according to engine the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If
coolant temperature and intake air temperature. the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has
Injector Timing and Duration been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part
The ECM/PCM contains the memory for basic discharge of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are
duration at various engine speeds and manifold set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete,
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be
read out from the memory, is further modified by finished.
signals sent from various sensors to obtain the final
discharge duration. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete,
By monitoring long term fuel trim, the ECM/PCM can turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the
detect long term malfunctions in the fuel system and engine. The MIL will come on for 15−20 seconds. If it
set DTCs (diagnostic trouble codes) if needed. then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it
flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not
Knock Sensor complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the
The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to engine as described in the procedures (see page 11-63).
minimize knock.
＊２３ Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature
TERMINAL
(IAT) Sensor
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature
(IAT) sensor contains a hot wire sensor, a cold wire
sensor and a thermistor. It is located in the intake air
passage. The resistance of the hot wire sensor, a cold
PIEZO wire sensor and thermistor changes due to intake air
ELEMENT temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF
sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set
DIAPHRAGM temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the
control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM.
＊２５
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressures O-RING IAT SENSOR
into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. (THERMISTOR)
＊２４
HOT WIRE
SENSOR
COLD WIRE
SENSOR
TERMINAL
O-RING
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-35

08/04/09 12:10:13 61TL2000_110_0036

Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Electronic Throttle Control System
This sensor detects countershaft speed.
The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic
M/T throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to
＊２６ see a functional layout of the system.
TERMINAL
Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM

MAGNET
controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle
speed according to engine loads.
Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is

pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve
depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor signal.
O-RINGS Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle

actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control
A/T is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the
＊２７ cruise control actuator.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor

As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor
varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM.
＊２９
MAGNET
O-RING APP SENSOR A/B
TERMINAL
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S)

The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the warm up three way
catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to the
ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection
accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an
internal heater. The ECM/PCM compares the HO2S
output with the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst
efficiency. The secondary HO2S is installed ACCELERATOR
downstream of the WU-TWC. PEDAL MODULE
＊２８
ZIRCONIA SENSOR
ELEMENT HEATER TERMINALS
HEATER
TERMINALS
11-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:14 61TL2000_110_0037
Throttle Body Fuel Supply System

The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine Fuel Cutoff Control
coolant from the cylinder head to prevent icing of the During deceleration with the throttle valve closed,
throttle plate. current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel
＊３０ economy at engine speeds over 850 rpm (A/T) or
THROTTLE VALVE
1,000 rpm (M/T). Fuel cutoff also occurs when the
engine speed exceeds 7,300 rpm regardless of the
position of the throttle valve, to protect the engine from
over-revving. When the vehicle is stopped, the ECM/
PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds over 5,100 rpm (A/T),
7,100 rpm (M/T). On a cold engine, fuel cut occurs at a
lower engine speed.
Fuel Pump Control

When the ignition is turned on, the ECM/PCM grounds
PGM-FI main relay 2 which feeds current to the fuel
pump for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With
the engine running, the ECM/PCM grounds PGM-FI
THROTTLE POSITION
(TP) SENSOR and main relay 2 and feeds current to the fuel pump. When
THROTTLE ACTUATOR the engine is not running and the ignition is on, the
ECM/PCM cuts ground to PGM-FI main relay 2 which
Idle Control System cuts current to the fuel pump.
When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2
transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, or PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition
the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM sends signals switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/
to the throttle actuator to maintain the correct idle PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI
speed. main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to
supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the
Brake Pedal Position Switch ignition switch is turned to ON (II), and when the engine
The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM is cranking or running.
when the brake pedal is pressed.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-37

08/04/09 12:10:14 61TL2000_110_0038

i-VTEC
• The i-VTEC system has a variable valve timing control (VTC) mechanism on the intake camshaft in addition to the
usual VTEC.
This system improves fuel efficiency and reduces exhaust emissions at all levels of engine speed, vehicle speed,
and engine load.
• The VTEC system changes the intake valve lift and timing by using more than one cam profile.
• The VTC system changes the phase of the intake camshaft via oil pressure. It changes the intake valve timing
continuously.
＊３１
HIGH
LOW SPEED CAM HIGH SPEED CAM
TORQUE CURVE
ENGINE
LOAD
LOW
LOW ENGINE SPEED HIGH
Driving Condition VTC Control Description

Light-load Base Position For stable combustion the cam angle is retarded, and
reduces the entry of exhaust gas into the cylinder.
Medium/high-load Advance Control Cam phase angle is controlled to optimize valve
timing, improving fuel efficiency and reducing
emissions.
High speed Advance-Base Position To reduce pumping loss, the intake valve is closed
quickly. This gives the air/fuel mixture a charging
effect that helps to maximize engine power.
11-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:14 61TL2000_110_0039
VTC System
• The VTC system makes continuous intake valve timing changes based on operating conditions.
• Intake valve timing is optimized to allow the engine to produce maximum power.
• Cam angle is advanced to obtain the EGR effect and reduce pumping loss. The intake valve is closed quickly to
reduce the entry of the air/fuel mixture into the intake port and improve the charging effect.
• The system reduces the cam advance at idle, stabilizes combustion, and reduces engine speed.
• If a malfunction occurs, the VTC system control is disabled and the valve timing is fixed at the fully retarded position.
＊３２
TDC
MAXIMUM VTC ADVANCE 50 ° MAXIMUM VTC ADVANCE 50 °
IN 2
IN 1
EX
IN 1
EX
IN 2
SHORT OVERLAP
LONG OVERLAP
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-39

08/04/09 12:10:15 61TL2000_110_0040

VTC System Diagram
The VTC oil control solenoid valve controls oil pressure to the advance chamber/retard chamber of the VTC actuator
according to a signal from the ECM/PCM. When the VTC actuator vanes rotate to the advance or retard position, the
intake camshaft timing is changed.
CMP sensor A detects the intake camshaft angle and sends the information to the ECM/PCM. The ECM/PCM controls
the VTC oil control solenoid valve as the intake camshaft angle changes.
＊３３
VANE ROTATION
RETARD ADVANCE
ADVANCE CHAMBER
RETARD CHAMBER
VTC ACTUATOR
INTAKE CAMSHAFT
INTAKE CMP SENSOR A
CAMSHAFT HOUSING
HOLDER VANE IG1
LG
ADVANCE LINE
RETARD LINE
VTC
(CONTROL) CMPA
DRAIN DRAIN
PG (SIGNAL)
ECM/
VTC OIL CONTROL PCM
SOLENOID VALVE VARIOUS
SENSORS
GND
To
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
VALVE VTC STRAINER
From
OIL PUMP
11-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:15 61TL2000_110_0041
VTEC System
Intake valve side
• The VTEC system changes the cam profile to correspond to engine speed. It maximizes torque at low engine speed
and output at high engine speed.
• The low lift cam is used at low engine speeds, and the high lift cam is used at high engine speeds.
• The rocker arm oil control solenoid switches the intake valve side of the VTEC system on and off; the solenoid is
controlled by the ECM/PCM.
• The rocker arm oil pressure switch detects VTEC system oil pressure and sends this information to the ECM/PCM.
ENGINE SPEED ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE INTAKE VALVE LIFT
SOLENOID SWITCH
LOW OFF ON LOW
HIGH ON OFF HIGH
＊３４
ROCKER ARM
LOW ENGINE SPEED OIL CONTROL VALVE
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID
ROCKER ARM
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
EX IN (LOW LIFT)
HIGH ENGINE SPEED
EX IN (HIGH LIFT)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-41

08/04/09 12:10:16 61TL2000_110_0042

VTEC System Operation
At low engine speed, the rocker arm oil control solenoid is turned off by the ECM/PCM. Oil pressure from the rocker
arm oil control valve does not enter the intake rocker shaft. Each intake rocker arm is separated by a return spring and
lifted by each low lift cam lobe.
＊３５
LOW LIFT CAM LOBE
LOW LIFT CAM LOBE
ROCKER ARM ECM/PCM

OIL CONTROL
INTAKE SOLENOID
ROCKER SHAFT
RETURN
SPRING
From VALVE
VTEC SWITCHING OIL PUMP
PISTON
INTAKE
INTAKE PRIMARY SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM ROCKER ARM
INTAKE MID ROCKER ARM
At high engine speed, the rocker arm oil control solenoid is turned on by the ECM/PCM. Oil pressure from the rocker
arm control solenoid enters into the primary intake rocker arm via the intake rocker shaft, and it moves the VTEC
switching piston in the rocker arm.
This causes the VTEC switching piston to slide into the intake mid rocker arm and the intake secondary rocker arm,
locking the rocker arms together. Both intake rocker arms are lifted by the high lift cam lobe.
＊３６
HIGH LIFT CAM LOBE
ROCKER ARM ECM/PCM

OIL CONTROL
INTAKE SOLENOID
ROCKER SHAFT
From
VTEC SWITCHING OIL PUMP
PISTON
INTAKE VALVE
INTAKE PRIMARY SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM ROCKER ARM
INTAKE MID ROCKER ARM
11-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:16 61TL2000_110_0043
Catalytic Converter System Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU-TWC) The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping
and Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake
The WU-TWC/TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon manifold.
monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the ＊３９
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), and BREATHER
PIPE
water vapor.
WU-TWC (ATTACHED TO THE CYLINDER HEAD)

INTAKE
＊３７ MANIFOLD
PCV HOSE
HOUSING
: BLOW-BY VAPOR
: FRESH AIR
WARM UP
THREE WAY
CATALYST PCV VALVE
TWC (UNDER THE FLOOR)

＊３８
HOUSING
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
UNDER-FLOOR
THREE WAY
CATALYST
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-43

08/04/09 12:10:17 61TL2000_110_0044

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
System The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM.
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout ＊４１
of the system. SENSOR UNIT
TERMINAL
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
the fuel tank until it can be purged back into the engine
and burned.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve

When the engine coolant temperature is below 131 °F
(55 °C), the ECM/PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge
valve which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister.
＊４０
OUT O-RING
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve

The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP
canister.
The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls the venting
of the EVAP canister.
＊４２
TERMINAL
TERMINAL COIL
IN
O-RING VALVE O-RING
11-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:18 61TL2000_110_0045
Fuel Cap Warning Message To make the message go off (with the HDS)
The ECM/PCM will detect a loose or missing fuel fill cap Procedure
as an evaporative system leak and alerts the driver by
showing a warning message in the gauge display. 1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
The first time a leak is detected, a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP 2. Clear the Temporary DTC with the HDS.
message appears on the multi-information display (A).
To scroll to another message, press the select/reset 3. Verify there is no leak by doing the EVAP
button. The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message will appear FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
each time you restart the engine until the system turns the HDS.
the message off. Turn the engine off, then replace or
tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least once. To make the message go off (without the
＊４３ HDS)
Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.

Shows TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
in the multi-information display. 2. Start the engine, then turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0).
3. Repeat step 2 two more times.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-45

08/04/09 12:10:18 61TL2000_110_0046

Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram
The electronic throttle control system consists of the throttle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor A/B, accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor A/B, the electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay, and the ECM/PCM.
＊４４
APP IG1 From
SENSOR A VCC ETCS ETCS CONTROL
APSA RELAY
SG
VARIOUS
APP ECM/ SENSORS
SENSOR B VCC PCM
APSB THROTTLE
BODY TP SENSOR A
SG
VCC
PGM TPSA TP SENSOR B
ETCS
TPSB
SG
THROTTLE
ETCSM＋ ACTUATOR
M
ETCSM−
11-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:19 61TL2000_110_0047
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram

The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned.
The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold.
The purging vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which operates whenever the engine coolant
temperature is above 131 °F (55 °C).
＊４５
FUEL TANK VAPOR FUEL TANK VAPOR EVAP CANISTER
RECIRCULATION CONTROL VALVE VENT SHUT VALVE
TUBE FTP ＋B
SENSOR ＋B (From
(POWER) PGM-FI
SUBRELAY)
ATMOSPHERE
VSV
EVAP (CONTROL)
ATMOSPHERE
CANISTER
VCC
FUEL TANK VARIOUS
FTP (SIGNAL) ECM/PCM SENSORS
FUEL FILL
CAP SG
EVAP CANISTER LG, PG

PURGE VALVE (GROUND)
PCS
(CONTROL)
IG1
IG1 (From
(POWER) No. 7 ACG
(15A) FUSE)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-47

08/04/09 12:10:19 61TL2000_110_0048

ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram
＊４６
ECM/PCM 24P JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
C5 2
BRN
INJ1
No. 1 INJECTOR
1
YEL/BLK
C6 2
RED
INJ2
No. 2 INJECTOR
1
YEL/BLK
C7 2
BLU
INJ3
No. 3 INJECTOR
1
YEL/BLK
C8 2
YEL
INJ4
No. 4 INJECTOR
5V 3
BLK/YEL
C45 1
BLU/WHT
CMPA
YEL/BLK 2
BRN/YEL
2 3
CMP SENSOR A
B C
C101
3
YEL/BLK
8 7
C31 1
GRN
CMPB
YEL/ YEL/ 2
BLK BLK BRN/YEL
CMP SENSOR B
C104
3 3
YEL/BLK
C32 1 1
BLU/YEL BLU
CKP
2 2
BRN/YEL
CKP SENSOR
A9
YEL/BLK
IGP YEL/ YEL/ YEL/ BRN/
BLK BLK BLK YEL
A E D F
11-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:20 61TL2000_110_0049
＊４７
12 V
B35 2
GRN/YEL GRN/YEL
VTS 1
BLK
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID
C22 1
BLU/BLK BLU/BLK
VTPSW 2
BRN/YEL
ROCKER ARM
OIL PRESSURE
K SWITCH
BLK
C23 2
BLU/WHT BLU/WHT
VTC
1
BLK
VTC OIL CONTROL

BLK SOLENOID VALVE
*2
C2
BLK
PGMETCS
B10
BLK
PG1
B1
BLK
PG2
BLK BLK BLK BLK
G H I J
*2: A/T G101
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-49

08/04/09 12:10:20 61TL2000_110_0050

ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont’d)
＊４８
C D K F
BRN/ BRN/ BRN/ BRN/

YEL YEL YEL YEL C101
C44 3 6
BRN/YEL BRN/YEL BRN
LG1
C48 4
BRN/YEL BRN/YEL
LG2
5
BRN/YEL
6
BRN/YEL
L M
BRN/YEL
G101
C102
C46 10
1
RED/BLU RED/BLU
KS
KNOCK SENSOR
2
LT GRN Brake pedal pressed: closed
1 Brake pedal released: open
RED/BLU
3
BLK/RED Brake pedal pressed: open
A41 4 Brake pedal released: closed
ORN ORN
BKSWNC
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
O N P
*1
A43 2
BRN Clutch pedal pressed: open
CRMTCLS 3 Clutch pedal released: closed
BLK
CLUTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
G302
*1: M/T
11-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:21 61TL2000_110_0051
＊４９
E
B31 1
RED/BLK RED/BLK
VG＋ 2 MAF
BLK/BLU SENSOR
B33 3
BLK/BLU YEL/BLK
VG−
4
GRN/BLK IAT
B32 5 SENSOR
RED/YEL RED/YEL
IAT
*1 12P JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
9 11 12 10
*2
B34
GRN/BLK
SG2
Q R S
2
GRN/BLK
B24 1
RED/WHT RED/WHT
ECT1
ECT SENSOR 1
B38 24P
BLK/WHT JUNCTION
NC
CONNECTOR
C13 15 14 13 18 17 16
1
YEL/RED YEL/RED
VCC1 2
GRN/RED
3
GRN/WHT
C11
GRN/RED MAP SENSOR
MAP
C14
GRN/WHT
SG1
1
YEL/RED
2
BLK/WHT
3
GRN/WHT
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
C40 1
BLU/YEL BLU/YEL
MCS
2
BLK/YEL
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
T VALVE
*1: M/T
*2: A/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-51

08/04/09 12:10:22 61TL2000_110_0052

＊５０
T B
21
BLK/YEL
24 2
BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
19 7 V
BLK/YEL
20 6
BLK/YEL
U 17 22 1
23 12P JUNCTION
C101 3 CONNECTOR
4
22
24P JUNCTION 5
BLK/
RED CONNECTOR
*2 *1
W
1
B3 BLK/YEL
2
YEL/BLU YEL/BLU
PCS
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
C102
5 1
BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
B46 2 3
WHT/BLU WHT/BLU WHT/BLU
ALTL
3 4
WHT/RED WHT/RED
4 2
WHT/GRN WHT/GRN
B47
WHT/RED
ALTF
24P JUNCTION ALTERNATOR
CONNECTOR
B45
WHT/GRN
ALTC
12 8 9 10 11
3 To
BLK/WHT
C15 1 SPARK
YEL/GRN YEL/GRN PLUG
IGPLS1 2 ICM
BLK
No. 1 IGNITION COIL
3
BLK/WHT To
C16 1 SPARK
BLU/RED BLU/RED PLUG
IGPLS2 2 ICM
BLK
No. 2 IGNITION COIL
3
BLK/WHT To
C17 1 SPARK
WHT/BLU WHT/BLU PLUG
IGPLS3 2 ICM
BLK
No. 3 IGNITION COIL
3 To
BLK/WHT
C18 1 SPARK
BRN BRN PLUG
IGPLS4 2 ICM
BLK
BLK/
WHT No. 4 IGNITION COIL
16
C101
23
BLK/ BLK
WHT
*1: M/T
*2: A/T X G102
11-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:22 61TL2000_110_0053
＊５１
*2
Q
C106
B28 6
RED/YEL WHT
ATFT 7
GRN/BLK WHT
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B11 5
BLU/BLK BLU
SHA
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
B12 2
GRN/WHT ORN
SHB
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
B21 1
GRN GRN
SHC
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
B27 8
GRN/RED YEL
SHD
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
B25 3
YEL RED
SHE
SHIFT SOLENOID
G H I VALVE E
B48 1
RED/BLK RED/BLK
LSA
2
BLK
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
B40 1
BRN BRN
LSB
2
BLK
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
B26 1
BLU/YEL BLU/YEL
LSC
2
BLK
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
B19 R CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
YEL/BLU
VCC2
1
YEL/BLU
B18 2
WHT/RED
NM
3
GRN/BLK
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
*2: A/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-53

08/04/09 12:10:23 61TL2000_110_0054

＊５２
*2
C101
8 7 9 10
BLU/ WHT
BLK
B14
BLU/BLK
ATPP C107
7 1
BLU/WHT BLU/WHT
B15
WHT 5 2
ATPR BLU/BLK BLK/BLU P
4 8
WHT WHT R
9 3
B13 RED/BLK RED/BLK N
ATPN 3 9
YEL/GRN PNK D
8 4
RED BLU S
B22
ATPD J
B16 6 7
ATPS BLU/YEL YEL/RED
10 6
RED/WHT WHT/RED
1 5
BLK BLK
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
B29
ATPFWD
B23
ATPRVS
2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
B8 1
BLU/RED
OP2SW
3RD CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
B9 1
BLU/WHT
OP3SW 13
C101
11
LT GRN
*1
1
RED/GRN Clutch pedal pressed: closed
2 Clutch pedal released: open
BLK
CLUTCH
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
G302
*1: M/T
*2: A/T
Y
11-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:23 61TL2000_110_0055
＊５３
TP SENSOR
C12 2
BLU BLU
VCC3 1
RED/BLK A B
C20 3
RED/BLK RED/BLU
TPSA 4
GRN
C21
RED/BLU 6
TPSB BLU/RED
5
C43 GRN/YEL
GRN THROTTLE
SG3 ACTUATOR
C4 THROTTLE BODY
BLU/RED
ETCSM＋
C3
GRN/YEL
ETCSM−
1
RED
2
RED/YEL
C29 4
RED GRN
AFS＋ 12 12 3
WHT/BLK
C30 WHT
RED/YEL C101 A/F SENSOR
AFS− (SENSOR 1)
C9 L Z U S
GRN
AFSHTC
BRN/ 2
YEL
B36 1
GRN/BLK
WHT/RED WHT/RED 3
SHO2S
4
BLK/YEL
B4
BLK/WHT SECONDARY
SO2SHTC HO2S
(SENSOR 2)
B7 1
YEL/RED
OPSW
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
A26 3
RED/BLK A
VCC4
A18 1
YEL/BLK
APSA
A36 2
BLU/RED
SG4
A25 6
BRN/WHT B
VCC5
A19 4
BLK
APSB
A35 5
GRN
SG5
APP SENSOR A/B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-55

08/04/09 12:10:24 61TL2000_110_0056

＊５４
A34 1
YEL/RED
ECT2 2
BLK
A10
BLK ECT SENSOR 2
SG6
A20
YEL
VCC6 C352 C202
9 9 1
YEL YEL
A17 2 4 2
BLU BLU BLU
ACPD
16 14 3
BLK BLK BLK
A/C PRESSURE
SENSOR
C305
6 1
YEL YEL
A27 7 2
LT GRN LT GRN
FTP 8 3
BLK BLK
FTP SENSOR
A11 4 1
RED RED
VSV
5 2
WHT WHT
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
AA
A29
BLK To
NEP EPS CONTROL UNIT
11-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:24 61TL2000_110_0057
＊５５
V
REVERSE LOCK
*1 SOLENOID VALVE
2
BLK/YEL
C27 1
RVS
*2
C301
A47 8 14 14 3
LT BLU LT BLU WHT
SUPP PADDLE SWITCH＋
(UPSHIFT SWITCH)
4
BLK
A48 7 15 15 3
PUR PUR ORN
SDNP PADDLE SWITCH−
(DOWNSHIFT
2 12 4 SWITCH)
BRN BLK
CABLE REEL 10
G501 CRUISE CONTROL

11 SET/RESUME/
MAIN SWITCH
8
A1
WHT/RED
VBSOL
AB
*3
A30
BLU To
VSSOUT NAVIGATION UNIT
A46
LT GRN To
S-NET5V MICU, IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
*1: M/T
*2: A/T
*3: With navigation system
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-57

08/04/09 12:10:25 61TL2000_110_0058

＊５６
A X
C101 BLU/RED
YEL/
C1 14 10 BLK
YEL/GRN BLU ETCS
CONTROL
IG1ETCS YEL/BLK RELAY
WHT
AA Z
WHT/BLU
AC
BLK/WHT
A21 WHT/BLU IGNITION
COIL
ETCSRLY WHT/BLU RELAY
A7
RED/BLK
MRLY
A22 WHT/RED
SUBRLY YEL/BLK
A15 WHT/RED PGM-FI
MAIN
ACC WHT/RED RELAY 1
A5 RED/BLK
FANL
A6 GRN
FANH WHT
GRN PGM-FI
SUBRELAY
GRN
RED/YEL
O
LT GRN
PUR
PNK
GRN/RED
A/C COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
A42
BKSW
RADIATOR
C10 FAN
YEL/RED RELAY
B7
GRY/BLK
FAN
CONTROL
RELAY
B2 CIRCUIT
LT GRN
B9
LT GRN
A/C
B10 CONDENSER
PNK FAN RELAY
CIRCUIT
WHT
AD N GRY/BLK RELAY
CIRCUIT BOARD
WHT
RED/BLU
A24
WHT
ELD
A1
BLK/RED
A3
BLU/BLK ELD
A2
BLK
AE AF AG G301 BATTERY
G1
11-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:10:26 61TL2000_110_0059
＊５７
AG P W AE *2
Y DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
C10
BLK/RED
IG1 STARTER
15 LT GRN CUT RELAY
(RED/GRN)*1
C101
*2 9 F3
YEL F14
AB
BLK/RED
F12
WHT/RED
F16
WHT
F2
YEL
A16 F22
GRY/BLK
IMOFPR
F31
YEL/BLK
AD AC AF F26
LT GRN
A3 F25 PGM-FI MAIN
WHT WHT RELAY 2
CANH
A4 F24
RED RED
CANL
F11
WHT
P9
WHT
P20
AH AI BRN
P16
WHT
P15
RED
D10
AJ AK PNK
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX: 2 C1

WHT
No. 18 DBW (ETCS) (15 A)
No. 13 IG COIL (15 A) IG1 5 C5
No. 17 FI MAIN (15 A) BLU
No. 14 FI SUB (15 A)
IG2 3 C4
No. 21 OIL LVL (7.5 A) ＋B ORN
No. 15 BACK UP (10 A)
No. 12 STOP (15 A) ST 1 C2
YEL
No. 3-1 IG MAIN (50 A)
No. 1 BATTERY (100 A) Q16
IGNITION SWITCH LT BLU MICU
DRIVER’S
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX:
No. 7 ACG (15 A)
No. 10 VB SOL (10 A) AP
No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) 2
No. 16 A/C (7.5 A) PNK
No. 5 METER (7.5 A) 4 P
BLK
*1: M/T FUEL PUMP

*2: A/T
G603
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-59

08/04/09 12:10:26 61TL2000_110_0060

＊５８
AH AI
DRIVER’S
JUNCTION BOX 1
F7
BRN
F8
WHT
G6
WHT
*2
A5
PNK
A28 6 C7
PNK PNK
SLS C2
C301 BRN
5
BRN
6
PNK
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
DRIVER’S
JUNCTION BOX 2
BARO SENSOR J6
(Built into ORN
the ECM/PCM) M
B2
BRN
A32 14 9
ORN ORN
SCS 18 12
RED
3 16
WHT
A44 4
RED BRN
WEN C301 DATA LINK
5
BRN CONNECTOR
6
WHT
CANH
14
RED
CANL
7
LT BLU
K-LINE
G501
*2: A/T
AL AM AN
11-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:12:11 61TL2000_110_0061
＊５９
CENTER JUNCTION BOX
AJ AK AL AM AN AP
J2
WHT
CANH AO
J1 RED
CANL
E5
WHT
CANH
E6
RED
CANL
E4
LT BLU To AUDIO UNIT
K-LINE
B3
LT BLU
K-LINE 22
G2 WHT
LT BLU CANH
K-LINE
F2 21
WHT RED
CANH CANL
F1
RED GAUGE CONTROL
CANL MODULE
D3
WHT
CANH
D2 17
RED
CANL CANH
D4 16
LT BLU
K-LINE CANL
18
A1 K-LINE
WHT
CANH SRS UNIT
A2
RED
CANL
A3 1
LT BLU WHT
K-LINE CANH
11
RED
CANL
7
LT BLU
K-LINE
C1 TPMS CONTROL
WHT UNIT
CANH
C2
RED
CANL
5
LT BLU
K-LINE
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
AQ AR CONTROL UNIT
K4 3
WHT
CANH CANH
K5 2
RED
CANL CANL
YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION
SENSOR
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-61

08/04/09 12:12:11 61TL2000_110_0062

＊６０
DRIVER’S JUNCTION BOX 2
AR AQ AO
A1
WHT
CANH
A3
RED
CANL
H2
WHT
CANH
H1
RED
CANL
C205
9 3
LT BLU LT BLU
2
1
6
PASSENGER’S UNDER-DASH 5 12P
FUSE/RELAY BOX JUNCTION
4 CONNECTOR
A18 12
CANH 11
A19 10
CANL
E7
WHT
CANH VSA MODULATOR-
E8 CONTROL UNIT
RED 10
CANL
K-LINE
12
CANH
13
CANL
H11
WHT
CANH EPS CONTROL
H29 UNIT
RED 17
CANL
K-LINE
1
CANH
15
CANL
1
CANH
12P 4
WHT
JUNCTION CANH
CONNECTOR
7
CANL *3
10
RED
CANL 8
CANH
24
CANL
*3: With navigation system NAVIGATION UNIT
11-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:12:11 61TL2000_110_0063
How to Set Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness
(In relation to Readiness Codes) Code
The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of NOTE:
the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If • Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected or gone procedure.
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM • All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
has been reset, these readiness codes are reset to disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
incomplete. In some states, part of the emissions ECM/PCM is reset with the HDS.
testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. • Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go
If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch
fail the emission test, or the test cannot be finished. the readiness code from incomplete to complete.
• The readiness code will not switch to complete until
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, all the enable criteria are met.
turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the • If a fault in the secondary HO2S system caused the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15−20 seconds. If it MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to
then goes off, the readiness codes are set to complete. complete until you correct the fault.
If it flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are
not set to complete. To set readiness codes from Enable Criteria
incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the
appropriate code. • ECT SENSOR 1 at 158 °F (70 °C) or more.
• IAT SENSOR at 20 °F ( −7 °C) or more.
To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the • Vehicle speed (VSS) above 25 mph (40 km/h).
OBD status in the DTC MENU with the HDS (see page
11-9). This screen displays the code, the current data list Procedure
of the enable criteria, and the status of the readiness
testing. 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle’s data link
connector (DLC), and bring up the READINESS
CODEs screen for Catalyst in the DTCs MENU.
2. Start the engine.
3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions

with short periods of steady cruise. After about
5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch to
complete.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete,

check for a Temporary DTC with the HDS. If there is
no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were
probably not met; repeat the procedure.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-63
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３１６１０００００ＢＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:12:12 61TL2000_110_0064
How to Set Readiness Codes (cont’d)

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and
System Monitor and Readiness Code Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery NOTE:
is disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the • Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
ECM/PCM is reset with the HDS. procedure.
• All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
Enable Criteria disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
ECM/PCM is reset with the HDS.
• Battery voltage is more than 10.5 V.
• Engine at idle. Enable Criteria
• ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 between 176 °F
(80 °C) and 212 °F (100 °C). ECT SENSOR 1 at 140 °F (60 °C) or more.
• MAP sensor less than 46.6 kPa (14 in.Hg, 350 mmHg).
• Vehicle speed (VSS) 0 mph (0 km/h). Procedure
• IAT SENSOR 1 between 32 °F (0 °C) and 212 °F
(100 °C). 1. Start the engine.
Procedure 2. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions

with short periods of steady cruise. During the
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for
5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the
2. Start the engine. readiness code should switch from incomplete to
complete.
3. Select EVAP TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS, then select the FUNCTION TEST in the 3. Check the readiness codes screen for the AIR FUEL
EVAP TEST MENU. RATIO (A/F) SENSOR in the DTCs MENU with the
HDS.
• If the result is normal, readiness is complete.
• If the result is not normal, go to the next step. • If the screen shows complete, readiness is
complete.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one • If the screen shows not complete, go to the next
or more of the enable criteria were probably not step.
met; repeat the procedure.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the
enable criteria was probably not met. Select the
DATA LIST MENU. Check the ECT SENSOR 1 in the
ALL DATA LIST with the HDS. If the ECT SENSOR 1
is less than 140 °F (60 °C), run the engine until it is
more than 140 °F (60 °C), then repeat the procedure.
11-64 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:12:12 61TL2000_110_0065
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor

Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery
is disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
ECM/PCM is reset with the HDS.
Procedure
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The

readiness code should switch from incomplete to
complete.
2. If the readiness code is still not set to complete,

check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC,
repeat the procedure.
Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code

• This readiness code is always set to available
because misfiring is continuously monitored.
• Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if
the vehicle is driven over a rough road.
• Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter
holds at its current value, if the throttle position
changes more than a predetermined value, or if
driving conditions fall outside the range of any
related enable criteria.
Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code

• This readiness code is always set to available
because the fuel system is continuously monitored
during closed loop operation.
• Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter,
EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are
active.
• Monitoring also pauses when any related enable
criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when
the enable criteria is again being met.
Comprehensive Component Monitor and

Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available because
the comprehensive component monitor is continuously
running whenever the engine is cranking or running.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-65

08/04/09 12:12:15 61TL2000_110_0066
PGM-FI System
＊０１
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) SENSOR B
(EXHAUST SIDE)
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY1

IGNITION COILS PGM-FI SUBRELAY
IGNITION COIL RELAY

OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD)
Replacement,
page 11-232
MASS AIR FLOW

(MAF) SENSOR/
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
(IAT) SENSOR
Replacement,
page 11-229
INJECTORS
Replacement,
page 11-225
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 1
Replacement,
page 11-230
KNOCK SENSOR ENGINE CONTROL

Replacement, MODULE (ECM)/
page 11-231 POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
CRANKSHAFT POSITION General Troubleshooting
(CKP) SENSOR Information, page 11-3
Replacement, page 11-228 Substituting, page 11-7
Update, page 11-233
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE ENGINE COOLANT OUTPUT SHAFT

PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR TEMPERATURE (ECT) (COUNTERSHAFT)
Replacement, page 11-229 SENSOR 2 SPEED SENSOR (M/T)
Replacement, OUTPUT SHAFT Replacement, page 11-231
page 11-230 (COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR (A/T)
11-66 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:12:17 61TL2000_110_0067
＊０２
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR

(SENSOR 1)
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN

SENSOR (SECONDARY HO2S)
(SENSOR 2)
＊０３
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
General Troubleshooting
Information, page 11-3
Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-210
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-67

08/04/09 12:12:17 61TL2000_110_0068
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0101: MAF Sensor Circuit Range/ 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Performance Problem
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 6. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
any on-board snapshot, and review the general HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P1128, P1129, P2228, and/or P2229 are stored Is there about 0.2 gm/ s or 0.5 V ?
at the same time as DTC P0101, troubleshoot those
DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0101. YES−Go to step 7.
1. Check for poor connections or damage to these NO−Go to step 13.

parts:
• PCV hose
• Intake air duct 8. Vary the engine speed between 2,000 rpm and
• Air cleaner 3,000 rpm.
• Purge (PCS) line
• Brake booster 9. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
• Brake booster hose HDS.
Are the parts OK ? Does the reading change?
YES−Go to step 2. YES−Go to step 10.
NO−Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go NO−Go to step 13.

to step 15.
10. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load
2. Check for damage or looseness at the air duct in (A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan
the air cleaner. comes on, then let it idle.
Is it OK ? 11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the

range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
YES−Go to step 3.
• ENGINE SPEED
NO−Reconnect or replace the air duct in the air • VSS
cleaner, then go to step 15. • MAP SENSOR
• MAF SENSOR
3. Check for a dirty air cleaner element.
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the
Is it dirty? DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES−Replace the air cleaner element (see page Does the screen indicate F AILED?
11-364), then go to step 15.
NO−Go to step 4.
NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF
sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11 and recheck.
11-68 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１０１ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:12:17 61TL2000_110_0069
14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page

11-229).

11-324).
18. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the

• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• MAP SENSOR
• MAF SENSOR
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DT C P0101 indicated?
YES−Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the MAF sensor and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 20.

DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 19,
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor
and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 18.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-69

08/04/09 12:12:17 61TL2000_110_0070
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d)

DTC P0102: MAF Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 8. Measure the resistance between MAF sensor/IAT
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general sensor 5P connector terminal No. 1 and body
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). ground.
＊０２
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
2 seconds.
2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
VG＋ (RED/BLK)
Is about 0 gm/ s, or 0.1 V or less indicated?
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Wire side of female terminals
at the MAF sensor and the ECM/PCM.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is there 190−210 k ?
4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P YES−Go to step 13.

connector.
NO−Go to step 9.
6. Measure the voltage between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body
ground.
＊０１
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
IGP (YEL/BLK)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main

relay 1 and the MAF sensor, then go to step 19.
11-70 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１０２ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:12:18 61TL2000_110_0071
10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P). 13. Substitute a known-good MAF sensor/IAT sensor
(see page 11-229).
terminal B31 and body ground. 14. Reconnect all connectors.
＊０３
16. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

neutral).
VG＋ (RED/BLK)
Terminal side of female terminals YES−Reinstall the original MAF sensor/IAT sensor,
and go to step 26.
NO−Replace the original MAF sensor/IAT sensor
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ (see page 11-229), then go to step 19.
PCM (B31) and the MAF sensor, then go to step 20.
NO−Go to step 12.
20. Reconnect all connectors.
12. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 1 and ECM/PCM 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connector terminal B31.
＊０４ 22. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
VG＋ (RED/BLK)
VG＋ (RED/BLK)
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/

PCM (B31) and the MAF sensor, then go to step 20.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-71

08/04/09 12:12:18 61TL2000_110_0072
PGM-FI System

11-324).

terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the
ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
26. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest

good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).

ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute
a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO−If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting

is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
11-72 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:12:18 61TL2000_110_0073
DTC P0103: MAF Sensor Circuit High Voltage 7. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 2 and ECM/PCM
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data connector terminal B33.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general ＊０１

2 seconds. VG− (BLK/BLU)
2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
Is about 202 gm/ s, or 4.89 V or more indicated?
YES−Go to step 3.

VG− (BLK/BLU)
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the MAF sensor and the ECM/PCM. Terminal side of female terminals
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is there continuity?
4. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. YES−Go to step 8.
5. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
connector. PCM (B33) and the MAF sensor, then go to step 15.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-73
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１０３ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:12:18 61TL2000_110_0074
PGM-FI System

8. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P). 19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
9. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector Is DT C P0103 indicated?

terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
＊０２ YES−Check for poor connections or loose
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the

VG＋ (RED/BLK) VG− (BLK/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE 21. Reconnect all connectors.
Wire side of female terminals 22. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
Is DT C P0103 indicated? terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the
YES−Go to step 20. a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
NO−Go to step 13. step 1.
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO−If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). If
11-229). any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,

11-324).
11-74 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:12:19 61TL2000_110_0075
DTC P0107: MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Is there about 5 V ?
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data YES−Go to step 16.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). NO−Go to step 8.
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
HDS.
10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P).
Is about 3 kPa ( 1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or
less indicated? 11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal C13 and MAP sensor 3P connector
YES−Go to step 3. terminal No. 1.
＊０２
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM.
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.

ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
6. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is about 3 kPa ( 1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or

less indicated? Terminal side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 12. Is there continuity?
NO−Go to step 7. YES−Go to step 23.
7. Measure the voltage between MAP sensor 3P NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3. PCM (C13) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
＊０１
VCC1 (YEL/RED) SG1 (GRN/WHT)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-75
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１０７ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:12:19 61TL2000_110_0076
PGM-FI System

12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Is DT C P0107 indicated?
14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P). YES−Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM,
15. Check for continuity between MAP sensor 3P then go to step 1.
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
＊０３ NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the

MAP (GRN/RED)
Wire side of female terminals Is DT C P0107 indicated?

Is there continuity? terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM (C11) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18. ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 23. NO−If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting

16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). If
17. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-229). go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.

11-324).
11-76 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:12:20 61TL2000_110_0077
DTC P0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 7. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general HDS.
Is about 160 kPa ( 47 .1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 4.49 V or more indicated?
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the YES−Go to step 8.
HDS.
NO−Go to step 18.
4.49 V or more indicated? 8. Remove the jumper wire from the MAP sensor 3P
connector.
YES−Go to step 3.
9. Measure the voltage between MAP sensor 3P
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals ＊０２
at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.

VCC1 (YEL/RED) SG1 (GRN/WHT)
5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2
and No. 3 with a jumper wire.
＊０１
Is there about 5 V ?
MAP (GRN/RED) SG1 (GRN/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE NO−Go to step 10.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-77
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１０８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:12:20 61TL2000_110_0078
PGM-FI System

10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P). 16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P).
13. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 17. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal C14 and MAP sensor 3P connector terminal C11 and MAP sensor 3P connector
terminal No. 3. terminal No. 2.
＊０３＊０４
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
SG1 (GRN/WHT) MAP (GRN/RED)

Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

SG1 (GRN/WHT) MAP (GRN/RED)
Terminal side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/ NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C14) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 20. PCM (C11) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 20.
11-78 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:12:20 61TL2000_110_0079
19. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-229).

11-324).

then go to step 1.



terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-79

08/04/09 12:12:20 61TL2000_110_0080
PGM-FI System

DTC P0111: IAT Sensor Circuit Range/ 11. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to the 5P
Performance Problem connector, but do not install the sensor onto the air
cleaner.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 12. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). HDS.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Does the IAT SENSOR change 63 °F ( 35 °C) or
ECT sensors 1 and 2, and the IAT sensor. more?
Are the connections and terminals OK ? YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
YES−Go to step 2. at the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM.
NO−Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to NO−Go to step 13.

step 15.
2. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-229). 14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-229).
3. Allow IAT sensor to cool to ambient temperature.
4. Note the ambient temperature.
5. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to its 5P
connector, but do not install the sensor onto the air 17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
cleaner. 11-324).
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
7. Note the value of the IAT SENSOR quickly in the Is DT C P0111 indicated?
DATA LIST with the HDS.
8. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR and the terminals at the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM, then
ambient temperature. go to step 1.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR dif f er 5.4 °F NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
( 3 °C) or more? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
NO−Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor from its 5P

connector.
10. Using a heat gun, blow hot air on the MAF sensor/
IAT sensor for a few seconds. Do not apply the heat
longer than a few seconds or you will damage the
sensor.
11-80 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１１１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:12:20 61TL2000_110_0081
DTC P0112: IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data ground.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
2. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS. IAT (RED/YEL)
Is about 356 °F ( 180 °C) or more, or 0.08 V or less

indicated?
YES−Go to step 3.
at the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. Is there continuity?
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES−Repair short in the wire between the IAT
sensor and the ECM/PCM (B32), then go to step 13.
4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P
connector. NO−Go to step 18.
6. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 12. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
HDS. 11-229).
Is about 356 °F ( 180 °C) or more, or 0.08 V or less 13. Reconnect all connectors.
indicated?
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Go to step 11.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11-324).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-81
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１１２ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:12:21 61TL2000_110_0082
PGM-FI System


terminals at the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.



step 1.

11-82 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:12:21 61TL2000_110_0083
DTC P0113: IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage 7. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Is about −40 °F ( −40 °C) or less, or 4.90 V or
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). higher indicated?
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES−Go to step 8.
2. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the NO−Go to step 20.
HDS.
Is about −40 °F ( −40 °C) or less, or 4.90 V or
higher indicated? 9. Remove the jumper wire from the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector.
YES−Go to step 3.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 11. Measure the voltage between MAF sensor/IAT
at the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body
ground.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ＊０２
4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P
connector.
5. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector

terminals No. 4 and No. 5 with a jumper wire. IAT (RED/YEL)
＊０１

SG2 (GRN/BLK) IAT (RED/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE YES−Go to step 12.
Wire side of female terminals NO−Go to step 16.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-83
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１１３ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:12:21 61TL2000_110_0084
PGM-FI System

14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P). 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P).
15. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT 19. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 4 and ECM/PCM sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and ECM/PCM
connector terminal B34. connector terminal B32.
＊０３＊０４
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR

ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

PCM (B34) and the IAT sensor, then go to step 22. PCM (B32) and the IAT sensor, then go to step 22.
11-84 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:12:22 61TL2000_110_0085
21. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page

11-229).

11-324).




step 1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-85

08/04/09 12:12:22 61TL2000_110_0086
PGM-FI System

DTC P0116: ECT Sensor 1 Range/ 10. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
Performance Problem HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 °F ( 10 °C) or
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general more?
YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM.
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. NO−Go to step 11.
Is about 17 6 °F ( 80 °C) or more, or 0.7 8 V or less 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
indicated?
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-230).
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 3.
3. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST
with the HDS. 15. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in 16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it
idle. Is DT C P0116 indicated?
5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the YES−Check for poor connections or loose
HDS. terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 °F ( 10 °C) or
more? NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
NO−Go to step 11.
6. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST

with the HDS.
8. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for 3 hours.
11-86 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１１６ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:12:22 61TL2000_110_0087
DTC P0117: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data ＊０１
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR

ECT1 (RED/WHT)
HDS.

indicated?
YES−Go to step 3. Wire side of female terminals

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Is there continuity?
YES−Repair short in the wire between ECT
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM (B24), then go to step
13.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
NO−Go to step 18.
HDS. 12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-230).
Is about 356 °F ( 180 °C) or more, or 0.08 V or less 13. Reconnect all connectors.
indicated?
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Go to step 11.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11-324).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-87
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１１７ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:12:22 61TL2000_110_0088
PGM-FI System


terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.



terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the

11-88 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:12:22 61TL2000_110_0089
DTC P0118: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit High 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Is about −40 °F ( −40 °C) or less, or 4.90 V or
higher indicated?
YES−Go to step 8.
Is about −40 °F ( −40 °C) or less, or 4.90 V or 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
higher indicated?
9. Remove the jumper wire from the ECT sensor 1 2P
YES−Go to step 3. connector.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
at ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM. 11. Measure the voltage between ECT sensor 1 2P
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
5. Connect ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminals No. 1

＊０１
ECT1 (RED/WHT)

ECT1 (RED/WHT) SG2 (GRN/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
NO−Go to step 16.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-89
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１１８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:12:23 61TL2000_110_0090
PGM-FI System

14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P). 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P).
15. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P 19. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P
connector terminal No. 2 and ECM/PCM connector connector terminal No. 1 and ECM/PCM connector
terminal B34. terminal B24.
＊０３＊０４
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
SG2 (GRN/BLK) ECT1 (RED/WHT)

ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
SG2 (GRN/BLK) ECT1 (RED/WHT)

PCM (B34) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22. PCM (B24) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.
11-90 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:13:38 61TL2000_110_0091

11-324).

go to step 1.




-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-91

08/04/09 12:13:38 61TL2000_110_0092
PGM-FI System

DTC P0125: ECT Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow 7. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
Response
Is the thermostat OK ?
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES−Check for poor connection or loose terminals
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If
they are OK, replace ECT SENSOR 1 (see page
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes or 11-230), then go to step 8.
more.
NO−Replace the thermostat (see page 10-8), then
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the go to step 8.
HDS.
Is about 0 °F ( −18 °C) or less indicated?
9. Allow the engine to cool 104 °F (40 °C) or less.
YES−Check for poor connection or loose terminals
at ECT SENSOR 1, ECT SENSOR 2, and the ECM/ 10. Check the temperature difference of ECT SENSOR 1
PCM. If they are OK, replace ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 is between about 50 °F (10 °C)
(see page 11-230). in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 3. 11. Start the engine, and let it idle until ECT sensor 1
goes up around 158 °F (70 °C)
Dose the ECT sensor 2 also show about 158 °F
4. Allow the engine to cool 104 °F (40 °C) or less. ( 7 0 °C)?
5. Make sure the difference between ECT SENSOR 1 YES−Go to step 1 and recheck.
and ECT SENSOR 2 temperature value is less than
about 50 °F (10 °C) in the DATA LIST with the HDS. NO−Troubleshooting is complete.
6. Start the engine, and let it idle until ECT sensor 1

goes up about 158 °F (70 °C)
Dose the ECT sensor 2 also show about 158 °F

( 7 0 °C)?
YES−Go to step 7.

at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM.
11-92 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１２５ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:38 61TL2000_110_0093
DTC P0128: Cooling System Malfunction 11. Compare the value of recorded ECT SENSOR 2 and
the present value of ECT SENSOR 2.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Did the temperature rise 14 °F ( 8 °C) or more?
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
NO−Test the thermostat (see page 10-4), then go
3. Make sure the blower switch is OFF. to step 12.
4. Check the FAN CTRL in the DATA LIST with the 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
HDS.
Is it OF F ?
14. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
YES−Go to step 5. between 21 °F ( −6 °C) and 104 °F (40 °C).
NO−Wait until the FAN CTRL is off, then go to step 15. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
5. 11-324).
5. Check the radiator fan operation. 16. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15−75 mph
(24−120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
Does the radiator f an keep running?
YES−Check the radiator fan circuit (see page
10-20), and the radiator fan relay (see page 22-80). Is DT C P0128 indicated?
If the circuits and the relay are OK, go to step 19.
YES−Check the cooling system (see page 10-2). If
NO−Go to step 6. the cooling system is OK, go to step 19.
6. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is NO−Go to step 18.
104 °F (40 °C) or less.
7. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR DTCs MENU with the HDS.
2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
9. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 17,
41 °F (23 °C) or more from the recorded go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
temperature.
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check the
10. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the cooling system (see page 10-2). If the cooling
HDS. system is OK, go to step 19. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 14.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-93
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１２８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:38 61TL2000_110_0094
PGM-FI System

20. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is

between 21 °F ( −6 °C) and 104 °F (40 °C).

idle.
22. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15−75 mph


terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go
to step 20. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO−Go to step 24.

YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated,

(see page 11-234). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs were indicated in step 23, go to the indicated
DTC’s troubleshooting.

connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then go to step 20. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
11-94 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:13:38 61TL2000_110_0095
DTC P0133: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) 10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
Malfunction/Slow Response 11-324).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it
idle.
12. Test-drive under these conditions:
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at above 158 °F (70 °C)
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in • A/T in D, M/T in 3rd or 4th
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it • Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for
idle. 5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed about
32 mph (52 km/h) or more
above 158 °F (70 °C) Is DT C P0133 indicated?
• A/T in D, M/T in 3rd or 4th
• Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for YES−Check for poor connections or loose
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed about terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
32 mph (52 km/h) or more PCM, then go to step 1.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 in the NO−Go to step 14.
Does the screen indicate F AILED? DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 6. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 3 and (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
recheck. the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11.
7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page

11-227).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-95
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１３３ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:38 61TL2000_110_0096
PGM-FI System

DTC P0134: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
System Malfunction
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and YES−Check for poor connections or loose
any on-board snapshot, and review the general terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). subrelay, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
• If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled
before this DTC was stored, refuel and clear the DTC NO−Go to step 11.
with the HDS.
• If DTC P0135 is stored at the same time as DTC P0134, 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0134 in the
troubleshoot DTC P0135 first, then recheck for DTC DTCs MENU with the HDS.
P0134.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 10,
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (A/T in
P or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
on. connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the ECM/PCM,
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
YES−Go to step 5.

at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay,
and the ECM/PCM.

11-227).

11-324).
11-96 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１３４ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:39 61TL2000_110_0097
DTC P0135: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater 7. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (A) from the under-
Circuit Malfunction hood fuse/relay box.
＊０１
A

idle.

8. Test the PGM-FI subrelay (see page 22-80).
Is the relay OK ?
YES−Go to step 5.
YES−Go to step 9.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals NO−Replace the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, 24.
and the ECM/PCM.
9. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
10. At the sensor side, measure the resistance between
6. Check the No. 14 FI SUB (15 A) fuse in the under- A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No. 3
hood fuse/relay box. and No. 4.
＊０２
Is the f use OK ? A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Go to step 19.

＋B AFSHTC
Terminal side of male terminals
Is there 2.0−2.7 at room temperature?
NO−Go to step 23.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-97
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１３５ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:39 61TL2000_110_0098
PGM-FI System

11. At the sensor side, check for continuity between 15. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No. 2 4P connector terminal No. 4 and ECM/PCM
and No. 3, and between terminals No. 2 and No. 4 connector terminal C9.
individually. ＊０５
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
＊０３
AFS−
AFSHTC (GRN)

＋B AFSHTC AFSHTC (GRN)
Is there continuity? Terminal side of female terminals
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C9) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to
13. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P). step 24.

terminal C9 and body ground.
＊０４
AFSHTC (GRN)
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/

step 24.
NO−Go to step 15.
11-98 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:13:40 61TL2000_110_0099
16. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 17. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
4P connector terminal No. 3 and PGM-FI subrelay
4P connector terminal No. 2. 18. Check for continuity between PGM-FI subrelay 4P
＊０６ connector terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector
terminal A22.
＊０７
PGM-FI SUBRELAY 4P CONNECTOR
＋B (WHT/BLK) Wire side of female terminals
PGM-FI SUBRELAY 4P CONNECTOR SUBRLY

＋B ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
SUBRLY (RED/YEL)
NO−Repair open in the wire between the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PGM-FI subrelay, then go Is there continuity?
to step 24.

PCM (A22) and the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to
step 24.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-99

08/04/09 12:13:40 61TL2000_110_0100
PGM-FI System

19. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (A) from the under- 23. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
hood fuse/relay box. 11-227).
＊０８
A

11-324).

20. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector. terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI
subrelay, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
21. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector. NO−Go to step 29.
22. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 29. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 in the
4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
＊０９
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR Does the screen indicate PASSED?

＋B (WHT/BLK) NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
YES−Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI

subrelay, the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), and the EVAP
canister vent shut valve. Also replace the No. 14 FI
SUB (15 A) fuse, then go to step 24.
NO−Check the under-hood fuse/relay box, and

replace it if needed (see page 22-73), then go to
step 24.
11-100 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:13:40 61TL2000_110_0101


terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI
subrelay, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
was substituted, go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 34.



(Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the ECM/PCM.
If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 32.
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
until a result comes on.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-101

08/04/09 12:13:40 61TL2000_110_0102
PGM-FI System

DTC P0137: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 12. Check for continuity between secondary HO2S
Circuit Low Voltage (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
SHO2S (WHT/RED)

idle.
4. Check the HO2S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less? Is there continuity?
YES−Go to step 5. YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/

PCM (B36) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2),
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this then go to step 15.
at the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/ NO−Go to step 23.
PCM.
14. Replace the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) (see page
6. Disconnect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P 11-227).
connector.
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less?
YES−Go to step 9. 11-324).
NO−Go to step 13. 19. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (A/T in
P or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). on.
11-102 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１３７ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:41 61TL2000_110_0103
20. Test-drive under these conditions: 27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) Is DT C P0137 indicated?

above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D, M/T in 4th YES−Check for poor connections or loose
• Engine speed between 1,500 −3,000 rpm terminals at the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and
• Drive about 1 minute or more the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. then go to step 25. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 28.
terminals at the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 in the
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 22. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 in the YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated,
DTCs MENU with the HDS. troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
Does the screen indicate PASSED? (see page 11-234). If any other Temporary DTCs or
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTC’s troubleshooting.
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
connections or loose terminals at the secondary PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/
HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 25. If the ECM/
1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 19. comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 25.

on.

above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D, M/T in 4th
• Engine speed between 1,500 −3,000 rpm
• Drive 1 minute or more
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-103

08/04/09 12:13:41 61TL2000_110_0104
PGM-FI System

DTC P0138: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
NO−Go to step 19.
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in 11. Remove the jumper wire from the secondary HO2S
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it (Sensor 2) 4P connector.
idle.
12. Connect secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
4. Check the HO2S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
＊０２
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more? SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 5.
SHO2S (WHT/RED)

at the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/
PCM. JUMPER WIRE
6. Disconnect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P Terminal side of male terminals

connector.
7. Connect secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
＊０１ 14. Check the HO2S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
JUMPER WIRE

PCM (B34) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2),
SG2 (GRN/BLK) SHO2S (WHT/RED) then go to step 21.
11-104 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１３８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:41 61TL2000_110_0105
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 25. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (A/T in
16. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. on.
17. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P). 26. Test-drive under these conditions:
18. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
terminal B36 and body ground. above 158 °F (70 °C)
＊０３ • A/T in D, M/T in 4th
• Drive about 1 minute or more
SHO2S (WHT/RED) YES−Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 28.

Is there continuity? DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 29. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/ YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
PCM (B36) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2), Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,
then go to step 21. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
20. Replace the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) (see page HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
11-227). 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
21. Reconnect all connectors. OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 25.

11-324).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-105

08/04/09 12:13:42 61TL2000_110_0106
PGM-FI System


on.

above 158 °F (70 °C)
• Drive about 1 minute or more

the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
then go to step 31. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 34.



HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 31. If the ECM/
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
11-106 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:13:42 61TL2000_110_0107
DTC P0139: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Slow 10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
Response 11-324).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (A/T in
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general P or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). on.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 °F (70 °C)
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at • A/T in D, M/T in 4th
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in • Drive at a steady speed between 55 −75 mph
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it (88−120 km/h) for 1 minute, then decelerate
idle. (with throttle fully closed) for 10 seconds
4. Test-drive under these conditions: 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) Is DT C P0139 indicated?

above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D, M/T in 4th YES−Check for poor connections or loose
• Drive at a steady speed between 55 −75 mph terminals at the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and
(88−120 km/h) for 1 minute, then decelerate the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
(with throttle fully closed) for 10 seconds
NO−Go to step 14.
DTCs MENU with the HDS. 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 in the
Does the screen indicate F AILED?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
poor connections or loose terminals at the
secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until connections or loose terminals at the secondary
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 3 and 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
recheck. until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11.
7. Replace the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) (see page

11-227).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-107
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１３９ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:42 61TL2000_110_0108
PGM-FI System

DTC P0141: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 8. At the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) side, measure
Heater Circuit Malfunction the resistance between secondary HO2S (Sensor 2)
4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
Is DT C P0141 indicated? Wire side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 5.
Is there 5.4−7 .3 at room temperature?
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals YES−Go to step 9.
at the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/
PCM. NO−Go to step 22.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 9. At the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) side, check for
continuity between body ground and secondary
6. Check the No. 7 ACG (15 A) fuse in the driver’s HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and
under-dash fuse/relay box. No. 4 individually.
＊０２
Is the f use OK ? SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Repair short in the wire between the

secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the No. 7 ACG
(15 A) fuse. Also replace the No. 7 ACG (15 A) fuse,
then go to step 23.
7. Disconnect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P

connector.
NO−Go to step 10.
11-108 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１４１ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:43 61TL2000_110_0109
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 15. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
11. Measure the voltage between secondary HO2S ＊０４
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
＊０３
SO2SHTC (BLK/WHT)
SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
SO2SHTC (BLK/WHT) IG1 (BLK/YEL)

Is there battery voltage? YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (B4) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2), then
YES−Go to step 12. go to step 23.
NO−Go to step 16. NO−Go to step 29.
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 16. Measure the voltage between secondary HO2S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. ground.
＊０５
14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P). SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
IG1 (BLK/YEL)

secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the No. 7 ACG
(15 A) fuse, then go to step 23.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-109

08/04/09 12:13:43 61TL2000_110_0110
PGM-FI System

17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Replace the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-227).
20. Connect secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire. 25. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
＊０６
SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR 26. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
SO2SHTC (BLK/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE terminals at the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and
Terminal side of male terminals NO−Go to step 28.

21. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector DTCs MENU with the HDS.
＊０７ Does the screen indicate PASSED?
SO2SHTC (BLK/WHT) Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,

HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes on.

PCM (B4) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2), then
go to step 23.
11-110 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:13:43 61TL2000_110_0111


go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 33.



HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-111

08/04/09 12:13:44 61TL2000_110_0112
PGM-FI System

DTC P0171: Fuel System Too Lean 2. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
DTC P0172: Fuel System Too Rich • PCV valve

• PCV hose
NOTE: • EVAP canister purge valve
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and • Throttle body
any on-board snapshot, and review the general • Intake manifold
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Brake booster
• If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the • Brake booster hose
same time as DTC P0171 and/or P0172, troubleshoot • Intake air duct
those DTCs first, then recheck for P0171 and/or P0172.
Are the parts OK ?
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF) sensor
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold absolute YES−Go to step 3.
pressure (MAP) sensor
P0133, P1172, P1157, P2195, P2238, P2252, P2A00: Air NO−Repair or replace parts with leaks, then go to
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1) step 7.
P0134, P0135: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1)
heater 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
P0137, P0138, P0139: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in
P0141: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) heater neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system idle.
P0443, P0496: EVAP canister purge valve
4. Check for these conditions:
1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-342).
Is the f uel pressure OK ? above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in N, M/T in neutral
YES−Go to step 2. • All electrical loads off
NO− 5. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with

• If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm.
pressure regulator (see page 11-354), then go to Once the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator
step 7. pedal steady for more than 10 seconds.
• If the pressure is too low, check the fuel pump,
the fuel feed pipe, and the fuel filter. If they are Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm f rom
OK, replace the fuel pressure regulator (see page 2,500 rpm?
YES−Repeat step 5.
NO−Go to step 6.
11-112 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１７１ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:44 61TL2000_110_0113
6. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, check

the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there about 6.0−7 .4 gm/ s ( M/ T ) or 7 .0−

8.6 gm/ s ( A/ T )?
YES−For DTC P0172, check the engine valve

clearances, and adjust them if necessary (see page
6-9). For DTC P0171, replace the injectors (see page
NO−Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page


11-324).

idle.

above 158 °F (70 °C)
• Drive at a steady speed between 15 −75 mph
(24−120 km/h) for 15 minutes
NOTE: DTC P0171 and/or P0172 may take up to

80 minutes of test driving to set. Using the HDS,
monitor the long term fuel trim (LT FUEL TRIM) or
the air fuel feed back average (AF FB AVE). If the
long term fuel trim/air fuel feed back average stays
within 0.80−1.25, there is no problem at this time.
Is DT C P017 1 or P017 2 indicated?
YES−Go to step 1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-113

08/04/09 12:13:44 61TL2000_110_0114
PGM-FI System

DTC P0300: Random Misfire and Any 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Combination of the Following:
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected P or N, M/T in neutral).
DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A YES−Go to step 9.
• A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301
• A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201 NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If
• A/T pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
• A/T pressure hose, adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
• Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200 CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, wait for several
minutes, then recheck.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
any on-board snapshot, and review the general MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). for 10 minutes with the HDS.
• If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection
of increased emissions during two consecutive Does the CY L1 MISF IRE, CY L2 MISF IRE, CY L3
driving cycles, the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 MISF IRE, and/ or CY L4 MISF IRE show misf ire
(and some combination of P0301 through P0304) will counts?
be stored.
• If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the YES−Go to step 9.
catalyst, the MIL will flash whenever the misfire
occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of NO−Go to step 6.
P0301 through P0304) will be stored. When the
misfire stops, the MIL will remain on. 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
• If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
same time as the random misfire DTCs, troubleshoot
those DTCs first, then recheck for random misfire • ENGINE SPEED
DTCs: • VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF) sensor • CLV (calculated load value)
P0107, P0108: Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) • APP SENSOR
sensor
P0171, P0172: Fuel system 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0335, P0339: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
P0365, P0369: Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B
P0506, P0507: Idle control system Does the screen indicate F AILED?
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If

the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6 and
recheck.
11-114 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０３００ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:44 61TL2000_110_0115
8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 14. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-342).
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes with the HDS. Is the f uel pressure OK ?
Does the CY L1 MISF IRE, CY L2 MISF IRE, CY L3 YES−Go to step 15.

MISF IRE, and/ or CY L4 MISF IRE show misf ire
counts? NO−
• If the fuel pressure is too high, replace the fuel
YES−Go to step 9. pressure regulator (see page 11-354), then go to
step 25.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this • If the fuel pressure is too low, check the fuel
time. pump, the fuel feed pipe, and the fuel filter. If
they are OK, replace the fuel pressure regulator
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). (see page 11-354), then go to step 25.
10. Check the fuel quality. 15. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
Is the quality good? neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it
idle.
16. Check for these conditions:
NO−Drain the tank and fill with a known-good fuel,
then go to step 25. • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 176 °F (80 °C)
11. Inspect the spark plugs (see page 4-19). If the spark • A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral
plugs are fouled or worn, replace them. • All electrical loads off
12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 17. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm.
Once the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator
• ENGINE SPEED pedal steady for more than 10 seconds.
• VSS
• REL TP SENSOR Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm f rom
• CLV (calculated load value) 2,500 rpm?
• APP SENSOR
YES−Repeat step 17.
13. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST NO−Go to step 18.
for 10 minutes with the HDS.
18. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, check
Does the CY L1 MISF IRE, CY L2 MISF IRE, CY L3 the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
counts? Is there about 6.0−7 .4 gm/ s ( M/ T ) or 7 .0−
8.6 gm/ s ( A/ T )?
NO−Go to step 25.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-115

08/04/09 12:13:44 61TL2000_110_0116
PGM-FI System

20. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch 22. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
(see page 11-308). connector.
21. Attach the special tools to the rocker arm oil control 23. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
valve as shown, then attach the rocker arm oil 3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in
pressure switch (A) in the pressure gauge adapter neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it
(B). idle.
＊０１
07406-0020201 or
07MAJ-PY4011A and 24. Check the oil pressure at engine speeds of
07406-0070301 07MAJ-PY40120 1,000 rpm and 2,000 rpm.
Is the oil pressure below 49 kPa ( 0.5 kgf / cm2 ,

A
7 psi)?
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, YES−Check for air in the fuel line, then go to step
16 lbf·ft)
25.
NO−Inspect the VTEC system, then go to step 25.
B 25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

07NAJ-P07010A
07JAZ-S5AA200
27. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.

11-324).
29. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
11-116 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:13:45 61TL2000_110_0117

• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value)
• APP SENSOR
Is DT C P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304

indicated?

terminals at the ignition coils, the injectors, and the
ECM/PCM, then go to the troubleshooting for DTC
P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 (see page 11-118).
NO−Go to step 32.
32. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,


NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1

and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 30.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-117

08/04/09 12:13:45 61TL2000_110_0118
PGM-FI System

DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
YES−Go to step 9.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6 and
recheck.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
P or N, M/T in neutral). Does the CY L1 MISF IRE, CY L2 MISF IRE, CY L3
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, counts?
YES−Go to step 9.
YES−Go to step 9. time. Check for loose wires or poor connections in
the fuel system circuit.
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, wait for several 10. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem
minutes, and recheck. cylinder with one from another cylinder.
5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• ENGINE SPEED
Does the CY L1 MISF IRE, CY L2 MISF IRE, CY L3 • VSS
MISF IRE, and/ or CY L4 MISF IRE show misf ire • REL TP SENSOR
counts? • CLV (calculated load value)
• APP SENSOR
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Go to step 6.

• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
• APP SENSOR
11-118 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０３０１ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:13:45 61TL2000_110_0119
12. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 18. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
for 10 minutes with the HDS. Does the misf ire occur in the cylinder where the
spark plug was exchanged?
Does the CY L1 MISF IRE, CY L2 MISF IRE, CY L3
MISF IRE, and/ or CY L4 MISF IRE show misf ire YES−Replace the faulty spark plug, then go to step
counts? 40.
YES−Go to step 13. NO−Go to step 19.
NO−Intermittent misfire due to poor contact at the 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
ignition coil connector (no misfire at this time).
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 20. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder
the ignition coil. with one from the another cylinder.
13. Determine which cylinder had the misfire. 21. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes.
Does the misf ire occur in the cylinder where the 22. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
ignition coil was exchanged? range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
YES−Replace the faulty ignition coil (see page • ENGINE SPEED

4-18), then go to step 40. • VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
NO−Go to step 14. • CLV (calculated load value)
• APP SENSOR
15. Exchange the spark plug from the problem cylinder MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
with one from another cylinder. for 10 minutes with the HDS.
16. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the Does the CY L1 MISF IRE, CY L2 MISF IRE, CY L3
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: MISF IRE, and/ or CY L4 MISF IRE show misf ire
counts?
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS YES−Go to step 24.
• REL TP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value) NO−Intermittent misfire due to bad contact at the
• APP SENSOR injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check
for poor connections or loose terminals at the
17. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 injector.
for 10 minutes with the HDS. 24. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the CY L1 MISF IRE, CY L2 MISF IRE, CY L3 Does the misf ire occur in the cylinder where the
MISF IRE, and/ or CY L4 MISF IRE show misf ire injector was exchanged?
counts?
YES−Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-225),
YES−Go to step 18. then go to step 40.
NO−Intermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling NO−Go to step 25.

(no misfire at this time).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-119

08/04/09 12:13:45 61TL2000_110_0120
PGM-FI System

25. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown 31. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
test (see page 6-6). appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal of the
problem cylinder (see table).
Did the engine pass both tests?
PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE
YES−Go to step 26. CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 C5 BRN
NO−Repair the engine, then go to step 40. No. 2 P0302 C6 RED
No. 3 P0303 C7 BLU
26. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see page 6-7). No. 4 P0304 C8 YEL
＊０１
Did the engine pass the test?
INJ2 (RED) INJ3 (BLU)
YES−Go to step 27. INJ1 (BRN) INJ4 (YEL)
NO−Repair the VTEC rocker arm (see page 6-34),

then go to step 40.

NO−Go to step 32.
11-120 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:15:01 61TL2000_110_0121
32. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 37. Check for continuity between body ground and the
ECM/PCM connector terminal of the problem
33. Disconnect the injector 2P connector from the cylinder (see table).
problem cylinder.
34. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 C5 BRN
35. Measure the voltage between injector 2P connector No. 2 P0302 C6 RED
terminal No. 1 and body ground. No. 3 P0303 C7 BLU
＊０２ No. 4 P0304 C8 YEL
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR ＊０３

INJ1 (BRN) INJ4 (YEL)
IGP (YEL/BLK)

NO−Repair open in the wire between the injector PCM and the injector, then go to step 40.
and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 40.
NO−Go to step 38.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-121

08/04/09 12:15:02 61TL2000_110_0122
PGM-FI System

38. Check for continuity between appropriate injector 39. At the injector side, measure the resistance
2P connector terminal No. 2 and the ECM/PCM between injector 2P connector terminals No. 1 and
connector terminal of the problem cylinder (see No. 2.
table). ＊０５
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 C5 BRN
No. 2 P0302 C6 RED
No. 3 P0303 C7 BLU
No. 4 P0304 C8 YEL IGP INJ
＊０４
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
INJ Terminal side of male terminals

Is there 10−13 ?
INJ1 (BRN) INJ4 (YEL)
NO−Replace the injector (see page 11-225), then
go to step 40.

PCM and the injector, then go to step 40. 45. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
11-122 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:15:02 61TL2000_110_0123
47. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 53. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DT C P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304
• ENGINE SPEED indicated?
• VSS
• REL TP SENSOR YES−Check for poor connections or loose
• CLV (calculated load value) terminals at the ignition coils, the injectors, and the
• APP SENSOR ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute
48. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. to step 52. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
Is DT C P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304
indicated? NO−Go to step 54.
YES−Check for poor connections or loose 54. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
terminals at the ignition coils, the injectors, and the P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
ECM/PCM, then go to the troubleshooting for DTC
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 (see page Does the screen indicate PASSED?
11-114).
NO−Go to step 49. troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
49. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, (see page 11-234). If any other Temporary DTCs or
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. DTCs were indicated in step 53, go to the indicated
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other connections or loose terminals at the ignition coils,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 48, the injectors, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
connections or loose terminals at the ignition coils, EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
the injectors, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT
If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving COMPLETED, go to step 52.
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 47.


• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
• APP SENSOR
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-123

08/04/09 12:15:02 61TL2000_110_0124
PGM-FI System

DTC P0325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction 10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at KS (RED/BLU)

idle.
4. Hold the engine speed between 3,000−4,000 rpm Terminal side of female terminals
for at least 10 seconds.
Is DT C P0325 indicated? PCM (C46) and the knock sensor, then go to step 14.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Connect the knock sensor 1P connector terminal to
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals body ground with a jumper wire.
at the knock sensor and the ECM/PCM. ＊０２
KNOCK SENSOR 1P CONNECTOR
8. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector KS (RED/BLU)

(see page 11-231).
JUMPER WIRE
11-124 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０３２５ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:15:03 61TL2000_110_0125
12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the
terminal C46 and body ground. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
＊０３


KS (RED/BLU) connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor

Terminal side of female terminals software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
22. Hold the engine speed between 3,000−4,000 rpm
YES−Go to step 13. for at least 10 seconds.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/ 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
PCM (C46) and the knock sensor, then go to step 14.
13. Replace the knock sensor (see page 11-231).
14. Reconnect all connectors. terminals at the knock sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 22.
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 24.
11-324). 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the
18. Hold the engine speed between 3,000−4,000 rpm
for at least 10 seconds. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated,
Is DT C P0325 indicated? substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
YES−Go to step 21. DTCs were indicated in step 23, go to the indicated
NO−Go to step 20.
connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 22.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-125

08/04/09 12:15:03 61TL2000_110_0126
PGM-FI System

DTC P0335: CKP Sensor No Signal 9. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data ＊０２
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

CKP (BLU)
YES−Go to step 5.
at the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM.
NO−Go to step 11.
10. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P
6. Disconnect the CKP sensor 3P connector. connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
＊０３
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
8. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P

＊０１
CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR LG (BRN/YEL) IGP (YEL/BLK)
IGP (YEL/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals YES−Go to step 17.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the CKP

Is there battery voltage? sensor and G101 (see page 22-20), then go to step
19.
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the CKP

sensor and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 19.
11-126 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０３３５ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:15:04 61TL2000_110_0127
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. ＊０６

＊０４
CKP (BLU/YEL)

CKP (BLU/YEL)
Terminal side of female terminals NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C32) and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19.
PCM (C32) and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19. 18. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-228).
NO−Go to step 15. 19. Reconnect all connectors.
15. Connect CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
body ground with a jumper wire.
＊０５ 21. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

11-324).
CKP (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-127

08/04/09 12:15:04 61TL2000_110_0128
PGM-FI System


terminals at the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.



terminals at the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If

11-128 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:15:04 61TL2000_110_0129
DTC P0339: CKP Sensor Circuit Intermittent 8. Remove the cam chain case (see page 6-13), and
Interruption check for damage on the CKP sensor pulser plate.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is the pulser plate damaged?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES−Replace the CKP sensor pulser plate
(see page 7-30), then go to step 11.
NO−Go to step 9.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
10. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-228).
4. Check the CKP NOISE in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Are 0 counts indicated? 12. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 7. 13. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 5. 14. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: 15. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
• ENGINE SPEED 16. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
• VSS
6. Check the CKP NOISE in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. Is DT C P0339 indicated?
Are 0 counts indicated? YES−Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM,
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
at the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM. indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
7. Check for poor or loose connections and terminals

at these locations:
• CKP sensor
• ECM/PCM
• Engine ground
• Body ground
Are the connections and terminals OK ?
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to

step 11.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-129
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０３３９ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:15:04 61TL2000_110_0130
PGM-FI System

DTC P0351: No. 1 Cylinder Ignition Coil 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Circuit Malfunction
10. Check the No. 13 IG COIL (15 A) fuse in the under-
DTC P0352: No. 2 Cylinder Ignition Coil hood fuse/relay box.
Circuit Malfunction
Is the f use OK ?
DTC P0353: No. 3 Cylinder Ignition Coil
Circuit Malfunction YES−Go to step 11.
DTC P0354: No. 4 Cylinder Ignition Coil NO−Go to step 12.

Circuit Malfunction
11. Test the ignition coil relay (A) in the under-hood
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data fuse/relay box (see page 22-73).
A
Is DT C P0351, P0352, P0353, and/ or P0354

indicated?
YES−Go to step 5.
Is the ignition coil relay OK ?
at the ignition coil and the ECM/PCM.
NO−Replace the ignition coil relay, then go to step
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 25.
6. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem

cylinder with one from another cylinder.
Is a DT C indicated at the exchanged cylinder?
YES−Replace the faulty ignition coil (see page

NO−Go to step 9.
11-130 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０３５１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:15:05 61TL2000_110_0131
12. Remove the ignition coil relay (A) from the under- 15. Reinstall the ignition coil relay.
hood fuse/relay box.
＊０２ 16. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector from the
A problem cylinder.
18. Measure the voltage between ignition coil 3P

connector terminal No. 3 of the problem cylinder
and body ground (see table).
PROBLEM DTC
CYLINDER
No. 1 P0351
No. 2 P0352
No. 3 P0353
No. 4 P0354
13. Disconnect all ignition coil 3P connectors. ＊０４
No. 1 IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
14. Check for continuity between No. 1 ignition coil 3P
＊０３
No. 1 IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
＋B (BLK/WHT)
＋B (BLK/WHT)

Is there continuity? NO−Repair open in the wire between the ignition

coil and the ignition coil relay, then go to step 25.
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ignition
coils and the ignition coil relay. Also replace the
No. 13 IG COIL (15 A) fuse, then go to step 25.

step 25.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-131

08/04/09 12:15:05 61TL2000_110_0132
PGM-FI System

ECM/PCM connector terminal of the problem
20. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P cylinder (see table).
connector terminal No. 2 of the problem cylinder
and body ground (see table). PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
PROBLEM DTC No. 1 P0351 C15 YEL/GRN
CYLINDER No. 2 P0352 C16 BLU/RED
No. 1 P0351 No. 3 P0353 C17 WHT/BLU
No. 2 P0352 No. 4 P0354 C18 BRN
No. 3 P0353 ＊０６
No. 4 P0354
＊０５
IGPLS2 (BLU/RED) IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU)
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN) IGPLS4 (BRN)
GND (BLK)

Is there continuity? YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/

PCM and the ignition coil, then go to step 25.
NO−Go to step 24.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ignition
coil and G102, then go to step 25.
11-132 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:15:06 61TL2000_110_0133
24. Check for continuity between appropriate ignition 30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
coil 3P connector terminal No. 1 and the ECM/PCM
connector terminal of the problem cylinder (see Is DT C P0351, P0352, P0353, and/ or P0354
table). indicated?
PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE YES−Check for poor connections or loose

CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR terminals at the ignition coil and the ECM/PCM,
No. 1 P0351 C15 YEL/GRN then go to step 1.
No. 2 P0352 C16 BLU/RED
No. 3 P0353 C17 WHT/BLU NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
No. 4 P0354 C18 BRN Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
＊０７ indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
IGPLS 32. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest

IGPLS2 (BLU/RED) IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU) Is DT C P0351, P0352, P0353, and/ or P0354
IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN) IGPLS4 (BRN) indicated?

terminals at the ignition coil and the ECM/PCM. If
Terminal side of female terminals ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
Is there continuity? NO−If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting

YES−Go to step 31. replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). If
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/ go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
PCM and the ignition coil, then go to step 25.

11-324).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-133

08/04/09 12:15:06 61TL2000_110_0134
PGM-FI System

DTC P0365: CMP Sensor B Circuit No Signal 9. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor B 3P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general CMP SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR

CMPB (GRN)
YES−Go to step 5.
at CMP sensor B and the ECM/PCM.
NO−Go to step 11.
10. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor 3P
6. Disconnect the CMP sensor B 3P connector. connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
＊０３
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). CMP SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR
8. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor B 3P

＊０１
CMP SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR LG (BRN/YEL) IGP (YEL/BLK)
IGP (YEL/BLK)
NO−Repair open in the wire between CMP sensor

Is there battery voltage? B and G101 (see page 22-20), then go to step 18.
YES−Go to step 9.

B and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 18.
11-134 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０３６５ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:15:07 61TL2000_110_0135
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Check for continuity between CMP sensor B 3P
connector terminal No. 1 and ECM/PCM connector
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. terminal C31.
＊０５
CMP SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR

CMPB (GRN)
＊０４
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) Wire side of female terminals
CMPB (GRN)
CMPB (GRN)
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ PCM (C31) and CMP sensor B, then go to step 18.
PCM (C31) and CMP sensor B, then go to step 18.
NO−Go to step 15.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-135

08/04/09 12:15:07 61TL2000_110_0136
PGM-FI System

17. Replace CMP sensor B (see page 11-228).

11-324).

terminals at CMP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.



terminals at CMP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If the

11-136 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:15:07 61TL2000_110_0137
DTC P0369: CMP Sensor B Circuit Intermittent 8. Check for damage on the CMP sensor B pulser
Interruption plate (see page 6-30).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES−Replace the CMP sensor B pulser plate
NO−Go to step 9.
10. Replace CMP sensor B (see page 11-228).
4. Check the CMP B NOISE in the DATA LIST with the
YES−Go to step 7. 13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
NO−Go to step 5.
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• ENGINE SPEED Is DT C P0369 indicated?

• VSS
6. Check the CMP B NOISE in the DATA LIST with the terminals at CMP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then
HDS. go to step 1.
Are 0 counts indicated? NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

YES−Go to step 7. indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.

at CMP sensor B and the ECM/PCM.

at these locations:
• CMP sensor B
• ECM/PCM
• Engine ground
• Body ground
YES−Go to step 8.

step 11.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-137
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０３６９ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:15:07 61TL2000_110_0138
PGM-FI System

DTC P050A: Cold Start Idle Air Control 6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
System Performance Problem 1 is 122 °F (50 °C) or less.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 8. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or
more.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Are any T emporary DT Cs or DT Cs other than Does the screen indicate F AILED?
P050A indicated?
YES−Go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
NO−Go to step 3. failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
3. Check for poor connections or blockage at the comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
intake air duct. CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6.
Is it OK ? 10. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

the HDS.
YES−Go to step 4.
Is the T HROT T LE ACT UAT OR CONT ROL
NO−Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then V ALV E normal?
go to step 19.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing.
NO−Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367),
Is it OK ? then go to step 19.
YES−Go to step 5. 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
NO−Replace the air cleaner housing (see page neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it
11-364), then go to step 19. idle.
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YES−Replace the air cleaner element or remove

the debris (see page 11-364), then go to step 19.
NO−Go to step 6.
11-138 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０５０ＡＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:15:07 61TL2000_110_0139
12. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
30 seconds, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA
LIST with the HDS. 20. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
Is there about 6.0−7 .4 gm/ s ( M/ T ) or 21. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
7 .0−8.6 gm/ s ( A/ T )? 11-324).
YES−Go to step 13. 22. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
1 is 122 °F (50 °C) or less.
11-229), then go to step 19. 23. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or
more.
14. Allow the engine to cool to ambient temperature.
Is DT C P050A indicated?
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). terminals at the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
17. Note the value of IAT SENSOR quickly in the DATA
LIST with the HDS. NO−Go to step 25.
18. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR and the 25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the
ambient temperature. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR dif f er 5.4 °F Does the screen indicate PASSED?
( 3 °C) or more?
YES−Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 24,
(see page 11-229), then go to step 19. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
NO−Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
throttle bore. If there is dirt or carbon, clean the connections or loose terminals at the throttle body,
throttle body (see page 11-363), then go to step 19. the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the ECM/PCM,
If there is damage in the throttle bore, replace the then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
throttle body (see page 11-367), then go to step 19. EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-139

08/04/09 12:15:07 61TL2000_110_0140
PGM-FI System

DTC P050B: Cold Start Ignition Timing 6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
Control System Performance Problem 1 is 122 °F (50 °C) or less.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 8. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or
more.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the
Are any T emporary DT Cs or DT Cs other than Does the screen indicate F AILED?
P050B indicated?
YES−Go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
NO−Go to step 3. failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
3. Check for poor connections or blockage at the comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
intake air duct. CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6.
Is it OK ? 10. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-17).
YES−Go to step 4. Is the ignition timing OK ?
NO−Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then YES−Go to step 12.
go to step 24.
NO−Go to step 11.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing.
11. Check for damage at the CKP sensor (see page
Is it OK ? 11-228) and the CKP sensor pulser plate (see page
7-30).
YES−Go to step 5.
Is the CK P sensor and/ or the CK P sensor pulser
NO−Replace the air cleaner housing (see page plate damaged?
YES−Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-228)
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element. and/or the CKP sensor pulser plate (see page 7-30),
then go to step 6.
Is it dirty?
NO−Go to step 31.
YES−Replace the air cleaner element or remove
the debris (see page 11-364), then go to step 24.
NO−Go to step 6.
11-140 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０５０ＢＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:15:08 61TL2000_110_0141
12. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with 23. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
the HDS. ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
Is the T HROT T LE ACT UAT OR CONT ROL individually.
V ALV E normal?
Does either sensor dif f er more than 5.4 °F ( 3 °C)
YES−Go to step 13. f rom the ambient temperature?
NO−Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367), YES−Replace the sensor that differed more than
then go to step 24. 5.4 °F (3 °C) from the ambient temperature, then go
to step 24.
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in NO−Refill the coolant (see page 10-6), then check
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it for and repair any problems with the following
idle. items. Go to step 24.
14. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for • Engine compression and cylinder leakdown
30 seconds, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA • VTEC system
LIST with the HDS. • Engine oil
• A/C system
Is there about 6.0−7 .4 gm/ s ( M/ T ) or • Power steering
7 .0−8.6 gm/ s ( A/ T )?
11-229), then go to step 24. 26. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
27. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
16. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6). 1 is 122 °F (50 °C) or less.
17. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-230), and ECT 28. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or
sensor 2 (see page 11-230). more.
18. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature. 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
19. Note the ambient temperature. Is DT C P050B indicated?
20. Connect ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 to their 2P YES−Check for poor connections or loose
connectors, but do not install them. terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
22. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR NO−Go to step 30.
2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-141

08/04/09 12:15:08 61TL2000_110_0142
PGM-FI System

30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the 36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated,

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 29, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor DTCs were indicated in step 35, go to the indicated
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor, DTC’s troubleshooting.
the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM, then go NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor,
idling until a result comes on. If the screen the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT
indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If the
go to step 27. ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 33. If the
31. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known- screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
11-324).
33. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
1 is 122 °F (50 °C) or less.
34. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or

more.
Is DT C P050B indicated?

terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor
2, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 36.
11-142 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:15:08 61TL2000_110_0143
DTC P0562: Charging System Low Voltage 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: 8. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 11-324).
• If any high current load accessories are installed, this
DTC can be set. 10. Start the engine.
• If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC is stored at the same time
as DTC P0562, troubleshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC 11. Check under these conditions:
first, then recheck for DTC P0562.
• A/C on
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). • Temperature control at maximum cool
• Blower fan at maximum speed
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. • Rear window defogger on
• Headlights on high beam
12. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (A/T in P or N,
4. Check under these conditions: M/T in neutral) for 1 minute.
• A/C on 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• Temperature control at maximum cool
• Blower fan at maximum speed Is DT C P0562 indicated?
• Rear window defogger on
• Headlights on high beam YES−Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the alternator and the under-hood
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (A/T in P or N, fuse/relay box, then go to step 1.
M/T in neutral) for 1 minute.
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
YES−Replace the alternator (see page 4-32), then

go to step 7.

at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
and check the battery performance (see page
22-77).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-143
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０５６２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:15:08 61TL2000_110_0144
PGM-FI System

DTC P0563: ECM/PCM Power Source Circuit 10. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector
Unexpected Voltage terminal A7 and body ground.
＊０１
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). MRLY (RED/BLK)
4. Wait 10 seconds.
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there battery voltage?
Is DT C P0563 indicated? YES−Go to step 13.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A) from the under-
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals hood fuse/relay box.
at PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM. ＊０２
A
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P).
11-144 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０５６３ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:15:09 61TL2000_110_0145
12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 14. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A7 and body ground. terminal A9 and body ground.
＊０３＊０５
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
MRLY (RED/BLK) IGP (YEL/BLK)
Is there continuity? Is there battery voltage?
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ YES−Repair short to power in the wire between
PCM (A7) and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step the ECM/PCM (A9) and PGM-FI main relay 1, then
16. go to step 16.
13. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A) from the under- 15. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-80).
＊０４ Is PGM-F I main relay 1 OK ?
A
NO−Replace PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step

16.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-145

08/04/09 12:15:10 61TL2000_110_0146
PGM-FI System


11-324).
21. Wait 10 seconds.

terminals at PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.



terminals at PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM.

11-146 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:15:10 61TL2000_110_0147
DTC P0602: ECM/PCM Programming Error DTC P0606: ECM/PCM Processor Malfunction
NOTE: NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• This DTC is indicated when an ECM/PCM update is 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
not completed.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACC (I) 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
while updating the ECM/PCM. If you turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0) or ACC (I) before completion, the 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
ECM/PCM can be damaged.
1. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure (see page
11-233). 5. Wait 40 seconds.
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DT C P0602 indicated? Is DT C P0606 indicated?
YES−Replace the original ECM/PCM (see page YES−Go to step 7.

11-234).
NO−The update is complete. If any other time.
indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. 7. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
10. Wait 40 seconds.
YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a

known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to
step 8. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step
1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-147
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０６０２ＦＡＡＴ００ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０６０６ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:15:10 61TL2000_110_0148
PGM-FI System

DTC P060A: PCM (A/T system) Internal DTC P062F: ECM/PCM Internal Control
Control Module Malfunction Module Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Is DT C P060A indicated? Is DT C P062F indicated?
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. time.
4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 4. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known- software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-7). good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
Is DT C P060A indicated? Is DT C P062F indicated?
YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
was substituted, go to step 1. recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the NO−If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
original PCM (see page 11-234). If any other is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). If
indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
11-148 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０６０ＡＦＡＡＴ３０ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０６２ＦＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:15:10 61TL2000_110_0149
DTC P0630: VIN Not Programmed or 8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Mismatch
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and YES−Go to step 9.
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
• This DTC is stored only when the ECM/PCM does not time.
have the VIN information of the vehicle. Use the HDS
to input the missing VIN information. 9. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
2. Check the VIN with the HDS. 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Does the HDS show the vehicle’s V IN? Is DT C P0630 indicated?
YES−Go to step 5. YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a

NO−Go to step 3. recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
3. Input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
Does the screen show COMPLET E? is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
YES−Go to step 5. any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
NO−Go to step 4.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DT C P062F indicated?
YES−Go to the DTC P062F troubleshooting

(see page 11-148).
NO−Go to step 9.

5 seconds.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-149
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０６３０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:15:10 61TL2000_110_0150
PGM-FI System

DTC P0685: ECM/PCM Power Control Circuit/ 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Internal Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Is DT C P0685 indicated?
• If the problem doesn’t return after you clear the DTC,
or it this DTC is stored intermittently, check for loose YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
terminals at the IGP line connectors before replacing known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to
the ECM/PCM. step 10. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step
1.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
3. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds. any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
5. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds.
YES−Go to step 9.

time.

11-150 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０６８５ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:16:13 61TL2000_110_0151
DTC P0720: Output Shaft (Countershaft) 7. Measure the voltage between output shaft
Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector terminal
No. 1 and body ground.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

3,000 rpm without load (in neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
2. Test-drive for several minutes.
3. Check the C SHAFT SPD in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is any vehicle speed indicated?
YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there about 5 V ?

at the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and YES−Go to step 8.
the ECM.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM
NO−Go to step 4. (C13) and the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor, then go to step 18.
8. Measure the voltage between output shaft
5. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector terminal
sensor 3P connector. No. 2 and body ground.
＊０２
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
NC (BLK/WHT)
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Go to step 10.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-151
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０７２０ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:16:13 61TL2000_110_0152
PGM-FI System

9. Measure the voltage between output shaft 13. Check for continuity between ECM connector
(countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector terminals terminal B38 and body ground.
No. 1 and No. 3. ＊０４
ECM CONNECTOR B (49P)
＊０３
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VCC1 (YEL/RED) SG1 (GRN/WHT) NC (BLK/WHT)
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM
YES−Go to step 16. (B38) and the output shaft (countershaft) speed
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM
(C14) and the output shaft (countershaft) speed NO−Go to step 14.
14. Connect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. ＊０５
12. Disconnect ECM connector B (49P). SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
NC (BLK/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
11-152 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:16:14 61TL2000_110_0153
15. Check for continuity between ECM connector 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
＊０６ Is DT C P07 20 indicated?
ECM CONNECTOR B (49P)
terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor and the ECM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 24.
NC (BLK/WHT) 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0720 in the
Terminal side of female terminals YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

Is there continuity? go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
YES−Go to step 25. NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the output shaft
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM (countershaft) speed sensor and the ECM, then go
(B38) and the output shaft (countershaft) speed to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
sensor, then go to step 18. go to step 22.
16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 25. Reconnect all connectors.
17. Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed 26. Update the ECM if it does not have the latest
sensor (see page 11-231). software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
good ECM (see page 11-7).
20. Reset the ECM with the HDS. above 176 °F (80 °C)
• Transmission in 5th
21. Do the ECM idle learn procedure (see page 11-324). • Engine speed between 2,000 −3,000 rpm
• Drive for several minutes, then decelerate (with
22. Test-drive under these conditions: the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds

above 176 °F (80 °C)
• Transmission in 5th
• Drive for several minutes, then decelerate (with
the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-153

08/04/09 12:16:14 61TL2000_110_0154
PGM-FI System

Is DT C P07 20 indicated?

terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor and the ECM. If the ECM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM (see page 11-7), then
go to step 27. If the ECM was substituted, go to step
1.
NO−Go to step 29.

YES−If the ECM was updated, troubleshooting is

complete. If the ECM was substituted, replace the
original ECM (see page 11-234). If any other

connections or loose terminals at the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor and the ECM. If the
ECM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM
(see page 11-7), then go to step 27. If the ECM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
11-154 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:16:14 61TL2000_110_0155
DTC P1109: BARO Sensor Circuit Out of

Range High
YES−Go to step 4.

time.


step 1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-155
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１１０９ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:16:14 61TL2000_110_0156
PGM-FI System

DTC P1116: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Range/ 11. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, but do
Performance Problem not install it.
NOTE: 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

any on-board snapshot, and review the general 13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 quickly in the
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). DATA LIST with the HDS.
• If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P1116,
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC 14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
P1116. ambient temperature.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Does the value of ECT SENSOR 1 dif f er 5.4 °F
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2. ( 3 °C) or more?
Are the connections and terminals OK ? YES−Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-230), then
go to step 27.
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
step 27. at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 15. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Are DT C P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same
time? Is about 99 °F ( 37 °C) or less indicated?
YES−Go to step 15. YES−Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-230), then
go to step 27.
NO−Go to step 4.
NO−Go to step 17.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.
17. Let the engine idle 10 minutes.
HDS. 18. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 99 °F ( 37 °C) or less indicated?
YES−Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-230), then
go to step 27. YES−Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-230), then
go to step 27.
NO−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 19.
7. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
8. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-230).
9. Allow ECT sensor 1 to cool to ambient temperature.
11-156 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１１１６ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:16:14 61TL2000_110_0157
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 27. Refill the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
20. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6). 28. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-230) and ECT 29. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
sensor 2 (see page 11-230).
22. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature. 11-324).
23. Note the ambient temperature. 31. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 to their 2P Is DT C P1116 indicated?
connectors, but do not install them.
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS. ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
26. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
ambient temperature, and the value of ECT Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
individually.
Does one of the sensors dif f er more than 5.4 °F

( 3 °C) f rom the ambient temperature?
YES−Replace the sensor that differed more than

5.4 °F (3 °C) from the ambient temperature, then go
to step 27.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-157

08/04/09 12:16:14 61TL2000_110_0158
PGM-FI System

DTC P1128: MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Expected
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 11. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
any on-board snapshot, and review the general 11-324).
• Before starting this troubleshooting check for poor 12. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
connections or blockage at the intake air duct. 3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). idle.
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 13. Test-drive under these conditions:
HDS.
Is less than 54.1 kPa ( 16.0 in.Hg, 406 mmHg), or above 158 °F (70 °C)
1.61 V held f or more than 5 seconds? • Engine speed between 1,400 −5,400 rpm
• A/T in D, M/T in 3rd
YES−Go to step 7. • Vehicle speed accelerated from 16 −31 mph
(25−50 km/h) under half throttle
NO−Go to step 3.
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in YES−Check for poor connections or loose
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM,
idle. then go to step 1.
5. Test-drive under these conditions: NO−Go to step 15.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) 15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1128 in the
above 158 °F (70 °C) DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• A/T in D, M/T in 3rd Does the screen indicate PASSED?
• Vehicle speed accelerated from 16 −31 mph
(25−50 km/h) under half throttle YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1128 in the go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
Does the screen indicate F AILED? connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
YES−Go to step 7. indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 12.

poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP
8. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-229).
11-158 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１１２８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:16:14 61TL2000_110_0159
DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than 5. Test-drive under these conditions:
Expected
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data above 158 °F (70 °C)
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general • A/T in D, M/T in 5th
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Drive at a steady speed between 55 −75 mph
(88−120 km/h) for 10 seconds
1. Check for vacuum leaks in these parts: • During the drive, decelerate (with throttle fully
closed) for at least 2 seconds
• PCV valve
• PCV hose 6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1129 in the
• EVAP canister purge valve DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Throttle body
• Intake manifold Does the screen indicate F AILED?
• Brake booster
• Brake booster hose YES−Go to step 7.
Are there any vacuum leaks? NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
YES−Repair or replace the parts with vacuum poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP
leaks, then go to step 9. sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the screen indicates
NO−Go to step 2.
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in 8. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-229).
idle. 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 10. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
HDS.
Is more than 36.9 kPa ( 11.0 in.Hg, 27 7 mmHg), or 11-324).
1.1 V held f or more than f or 5 seconds?
YES−Go to step 7. 3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in
NO−Go to step 4. idle.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-159
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１１２９ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:16:15 61TL2000_110_0160
PGM-FI System


above 158 °F (70 °C)
(88−120 km/h) for 10 seconds
• During the drive, decelerate (with throttle fully
closed) for at least 2 seconds

then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 15.



connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
11-160 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:16:15 61TL2000_110_0161
DTC P1157: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS Circuit 9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
High Voltage 4P connector terminal No. 1 and ECM/PCM
connector terminal C29.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). AFS＋ (RED)

3. Start the engine, and wait 1 minute. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
YES−Go to step 5.
AFS＋ (RED)
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Terminal side of female terminals
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. Is there continuity?
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES−Go to step 10.
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector. step 12.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-161
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１１５７ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:16:15 61TL2000_110_0162
PGM-FI System

10. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
4P connector terminal No. 2 and ECM/PCM
connector terminal C30. Is DT C P1157 indicated?
＊０２
AFS− (RED/YEL) terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
PCM, then go to step 1. If the connector and
terminal fits are OK, go to step 18.
NO−Go to step 17.

ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) 17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1157 in the

AFS− (RED/YEL) go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
Is there continuity? connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
YES−Go to step 11. the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
PCM (C30) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to 18. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
step 12. software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
11-227). 19. Start the engine, and let it idle.

11-324).
11-162 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:16:15 61TL2000_110_0163

1.
NO−Go to step 21.


NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If

If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-163

08/04/09 12:16:15 61TL2000_110_0164
PGM-FI System

DTC P1172: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Out 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
of Range High
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES−Check for poor connections or loose
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 12.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at DTCs MENU with the HDS.
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it Does the screen indicate PASSED?
idle.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1172 in the Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 11,
DTCs MENU with the HDS. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
Does the screen indicate F AILED? NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
YES−Go to step 5. (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 10.
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the screen
recheck.

11-227).

11-324).

idle.
11-164 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１１７２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:16:16 61TL2000_110_0165
DTC P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A24 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 7 2 A or more indicated? ELD (BLU/BLK)
YES−Go to step 3.

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Terminal side of female terminals
at the ELD and the ECM/PCM.
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector. PCM (A24) and the ELD, then go to step 13.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO−Go to step 20.
6. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is 7 2 A or more indicated? 12. Replace the ELD (see page 11-232).
YES−Go to step 7. 13. Reconnect all connectors.
NO−Go to step 11. 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 16. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
18. Turn on the headlights.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-165
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１２９７ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:16:16 61TL2000_110_0166
PGM-FI System


terminals at the ELD and the ECM/PCM, then go to
step 1.


23. Turn on the headlights.

terminals at the ELD and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

11-166 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:16:16 61TL2000_110_0167
DTC P1298: ELD Circuit High Voltage 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 9. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector
terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). A24.
＊０２
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 0.2 A or less indicated?

ELD (BLU/BLK)
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

at the ELD and the ECM/PCM.
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector. ELD (BLU/BLK)
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Terminal side of female terminals
6. Measure the voltage between ELD 3P connector Is there continuity?

terminal No. 1 and body ground.
＊０１ YES−Go to step 10.
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
PCM (A24) and the ELD, then go to step 12.
IG1 (BLK/RED)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Check the No. 7 ACG (15 A) fuse in the driver’s

under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
open in the wire between the No. 7 ACG (15 A) fuse
and the ELD, then go to step 12.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-167
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１２９８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:16:17 61TL2000_110_0168
PGM-FI System

10. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector 17. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
terminal No. 2 and body ground. software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
＊０３ good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
ELD 3P CONNECTOR

GND (BLK)
terminals at the ELD and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, go to step 1.
Wire side of female terminals NO−If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
Is there continuity? any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ELD and

G301 (see page 22-26), then go to step 12.
11. Replace the ELD (see page 11-232).

11-324).

11-168 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:16:17 61TL2000_110_0169
DTC P1549: Charging System High Voltage 10. Start the engine.
NOTE: 11. Check under these conditions:

any on-board snapshot, and review the general • A/C off
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Headlights off
• If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) is connected to • Rear window defogger off
the vehicle, this DTC can be stored.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). M/T in neutral) for 1 minute.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Is DT C P1549 indicated?
4. Check under these conditions: YES−Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the alternator and the under-hood
• A/C off fuse/relay box, then go to step 1.
• Headlights off
• Rear window defogger off NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (A/T in P or N, indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.

go to step 7.

at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay
box.

11-324).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-169
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１５４９ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:16:17 61TL2000_110_0170
PGM-FI System

DTC P16BB: Alternator B Terminal Circuit 8. Check for an open in the wire between the
Low Voltage alternator and under-hood fuse/relay box at the
starter subharness.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Is the harness OK ?
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). go to step 9.
2. Clear the DTC with HDS. NO−Repair open in the wire between the
alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then
3. Start the engine. go to step 9.
4. Check under these conditions: 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
• A/C on 10. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.

• Blower fan at maximum speed 11. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
• Rear window defogger on 11-324).
M/T in neutral) for 1 minute. 13. Check under these conditions:
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. • A/C on

Is DT C P16BB indicated? • Blower fan at maximum speed
YES−Go to step 7. • Headlights on high beam
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 14. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (A/T in P or N,
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals M/T in neutral) for 1 minute.
at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
and check the battery performance (see page 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
22-77).
Is DT C P16BB indicated?
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box YES−Check for poor connections or loose
(＋B line). terminals at the alternator and the under-hood
fuse/relay box, then go to step 1.
YES−Go to step 8. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
step 9.
11-170 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１６ＢＢＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:16:17 61TL2000_110_0171
DTC P16BC: Alternator FR Terminal Circuit/ 8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
IGP Circuit Low Voltage
Is DT C P16BC indicated?
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES−Go to step 9.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
the alternator 4P connector. at the alternator.
Are the connections and terminals OK ? 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES−Go to step 2. 10. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
NO−Repair the connector or terminals, then go to 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
step 18.
12. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P
2. Check the alternator mounting surfaces for connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
corrosion. ＊０１
Are the mounting surf aces corroded?
IG1 (BLK/YEL)
YES−Remove the alternator (see page 4-32). Clean
all of its mounting surfaces, reinstall the alternator,
then go to step 18.
NO−Go to step 3.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals

6. Check under these conditions:
• A/C on
• Temperature control at maximum cool NO−Repair open in the wire between the
• Blower fan at maximum speed alternator (IG1 line) and the No. 7 ACG (15 A) fuse
• Rear window defogger on in the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box, then go
• Headlights on high beam to step 18.
7. Hold the engine speed 2,000 rpm (A/T in P or N,

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-171
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１６ＢＣＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:16:18 61TL2000_110_0172
PGM-FI System

13. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P 17. Check for continuity between alternator 4P
connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. connector terminal No. 4 and ECM/PCM connector
＊０２ terminal B47.
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR ＊０３
ALTF (WHT/RED)
ALTF (WHT/RED) Wire side of female terminals
ALTF (WHT/RED)
YES−Replace the alternator (see page 4-32), then Terminal side of female terminals
go to step 18.
NO−Go to step 14.
15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. PCM (B47) and the alternator, then go to step 18.
16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P). 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

11-324).
• A/C on
11-172 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:16:18 61TL2000_110_0173


terminals at the alternator and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.


• A/C on


terminals at the alternator and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 29. If the

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-173

08/04/09 12:16:18 61TL2000_110_0174
PGM-FI System

DTC P2183: ECT Sensor 2 Range/ 11. Connect ECT sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do
Performance Problem not install it.

any on-board snapshot, and review the general 13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 quickly in the
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). DATA LIST with the HDS.
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC 14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the
P2183. ambient temperature.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Does ECT SENSOR 2 dif f er 5.4 °F ( 3 °C) or
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2. more?
Are the connections and terminals OK ? YES−Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-230), then
go to step 27.
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
step 27. at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 15. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
time? Is about 99 °F ( 37 °C) or less indicated?
YES−Go to step 15. YES−Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-230), then
go to step 27.
NO−Go to step 4.
NO−Go to step 17.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.
17. Let the engine idle 10 minutes.
HDS. 18. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 108 °F ( 42 °C) indicated?
YES−Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-230), then
go to step 27. YES−Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-230), then
go to step 27.
NO−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 19.
7. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
8. Remove ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-230).
9. Allow ECT sensor 2 to cool to ambient temperature.
11-174 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１８３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:16:18 61TL2000_110_0175
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
20. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6). 28. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-230) and ECT 29. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
sensor 2 (see page 11-230). 11-324).
22. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature. 30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
23. Note the ambient temperature. Is DT C P2183 indicated?
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 to their 2P YES−Check for poor connections or loose
connectors, but do not install them. terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR
2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS. NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
26. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
individually.
Does one of the sensors dif f er more than 5.4 °F

( 3 °C) f rom the ambient temperature?
YES−Replace the sensor that differed more than

5.4 °F (3 °C) from the ambient temperature, then go
to step 27.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-175

08/04/09 12:16:18 61TL2000_110_0176
PGM-FI System

DTC P2184: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR

ECT2 (YEL/RED)
HDS.

indicated?

YES−Repair short in the wire between ECT sensor
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2 and the ECM/PCM (A34), then go to step 13.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector. NO−Go to step 18.
6. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the 12. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-230).
HDS.
indicated? 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES−Go to step 7. 15. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 11. 16. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
11-176 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１８４ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:16:19 61TL2000_110_0177

go to step 1.




-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-177

08/04/09 12:16:19 61TL2000_110_0178
PGM-FI System

DTC P2185: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Is about −40 °F ( −40 °C) or less, or 4.90 V or
more indicated?
YES−Go to step 8.
Is about −40 °F ( −40 °C) or less, or 4.90 V or 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
more indicated?
9. Remove the jumper wire from the ECT sensor 2 2P
YES−Go to step 3. connector.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
at ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM. 11. Measure the voltage between ECT sensor 2 2P
5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No. 1

＊０１
ECT2 (YEL/RED)

ECT2 (YEL/RED) SG6 (BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
NO−Go to step 16.
11-178 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１８５ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:16:19 61TL2000_110_0179
14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P). 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
15. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P 19. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P
connector terminal No. 2 and ECM/PCM connector connector terminal No. 1 and ECM/PCM connector
terminal A10. terminal A34.
＊０３＊０４
ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
SG6 (BLK) ECT2 (YEL/RED)


SG6 (BLK)
ECT2 (YEL/RED)
PCM (A10) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22. PCM (A34) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-179

08/04/09 12:16:20 61TL2000_110_0180
PGM-FI System


11-324).

go to step 1.




11-180 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:17:52 61TL2000_110_0181
DTC P2195: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Signal 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Stuck Lean
7. Reinstall the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
NOTE: 11-227).
any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
• If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled 9. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
before this DTC was stored, refuel and clear the DTC
with the HDS. 10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
• If DTC P2101, P2118, P2135, P2138, P2176, or a 11-324).
combination of P2122 and P2127, P2122, and P2138,
or P2127 and P2138 is stored at the same time, 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
troubleshoot them first, then recheck for DTC P2195.
1. Check the installation of the A/F sensor (Sensor 1).
Is the A/ F sensor loose or disconnected f rom the terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
exhaust pipe? PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 2. 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 in the
4. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (A/T in Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 11,
P or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
on.
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
Is DT C P2195 indicated? the screen indicated NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/

at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-181
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１９５ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:17:52 61TL2000_110_0182
PGM-FI System

on.

terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
1.
NO−Go to step 16.



(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes
on.
11-182 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:17:53 61TL2000_110_0183
DTC P2227: BARO Sensor Range/ 7. Check the intake air system for clogging or
Performance Problem restrictions (foreign material, dirty air cleaner
element, etc.).
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Is the intake air system clogged or restricted?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES−Remove the clog or restriction, then go to
• If DTC P0107, P0108, P1128, and/or P1129 are stored step 9.
at the same time as DTC P2227, troubleshoot those
DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P2227. NO−Go to step 8.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 8. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
2 seconds. software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. 9. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
Is about 101 kPa ( 29.9 in.Hg, 7 60 mmHg), or about neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it
2.9 V at sea level indicated? idle.
YES−Go to step 3. 10. Test-drive under these conditions:
NO−Go to step 8. • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)

above 158 °F (70 °C)
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. • A/T in D, M/T in 4th
• REL TP SENSOR between 16 deg and 28 deg for
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at at least 3 seconds
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
idle.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) terminals at the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
above 158 °F (70 °C) updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
• A/T in D, M/T in 4th (see page 11-7), then go to step 9. If the ECM/PCM
• REL TP SENSOR between 16 deg and 28 deg for was substituted, go to step 1.
at least 3 seconds
NO−Go to step 12.
YES−Go to step 7.

something that may have clogged the intake air
system. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 4 and recheck.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-183
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２２２７ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:17:53 61TL2000_110_0184
PGM-FI System

12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 in the DTC P2228: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Does the screen indicate PASSED? and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(see page 11-234). If any other Temporary DTCs or 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
DTCs were indicated in step 11, go to the indicated the HDS.
Is about 43 kPa ( 12.7 in.Hg, 323 mmHg), or 1.3 V
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor or less indicated?
connections or loose terminals at the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known- YES−Go to step 3.
good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 9. If
the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 9. time.


terminals at the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
(see page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.

11-184 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２２２８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:17:53 61TL2000_110_0185
DTC P2229: BARO Sensor Circuit High DTC P2238: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS＋ Line
Voltage Low Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
the HDS.
4.5 V or more indicated? Is DT C P2238 indicated?
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM.
software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known- 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
terminals at the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was 8. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM terminal C29 and body ground.
(see page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was ＊０１
substituted, go to step 1.

AFS＋ (RED)

step 10.
NO−Go to step 9.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-185
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２２２９ＦＡＡＴ３０ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２２３８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:17:53 61TL2000_110_0186
PGM-FI System

9. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
11-227).
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to
12. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 1.
13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page NO−Go to step 19.
11-324).
Is DT C P2238 indicated? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES−Check for poor connections or loose YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated,
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/ troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
PCM, then go to step 1. If the connector and substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
terminal fits are OK, go to step 16. (see page 11-234). If any other Temporary DTCs or
NO−Go to step 15. DTC’s troubleshooting.
15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 in the NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If
DTCs MENU with the HDS. the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-
Does the screen indicate PASSED? If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other until a result comes on.

the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling

11-186 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:17:54 61TL2000_110_0187
DTC P2252: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS− Line 9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
Low Voltage terminal C30 and body ground.
＊０１

AFS− (RED/YEL)
Is DT C P2252 indicated? Terminal side of female terminals
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals PCM (C30) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. step 11.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO−Go to step 10.
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-227).

11-324).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-187
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２２５２ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:17:54 61TL2000_110_0188
PGM-FI System

15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2252 in the
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/ YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated,
PCM, then go to step 1. If the connector and troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
terminal fits are OK, go to step 17. substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
NO−Go to step 16. DTCs were indicated in step 19, go to the indicated
DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If
Does the screen indicate PASSED? good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 18.
If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other idling until a result comes on.

the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling

YES−Go to step 1 and recheck.
NO−Go to step 20.
11-188 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:17:54 61TL2000_110_0189
DTC P2610: ECM/PCM Ignition Off Internal

Timer Malfunction
YES−Go to step 4.

time.


step 1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-189
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２６１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:17:54 61TL2000_110_0190
PGM-FI System

DTC P2A00: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Range/ 10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
Performance Problem 11-324).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Test-drive under these conditions:
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 °F (70 °C)
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). • A/T in D, M/T in 3rd
• Vehicle speed between 25 −55 mph (40 −
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 88 km/h) for 5 minutes
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at (88−120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in (with throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds
idle. 12. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
4. Test-drive under these conditions: Is DT C P2A00 indicated?
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) YES−Check for poor connections or loose
above 158 °F (70 °C) terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
• A/T in D, M/T in 3rd PCM, then go to step 1.
• Vehicle speed between 25 −55 mph (40 −
88 km/h) for 5 minutes NO−Go to step 13.
(88−120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 in the
(with throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds DTCs MENU with the HDS.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 in the Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Does the screen indicate F AILED? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 12,
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the screen a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11.
recheck.

11-227).
11-190 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２Ａ００ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:17:54 61TL2000_110_0191
DTC U0029: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF

(ECM/PCM))
Is DT C U0029 indicated?
YES−Go to step 4.

time.


step 1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-191
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００Ｕ００２９ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:17:54 61TL2000_110_0192
PGM-FI System

DTC U0122: F-CAN Malfunction (ECM/PCM- 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
VSA Modulator-Control Unit)
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). connector.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A3 and VSA modulator-control unit 47P
Are DT C U0029 and U0122 indicated at the same connector terminal No. 12.
time? ＊０１
YES−Go to the troubleshooting for DTC U0029 CANH (WHT)
(see page 11-191).
NO−Go to step 3.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Terminal side of female terminals
Is DT C U0122 indicated? VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR

CANH (WHT)
YES−Go to step 5.

at the VSA modulator-control unit and the ECM/
PCM. Is there continuity?
5. Check for communication to the VSA system with YES−Go to step 11.
the HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the V SA PCM (A3) and the VSA modulator-control unit, then
modulator-control unit? go to step 12.
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting

(see page 11-210).
11-192 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００Ｕ０１２２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:17:55 61TL2000_110_0193
11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 12. Reconnect all connectors.
terminal A4 and VSA modulator-control unit 47P
connector terminal No. 13. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
＊０２
CANL (RED)
11-324).
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR terminals at the VSA modulator unit and the ECM/
CANL (RED) PCM, then go to step 1.

YES−Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it

does not have the latest software (see page 19-102),
or substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-103), then go to step 12 and
recheck. If DTC U0122 is not indicated after
substitution, replace the original VSA modulator-
control unit (see page 19-103), then go to step 12.

PCM (A4) and the VSA modulator-control unit, then
go to step 12.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-193

08/04/09 12:17:55 61TL2000_110_0194
PGM-FI System

DTC U0131: F-CAN Malfunction (ECM/PCM- 10. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A3 to body
EPS Control Unit) ground with a jumper wire.
＊０１
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). CANH (WHT)
Are DT C U0029 and U0131 indicated at the same JUMPER WIRE

time?
YES−Go to troubleshooting for DTC U0029 Terminal side of female terminals

(see page 11-191).
NO−Go to step 3. 11. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector D (28P) terminal No. 1 and body ground.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ＊０２
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P)
CANH (WHT)
YES−Go to step 5.

at the gauge control module, the EPS control unit,
and the ECM/PCM.
5. Check for communication the EPS system with the
HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the EPS control
unit? YES−Go to step 12.
YES−Go to step 6. NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/

PCM (A3) and the EPS control unit, then go to step
NO−Go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting 14.
(see page 11-210).
8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P).
11-194 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００Ｕ０１３１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:17:56 61TL2000_110_0195
12. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A4 to body 14. Reconnect all connectors.
ground with a jumper wire.
＊０３ 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
CANL (RED)
11-324).
JUMPER WIRE

Terminal side of female terminals terminals at the gauge control module, the EPS
control unit, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
13. Check for continuity between EPS control unit NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
connector D (28P) terminal No. 15 and body ground. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
＊０４ indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
CANL (RED)
YES−Substitute a known-good EPS control unit

(see page 17-85), then go to step 14 and recheck. If
DTC U0131 is not indicated, replace the original
EPS control unit (see page 17-85), then go to step
14.

PCM (A4) and the EPS control unit, then go to step
14.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-195

08/04/09 12:17:56 61TL2000_110_0196
PGM-FI System

DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (ECM/PCM- 10. Connect gauge control module 32P connector
Gauge Control Module) terminal No. 22 to body ground with a jumper wire.
＊０１
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CANH (WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals terminal A3 and body ground.
at the gauge control module and the ECM/PCM. ＊０２
4. Check for body electrical DTCs in the DTCs MENU
with the HDS. CANH (WHT)
Is DT C B1168, B1169, and/ or B117 8 indicated?
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Do the gauge control module input test

(see page 22-309).
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Terminal side of female terminals

7. Remove the gauge control module (see page
22-313). YES−Go to step 12.
8. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
connector. PCM (A3) and the gauge control module, then go to
step 14.
11-196 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００Ｕ０１５５ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:17:57 61TL2000_110_0197
12. Connect gauge control module 32P connector 14. Reconnect all connectors.
terminal No. 21 to body ground with a jumper wire.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR

11-324).
CANL (RED) 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
JUMPER WIRE

Wire side of female terminals terminals at the gauge control module and the
13. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
terminal A4 and body ground. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
＊０４ indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
CANL (RED)
YES−Substitute a known-good gauge control

module (see page 22-313), then go to step 14 and
recheck. If DTC U0155 is not indicated after
substitution, replace the original gauge control
module (see page 22-313), then go to step 14.

PCM (A4) and the gauge control module, then go to
step 14.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-197

08/04/09 12:17:57 61TL2000_110_0198
PGM-FI System

DTC U0300: PGM-FI System and A/T System
Program Version Mismatch
NOTE:
• Do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACC (I)
while updating the PCM. If you turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0) or ACC (I) before completion, the
PCM will be damaged.
1. Do the PCM update procedure (PGM-FI system and

A/T system) (see page 11-233).
YES−Replace the original PCM (see page 11-234).

11-198 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００Ｕ０３００ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:17:57 61TL2000_110_0199
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting

NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( ) applies 5. Disconnect these connectors:
to the CANL line.
• Gauge control module 32P (see page 22-313).
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). • VSA modulator-control unit 47P (see page
19-103).
2. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. • Yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 4P (see page
19-100).
3. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P), then • EPS control unit D (28P) (see page 17-85).
disconnect the HDS. • SRS unit A (39P) (see page 24-166).
• TPMS control unit 20P (see page 18-93)
4. Measure the resistance between ECM/PCM • Navigation unit 32P (see page 23-279) (with
connector terminals A3 and A4. navigation system)
＊０１
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) 6. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminals A3 and A4.
＊０２
CANH (WHT) CANL (RED)
Is there about 7 9−111 ? Terminal side of female terminals

NO−Go to step 5.
YES−Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM
terminals A3 and A4 .
NO−Go to step 7.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-199
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９２６９３５ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:17:58 61TL2000_110_0200
PGM-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

7. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A3 to body 9. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
ground with a jumper wire. control unit 47P connector terminal No. 12 and
＊０３ body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) ＊０５
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
CANH (WHT)
CANH (WHT)
JUMPER WIRE

8. Check for continuity between gauge control

module 32P connector terminal No. 22 and body Is there continuity?
ground.
＊０４ YES−Go to step 10.
PCM (A3) and the VSA modulator-control unit.
CANH (WHT)
YES−Go to step 9.

PCM (A3) and the gauge control module.
11-200 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:17:59 61TL2000_110_0201
10. Check for continuity between EPS control unit 11. Remove the jumper wire from ECM/PCM connector
connector D (28P) terminal No. 1 and body ground. A (49P).
＊０６
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P) 12. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A4 to body
ground with a jumper wire.
＊０７
CANH (WHT)
CANL (RED)
Wire side of female terminals JUMPER WIRE

NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/ module 32P connector terminal No. 21 and body
PCM (A3) and the EPS control unit. ground.
＊０８
CANL (RED)

PCM (A4) and the gauge control module.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-201

08/04/09 12:17:59 61TL2000_110_0202
PGM-FI System

14. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- 16. Reconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 13 and
body ground. 17. Measure the resistance between ECM/PCM
＊０９ connector terminals A3 and A4.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR ＊１１
CANL (RED)

Is there about 108−132 ?
PCM (A4) and the VSA modulator-control unit. NO−Substitute a known-good gauge control
module (see page 22-313). If the HDS identifies the
15. Check for continuity between EPS control unit vehicle, replace the original gauge control module
connector D (28P) terminal No. 15 and body ground. (see page 22-313).
＊１０
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P) 18. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P
connector.
19. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P

connector.
CANL (RED)

PCM (A4) and the EPS control unit.
11-202 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:18:00 61TL2000_110_0203
20. Measure the resistance between ECM/PCM 23. Measure the resistance between ECM/PCM
connector terminals A3 and A4. connector terminals A3 and A4.
＊１２＊１３
CANH (WHT) CANL (RED) CANH (WHT) CANL (RED)
Is there about 2.34−2.86 k ? Is there about 2.34−2.86 k ?
NO−Substitute a known-good VSA modulator- NO−Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral

control unit (see page 19-102). If the HDS identifies acceleration sensor (see page 19-100). If the HDS
the vehicle, replace the original VSA modulator- identifies the vehicle, replace the original yaw rate-
control unit (see page 19-102). lateral acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).
21. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P 24. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
connector. 4P connector.
22. Reconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 25. Reconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P).
4P connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-203

08/04/09 12:18:00 61TL2000_110_0204
PGM-FI System

＊１４＊１５
NO−Substitute a known-good EPS control unit NO−Substitute a known-good SRS unit (see page
(see page 17-85). If the HDS identifies the vehicle, 24-166). If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace
replace the original EPS control unit (see page the original SRS unit (see page 24-166).
17-85).
30. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
31. Reconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
28. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
11-204 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:18:01 61TL2000_110_0205
＊１６＊１７
YES− YES−Reconnect all connectors, then update the

• With navigation system: Go to step 33. ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software
• Without navigation system: Reconnect all (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-good
connectors, then update the ECM/PCM if it does ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
not have the latest software (see page 11-233), or symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
11-7), then recheck. If the symptom/indication 11-234).
goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). NO−Substitute a known-good navigation unit
(see page 23-279). If the HDS identifies the vehicle,
replace the original navigation unit (see page
NO−Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit 23-279).
(see page 18-93). If the HDS identifies the vehicle,
replace the original TPMS control unit (see page
18-93).
33. Disconnect TPMS control unit 20P connector.
34. Reconnect the navigation unit 32P connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-205

08/04/09 12:18:01 61TL2000_110_0206
PGM-FI System

36. Disconnect these connectors: 38. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
• Gauge control module 32P (see page 22-313). ＊１９
• VSA modulator-control unit 47P (see page ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
19-103).
• Yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 4P (see page CANL (RED)
19-100).
• EPS control unit D (28P) (see page 17-85).
• SRS unit A (39P) (see page 24-166).
• TPMS control unit 20P (see page 18-93)
• Navigation unit 32P (see page 23-279) (with
navigation system)

terminal A3 and body ground. Terminal side of female terminals
＊１８
CANH (WHT)
YES−Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM
terminals A4 and the gauge control module, the
VSA modulator-control unit, the yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor, the EPS control unit, the SRS
unit, the TPMS control unit, the navigation unit
(with navigation system), or the DLC.
NO−Go to step 39.


PCM terminals A3 and the gauge control module,
the VSA modulator-control unit, the yaw rate-
lateral acceleration sensor, the EPS control unit, the
SRS unit, the TPMS control unit, the navigation unit
(with navigation system), or the DLC.
NO−Go to step 38.
11-206 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:18:01 61TL2000_110_0207
39. Reconnect all connectors. 51. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
40. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). 52. Reconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
4P connector.
41. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P
connector. 53. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P).
42. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the 54. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the
HDS. HDS.
Does the HDS identif y the vehicle? Does the HDS identif y the vehicle?
YES−Replace the gauge control module (see page YES−Replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-85).
22-313).
44. Reconnect the gauge control module 32P connector. 56. Reconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P).
45. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P 57. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
connector.
58. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the
46. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the HDS.
HDS.
Does the HDS identif y the vehicle?
YES−Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-166).
YES−Replace the VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-103). NO−Go to step 59.
NO−Go to step 47. 59. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
47. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 60. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
48. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P 61. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
connector.
49. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor

4P connector.

HDS.
YES−Replace the yaw rate-lateral acceleration

sensor (see page 19-100).
NO−Go to step 51.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-207

08/04/09 12:18:01 61TL2000_110_0208
PGM-FI System

HDS.
YES−Replace the TPMS control unit (see page

18-93).
NO−
• With navigation system: Go to step 63.
• Without navigation system: Reconnect all
connectors, then update the ECM/PCM if it does
not have the latest software (see page 11-233), or
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page
11-7), then recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234).
65. Disconnect the navigation unit 32P connector.

HDS.
YES−Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-279).
NO−Reconnect all connectors, then update the

ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-233), or substitute a known-good
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
11-234).
11-208 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:18:02 61TL2000_110_0209
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting

2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page ＊０１
22-292).
Does the MIL indicator f lash?
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Substitute a known-good gauge control

module, and recheck. If the symptom/indication SCS (ORN)
goes away with a known-good gauge control
module, replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22-313).
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). Terminal side of female terminals
4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is there continuity?
Is a short indicated? YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/

PCM (A32) and the EPS control unit or the DLC.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Reconnect all connectors, then update the
NO−Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software
latest software (see page 11-233), or substitute a (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-good
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/ ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
PCM (see page 11-234). 11-234).
6. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P), then

disconnect the HDS.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-209
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９３９９０２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:18:02 61TL2000_110_0210
PGM-FI System
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting

NOTE: Make sure the HDS and its DLC cable are 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the
working properly. SRS indicator.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Does the SRS indicator stay on?
2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). YES−Go to the SRS system’s general
NOTE: Make sure the HDS is properly connected to
the DLC. NO−Go to step 17.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
HDS.
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the
Does the HDS identif y the vehicle? VSA indicator.
YES−Go to step 4. Does the V SA indicator stay on?
NO−Go to step 23. YES−Go to the VSA system’s general

4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI
system with the HDS. NO−Go to step 17.
Are any T emporary DT Cs or DT Cs indicated? 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES−Go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the
TPMS indicator.
NO−
• If the HDS does not communicate with the SRS Does the T PMS indicator stay on?
system, go to step 5.
• If the HDS does not communicate with the VSA YES−Go to the TPMS general troubleshooting
system, go to step 7. information (see page 18-53).
• If the HDS does not communicate with the TPMS
system, go to step 9. NO−Go to step 17.
• If the HDS does not communicate with the EPS
system, go to step 11. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
• If the HDS does not communicate with the
IMMOBI (immobilizer) system, go to step 13. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the
• If the HDS does not communicate with the BODY EPS indicator.
ELECTRICAL system, go to step 15.
Does the EPS indicator stay on?
YES−Go to the EPS general troubleshooting
information (see page 17-20).
NO−Go to step 17.
11-210 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９１９４６１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:18:59 61TL2000_110_0211
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 20. Continue to check for continuity between DLC
terminal No. 7 and body ground while
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the disconnecting these connectors, one at a time:
immobilizer indicator.
• SRS unit connector A (39P)
Does the immobilizer indicator stay on or f lash? • VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector
• TPMS control unit 20P connector
YES−Go to the immobilizer system’s • EPS control unit connector D (28P)
troubleshooting (see page 22-377). • Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
• Audio unit 24P connector
NO−Go to step 15. • Driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box (Q) (20P)
connector
15. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-292). Does continuity go away when one of the above
connectors is disconnected?
16. Check the gauge display.
YES−Replace the part that caused an open when it
Is Error 2 indicated? was disconnected.
YES−Check for B-CAN system DTCs (see page NO−Repair short in the wire between the DLC
22-86). (K-line) and the VSA modulator-control unit, the
SRS unit, the TPMS control unit, the EPS control
NO−Go to step 17. unit, the immobilizer-keyless control unit, the audio
unit, or the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box.
19. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7

and body ground.
＊０１
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
K-LINE (LT BLU)
NO−Go to step 21.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-211

08/04/09 12:19:00 61TL2000_110_0212
PGM-FI System
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

21. Connect DLC terminal No. 7 to body ground with a 23. Check for B-CAN system DTCs without the HDS
jumper wire. (see page 22-86).
＊０２
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) Is DT C U0029 and/ or U0100 indicated?
K-LINE (LT BLU) YES−Go to step 36.
NO−Go to step 24.
JUMPER WIRE
26. Measure the voltage between DLC terminal No. 16

Terminal side of female terminals and body ground.
＊０３
22. Check for continuity between body ground and
these connector terminals:
Connector Terminal
SRS unit A (39P) No. 18 (LT BLU)
VSA modulator-control unit No. 10 (LT BLU) ＋B (WHT)
36P
TPMS control unit 20P No. 7 (LT BLU)
EPS control unit connector No. 17 (LT BLU)
D (28P)
Immobilizer-keyless control No. 5 (LT BLU) Terminal side of female terminals
unit 7P
Audio unit 24P No. 3 (LT BLU)
Driver’s under-dash fuse/ No. 16 (LT BLU) Is there battery voltage?
relay box (Q) (20P)
Is there continuity between the DLC terminal and
each of the terminals in the chart? NO−Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
No. 16 and the No. 15 BACK UP (10 A) fuse in the
YES−Replace the part that does not communicate under-hood fuse/relay box.
with the HDS.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the DLC

(K-line) and the appropriate connector.
11-212 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:19:00 61TL2000_110_0213
27. Measure the voltage between DLC terminals No. 4 32. Connect DLC terminal No. 6 to body ground with a
and No. 16. jumper wire.
＊０４＊０５
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
CANH (WHT)
GND (BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
＋B (WHT)
Is there battery voltage? 33. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
YES−Go to step 28. ＊０６
NO−Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
No. 4 and body ground (G502) (see page 22-33). CANH (WHT)
28. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3).


PCM (A3) and DLC terminal No. 6.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-213

08/04/09 12:19:01 61TL2000_110_0214
PGM-FI System

34. Connect DLC terminal No. 14 to body ground with a 36. Try to start the engine.
jumper wire.
＊０７ Does the engine start and idle smoothly?
YES−Go to F-CAN circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-199).
NO−Go to step 37.
CANL (RED) 37. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

JUMPER WIRE
38. Check the No. 3 IG MAIN (50 A) fuse in the under-
Terminal side of female terminals Is the f use OK ?
YES−Repair open in the wire between the No. 3 IG

35. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the wire
terminal A4 and body ground. is OK, go to step 39.
＊０８
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) NO−Repair short in the wire between the No. 3 IG
MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. Also
CANL (RED) replace the No. 3 IG MAIN (50 A) fuse.
YES−Reconnect all connectors, then update the

11-234).

PCM (A4) and DLC terminal No. 14.
11-214 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:19:01 61TL2000_110_0215
39. Inspect the No. 17 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse in the under- 42. Check for continuity between body ground and
hood fuse/relay box. PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 4 individually.
Is the f use OK ? ＊１０
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
＋B
NO−Go to step 40.
＋B
40. Remove the blown No. 17 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse from
the under-hood fuse/relay box.
41. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A) from the under-

＊０９
A
YES−Check the under-hood fuse/relay box, and

replace it if needed (see page 22-73). Also replace
the No. 17 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse.
NO−Go to step 43.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-215

08/04/09 12:19:02 61TL2000_110_0216
PGM-FI System

43. While disconnecting each of the parts or 44. Disconnect these parts or connectors:
connectors below, one at a time, check for
continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P • PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. • ECM/PCM connector A (49P)
• Injectors
• PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) • Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B
• ECM/PCM connector A (49P) • MAF/IAT sensor
• Each injector 2P connector • Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B 3P connector • Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector relay
• MAF/IAT sensor 5P connector
• Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control 45. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1
relay 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
＊１１＊１２
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
IGP IGP
Does continuity go away when one of the above Is there continuity?

parts or connectors is disconnected?
YES−Repair short in the wire between PGM-FI
YES−Replace the part that made the short to body main relay 1 and each part. Also replace the No. 17
ground go away when disconnected. If the part is FI MAIN (15 A) fuse.
the ECM/PCM, reconnect all connectors, then
update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest NO−Replace PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the
software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known- No. 17 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse.
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good 46. Inspect the No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in the
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box.
11-234). Also replace the No. 17 FI MAIN (15 A)
fuse. Is the f use OK ?
NO−Go to step 47.
47. Remove the blown No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse

from the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box.
11-216 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:19:02 61TL2000_110_0217
terminal C10 and body ground. terminal C10 and body ground.
＊１３＊１５
IG1 (BLK/RED) IG1 (BLK/RED)
YES−Go to step 51. YES−Repair short in the wire between the No. 9
FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (C10),
NO−Replace the No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse, between the No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and
and update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP), or between the
latest software (see page 11-233), or substitute a No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the immobilizer
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then control unit. Also replace the No. 9 FUEL PUMP
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with (20 A) fuse.
PCM (see page 11-234). NO−Go to step 53.
51. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) 53. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-185).
from the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box.
＊１４ 54. Remove the access panel from the floor (see page
A
11-352).
55. Disconnect the fuel pump 4P connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-217

08/04/09 12:19:03 61TL2000_110_0218
PGM-FI System

56. Check for continuity between fuel pump 4P 58. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
＊１６ 59. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A (49P) and C
FUEL PUMP 4P CONNECTOR (49P).

FUEL PUMP (PNK)
61. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector
＊１７
IG1 (BLK/RED)
YES−Repair short in the wire between the fuel

pump and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also
replace the No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse. Terminal side of female terminals
NO−Go to step 57.

57. Test PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (see page
Is the relay OK ? NO−Repair open in the wire between the No. 9

FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (C10).
YES−Check the fuel pump, and replace it if
necessary (see page 11-355). Also replace the No. 9
FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse.
NO−Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).

Also replace the No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse.
11-218 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:19:03 61TL2000_110_0219
62. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector 64. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A) from the under-
terminal A7 and body ground. hood fuse/relay box.
＊１８＊１９
A
MRLY (RED/BLK)
Is there battery voltage? 65. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1
4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
YES−Go to step 67. ＊２０
NO−Go to step 63.
＋B

replace it if needed (see page 22-73).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-219

08/04/09 12:19:04 61TL2000_110_0220
PGM-FI System

66. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 67. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector terminal A7. 68. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A) from the under-
＊２１ hood fuse/relay box.
＊２２
A
MRLY

MRLY (RED/BLK)
69. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1

Terminal side of female terminals 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
＊２３
Is there continuity? PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
YES−Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-80). If ＋B

the relay is OK, reconnect all connectors, then
update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
11-234).
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/ Terminal side of female terminals
PCM (A7) and PGM-FI main relay 1.

replace it if needed (see page 22-73).
11-220 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:19:04 61TL2000_110_0221
70. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 72. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P).
connector terminal A9. 73. Check for continuity between body ground and
＊２４ ECM/PCM connector terminals B1, B10, C2, C44,
and C48 individually.
＊２５
IGP ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
B (49P)
PG2 (BLK) PG1 (BLK)

IGP (YEL/BLK)
C (49P)
Terminal side of female terminals PGMETCS (BLK)

PCM (A9) and PGM-FI main relay 1. LG1 LG2
(BRN/YEL) (BRN/YEL)
71. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-80).
Is PGM-F I main relay 1 OK ? Terminal side of female terminals
NO−Replace PGM-FI main relay 1. YES−Go to step 74.

PCM (B1, B10, C2, C44, C48) and G101 (see page
22-22).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-221

08/04/09 12:19:05 61TL2000_110_0222
PGM-FI System

74. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 76. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C13 and body ground. terminal B19 and body ground.
＊２６＊２７
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
VCC1 (YEL/RED) VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
NO− NO−Go to step 78.

• A/T: Go to step 76.
• M/T: Go to step 78. 77. Continue to check for continuity between PCM
connector terminal B19 and body ground while
75. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM disconnecting the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
connector terminal C13 and body ground, while sensor 3P connector.
disconnecting these connectors, one at a time:
• MAP sensor 3P connector
• Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P YES−Repair short in the wire between the PCM
connector. (B19) and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor.
Does continuity go away when one of the above
connectors is disconnected? NO−Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
was disconnected.
NO−Repair short in the wires between the ECM/

PCM (C13) and the MAP sensor or the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor.
11-222 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:19:05 61TL2000_110_0223
terminal C12 and body ground. terminal A26 and body ground.
＊２８＊２９
VCC3 (BLU)
VCC4 (RED/BLK)

79. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM 81. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM
connector terminal C12 and body ground while connector terminal A26 and body ground while
disconnecting the throttle body 6P connector. disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector.
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C12) and the throttle body. PCM (A26) and APP sensor A.
NO−Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367). NO−Replace the accelerator pedal module
(see page 11-280).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-223

08/04/09 12:19:06 61TL2000_110_0224
PGM-FI System

＊３０＊３１
VCC6 (YEL)
VCC5 (BRN/WHT)

NO−Go to step 84. NO−Reconnect all connectors, then update the

83. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-good
connector terminal A25 and body ground while ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector. symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
Is there continuity? 11-234).
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ 85. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM
PCM (A25) and APP sensor B. connector terminal A20 and body ground while
disconnecting these connector, one at a time:
NO−Replace the accelerator pedal module
(see page 11-280). • FTP sensor 3P connector
• A/C pressure sensor 3P connector
Does continuity go away when one of the above

connectors is disconnected?

was disconnected.
NO−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/

PCM (A20) and the FTP sensor or the A/C pressure
sensor.
11-224 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:19:06 61TL2000_110_0225
Injector Replacement
2. Remove the engine cover.
3. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then disconnect the quick-connect fitting (B).
＊０１
E
A
F
G B
4. Disconnect the injector connectors (C) and the engine mount control solenoid valve connector (D).
5. Remove the ground cable bolts (G101 and G102) (E).
6. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts (F) from the fuel rail (G).
7. Remove the fuel rail and the injectors from the injector base.
8. Remove the injector clips (H) from the fuel rail.
9. Remove the injectors from the fuel rail.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-225
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９３４５９５ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:19:07 61TL2000_110_0226
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement (cont’d)

10. Coat the new O-rings (black) (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rail (C).
＊０２
H
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
L
K
G A
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft) B
11. Install the injectors clips (D).
12. Coat the new injector O-rings (brown) (E) with clean engine oil.
13. Install the fuel rail and the injectors in the injector base (F).
14. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts (G) and the ground cable bolts (G101 and G102) (H).
15. Connect the injector connectors (I) and the engine mount control solenoid valve connector (J).
16. Connect the quick-connect fitting (K), and quick-connect fitting cover (L).
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the
fuel rail will be pressurized. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leaks.
18. Reinstall the engine cover.
11-226 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:19:07 61TL2000_110_0227
A/F Sensor Replacement Secondary HO2S Replacement

O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SWR2, or O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SWR2, or
equivalent, commercially available equivalent, commercially available
1. Disconnect the A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then 1. Disconnect the secondary HO2S 4P connector (A),
remove the A/F sensor (B). then remove the secondary HO2S (B).
＊０１＊０１
A
B
44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
B
44 N·m
(4.4 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-227
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９１２１５１ＫＢＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９３１３１２ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:19:08 61TL2000_110_0228
PGM-FI System
CMP Sensor B Replacement CKP Sensor Replacement

1. Disconnect the connector (A) and hoses (B) from 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
the EVAP canister purge valve (C), then remove the
EVAP canister purge valve assembly. 2. Remove the CKP sensor cover (A).
＊０１＊０１
B
A
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, C
8.7 lbf·ft)
B
D
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, C
8.7 lbf·ft) A
2. Disconnect the CMP sensor B connector (A). 3. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (B).
＊０２
A 4. Remove the CKP sensor (C).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal

with a new O-ring (D).
6. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn

B procedure (see page 11-5).
C
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
3. Remove CMP sensor B.

with a new O-ring (C).
11-228 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９１６０８１ＫＢＡＴ１０ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９１７５２３ＫＢＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:19:09 61TL2000_110_0229
MAP Sensor Replacement MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor

Replacement
1. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A).
＊０１
1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector
B (A).
3.4 N·m ＊０１
(0.34 kgf·m, B C
2.4 lbf·ft) 1.5 N·m
C (0.15 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)
A
2. Remove the MAP sensor (B).

with a new O-ring (C). 2. Remove the screws (B).
3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C).

with a new O-ring (D).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-229
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９４０００１ＫＢＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９４００５１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:19:09 61TL2000_110_0230
PGM-FI System
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement

1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 1. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-214).
2. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector (A). 2. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
＊０１
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A), then
A
remove ECT sensor 2 (B).
＊０２
A
B
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft) B
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
3. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B).

C
with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with 4. Install ECT sensor 2 with a new O-ring (C).
engine coolant (see page 10-6).
5. Install the splash shield (see page 20-214).
6. Refill the radiator with engine coolant (see page

10-6).
11-230 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９２４７１１ＫＢＡＴ１０ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９２４７１１ＫＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:19:10 61TL2000_110_0231
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Knock Sensor Replacement

Sensor Replacement
M/T 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A).

＊０１
1. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed A
sensor connector (A).
＊０１
B
C 32 N·m
(3.3 kgf·m,
24 lbf·ft)
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
3. Remove the knock sensor (B).

2. Remove the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor (B).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-231
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ａ２０３２６９４３８２１ＫＢＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９３６３０１ＫＢＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:19:11 61TL2000_110_0232
PGM-FI System
ELD Replacement
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure 6. Remove the fuses (A) and (B).
(see page 22-78). ＊０３
B
3 N·m
2. Remove the upper cover (A), then remove the two (0.3 kgf·m,
positive (＋) terminals (B). 2 lbf·ft)
＊０１
A
A
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
9 N·m 7. Release the three lock tabs (A), then remove the
(0.9 kgf·m, ELD (B).
7 lbf·ft)
＊０４
B B
3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box (C) from the

bracket.
4. Remove the lower cover (A).

＊０２
A
B
A

(see page 22-78).
5. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector (B).
11-232 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６９２４００１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:19:11 61TL2000_110_0233
ECM/PCM Update
Special Tools Required 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start
Use any one of these update tools: the engine.
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester
• Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
with HDS and CM update software (A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
• HDS pocket tester ＊０１
• GNA600 and an iN workstation with HDS and CM
update software
NOTE:
• Use this procedure when you need to update the
ECM/PCM at any time.
• Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version.
• Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the
battery in the vehicle is fully charged, and connect a
jumper battery (not a battery charger) to maintain
system voltage.
• Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACC (I)
during the update. If there is a problem with the
update, leave the ignition switch ON (II). A
• To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate
anything electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/
A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), door PCM and other vehicle systems. If it doesn’t, go to
locks, etc.) during the update. the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-210). If
• To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/ you are returning from the DLC circuit
PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, and clean the
replaced. throttle body after updating the ECM/PCM
• You cannot update an ECM/PCM with a program it (see page 11-363).
already has. It will only accept a new program.
• High temperature in the engine compartment might 4. USA, Canada models: Select the INSPECTION
cause the ECM/PCM to become too hot to run the MENU with the HDS.
update. If the engine has been running before this
procedure, open the hood and cool the engine 5. USA, Canada models: Select the ETCS TEST, then
compartment. select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the HDS
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module screen prompts.
(HIM) because the HIM’s red (＃3) light came on or
was flashing during the update, leave the ignition NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the TP POSITION
switch in ON (II) when you disconnect the HIM from CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure.
the data link connector (DLC). This prevents damage
to the ECM/PCM. 6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the
update mode, and follow the screen prompts to
update the ECM/PCM.
(cont’d)
11-233
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ａ２０３２６９２４６０１ＬＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:19:11 61TL2000_110_0234
PGM-FI System
ECM/PCM Update (cont’d) ECM/PCM Replacement

7. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest, Special Tools Required
disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back Use any one of these update tools:
to the procedure that you were doing. If the • Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester
software in the ECM/PCM is not the latest, follow • Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation
the instructions on the screen. If prompted to with HDS and CM update software
choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system (A/T), • HDS pocket tester
make sure you update both. • GNA600 and an iN workstation with HDS and CM
update software
NOTE: If the ECM/PCM update system requires you
to cool the ECM/PCM, follow the instructions on 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
screen. If you run into a problem during the update (A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes, ＊０１
status bar goes over 100 %, D (A/T) or immobilizer
indicator flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.), follow
these steps to minimize the chance of damaging
the ECM/PCM:
• Leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.
• Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a
battery charger).
• Shut down the HDS.
• Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
• Reboot the HDS.
• Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the
update procedure again.

failed in step 5, clean the throttle body (see page A
11-363).
11-324). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/
PCM and other vehicle systems. If it doesn’t, go to
10. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-210). If
you are returning from the DLC circuit
troubleshooting, skip steps 4 through 9, 19 through
24, and 27 through 29, and do these procedures
after replacing the ECM/PCM:
• USA, Canada models: Replace the engine oil

(see page 8-10) and the engine oil filter (see page
8-11).
• USA, Canada models: Replace the ATF (A/T)
(see page 14-255).
• USA, Canada models: Clean the throttle body
(see page 11-363).
11-234
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ａ２０３０００２４６０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:19:12 61TL2000_110_0235
4. USA, Canada models: Select the PGM-FI system 12. Remove the ECM/PCM cover (A).
with the HDS. ＊０２
5. USA, Canada models: Select the INSPECTION

MENU with the HDS.
6. USA, Canada models: Select the ETCS TEST, then A

select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the
screen prompts.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the TP POSITION

CHECK indicates FAILED, continue with this
procedure.
B
7. USA, Canada models: Select the REPLACE ECM/
PCM MENU, then READ DATA, and follow the 13. Remove the battery setting plate (B), and reposition
screen prompts. the battery away from the ECM/PCM.
NOTE: NOTE: Do not disconnect the battery terminals.

• USA, Canada models: Doing this step copies
(READS) the engine oil life data from the original 14. Remove the bolts (D).
ECM/PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it ＊０３
into the new ECM/PCM.
• USA, Canada models: If READ DATA indicates
FAILED, continue with this procedure.
C
8. USA, Canada (A/T) models: Select the A/T system
with the HDS. B
A
9. USA, Canada (A/T) models: Select the REPLACE
TCM/PCM MENU, then READ DATA, and follow the
screen prompts.
F
NOTE: E
• USA, Canada (A/T) models: Doing this step D
9.8 N·m
copies (READS) the ATF life data from the (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
original PCM so you can later download
9.8 N·m
(WRITES) it into the new PCM. (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
• USA, Canada (A/T) models: If READ DATA
indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure.
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. remove the ECM/PCM (E).
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NOTE:

identification.
PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM
subbracket (F).
16. Install a known-good ECM/PCM in the reverse

order of removal.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-235

08/04/09 12:19:12 61TL2000_110_0236
PGM-FI System
ECM/PCM Replacement (cont’d)

17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 28. USA, Canada models: If the READ DATA failed in
step 7 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 21, replace
18. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the the engine oil (see page 8-10) and engine oil filter
HDS. (see page 8-11), then go to step 29 (A/T) or step 30
(M/T).
NOTE: DTC P0630 (VIN Not Programmed or
Mismatch) may be stored because the VIN has not 29. USA, Canada (A/T) models: If the READ DATA
been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, failed in step 9 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 24,
and continue this procedure. replace the ATF (see page 14-255), then go to step
30.
19. USA, Canada models: If the READ DATA (engine oil
life) failed in step 7, go to step 22 (A/T) or step 25 30. Select PGM-FI system, and reset the ECM/PCM with
(M/T). Otherwise, go to step 20. the HDS.
20. USA, Canada models: Select the PGM-FI system 31. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
with the HDS. software (see page 11-233).
21. USA, Canada models: Select the REPLACE ECM/ 32. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA, and follow the 11-324).
screen prompts.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the WRITE DATA
indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure.
22. USA, Canada (A/T) models: If the READ DATA (ATF

life) failed in step 8, go to step 25. Otherwise go to
step 23.
23. USA, Canada (A/T) models: Select the A/T SYSTEM

with the HDS.
24. USA, Canada (A/T) models: Select the REPLACE

TCM/PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA, and follow
the screen prompts.
NOTE: USA, Canada (A/T) models: If the WRITE

DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this
procedure.
25. Select IMMOBI system with the HDS.
26. Enter the immobilizer code that you obtained from

iN or ISIS; it allows you to start the engine.

failed in step 6 clean the throttle body (see page
11-236 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:19:15 61TL2000_110_0237
Electronic Throttle Control System

＊０１
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
CONTROL SYSTEM
(ETCS)
CONTROL RELAY
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
THROTTLE ACTUATOR and Substituting, page 11-7
THROTTLE POSITION Update, page 11-233
(TP) SENSOR Replacement, page 11-234
＊０２
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION
(APP) SENSOR
Signal Inspection,
page 11-279
ACCELERATOR PEDAL MODULE

Removal and Installation, page 11-280
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-237
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２４１０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:19:15 61TL2000_110_0238
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0122: TP Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage 9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. TPSA (RED/BLK)
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is there about 0.3 V or less?

YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there continuity?

at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM. YES−Repair short in the wire between the throttle
body and the ECM/PCM (C20), then go to step 18.
NO−Go to step 23.
time? 10. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P
YES−Go to step 10. ＊０２
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
NO−Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. VCC3 (BLU)
NO−Go to step 11.
11-238 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１２２ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:19:15 61TL2000_110_0239
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 21. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
15. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminals at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM,
terminal C12 and throttle body 6P connector then go to step 1.
terminal No. 2.
＊０３ NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
VCC3 (BLU) 23. Reconnect all connectors.

ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
VCC3 (BLU) good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).

Terminal side of female terminals terminals at TP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If the
Is there continuity? ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
NO−Repair open in the wire between the throttle is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
body and the ECM/PCM (C12), then go to step 18. replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). If
16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
17. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-239

08/04/09 12:19:16 61TL2000_110_0240

DTC P0123: TP Sensor A Circuit High Voltage 8. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. TPSA (RED/BLK)
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is there about 4.8 V or more?

YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there about 5 V ?

at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM. YES−Go to step 18.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO−Go to step 9.
Are DT C P0123 and P0223 indicated at the same 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
time?
NO−Go to step 5.
11-240 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０１２３ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:21:31 61TL2000_110_0241
terminal C20 and throttle body 6P connector terminal C43 and throttle body 6P connector
＊０２＊０３
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
TPSA (RED/BLK) SG3 (GRN)


TPSA (RED/BLK)
SG3 (GRN)
NO−Repair open in the wire between the throttle NO−Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the ECM/PCM (C20), then go to step 20. body and the ECM/PCM (C43), then go to step 20.
14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367).
15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 20. Reconnect all connectors.
16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P). 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-241

08/04/09 12:21:31 61TL2000_110_0242

11-324).

terminals at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.



terminals at TP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If the

11-242 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:31 61TL2000_110_0243
DTC P0222: TP Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the ＊０１
HDS. THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 4.
TPSB (RED/BLU)
at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM.

time?
YES−Repair short in the wire between the throttle
NO−Go to step 5. body and the ECM/PCM (C21), then go to step 18.
NO−Go to step 23.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-243
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０２２２ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:21:32 61TL2000_110_0244

10. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P 15. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. terminal C12 and throttle body 6P connector
＊０２ terminal No. 2.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR ＊０３
VCC3 (BLU)
VCC3 (BLU) Wire side of female terminals

VCC3 (BLU)
NO−Go to step 11.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the throttle
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. body and the ECM/PCM (C12), then go to step 18.
13. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P). 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
11-244 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:32 61TL2000_110_0245

11-324).

then go to step 1.



terminals at TP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If the

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-245

08/04/09 12:21:32 61TL2000_110_0246

DTC P0223: TP Sensor B Circuit High Voltage 8. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P

TPSB (RED/BLU)
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.

YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there about 5 V ?

at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM. YES−Go to step 18.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO−Go to step 9.
Are DT C P0123 and P0223 indicated at the same 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
time?
NO−Go to step 5.
11-246 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０２２３ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:21:33 61TL2000_110_0247
terminal C21 and throttle body 6P connector terminal C43 and throttle body 6P connector
＊０２＊０３
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
TPSB (RED/BLU) SG3 (GRN)


TPSB (RED/BLU)
SG3 (GRN)
NO−Repair open in the wire between the throttle NO−Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the ECM/PCM (C21), then go to step 20. body and the ECM/PCM (C43), then go to step 20.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-247

08/04/09 12:21:33 61TL2000_110_0248

11-324).

then go to step 1.



terminals at TP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If the

11-248 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:33 61TL2000_110_0249
DTC P1658: ETCS Control Relay ON 6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Malfunction
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). terminal A21 and body ground.
＊０２
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
2. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with ETCSRLY (WHT)

the HDS.
Is the RELAY circuit OK ?

at the ETCS control relay and the ECM/PCM.
NO−Go to step 3. Terminal side of female terminals

4. Remove the ETCS control relay (A) from the under-
hood fuse/relay box. YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
＊０１ PCM (A21) and the ETCS control relay, then go to
A
step 13.
NO−Go to step 9.
5. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-80).
Is the ET CS control relay OK ?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Replace the ETCS control relay, then go to

step 13.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-249
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１６５８ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:33 61TL2000_110_0250

11. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
＊０３ 19. Reconnect all connectors.
IG1ETCS (YEL/GRN) software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-

terminals at the ETCS control relay and the ECM/
Terminal side of female terminals PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
Is there battery voltage? step 1.
YES−Repair short to power in the wire between NO−If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
the ECM/PCM (C1) and the ETCS control relay, then is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go to step 12. replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). If
NO−Go to step 18. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.

11-324).


11-250 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:34 61TL2000_110_0251
DTC P1659: ETCS Control Relay OFF 7. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-80).
Malfunction
Is the ET CS control relay OK ?
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Replace the ETCS control relay, then go to
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). step 23.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 9. Measure the voltage between ETCS control relay
4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
Is DT C P1659 indicated? ＊０２
ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 4.

at the ETCS control relay and the ECM/PCM.
IGP
5. Check the No. 18 DBW (THROTTLE ACTUATOR

CONTROL) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay
box. Terminal side of female terminals
Is the f use OK ?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 17.
6. Remove the ETCS control relay (A) from the under- replace it if needed (see page 22-73), then go to
hood fuse/relay box. step 22.
＊０１
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-251
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１６５９ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:34 61TL2000_110_0252

10. Measure the voltage between ETCS control relay 14. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P
4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. connector terminal No. 2 and ECM/PCM connector
＊０３ terminal C1.
ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR ＊０４
＋B
IG1ETCS

IG1ETCS (YEL/GRN)
YES−Go to step 11. Terminal side of female terminals
NO−Check the under-hood fuse/relay box, and Is there continuity?

step 22. YES−Go to step 15.
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C1) and the ETCS control relay, then go to
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. step 23.
13. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P). 15. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
11-252 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:35 61TL2000_110_0253
16. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P 18. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
terminal A21. 19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P).
＊０５
＊０７
IG1ETCS (YEL/GRN)
ETCARLY

ETCARLY (WHT)

YES−Go to step 28. PCM (C1) and the ETCS control relay, then go to
step 23.
PCM (A21) and the ETCS control relay, then go to NO−Go to step 21.
step 23.
17. Remove the ETCS control relay (A) from the under-
＊０６
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-253

08/04/09 12:21:35 61TL2000_110_0254

21. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P 28. Reconnect all connectors.
＊０８ 29. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
＋B

Terminal side of female terminals recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
Is there continuity? NO−If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting

YES−Check the under-hood fuse/relay box, and replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). If
replace it if needed (see page 22-73), then go to any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
step 23. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
NO−Go to step 28.

11-324).


11-254 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:35 61TL2000_110_0255
DTC P1683: Throttle Valve Default Position 9. Push the throttle valve closed as shown.
Spring Performance Problem ＊０１
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle

body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 10. Release the throttle valve.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Does the throttle valve return?
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at YES−Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363),
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in then go to step 12.
idle. NO−Go to step 11.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 11. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367).
10 seconds.
Is DT C P1683 indicated? 11-324).
YES−Go to step 7. 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait
10 seconds.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle
body (see page 11-367). YES−If the throttle body was cleaned, go to step
11. If the throttle body was replaced, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-255
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１６８３ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:21:36 61TL2000_110_0256

DTC P1684: Throttle Valve Return Spring 9. Push the throttle valve open as shown.
Performance Problem ＊０１

is activated.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 10. Release the throttle valve.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Does the throttle valve return?
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at YES−Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363),
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in then go to step 12.
idle. NO−Go to step 11.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 11. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367).
10 seconds.
Is DT C P1684 indicated? 11-324).
YES−Go to step 7. 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait
10 seconds.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
body (see page 11-367). YES−If the throttle body was cleaned, go to step
11. If the throttle body was replaced, check for poor
and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.

11-256 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１６８４ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:21:36 61TL2000_110_0257
DTC P2101: Electronic Throttle Control 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
System (ETCS) Malfunction
11. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle the HDS.
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you 12. Visually check the throttle valve operation.
is activated. Does the throttle valve operate smoothly?
YES−Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363),

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data then go to step 22 and recheck. If DTC P2101 is
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general indicated, go to step 19.
NO−Go to step 13.
the HDS. 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P).
Is DT C P2101 indicated? 17. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5

YES−Go to step 7. ＊０１
NO−Go to step 5.

ETCSM− ETCSM＋
• ENGINE SPEED (GRN/YEL) (BLU/RED)
• VSS
• APP SENSOR A
JUMPER WIRE
YES−Go to step 7.

at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM, then clean
the throttle body (see page 11-363).

body (see page 11-367).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-257
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１０１ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:21:36 61TL2000_110_0258

18. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 25. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
terminals C3 and C4. range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
＊０２
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) • ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• APP SENSOR A
ETCSM− (GRN/YEL) ETCSM＋ (BLU/RED) 26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

then clean the throttle body (see page 11-363), and
Terminal side of female terminals go to step 1.

Is there continuity? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
NO−Repair open in the wires between the throttle
body and the ECM/PCM (C3, C4), then go to step 21. 28. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
20. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367). 29. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
• ENGINE SPEED
22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). • VSS
• APP SENSOR A
11-324). Is DT C P2101 indicated?

terminals at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM. If

11-258 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:37 61TL2000_110_0259
DTC P2118: Throttle Actuator Current Range/ 9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
Performance Problem terminal C43 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No. 4.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). SG3 (GRN)

3. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
SG3 (GRN)
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the throttle
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. body and the ECM/PCM (C43), then go to step 14.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-259
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１１８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:21:37 61TL2000_110_0260

10. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P 11. Check for continuity between body ground and
connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6. throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5 and
＊０２ No. 6 individually.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR ＊０３
ETCSM− (GRN/YEL) ETCSM＋ (BLU/RED)

ETCSM− ETCSM＋
(GRN/YEL) (BLU/RED)

YES−Repair short in the wires between throttle
body 6P connector terminals No. 5 (ETCS− line) YES−Repair short in the wire between the throttle
and No. 6 (ETCS＋ line), then go to step 14. body 6P connector and body ground, then go to
step 14.
NO−Go to step 11.
NO−Go to step 12.
11-260 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:37 61TL2000_110_0261
12. At the throttle body side, measure the resistance 13. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367).
between throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
and No. 6 with the throttle fully closed. 14. Reconnect all connectors.
＊０４
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

11-324).
ETCSM− ETCSM＋
Terminal side of male terminals 20. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.

Is there about 1.0 or less?
NO−Go to step 22. terminals at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-261

08/04/09 12:21:37 61TL2000_110_0262


26. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.


11-262 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:38 61TL2000_110_0263
DTC P2122: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Circuit Low Voltage
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
＊０２
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
HDS.
YES−Go to step 3. APSA (YEL/BLK)

at APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Wire side of female terminals
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.

6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P PCM (A18) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24.
connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
＊０１ NO−Go to step 11.
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
11. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 1 to
＊０３
SG4 (BLU/RED) VCC4 (RED/BLK)
APSA (YEL/BLK)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Go to step 17.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-263
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１２２ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:21:38 61TL2000_110_0264

12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
＊０４ 16. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) HDS.
APSA (YEL/BLK) Is there about 0.2 V or less?
NO−Go to step 22.

Is there continuity? 20. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 3 to

PCM (A18) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24.
13. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).

VCC4 (RED/BLK)
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 3 with a jumper wire. JUMPER WIRE
＊０５
APSA (YEL/BLK) VCC4 (RED/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
11-264 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:39 61TL2000_110_0265
21. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
＊０７ 30. Reconnect all connectors.
VCC4 (RED/BLK) Is DT C P2122 indicated?

terminals at APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If the
Terminal side of female terminals ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
YES−Go to step 30. is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/ any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
PCM (A26) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
23. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page

11-280).

11-324).

terminals at APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-265

08/04/09 12:21:39 61TL2000_110_0266

DTC P2123: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). body ground with a jumper wire.
＊０２
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
HDS.
YES−Go to step 3.
SG4 (BLU/RED)
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this JUMPER WIRE

at APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). terminal A36 and body ground.
＊０３
6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P
＊０１
SG4 (BLU/RED)
SG4 (BLU/RED) VCC4 (RED/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?

YES−Go to step 12. PCM (A36) and APP sensor A, then go to step 14.
NO−Go to step 7.
11-266 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１２３ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:21:40 61TL2000_110_0267

11-280).

11-324).

terminals at APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.



terminals at APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If the

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-267

08/04/09 12:21:40 61TL2000_110_0268

DTC P2127: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E) 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Circuit Low Voltage
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
＊０２
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
HDS.
YES−Go to step 3. APSB (BLK)

at APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM.

6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P PCM (A19) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24.
＊０１ NO−Go to step 11.
＊０３
SG5 (GRN) VCC5 (BRN/WHT)
APSB (BLK)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Go to step 17.
11-268 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１２７ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:21:41 61TL2000_110_0269
12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
＊０４ 16. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) HDS.
APSB (BLK) Is there about 0.2 V or less?
NO−Go to step 22.

Is there continuity? 20. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 6 to

PCM (A19) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24.
13. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).

VCC5 (BRN/WHT)
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No. 4
and No. 6 with a jumper wire. JUMPER WIRE
＊０５
APSB (BLK) VCC5 (BRN/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-269

08/04/09 12:21:41 61TL2000_110_0270

21. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
＊０７ 30. Reconnect all connectors.
VCC5 (BRN/WHT) Is DT C P2127 indicated?

terminals at APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If the
Terminal side of female terminals ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
YES−Go to step 30. is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/ any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
PCM (A25) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.

11-280).

11-324).

terminals at APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.

11-270 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:47 61TL2000_110_0271
DTC P2128: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E) 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). body ground with a jumper wire.
＊０２
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
HDS.
YES−Go to step 3.
SG5 (GRN)
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this JUMPER WIRE

at APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). terminal A35 and body ground.
＊０３
6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P
＊０１
SG5 (GRN)
SG5 (GRN) VCC5 (BRN/WHT)

YES−Go to step 12. PCM (A35) and APP sensor B, then go to step 14.
NO−Go to step 7.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-271
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１２８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:47 61TL2000_110_0272


11-280).

11-324).

terminals at APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.



terminals at APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If the

11-272 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:47 61TL2000_110_0273
DTC P2135: TP Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage 8. Visually check the throttle valve operation while
Correlation you clear the DTC with the HDS.
Does the valve temporarily move to its f ully

closed position?
body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or YES−Go to step 15.
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve NO−Go to step 9.
is activated.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P).
terminals C20 and C21.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ＊０１
the HDS.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. TPSA (RED/BLK) TPSB (RED/BLU)
YES−Go to step 5.

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Terminal side of female terminals
6. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle YES−Go to step 13.
NO−Go to step 22.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-273
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１３５ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:47 61TL2000_110_0274

13. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
14. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector Is DT C P2135 indicated?

＊０２ YES−Check for poor connections or loose
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) terminals at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.

TPSA (RED/BLK) TPSB (RED/BLU) Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the

Terminal side of female terminals good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).

YES−Repair short in the wires between the ECM/
PCM connector terminals C20 (TPSA line) and C21 YES−Check for poor connections or loose
(TPSB line), then go to step 17. terminals at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM. If
NO−Go to step 15. good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
16. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367). is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
17. Reconnect all connectors. any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,

11-324).
11-274 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:48 61TL2000_110_0275
DTC P2138: APP Sensor A/B (TP Sensor D/E) 9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
Incorrect Voltage Correlation terminals A18 and A19.
＊０１
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). APSA (YEL/BLK) APSB (BLK)
2. Clear the DTC with HDS.
3. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.

NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES−Go to step 10.

at the APP sensor and the ECM/PCM. NO−Go to step 22.
5. Check APP SENSOR A and APP SENSOR B in the 10. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are they the same voltage? terminals A18 and A19.
＊０２
YES−Go to step 6. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
NO−Go to step 12.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). APSA (YEL/BLK) APSB (BLK)
YES−Repair short in the wires between ECM/PCM

connector terminals A18 (APSA line) and A19
(APSB line), then go to step 14.
NO−Go to step 13.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-275
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１３８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:48 61TL2000_110_0276

13. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page Is DT C P2138 indicated?
11-280).
14. Reconnect all connectors. terminals at APP sensor A/B and the ECM/PCM. If
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 24.
17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
11-324). replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). If
18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.

terminals at APP sensor A/B and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.


11-276 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:48 61TL2000_110_0277
DTC P2176: Throttle Actuator Control System 10. Visually check the throttle valve operation while
Idle Position Not Learned performing the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
Does the throttle valve move to its f ully closed

Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle position?
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you YES−Go to step 11.
is activated. NO−Go to step 12.
11. Check for sludge or carbon on the throttle valve.

NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Is there sludge or carbon on the throttle valve?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES−Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363),
• If DTC P2135 is stored at the same time as DTC P2176, then go to step 21 and recheck.
troubleshoot DTC P2135 first, then recheck for DTC
P2176. NO−Go to step 18.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 15. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P).
10 seconds.
16. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. and No. 6 with a jumper wire.
＊０１
Is DT C P217 6 indicated? THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 6.

ETCSM− ETCSM＋
at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM, then clean (GRN/YEL) (BLU/RED)
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). JUMPER WIRE
7. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle Wire side of female terminals
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-277
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２１７６ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:48 61TL2000_110_0278

17. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
＊０２ Is DT C P217 6 indicated?
then clean the throttle body (see page 11-363), and
ETCSM− (GRN/YEL) ETCSM＋ (BLU/RED) go to step 1.


Is there continuity? good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
YES−Go to step 27. 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NO−Repair open in the wires between the throttle Is DT C P217 6 indicated?

body and the ECM/PCM (C3, C4), then go to step 20.
18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). terminals at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM. If
19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367). good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
22. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
11-324).

10 seconds.
11-278 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:49 61TL2000_110_0279
APP Sensor Signal Inspection

NOTE: 5. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,
• This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor the HDS.
stores DTCs which are covered in other
troubleshooting procedures. • If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
• Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS • If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal
before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are module (see page 11-280), then go to step 1.
indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this
procedure.
• Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its
operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the
pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator
pedal module (see page 11-280).

＊０１

PCM. If it doesn’t, go to the DLC circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-210).
4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,

then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
• If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.

• If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not
have the latest software (see page 11-233), or
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-279
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２４１１２９４７ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:22:50 61TL2000_110_0280
Accelerator Pedal Module Removal and Installation

1. Disconnect the accelerator pedal module connector 1. Install the accelerator pedal module (A), then slide
(A). it until it locks with a clicking sound.
＊０１＊０２
G
9.8 N·m
E (1.0 kgf·m, A
C A
7.2 lbf·ft)
H
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
D
F
A
2. Install a new clip (A).
13 N·m NOTE:
(1.3 kgf·m, • Make sure that the accelerator pedal module and
9.4 lbf·ft)
the clip are secure.
B • The clip must be replaced whenever a new
accelerator pedal module is installed.
2. Remove the clip (B). ＊０３
C
3. Using flat-tip screwdriver (C), push the lock (D),
then remove the accelerator pedal module (E). A
NOTE:
• The APP sensor is not available separately. Do
not disassemble the accelerator pedal module.
• If the pedal stop (F) is damaged, pull back the
carpet, remove the nuts (G) and bolt (H), and
replace the pedal stop. B
13 N·m
(1.3 kgf·m,
9.4 lbf·ft)
3. Install the nuts (B), and connect the accelerator

pedal module connector (C).
11-280 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２４１１２３８６ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:22:52 61TL2000_110_0281
VTEC/VTC
＊０１
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL VALVE
ROCKER ARM OIL

PRESSURE SWITCH
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) SENSOR A
(INTAKE SIDE)
VTC OIL CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE
Removal/Test/Installation, ENGINE CONTROL
page 11-305 MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
VTC STRAINER Information, page 11-3
Substituting, page 11-7
Update, page 11-233
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-281
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０４０００００ＤＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:52 61TL2000_110_0282
VTEC/VTC
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0010: VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve 8. At the solenoid valve side, measure the resistance
Malfunction between VTC oil control solenoid valve 2P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR

idle.
4. Do the VTC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
Is there 6.7 5 −8.25 at room temperature?
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Go to step 14.
YES−Go to step 6.

at the VTC oil control solenoid valve and the
ECM/PCM.
7. Disconnect the VTC oil control solenoid valve 2P

connector.
11-282 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９００１０ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:53 61TL2000_110_0283
9. Check for continuity between VTC oil control 13. Check for continuity between VTC oil control
solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground. ECM/PCM connector terminal C23.
＊０２＊０４
VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
VTC (BLU/WHT)
GND (BLK)

VTC (BLU/WHT)
NO−Repair open in the wire between the VTC oil YES−Go to step 22.
control solenoid valve and G101 (see page 22-22),
then go to step 15. NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C23) and the VTC oil control solenoid valve,
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. then go to step 15.

＊０３
VTC (BLU/WHT)

PCM (C23) and the VTC oil control solenoid valve,
then go to step 15.
NO−Go to step 13.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-283

08/04/09 12:22:53 61TL2000_110_0284
VTEC/VTC

14. Replace the VTC oil control solenoid valve 23. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
(see page 11-305). software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the HDS.
17. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
18. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page Is DT C P0010 indicated?
11-324).
19. Do the VTC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with terminals at the VTC oil control solenoid valve and
the HDS. the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. then go to step 24. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 26.
terminals at the VTC oil control solenoid valve and 26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0010 in the
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 21. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0010 in the YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated,
DTCs MENU with the HDS. troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
Does the screen indicate PASSED? (see page 11-234). If any other Temporary DTCs or
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTC’s troubleshooting.
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the VTC oil
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor control solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM. If the
connections or loose terminals at the VTC oil ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
control solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM, then go ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 24. If the
to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
go to step 19. screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 24.
11-284 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:54 61TL2000_110_0285
DTC P0011: VTC System Malfunction 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0011 in the
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Does the screen indicate F AILED?
YES−Go to step 9.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 5 and
3. Start the engine. recheck.
4. Watch the low oil pressure indicator. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is the low oil pressure indicator on? 10. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 6-21).
YES−Check the engine oil level. If the level is OK, 11. Remove the VTC strainer (A), and check it for
check the engine oil pressure (see page 8-9), then clogging.
go to step 15. ＊０１
NO−Go to step 5.

the HDS.
Is the result OK ? A
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 9.

Is the strainer OK ?
7. Check the VTC STATUS in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. YES−Go to step 12.
Does it indicate ON? NO−Clean the VTC strainer, replace the engine oil
filter and the engine oil, then go to step 14.
YES−Go to step 8.
12. Test the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see page
NO−Go to step 6 and recheck. 11-305).
Is the V T C oil control solenoid valve OK ?
NO−Replace the VTC oil control solenoid valve

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-285
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９００１１ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:54 61TL2000_110_0286
VTEC/VTC

13. Inspect the VTC actuator (see page 6-8).
Is the V T C actuator OK ?
YES−Check the VTC system oil passages, then go

to step 14.
NO−Replace the VTC actuator (see page 6-31),

then go to step 14.

11-324).

the HDS.

terminals at the VTC oil control solenoid valve and
NO−Go to step 21.



control solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM, then go
to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 19.
11-286 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:54 61TL2000_110_0287
DTC P0340: CMP Sensor A No Signal 9. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor A 3P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general CMP SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR

CMPA (BLU/WHT)
YES−Go to step 5.
at CMP sensor A and the ECM/PCM.
NO−Go to step 11.
10. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor A 3P
6. Disconnect the CMP sensor A 3P connector. connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
＊０３
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). CMP SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR
8. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor A 3P

＊０１
CMP SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR LG (BRN/YEL) IG1 (BLK/YEL)
IG1 (BLK/YEL)

Is there battery voltage? A and G101 (see page 22-22), then go to step 18.
YES−Go to step 9.

A and the No. 7 ACG (15 A) fuse, then go to step 18.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-287
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０３４０ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:55 61TL2000_110_0288
VTEC/VTC

11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Check for continuity between CMP sensor A 3P
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. terminal C45.
＊０５
CMP SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR

CMPA (BLU/WHT)
＊０４
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) Wire side of female terminals
CMPA (BLU/WHT)
CMPA (BLU/WHT)
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ PCM (C45) and CMP sensor A, then go to step 18.
PCM (C45) and CMP sensor A, then go to step 18.
NO−Go to step 15.
11-288 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:55 61TL2000_110_0289
17. Replace CMP sensor A (see page 11-306).

11-324).

terminals at CMP sensor A and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.



terminals at CMP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If the

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-289

08/04/09 12:22:55 61TL2000_110_0290
VTEC/VTC

DTC P0341: CMP Sensor A and CKP Sensor Does the screen indicate F AILED?
Incorrect Phase Detected
YES−Go to step 9.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the VTC oil
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). control solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. and recheck.
3. Test-drive at a steady speed between 19−38 mph 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
10. Test the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see page
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 11-305).
Is DT C P0341 indicated? Is the V T C oil control solenoid valve OK ?
NO−Go to step 5. NO−Replace the VTC oil control solenoid valve

the HDS. 11. Check the camshaft timing (see step 2 on page 6-9).
Is the result OK ? Is the camshaf t timing OK ?
NO−Go to step 9. NO−Reset the camshaft timing (see step 2 on page

(30−60 km/h) for 10 minutes. 12. Check the cam chain for damage or stretch
(see page 6-23).
7. Check the VTC STATUS in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. Is the cam chain damaged or stretched?
Does it indicate ON? YES−Replace the cam chain (see page 6-13) and
the auto-tensioner (see page 6-21), then go to step
YES−Go to step 8. 14.
NO−Go to step 6 and recheck. NO−Go to step 13.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0341 in the 13. Inspect the VTC actuator (see page 6-8).
Is the actuator OK ?

then go to step 14.
11-290 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０３４１ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:55 61TL2000_110_0291

11-324).


terminals at the VTC oil control solenoid valve and
NO−Go to step 21.



control solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM, then go
to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 19.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-291

08/04/09 12:22:55 61TL2000_110_0292
VTEC/VTC

DTC P0344: CMP Sensor A Circuit 8. Check for damage on the CMP sensor A pulser
Intermittent Interruption plate (see page 6-30).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES−Replace the CMP sensor A pulser plate
NO−Go to step 9.
10. Replace CMP sensor A (see page 11-306).
4. Check the CMP A NOISE in the DATA LIST with the
YES−Go to step 7. 13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
NO−Go to step 5.
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• ENGINE SPEED Is DT C P0344 indicated?

• VSS
6. Check the CMP A NOISE in the DATA LIST with the terminals at CMP sensor A and the ECM/PCM, then
HDS. go to step 1.
Are 0 counts indicated? NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

YES−Go to step 7. indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.

at CMP sensor A and the ECM/PCM.

at these locations:
• CMP sensor A
• ECM/PCM
• Engine ground
• Body ground
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Repair the connections or terminals, then go

to step 11.
11-292 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０３４４ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:56 61TL2000_110_0293
DTC P1009: VTC Advance Malfunction 8. Test the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see page
11-305).
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Is the valve OK ?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES−Go to step 9.
troubleshoot DTC P1009 first, then recheck for DTC NO−Replace the VTC oil control solenoid valve
P0341. (see page 11-305), then go to step 10.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Inspect the VTC actuator (see page 6-8).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Is the actuator OK ?
3. Start the engine. YES−Check the VTC system oil passages, then go
to step 10.
Is DT C P1009 indicated? then go to step 10.
YES−Go to step 5. 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
time.
6. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-30). 11-324).
7. Remove the VTC strainer (A), and check it for 14. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
clogging.
＊０１ 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES−Check the oil passages at the VTC system,

then go to step 1.
A NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

Is the strainer OK ?
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Clean the VTC strainer, replace the engine oil

filter and the engine oil, then go to step 10.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-293
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１００９ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:22:56 61TL2000_110_0294
VTEC/VTC

DTC P2646: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch 8. Check the VTEC PRES SW in the DATA LIST with
Circuit Low Voltage the HDS.
Special Tools Required Is SW IT CH ON indicated?

• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
• A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301 YES−Go to step 15.
• A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201
• A/T pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A NO−Go to step 9.
• A/T pressure hose, adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
• Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 10. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A), and
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general attach the special tools as shown, then attach the
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). rocker arm oil pressure switch to the oil pressure
gauge adapter (B).
1. Check the engine oil level. ＊０１
07406-0020201 or
07MAJ-PY4011A and
Is the level OK ? 07406-0070301 07MAJ-PY40120
YES−Go to step 2.
A
NO−Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then 22 N·m
go to step 20. (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)

B
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with 07NAJ-P07010A
the HDS.
07ZAJ-S5AA200
Is the result OK ?

at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker 11. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
arm oil control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM. connector.
NO−Go to step 5. 12. Start the engine.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
11-294 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２６４６ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:56 61TL2000_110_0295
14. Check the oil pressure. 19. Reconnect all connectors.
Does the oil pressure increase to at least 392 kPa 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
( 4.0 kgf / cm2 , 56.9 psi)?
YES−Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(see page 11-308), then go to step 19. 22. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
NO−Check the engine oil pressure (see page 8-9).
If the pressure is OK, inspect the VTEC system. If it 23. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
is OK, replace the rocker arm oil control valve the HDS.
17. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P). terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the
rocker arm oil control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM,
18. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector then go step 1.
＊０２ NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
VTPSW (BLU/BLK)

PCM (C22) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch,
then go to step 19.
NO−Go to step 25.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-295

08/04/09 12:22:56 61TL2000_110_0296
VTEC/VTC

27. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

the HDS.

terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the
rocker arm oil control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM.

11-296 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:57 61TL2000_110_0297
DTC P2647: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch 5. Check the result of step 4.
• VTEC Switch Failure
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data • VTEC Switch Open
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general • VTEC Switch SIG Line Open
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • VTEC Switch GND Line Open
1. Check the engine oil level. Is the test result any of those above?
Is the level OK ? YES−Go to step 6.
YES−Go to step 2. NO−Check for poor connections or loose terminals

at the rocker arm oil pressure switch. If it is OK,
NO−Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
go to step 17. 11-307), then, go to step 15.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 7. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
the HDS. 8. At the rocker arm oil pressure switch side, check for
continuity between its 2P connector terminals.
NOTE: If a DTC was stored during the VTEC TEST, ＊０１
check the DTCs MENU. If DTC P2647 is indicated, ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
go to step 6. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to the indicated DTC’s VTPSW
troubleshooting.
Is the result OK ?

at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker GND
arm oil control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM.
NO−Go to step 5.
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-297
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２６４７ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:22:57 61TL2000_110_0298
VTEC/VTC

9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil
pressure switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and
10. Measure the voltage between rocker arm oil ECM/PCM connector terminal C22.
pressure switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and ＊０３
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
body ground.
＊０２ VTPSW (BLU/BLK)
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
VTPSW (BLU/BLK) Terminal side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals VTPSW (BLU/BLK)

Is there battery voltage? Is there continuity?
YES−Repair open in the wire between the rocker YES−Go to step 21.
arm oil pressure switch and G101 (see page 22-22),
then go to step 15. NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C22) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch,
NO−Go to step 11. then go to step 16.

11-324).
11-298 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:57 61TL2000_110_0299
YES−Check for poor connections or loose YES−Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the
rocker arm oil control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM, rocker arm oil control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM.
then go to step 1. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-
NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. NO−If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
21. Reconnect all connectors. replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). If
22. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-299

08/04/09 12:22:58 61TL2000_110_0300
VTEC/VTC

DTC P2648: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Circuit Low Voltage
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). terminal B35 and body ground.
＊０２

the HDS.
Is the result OK ? VTS (GRN/YEL)

at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the
ECM/PCM. Terminal side of female terminals
NO−Go to step 4. Is there continuity?
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (B35) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid,
5. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P then go to step 11.
connector.
NO−Go to step 18.
6. Measure the resistance between rocker arm oil
control solenoid 2P connector terminals No. 1 and 10. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
No. 2. 11-307).
＊０１
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR 11. Reconnect all connectors.

11-324).

the HDS.
Is there 14−30 at room temperature?
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Go to step 10.
11-300 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２６４８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:24:01 61TL2000_110_0301
terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated,
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
NO−Go to step 17. (see page 11-234). If any other Temporary DTCs or
17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2648 in the DTC’s troubleshooting.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
control solenoid and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 16, PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 20. If the ECM/
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
control solenoid and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 15.


the HDS.

terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and
go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 22.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-301

08/04/09 12:24:02 61TL2000_110_0302
VTEC/VTC

DTC P2649: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 8. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil control
Circuit High Voltage solenoid 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR

GND (BLK)

idle.
Is DT C P2649 indicated? Is there continuity?
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO−Repair open in the wire between the rocker
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals arm oil control solenoid and G101 (see page 22-22),
at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the then go to step 13.
ECM/PCM.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P
connector.
7. Measure the resistance between rocker arm oil

control solenoid 2P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 2.
＊０１
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR
Is there 14−30 at room temperature?
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 12.
11-302 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２６４９ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:24:02 61TL2000_110_0303
11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2649 in the
terminal B35 and rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P DTCs MENU with the HDS.
connector terminal No. 2.
＊０３ Does the screen indicate PASSED?
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR
VTS (GRN/YEL) go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
control solenoid and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes on.
VTS (GRN/YEL)

PCM (B35) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid,
then go to step 13.
12. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
11-307).

11-324).

NO−Go to step 18.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-303

08/04/09 12:24:02 61TL2000_110_0304
VTEC/VTC



then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.
NO−Go to step 23.

YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated


control solenoid and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM
on.
11-304 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:03 61TL2000_110_0305
VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve Removal/Test/Installation

1. Disconnect the VTC oil control solenoid valve 2P 5. Connect the battery positive terminal to VTC oil
connector (A). control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2.
＊０１＊０３
A VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
C
BATTERY
B Terminal side of male terminals

12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
6. Connect the battery negative terminal to VTC oil
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 1.
Appearance of the inner valve (A) in the port should
be at least 0.05 in. (1.2 mm). If the inner valve does
2. Remove the bolt (B) and the VTC oil control not open, replace it; then go to step 8.
solenoid valve (C).
Open
3. Check the VTC oil control solenoid valve strainer ＊０４
for clogging. If the strainer is clogged, replace the
VTC oil control solenoid valve.
4. Note the amount of valve opening by observing the

position of the piston shoulder (A) through the
valve retard drain port. If you see the shoulder of
the piston, the valve is open and must be replaced.
Closed
＊０２
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-305
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０４６３３６５ＦＪＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:03 61TL2000_110_0306
VTEC/VTC
VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve CMP Sensor A Replacement

Removal/Test/Installation (cont’d)
1. Disconnect the CMP sensor A connector (B).
＊０１
7. Replace the VTC valve O-ring (A). B
＊０５
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
C
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
2. Remove CMP sensor A from the intake camshaft
side of the cylinder head.

8. Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, then install it. with a new O-ring (C).
9. Clean and dry the mating surface of the valve.
10. Install the valve.
NOTE: Do not install the valve while wearing cloth

fibrous gloves. Be careful not to contaminate the
cylinder head opening.
11-306 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０４１６０８１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:24:04 61TL2000_110_0307
Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Removal/Installation

1. Remove the frame brace (see page 20-230). 5. Remove the engine wire harness brackets (A) from
the rocker arm oil control valve (B).
2. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid ＊０２
connector (A) and the rocker arm oil pressure
switch connector (B).
＊０１
A
B
C A
E
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
D 8.7 lbf·ft)
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft) F

with a new rocker arm oil control valve filter.
3. Remove the harness clamps (C) and the bolts (D).
4. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve assembly

(E) and the rocker arm oil control valve filter (F).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-307
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０３５１５１９ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:04 61TL2000_110_0308
VTEC/VTC
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Removal/Installation

1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch
connector (A).
＊０１
B
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
C
A
2. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (B).

11-308 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ１４６８０３５１５１８ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:06 61TL2000_110_0309
Idle Control System

＊０１
A/C COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
Signal Circuit
A/C PRESSURE Troubleshooting,
SENSOR page 11-319
ALTERNATOR
Signal Circuit ENGINE CONTROL
Troubleshooting, MODULE (ECM)/
page 11-320 POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
A/C COMPRESSOR Substituting, page 11-7
Update, page 11-233
＊０２
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Signal Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-321
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-309
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６１０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:07 61TL2000_110_0310
Idle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0506: Idle Control System RPM Lower 7. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
Than Expected bore.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general bore?
YES−If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). body (see page 11-363). Also check for damage to
the air cleaner element (see page 11-364), then go
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. to step 9. If there is damage in the throttle bore, go
to step 8.
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in NO−Check the A/C system or power steering
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it system, then go to step 9.
idle.
8. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-367).
4. Check under these DATA LIST parameters with the
HDS: 9. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 °F (70 °C) 10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
• IAT SENSOR above 32 °F (0 °C) 11-324).
• VSS is 0 mph (0 km/h)
• ST FUEL TRIM between 0.69 −1.47 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
• FSS is CLOSED 3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the idle.
12. Check under these DATA LIST parameters with the
Does the screen indicate F AILED? HDS:
YES−Go to step 6. • ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 °F (70 °C)

• IAT SENSOR above 32 °F (0 °C)
NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 15. • VSS is 0 mph (0 km/h)
If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling • ST FUEL TRIM between 0.69 −1.47
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT • FSS is CLOSED
OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4
and recheck. 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
6. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body Is DT C P0506 indicated?
(see page 11-367).
NO−Go to step 14.
11-310 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０５０６ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:24:07 61TL2000_110_0311
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the 19. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
DTCs MENU with the HDS. software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13, neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. idle.
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 19. If 21. Check under these DATA LIST parameters with the
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until HDS:
CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11 • ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 °F (70 °C)
and recheck. • IAT SENSOR above 32 °F (0 °C)
• VSS is 0 mph (0 km/h)
15. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body • ST FUEL TRIM between 0.69 −1.47
(see page 11-367). • FSS is CLOSED
16. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
bore.
Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore? YES−Check for poor connections or loose
YES−If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-
body (see page 11-363). Also check for damage to good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 20.
the air cleaner element (see page 11-364), then go If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
to step 9. If there is damage in the throttle bore, go
to step 8. NO−Go to step 23.
NO−Go to step 17. 23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the
17. Recheck with different load conditions (turn on the
headlights, blower motor, rear window defogger Does the screen indicate PASSED?
and/or A/C, change the gear position, etc.).
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
DTCs MENU with the HDS. substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
Does the screen indicate PASSED? DTCs were indicated in step 22, go to the indicated
time. NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check the A/C and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
system and/or power steering system, then go to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates then go to step 20. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT keep idling until a result comes on. If the screen
COMPLETED, go to step 17. indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 20.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-311

08/04/09 12:24:07 61TL2000_110_0312
Idle Control System

DTC P0507: Idle Control System RPM Higher 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Than Expected
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 11-324).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it
idle for at least 20 seconds.
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
idle for at least 20 seconds. Is DT C P0507 indicated?
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the YES−Go to step 12.
NO−Go to step 11.
YES−Go to step 5. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent Does the screen indicate PASSED?
failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 10,
CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, recheck with go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
different load conditions (electrical, A/C, gear
position, etc.), then go to step 3. NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 12. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
5. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts: a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, recheck with
• PCV valve different load conditions (turn on the headlights,
• PCV hose blower motor, or A/C; change the gear position, etc.),
• EVAP canister purge valve then go to step 9.
• Throttle body
• Intake manifold
• Brake booster hose
• Brake booster
Are there any leaks?
YES−Repair or replace the leaking part(s), then go

to step 6.
NO−Go to step 6.
11-312 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０５０７ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:24:07 61TL2000_110_0313


idle for at least 20 seconds.

NO−Go to step 15.



and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep idling until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 13.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-313

08/04/09 12:24:08 61TL2000_110_0314
Idle Control System

DTC P0532: A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit Low 9. Measure the voltage between A/C pressure sensor
Voltage 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
＊０１
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data A/C PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

VCC6 (YEL) SG6 (BLK)
2. Turn the blower switch on.
3. Turn the A/C switch on.
4. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA

LIST with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals

YES−Go to step 5.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals NO−Go to step 14.
at the A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/PCM.
6. Disconnect the A/C pressure sensor 3P connector.
13. Check for continuity between A/C pressure sensor
8. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
LIST with the HDS. ＊０２
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
NO−Go to step 9.
ACPD (BLU)

PCM (A17) and the A/C pressure sensor, then go to
step 20.
NO−Go to step 27.
11-314 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０５３２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:08 61TL2000_110_0315
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324), then let the engine idle.
17. Check for continuity between A/C pressure sensor
3P connector terminal No. 1 and ECM/PCM 25. Turn the A/C switch on.
connector terminal A20.
＊０３ 26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

VCC6 (YEL)
terminals at the A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/
VCC6 (YEL)

Terminal side of female terminals software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
PCM (A20) and the A/C pressure sensor, then go to 31. Turn the A/C switch on.
step 20.
19. Replace the A/C pressure sensor (see page 21-7).
20. Reconnect all connectors. terminals at the A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to
1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-315

08/04/09 12:24:08 61TL2000_110_0316
Idle Control System

DTC P0533: A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit High 9. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA
Voltage LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is there about 4.7 5 V or more?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES−Go to step 10.
1. Start the engine, and let it idle. NO−Go to step 22.
2. Turn the blower switch on. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Turn the A/C switch on. 11. Remove the jumper wire from the A/C pressure
sensor 3P connector.
4. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA
LIST with the HDS. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is there about 4.7 5 V or more? 13. Measure the voltage between A/C pressure sensor
3P connector terminal No. 1 and No. 3.
at the A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/PCM.

6. Disconnect the A/C pressure sensor 3P connector.
7. Connect A/C pressure sensor 3P connector

＊０１ Wire side of female terminals

ACPD (BLU) SG6 (BLK)
NO−Go to step 18.
JUMPER WIRE
11-316 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０５３３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:09 61TL2000_110_0317
17. Check for continuity between A/C pressure sensor 21. Check for continuity between A/C pressure sensor
3P connector terminal No. 2 and ECM/PCM 3P connector terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM
connector terminal A17. connector terminal A10.
＊０３＊０４
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR A/C PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR


PCM (A17) and the A/C pressure sensor, then go to PCM (A10) and the A/C pressure sensor, then go to
step 24. step 24.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-317

08/04/09 12:24:09 61TL2000_110_0318
Idle Control System

23. Replace the A/C pressure sensor (see page 21-7). 32. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
24. Reconnect all connectors. good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 33. Start the engine, and let it idle.
26. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 34. Turn the blower switch on.
27. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page 35. Turn the A/C switch on.
11-324), then let the engine idle.
29. Turn the A/C switch on.
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. terminals at the A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/
Is DT C P0533 indicated? known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to
YES−Check for poor connections or loose 1.
terminals at the A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/
PCM, then go to step 1. NO−If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
NO−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). If
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
11-318 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:09 61TL2000_110_0319
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 13. Momentarily connect ECM/PCM connector terminal
A15 to body ground with a jumper wire several
2. Turn the blower switch on. times.
＊０１
3. Turn the A/C switch on. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
4. Check the A/C CLUTCH in the DATA LIST with the ACC (PUR)
HDS.
Does it indicate ON?
YES−Go to step 5.
JUMPER WIRE
NO−Do the A/C system test (see page 21-8).
5. Check the A/C system. Terminal side of female terminals
Does the A/ C system operate?

Is there a clicking noise f rom the A/ C compressor
YES−The air conditioning system circuit is OK. clutch?
NO−Go to step 6. YES−Reconnect all connectors, then update the

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-good
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
8. Activate the A/C CLUTCH in the INSPECTION 11-234).
MENU with the HDS.
NO−Check for poor connections or loose terminals
Is there a clicking noise f rom the A/ C compressor at the A/C compressor clutch relay and the ECM/
clutch? PCM. If the connections are OK, check the A/C
compressor clutch relay (see page 22-80). Then
YES−Do the A/C system test (see page 21-8). repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
(A15) and the A/C compressor clutch relay and the
NO−Go to step 9. other A/C systems.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-319
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６１１２１０１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:09 61TL2000_110_0320
Idle Control System
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting

2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST with

the HDS.
3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the

headlight switch is turned on.
Does the percentage vary?
YES−The alternator signal circuit is OK.
NO−Go to step 4.
4. Turn the headlight switch off and the ignition

switch to LOCK (0).
6. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.

＊０１
ALTF (WHT/RED)

PCM (B47) and the alternator.
NO−
• Do the alternator and regulator circuit
• Reconnect all connectors, then update the ECM/
PCM if it does not have the latest software
symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-234).
11-320 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６１１２９３１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:10 61TL2000_110_0321
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting

2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with ＊０１
the HDS.
Does it indicate OF F ?
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Inspect the brake pedal position switch

(see page 19-6). BKSW (LT GRN)
3. Press the brake pedal, and check the BRAKE

SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it change to ON? Terminal side of female terminals
YES−The brake pedal position switch signal circuit Is there continuity?

(BKSW line) is OK.
NO−Go to step 4. PCM (A42) and the brake pedal position switch.
Replace the No. 12 STOP (15 A) fuse in the under-
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). hood fuse/relay box.
5. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. NO−Go to step 9.
6. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P

connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-321
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６１１４８０６ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:10 61TL2000_110_0322
Idle Control System
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

9. Connect brake pedal position switch 4P connector
＊０２
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
BKSW (LT GRN)
JUMPER WIRE

＊０３
BKSW (LT GRN)
YES−Repair open in the wire between the brake

pedal position switch and the No. 12 STOP (15 A)
fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch
(see page 19-6).

PCM (A42) and the brake pedal position switch.
11-322 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:10 61TL2000_110_0323
Idle Speed Inspection

NOTE: 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
• Before checking the idle speed, check these items: 3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in
– The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it
reported on, and there are no DTCs. idle.
– Ignition timing
– Spark plugs 5. Check the idle speed without load conditions:
– Air cleaner headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air
– PCV system conditioner off.
• Apply the parking brake, and make sure the
headlights are off. Idle speed should be:
M/T 750±50 rpm
1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) A/T 800±50 rpm (in P or N)
canister purge valve connector.
6. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) load (A/C switch on, temperature set to max cool,
(A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard. blower fan on high, and headlights on high beam).
＊０１
Idle speed should be:
M/T 750±50 rpm
A/T 800±50 rpm (in P or N)
NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification,

do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324). If the idle speed is still not within
specification, go to symptom troubleshooting.
7. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve

connector.

PCM. If it doesn’t, go to the DLC circuit
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-323
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６１０００００ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:11 61TL2000_110_0324
Idle Control System
ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure

The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM
can learn the engine idle characteristics.
Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of

these actions:
• Replace the ECM/PCM.

• Reset the ECM/PCM.
• Update the ECM/PCM.
• Replace or clean the throttle body.
• When the engine or transmission is disassembled.
NOTE: Clearing the DTCs with the HDS does not require
you to do the idle learn procedure.
Procedure
1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.)
are off.

2 seconds.

neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the
engine coolant temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C).
5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the

throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include

its running time in the 5 minutes.
6. Verify on the HDS data list that the idle learn

procedure is complete.
11-324 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ａ２０３３６１２４６０１ＢＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:24:15 61TL2000_110_0325
Fuel Supply System
＊０１
FUEL TANK
Draining, page 11-342
FUEL FEED LINE Replacement, page 11-356
FUEL FILL CAP
FUEL RAIL
FUEL FILL PIPE

page 11-358
FUEL LINE/
QUICK-CONNECT FITTING
Precautions, page 11-345
Removal, page 11-346
FUEL TANK UNIT
page 11-352
FUEL PUMP
Circuit Troubleshooting,
FUEL VAPOR LINE page 11-333
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Test, page 11-359
FUEL LINE/ Replacement, page 11-355
QUICK-CONNECT FITTING FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Precautions, page 11-345 Replacement, page 11-354
Removal, page 11-346 FUEL FILTER
Installation, page 11-349 Replacement, page 11-354
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-325
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:17 61TL2000_110_0326
Fuel Supply System

＊０２
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-233
＊０３
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2
11-326 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:17 61TL2000_110_0327
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0461: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sending Unit) Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
NOTE:
• Because it requires 162 miles (260 km) of driving
without refueling to complete this diagnosis, DTC
P0461 cannot be duplicated during this
troubleshooting.
1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-359).
Is the f uel gauge sending unit OK ?

terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the
gauge control module.
NO−Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page


11-324).

terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the
gauge control module, then go to step 1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-327
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４６１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:17 61TL2000_110_0328
Fuel Supply System

DTC P0462: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge 11. Measure the voltage between fuel tank unit 4P
Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
＊０１
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). SIGNAL (PUR)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
YES−Go to step 4.
at the gauge control module and the fuel gauge
sending unit. NO−Go to step 12.
5. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-185). 13. Remove the gauge control module (see page
22-313).
6. Remove the access panel from the floor (see page
11-352). 14. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P
connector.
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
15. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P
＊０２
9. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds. FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. SIGNAL (PUR)
YES−Replace the fuel gauge sending unit

NO−Go to step 11.

YES−Repair short in the wire between the gauge

control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 24.

11-328 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４６２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:18 61TL2000_110_0329
17. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-352). 27. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
18. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector. 28. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
21. Set the float (A) to the E position.
＊０３ YES−Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the gauge control module and the fuel
gauge sending unit, then go to step 1.

A

E
0.84 in. 32. Reconnect all connectors.
(21.4 mm )
22. Check the fuel gauge. software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
Does the gauge move to the empty position?
22-313), then go to step 23. YES−Check for poor connections or loose
23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). gauge sending unit. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
24. Reconnect all connectors. then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-329

08/04/09 12:24:18 61TL2000_110_0330
Fuel Supply System

DTC P0463: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage
11. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 3
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data to body ground with a jumper wire.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general ＊０２
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. GND (ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
YES−Go to step 4.
at the gauge control module and the fuel gauge 12. Remove the gauge control module (see page
sending unit. 22-313).
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P
connector.
5. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-185).
6. Remove the access panel from the floor (see page module 32P connector terminal No. 18 and body
11-352). ground.
＊０３
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector. GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
9. Measure the voltage between fuel tank unit 4P

＊０１ GND (ORN)
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
SIGNAL (PUR)
GND (ORN)
Wire side of female terminals NO−Repair open in the wire between the gauge
control module (GND line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 27.
NO−Go to step 10.
11-330 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４６３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:08 61TL2000_110_0331
15. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 1 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
to body ground with a jumper wire.
＊０４ 18. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-352).
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
19. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-359).
SIGNAL (PUR) Is the f uel gauge sending unit OK ?

JUMPER WIRE
NO−Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
20. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.

21. Reconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
16. Check for continuity between gauge control 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
module 32P connector terminal No. 6 and body
ground. 23. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
＊０５
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR 24. Set the float (A) to the F position.
＊０６
A
SIGNAL (PUR)
F
5.58 in.
(141.8 mm )
YES−Remove the jumper wire, then go to step 18. 25. Check the fuel gauge.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the gauge Does the gauge move to the f ull position?
control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 27. YES−Go to step 33.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-331

08/04/09 12:25:08 61TL2000_110_0332
Fuel Supply System


11-324).

gauge sending unit, then go to step 1.



gauge sending unit. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.

11-332 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:08 61TL2000_110_0333
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting

If you suspect a problem with the fuel pump, check that 5. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2
the fuel pump actually runs; when it is on, you will hear 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
some noise if you listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel ＊０２
fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR
2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned on. If the
fuel pump does not make noise, do this: IGP
2. Remove the driver’s dashboard lower cover

(see page 20-118).
3. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (A) from the driver’s

＊０１ Terminal side of female terminals
A YES−Go to step 14.
NO−Go to step 6.
7. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A) and the ETCS

control relay (B) from the under-hood fuse/relay
box.
＊０３
A B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-333
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２８３０２ＦＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:25:09 61TL2000_110_0334
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 13. Check for continuity between driver’s under-dash
fuse/relay box connector F (33P) terminal No. 31
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P). and body ground.
＊０５
10. Disconnect the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
connector F (33P). CONNECTOR F (33P)
11. Disconnect the engine wire harness C101

connector at left side of engine compartment.
12. Connect PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector IGP (YEL/BLK)

＊０４

IGP
JUMPER WIRE YES−

• Replace PGM-FI main relay 1.
• If needed, replace the driver’s under-dash fuse/
relay box (see page 22-74).
NO−
• Repair open in the wire between the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the driver’s under-dash fuse/
relay box.
• If the wire is OK, replace the under-hood fuse/
relay box (see page 22-73).
11-334 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:10 61TL2000_110_0335
14. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 16. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector
4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
＊０６＊０７
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR
IG1
IMOFPR
JUMPER WIRE
Is there battery voltage? 17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 15. 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
NO− 19. Check for continuity between body ground and

• Check the No. 9 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in the ECM/PCM connector terminal A16.
driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box. ＊０８
• If the fuse is OK, replace the driver’s under-dash ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
fuse/relay box (see page 22-74).
IMOFPR (GRY/BLK)
NO−Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main

relay 2 and the ECM/PCM (A16).
20. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-335

08/04/09 12:25:10 61TL2000_110_0336
Fuel Supply System

21. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A7 to body 26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
ground with a jumper wire. voltage between driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box
＊０９ connector F (33P) terminal No. 22 and body ground
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) within 2 seconds.
＊１１
MRLY (RED/BLK)
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR F (33P)
JUMPER WIRE IMOFPR (GRY/BLK)

23. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector Is there battery voltage?
＊１０ YES−Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) latest software (see page 11-233), or substitute a
IMOFPR (GRY/BLK) recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with
NO−Go to step 27.
NO−Replace PGM-FI main relay 2.
11-336 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:11 61TL2000_110_0337
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the 31. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
voltage between driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector
connector F (33P) terminal No. 22 and body ground terminal No. 2 and body ground within 2 seconds.
after 2 seconds. ＊１３
＊１２ FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR F (33P)
FUEL PUMP (PNK)
IMOFPR (GRY/BLK)


NO−Go to step 32.
NO−If needed, replace the driver’s under-dash
fuse/relay box (see page 22-74), then go to step 28. 32. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 33. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2.
30. Remove the access panel from the floor (see page
11-352).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-337

08/04/09 12:25:11 61TL2000_110_0338
Fuel Supply System

34. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector 37. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire. connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
＊１４＊１６
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
IG1 FUEL PUMP GND (BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
Terminal side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
35. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the Is there continuity?
voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector
terminal No. 2 and body ground. YES−Replace the fuel pump (see page 11-355).
＊１５
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR NO−Repair open in the wire between the fuel tank
unit 4P connector and G603 (see page 22-44).
FUEL PUMP (PNK)
YES−Replace PGM-FI main relay 2.
NO−
• Repair open in the wire between the driver’s
under-dash fuse/relay box (D10) and the fuel tank
unit 4P connector.
• If the wire is OK, replace the driver’s under-dash
fuse/relay box (see page 22-74).
11-338 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:12 61TL2000_110_0339
Fuel Pressure Relieving

Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump
and then disconnecting the fuel line/quick connect 9. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure
fitting in the engine compartment. (see page 22-78).
With the HDS 10. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A) (see
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) ＊０２
(A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard. A
＊０１
A
11. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). clean it if needed.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/ 12. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect
PCM. If it doesn’t, go to the DLC circuit fitting (A).
troubleshooting (see page 11-210). ＊０３
5. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in

the fuel tank. A
7. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select

Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle
until it stalls.
NOTE:
• Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm
or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel
pump.
• A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during
this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them
as needed (see page 11-4).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-339
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４０００００ＭＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:12 61TL2000_110_0340
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Relieving (cont’d)

13. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the Without the HDS
connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release 1. Remove the driver’s dashboard lower cover
them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector (see page 11-118).
off.
2. Remove PGM-Fl main relay 2 (A) from the driver’s
NOTE: under-dash fuse/relay box.
• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other ＊０５
A
parts.
• Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
• Do not remove the retainer from the line; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a
new one.
＊０４
3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.

A E
NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore
them.
B
14. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check 5. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in
it for dirt or damage (see step 5 on page 11-348). the fuel tank.
15. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure 6. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure
(see page 22-78). (see page 22-78).
11-340 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:13 61TL2000_110_0341
7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the
＊０６ connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the
A retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release
them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
off.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
parts.
• Do not use tools.
new one.
＊０８
8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and

clean it if needed. D
9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect

C
fitting (A).
＊０７
A E
B
A
11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check

it for dirt or damage (see step 5 on page 11-348).

(see page 22-78).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-341

08/04/09 12:25:13 61TL2000_110_0342
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Test Fuel Tank Draining

Special Tools Required 1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-352).
• Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000B
• Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150 2. Using a hand pump, a hose, and a container
suitable for fuel, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
3. Reinstall the fuel tank unit (see page 11-353).
2. Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel
pressure gauge.
＊０１
07AAJ-S6MA150
07406-00400B
• If the engine starts, go to step 5.

• If the engine does not start, go to step 4.
4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to

the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed.
The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the
ignition switch is first turned on.
• If the pump runs, go to step 5.

• If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit
5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should

be 330−380 kPa (3.4−3.9 kgf/cm2, 48−55 psi).
• If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.

• If the pressure is out of specification, replace the
fuel pressure regulator (see page 11-354) and the
fuel filter (see page 11-354), then recheck the fuel
pressure.
11-342 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４０００００ＦＥＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２８５０１ＬＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:25:13 61TL2000_110_0343
Fuel Line Inspection

Check the fuel system lines and hoses for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
＊０１
Make sure the connections are

secure and the quick-connect
fitting covers are firmly locked in place.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-343
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２８００１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:14 61TL2000_110_0344
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line Inspection (cont’d)

Check all clamps, and make sure they are properly positioned and tightened.
＊０２
FUEL TANK UNIT LOCKNUT
Replace.
LOCKNUT PLATE
Replace.
B
To FUEL RAIL
C
BASE GASKET
To EVAPORATIVE Replace.
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
A: B: When installing the fuel fill

neck tube, align the mark on
the tube with the projection
on the fuel fill neck fitting.
115 °
LEFT SIDE OF
THE VEHICLE
90 °
Make sure the clamp is

positioned as shown.
There should be Make sure the clamp is

no clearance. positioned as shown.
C:
120 °
120 °

To EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE To PURGE PIPE
11-344 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:15 61TL2000_110_0345
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions

The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A), (B), (C), (D), and ＊０２
(E) connect the fuel rail (F) to the fuel feed hose (G), the
fuel feed hose to the fuel line (H), the fuel line (I) to the
fuel tank unit (J), the fuel vapor line (K) to the EVAP
canister (L), and the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube
(M). When removing or installing the fuel feed hose, the
fuel tank unit, or the fuel tank, it is necessary to
disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings.
Pay attention to the following:
• The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect

fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to
damage them during welding or other heat-
generating procedures. C
• The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect
J
fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a I
shop towel that was used for wiping battery
electrolyte. Replace them if they come in contact with ＊０３
electrolyte or something similar.
K
• When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed
hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings, be careful
not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them
if they are damaged.
＊０１
H
D
B
F ＊０４
A
G
E
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-345
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２８００１ＢＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:15 61TL2000_110_0346
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting

Precautions (cont’d) Removal
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings,
reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot read the Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
be reused once it has been removed from the line. (see page 11-345).
Replace the retainer when:
1. If equipped, remove the quick-connect fitting cover
• replacing the fuel rail. from the fuel line. Raise the cover (A) from the fuel
• replacing the fuel line. line (B), and remove it as shown.
• replacing the fuel pump. ＊０１
• replacing the fuel filter. A
• replacing the EVAP canister.
• replacing the fuel fill pipe.
• replacing the fuel tank.
• it has been removed from the line.
• it is damaged.
Use the same manufacturer retainer and the same size

retainer when the replacing the retainer.
B
Location Manufacturer Retainer Line
color diameter
A Tokai Blue 0.3 in.
green (8 mm)
B Tokai Green 0.2 in.
(6.3 mm) 2. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-339).
C Sanoh White 0.4 in.
(9.5 mm) 3. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings (A) for dirt,
D Sanoh White 0.5 in. and clean them if needed.
(12 mm) ＊０２
E Tokai Natural 0.5 in.
(12 mm)
11-346 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２８００１ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:16 61TL2000_110_0347
＊０３ 4. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect

fitting. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and
squeeze the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to
release them from the locking tabs (C). Pull the
connector off.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other
parts. Do not use tools.
A
new one.
＊０６
＊０４
A
A D
＊０５
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-347

08/04/09 12:25:17 61TL2000_110_0348
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal (cont’d)

5. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or 6. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
damage. cover the disconnected connector and line ends
with plastic bags (A).
• If it is dirty, clean the connector with a pressure
washer, and dry it with the compressed air. NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has
• If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel filter or been removed from the line.
the fuel feed line. Replace the retainer when:
＊０７ • replacing the fuel rail.
• replacing the fuel line.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
A • it has been removed from the line.
• it is damaged.
＊０８
B
11-348 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:18 61TL2000_110_0349
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation

NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings, 3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect
read the ‘‘Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions’’ fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer (B)
(see page 11-345). from the mating line.
＊０３
A
1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage, and clean it if needed.
＊０１
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the

retainer is damaged, or after: ＊０４
• replacing the fuel rail.

• replacing the fuel line.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
• removing the retainer from the line.
• Use the same manufacturer retainer and the B
same size retainer when replacing the retainer
(see page 11-345).
A
＊０２
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-349
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２８００１ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:19 61TL2000_110_0350
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont’d)

＊０５ 4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A),
and align the retainer locking tabs (B) with the
connector grooves (C). Then press the quick-
connect fittings onto the line until both retainer tabs
A lock with a clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of

new engine oil on the line end.
Connection with new retainer

＊０７
B
C
A
＊０６
Connection to new fuel line

＊０８
Sanoh-made
A
A
B
C
B
C
Tokai DTR-made
Reconnection to existing retainer

＊０９
11-350 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:20 61TL2000_110_0351
5. When you reconnect the connector with the old 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and
retainer, make sure the connection is secure and turn the ignition switch to ON (II) (but do not
the tabs (A) are firmly locked into place; check operate the starter motor). The fuel pump will run
visually and also by pulling the connector (B). for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise.
When you replace the fuel line with a new one, Repeat two or three times, and check that there is
make sure you remove the ring pull (C) upwards no leakage in the fuel supply system.
after you confirm the connection is secure.
7. If equipped, install the quick-connect fitting cover.
NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure Set the groove of the cover (A) on the fuel line (B)
the fuel line connection is secure. If the connection as shown, then install it. Make sure the cover is
is not secure, the ring pull could break when you try firmly locked in place.
to remove it. ＊１２
Reconnection to existing retainer A

＊１０
Connection to new fuel line

＊１１
C
Sanoh-made Tokai DTR-made
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-351

08/04/09 12:25:20 61TL2000_110_0352
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tank Unit Removal and Installation

Special Tools Required 6. Using the special tool, loosen the locknut (A).
Fuel sender wrench 07AAA-S0XA100 ＊０２
Removal
3. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor.

＊０１
A A
07AAA-S0XA100
B
7. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit (B).
＊０３
C
B
4. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).
5. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the

fuel tank unit.
11-352 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２８５２１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:21 61TL2000_110_0353
Installation 4. Using the special tool, tighten a new locknut (A)

with a new locknut plate (B) to the specified torque.
1. Temporarily attach a new base gasket (A) to the
fuel tank unit (B), then insert the fuel tank unit NOTE:
partially into the fuel tank. • Before tightening, align the marks (C) on the fuel
tank and the locknut.
NOTE: • After tightening, make sure the marks are still
• Be careful not to damage the new base gasket. aligned.
• Be careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending • After installation, check the base gasket, visually
unit. or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
• Do not coat the base gasket with oil. ＊０６
＊０４ A
B 70 N·m (7.0 kgf·m, 51 lbf·ft)
07AAA-S0XA100
5. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector, then

connect the quick-connect fitting.
2. Transfer the base gasket (A) from the fuel tank unit 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and
to the fuel tank. turn the ignition switch to ON (II) (but do not
＊０５ operate the starter motor). The fuel pump will run
B for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure rises.
Repeat this two or three times, then check that
there is no leakage in the fuel supply system.
7. Install the access panel.
8. Install the rear seat cushion (see page 20-185).
3. Align the marks (B) on the fuel tank and fuel tank
unit, then insert the fuel tank unit into the fuel tank
until it sits on the base gasket.
NOTE: To avoid a fuel leak, check the base gasket,

visually or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-353

08/04/09 12:25:22 61TL2000_110_0354
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Regulator Fuel Filter Replacement

Replacement
The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel
pressure drops below the specified value (see page
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-352). 11-342), after making sure that the fuel pump and the
fuel pressure regulator are OK.
2. Remove the reservoir (A).
＊０１ 1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-352).
2. Remove the fuel filter set (A).

＊０１
D
B
B
B
D
3. Remove the bracket (B).
4. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (C). E
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal D

C
with new O-rings (D) and a new bracket. When
installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the
unit and the fuel tank (see page 11-353). 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank
unit:
NOTE:
• Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil; do not use • When connecting the wire harness (B), make
any other oils or fluids. sure the connection is secure and the connectors
• Use all supplied new parts in the pressure are firmly locked into place.
regulator replacement kit. • When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (C),
• Do not pinch the O-rings during installation. make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
not to bend or twist it excessively.

with new O-rings (D) and a new bracket (E). When
installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the
unit and the fuel tank (see page 11-353).
NOTE:
• Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil; do not use
any other oils or fluids.
• Do not pinch the O-rings during installation.
• Use all supplied new parts in the pressure
regulator replacement kit.
11-354 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２８２０１ＫＢＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２７６０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:22 61TL2000_110_0355
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement

1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-352).
2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending

unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B).
＊０１
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank

unit:
• When connecting the wire harness, make sure

the connection is secure and the connector (C) is
firmly locked into place.
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit,
make sure the connection is secure. Be careful
not to bend or twist it excessively.

When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks
on the unit and the fuel tank (see page 11-353).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-355
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２８３０１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:25:23 61TL2000_110_0356
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tank Replacement

1. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-342). 5. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
2. Reinstall the fuel tank unit without connecting the 6. Disconnect the hose (A) from the EVAP canister.
fuel tank unit 4P connector and the quick-connect ＊０２
fitting (see page 11-352). C
B
3. Remove the fuel fill pipe cover (see page 11-358).
4. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (A) (see page

11-346), and the fuel fill tube (B) from the fuel fill
pipe. Slide back the clamps, then twist the hose as
you pull to avoid damaging them.
＊０１
B
A
7. Remove the hose (B) from the clamp (C).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the hose.
8. Remove the exhaust pipe (see page 9-7).
9. Remove the middle floor undercover (see page

20-216).
11-356 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２８５０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:23 61TL2000_110_0357
10. Remove the fuel tank protector (A).

＊０３
E
E
9.8 N·m
C (1.0 kgf·m,
38 N·m 7.2 lbf·ft)
(3.9 kgf·m, A
28 lbf·ft)
11. Place a jack or other support under the fuel tank (B).
12. Remove the strap bolts (C) and the straps (D).
13. Remove the fuel tank.
NOTE:
• New fuel tanks have a ring pull (E) at the fuel vapor hose connector (F). When you connect the hose and confirm
that the connection is secure, remove the ring pull by pulling it down.
• Before connecting the fuel fill pipe and the quick-connect fitting, check for dirt, and clean them if needed, taking
care not to damage the fuel fill pipe and other parts.
• When installing the fuel tank protector, make sure to insert it the same direction as the clip (G).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-357

08/04/09 12:25:24 61TL2000_110_0358
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation

1. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-342). 7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
2. Remove the fuel fill cap. NOTE: Before connecting the fuel fill pipe and
quick-connect fitting, check for dirt, and clean it if
3. Remove the left rear wheel. needed, taking care not to damage the fuel fill pipe
and other parts.
4. Remove the fuel fill pipe cover (A).
＊０１
5. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A) (see page

11-346), and the fuel fill tubes (B) from the fuel fill
pipe. Slide back the clamp, then twist the hose as
you pull to avoid damaging them.
＊０２
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, B
7.2 lbf·ft)
6. Remove the fuel fill pipe (C).
11-358 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２７９４０ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:24 61TL2000_110_0359
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test

NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer 7. Measure the voltage between fuel tank unit 4P
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-295). connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the
ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery
1. Check the No. 5 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the driver’s voltage.
under-dash fuse/relay box before testing.
• If the voltage is OK, go to step 8.
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs. • If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
– a short in the PUR wire to ground.
• If no problem is found, go to step 3. – an open in the PUR or ORN wire.
• If DTC B1175 or B1176 is indicated, go to the ＊０２
indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
4. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-185). PUR
5. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor.

＊０１
ORN

B
9. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank

(see page 11-352).
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-359
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４２７７０２ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:24 61TL2000_110_0360
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test Low Fuel Indicator Test

(cont’d)
1. Do the gauge self-diagnostic test (see page 22-292).
10. Measure the resistance between fuel tank unit 4P • If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2.
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the float • If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace
at E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 the gauge control module (see page 22-313).
(HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
If you do not get the following readings, replace the 2. Check for body electrical system DTCs.
fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-355).
• If any DTCs are indicated, do the indicated DTC’s
Float F 1/2 LOW E troubleshooting.
Position 5.9 in. 3.7 in. 1.6 in. 0.7 in. • If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3.
(146.5 mm) (93.5 mm) (38.8 mm) (16.6 mm)
Resistance 19 to 202.4 to 503.5 to 772 to 3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page
( ) 21 212.4 614.3 788 11-359).
＊０３
Terminal side of
male terminals
1/2
LOW
E
11. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
12. Remove the No. 15 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the

under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds,
then reinstall it.
14. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates

‘‘F’’ with the float at F.
• If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate

‘‘F’’, replace the gauge assembly.
• If the gauge is OK, the test is complete.
NOTE:
• The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the
bottom of the gauge dial when the ignition switch
in LOCK (0) and ACC (I), regardless of the fuel
level.
• Remove the No. 15 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the
under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds
after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it
may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to
indicate the correct fuel level.
11-360 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２６４３７６０１ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:16 61TL2000_110_0361
Intake Air System
＊０１
AIR CLEANER
page 11-364
Element Inspection/
Replacement,
page 11-364
INTAKE AIR RESONATOR

THROTTLE BODY
Test, page 11-362
Cleaning, page 11-363
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 11-369
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-361
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６３０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:17 61TL2000_110_0362
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Test

Carbon Accumulation Check Throttle Position Learning Check
NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been
reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard. (A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
＊０１＊０２
A A
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/ 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/
PCM. If it doesn’t, go to the DLC circuit PCM. If it doesn’t, go to the DLC circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-210). troubleshooting (see page 11-210).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it 5. Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST. If
idle. needed, clean the throttle body (see page 11-363).
5. Check the REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with

the HDS. The reading should be below 3 deg. If it is
not, clean the throttle body (see page 11-363).
11-362 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６３５９４０１ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:17 61TL2000_110_0363
Throttle Body Cleaning

Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle ＊０２
is activated.
1. Make sure the ignition switch turned LOCK (0).
2. Check for damage to the air cleaner. If the air

cleaner is damaged, replace it (see page 11-364).
3. Remove the throttle body (see page 11-367).
4. Clean off the carbon from the throttle valve and

inside the throttle body with a paper towel soaked A
in throttle plate and induction cleaner.
NOTE:
• Remove the throttle body to clean it. 8. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
• Be careful not to pinch your fingers.
• To avoid removing the molybdenum coating, do 9. Select the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU
not clean the bearing area of the throttle shaft (A). with the HDS.
• Do not spray carburetor cleaner directly on the
throttle body. 10. Select TP POSITION CHECK and clear the throttle
• Use Honda genuine carburetor cleaner. position (TP) learned value.
＊０１
A 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait

A
2 seconds without pressing the accelerator pedal.

11-324).
5. Install the throttle body (see page 11-367).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-363
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６３５９４０１ＬＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:18 61TL2000_110_0364
Intake Air System
Air Cleaner Removal/Installation Air Cleaner Element Inspection/

Replacement
1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector
(A).
＊０１ 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A).
＊０１
C
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) B
F E
H A
C
2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) from the air

cleaner housing (C).
3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or

clogging. If it is damaged or clogged, replace it.
D NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air

B A cleaner element.
2. Remove the harness clamp (B) and bolts (C). 4. Clean and remove any debris from inside the air
cleaner.
3. Loosen the band (D), then remove the air cleaner
housing (E). 5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. • If you did not replace the air cleaner element, this
procedure is complete.
NOTE: When torquing the screw of the hose band • If the maintenance minder required air cleaner
(F), align the edge of the hose band (G) with the replacement, reset the maintenance minder
mark (H) painted on the hose band. (see page 3-7).
• If you replace the air cleaner element, reset the
ECM/PCM with the HDS, and do the ECM/PCM
idle learn procedure (see page 11-324).
11-364 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６３１２６０１ＫＤＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６３１２６０２ＭＤＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:26:19 61TL2000_110_0365
Intake Air Resonator Removal/Installation

1. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-79). 7. Remove the intake air resonator (A).
2. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-364). NOTE: When installing the resonator, use a new
seal ring (B).
3. Remove the air intake cover (A), the intake air ducts ＊０３
9.8 N·m
(B). (1.0 kgf·m,
B 7.2 lbf·ft)
＊０１

remove the ECM/PCM (D).
NOTE:
identification.
4. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-186). PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM
subbracket (E).
5. Remove the left front wheel. ＊０４
D C
6. Remove the clips (A), then remove the inner fender
(B).
＊０２
B
A B
9.8 N·m
E (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-365
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６３５０９０１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:20 61TL2000_110_0366
Intake Air System
Intake Air Resonator Removal/Installation (cont’d)

9. Remove the battery base (A). 10. Remove the intake air duct (A).
＊０５＊０６
9.8 N·m 22 N·m A 22 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, (2.2 kgf·m, (2.2 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) 16 lbf·ft) 16 lbf·ft)

22-79).
11-366 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:26:20 61TL2000_110_0367
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or while the
ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is activated.
NOTE: If you are replacing or cleaning the throttle body, start at step 1. If you are removing the throttle body, start at
step 4.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC while the engine is stopped.
2. Select the INSPECTION MENU on the HDS.
3. Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST.
5. Remove the intake air duct (A).

＊０１ B
C 22 N·m
G
H
6. Disconnect the throttle body connector (B).
7. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (C).
8. Remove the throttle body (D).
9. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (E) then refill the radiator with the engine
coolant (see page 10-6).
NOTE:
• If you replace or clean the throttle body, go to step 10.
• If you did not replace or clean the throttle body, this procedure is complete.
• When torquing the screw of the hose band (F), align the edge of the hose band (G) with the mark (H) painted on
the hose band.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-367
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６３５９４０１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:21 61TL2000_110_0368
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Removal/Installation (cont’d)

＊０２
13. Select the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU

with the HDS.
14. Select TP POSITION CHECK and clear the throttle

position (TP) learned value.

2 seconds without pressing the accelerator pedal.

11-324).
11-368 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:26:21 61TL2000_110_0369
Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly
＊０１
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
THROTTLE BODY
O-RING
Replace.
2.55 N·m
(0.26 kgf·m,
1.88 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-369
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３３６３５９４０１ＭＦＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:23 61TL2000_110_0370
Catalytic Converter System
＊０１
UNDER-FLOOR THREE WAY

CATALYTIC CONVERTER
page 11-375
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
WARM UP THREEE WAY Substituting, page 11-7
CATALYTIC CONVERTER Update, page 11-233
Removal/Installation, Replacement, page 11-234
page 11-373
11-370 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３１６１０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:23 61TL2000_110_0371
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0420: Catalyst System Efficiency Below 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 in the
Threshold DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Does the screen indicate F AILED?

any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES−Go to step 6.
• If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
same time as DTC P0420, troubleshoot them first, failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
then recheck for DTC P0420. indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
P0137, P0138: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
P0141: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) heater CONDITION or NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4 and
• P0300: Random misfire recheck.
P0301−P0304: No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, or No. 4 cylinder
misfire detected 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
• Poor quality fuel may cause this DTC.
7. Replace the WU-TWC (see page 11-373).
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in 10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it 11-324).
idle.
4. Test-drive under these conditions: 3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) idle.
above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D, M/T in 4th or 5th 12. Test-drive for about 10 minutes, varying the vehicle
• Vehicle speed between 45 −75 mph (72 − speed.
120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more with cruise
control set 13. Check the CATA MONITOR CONDITION in the
• Vehicle speed between 55 −75 mph (88 − DATA LIST with the HDS.
120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with
throttle fully closed). Repeat this 3 times or more Is the condition OK ?
• Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
for 5 minutes or more with cruise control set YES−Go to step 14.
NO−Go to step 11 and recheck.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-371
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４２０ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:26:23 61TL2000_110_0372


above 158 °F (70 °C)
• Vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) for 5 minutes
or more with cruise control set
YES−Check the fuel quality, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 16.


NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check the fuel

quality, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION or NOT
11-372 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:26:24 61TL2000_110_0373
Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation

Special Tools Required 8. Remove the upper converter cover (A).
O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, or SWR2, or ＊０２
31 N·m
equivalent, commercially available (3.2 kgf·m,
23 lbf·ft)
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
A
22 N·m
2. Disconnect the secondary HO2S connector (A). (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
＊０１
A
C
B
B
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
C 44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
9. Remove the WU-TWC (B) and the gaskets (C).
3. Remove the bolts (B).
10. Remove the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) (A).
4. Remove the WU-TWC bracket (C). ＊０３
5. Lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the strut brace.
7. Remove the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page

11-227).
A
44 N·m
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-373
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３１６１１６２０１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:24 61TL2000_110_0374
Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation (cont’d)

11. Remove the converter cover (A).
＊０４
A 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)

with new gaskets.
11-374 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:26:25 61TL2000_110_0375
Under-floor TWC Removal/Installation

1. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
2. Remove the exhaust pipe hangers (A).

＊０５
C
D
33 N·m
(3.4 kgf·m,
25 lbf·ft)
D
33 N·m
(3.4 kgf·m,
25 lbf·ft)
A
C
3. Remove the under-floor TWC (B).

with new gaskets (C) and new self-locking nuts (D).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-375
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３１６１１６２０１ＫＤＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:26:26 61TL2000_110_0376
PCV System
＊０１
PCV VALVE
Inspection,
page 11-379
Replacement,
page 11-379
11-376 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３６０３０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:26 61TL2000_110_0377
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P2279: Intake Air System Leak Detected 6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Does the screen indicate F AILED?
YES−Go to step 7.
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a
Are DT C P227 9 and DT C P0101 or P1129 result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
indicated at the same time? CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck.
YES−Troubleshoot DTC P0101 or P1129. 7. Do the PCS ON/OFF in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
NO−Go to step 3.
8. Listen for a clicking sound at the EVAP canister
3. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts: purge valve.
• PCV valve Does the valve click?

• PCV hose
• Purge (PCS) line YES−Go to step 9.
• Throttle body
• Intake manifold NO−Replace the EVAP canister purge valve
• Brake booster hose (see page 11-413), then go to step 14.
• Brake booster
9. Do the PCV valve test (see page 11-379).
Are there any leaks?
Is the test OK ?
YES−Repair or replace the damaged part(s), then
go to step 14. YES−Go to step 10.
NO−Go to step 4. NO−Replace the PCV valve (see page 11-379), then
go to step 14.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 1 minute.

YES−Go to step 7.
NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 6.

If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
4 and recheck.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-377
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９２２７９ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:26 61TL2000_110_0378
PCV System

10. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-364). 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2279 in the
11. Check for cracks or other damage at the air cleaner.
Is the air cleaner OK ?
YES−Troubleshooting is complete.
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1
NO−Replace the air cleaner (see page 11-364), and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
then go to step 4. COMPLETED, go to step 16 and recheck.
12. Remove the air cleaner element.
13. Check for damage to the air cleaner element.
Is the air cleaner element OK ?
YES−Check the camshaft timing (see step 2 on

page 6-9), then go to step 14.
NO−Replace the air cleaner element (see page

14. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-324).

idle 1 minute.
Are any T emporary DT Cs or DT Cs indicated?
YES−If DTC P2279 is indicated, check for vacuum

leaks at the PCV valve, the PCV hose, the purge
(PCS) line, the throttle body, or the brake booster
hose, the intake manifold, then go to step 1. If any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to
the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
NO−Go to step 18.
11-378 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:26:27 61TL2000_110_0379
PCV Valve Inspection PCV Valve Replacement

1. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B), and 1. Disconnect the PCV hose.
connections for leaks or restrictions.
＊０１ 2. Remove the PCV valve (A).
B ＊０１
A B
45 N·m
2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the

PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve
and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your
fingers or pliers.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
washer for cracks or damage. If the washer is OK, with a new washer (B).
replace the PCV valve and recheck.
＊０２
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-379
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３６０３４５８０１ＭＡＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３６０３４５８０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:30 61TL2000_110_0380
EVAP System

＊０１
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE
VALVE
Replacement,
page 11-413
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-233
＊０２
EVAPORATIVE
FUEL TANK VAPOR EMISSION (EVAP)
CONTROL VALVE CANISTER
Replacement,
page 11-410
FUEL FILL CAP

Fuel Cap Warning Message
System Troubleshooting,
page 11-408
FUEL TANK PRESSURE

(FTP) SENSOR
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
11-380 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２３４０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:30 61TL2000_110_0381
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0443: EVAP Canister Purge Valve 7. Start the engine, and let it idle.
Circuit Malfunction
Is there vacuum?
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A YES−Go to step 8.
or equivalent, commercially available
NO−Go to step 14.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). connector.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at ＊０２
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
idle.

PCS (YEL/BLU)
YES−Go to step 5.

at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
ECM/PCM.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and allow the
engine to cool below 140 °F (60 °C). YES−Go to step 11.
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the purge NO−Go to step 23.
valve (B) in the engine compartment, and connect a
vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg, to the hose.
＊０１
A
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-381
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４４３ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:26:31 61TL2000_110_0382
EVAP System

11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Measure the voltage between EVAP canister purge
12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (49P). ＊０４
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
13. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge
＊０３
IG1 (BLK/YEL)
PCS (YEL/BLU)

Is there continuity? NO−Repair open in the wire between the EVAP

canister purge valve and the No. 7 ACG (15 A) fuse
YES−Repair short in the wire between the EVAP in the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box, then go
canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM (B3), then to step 24.
go to step 24.
NO−Go to step 30.
15. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
11-382 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:26:31 61TL2000_110_0383
21. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 22. At the valve side, measure the resistance between
terminal B3 and EVAP canister purge valve 2P EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminals
connector terminal No. 2. No. 1 and No. 2.
＊０５＊０６
PCS (YEL/BLU)

PCS (YEL/BLU)
Terminal side of female terminals Is there about 23−26 at room temperature?
Is there continuity? YES−Go to step 30.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the EVAP 23. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM (B3), then 11-413).
go to step 24.

11-324).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-383

08/04/09 12:26:31 61TL2000_110_0384
EVAP System

terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated,
ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
NO−Go to step 29. (see page 11-234). If any other Temporary DTCs or
29. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0443 in the DTC’s troubleshooting.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
purge valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 28, (see page 11-7), then go to step 32. If the ECM/PCM
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, OUT OF CONDITION, or NOT
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
purge valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, OUT OF
CONDITION, or NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until
a result comes on.


terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
to step 32. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO−Go to step 34.
11-384 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:26:31 61TL2000_110_0385
DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Circuit Range/ 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Performance Problem
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and YES−Check for poor connections or loose
any on-board snapshot, and review the general terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). go to step 1.
troubleshoot DTC P2422 first, then recheck for DTC NO−Go to step 12.
P0451.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTCs MENU with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0451 in the go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
Does the screen indicate F AILED? connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
YES−Go to step 5. indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP
on.
6. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-412).

11-324).
10. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-385
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４５１ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:26:32 61TL2000_110_0386
EVAP System

DTC P0452: FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 13. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about −7 .3 kPa ( −2.16 in.Hg, −55 mmHg), or
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 0.3 V or less indicated?
4. Remove the fuel fill cap. YES−Go to step 20.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO−Go to step 14.
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 14. Measure the voltage between FTP sensor 3P
HDS. connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
＊０１
Is about −7 .3 kPa ( −2.16 in.Hg, −55 mmHg), or FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
0.3 V or less indicated?
NO−Go to step 7.
VCC6 (YEL)
7. Install the fuel fill cap.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0452 in the Wire side of female terminals
Does the screen indicate F AILED? Is there about 5 V ?
NO−If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent NO−Go to step 15.

on.
11-386 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４５２ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:26:32 61TL2000_110_0387
18. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to 23. Check for continuity between FTP sensor 3P
body ground with a jumper wire. connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
＊０２＊０４
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VCC6 (YEL) FTP (LT GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
19. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector Is there continuity?

＊０３ YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) PCM (A27) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
VCC6 (YEL) NO−Go to step 32.

PCM (A20) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-387

08/04/09 12:26:32 61TL2000_110_0388
EVAP System

25. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-412). Is DT C P0452 indicated?
26. Reconnect all connectors. YES−Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-
28. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
11-324).
terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
go to step 1. substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
Does the screen indicate PASSED? and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other then go to step 34. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.

result comes on.

11-388 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:26:33 61TL2000_110_0389
DTC P0453: FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 12. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

FTP (LT GRN) SG6 (BLK)
4. Remove the fuel fill cap. JUMPER WIRE
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Wire side of female terminals
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

Is about 7 .3 kPa ( 2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V 14. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
or more indicated? HDS.
YES−Go to step 10. Is about 7 .3 kPa ( 2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V

or more indicated?
NO−Go to step 7.
NO−Go to step 26.
15. Measure the voltage between FTP sensor 3P
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
DTCs MENU with the HDS. ＊０２
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

on.
11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector. Is there about 5 V ?
NO−Go to step 16.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-389
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４５３ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:26:34 61TL2000_110_0390
EVAP System

19. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 to 24. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 to
body ground with a jumper wire. body ground with a jumper wire.
＊０３＊０５
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
SG6 (BLK) FTP (LT GRN)
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
＊０４＊０６
SG6 (BLK)
FTP (LT GRN)

PCM (A10) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28. PCM (A27) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28.
11-390 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:27:21 61TL2000_110_0391
27. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-412). Is DT C P0453 indicated?
28. Reconnect all connectors. YES−Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
29. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-
30. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
11-324).
terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
go to step 1. substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Does the screen indicate PASSED? and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other then go to step 36. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 32, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.

result comes on.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-391

08/04/09 12:27:21 61TL2000_110_0392
EVAP System

DTC P0455: EVAP System Large Leak 2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
Detected mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
DTC P0456: EVAP System Very Small Leak ＊０１
Detected
B
The fuel system is designed to allow specified

maximum vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum would damage the EVAP components or
cause eventual fuel tank failure. C

Vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A A
NOTE: Is the f uel f ill cap seal missing or damaged, is the

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and f uel f ill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
any on-board snapshot, and review the general under the cap?
• Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create YES−Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe,
greater pressure/vacuum. The optimum condition for then go to step 22.
testing is less than a full tank of fresh fuel. If possible,
to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon of fresh fuel to NO−Go to step 3.
the tank (as long as it will not fill the tank), just before
starting these procedures. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say TIGHTEN 4. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
TO CLICK). It should turn 1/4 turn after it’s tight,
then it clicks. 5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
Is the correct f uel f ill cap installed and properly
tightened? Is the result OK ?
YES−Go to step 2. YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

NO−Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 22. at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/
PCM.
NO−Go to step 6.
11-392 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４５５ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:27:22 61TL2000_110_0393
7. Check for a poor connection or damage at the fuel 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
tank vapor recirculation tube.
11. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
Is the tube OK ? with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 8. 12. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads
1.90 V (−0.59 in.Hg, −15.1 mmHg).
NO−
• Replace the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube, NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you
then go to step 22. exceed the vacuum, the FTP sensor can be
• If necessary, replace the fuel tank (see page damaged.
13. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for
8. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube 1 minute with the HDS.
(A) from the EVAP canister (B), and plug the EVAP
canister port (C). Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V
＊０２ ( 0.1 in.Hg, 0.5 mmHg)?
A
NO−Go to step 19.
14. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU

with the HDS.
C
9. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) from

the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine
compartment, and connect a vacuum pump/gauge,
0−30 in.Hg, to the vacuum hose as shown.
＊０３
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-393

08/04/09 12:27:22 61TL2000_110_0394
EVAP System

15. Disconnect the fresh air hose (A) from the EVAP 19. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU
canister (B), and plug the EVAP canister port (C). with the HDS.
＊０４
A
20. Check these parts for looseness or damage:
C
• Fuel fill pipe

• Fuel vapor return pipe
Are the parts OK ?
YES−Check the fuel tank unit base gasket

(see page 11-352), and check the fuel tank, then go
to step 21.
NO−Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go

B to step 21.
21. Reconnect all hoses and connectors.

16. Apply vacuum to the EVAP system until the FTP
reads 1.90 V (−0.59 in.Hg, −15.1 mmHg). 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you 23. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
exceed the vacuum, the FTP sensor can be
damaged. 24. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-324).
17. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for
1 minute with the HDS. 25. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V
( 0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 mmHg)? Is the result OK ?
YES−Go to step 18. YES−Troubleshooting is complete.
NO−Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve, NO−Check for poor connections or loose terminals
then go to step 21. at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve,
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the ECM/
18. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge PCM, then go to step 1.
line between the EVAP canister and the EVAP
canister purge valve, or a leaking EVAP canister
purge valve.
Are the line and the EV AP canister purge valve

OK ?
YES−Replace these parts, then go to step 21:
• FTP sensor O-ring

• EVAP canister vent shut valve case and O-ring
• EVAP canister
NO−Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge

hose, then go to step 21.
11-394 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:27:23 61TL2000_110_0395
DTC P0457: EVAP System Leak Detected/Fuel 5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
Fill Cap Loose or Missing MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is the result OK ?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say TIGHTEN at the FTP sensor or the EVAP canister vent shut
TO CLICK). It should turn 1/4 turn after it’s tight, valve and the ECM/PCM.
then it clicks.
NO−Go to step 6.
tightened? 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES−Go to step 2. 7. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
EVAP canister (see page 11-413).
NO−Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 19.
8. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe shut valve.
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap. 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
＊０１
B with the HDS.
11. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)

operation.
＊０２
A
Is the f uel f ill cap seal missing or damaged, is the

f uel f ill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
under the cap?
YES−Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe,

then go to step 19.
Does the valve operate?
NO−Go to step 3.
YES−Check the routing of the EVAP canister vent
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). tube, then go to step 18.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO−Go to step 12.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-395
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４５７ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:27:23 61TL2000_110_0396
EVAP System

13. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve

(see page 11-413).

11-324).
17. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION

MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK ?

at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut
valve, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
18. Reinstall the EVAP canister vent shut valve.

11-324).

MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK ?

at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut
valve, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
11-396 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:27:23 61TL2000_110_0397
DTC P0496: EVAP System High Purge Flow

Detected

MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK ?

at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve,
PCM.
NO−Go to step 4.
5. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page

11-413).

11-324).

MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK ?

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-397
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４９６ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:27:23 61TL2000_110_0398
EVAP System

DTC P0497: EVAP System Low Purge Flow 6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
Detected canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment,
and connect a T-fitting (C) from the vacuum gauge
Special Tools Required and the vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg, to the
• Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0 −4 in.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B vacuum hose as shown.
• Vacuum pump/gauge, 0 −30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A ＊０１
or equivalent, commercially available A


B

MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK ?
C
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the PCM.
07JAZ-001000B
NO−Go to step 4.
5. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge 8. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
line between the intake manifold and the EVAP with the HDS.
canister purge valve.
9. Slowly apply about 0.6 in.Hg (15 mmHg) of vacuum
Is the line OK ? to the hose.
YES−Go to step 6. Does it hold vacuum?
NO−Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge YES−Replace the EVAP canister purge valve, then
line, then go to step 24. go to step 23.
NO−Go to step 10.
11-398 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４９７ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:27:24 61TL2000_110_0399
10. Reconnect the vacuum hose to the EVAP canister 14. Remove the FTP sensor with its connector
purge valve. connected (see page 11-412).
11. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the purge line (at 15. Connect a T-fitting (A) from the vacuum pump/
the EVAP canister side), and connect a T-fitting (A) gauge, 0−30 in.Hg, and the vacuum pump to the
from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/ FTP sensor (B) as shown.
gauge, 0−30 in.Hg, to the hose as shown. ＊０３
＊０２ 07JAZ-001000B
16. Check and record the FTP SENSOR reading in the

07JAZ-001000B DATA LIST with the HDS.
17. Slowly apply about 1.3 kPa (0.4 in.Hg, 10 mmHg) of

12. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU vacuum to the hose.
with the HDS.
13. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of

vacuum to the hose.
Does it hold vacuum?
YES−Check for a restrictied EVAP canister purge

line between the EVAP canister purge valve and the
EVAP canister, then go to step 23.
NO−Go to step 14.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-399

08/04/09 12:27:24 61TL2000_110_0400
EVAP System

18. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 22. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of
HDS. vacuum to the hose.
Is the dif f erence more than 1.1 kPa ( 0.31 in.Hg, Does the hose hold vacuum?
8 mmHg) bef ore and af ter applying vacuum?
YES−Check for blockage at the EVAP canister port,
NO−Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-412), NO−Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
then go to step 23. (see page 11-413), then go to step 23.
19. Reconnect the vacuum hoses to the EVAP canister 23. Reconnect all hoses.
purge line (EVAP canister side), and reinstall the
FTP sensor. 24. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
20. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) from 25. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
the EVAP canister purge valve (B), and connect a
T-fitting (C) from the vacuum gauge and the 26. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-324).
vacuum pump/gauge, 0−30 in.Hg, to the hose as
shown. 27. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
＊０４ MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK ?
B

the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
07JAZ-001000B

with the HDS.
11-400 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:27:25 61TL2000_110_0401
DTC P0498: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 9. Measure the voltage between EVAP canister vent
Circuit Low Voltage shut valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE 2P CONNECTOR

＋B (WHT)
NO−Go to step 4.
with the HDS. YES−Go to step 10.
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO−Repair open in the wire between the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and the PGM-FI subrelay,
Is DT C P0498 indicated? then go to step 18.
YES−Go to step 6. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. At the valve side, measure the resistance between
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector
at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
ECM/PCM. ＊０２
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
7. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P

connector.
Is there about 25 −30 at room temperature?
NO−Go to step 17.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-401
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４９８ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:27:26 61TL2000_110_0402
EVAP System

12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
13. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P). ＊０５
terminal A11 and body ground. VSV (RED)
＊０３
VSV (RED)
Is there continuity? NO−Repair open in the wire between the EVAP

canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM (A11),
YES−Repair short in the wire between the EVAP then go to step 18.
canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM (A11),
then go to step 18. 17. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-413).
NO−Go to step 15.
15. Connect EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
＊０４
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
VSV (RED)
JUMPER WIRE
11-402 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:27:26 61TL2000_110_0403
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 25. Reconnect all connectors.
20. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 26. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
21. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
11-324).
22. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
with the HDS.
YES−Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
NO−Go to step 24. go to step 1.
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0498 in the NO−Go to step 29.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Does the screen indicate PASSED?

go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated,
NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister (see page 11-234). If any other Temporary DTCs or
vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step DTCs were indicated in step 28, go to the indicated
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to DTC’s troubleshooting.
step 22.
vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-403

08/04/09 12:27:26 61TL2000_110_0404
EVAP System

DTC P0499: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0499 in the
Circuit High Voltage DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the screen indicate PASSED?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES−If the ECM/PCM was updated,
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. DTCs were indicated in step 7, go to the indicated
with the HDS. NO−If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
Is DT C P0499 indicated? (see page 11-7), then go to step 6. If the ECM/PCM
YES−Go to step 5. NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6.

at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the
ECM/PCM.


with the HDS.

terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 8.
11-404 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９０４９９ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:27:26 61TL2000_110_0405
DTC P1454: FTP Sensor Range/Performance 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Problem
DTC P2422: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Stuck Closed Malfunction 13. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
EVAP canister (see page 11-413).
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 14. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). shut valve.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 16. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
17. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)
4. Remove the fuel fill cap, and wait 1 minute. operation.
＊０１
A

HDS.
Is it between −0.67 and 0.67 kPa ( −0.2 and

0.2 in.Hg, −5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V ?
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Go to step 18.
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Does the valve operate?
9. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at YES−Check for a blockage in the EVAP canister,
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in vent hoses, and drain joint, then install the EVAP
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it canister vent shut valve, and go to step 24.
idle.
NO−Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
10. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1454 in the (see page 11-413), then go to step 24.

sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the
ECM/PCM. Also check for a blockage in the vent
hoses and the drain joint. If the screen indicates
on.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-405
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１４５４ＦＡＡＴ３０
08/04/09 12:27:27 61TL2000_110_0406
EVAP System

18. Disconnect the air tube (A) from the FTP sensor (B). 21. Remove the FTP sensor (A) from the EVAP canister
＊０２ with its connector connected (see page 11-412).
B
＊０３
A
Is it between −0.67 and 0.67 kPa ( −0.2 and 23. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
0.2 in.Hg, −5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V ? HDS.
YES−Check for a blockage in the FTP sensor air Is it between −0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa ( −0.2 and
tube or vent, then go to step 24. 0.2 in.Hg, −5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V ?
NO−Go to step 20. YES−Check for debris or clogging at the EVAP

canister and the FTP sensor port, then go to
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). step 24.
NO−Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-412),

then go to step 24.
11-406 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:27:27 61TL2000_110_0407
24. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC P145C: EVAP System Purge Flow
Malfunction
NOTE:
26. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
11-324). any on-board snapshot, and review the general
27. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at • If DTC P145C is indicated alone, do the
3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in troubleshooting for DTC P0496 and P0497 using
neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it freeze data for P145C.
idle. • If DTC P0497 and P145C are stored at the same time,
check for a poor connection, a blockage, or damage
28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. at the EVAP canister purge line between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the EVAP canister, or a stuck
Is DT C P1454 and/ or P2422 indicated? closed EVAP canister purge valve.
• If any of DTCs listed below are indicated at the same
YES−Check for poor connections or loose time as DTC P145C, troubleshoot those DTCs first,
terminals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent then recheck for P145C.
shut valve, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
P0496, P0497: EVAP system purge flow
NO−Go to step 29.



connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor,
PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-407
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｋ７２１０００９１４５ＣＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:27 61TL2000_110_0408
EVAP System
Fuel Cap Warning Message System Troubleshooting

Special Tools Required 3. Reinstall and tighten the fuel fill cap.
• Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0 −4 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B
• Vacuum pump/gauge, 0 −30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A 4. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Do this procedure if the fuel cap warning message 3,000 rpm without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in
comes on frequently, or if the message does not go off neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it
after the fuel fill cap is tightened and the vehicle is idle for 1 minute.
driven several days.
6. Test drive at 45 mph (72 km/h) for 1 minute or more.
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say TIGHTEN
TO CLICK). It should turn 1/4 after it’s tight, then it Does f uel cap warning message come on?
clicks.
YES−Go to step 7.
tightened? NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 13.
8. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment,
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether and connect a T-fitting (C) from the vacuum gauge
cord (C) is not caught under the cap. and the vacuum pump/gauge 0−30 in.Hg, to the
＊０１ EVAP canister purge valve as shown.
＊０２
B
A
Is the f uel f ill cap seal missing or damaged, is the

f uel f ill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught C
under the cap?
YES−Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe,

then go to step 13. 07JAZ-001000B
NO−Go to step 3.
11-408 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２３４０００００ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:28 61TL2000_110_0409
10. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of vacuum

to the hose.
11. Select the EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU

with the HDS.
Does the vacuum release immediately?
YES−Check for blockage at the EVAP canister

purge line between the EVAP canister purge valve
and the EVAP canister, then go to step 12.
NO−Replace the EVAP canister purge valve

12. Reconnect all hoses.

11-324).

idle for 1 minute.
17. Test-drive at 45 mph (72 km/h) for 1 minute or more.
Does the f uel cap message come on?
YES−Go to step 1 and recheck.
NO−Troubleshooting is complete.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-409

08/04/09 12:27:28 61TL2000_110_0410
EVAP System
EVAP Canister Replacement

1. Lift the vehicle on the hoist. 6. Remove the bolt (A), and disconnect the hoses (B),
the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector (C),
2. Remove the wheel sensor harness clamps (A) and the FTP sensor 3P connector (D).
＊０１＊０２
B D B
103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A E
A A 9.8 N·m 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) 7.2 lbf·ft)
B
103 N·m C
(10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft) 27 N·m
Replace. (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
3. Support the rear subframe with a transmission jack

and a wooden block as shown.
4. Remove the rear subframe mounting bolts (B) and 7. Remove the bolts (E), then remove the EVAP
(C). canister assembly (F).
5. Lower the transmission jack and rear subframe

about 50 mm.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the connecting

parts.
11-410 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２３４２５２１１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:29 61TL2000_110_0411
8. Remove the EVAP canister (A) from the EVAP 11. Install the EVAP canister assembly to the body.
canister bracket (B).
＊０３ NOTE: Attach the bracket arm (A) to the body as
shown.
＊０５
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
A
A
9. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A) and

FTP sensor (B) from the canister (C).
＊０４ 12. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
B C Use new bolts when you install the rear subframe.
D 13. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).

E
10. Reassemble the EVAP canister with new O-rings (D)

and a new retainer (E), then install the EVAP
canister bracket.
NOTE: Do not coat the O-rings with oil.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-411

08/04/09 12:27:29 61TL2000_110_0412
EVAP System
FTP Sensor Replacement

1. Remove the bolt (A), and disconnect the EVAP 3. Remove the FTP sensor (A).
canister vent shut valve 2P connector (B), the FTP ＊０２
sensor 3P connector (C), and the hoses (D). A
＊０１
D C B
C
F B
A
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, E
7.2 lbf·ft) 9.8 N·m 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) with a new O-ring (B) and a new retainer (C).
2. Remove the bolts (E), and move the EVAP canister

assembly (F) to the rear.
11-412 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２３４２８５１１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:27:30 61TL2000_110_0413
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve EVAP Canister Purge Valve

Replacement Replacement
1. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P 1. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector (A). connector (A).
＊０１
2. Remove the cap (B). A
＊０１
A B
B 6 N·m
(0.6 kgf·m,
4 lbf·ft)
C
C
2. Disconnect the hoses (B), then remove the EVAP

canister purge valve (C).
D
3. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (C).

with new O-rings (D) and a new cap.
NOTE: Do not coat the O-rings with oil.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-413
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２３４２５２１２ＫＢＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ａ２０３２３４２５２２１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:22 61TL2000_120_0001
Transaxle
Clutch ................................................................ 12-1

Manual Transmission ....................................... 13-1
Automatic Transmission .................................. 14-1

Driveline/Axle ................................................... 16-1
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１３００ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:22 61TL2000_120_0002
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１３００ＺＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:22 61TL2000_120_0003
Clutch
Clutch
Special Tools ................................................................. 12-2
System Description ...................................................... 12-4
Clutch Hydraulic System Bleeding ............................. 12-6
Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch,
and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment ................ 12-7
Clutch Pedal Assembly Replacement ......................... 12-9
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement ......................... 12-10
Slave Cylinder Replacement ....................................... 12-14
Clutch Hose Replacement ............................................ 12-16
Clutch Replacement ..................................................... 12-18
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７０００００００Ｊ１２０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:23 61TL2000_120_0004
Clutch
Special Tools
07JAF-PM7011A Clutch Alignment Disc 1
07LAB-PV00100 Ring Gear Holder 1
07PAF-0020000 Clutch Alignment Tool Set 1
07PAF-0020370 Clutch Alignment Pilot, 21 mm 1
07ZAF-PR8A100 Clutch Alignment Shaft 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135 L 1
07936-3710100 Remover Handle 1
07936-371020A Slide Hammer 1
07936-3710600 Bearing Remover Shaft 1
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７０００００００Ｊ１２０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:27 61TL2000_120_0005
＊０１
CLUTCH
MASTER
CYLINDER
Clutch Hydraulic
RESERVOIR HOSE System Bleeding, CLUTCH ASSIST SPRING
page 12-6
Replacement, CLUTCH ASSIST BUSHING A
page 12-10
CLUTCH CLUTCH PEDAL ASSEMBLY
RESERVOIR CLUTCH Replacement, page 12-9
ASSIST
BUSHING B CLUTCH INTERLOCK
SWITCH
Test, page 4-8
Adjustment,
page 12-7
CLUTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
Test, page 4-45
Adjustment,
page 12-7
CLEVIS PIN
CLUTCH LINE CLUTCH MASTER
CONNECTOR LOCK PIN
CYLINDER SEAL
Replace.
CLUTCH PEDAL
Adjustment,
page 12-7
O-RING
Replace. CLUTCH LINE
RETAINING CLIP
Replace.
CLUTCH DISC
Inspection and
Removal,
step 8 on page 12-19
Installation,
CRANKSHAFT step 24 on page 12-22
PILOT BUSHING
Inspection, RELEASE BEARING
step 20 on page 12-21 Removal, step 1 on page 12-23
Replacement, Inspection, step 4 on page 12-23
step 22 on page 12-22 Installation, step 5 on page 12-24
CLUTCH LINE
SLAVE CYLINDER
Replacement,
page 12-14
FLYWHEEL
Inspection, RELEASE FORK
step 12 on page 12-20
Replacement,
step 16 on page 12-21 PRESSURE PLATE
Inspection and
Removal, step 1 on page 12-18
Installation, step 24 on page 12-22
CLUTCH HOSE
Replacement, CLUTCH HOSE CLIPS
page 12-16 Replace.
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１１６３０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:27 61TL2000_120_0006
Clutch
System Description
Delay Orifice Mechanism
Function
The delay orifice mechanism improves clutch operation by delaying the slave cylinder release speed when the clutch
pedal is suddenly released. The delay orifice mechanism is built into the slave cylinder.
＊０１
DELAY ORIFICE MECHANISM
PISTON CYLINDER
PISTON
SLAVE CYLINDER

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１１６３０００００ＣＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:27 61TL2000_120_0007
Fluid Flow Operation

When the clutch pedal is pressed, the fluid pressure from the master cylinder moves the one-way valve in the
direction shown in the illustration. The fluid flows through two passages: the orifice part and the filter part. It then
flows out to the piston cylinder to release the pressure plate and clutch disc joint.
＊０２
ORIFICE PART of FLOW ONE-WAY VALVE
FLOW to PISTON CYLINDER
FLUID from
MASTER CYLINDER
FILTER PART of FLOW (Blocked)
When the clutch pedal is released, the fluid pressure from the piston cylinder moves the one-way valve in the direction
shown in the illustration. The one-way valve blocks the filter-part passage and delays the clutch release speed by
returning the fluid to the master cylinder through only the orifice-part passage.
＊０３
ORIFICE PART of FLOW
ONE-WAY VALVE
FLUID from PISTON CYLINDER
FLUID to
MASTER CYLINDER
FILTER PART of FLOW (Blocked)

08/04/09 12:26:28 61TL2000_120_0008
Clutch
Clutch Hydraulic System Bleeding

NOTE: 2. Attach one end of a clear tube to the bleeder screw
• Do not reuse the drained fluid. Always use Acura (A), and put the other end into a container. Loosen
DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. the bleeder screw to allow air to escape from the
Using a non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion system.
and shorten the life of the system. ＊０２
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed
to contaminate the brake fluid.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint or plastic. If brake fluid does contact the
paint or plastic, wash it off immediately with water.
• If may be necessary to limit the movement of the
release fork with a block of wood to remove all the air
from the system.
surfaces.
A
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the clutch
reservoir (A) is at the MAX (upper) level line (B).
＊０１
3. Make sure there is an adequate supply of fluid in
the reservoir, then slowly push the clutch pedal all
the way down. Before releasing the pedal, have an
assistant temporarily tighten the bleeder screw.
B Loosen the bleeder screw, and push the clutch
pedal down again. Repeat this step until no more
bubbles appear at the clear tube.
A NOTE: Make sure the fluid level on the reservoir

does not go below MIN.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw securely.
5. Refill the brake fluid in the reservoir to the MAX

(upper) level line.

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１１６３０００００ＬＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:28 61TL2000_120_0009
Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch
Adjustment
NOTE: 2. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A),
• For a cruise control problem, check the clutch pedal and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B)
position switch (see page 4-45). until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C).
• For an engine cranking problem, check the clutch ＊０１
E
interlock switch (see page 4-8).
• Remove the driver’s floor mat before adjusting the
clutch pedal.
• If there is no clearance between the master cylinder
piston and push rod, the release bearing will be held
against the diaphragm spring, which can result in B
clutch slippage or other clutch problems.
A
C
1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch
connector and the clutch interlock switch connector. G
D
3. Loosen the clutch pushrod locknut (D), and turn the

pushrod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F),
and the stroke (G) at the clutch pedal. If adjusting
the pushrod causes the clutch pedal to contact the
clutch pedal position switch, back off the switch
further.
F Clutch Pedal Height: 170.5 mm (6.71 in.)

G Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130−140 mm
(5.12−5.51 in.)
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１１６３１７０４１ＭＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:28 61TL2000_120_0010
Clutch
Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch
Adjustment (cont’d)
4. Tighten the clutch pushrod locknut (A). 8. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (A).
＊０２＊０３
A
12 x 1.25 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
C
12 x 1.25 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
A
17 N·m
5. With the clutch pedal released, turn in the clutch

pedal position switch (B) until it contacts the clutch
pedal.
9−12 mm
(0.35−0.47 in.)
6. Turn in the clutch pedal position switch an
additional 3/4 to 1 turn. Make sure the clutch pedal
height didn’t change. 9. Fully press the clutch pedal to the floor, then
release the clutch pedal 9−12 mm (0.35−0.47 in.)
7. While holding the clutch pedal position switch, and hold it there.
tighten the locknut (C).
10. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (B)
so the engine starts with the clutch pedal in this
position.
11. While holding the clutch interlock switch, tighten

the locknut.
12. Check the clutch operation.
13. Connect the clutch pedal position switch connector

and the clutch interlock switch connector, then
check the cruise control and engine starting.

08/04/09 12:26:28 61TL2000_120_0011
Clutch Pedal Assembly Replacement

1. Remove the driver’s dashboard undercover 7. Loosely install the clutch pedal position switch (A)
(see page 20-119). and the clutch interlock switch (B).
＊０２
2. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch
connector (A) and the clutch interlock switch (Multipurpose)
connector (B).
＊０１
B I
A F
G
H B
E C
E
(Multipurpose)
D A
3. Pry out the lock pin (C), and pull the clevis pin (D)
out of the clevis.
4. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (E) and

the clutch pedal mounting bolt (F).
5. Remove the clutch pedal assembly (G).
6. Remove the clutch pedal position switch (H) and

the clutch interlock switch (I).
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１１６３１７０４１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:29 61TL2000_120_0012
Clutch
Clutch Pedal Assembly Clutch Master Cylinder

8. Install the clutch pedal assembly (A). NOTE:

＊０３ • Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
B
8 x 1.25 mm surfaces.
22 N·m • Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) the paint or plastic. If brake fluid does contact the
A paint or plastic, wash it off immediately with water.
F
1. Remove the brake fluid from the clutch master
cylinder reservoir with a syringe or other suitable
C device.
8 x 1.25 mm
13 N·m
(1.3 kgf·m, 2. Remove the clutch master cylinder reservoir (A).
9.4 lbf·ft) ＊０１
C
8 x 1.25 mm
13 N·m E
(1.3 kgf·m,
9.4 lbf·ft)
A
9. Install the clutch pedal mounting bolt (B) and the

master cylinder mounting nuts (C).
10. Apply multipurpose grease to the clevis pin (D) and

the mating surfaces (E) of the clevis and the pedal.
Slide the clevis pin into the clevis, then install a lock
pin (F).
11. Adjust the clutch pedal, the clutch pedal position

switch, and the clutch interlock switch (see page
12-7).
NOTE: Connect the switch connectors after

adjusting them.
12. Check the clutch operation.
13. Install the driver’s dashboard undercover (see page

20-119).
12-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１１６３１７０３１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:29 61TL2000_120_0013
3. Disconnect the clutch line (A) from the clutch 5. Remove the clutch master cylinder (A) and the
master cylinder (B). To prevent spills, cover the line master cylinder seal (B).
joint with rags or shop towels. ＊０４
B
NOTE: Loosen the flare nut (C) while holding the

clutch line connector (D) with a wrench.
＊０２
C
6. Remove the reservoir hose (C).
NOTE: Inspect the hose. If the hose has damage,

leaks, interference, or twisting, replace it.
A C D
7. Remove the retaining clip (A), then remove the
4. Pry out the lock pin (A), and pull the clevis pin (B) clutch line connector (B) and the O-ring (C) from the
out of the clevis. Remove the master cylinder master cylinder (D).
mounting nuts (C). ＊０５
＊０３
C
A
B
A
C
B
C
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 12-11

08/04/09 12:26:30 61TL2000_120_0014
Clutch
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement (cont’d)

8. Install the clutch line connector (A) with a new 10. Install the reservoir hose, and adjust the hose
O-ring (B), then set in a new retaining clip (C) to the clamp (A) positions and its direction.
master cylinder (D).
NOTE: When attaching the reservoir hose, align the
NOTE: yellow mark on the hose to the rib on reservoir
• Apply the silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M) on connection area, and the blue mark on the hose to
the O-ring and the joint part (E) of the clutch line the rib on the clutch master cylinder connection
connector. area.
• Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the ＊０８
terminal part of the connectors and switches,
especially if you have silicone grease on your Reservoir side A
hands or gloves.
＊０６ Master cylinder side
B UP
Replace.
C LEFT
Replace. (P/N 08C30-B0234M) SIDE
A 1−3 mm
2.8−3.0 mm (0.04−0.12 in.)
D (0.110−0.118 in.)
11. Install a new master cylinder seal (A) and the clutch
master cylinder (B).
＊０９
A
Replace.
(P/N 08C30-B0234M)
9. To prevent the retaining clip (A) from coming off,

pry apart the tip (B) of the clip with a screwdriver.
＊０７
12-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:26:30 61TL2000_120_0015
12. Install the master cylinder mounting nuts (A). 15. Install the clutch master cylinder reservoir (A).
＊１０＊１２
A
8 x 1.25 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
13 N·m C 9.8 N·m
(1.3 kgf·m, 9.4 lbf·ft) (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
B
A
8 x 1.25 mm
13 N·m
(1.3 kgf·m,
9.4 lbf·ft)
16. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system (see page 12-6).
17. Adjust the clutch pedal, the clutch pedal position

switch, and the clutch interlock switch (see page
13. Apply multipurpose grease to the clevis pin (B) and 12-7).
the mating surfaces (C) of the clevis and the pedal.
Slide the clevis pin into the clevis, then install a lock 18. Check the clutch operation, and check for leaks.
pin (D).
19. Test-drive the vehicle.
14. Connect the clutch line (A) to the clutch master
cylinder (B).
NOTE: Tighten the flare nut (C) while holding the

＊１１
A C D
10 x 1.0 mm
15 N·m
-DYNOMITE 2009- 12-13

08/04/09 12:26:31 61TL2000_120_0016
Clutch
Slave Cylinder Replacement

NOTE: 3. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted (P/N 08798-9002) to the pushrod (A) of the slave
surfaces. cylinder.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage ＊０２
8 x 1.25 mm
the paint or plastic. If brake fluid does contact the 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
paint or plastic, wash it off immediately with water.
• Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the
terminal part of the connectors and switches, D
especially if you have silicone grease on your hands 10 x 1.0 mm
15 N·m
or gloves. (1.5 kgf·m,
11 lbf·ft)
Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the clutch line (A) from the slave C
cylinder (B). To prevent spills, cover the line joint
with rags or shop towels.
E
NOTE: Loosen the flare nut (C) while holding the

＊０１ A
C
B
B
D
＊０３
A
A
(P/N 08C30-B0234M) (P/N 08798-9002)

2. Remove the slave cylinder from the transmission
housing.
4. Connect the clutch line (B) to the slave cylinder (C),
and loosely tighten the flare nut (D).
5. Install the slave cylinder to the transmission

housing, then tighten the clutch line flare nut to the
specified torque.
NOTE: Tighten the flare nut while holding the

clutch line connector (E) with a wrench.
12-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１１６３１７０８１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:31 61TL2000_120_0017
6. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system (see page 12-6). O-ring Replacement
7. Check the clutch operation, and check for leaks. 1. Remove the slave cylinder.
8. Test-drive the vehicle. 2. Remove the roll pins (A), then remove the clutch
line connector (B) and the O-ring (C) from the slave
cylinder (D).
＊０４
D
C
B
3. Install the clutch line connector (A) with a new

O-ring (B), then set in new roll pins (C) to the slave
cylinder (D).
＊０５
D
C
Replace.
B
Replace.
(08C30-B0234M)
4. Install the slave cylinder.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 12-15

08/04/09 12:26:31 61TL2000_120_0018
Clutch
Clutch Hose Replacement

NOTE: 4. Disconnect the clutch hose (A) from the clutch lines
• Replace the clutch hose if it is twisted, cracked, or if it (B).
leaks. ＊０２
surfaces.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint or plastic. If brake fluid does contact the
paint or plastic, wash it off immediately water.
1. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-79).
2. Disconnect the ECM connectors, then remove the

ECM (see page 11-234).
3. Remove the ground cable clamp (A) and the upper

A
battery base mounting bolts (B), loosen the under
B
battery base mounting bolts (C), then remove the
battery base (D).
＊０１ 5. Remove and discard the clutch hose clips (C) from
B the clutch hose (D).
＊０３
D B
D
C
6. Remove the clutch hose from the clutch line

C brackets A and B.
12-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１１６３１７０１０ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:32 61TL2000_120_0019
7. Install the clutch hose (C) into the clutch line 11. Install the battery base (A) and the ground cable
brackets A and B with the new clutch hose clips (D). clamp (B).
＊０４＊０６
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
C
D
Replace.
8. Connect the clutch lines (A) to the clutch hose (B).

＊０５
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft) B
12. Install the ECM, then reconnect the ECM

connectors (see page 11-234).

22-79).

B
A
15 N·m
9. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system (see page 12-6).
10. Do the following checks:
• Check the clutch hose and line joints for leaks,

and tighten if necessary.
• Check the clutch hose for interference and
twisting.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 12-17

08/04/09 12:26:32 61TL2000_120_0020
Clutch
Clutch Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the ring gear holder (A), the clutch alignment
• Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A tool set (B), and the 21 mm clutch alignment pilot
• Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 (C).
• Clutch alignment tool set 07PAF-0020000 ＊０２
E C
• Clutch alignment pilot, 21 mm 07PAF-0020370 07PAF-0020370
• Clutch alignment shaft 07ZAF-PR8A100
D
• Driver handle, 15 x 135 L 07749-0010000
• Remover handle 07936-3710100
• Bearing remover shaft 07936-3710600
• Slide hammer 07936-371020A
Engine Side B
07PAF-0020000
Pressure Plate Inspection and Removal
1. Remove the transmission (see page 13-16). A

07LAB-PV00100
2. Check the evenness of the height of the diaphragm
spring fingers using the clutch alignment disc (A),
clutch alignment shaft (B), remover handle (C), and
a feeler gauge (D). If the height difference is more
than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 4. To prevent warping, loosen the pressure plate
mounting bolts (D) in a crisscross pattern in several
Standard (New): 0.6 mm (0.02 in.) max. steps, then remove the pressure plate (E).
＊０１ 5. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for
A
07JAF-PM7011A wear at the release bearing contact area.
D ＊０３
C
07936-3710100 A
B
07ZAF-PR8A100
12-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１１６３０００００ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:26:39 61TL2000_120_0021
6. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, Clutch Disc Inspection and Removal
cracks, and burning.
＊０４ 8. Remove the clutch disc (A), the clutch alignment
A tool set (B), and the 21 mm clutch alignment pilot
(C).
＊０６
C
07PAF-0020370
B
07PAF-0020000
A
7. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a
feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate
(C). If the most measurement difference is more
than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. 9. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of
slippage or oil. If the clutch disc looks burnt or is oil
Standard (New): 0.08 mm (0.003 in.) max. soaked, replace the clutch disc. If the clutch disc is
Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) oil soaked, find and repair the source of the oil leak.
＊０５
10. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the
A
measurement is less than the service limit, replace
C the clutch disc.

(0.287−0.311 in.)
＊０７
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 12-19

08/04/09 12:26:39 61TL2000_120_0022
Clutch
Clutch Replacement (cont’d)

11. Measure the rivet depths from the clutch disc lining Flywheel Inspection
surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the
measurement is less than the service limit, replace 12. Remove the ring gear holder.
the clutch disc.
13. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage.
(0.045−0.069 in.) 14. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the
Service Limit: 0.7 mm (0.03 in.) flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning.
＊０８
15. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial
indicator (B). Through at least two full turns with
pushing against the flywheel each time you turn it
to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If
the measurement is not within the standard,
replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout; go to
step 16.

＊０９
B
A B
12-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:26:39 61TL2000_120_0023
Flywheel Replacement Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Inspection
16. Install the ring gear holder (A). 20. Inspect the crankshaft pilot bushing for wear and
＊１０ damage.
21. Inspect the inside surface of the crankshaft pilot

bushing with your finger. If the crankshaft pilot
bushing is not smooth, replace it; go to step 22.
＊１２
A
07LAB-PV00100
17. Loosen the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross

pattern in several steps. Remove the bolts, then
remove the flywheel and the ring gear holder.
18. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft, and install

the mounting bolts finger-tight.
19. Install the ring gear holder (A), then torque the
flywheel mounting bolts (B) in a crisscross pattern
in several steps.
＊１１
B
12 x 1.0 mm
123 N·m
(12.5 kgf·m,
90.4 lbf·ft)
A
07LAB-PV00100
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 12-21

08/04/09 12:26:40 61TL2000_120_0024
Clutch

Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Replacement Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation
22. Remove the crankshaft pilot bushing (A) using the 24. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines
slide hammer (B), the remover handle (C), and the of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch
bearing remover shaft (D). disc slides freely on the mainshaft.
＊１３
B 25. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease
07936-371020A
A (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing (A).
＊１５
D
07PAF-0020000
E
07PAF-0020370
C
07936-3710100
D
07936-3710600
B
(P/N 08798-9002)
23. Install a new crankshaft pilot bushing (A) into the A
C
crankshaft using the 15 x 135 L driver handle (B)
(P/N 08798-9002)
and the 22 x 24 mm bearing driver attachment (C).
＊１４
C 26. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-
07746-0010800 9002) to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then
install the clutch disc using the clutch alignment
tool set (D), and the 21 mm clutch alignment pilot
(E).
27. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting

bolts (B) finger-tight.
＊１６
B
07749-0010000
B
A
2.4−2.6 mm
(0.09−0.10 in.)
12-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:26:40 61TL2000_120_0025
28. Torque the mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross Transmission Side

pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to
prevent warping the diaphragm spring. Release Bearing Removal
Specified Torque: 25 N·m (2.6 kgf·m, 19 lbf·ft) 1. Remove the transmission (see page 13-16).
＊１７
2. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch
A
housing (B).
＊１８
E A
D
C
07PAF-0020000
with 07PAF-0020370
C
B
D
B
07LAB-PV00100
3. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch
29. Remove the ring gear holder (B), the clutch housing by squeezing the release fork set spring (D)
alignment tool set (C), and the 21 mm clutch with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E).
alignment pilot.
Release Bearing Inspection
30. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the
same height. 4. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it
by hand. If there is excessive play or noise, replace
31. Do the release bearing inspection, and replace if it the release bearing.
necessary.
NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease.
32. Install the transmission (see page 13-25). Do not wash it in solvent.
＊１９
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 12-23

08/04/09 12:26:41 61TL2000_120_0026
Clutch

Release Bearing Installation 6. With the release fork (A) slid between the release
bearing pawls (B), install the release bearing on the
5. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798- mainshaft while inserting the release fork through
9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt the hole (C) in the clutch housing.
(B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing ＊２１
E
guide (D) in the shaded areas, then set the release
fork set spring (E).
NOTE: Replace the release fork bolt if necessary.

＊２０ B
B
29 N·m
(P/N 08798-9002) (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft) (P/N 08798-9002)
0.4−1.0 g 1.0−1.6 g
(0.01−0.04 oz) (0.04−0.06 oz)
(P/N 08798-9002) C F
B D A
7. Align the detent (D) of the release fork with the

release fork bolt (E), then press the detent of the
release fork over the release fork bolt squarely.
E
8. Install the release fork boot (F). Make sure the boot
seals around the release fork and clutch housing.
C 9. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make

D sure that it fits properly against the release bearing
(B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly.
A
Wipe off any excess grease.
(P/N 08798-9002) (P/N 08798-9002) ＊２２
0.4−1.0 g
(0.01−0.04 oz)
10. Install the transmission (see page 13-25).
12-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:06 61TL2000_130_0001
Manual Transmission
Reverse Lockout System

Component Location Index .... 13-3 Mainshaft Reassembly ............ 13-48
System Description ................. 13-4 Countershaft Assembly
Circuit Diagram ........................ 13-5 Clearance Inspection ........... 13-53
Symptom Troubleshooting .... 13-5 Countershaft Disassembly ...... 13-54
Reverse Lockout Solenoid Countershaft Inspection .......... 13-55
Test ........................................ 13-8 Countershaft Reassembly ....... 13-56
Reverse Lockout Solenoid Synchro Sleeve and Hub
Disassembly/Reassembly ... 13-8 Inspection and
Reassembly .......................... 13-62
Manual Transmission Synchro Ring and Gear
Special Tools ............................ 13-2 Inspection ............................. 13-62
Component Location Index .... 13-10 Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal
Symptom Troubleshooting Replacement ......................... 13-64
Index ...................................... 13-11 Countershaft Bearing
Transmission Fluid Inspection Replacement ......................... 13-65
and Replacement ................. 13-13 Mainshaft Thrust Clearance
Back-up Light Switch Test ....... 13-15 Adjustment ........................... 13-66
Transmission Removal ........... 13-16 Transmission Reassembly ...... 13-69
Transmission Installation ........ 13-25 Gearshift Mechanism
Transmission Disassembly ..... 13-34 Replacement ......................... 13-73
Reverse Shift Fork Clearance Shift Lever Housing
Inspection ............................. 13-39 Replacement ......................... 13-74
Change Lever Clearance
Inspection ............................. 13-39 M/T Differential
Change Lever Assembly Component Location Index .... 13-76
Disassembly/Reassembly ... 13-40 Backlash Inspection ................. 13-77
Shift Fork Clearance Differential Carrier,
Inspection ............................. 13-41 Final Driven Gear
Shift Fork Replacement ......................... 13-77
Disassembly/Reassembly ... 13-42 Carrier Bearing
Mainshaft Assembly Replacement ......................... 13-78
Clearance Inspection ........... 13-43 Oil Seal Replacement .............. 13-79
Mainshaft Disassembly ........... 13-46 Differential Thrust Clearance
Mainshaft Inspection ............... 13-47 Adjustment ........................... 13-80
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７０００００００Ｊ１３０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:07 61TL2000_130_0002
Manual Transmission
Special Tools
07GAJ-PG20110 Catch Adapter 1
07GAJ-PG20130 Base Adapter 1
07JAD-PL90100 Oil Seal Driver, 65 mm 1
07NAD-P20A100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07736-A01000B Adjustable Bearing Puller, 20−40 mm 1
07746-0030100 Inner Driver Handle, 40 mm 1
07746-0030300 Inner Bearing Driver Attachment, 30 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135 L 1
: Part of Mainshaft Inspection Tool Set, 07GAJ-PG20102.
: Must be used with commercially available 3/8’’-16 UNF Slide Hammer.
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７０００００００Ｊ１３０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:07 61TL2000_130_0003
＊０１
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)
REVERSE LOCKOUT SOLENOID

Test, page 13-8
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５１１０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:07 61TL2000_130_0004
System Description
At vehicle speeds of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, the ECM, which monitors the signals from the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, activates the reverse lockout solenoid, which pushes select lock cam B into the locked
position. As a result, the select lever cannot rotate to the reverse select position, making it impossible to engage
reverse gear. As the vehicle speed drops to 9 mph (15 km/h) or less, the ECM turns off the reverse lockout solenoid.
The select lock return spring pulls back select lock cam B, enabling the select lever to move freely so reverse gear can
be selected.
Vehicle speed Inhibitor Reverse selection
Above 12 mph (20 km/h) ON Not allowed
Below 9 mph (15 km/h) OFF Allowed
Ignition switch LOCK (0) OFF Allowed
＊０１
With 5th-6th selected
With reverse selected
Select lever
Locked position
Inhibitor OFF
Change lever Select lock

cam A
Select lock cam B Select lock return spring
Direction of reverse selection

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５１１０００００ＣＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:07 61TL2000_130_0005
Circuit Diagram Symptom Troubleshooting

＊０１
BATTERY
Driver can select reverse gear when vehicle
speed is 12 mph (20 km/h) or more
NOTE:
• When checking if the transmission will shift to
No. 1
(100 A) reverse while the wheels are being driven forward,
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is securely
BOX
No. 3 supported, and allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
(50 A)
• Do not release the clutch pedal if you can select
reverse gear while the wheels are driven forward.
• When the vehicle is on a lift, and you make the
WHT wheels rotate, turn off the VSA system by the VSA
OFF switch.
• Refer to How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM
BAT IGNITION Connectors in the Fuel and Emission Systems section
IG1 SWITCH
before troubleshooting this circuit (see page 11-6).
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
BLU
2. Check the No. 7 (15 A) fuse in the driver’s under-

No. 7
DRIVER’S
UNDER-DASH
dash fuse/relay box.
(15 A) FUSE/RELAY
BOX
Is the f use OK ?
BLK/RED
YES−Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 3.
NO−Install a new No. 7 (15 A) fuse, and recheck. If

BLK/YEL
the fuse continues to blow, check for short to body
2
ground in the wire between the No. 7 (15 A) fuse in
REVERSE the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box and the
LOCKOUT
SOLENOID reverse lockout solenoid.
1
GRN/BLK
ECM C27 RVS
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５１１０００００ＥＡＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５１１０００００ＦＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:24:08 61TL2000_130_0006
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont’d)

4. Check for fuel and emissions system’s DTC with the 12. Check for continuity between reverse lockout
HDS. solenoid 2P connector terminal No. 1 and ECM
connector C (49P) terminal No. 27.
Are there any DT Cs stored in the ECM? ＊０３
ECM CONNECTOR C (49P)
YES−Go to the indicated ECM DTC’s
NO−Go to step 5.

RVS (GRN/BLK)
6. Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid 2P
connector.
RVS (GRN/BLK)
8. Measure the voltage between reverse lockout

solenoid 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground. REVERSE LOCKOUT SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR
＊０２
Is the continuity?
REVERSE LOCKOUT SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR
NO−Repair open in the wire between the reverse

IG1 (BLK/YEL) lockout solenoid and the ECM.
13. Do the reverse lockout solenoid test (see page 13-8).
Is the reverse lockout solenoid OK ?
Wire side of female terminals YES−Check for loose terminals or poor

connections at the ECM. If necessary, update the
ECM if it does not have the latest software
Is there battery voltage? (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-good ECM
(see page 11-7), then recheck. If the trouble goes
YES−Go to step 9. away with a known-good ECM, replace the original
ECM (see page 11-234).
NO−Repair open in the wire between the reverse
lockout solenoid and the No. 7 (15 A) fuse in the NO−Repair or replace the reverse lockout solenoid
driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box. (see page 13-8).
11. Disconnect ECM connector C (49P).

08/04/09 12:24:08 61TL2000_130_0007
Driver cannot select reverse gear when 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or less
NOTE:
• When checking if the transmission will shift to 7. Disconnect ECM connector C (49P).
reverse while the wheels are being driven forward,
raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is securely 8. Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid 2P
supported, and allow the front wheels to rotate freely. connector.
• Do not release the clutch pedal if you can select
reverse gear while the wheels are driven forward. 9. Check for continuity between body ground and
• When the vehicle is on a lift, and you make the reverse lockout solenoid 2P connector terminal
wheels rotate, turn off the VSA system by the VSA No. 1.
OFF switch. ＊０１
REVERSE LOCKOUT SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR
2. Try to shift the transmission into reverse.
Can you shif t the transmission into the reverse? RVS (GRN/BLK)
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Go to step 3.
3. Do the reverse lockout solenoid test (see page 13-8). Wire side of female terminals
Is the reverse lockout solenoid OK ?

YES−Check the change lever assembly (see page
13-40), if necessary inspect the internal YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
transmission. between the reverse lockout solenoid and the
ECM.
NO−Repair or replace the reverse lockout solenoid
(see page 13-8). NO−Check for loose terminals or poor connections
at the ECM. If necessary, update the ECM if it does
4. Start the engine. not have the latest software (see page 11-233), or
substitute a known-good ECM (see page 11-7), then
Can you shif t the transmission into the reverse? recheck. If the trouble goes away with a known-
good ECM, replace the original ECM (see page
YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11-234).
time.
NO−Go to step 5.
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５１１０００００ＦＡＡＴ１１
08/04/09 12:24:08 61TL2000_130_0008
Reverse Lockout Solenoid Test Reverse Lockout Solenoid

Disassembly/Reassembly
1. Remove the reverse lockout solenoid (see page
13-8).
1. Remove the intake air duct (see step 2 on page 9-3).
2. Connect jumper wires from the battery positive
terminal to reverse lockout solenoid 2P connector 2. Remove the air cleaner housing (see page 11-364).
terminal No. 2, and from the battery negative
terminal to reverse lockout solenoid 2P connector 3. Carefully remove the shift cables and the cable
terminal No. 1. bracket together to avoid bending the shift cables
＊０１ (see step 11 on page 13-17).
REVERSE LOCKOUT SOLENOID
2P CONNECTOR 4. Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid 2P
connector (A).
＊０１
A
3. Make sure the reverse lockout solenoid works. If

the reverse lockout solenoid does not work, replace
it.
NOTE: The inhibitor should be pushed out when

applying battery voltage to the solenoid, and the
inhibitor should be released when there is no
battery voltage at the solenoid.
5. Remove the reverse lockout solenoid (B).

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５１１５０９４１ＦＥＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５１１５０９４１ＭＦＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:24:08 61TL2000_130_0009
6. Remove the pin (A), the select lock return spring (C), 10. Install the reverse lockout solenoid (A).
and select lock cam B. ＊０４
＊０２ B
A 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
A
B
7. Install the components of the reverse lockout 11. Connect the reverse lockout solenoid 2P connector
solenoid in the reverse order of removal. (B).
8. Clean any dirt and oil from the sealing surface. 12. Carefully install the shift cables and the cable
bracket together to avoid bending the shift cables
9. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0003 evenly to the (see step 55 on page 13-32).
change lever assembly mating surface of the
reverse lockout solenoid. Install the component 13. Install the air cleaner housing (see page 11-364).
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
14. Install the intake air duct (see step 9 on page 9-6).
NOTE: If too much time has passed after applying
the liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
＊０３
Liquid gasket

08/04/09 12:24:13 61TL2000_130_0010
Manual Transmission

＊０１
GEARSHIFT MECHANISM
SHIFT LEVER HOUSING

BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH

Test, page 13-15
TRANSMISSION
Removal, page 13-16
TRANSMISSION FLUID Installation, page 13-25
Inspection and Replacement, Disassembly, page 13-34
page 13-13 Reassembly, page 13-69
＊０２
CHANGE LEVER ASSEMBLY

SHIFT FORK
CHANGE LEVER Clearance Inspection, page 13-41
Clearance Inspection, Disassembly/Reassembly, page 13-42
page 13-39
DIFFERENTIAL
REVERSE SHIFT FORK

Clearance Inspection,
page 13-39
COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY
Clearance Inspection, page 13-53
COUNTERSHAFT
MAINSHAFT Disassembly, page 13-54
Disassembly, page 13-46 Inspection, page 13-55
Inspection, page 13-47 Reassembly, page 13-56
Reassembly, page 13-48 Bearing Replacement,
Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement, page 13-65
page 13-64
Thrust Clearance Adjustment,
page 13-66
SYNCHRO SLEEVE and HUB MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY
Inspection and Reassembly, Clearance Inspection, page 13-43
page 13-62
SYNCHRO RING and GEAR
REVERSE IDLER GEAR
13-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４５５０１０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:13 61TL2000_130_0011

Symptom Diagnostic procedure
Hard to shift into 1st gear 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-13).
2. Check the clutch (see page 12-18).
3. Check the change lever assembly (see page 13-40).
4. Check the 1st synchro ring and the 1st gear (see page 13-62).
5. Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-62).
Hard to shift into 2nd gear 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-13).
3. Check the 2nd synchro ring and the 2nd gear (see page 13-62).
4. Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-62).
Hard to shift into 3rd gear 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-13).
3. Check the 3rd synchro ring and the 3rd gear (see page 13-62).
4. Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-62).
Hard to shift into 4th gear 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-13).
3. Check the 4th synchro ring and the 4th gear (see page 13-62).
4. Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-62).
4. Check the 5th/6th synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-62).
4. Check the 5th/6th synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-62).
Hard to shift into reverse 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-13).
2. Check the clutch (see page 12-18).
4. Check the reverse shift fork and reverse idler gear (see page 13-39).
5. Check reverse gears.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-11
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１００００００００ＨＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:24:13 61TL2000_130_0012
Manual Transmission

HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
ECM or the vehicle
Driver can select reverse gear when Do the symptom troubleshooting (see page 13-5).
vehicle speed is 12 mph (20 km/h) or
more
Driver cannot select reverse gear Do the symptom troubleshooting (see page 13-7).
when vehicle speed is 9 mph
(15 km/h) or less
Noise from the transmission 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-13).
2. Check the MTF level (unfilled or in surplus the transmission with the
MTF).
3. Check the transmission gears.
4. Check the transmission bearings.
5. Check the differential carrier, the final driven gear, and the carrier
bearings.
Shift lever does not operate 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-13).
smoothly 2. Check the shift cables and their joints (see page 13-73).
3. Check the shift lever housing with the shift lever shaft.
Transmission jumps out of gear 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-13).
2. Check the detent ball springs (see page 13-34).
3. Check the teeth of the synchro rings and the gears (see page 13-62).
4. Check for bent, deform, or damage of the shift forks.
13-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:14 61TL2000_130_0013
Transmission Fluid Inspection and Replacement

1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and make sure it is 4. If the fluid is dirty, remove the drain plug (A) and
securely supported. the sealing washer (B), and drain the MTF.
＊０３
2. Remove the engine undercover (A) from the splash
shield.
＊０１
C
44 N·m
A (4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
D
Replace.
B A
Replace. 39 N·m
3. Remove the filler plug (A) and sealing washer (B), (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
check the condition of the MTF, and make sure it is
at the proper level (C). 5. Install the drain plug with a new sealing washer,
＊０２ and refill the transmission with MTF to the proper
level. Always use Acura Manual Transmission Fluid
(MTF).
B
Fluid Capacity:
C 1.9 L (2.0 US qt) at fluid change
2.0 L (2.1 US qt) at overhaul
6. Install the filler plug (C) with a new sealing washer

(D).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-13
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１０００４１７０１ＭＤＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:24:14 61TL2000_130_0014
Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid Inspection and Replacement (cont’d)

7. Install the engine undercover (A) to the splash 9. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
shield. data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
＊０４

and the engine control module (ECM). If it doesn’t
communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
(see page 11-210).
13. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with

the HDS.
A
the HDS.
9.8 N·m 15. Select RESETTING THE MTF LIFE with the HDS
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) (see page 3-7).
13-14
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 12:24:14 61TL2000_130_0015
Back-up Light Switch Test

1. Disconnect the back-up light switch 2P connector 3. Remove the back-up light switch (A). Check for
(A). continuity between back-up light switch 2P
＊０１ connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should
be continuity when the switch end (B) is pressed,
and no continuity when the switch end is released.
If the result is faulty, replace the back-up light
A switch. If the switch is OK, check the reverse shift
piece in the transmission.
＊０３
A
29 N·m
2. Check for continuity between back-up light switch

2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There
should be continuity only when the shift lever is in
reverse. If the result is faulty, go to step 3.
＊０２
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
＊０４
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR

08718-0012, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to the
threads of the back-up light switch, and install it on
the transmission housing.
5. Connect the back-up light switch 2P connector.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-15
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４５０００１４００１ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:15 61TL2000_130_0016
Manual Transmission
Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required 8. Remove the ground cable clamp (A) and the upper
• Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256 battery base mounting bolts (B), loosen the under
• Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000015 battery base mounting bolts (C), then remove the
• Front subframe adapter VSB02C000016 battery base (D).
These special tools are available through the Acura ＊０１
B
Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857.
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surfaces.
1. Secure the hood in the wide open position with the

support strut.
D
4. Remove the air cleaner housing (see page 11-364).
5. Remove the front grille cover (see page 20-202). C
7. Disconnect the ECM connectors, then remove the

ECM (see page 11-234). A
9. Remove the clutch hose bracket (A) and the slave

cylinder (B), then carefully move the slave cylinder
out of the way to avoid bending the clutch line.
NOTE:
• Do not disconnect the clutch line joints.
• Do not press the clutch pedal after the slave
cylinder has been removed.
＊０２
13-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０１０００００ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:15 61TL2000_130_0017
10. Remove the nut (A), and release the clamp (B), then 12. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
move the under-hood fuse/relay box (C) out of the sensor connector (A), and remove the harness
way. clamp (B).
＊０３＊０５
E
C
C
A
D
B
11. Remove the lock pins (A) and the shift cable bracket A
bolts (B), then disconnect the shift cables (C) from
the change lever assembly (D). Carefully remove 13. Disconnect the back-up light switch connector (C)
both cables and the shift cable bracket (E) together and the reverse lockout solenoid connector (D),
to avoid bending the cables. then remove the harness clamp (E).
＊０４
B
14. Remove the harness clamp (A) and the hose (B)
from the bracket (C), then remove the bracket.
＊０６
A
C C
E B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-17

08/04/09 12:24:16 61TL2000_130_0018
Manual Transmission
Transmission Removal (cont’d)

15. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolts (A) 17. Remove the ignition coil cover (A).
and the top washers (B). ＊０９
A
NOTE: The washers are on the top and the bottom
of the steering gearbox mounts.
Driver’s side
＊０７
A
18. Remove the engine harness clamp bracket bolts (A).

＊１０
Passenger’s side
＊０８
A
16. Hang up both sides of the steering gearbox end

securely to prevent damage the EPS harnesses.
13-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:16 61TL2000_130_0019
19. Attach the engine hanger adapter (VSB02C000015) 21. Remove the vacuum hose (A) from the clamp (B),
to the threaded hole in the cylinder head. and disconnect the vacuum hose, then remove the
＊１１ front engine mount stop (C) and the vacuum hose
VSB02C000015 bracket (D).
＊１３
D
20. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256), E

then attach the hook to the slotted hole in the
engine hanger adapter. Tighten the wing nut (A) by A
hand to lift and support the engine/transmission.
＊１２ 22. Remove the front engine mount bolt (E).
23. Remove the rear engine mount bolts (A).

＊１４
A
B
VSB02C000015 AAR-T1256
24. Remove the rear engine mount bracket upper
mounting bolt (B).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-19

08/04/09 12:24:17 61TL2000_130_0020
Manual Transmission

25. Remove the transmission mount bracket bolts (A) 27. Remove the upper transmission mounting bolts (A).
from the transmission housing. ＊１７
NOTE: Do not remove the TORX bolt (B) from the

upper transmission mount. If the TORX bolt is
removed, the upper transmission mount must be
replaced as an assembly.
＊１５
B
A
A
28. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and make sure it is

securely supported.
29. Remove the front wheels (see step 2 on page 18-14).
30. Remove the damper fork (see step 4 on page 18-21).
31. Separate the knuckle ball joint from the lower arm
26. Remove transmission hanger C from the
transmission housing. 32. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-214).
＊１６
33. Drain the MTF. Reinstall the drain plug using a new
sealing washer (see page 13-13).
34. Remove exhaust pipe A and the gaskets (see page

9-7).
13-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:32 61TL2000_130_0021
35. Remove the ground cable (A) from the 38. Attach the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016)
transmission housing. to the front suspension subframe and hang the belt
＊１８ of the subframe adapter over the front of the
subframe, then secure the belt with its stop.
＊２０
B
VSB02C000016
39. Raise the jack and line up the slots in the front
36. Remove both sides of the front subframe mid subframe adapter arms with the bolt holes on the
mount bolts (B). jack base, then securely attach them with four bolts.
37. Remove the nuts (A) securing the lower

transmission mount.
＊１９
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-21

08/04/09 12:24:33 61TL2000_130_0022
Manual Transmission

40. Remove the four stiffeners mounting bolts (A), then 42. Remove the rear engine mount bracket (A) with the
remove the four front subframe mounting bolts (B) rear engine mount (B).
and stiffeners (C). ＊２２
＊２１
D E B
43. Remove the lower transmission mount (A).

＊２３
C C
C
B A A B
41. Remove the front suspension subframe (D).
NOTE: Pick up the steering gearbox mounting

washers (E).
A
13-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:33 61TL2000_130_0023
44. Pry the left driveshaft inboard joint (A) from the 47. Remove the clutch case cover (A).
differential using a prybar. ＊２６
NOTE:
• Do not pull on the driveshaft, or the inboard joint
may come apart. Pull the inboard joint straight
out to avoid damaging the oil seal.
• Be careful not to damage the oil seal with the
prybar.
＊２４
A
48. Securely support the transmission with a

transmission jack.
45. Drive the inboard joint (A) of the right driveshaft off
of the intermediate shaft using a drift and a
hammer.
NOTE: Do not pull on the driveshaft, or the inboard

joint may come apart.
＊２５
46. Remove the intermediate shaft (see page 16-23).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-23

08/04/09 12:24:33 61TL2000_130_0024
Manual Transmission

49. Remove the lower transmission mounting bolts.
Front side
＊２７
Rear side
＊２８
50. Pull the transmission away from the engine until

the transmission mainshaft clears the clutch
pressure plate.
51. Slowly lower the transmission about 150 mm (6 in.).

Check once again that all hoses and electrical
wiring are disconnected and free from the
transmission, then lower it completely.
13-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:34 61TL2000_130_0025
Transmission Installation
Special Tools Required 5. Install the lower transmission mounting bolts (A).
• Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000015 Front side
• Front subframe adapter VSB02C000016 ＊０２
• Subframe alignment pin 070AG-SJAA10S
These special tools are available through the Acura
Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857.
A
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted 12 x 1.25 mm
surfaces. 64 N·m
(6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
1. Make sure the two dowel pins (A) are installed in
the prescribed holes on the engine block as shown.
＊０１
A
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
Rear side
A
＊０３
A
A 12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
2. Check the release bearing, and reinstall the release

bearing and the release fork with the appropriate
grease (see page 12-23).
3. Place the transmission on the transmission jack,

and raise it to the engine level.
4. Align the transmission mainshaft and the clutch

pressure plate, then move the transmission inward
until there is no gap between the transmission
housing and the engine block.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-25
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０１０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:34 61TL2000_130_0026
Manual Transmission
Transmission Installation (cont’d)

6. Install the clutch case cover (A). 10. Install the rear engine mount bracket (A) with new
＊０４ bolts.
＊０６
12 x 1.25 mm
88 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm (9.0 kgf·m,
12 N·m 65 lbf·ft)
(1.2 kgf·m, Replace.
A 8.7 lbf·ft)
7. Install the intermediate shaft (see page 16-29). 12 x 1.25 mm A

88 N·m (9.0 kgf·m, 65 lbf·ft)
8. Install both driveshafts (see page 16-20). Replace.
9. Install the lower transmission mount (A) with new 11. Support the front suspension subframe with the
bolts. front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016) and a jack.
＊０５＊０７
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
(5.5 kgf·m,
40 lbf·ft)
Replace.
VSB02C000016
A
13-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:35 61TL2000_130_0027
12. Position the steering gearbox washers (A) on the 14. Align the front suspension subframe using the
front suspension subframe (B), and lift up the subframe alignment pin (A). Vertically install the
subframe until it is about 0.4 in. (10 mm) away from subframe alignment pin, and align the right-rear
the frame. corner of the subframe and vehicle frame holes,
＊０８ then loosely tighten the subframe mounting bolt
(B) until the front suspension subframe contacts the
body frame.
＊０９
B
14 x 1.5 mm
A 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft)
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm D
12 x 1.25 mm
C 93 N·m (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft) A
12 x 1.25 mm Replace. 070AG-SJAA10S
Replace.
15. Loosely tighten the left-rear subframe mounting

13. Loosely install new four front subframe mounting bolt using the same procedure as the right-rear
bolts with stiffeners, the new rear stiffener with the subframe alignment pin.
mounting bolts (C), and the front stiffener
mounting bolts (D). 16. Partially tighten the right and left front subframe
mounting bolts.
17. Tighten the right-rear subframe mounting bolt to

the specified torque with the subframe alignment
pin in the positioning hole.
18. Tighten the left-rear subframe mounting bolt to the

specified torque with the subframe alignment pin
in the positioning hole.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-27

08/04/09 12:24:35 61TL2000_130_0028
Manual Transmission

19. Tighten the right and left front subframe mounting 24. Install both sides of the front subframe mid mount
bolts (A) to the specified torque. (A) with new bolts.
＊１０＊１２
12 x 1.25 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
54 N·m 9.8 N·m
(5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
A
A
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N·m 10 x 1.25 mm
(10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft) 49 N·m
Replace. (5.0 kgf·m,
36 lbf·ft)
Replace. B
20. Tighten the rear and front stiffener mounting bolts
to the specified torque.
21. Retorque all of the front subframe mounting bolts. 25. Install the ground cable (B) to the transmission
housing.
22. Remove the jack and front subframe adapter (VSB
02C000016). 26. Install exhaust pipe A with the gaskets (see page
9-7).
23. Install the nuts (A) securing lower transmission
mount. 27. Refill the MTF to the proper level (see page 13-13).
＊１１
28. Install the splash shield (see page 20-214).
29. Connect the knuckle ball joint onto the lower arm
30. Install the damper fork (see step 4 on page 18-21).
31. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
13-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:35 61TL2000_130_0029
33. Install the upper transmission mounting bolts (A). 35. Loosely install the transmission mount bracket (A)
＊１３ to the transmission housing with new bolts.
＊１５
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
(5.5 kgf·m,
40 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
34. Install transmission hanger C to the transmission

housing.
＊１４ 36. Install the new rear engine mount bracket upper
mounting bolt (A).
＊１６
B
12 x 1.25 mm A
78 N·m (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft) 12 x 1.25 mm
Replace. 88 N·m
Replace.
C 10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
37. Loosely install the new rear engine mount bolts (B).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-29

08/04/09 12:24:36 61TL2000_130_0030
Manual Transmission

38. Connect the vacuum hose (A). 44. Install the engine harness clamp bracket (A).
＊１７＊１８
D A
E
12 x 1.25 mm
78 N·m
(8.0 kgf·m,
58 lbf·ft)
Replace.
C
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
B (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
(5.5 kgf·m, 45. Install the ignition coil cover (A).
40 lbf·ft) ＊１９
Replace. A 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
39. Loosely install the new front engine mount bolt (B).
A
NOTE: Install the engine mount stop (C) and the
vacuum hose bracket (D) after tightening the front
engine mount bolt to the specified torque.
40. Remove the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256)

and the engine hanger adapter (VSB02C000015).
41. Tighten the rear engine mount bolts to the

specified torque value.
42. Tighten the transmission mount bolts to the

43. Tighten the front engine mount bolt to the specified

torque value, then install the vacuum hose bracket
and the engine mount stop with new nuts (E).
13-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:36 61TL2000_130_0031
46. Set the steering gearbox into position, then loosely 48. Tighten the front/passenger’s side of the steering
install the all four steering gearbox mounting bolts gearbox mounting bolt (C) to the specified torque
with top washers (A). value.
NOTE: Make sure the lower washers placed in step 49. Tighten the rear/driver’s side of the steering
12 are correctly positioned before installing the gearbox mounting bolt (D) to the specified torque
bolts. value.
Driver’s side 50. Tighten the rear/passenger’s side of the steering

＊２０ gearbox mounting bolt (E) to the specified torque
B
14 x 1.5 mm value.
D 74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft)
14 x 1.5 mm
74 N·m 51. Retorque all of the steering gearbox mounting
(7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft) bolts in the same sequence that they were
tightened.
A
Passenger’s side
＊２１
E
14 x 1.5 mm
74 N·m
C (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft)
14 x 1.5 mm
74 N·m
47. Tighten the front/driver’s side of the steering

gearbox mounting bolt (B) to the specified torque
value.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-31

08/04/09 12:24:37 61TL2000_130_0032
Manual Transmission

52. Install the bracket (A), then install the harness 55. Apply a light coat of silicone grease
clamp (B) and the hose (C) to the bracket. (08C30-B0234M) to the cable ends (A), and connect
＊２２ the cable end to the change lever assembly (B),
then install the shift cable bracket (C) and the lock
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m pins (D). Do not bend or damage the shift cables.
B (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on
A
the terminal part of the connectors and switches,
especially if you have silicone grease on your
hands or gloves.
＊２４
8 x 1.25 mm
27 N·m
C
53. Connect the back-up light switch connector (A) and

the reverse lockout solenoid connector (B), then
install the harness clamp (C). (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
＊２３
C
A
A C
D
B
E
54. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor connector (D), and install the harness clamp
(E).
13-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:37 61TL2000_130_0033
56. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box (A). 59. Install the battery base (A) and the ground cable
＊２５ clamp (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m ＊２７
6 x 1.0 mm
(1.0 kgf·m, 9.8 N·m
7.2 lbf·ft) (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
A
57. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease

(P/N 08798-9002) to the end of slave cylinder rod
(A).
＊２６
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m 8 x 1.25 mm B
(2.2 kgf·m, 22 N·m
16 lbf·ft) (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
60. Install the ECM, then connect the ECM connectors

(see page 11-234).
C
62. Install the front grille cover (see page 20-202).
63. Install the air cleaner housing (see page 11-364).

A
(P/N 08798-9002)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m 22-79).
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) B
66. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
58. Install the clutch hose bracket (B), then install the 67. Check the shift lever and the clutch operation.
slave cylinder (C). Do not bend or damage the
clutch line. 68. Test-drive the vehicle.
13-33
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 12:24:38 61TL2000_130_0034
Manual Transmission
Transmission Disassembly
Exploded View-Clutch Housing
＊０１
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY REVERSE SHIFT FORK

SHIFT FORK ASSEMBLY 28 mm WASHER 35 x 58 x 8 mm OIL SEAL
6 mm FLANGE BOLT 28 mm SPRING WASHER Replace.
13 N·m (1.3 kgf·m, 9.4 lbf·ft) BALL BEARING BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH
BEARING SET PLATE 28 x 43 x 7 mm OIL SEAL 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY Replace. CLUTCH HOUSING
NEEDLE BEARING REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT BAFFLE PLATE
OIL GUIDE PLATE C REVERSE IDLER GEAR 72 mm SNAP RING
14 x 20 mm DOWEL PIN 6 mm SPECIAL BOLT
MAGNET 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
13-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０１０００００ＬＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:38 61TL2000_130_0035
Exploded View-Transmission Housing

＊０２
TRANSMISSION HOUSING DETENT BOLT 32 mm SEALING CAP

10 mm SEALING WASHER 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Replace. 12 mm SEALING WASHER 10 mm FLANGE BOLT
10 mm FLANGE BOLT Replace. 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) SPRING 20 mm BOLT
8 mm FLANGE BOLT STEEL BALL 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft) TRANSMISSION HANGER B 20 mm SEALING WASHER
TRANSMISSION HANGER A TRANSMISSION HANGER C Replace.
INTERLOCK BOLT 20 mm SEALING WASHER OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) Replace. SPEED SENSOR
OIL GUIDE PLATE M FILLER PLUG O-RING
72 mm SHIM 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) Replace.
OIL GUTTER PLATE 40 x 56 x 8 mm OIL SEAL PLAIN WASHER
80 mm SHIM Replace. 6 mm FLANGE BOLT
8 x 14 mm DOWEL PIN 14 mm SEALING WASHER 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
CHANGE LEVER ASSEMBLY Replace. HARNESS BRACKET
6 mm FLANGE BOLT DRAIN PLUG
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-35

08/04/09 12:24:39 61TL2000_130_0036
Manual Transmission
Transmission Disassembly (cont’d)

NOTE: Place the clutch housing on two pieces of wood 5. Remove the drain plug (A), the filler plug (B), the
thick enough to keep the mainshaft from hitting the 10 mm flange bolt (C), and the sealing washers (D).
workbench. ＊０５
B D A
1. Remove the release bearing and the release fork
(see page 12-23).
2. Remove the detent bolts (A), the 12 mm sealing

washers (B), the springs (C), the steel balls (D), and
the back-up light switch (E).
＊０３ D
G
C D
B
D
A F
E C
6. Remove the output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor (E), the plain washer (F), and the O-ring (G).
7. Loosen the 8 mm flange bolts in a crisscross

pattern in several steps, then remove them with
transmission hanger A, transmission hanger B, and
F G E the harness bracket (C).
＊０６
3. Remove the 20 mm bolt (F) and the 20 mm sealing
washer (G).
B
4. Remove the interlock bolt (A), the change lever
assembly (B), and the 8 x 14 mm dowel pins (C).
＊０４
C
A
13-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:40 61TL2000_130_0037
8. Remove the 32 mm sealing cap (A). 11. Remove the reverse idler gear (A) and the reverse
＊０７ idler gear shaft (B).
＊０９
A
B
D
C
D A
12. Remove the reverse shift fork (A).

＊１０
9. While expanding the 72 mm snap ring (B) on the

countershaft ball bearing with snap ring pliers, lift
the transmission housing (C). Release the snap ring
pliers, and remove the transmission housing and
the three 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (D).
10. Remove the baffle plate (A).

＊０８
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-37

08/04/09 12:24:40 61TL2000_130_0038
Manual Transmission
Transmission Disassembly (cont’d)

13. Apply tape to the mainshaft splines to protect the 16. Remove the oil gutter plate (A), 72 mm shim (B),
seal, then remove the mainshaft assembly (A) and and oil guide plate M.
the countershaft assembly (B) with the shift fork ＊１３
assembly (C) from the clutch housing (D). A
＊１１
A B
B
C
M
E
D
14. Remove the 28 mm spring washer (E) and the

28 mm washer (F).
15. Remove the differential assembly (A) and the

magnet (B).
＊１２
13-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:41 61TL2000_130_0039
Reverse Shift Fork Clearance Change Lever Clearance Inspection

Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between the change lever
(A) and the select lever (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If
1. Measure the clearance between the reverse idler the clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step
gear (A) and the reverse shift fork (B) with a feeler 2.
gauge (C). If the clearance exceeds the service limit,
go to step 2. Standard: 0.05−0.25 mm (0.002−0.010 in.)
Standard: 0.20−0.59 mm (0.008−0.023 in.) ＊０１
＊０１
B A
A
C
2. Measure the groove width of the change lever.
2. Measure the width of the reverse shift fork. • If the groove width is not within the standard,
replace the shift lever.
• If the width is not within the standard, replace the • If the groove width is within the standard, replace
reverse shift fork. the select lever.
• If the width is within the standard, replace
reverse idler gear. Standard: 15.00−15.10 mm (0.591−0.594 in.)
＊０２
Standard: 13.4−13.7 mm (0.528−0.539 in.)
＊０２
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-39
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０３３９１１１ＭＡＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０３３９０９１ＭＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:24:41 61TL2000_130_0040
Manual Transmission
Change Lever Assembly Disassembly/Reassembly

NOTE:
• Install the component within 5 minutes of applying liquid gasket.
• If too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and residue, then reapply
new liquid gasket.
• Prior to reassembling, clean all parts in solvent, dry them, and apply grease to the contact surfaces as shown.
＊０１
SELECT LEVER
(P/N 08798-9002) Be careful not to damage the dust seal
when installing it.
DUST SEAL
Replace.
(P/N 08798-9002)
CHANGE
BREATHER CAP LEVER COVER
Turn toward the front of
the vehicle, and install it.
ROLLER
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
(P/N 08798-9002)
WASHER
CHANGE LEVER
SHIFT ARM
COVER
DUST COVER
SELECT
LOCK CAM A
1ST/2ND
REVERSE LOCKOUT SELECT OIL SEAL
SOLENOID SPRING Replace.
Apply liquid gasket
(P/N 08718-0003) to
the sealing surface. INTERLOCK
5TH/6TH
SELECT
SPRING
SELECT STOP
PLATE
SELECT 8 mm
LOCK CAM B SPRING
WASHER
8 mm
SPECIAL BOLT
31 N·m
(3.2 kgf·m,
SHIFT 23 lbf·ft)
ARM
MBS RETURN
SPRING
MBS ARM
13-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０３３９０９１ＭＦＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:55 61TL2000_130_0041
Shift Fork Clearance Inspection

1. Measure the clearance between each shift fork (A) 3. Measure the clearance between the shift fork (A)
and its matching synchro sleeve (B). If the and the shift arm (B). If the clearance exceeds the
clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step 2. service limit, go to step 4.
Standard: 0.35−0.65 mm (0.014−0.026 in.) Standard: 0.2−0.5 mm (0.008−0.020 in.)

Service Limit: 1.0 mm (0.039 in.) Service Limit: 0.62 mm (0.024 in.)
＊０１＊０３
B
A
A
4. Measure the width of the shift arm.
2. Measure the thickness of the shift fork fingers.
• If the width is not within the standard, replace the
• If the thickness is not within the standard, replace shift arm.
the shift fork. • If the width is within the standard, replace the
• If the thickness is within the standard, replace the shift fork or reverse shift piece.
synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set.
• If one arm of the shift fork shows more wear than Standard: 16.9−17.0 mm (0.665−0.669 in.)
others, the fork may be bent and needs to be ＊０４
replaced.
Standard: 7.4−7.6 mm (0.29−0.30 in.)

＊０２
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-41
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０３５４９０１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:55 61TL2000_130_0042
Manual Transmission
Shift Fork Disassembly/Reassembly

NOTE: Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply MTF to all contact surfaces.
＊０１
3RD/4TH SHIFT FORK
1ST/2ND SHIFT FORK
5TH/6TH SHIFT FORK
REVERSE SHIFT PIECE
13-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０３５４９０１ＭＦＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:55 61TL2000_130_0043
Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection

1. Support the bearing inner race with an appropriate 3. Measure the thickness of 3rd gear.
sized socket (A), and push down on the mainshaft
(B). • If the thickness is less than the service limit,
＊０１ replace 3rd gear.
• If the thickness is within the service limit, replace
the 3rd/4th synchro hub and 3rd/4th synchro
B
sleeve as a set.
Standard: 23.92−23.97 mm (0.942−0.944 in.)

C Service Limit: 23.80 mm (0.937 in.)
E ＊０２
D
A
2. Measure the clearance between 2nd gear (C) and

3rd gear (D) with a feeler gauge (E).
• If the clearance exceeds the service limit, go to

step 3. 4. Measure the clearance between 4th gear (A) and
• If the clearance is within the service limit, go to the distance collar (B) with a dial indicator (C).
step 4.
Standard: 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.) step 5.
Service Limit: 0.25 mm (0.010 in.) • If the clearance is within the service limit, go to
step 7.
Standard: 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.)

＊０３
A
C
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-43
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０４０００００ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:55 61TL2000_130_0044
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection (cont’d)

5. Measure the length of the 4th/5th gear distance 7. Measure the clearance between the distance collar
collar as shown. (A) and 5th gear (B) with a dial indicator (C).
• If the length is not within the standard, replace • If the clearance exceeds the service limit, go to
the 4th/5th gear distance collar. step 8.
• If the length is within the standard, go to • If the clearance is within the service limit, go to
step 6. step 10.

＊０４ Service Limit: 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)
＊０６
C
A
6. Measure the thickness of 4th gear.
• If the thickness is less than the service limit,

B
replace 4th gear.
• If the thickness is within the service limit, replace 8. Measure the length of the 4th/5th gear distance
the 3rd/4th synchro hub and 3rd/4th synchro collar as shown.
sleeve as a set.
• If the length is not within the standard, replace
Standard: 23.92−23.97 mm (0.942−0.944 in.) the 4th/5th gear distance collar.
Service Limit: 23.80 mm (0.937 in.) • If the length is within the standard, go to
＊０５ step 9.
Standard: 24.03−24.08 mm (0.946−0.948 in.)

＊０７
13-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:56 61TL2000_130_0045
9. Measure the thickness of 5th gear. 11. Measure the length of the 6th gear distance collar.
• If the thickness is less than the service limit, • If the length is not within the standard, replace
replace 5th gear. the 6th gear distance collar.
• If the thickness is within the service limit, replace • If the length is within the standard, go to step 12.
the 5th/6th synchro hub and 5th/6th synchro
sleeve as a set. Standard: 24.03−24.08 mm (0.946−0.948 in.)
＊１０
Standard: 23.92−23.97 mm (0.942−0.944 in.)
＊０８
12. Measure the thickness of 6th gear.

10. Measure the clearance between 6th gear (A) and replace 6th gear.
the angular ball bearing (B) with a feeler gauge (C). • If the thickness is within the service limit, replace
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step the 5th/6th synchro hub and 5th/6th synchro
11. sleeve as a set.

Service Limit: 0.34 mm (0.013 in.) Service Limit: 23.71 mm (0.933 in.)
＊０９＊１１
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-45

08/04/09 12:24:56 61TL2000_130_0046
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Disassembly
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View in the Mainshaft 2. Support 5th gear (A) on steel blocks, and press the
Reassembly, as needed, to remove components except mainshaft out of the 5th/6th synchro hub (B) and
those pressed on the mainshaft (see page 13-48). 5th gear.
1. Remove the angular ball bearing (A) using a NOTE: Do not use a jaw-type puller; it can damage
commercially available bearing separator (B) and the gear teeth.
bearing puller (C). ＊０２
＊０１
3. Support 3rd gear (A) on steel blocks, and press the

mainshaft out of the 3rd/4th synchro hub (B) and
3rd gear.
NOTE: Do not use a jaw-type puller; it can damage

the gear teeth.
＊０３
13-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０４０００００ＬＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:56 61TL2000_130_0047
Mainshaft Inspection
1. Inspect the gear and bearing contact areas for wear 2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the
and damage, then measure the mainshaft at points mainshaft. Then rotate the mainshaft two complete
A, B, C, D, and E. If any part of the mainshaft is less turns while measuring with a dial gauge. If the
than the service limit, replace it. runout exceeds the service limit, replace the
mainshaft.
Standard:
A Ball Bearing Contact Area (Transmission Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Housing Side): Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
27.987−28.000 mm (1.1019−1.1024 in.) ＊１３
B 4th/5th Gear Distance Collar Contact Area:
31.984−32.000 mm (1.2592−1.2598 in.)
C Needle Bearing Contact Area:
38.984−39.000 mm (1.5348−1.5354 in.)
D Ball Bearing Contact Area (Clutch Housing Side):
27.977−27.990 mm (1.1015−1.1020 in.)
E Bushing Contact Area:
20.80−20.85 mm (0.819−0.821 in.)
Service Limit:
A: 27.93 mm (1.100 in.)
B: 31.93 mm (1.257 in.)
C: 38.93 mm (1.533 in.)
D: 27.92 mm (1.099 in.)
E: 20.75 mm (0.817 in.)
＊１２
E
D
C
B
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-47
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０４０００００ＭＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:24:57 61TL2000_130_0048
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
＊０１
ANGULAR BALL BEARING
Check for wear and operation.
Note the direction of
3RD/4TH installation.
SYNCHRO
SLEEVE 6TH GEAR
installation.
3RD/4TH NEEDLE BEARING
SYNCHRO HUB Check for wear and operation.
Note the direction of installation.
6TH GEAR
SYNCHRO DISTANCE COLLAR
SPRING
SYNCHRO RING
SYNCHRO RING* SYNCHRO SPRING
SYNCHRO CONE*
5TH/6TH SYNCHRO SLEEVE
INNER RING*
3RD GEAR 5TH/6TH SYNCHRO HUB
SYNCHRO SPRING
NEEDLE BEARING
Check for wear and operation. SYNCHRO RING
5TH GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
MAINSHAFT Check for wear and operation.
4TH GEAR
4TH/5TH GEAR DISTANCE COLLAR
INNER RING*
SYNCHRO CONE*
SYNCHRO RING*
SYNCHRO SPRING
*: The components of the double cone synchro assembly.
13-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０４０００００ＬＤＡＴ００
08/04/14 13:22:55 61TL2000_130_0049
Special Tools Required 3. Install the double cone synchro assembly (A) with
• Inner driver handle, 40 mm 07746-0030100 the synchro spring (B) by aligning the synchro cone
• Inner bearing driver attachment, 30 mm fingers (C) with the holes (D) in 3rd gear.
07746-0030300 ＊０３
B
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during
this procedure.
1. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply

A
MTF to all contact surfaces.
2. Install the needle bearing (A) and 3rd gear (B) onto
the mainshaft (C). C
＊０２
D
B
4. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A) by aligning the

A synchro ring fingers (B) with the grooves (C) in the
3rd/4th synchro hub.
NOTE: Make sure to install the 3rd/4th synchro hub

C
in the direction shown.
＊０４
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-49

08/04/09 12:24:57 61TL2000_130_0050
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Reassembly (cont’d)

5. Press on the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A) using the 7. Install the double cone synchro assembly (A) with
40 mm inner driver handle (B) and a press (C). the synchro spring (B) by aligning the synchro ring
＊０５ fingers (C) with the grooves (D) in the 3rd/4th
C synchro hub.
＊０７
B
07746-0030100
A
B
C
D
6. Install the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve (A) by aligning
the stops (B) of the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and the 8. Install 4th gear (A) by aligning the synchro cone
3rd/4th synchro hub. After installing, check the fingers (B) with the holes (C) in 4th gear.
operation of the 3rd/4th synchro hub set. ＊０８
A
＊０６
A
13-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:58 61TL2000_130_0051
9. Install the 4th/5th gear distance collar (A) with the 12. Press on the 5th/6th synchro hub (A) using the
needle bearings (B) and 5th gear (C). 40 mm inner driver handle (B), the 30 mm inner
＊０９ bearing driver attachment (C), and a press (D).
E ＊１１
D
C B
07746-0030100
C
A 07746-0030300
B
13. Install the 5th/6th synchro sleeve (A) by aligning

the slots of the 5th/6th synchro sleeve and the 5th/
6th synchro hub (B). After installing, check the
operation of the 5th/6th synchro hub set.
10. Install the synchro ring (D) with the synchro spring
(E) onto 5th gear. NOTE: Make sure to align the slots in the 5th/6th
synchro hub as shown.
11. Install the 5th/6th synchro hub (A) by aligning the ＊１２
synchro ring fingers (B) with the grooves (C) in the
5th/6th synchro hub.
＊１０
A
C A
B
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-51

08/04/09 12:24:58 61TL2000_130_0052
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Reassembly (cont’d)

14. Install the synchro ring (A) with the synchro spring
(B) by aligning the synchro ring fingers (C) with the
grooves (D) in the 5th/6th synchro hub.
＊１３
B
C
15. Install the 6th gear distance collar (E) with the
needle bearing (F) and 6th gear (G).
16. Press on the new angular ball bearing (A) using the
40 mm inner driver handle (B), the 30 mm inner
bearing driver attachment (C), and a press (D).
＊１４
D
B
07746-0030100
C
07746-0030300 A
13-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:24:59 61TL2000_130_0053
Countershaft Assembly Clearance Inspection

NOTE: Before inspection, make sure the special bolt is 3. Measure the thickness of 1st gear.
tightened to the specified torque (see page 13-56).
1. Measure the clearance between 1st gear (A) and replace 1st gear.
the distance collar (B) with a feeler gauge (C). • If the thickness is within the service limit, replace
the 1st/2nd synchro hub and reverse gear as a set.
step 2. Standard: 22.92−22.97 mm (0.902−0.904 in.)
• If the clearance is within the service limit, go to Service Limit: 22.87 mm (0.900 in.)
step 4. ＊０３
Standard: 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.)

＊０１
C A
4. Measure the clearance between 2nd gear (A) and

3rd gear (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance
exceeds the service limit, go to step 5.
B Standard: 0.06−0.16 mm (0.002−0.006 in.)

2. Measure the length of the 1st gear distance collar ＊０４
as shown.
• If the length is not within the standard, replace B

the 1st gear distance collar.
C
• If the length is within the standard, go to step 3.
Standard: 23.03−23.08 mm (0.907−0.909 in.)

＊０２
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-53
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０２０００００ＭＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:24:59 61TL2000_130_0054
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Assembly Clearance Countershaft Disassembly

Inspection (cont’d)
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View in the Countershaft
Reassembly, as needed, to remove components except
5. Measure the length of the 2nd gear distance collar. those pressed on the countershaft (see page 13-56).
• If the length is not within the standard, replace 1. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a
the 2nd gear distance collar. bench vise with wood blocks.
• If the length is within the standard, go to step 6. ＊０１
Standard: 28.03−28.08 mm (1.104−1.106 in.)

＊０５
6. Measure the thickness of 2nd gear.

2. Remove the special bolt (left-hand threads).
replace 2nd gear. 3. Support 6th gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a
• If the thickness is within the service limit, replace press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the
the 1st/2nd synchro hub and reverse gear as a set. countershaft out of the ball bearing and the 6th
gear.
Standard: 27.92−27.97 mm (1.099−1.101 in.) ＊０２
＊０６ C
4. Remove the 35 mm shim.
13-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０２０００００ＬＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:24:59 61TL2000_130_0055
Countershaft Inspection
5. Support 4th gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a 1. Inspect the gear and bearing contact areas for wear
press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the and damage, then measure the countershaft at
countershaft (E) out of 5th gear and 4th gear. points A, B, and C. If any part of the countershaft is
＊０３ less than the service limit, replace it.
C
D Standard:
A Ball Bearing Contact Area (Transmission
E Housing Side):
30.020−30.033 mm (1.1819−1.1824 in.)
A
B 1st Gear Distance Collar Contact Area:
39.937-39.950 mm (1.5723-1.5728 in.)
C Needle Bearing Contact Area (Clutch Housing
Side):
35.000-35.015 mm (1.3780-1.3785 in.)
B Service Limit:
A: 29.97 mm (1.180 in.)
B: 39.883 mm (1.5702 in.)
C: 34.95 mm (1.3760 in.)
6. Support 2nd gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a ＊０７
press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the C
countershaft (E) out of 3rd gear and 2nd gear. B
＊０４
C
B
2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the
countershaft. Then rotate the countershaft two
complete turns while measuring with a dial gauge.
If the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the
countershaft.
Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.

＊０８
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-55
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０２０００００ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:00 61TL2000_130_0056
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Reassembly
Exploded View
＊０１
SPECIAL BOLT
NOTE: Left-hand threads.
REVERSE GEAR 119 N·m (12.1 kgf·m, 87.5 lbf·ft)
(1ST/2ND SYNCHRO SLEEVE) Replace.
BALL BEARING
Check for wear
and operation.
Note the direction
of installation.
1ST/2ND
SYNCHRO HUB
Note the direction of 35 mm SHIM
installation.
SYNCHRO SPRING 6TH GEAR
SYNCHRO RING*
5TH GEAR
SYNCHRO CONE*
INNER RING* 4TH GEAR
1ST GEAR 3RD GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING 2ND GEAR

Check for wear and
operation. NEEDLE BEARING
Check for wear and
operation.
1ST GEAR
DISTANCE COLLAR 2ND GEAR
DISTANCE COLLAR
FRICTION DAMPER
Check for wear
and damage.
installation.
INNER RING*
SYNCHRO CONE*
SYNCHRO RING*
COUNTERSHAFT
SYNCHRO SPRING
*: The components of the triple cone synchro assembly.
13-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０２０００００ＬＤＡＴ００
08/04/14 13:23:00 61TL2000_130_0057
Special Tools Required 4. Install the 1st/2nd synchro hub (A) by aligning the
• Inner driver handle, 40 mm 07746-0030100 synchro ring fingers (B) with the grooves (C) in the
• Inner bearing driver attachment, 30 mm 1st/2nd synchro hub.
07746-0030300 ＊０４
A
this procedure.
1. Clean all parts in solvent, dry them, and apply MTF

C
to all contact surfaces.
2. Install the 1st gear distance collar (A) with the

needle bearing (B) and 1st gear (C) onto the
countershaft (D).
＊０２
B
C
5. Install reverse gear (A) by aligning the slots of
B reverse gear and the 1st/2nd synchro hub (B). After
installing, check the operation of the 1st/2nd
synchro hub set.
A
NOTE: Make sure to align the slots in the 1st/2nd
synchro hub as shown.
＊０５
D
3. Install the triple cone synchro assembly (A) with the

synchro spring (B) by aligning the synchro cone
fingers (C) with the grooves (D) in 1st gear. B
＊０３
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-57

08/04/09 12:25:01 61TL2000_130_0058
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Reassembly (cont’d)

6. Install the triple cone synchro assembly (A) with the 8. Install the needle bearing (A).
synchro spring (B) by aligning the synchro ring ＊０８
fingers (C) with the grooves (D) in the 1st/2nd B
synchro hub.
＊０６ D
C B A
7. Install the 2nd gear distance collar (A) and friction 9. Install 2nd gear (B) by aligning the synchro cone
damper (B) by aligning the friction damper fingers fingers (C) with the grooves (D) in 2nd gear.
(C) with the grooves (D) in the 1st/2nd synchro hub.
＊０７ 10. Support the countershaft (A) on steel blocks, then
B press on 3rd gear (B) using the 40 mm inner driver
A
handle (C) and a press (D).
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum pressure.

＊０９
D
C 25,480 N
(2,600 kgf,
5,730 lbf)
max.
D C
07746-0030100
13-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:01 61TL2000_130_0059
11. Press on 4th gear (A) using the 40 mm inner driver 13. Press on 6th gear (A) using the 40 mm inner driver
handle (B) and a press (C). handle (B), the 30 mm inner bearing driver
attachment (C), and a press (D).
＊１０ NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum pressure.
＊１２
C D
25,480 N 25,480 N
(2,600 kgf, (2,600 kgf,
5,730 lbf)
5,730 lbf) max.
max.
B
07746-0030100
B
07746-0030100
A C
07746-0030300 A
14. Install the 35 mm shim (A) and temporarily press

12. Press on 5th gear (A) using the 40 mm inner driver on the used old ball bearing (B) using the 40 mm
handle (B) and a press (C). inner driver handle (C), the 30 mm inner bearing
driver attachment (D), and a press (E).
＊１１ NOTE:
C • Use any size of 35 mm shim, and note size you
25,480 N
(2,600 kgf, used. Measurements taken in the following steps
5,730 lbf) will determine the correct shim to use for final
max.
assembly.
• Make sure the ball bearing is installed in the
correct direction.
B
07746-0030100 ＊１３
E
A
C
B 07746-0030100
D
07746-0030300
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-59

08/04/09 12:25:02 61TL2000_130_0060
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Reassembly (cont’d)

15. Measure the clearance between the bearing (A) and 16. If the measured clearance in step 15 is not within
the 35 mm shim (B) with a feeler gauge (C). the standard, select another suitable 35 mm shim
from the table, then go to next step to replace the
Standard: 0.04−0.10 mm (0.0016−0.0039 in.) 35 mm shim and the ball bearing with a new one. If
＊１４ the measured clearance in step 15 is within the
A
standard, go to the next step to replace the only the
ball bearing with a new one.
35 mm Shim
Type Part Number Thickness
A 23981-PPP-000 0.87 mm (0.034 in.)
C
AA 23981-PPP-900 0.91 mm (0.036 in.)
B 23982-PPP-000 0.95 mm (0.037 in.)
B AB 23982-PPP-900 0.99 mm (0.039 in.)
C 23983-PPP-000 1.03 mm (0.041 in.)
AC 23983-PPP-900 1.07 mm (0.042 in.)
D 23984-PPP-000 1.11 mm (0.044 in.)
AD 23984-PPP-900 1.15 mm (0.045 in.)
E 23985-PPP-000 1.19 mm (0.047 in.)
AE 23985-PPP-900 1.23 mm (0.048 in.)
F 23986-PPP-000 1.27 mm (0.050 in.)
AF 23986-PPP-900 1.31 mm (0.052 in.)
G 23987-PPP-000 1.35 mm (0.053 in.)
AG 23987-PPP-900 1.39 mm (0.055 in.)
H 23988-PPP-000 1.43 mm (0.056 in.)
AH 23988-PPP-900 1.47 mm (0.058 in.)
J 23989-PPP-000 1.51 mm (0.060 in.)
AJ 23989-PPP-900 1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
K 23990-PPP-000 1.59 mm (0.063 in.)
AK 23990-PPP-900 1.63 mm (0.064 in.)
L 23991-PPP-000 1.67 mm (0.066 in.)
AL 23991-PPP-900 1.71 mm (0.067 in.)
M 23992-PPP-000 1.75 mm (0.069 in.)
AM 23992-PPP-900 1.79 mm (0.070 in.)
N 23993-PPP-000 1.83 mm (0.072 in.)
AN 23993-PPP-900 1.87 mm (0.074 in.)
P 23994-PPP-000 1.91 mm (0.075 in.)
AP 23994-PPP-900 1.95 mm (0.077 in.)
Q 23995-PPP-000 1.99 mm (0.078 in.)
13-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:22 61TL2000_130_0061
17. Remove 6th gear with the ball bearing and the 21. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a
35 mm shim using a press (see step 3 on page bench vise with wood blocks (A).
13-54). ＊１６
18. Repeat step 13 to install 6th gear.
19. Install the correct 35 mm shim (A) and new ball

bearing (B) using the 40 mm inner driver handle (C),
the 30 mm inner bearing driver attachment (D), and B
a press (E). 20 x 1.5 mm
119 N·m
(12.1 kgf·m,
NOTE: 87.5 lbf·ft)
• If necessary, replace the 35 mm shim with the Replace.
correct one selected in step 16.
• Make sure the ball bearing is installed in the
correct direction.
＊１５
E
C
07746-0030100
B A
22. Tighten the new special bolt (B) (left-hand threads).
D NOTE: Apply new MTF to the bolt threads and

07746-0030300
flange.
20. Check the clearance between the bearing and the

35 mm shim with a feeler gauge.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-61

08/04/09 12:25:22 61TL2000_130_0062
Manual Transmission
Synchro Sleeve and Hub Inspection Synchro Ring and Gear Inspection
and Reassembly
1. Inspect the inside of each synchro ring (A) for wear.
Inspect the teeth (B) on each synchro ring for wear
1. Inspect the gear teeth on all synchro hubs and (rounded off).
synchro sleeves for wear (rounded off corners). ＊０１
2. Install each synchro hub (A) in its mating synchro

sleeve (B), and check for free movement. Make
sure to match the three sets of longer teeth (C)
(120 degrees apart) on the synchro sleeve with the
three sets of deeper grooves (D) in the synchro hub.
B
NOTE:
• Do not install the synchro sleeve with its longer
A
teeth in the 1st/2nd and 5th/6th synchro hub slots
(E) because it will damage the spring ring.
• If replacement is required, always replace the
synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set.
＊０１
B Example of synchro ring teeth
GOOD WORN
2. Inspect the teeth (A) on each synchro sleeve and

matching teeth on each gear for wear (rounded off).
＊０２
C
Example of synchro sleeve teeth and gear teeth
GOOD WORN
13-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１７１１５７３３１ＭＧＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１７１１５７３２１ＭＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:25:22 61TL2000_130_0063
3. Inspect the thrust surface (A) on each gear hub for ＊０６
wear.
＊０３
B
B
C
A
4. Inspect the cone surface (B) on each gear hub for Synchro ring-to-gear
wear and roughness. ＊０４
B
5. Inspect the teeth on all gears (C) for uneven wear,

scoring, and cracks.
6. Coat the cone surface of each gear with MTF, and

place its synchro ring on it. Rotate the synchro ring,
making sure that it does not slip.
7. Measure the clearance between each gear (A) and

its synchro ring (B) all around the gear. Hold the
synchro ring against the gear evenly while
measuring the clearance. If the clearance is less
A
than the service limit, replace the synchro ring and
gear.
Double cone synchro and triple cone synchro-to-
Synchro Ring-to-Gear Clearance gear
Standard: 0.70−1.49 mm (0.028−0.059 in.) ＊０５
B
Double Cone Synchro and Triple Cone Synchro-to-

Gear Clearance
Standard:
: Outer Synchro Ring (B) to Synchro Cone (C)
0.70−1.19 mm (0.028−0.047 in.)
: Synchro Cone (C) to Gear (A)
0.50−1.04 mm (0.020−0.041 in.)
: Outer Synchro Ring (B) to Gear (A)
0.95−1.68 mm (0.037−0.066 in.)
Service Limit:
C
: 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)
A
: 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)
: 0.6 mm (0.024 in.)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-63

08/04/09 12:25:23 61TL2000_130_0064
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Drive in the new oil seal from the transmission side
• Oil seal driver, 65 mm 07JAD-PL90100 using the 15 x 135L driver handle (A) and the 42 x
• Adjustable bearing puller, 20 −40 mm 47 mm bearing driver attachment (B).
07736-A01000B ＊０３
• Driver handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
• Slide hammer, 3/8’’-16 UNF commercially available
A
07749-0010000
1. Remove the ball bearing (A) from the clutch
housing (B) using the 20−40 mm adjustable
B
bearing puller (C) and a commercially available 07746-0010300
3/8’’-16 UNF slide hammer (D).
＊０１
C
07736-A01000B
4. Drive in the new ball bearing (A) from the
A transmission side using the 65 mm oil seal driver
(B).
＊０４
B
07JAD-PL90100
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch housing. Be
careful when removing the oil seal so the clutch
housing is not damaged.
＊０２
13-64 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０４３９５０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:23 61TL2000_130_0065
Countershaft Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Position oil guide plate C and the new needle
• Oil seal driver, 65 mm 07JAD-PL90100 bearing (A) in the bore of the clutch housing (B).
• Adjustable bearing puller, 20 −40 mm ＊０３
A
07736-A01000B
• Slide hammer, 3/8’’-16 UNF commercially available
1. Remove the bearing set plate (A) from the clutch

housing (B).
＊０１
A C
B
D
07JAD-PL90100
4. Install the needle bearing using the 65 mm oil seal

driver (D).
5. Install the bearing set plate (A) with bolts (B).

＊０４
B
2. Remove the needle bearing (A) using the 6 x 1.0 mm
20−40 mm adjustable bearing puller (B) and a 13N·m
commercially available 3/8’’-16 UNF slide hammer (1.3 kgf·m,
9.4 lbf·ft)
(D), then remove oil guide plate C.
＊０２
D A
C
B
07736-A01000B
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-65
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０２１７４２１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:24 61TL2000_130_0066
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment

Special Tools Required 2. Thoroughly clean the 28 mm spring washer (A) and
• Catch adapter 07GAJ-PG20110 the 28 mm washer (B) before installing them on the
• Base adapter 07GAJ-PG20130 clutch housing side ball bearing (C). Note the
installation direction of the spring washer.
1. Remove the 72 mm shim (A) and oil guide plate M ＊０２
from the transmission housing (B).
＊０１ B
A
C A
M
3. Assemble all of the mainshaft components

correctly (see page 13-48).
B
4. Install the mainshaft assembly into the clutch

housing.
5. Place the transmission housing over the mainshaft

and onto the clutch housing.
6. Tighten the clutch and transmission housings with

several 8 mm bolts.
NOTE: It is not necessary to use sealing agent

between the housing for this procedure.
7. Lightly tap on the mainshaft with a plastic hammer.
13-66 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０４０００００ＭＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:24 61TL2000_130_0067
8. Attach the catch adapter (A) and base adapter (B) to 11. Zero a dial gauge (A) on the end of the mainshaft.
the mainshaft as follows: ＊０４
A
• Back out the catch adapter bolt (C), and loosen 07GAJ-PG20110
the two hex bolts (D).
• Fit the holder over the mainshaft so its lip is
towards the transmission. B
• Align the catch adapter lip around the groove at
the inside of the mainshaft splines, then tighten
the hex bolts.
＊０３
A
C 07GAJ-PG20110
D
07GAJ-PG20130
12. Turn the mainshaft holder bolt (B) clockwise; stop

B turning when the dial gauge has reached its
07GAJ-PG20130 maximum movement. The reading on the dial
gauge is the amount of mainshaft thrust clearance.
NOTE: Do not turn the catch adapter bolt more than

60 degrees after the needle of the dial gauge stops
9. Fully seat the mainshaft by tapping its end with a moving. Applying more pressure with the catch
plastic hammer. adapter bolt could damage the transmission.
10. Thread the catch adapter bolt in until it just contacts

the wide surface of the base adapter.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-67

08/04/09 12:25:24 61TL2000_130_0068
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment (cont’d)

13. If the reading is with in the standard, the clearance 72 mm Shim
is correct. If the reading is not within the standard, Type Part Number Thickness
select the appropriate shim needed from the table, AA 23957-P21-000 1.38 mm (0.054 in.)
and recheck the thrust clearance. AB 23958-P21-000 1.41 mm (0.056 in.)
AC 23959-P21-000 1.44 mm (0.057 in.)
Standard: 0.11−0.17 mm (0.004−0.007 in.) AD 23960-P21-000 1.47 mm (0.058 in.)
AE 23961-P21-000 1.50 mm (0.059 in.)
(Example) AF 23962-P21-000 1.53 mm (0.060 in.)
Measure reading: 1.93 mm (0.076 in.) AG 23963-P21-000 1.56 mm (0.061 in.)
AH 23964-P21-000 1.59 mm (0.063 in.)
Subtract the total clearance measurement from the AI 23965-P21-000 1.62 mm (0.064 in.)
middle of the clearance standard 0.14 mm AJ 23966-P21-000 1.65 mm (0.065 in.)
(0.0056 in.). AK 23967-P21-000 1.68 mm (0.066 in.)
AL 23968-P21-000 1.71 mm (0.067 in.)
1.93 − 0.14 (0.076−0.006) = 1.79 mm (0.070 in.) AM 23969-P21-000 1.74 mm (0.069 in.)
AN 23970-P21-000 1.77 mm (0.070 in.)
Select the shim closest to the amount calculated, AO 23971-P21-000 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
for example the 1.80 mm (0.071 in.) shim. AP 23972-PPP-J00 1.83 mm (0.072 in.)
AQ 23973-PPP-J00 1.86 mm (0.073 in.)
14. With oil guide plate M and the appropriate size AR 23974-PPP-J00 1.89 mm (0.074 in.)
shim installed in the transmission housing, check AS 23975-PPP-J00 1.92 mm (0.076 in.)
the thrust clearance again to verify the clearance is AT 23976-PPP-J00 1.95 mm (0.077 in.)
within the standard. AV 23977-PPP-J00 1.98 mm (0.078 in.)
AW 23978-PPP-J00 2.01 mm (0.079 in.)
72 mm Shim AX 23979-PPP-J00 2.04 mm (0.080 in.)
Type Part Number Thickness AY 23980-PPP-J00 2.07 mm (0.081 in.)
A 23931-P21-000 0.60 mm (0.024 in.) AZ 23981-PPP-J00 2.10 mm (0.083 in.)
B 23932-P21-000 0.63 mm (0.025 in.) BA 23982-PPP-J00 2.13 mm (0.084 in.)
C 23933-P21-000 0.66 mm (0.026 in.) BB 23983-PPP-J00 2.16 mm (0.085 in.)
D 23934-P21-000 0.69 mm (0.027 in.) BC 23984-PPP-J00 2.19 mm (0.086 in.)
E 23935-P21-000 0.72 mm (0.028 in.) BD 23985-PPP-J00 2.22 mm (0.087 in.)
F 23936-P21-000 0.75 mm (0.030 in.) BE 23986-PPP-J00 2.25 mm (0.089 in.)
G 23937-P21-000 0.78 mm (0.031 in.)
H 23938-P21-000 0.81 mm (0.032 in.)
I 23939-P21-000 0.84 mm (0.033 in.)
J 23940-P21-000 0.87 mm (0.034 in.)
K 23941-P21-000 0.90 mm (0.035 in.)
L 23942-P21-000 0.93 mm (0.037 in.)
M 23943-P21-000 0.96 mm (0.038 in.)
N 23944-P21-000 0.99 mm (0.039 in.)
O 23945-P21-000 1.02 mm (0.040 in.)
P 23946-P21-000 1.05 mm (0.041 in.)
Q 23947-P21-000 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
R 23948-P21-000 1.11 mm (0.044 in.)
S 23949-P21-000 1.14 mm (0.045 in.)
T 23950-P21-000 1.17 mm (0.046 in.)
U 23951-P21-000 1.20 mm (0.047 in.)
V 23952-P21-000 1.23 mm (0.048 in.)
W 23953-P21-000 1.26 mm (0.050 in.)
X 23954-P21-000 1.29 mm (0.051 in.)
Y 23955-P21-000 1.32 mm (0.052 in.)
Z 23956-P21-000 1.35 mm (0.053 in.)
13-68 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:24 61TL2000_130_0069
Transmission Reassembly
NOTE: Prior to reassembly, clean all parts in solvent, 2. Install the 28 mm spring washer (A) and the 28 mm
dry them, and apply MTF to any contact surfaces. washer (B) over the ball bearing (C). Note the
installation direction of the spring washer.
1. Install the magnet (A) and differential assembly (B). ＊０２
E F
NOTE: Clean the magnet anytime the transmission

is disassembled.
＊０１ G
A
D
B
3. Apply vinyl tape to the mainshaft splines (D) to

protect the seal. Install the mainshaft assembly (E)
and the countershaft assembly (F) with the shift
fork assembly (G), as an assembly.
4. Install the reverse shift fork (A).

＊０３
6 x 1.0 mm
15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-69
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０１０００００ＬＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:25 61TL2000_130_0070
Manual Transmission
Transmission Reassembly (cont’d)

5. Install the reverse idler gear (A) and the reverse 7. Select the proper size 72 mm shim (A) according to
idler gear shaft (B) by aligning the mark (C) on the the measurements made during the Mainshaft
clutch housing with the reverse idler gear shaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment (see page 13-66).
hole (D). Install the oil gutter plate (B), oil guide plate M, and
＊０４ the 72 mm shim into the transmission housing (C).
D ＊０６
B
A
C
B
M
6. Install the baffle plate (A).

＊０５ 8. Clean any dirt or oil from the transmission housing
sealing surface.
9. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,

08718-0003, or 08718-0009 evenly to the clutch
housing mating surface of the transmission
housing. Install the component within 5 minutes of
applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
• If apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
A
＊０７
Liquid gasket
13-70 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:26 61TL2000_130_0071
10. Install the three 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (A). 14. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
＊０８ 08718-0012, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to the
threads of the 32 mm sealing cap, and install it on
D the transmission housing.
34 N·m
(3.5 kgf·m,
25 lbf·ft) 15. Install the 8 mm flange bolts finger-tight with
transmission hanger A, transmission hanger B, and
the harness bracket (C).
C ＊１０
A B
C
11. Place the transmission housing on the clutch
housing, making sure to line up the shafts.
12. While expanding the 72 mm snap ring (C) on the 16. Torque the 8 mm flange bolts in a crisscross
countershaft ball bearing using snap ring pliers, pattern in several steps.
push the transmission housing down to start the
countershaft ball bearing through the snap ring. Specified Torque: 8 x 1.25 mm
Release the pliers, and push down the housing until 27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ft)
it bottoms and the snap ring snaps in place in the ＊１１
countershaft ball bearing snap ring groove.
NOTE: Install the 32 mm sealing cap (D) after

setting in the 72 mm snap ring.
13. Make sure the 72 mm snap ring (A) is securely

seated in the groove of the countershaft bearing.
Dimension as installed: 3.3−6.0 mm

(0.13−0.24 in.)
＊０９
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-71

08/04/09 12:25:26 61TL2000_130_0072
Manual Transmission
Transmission Reassembly (cont’d)

17. Clean any dirt or oil from the change lever 21. Install the filler plug (A) with a new washer finger-
assembly sealing surface. tight, and install the drain plug (B) and the 10 mm
flange bolt (C) with new sealing washers (D).
18. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, ＊１４
A
08718-0003, or 08718-0009 evenly to the 44 N·m
transmission housing mating surface of the change (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) D
lever assembly. Install the component within Replace.
5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
B
NOTE:
• If apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
• If too much time has passed after applying the E
Replace.
＊１２ G
D
F Replace.
C
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
22. Install the new O-ring (E), the plain washer (F), and
the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (G).
23. Install the steel balls (A), the springs (B), and the
Liquid gasket detent bolts (C) with new 12 mm sealing washers
(D).
19. Install the 8 x 14 mm dowel pins (A) and the change ＊１５
lever assembly (B).
＊１３
A D
Replace.
B
A C
39 N·m A
(4.0 kgf·m, B
29 lbf·ft)
C E G
22 N·m 44 N·m 29 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm (2.2 kgf·m, (4.5 kgf·m, F (3.0 kgf·m,
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 16 lbf·ft) 33 lbf·ft) Replace. 22 lbf·ft)
20. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 24. Install the 20 mm bolt (E) with the new 20 mm
08718-0012, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to the sealing washer (F).
threads of the interlock bolt (C), and install it on the
transmission housing. 25. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0012, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009) to the
threads of the back-up light switch (G), and install it
in the transmission housing.
13-72 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:25:27 61TL2000_130_0073
Gearshift Mechanism Replacement

NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially if you
have silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
＊０１
When installing the shift cables
(transmission side), position the
paint mark facing upward.
SHIFT LEVER KNOB

LOCK PINS
LOCKNUT
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) CABLE CLIPS
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
8 x 1.25 mm
27 N·m
SHIFT CABLES
OUTER SOCKETS
SHIFT LEVER
HOUSING 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
COTTER PIN
Replace.
WASHER
When installing the shift cable (shift lever side),

position the serrated side facing up.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-73
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０３３９１２１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:27 61TL2000_130_0074
Manual Transmission
Shift Lever Housing Replacement

Special Tools Required 4. Unlock the retainer (A).
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 ＊０３
Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE:
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to A
avoid damage when removing components.
• Take care not to scratch the center console,
dashboard, and related parts.
C D
1. Remove the center console panel (see page 20-111).
B
2. Remove the harness clamps.
E F
＊０１ G
5. Rotate the socket holder retainer (B)

counterclockwise (C) until it stops, and push the
retainer lock (D) into the socket holder retainer to
lock the retainer.
6. Slide the socket holder (E), and the shift cable (F)
out of the shift cable bracket (G). Do not remove the
shift cable by pulling the shift cable guide (H).
7. Remove the shift lever assembly (A) from the shift

3. Remove the cotter pin (A), the washer (B), and the cable (B) and the select cable (C).
bolts. ＊０４
＊０２
A
C
B A
B
13-74 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０３５４９８８ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:28 61TL2000_130_0075
8. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cables (B) 9. Install the bolts, the washer (A), and the cotter pin
with the slot in the bracket base (C), then slide the (B), then bend the cotter pin ends.
holder into the base. Install the shift cable ends (D)
to the shift lever assembly (E) then install the shift NOTE: You can install the cotter pin from either
lever assembly. direction.
＊０７
NOTE: When installing the shift cable (shift lever 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
side), position the serrated side (F) facing up.
＊０５
D
F
B A B
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
D
10. Install the harness clamps.
＊０８
＊０６
C A
11. Install the center console panel (see page 20-111).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-75

08/04/09 12:25:29 61TL2000_130_0076
M/T Differential
＊０１
40 x 56 x 8 mm OIL SEAL
80 mm SHIM
Differential Thrust Clearance
Adjustment, page 13-80
CARRIER BEARING
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection, page 13-77
CARRIER BEARING
35 x 58 x 8 mm OIL SEAL
13-76 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０７０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:29 61TL2000_130_0077
Backlash Inspection Differential Carrier, Final Driven

Gear Replacement
1. Install the driveshaft and intermediate shaft into the
differential assembly.
1. Loosen the bolts in a crisscross pattern in several
2. Carefully clamp the driveshaft (A) in a vise (B). steps, then remove the bolts and the final driven
＊０１ gear (A) from the differential carrier (B).
G
NOTE: The bolts have left-hand threads.
A
F ＊０１
11 x 1.0 mm (14)
130 N·m (13.3 kgf·m, 96.2 lbf·ft)
B C
D
E
3. Place the intermediate shaft (C) on a V-block (D),

then fix the intermediate shaft using vise grips or B
equivalent (E).
4. Measure the backlash of the final driven gear (F) 2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfer on the
with a dial indicator (G). If the backlash is not within inside diameter facing the carrier. Tighten the bolts
the standard, check the differential carrier and in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
replace it if necessary.
NOTE: The bolts have left-hand threads.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-77
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０７１９６２２ＭＡＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０７２７００２ＫＢＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:25:30 61TL2000_130_0078
M/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Install the new bearings (A) with the 40 mm inner
Inner driver handle, 40 mm 07746-0030100 driver handle (B) and a press (C). Press on each
bearing until it bottoms. There should be no
1. Check the carrier bearings for wear and rough clearance between the bearings and the differential
rotation. If they rotate smoothly and their rollers carrier.
show no signs of wear, the bearings are OK.
NOTE: Place the seal (D) part of the bearing
2. Remove the carrier bearings (A) with a towards the outside of the differential, then install it.
commercially available bearing puller (B). ＊０３
C
＊０１
D
B
B 07746-0030100
A
＊０４
C
D
＊０２ B
07746-0030100
A
B
13-78 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０７１９６１２ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:30 61TL2000_130_0079
Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal in the transmission housing
• Driver handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 with the 15 x 135L driver handle (A) and the oil seal
• Oil seal driver attachment 07NAD-P20A100 driver attachment (B).
＊０３
1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmission
A
housing (B). 07749-0010000
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the transmission

housing while removing the oil seals.
＊０１
B
07NAD-P20A100
B 4. Install the new oil seal in the clutch housing with

the 15 x 135L driver handle (A) and the oil seal
driver attachment (B).
＊０４
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch housing (B).
＊０２
A
07749-0010000
A
B B
07NAD-P20A100
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-79
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０７１９６３２ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:31 61TL2000_130_0080
M/T Differential
Differential Thrust Clearance Adjustment

Special Tools Required 4. Install the transmission housing onto the clutch
Inner driver handle, 40 mm 07746-0030100 housing, then tighten the 8 mm flange bolts in a
crisscross pattern in several steps (see step 16 on
1. Remove the left driveshaft side oil seal from the page 13-71).
transmission housing (see page 13-79).
Specified Torque: 8 x 1.25 mm
2. If you removed the 80 mm shim from the 27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ft)
transmission housing, reinstall the same sized
shim. 5. Use the 40 mm inner driver handle to bottom the
＊０１ differential assembly in the clutch housing.
＊０３
00746-0030100
3. Install the differential assembly into the clutch

housing.
＊０２
6. Measure clearance between 80 mm shim and the
bearing outer race in the transmission housing.
Standard: 0−0.10 mm (0−0.0039 in.)

＊０４
13-80 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ７Ｅ３４１５０７０００００ＭＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:25:31 61TL2000_130_0081
7. If the clearance exceeds the standard, select a new

80 mm shim from the following table. If the
clearance measured in step 6 is within the standard,
go to step 10.
80 mm Shim
Type Part Number Thickness
A 41441-PL3-B00 1.00 mm (0.039 in.)
B 41442-PL3-B00 1.10 mm (0.043 in.)
C 41443-PL3-B00 1.20 mm (0.047 in.)
D 41444-PL3-B00 1.30 mm (0.051 in.)
E 41445-PL3-B00 1.40 mm (0.055 in.)
F 41446-PL3-B00 1.50 mm (0.059 in.)
G 41447-PL3-B00 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
H 41448-PL3-B00 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
J 41449-PL3-B00 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
K 41450-PL3-B00 1.05 mm (0.041 in.)
L 41451-PL3-B00 1.15 mm (0.045 in.)
M 41452-PL3-B00 1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
N 41453-PL3-B00 1.35 mm (0.053 in.)
P 41454-PL3-B00 1.45 mm (0.057 in.)
Q 41455-PL3-B00 1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
R 41456-PL3-B00 1.65 mm (0.065 in.)
S 41457-PL3-B00 1.75 mm (0.069 in.)
8. Remove the bolts and transmission housing.
9. Replace the thrust shim selected in step 7, then

recheck the clearance.
10. Install the new left driveshaft side oil seal to the
11. Reinstall the transmission housing.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-81

08/04/09 11:49:41 61TL2000_140_0002
Automatic Transmission A/T Gear Position Indicator
Special Tools ............................................... 14-2 Component Location Index ....................... 14-302
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 14-4 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 14-303
DTC Troubleshooting Index ....................... 14-10 Transmission Range Switch Test .............. 14-304
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 14-14 Transmission Range Switch
Component Location Index ....................... 14-29 Replacement ............................................ 14-306
System Description .................................... 14-30 Paddle Shifter ＋ (Upshift Switch)
DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 14-83 Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 14-308
Road Test ..................................................... 14-224 Illumination Circuit Troubleshooting .... 14-312
Stall Speed Test .......................................... 14-226 Replacement ............................................ 14-316
Pressure Test ............................................... 14-227 Paddle Shifter − (Downshift Switch)
Shift Solenoid Valve Test ........................... 14-231 Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 14-310
Shift Solenoid Valve and Shift Solenoid Illumination Circuit Troubleshooting .... 14-314
Wire Harness Replacement .................... 14-236 Replacement ............................................ 14-317
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel
Valve Light Harness Replacement ................... 14-318
Solenoid Valve A Test ............................. 14-240 A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel
Solenoid Valve A Replacement ............. 14-242 Replacement ............................................ 14-320
Solenoid Valve B Test ............................. 14-243
Solenoid Valve B Replacement ............. 14-247 A/T Interlock System
Solenoid Valve C Test ............................. 14-245 Component Location Index ....................... 14-321
Solenoid Valve C Replacement ............. 14-247 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 14-322
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Shift Lock System Circuit
Replacement ............................................ 14-248 Troubleshooting ...................................... 14-323
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Key Interlock System Circuit
Replacement ............................................ 14-248 Troubleshooting ...................................... 14-328
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Key Interlock Solenoid Test ....................... 14-330
Switch Replacement ............................... 14-249 Shift Lock Solenoid Test ............................ 14-330
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement ............. 14-331
Switch Replacement ............................... 14-250 Shift Lock Stop, Shift Lock Stop Cushion
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement ............................................ 14-332
Test/Replacement ................................... 14-251 Shift Lock Release, Release Spring, and
ATF Level Check .......................................... 14-254 Release Shaft Replacement ................... 14-333
ATF Replacement ....................................... 14-255 Park Pin Switch Test ................................... 14-334
Transmission Removal .............................. 14-257 Park Pin Switch Replacement .................... 14-335
Transmission Installation ........................... 14-268
Drive Plate Removal and Installation ........ 14-280 Transmission End Cover
ATF Cooler Cleaning ................................... 14-281 End Cover Removal .................................... 14-337
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement ................. 14-283 Park Lever Stop
ATF Filter Replacement .............................. 14-284 Inspection and Adjustment .................... 14-339
Shift Lever Removal ................................... 14-286 Idler Gear Shaft Bearing Replacement ..... 14-340
Shift Lever Installation ............................... 14-288 Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal
Shift Lever Knob Replacement .................. 14-291 Replacement ............................................ 14-340
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly ...... 14-292 Selector Control Shaft Bearing
Shift Lever Boot and A/T Gear Position Replacement ............................................ 14-341
Indicator Panel Base Replacement ........ 14-293 ATF Feed Pipe Replacement ...................... 14-341
Shift Cable Replacement ............................ 14-295 End Cover Installation ................................ 14-399
Shift Cable Adjustment .............................. 14-298
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１０００００００Ｊ１４０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:49:42 61TL2000_140_0003
Transmission Housing Shafts and Clutches

Housing and Shaft Assembly Removal .... 14-342 Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection,
Bearing Removal ........................................ 14-345 and Reassembly ...................................... 14-361
Bearing Installation .................................... 14-346 Mainshaft 5th Gear Axial Clearance
Reverse Idler Gear Inspection ................................................ 14-362
Removal and Installation ........................ 14-347 Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection,
Shaft Assembly and Housing and Reassembly ...................................... 14-364
Installation ............................................... 14-394 Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and
3rd Gear Removal ................................... 14-365
Valve Body Countershaft 3rd Gear and Reverse
Valve Body and ATF Strainer Removal .... 14-348 Selector Hub Installation ........................ 14-366
Valve Body Repair ...................................... 14-350 Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection,
Valve Body Valve Installation .................... 14-351 and Reassembly ...................................... 14-367
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, Secondary Shaft Idler Gear
and Reassembly ...................................... 14-352 Removal and Installation ........................ 14-368
ATF Pump Inspection ................................. 14-353 Secondary Shaft 2nd Gear Axial Clearance
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection ................................................ 14-369
Inspection, and Reassembly .................. 14-354 Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, Inspection ................................................ 14-371
and Reassembly ...................................... 14-355 Idler Gear Shaft
Shift Solenoid Valve Removal and Installation ........................ 14-373
Removal and Installation ........................ 14-356 Idler Gear/Idler Gear Shaft
Valve Body and ATF Strainer Replacement ............................................ 14-374
Installation ............................................... 14-392 Clutch Disassembly .................................... 14-375
Clutch Inspection ........................................ 14-379
Torque Converter Housing Clutch Wave-plate Phase Difference
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Inspection ................................................ 14-380
Replacement ............................................ 14-357 Clutch Clearance Inspection ...................... 14-381
Countershaft Bearing Replacement .......... 14-358 1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clutch Reassembly ........ 14-385
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement ... 14-359 4th and 5th Clutch Reassembly ................. 14-389
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal
Replacement ............................................ 14-360 A/T Differential
Component Location Index ....................... 14-406
Backlash Inspection .................................... 14-406
Carrier Bearing Replacement .................... 14-407
Differential Carrier and Final Driven Gear
Replacement ............................................ 14-407
Oil Seal Replacement ................................. 14-408
Carrier Bearing Outer Race
Replacement ............................................ 14-409
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection ........... 14-411
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 11:49:42 61TL2000_140_0004
Special Tools
07GAB-PF50101 Mainshaft Holder 1
07HAC-PK40102 Housing Puller 1
07HAJ-PK40201 Preload Inspection Tool 1
07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07LAD-PW50601 Attachment, 40 mm 1
07LAE-PX40000 Clutch Spring Compressor Set 1
07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 3
07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose Adapter 3
07NAD-PX40100 Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 1
07QAD-P0A0100 Attachment, 42 mm 1
07ZAE-PRP0100 Clutch Compressor Attachment 1
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１０００００００Ｊ１４０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:49:43 61TL2000_140_0005

07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set 1
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25−40 mm 1
07746-0010100 Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 1
07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
07746-0010400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1
07746-0010600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 1
07746-001A800 Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 1
07746-0030100 Driver, Handle 40 mm I.D. 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
07947-SD90101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07947-ZV00100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
: Must be used with commercially available 3/8 ’’-16 slide hammer.
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１

08/04/09 11:49:43 61TL2000_140_0006

How to Check for DTCs with the Honda If the D indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp
Diagnostic System (HDS) (MIL) has been reported on, or if a driveability problem
is suspected, follow this procedure:
When the powertrain control module (PCM) senses an
abnormality in the input or output system, the D 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user’s
indicator (A) in the gauge control module (B) will manual for specific instructions.)
usually blink.
＊０１ 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the
HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go
to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page
11-210).
3. Select A/T system, and observe the DTC in the

DTCs MENU on the HDS screen.
B
4. Record the freeze data and the on-board snapshots
for all fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.
5. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC.
A
6. Clear the DTC and the data.
7. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the

When the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) is connected same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the data, and then recheck for a DTC. If the A/T DTC
driver’s side of the dashboard, it will indicate the returns, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) when the ignition switch If the DTC does not return, there was an
is turned to ON (II) and the appropriate menu is selected. intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure
＊０２ all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC

Troubleshooting
Some symptoms will not trigger DTCs or cause the D
indicator to blink. If the MIL was reported ON or the D
indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. If the
vehicle has an abnormal symptom, and there are no
DTCs stored, do the symptom troubleshooting. Check
the list of probable cause(s) for the symptom, in the
sequence listed, until you find the problem.

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１００００００００ＢＢＡＴ２０
08/04/09 11:49:44 61TL2000_140_0007
How to Check for DTCs with the SCS Mode If the D indicator and the MIL come on at the same time,
(retrieving the flash codes) or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow this
procedure:
NOTE: The preferred method is to use the HDS to
retrieve the DTCs. 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user’s
manual for specific instructions.)
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or
output system, the D indicator (A) in the gauge control 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the
module (B) will usually blink. HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go
＊０３ to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page
11-210).
3. Select SCS mode, then observe the D indicator in

the gauge control module. Codes 1 through 9 are
indicated by individual short blinks. Code 10 and
above are indicated by a series of long and short
B blinks. One long blink equals 10 short blinks. Add
the long and short blinks together to determine the
code.
＊０５
Example: DTC P0705 (5)
Short blinks (five)
A
ON
OFF
When the D indicator has been reported on, connect the
HDS to the DLC (A) located under the driver’s side of the
dashboard. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), select Example: DTC P0717 (15)
SCS mode, then the D indicator will indicate (flash) the
Long blink Short blinks (five)
DTC.
＊０４
ON
OFF
10 ＋ 5 = 15
4. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.
5. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC.
6. Clear the DTC and the data.
7. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the

same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
A data, and then recheck for DTCs. If the A/T DTC
returns, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
If the DTC does not return, there was an
intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
(cont’d)

08/04/09 11:49:44 61TL2000_140_0008

How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM 4. Connect one side of the patch cords (A) terminals to
Connectors a commercially available digital multimeter (B),
and connect the other side of the patch cord
NOTE: The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP terminals to a commercially available banana jack
system for about 30 minutes after the ignition switch is (Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent)
turned to LOCK (0). Jumping the SCS line after turning (C).
the ignition switch to LOCK (0) cancels this function. ＊０８
Disconnecting the PCM during this function, without
jumping the SCS line first, can damage the PCM.
1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. A
2. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C.
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols

identification.
＊０６ B
C
5. Gently insert the pin probe (male) into the terminal

test port from the terminal side. Do not force the
tips into the terminals.
C • For accurate results, always use the pin

probe (male).
• To prevent damage to the connector
B terminals, do not insert test equipment
A probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
they can damage the terminals. Damaged
3. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the terminals cause a poor connection and an
PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A) above incorrect measurement.
the terminal you need to check. • Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
＊０７ Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.

08/04/09 11:49:44 61TL2000_140_0009
Clear A/T DTCs Procedure How to End a Troubleshooting Session

(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the
driver’s side of the dashboard. NOTE: Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is
＊０９ stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait for

30 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and

disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
5. Start the engine with the shift lever in P or N, and

warm it up to normal operating temperature (the
radiator fan comes on).
A
6. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 31 mph
(50 km/h) or under the same conditions as those
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If indicated by the freeze data.
it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-210).
4. Clear the DTC(s) on the HDS screen.
OBD Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of
each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the technician’s repair was successfully
completed. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC
are displayed as:
• PASSED: The on-board diagnosis is successfully

completed.
• FAILED: The on-board diagnosis has finished but
failed.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on-board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
(cont’d)

08/04/09 11:49:45 61TL2000_140_0010

Substituting the PCM 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Special Tools Required 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester
• Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation 8. Remove the PCM cover (A).
with HDS and CM update software ＊１１
• HDS pocket tester
• GNA600 and an iN workstation with HDS and CM A
update software
Use any one of these update tools.
NOTE: Use this procedure when you have to substitute

a known-good PCM during a troubleshooting procedure.

(A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard. B
＊１０
9. Remove the battery setting plate (B), and re-

position the battery away from the PCM.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the battery terminals.
10. Remove the bolts (D).

＊１２
C
A
B
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If A

it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-210). If you are returning from DLC
circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, and then
clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM
(see page 11-363).
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.

E
D
5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
CHECK, and follow the screen prompts.
11. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C, then
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, remove the PCM (E).
continue this procedure.
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
identification.

08/04/09 11:49:45 61TL2000_140_0011
12. Install a known-good PCM in the reverse order of Failure Reproduction Technique
removal.
While the vehicle is raised on a lift for the test-drive,
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). disable the VSA by pressing the VSA OFF switch.
VSA DTC’s may come on when test-driving on a lift. If the
NOTE: DTC P0630 ‘‘VIN Not Programmed or
VSA DTC(s) come on, clear the DTC(s) with the HDS.
Mismatch’’ may be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and
continue this procedure.
14. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.
15. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
16. Enter the immobilizer code using the PCM

replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you
to start the engine.
17. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

software.
18. Select the PGM-FI SYSTEM and reset the PCM with
the HDS.
19. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean

14-9
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 11:49:45 61TL2000_140_0012

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
(1)
DTC Two Drive D MIL Detection Item Page
Cycle Indicator
Detection
P062F (0) ――― Blinks OFF or Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal (see page 14-83)
ON (3) Control Module Keep Alive Memory (KAM)
Error
(2)
P0705 (5) ――― Blinks ON Short in Transmission Range Switch (see page 14-84)
Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input)
(2)
P0706 (6) ○ OFF ON Open in Transmission Range Switch (see page 14-93)
Circuit
(2)
P0711 (28) ○ Blinks OFF Problem in ATF Temperature Sensor (see page 14-97)
Circuit
(2)
P0712 (28) ○ Blinks OFF Short in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit (see page 14-99)
(2)
P0713 (28) ○ Blinks OFF Open in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit (see page 14-101)
(2)
P0716 (15) ――― Blinks ON Problem in Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed (see page 14-104)
Sensor Circuit
(2)
P0717 (15) ――― Blinks ON Problem in Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed (see page 14-104)
Sensor Circuit (No Signal Input)
(2)
P0718 (15) ○ Blinks ON Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (see page 14-109)
Intermittent Failure
(2)
P0721 (9) ――― Blinks ON Problem in Output Shaft (Countershaft) (see page 14-114)
Speed Sensor Circuit
(2)
P0722 (9) ――― Blinks ON Problem in Output Shaft (Countershaft) (see page 14-114)
Speed Sensor Circuit (No Signal Input)
(2)
P0723 (9) ○ Blinks ON Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (see page 14-119)
Intermittent Failure
P0731 (64) ○ Blinks OFF Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st Clutch (see page 14-124)
Hydraulic Circuit (1st Gear Incorrect Ratio)
P0732 (64) ○ Blinks OFF Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd Clutch (see page 14-126)
Hydraulic Circuit (2nd Gear Incorrect Ratio)
P0733 (64) ○ Blinks OFF Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd Clutch (see page 14-128)
Hydraulic Circuit (3rd Gear Incorrect Ratio)
P0734 (64) ○ Blinks OFF Problem in 4th Clutch and 4th Clutch (see page 14-130)
Hydraulic Circuit (4th Gear Incorrect Ratio)
P0735 (64) ○ Blinks OFF Problem in 5th Clutch and 5th Clutch (see page 14-132)
Hydraulic Circuit (5th Gear Incorrect Ratio)
P0741 (40) ○ Blinks OFF Torque Converter Clutch Hydraulic Circuit (see page 14-134)
Stuck OFF
P0747 (76) ○ Blinks ON A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid (see page 14-136)
Valve A Stuck ON
14-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４００００００００ＧＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:49:45 61TL2000_140_0013
(1)
Cycle Indicator
Detection
P0752 (70) ○ Blinks ON Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON (see page 14-138)
P0756 (71) ○ Blinks ON Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF (see page 14-140)
P0757 (71) ○ Blinks ON Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON (see page 14-140)
P0761 (72) ○ Blinks ON Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF (see page 14-142)
P0771 (74) ○ Blinks ON Shift Solenoid Valve E Stuck OFF (see page 14-144)
Valve B Stuck OFF
Valve B Stuck ON
P0780 (45) ○ Blinks ON Shift Control System (see page 14-148)
Valve C Stuck OFF
Valve C Stuck ON
(2)
P0842 (25) ○ Blinks ON Short in 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid (see page 14-151)
Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck
ON
(2)
P0843 (25) ○ Blinks ON Open in 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid (see page 14-153)
Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
OFF
(2)
P0847 (26) ○ Blinks OFF Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid (see page 14-156)
Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
ON
(2)
P0848 (26) ○ Blinks OFF Open in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid (see page 14-158)
Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
OFF
NOTE:
(1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the data link connector (DLC) is
connected to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
(2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
(3): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI system detects the same failure.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-11

08/04/09 11:49:45 61TL2000_140_0014

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
(1)
Cycle Indicator
Detection
(2)
P0962 (16) ――― Blinks ON Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control (see page 14-161)
Solenoid Valve A Circuit
(2)
Solenoid Valve A
(2)
Solenoid Valve B Circuit
(2)
Solenoid Valve B
(2)
Solenoid Valve C Circuit
(2)
Solenoid Valve C
P0973 (7) (2) ――― Blinks ON Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit (see page 14-179)
P0974 (7) (2) ――― Blinks ON Open in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit (see page 14-182)
P0976 (8) (2) ――― Blinks ON Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit (see page 14-185)
P0977 (8) (2) ――― Blinks ON Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit (see page 14-188)
P0979 (22) (2) ――― Blinks ON Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit (see page 14-191)
P0980 (22) (2) ――― Blinks ON Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit (see page 14-194)
P0982 (60) (2) ――― Blinks ON Short in Shift Solenoid Valve D Circuit (see page 14-197)
P0983 (60) (2) ――― Blinks ON Open in Shift Solenoid Valve D Circuit (see page 14-199)
P0985 (61) (2) ――― Blinks ON Short in Shift Solenoid Valve E Circuit (see page 14-202)
P0986 (61) (2) ――― Blinks ON Open in Shift Solenoid Valve E Circuit (see page 14-204)
P16C0 (99) ――― OFF ON PCM A/T Control System Incomplete (see page 14-207)
Update
(2)
P1717 (62) ○ Blinks OFF Open in Transmission Range Switch ATP (see page 14-208)
RVS Switch Circuit
14-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:49:45 61TL2000_140_0015
(1)
Cycle Indicator
Detection
P1730 (45) ○ Blinks ON Problem in Shift Control System: (see page 14-211)
• Shift Solenoid Valves A or D Stuck OFF
• Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
• Shift Valves A, B, or D Stuck
• Shift Solenoid Valve E Stuck ON
• Shift Valve E Stuck
• A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A Stuck OFF
• Shift Solenoid Valves B or C Stuck ON
• Shift Valves B or C Stuck
• Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck ON
• Shift Valve D Stuck
• A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve C Stuck OFF
• Shift Solenoid Valves B or C Stuck OFF
U0029 (107) ――― Blinks OFF or F-CAN Malfunction (see page 14-221)
ON (3) (F-CAN BUS-OFF (PCM))
U0122 (107) ――― Blinks OFF F-CAN Malfunction (see page 14-222)
(PCM-VSA Modulator-Control Unit)
U0155 (107) ――― Blinks OFF or F-CAN Malfunction (see page 14-223)
ON (3) (PCM-Gauge Control Module)
NOTE:
(1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the data link connector (DLC) is
connected to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
(2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
(3): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI system detects the same failure.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-13

08/04/09 11:49:46 61TL2000_140_0016

Symptom Probable Cause(s) Notes
When you turn the • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
ignition switch to • Gauge control module defective (see page 11-199).
ON (II), the D • PCM defective • Check the A/T gear position indicator drive circuit
indicator comes on in the gauge control module by using the gauge
and stays on in all control module self-diagnostic function (see page
shift lever positions, 22-292).
or it never comes on
at all
A/T gear position • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
indicator does not • Gauge control module defective (see page 11-199).
come on while the • PCM defective • Check the A/T gear position indicator drive circuit
shift lever is in that • Transmission range switch in the gauge control module by using the gauge
position defective control module self-diagnostic function (see page
• Shift cable broken or out of 22-292).
adjustment • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
• Connection between the shift 14-304).
cable and transmission or body is • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
worn the selector control shaft.
Shift indicator does • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
not work • Gauge control module defective (see page 11-199).
• PCM defective • Check the F-CAN communication line by using
• Transmission range switch the gauge control module self-diagnostic
defective function (see page 22-292).
• Shift cable broken or out of • Check the A/T gear position indicator drive circuit
adjustment in the gauge control module by using the gauge
• Connection between the shift control module self-diagnostic function (see page
cable and transmission or body is 22-292).
worn • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-304).
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the selector control shaft.
When you press the A problem in the paddle shifter ＋ Check the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) circuit
paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) circuit (see page 14-308).
(upshift switch) in D
and S, the
transmission does
not upshift
When you press the A problem in the paddle shifter − Check the paddle shifter − (downshift switch)
paddle shifter − (downshift switch) circuit circuit (see page 14-310).
(downshift switch) in
D and S, the
transmission does
not downshift
M indicator does not • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
come on even • Gauge control module defective (see page 11-199).
though the paddle • PCM defective • Check the A/T gear position indicator drive circuit
shifter ＋ (upshift in the gauge control module by using the gauge
switch) or paddle control module self-diagnostic function (see page
shifter − (downshift 22-292).
switch) is operated in
sequential sportshift
mode
14-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４００００００００ＨＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 11:49:46 61TL2000_140_0017

The paddle shifter ＋ • Paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) Check the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch)
(upshift switch) illumination circuit illumination circuit (see page 14-308).
illumination does not • Paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch)
come on when the illumination
combination light
switch is turned on
while the ignition
switch is ON (II)
The paddle shifter − • Paddle shifter − (downshift Check the paddle shifter − (downshift switch)
(downshift switch) switch) illumination circuit illumination circuit (see page 14-310).
illumination does not • Paddle shifter − (downshift
come on when the switch) illumination
combination light
switch is turned on
while the ignition
switch is ON (II)
Shift lever cannot be • Shift lock solenoid defective • Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit
moved from P while • Shift lock solenoid control circuit (see page 14-323).
you are pressing on • Shift lock mechanism defective • Test the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-330).
the brake pedal • Brake pedal position switch circuit • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
• Brake pedal position switch 14-304).
defective • Inspect the APP sensor signal (see page 11-279).
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
circuit
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
defective
• Throttle body defective
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch stuck OFF
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch line opened
Ignition switch • Interlock control system circuit • Troubleshoot the key interlock system circuit
cannot be moved • Key interlock solenoid stuck ON (see page 14-328).
from ACCESSORY (I) • Park pin switch stuck OFF • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
to LOCK (0) (key is • Transmission range switch 14-304).
pushed in, the shift
lever in P)
HDS does not DLC circuit error Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
communicate with
the PCM or the
vehicle
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-15

08/04/09 11:49:46 61TL2000_140_0018

Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level • Check the ATF level, and check the ATF cooler
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out of lines for leakage and loose connections. If
move in any gear adjustment necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
3. Connection between the shift • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
cable and transmission or body the selector control shaft.
is worn • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
4. ATF pump worn or binding converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
5. Regulator valve stuck or spring The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
worn noise or a high pitched squeak.
6. ATF strainer clogged • Check the line pressure.
7. Mainshaft worn or damaged • Be careful not to damage the torque converter
8. Final gears worn or damaged housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
9. Transmission-to-engine You may also damage the ATF pump when you
assembly error torque down the main valve body. This will result
10. Axle disengaged in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools.
• Install the main seal flush with the torque
converter housing. If you push it into the torque
converter housing until it bottoms out, it will
block the fluid return passage and result in
damage.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the ATF
strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF
pump is OK, find the damaged components that
caused the debris. If no cause for contamination
is found, replace the torque converter.
• Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If
the differential pinion gears are worn, replace the
differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean the
torque converter, cooler, and lines.
Vehicle moves in R, 1. 1st accumulator defective • Check the 1st clutch pressure.
but not in D, S, or 2. 1st gears worn or damaged • Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch piston check
1st in S 3. 1st clutch defective valve, and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer
and the retainer seal for wear and damage.
Inspect the clearance between the clutch end-
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and the plates
for wear and damage. If the discs are worn or
damaged, replace them as a set. Inspect the
clutch wave-plate height. If the height is out of
tolerance, replace the wave-plate. If the discs and
the plates are OK, adjust the clearance with the
clutch end-plate.
• Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe. If the 1st clutch
feed pipe is scored, replace the end cover.
• Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the
1st clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
• Check the 1st accumulator piston, the O-ring and
the springs in the regulator valve body for wear
and damage.
14-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:49:46 61TL2000_140_0019

Vehicle moves in D 1. 2nd accumulator defective • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
and R, but not in 2. 2nd gears worn or damaged • Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch piston check
2nd in S 3. 2nd clutch defective valve, and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer
and the retainer seal for wear and damage.
Inspect the clearance between the clutch end-
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and the plates
for wear and damage. If the discs are worn or
damaged, replace them as a set. Inspect the
clutch end-plate.
• Check the 2nd accumulator piston, the O-ring and
the springs in the servo valve body for wear and
damage.
Vehicle moves in D 1. Shift solenoid valve E defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
and S, but not in R 2. Shift fork shaft stuck connectors.
3. Shift valve E defective • Inspect shift solenoid valve E for seizure, and the
4. 4th/reverse accumulator defective O-rings for wear and damage.
5. 4th clutch defective • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift
6. Reverse gears worn or damaged fork shaft.
• Check shift valve E in the main valve body for
free movement, and check the shift valve E
spring for wear and damage.
• Check the 4th clutch pressure.
• Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch piston check
valve, and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer
for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance
between the clutch end-plate and the top disc. If
the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
clutch discs and the plates for wear and damage.
If the discs are worn or damaged, replace them
as a set. Inspect the clutch wave-plate height. If
the height is out of tolerance, replace the wave-
plate. If the discs and the plates are OK, adjust
the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
• Inspect the reverse selector teeth chamfers, and
inspect the engagement teeth chamfers of the
countershaft 4th gear and the reverse gear.
Replace the reverse gears and the reverse
selector if they are worn or damaged. If the
transmission makes a clicking, grinding, or
whirring noise, also replace the mainshaft 4th
gear, the reverse idler gear, and the countershaft
4th gear.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-17

08/04/09 11:49:46 61TL2000_140_0020

Poor acceleration; 1. Low ATF level • Check the ATF level, and check the ATF cooler
flares when 2. Shift cable broken or out of lines for leakage and loose connections. If
starting off in D, S, adjustment necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
and R; stall speed 3. ATF pump worn or binding • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
high in D and S in 4. Regulator valve stuck or spring the selector control shaft.
1st and 2nd worn • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
5. ATF strainer clogged converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
6. Torque converter check valve The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
defective noise or a high pitched squeak.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the ATF
strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF
pump is OK, find the damaged components that
caused the debris. If no cause for contamination
is found, replace the torque converter.
Poor acceleration; 2nd clutch defective • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
flares when • Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch piston check
starting off in D, S, valve, and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer
and R; stall speed and the retainer seal for wear, damage, and
high when starting peeling. Inspect the clearance between the clutch
off in 2nd in S end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and the
plates for wear and damage. If the discs are worn
or damaged, replace them as a set. Inspect the
clutch end-plate.
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
flares when adjustment the selector control shaft.
starting off in D, S, 2. 4th clutch defective • Check the 4th clutch pressure.
and R; stall speed • Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch piston check
high in R valve, and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer
14-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:49:46 61TL2000_140_0021

Poor acceleration; 1. Shift solenoid valve E defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares when 2. Torque converter one-way clutch connectors.
starting off in D, S, defective • Inspect shift solenoid valve E for seizure, and the
and R; stall speed 3. Engine output low O-rings for wear and damage.
low in D and S in 4. Torque converter clutch piston • Replace the torque converter.
1st and 2nd defective • Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator
5. Lock-up shift valve defective valve body for free movement, and check the
lock-up shift valve spring for wear and damage.
Poor acceleration; 1. Engine output low • Replace the torque converter.
flares when 2. Torque converter clutch piston • Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator
starting off in D, S, defective valve body for free movement, and check the
and R; stall speed 3. Lock-up shift valve defective lock-up shift valve spring for wear and damage.
low in R 4. Torque converter one-way clutch
defective
Engine idle 1. Low ATF level • Check the ATF level, and check the ATF cooler
vibration 2. Shift solenoid valve E defective lines for leakage and loose connections. If
3. Drive plate defective or necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
transmission misassembled • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
4. Engine output low converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
5. Torque converter clutch piston The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
defective noise or a high pitched squeak.
6. ATF pump worn or binding • Inspect the ATF strainer for clogging with
7. Lock-up shift valve defective particles of steel or aluminum. If the ATF strainer
is clogged, replace it, and clean the torque
converter, cooler, and lines.
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connectors.
• Inspect shift solenoid valve E for seizure, and the
O-rings for wear and damage.
• Check for a misinstalled/damaged drive plate.
• Check that the idle rpm in gear is the specified
idle speed (see page 11-323). If the idle speed is
correct, adjust the engine and the transmission
mounts.
• Replace the torque converter.
• Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator
valve body for free movement, and check the
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-19

08/04/09 11:49:46 61TL2000_140_0022

Vehicle moves in N 1. Excessive ATF • Check the ATF level, and drain the ATF if it is
2. Foreign material in separator over-filled.
plate orifice • Check for a clogged orifice in the separator plate.
3. Relief valve defective If the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
4. 1st clutch defective separator plate orifice.
5. 2nd clutch defective • Check the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch
6. 3rd clutch defective pressures.
7. 4th clutch defective • Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the ATF
8. 5th clutch defective strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
9. Clearance between clutch end- aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF
plate and top disc incorrect pump is OK, find the damaged components that
10. Needle bearing seized, worn, or caused the debris. If no cause for contamination
damaged is found, replace the torque converter.
11. Thrust washer seized, worn, or • Check the relief valve in the main valve body for
damaged free movement, and check the relief valve spring
for wear and damage.
and the retainer seal (for 1st, 2nd, and 3rd clutch
only) for wear, damage, and peeling. Inspect the
clearance between the clutch end-plate and the
top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance,
inspect the clutch discs and the plates for wear
and damage. If the discs are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. Inspect the clutch wave-
plate height. If the height is out of tolerance,
replace the wave-plate. If the discs and the plates
are OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end-
plate.
• Inspect the 3rd clutch feed pipe. If the 3rd clutch
feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-ring
under the feed pipe guide.
1st or the 3rd clutch feed pipe is loose or
damaged.
• Inspect the 5th clutch feed pipe. If the 5th clutch
• Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 5th
clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
14-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:49:47 61TL2000_140_0023

Late shift after 1. Shift solenoid valve E defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifting from N to 2. A/T clutch pressure control connectors.
D, or excessive solenoid valve A defective • Inspect shift solenoid valve E for seizure, and the
shock when shifted 3. A/T clutch pressure control O-rings for wear and damage.
into D solenoid valve B defective • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
4. A/T clutch pressure control valve filter/gasket and the O-rings for wear and
solenoid valve C defective damage, and inspect the solenoid valves for
5. Shift cable broken or out of seizure.
adjustment • Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
6. Connection between the shift and the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
cable and transmission or body installation.
is worn • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
7. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed the selector control shaft.
sensor defective • Check the 1st clutch pressure.
8. Output shaft (countershaft) • Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch piston check
speed sensor defective valve, and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer
9. ATF temperature sensor and the retainer seal for wear, damage, and
defective peeling. Inspect the clearance between the clutch
10. Foreign material in separator end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
plate orifice of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and the
11. Servo control valve defective plates for wear and damage. If the discs are worn
12. 1st accumulator defective or damaged, replace them as a set. Inspect the
13. 1st check ball stuck clutch wave-plate height. If the height is out of
14. Lock-up shift valve defective tolerance, replace the wave-plate. If the discs and
15. 1st clutch defective the plates are OK, adjust the clearance with the
clutch end-plate.
• Check for a clogged orifice in the separator plate.
If the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
separator plate orifice.
• Check the servo control valve in the main valve
body for free movement, and check the servo
control valve spring for wear and damage.
1st clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
• Check the 1st accumulator piston, the O-ring and
and damage.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-21

08/04/09 11:49:47 61TL2000_140_0024

Late shift after 1. Shift solenoid valve E defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifting from N to 2. A/T clutch pressure control connectors.
R, or excessive solenoid valve A defective • Inspect shift solenoid valve E for seizure, and the
shock when shifted 3. Shift cable broken or out of O-rings for wear and damage.
into R adjustment • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
4. Connection between the shift valve filter/gasket and the O-rings for wear and
cable and transmission or body damage, and inspect the solenoid valves for
is worn seizure.
5. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed • Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
sensor defective and the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
6. Output shaft (countershaft) installation.
speed sensor defective • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
7. ATF temperature sensor the selector control shaft.
defective • Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch piston check
8. Shift fork shaft stuck valve, and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer
9. Foreign material in separator for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance
plate orifice between the clutch end-plate and the top disc. If
10. Shift valve E defective the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
11. 4th/reverse accumulator clutch discs and the plates for wear and damage.
defective If the discs are worn or damaged, replace them
12. Lock-up shift valve defective as a set. Inspect the clutch wave-plate height. If
13. 4th clutch defective the height is out of tolerance, replace the wave-
• Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift
fork shaft.
• Check for a clogged orifice in the separator plate.
If the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
separator plate orifice.
• Check the 4th clutch pressure.
• Inspect the servo valve and the O-ring for wear
and damage.
• Check shift valve E in the main valve body for
free movement, and check the shift valve E
spring for wear and damage.
14-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:49:47 61TL2000_140_0025

Transmission does 1. Input shaft (mainshaft) • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
not shift speed sensor defective connectors.
2. Output shaft (countershaft) • Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and
speed sensor defective the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
installation.
Excessive shock or 1. A/T clutch pressure control • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on all solenoid valve B defective connectors.
upshifts and 2. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
downshifts solenoid valve C defective filter/gasket and the O-rings for wear and damage,
3. Input shaft (mainshaft) and inspect the solenoid valves for seizure.
speed sensor defective • Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and
4. Output shaft (countershaft) the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
speed sensor defective installation.
5. ATF temperature sensor • Check for a clogged orifice in the separator plate. If
defective the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
6. Foreign material in separator plate orifice.
separator plate orifice
Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve E • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 1-2 defective connectors.
upshift or 2-1 2. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspect shift solenoid valve E for seizure, and the
downshift solenoid valve A defective O-rings for wear and damage.
3. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
solenoid valve B defective filter/gasket and the O-rings for wear and damage,
4. A/T clutch pressure control and inspect the solenoid valves for seizure.
solenoid valve C defective • Check the 1st and the 2nd clutch pressures.
5. 2nd clutch transmission • Check for a clogged orifice in the separator plate. If
fluid pressure switch the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
defective separator plate orifice.
6. Foreign material in • Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch piston check
separator plate orifice valve, and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer and
7. 1st accumulator defective the retainer seal for wear, damage, and peeling.
8. 2nd accumulator defective Inspect the clearance between the clutch end-plate
9. 1st check ball stuck and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance,
10. 2nd check ball stuck inspect the clutch discs and the plates for wear and
11. Lock-up shift valve damage. If the discs are worn or damaged, replace
defective them as a set. Inspect the clutch wave-plate height. If
12. 1st clutch defective the height is out of tolerance, replace the wave-plate.
13. 2nd clutch defective If the discs and the plates are OK, adjust the clearance
with the clutch end-plate.
• Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator valve
body for free movement, and check the lock-up shift
valve spring for wear and damage.
• Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe. If the 1st clutch feed
pipe is scored, replace the end cover.
• Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 1st
• Check the 1st accumulator piston, the O-ring and the
springs in the regulator valve body for wear and
damage.
• Check the 2nd accumulator piston, the O-ring and the
springs in the servo valve body for wear and damage.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-23

08/04/09 11:49:47 61TL2000_140_0026

flares on 2-3 solenoid valve B defective connectors.
upshift or 3-2 2. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
downshift solenoid valve C defective valve filter/gasket and the O-rings for wear and
3. 3rd clutch transmission fluid damage, and inspect the solenoid valves for
pressure switch defective seizure.
4. Foreign material in separator • Check the 2nd and the 3rd clutch pressures.
plate orifice • Check for a clogged orifice in the separator plate.
5. 2nd accumulator defective If the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
6. 3rd accumulator defective separator plate orifice.
7. 2nd check ball stuck • Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch piston check
8. 2nd clutch defective valve, and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer
9. 3rd clutch defective and the retainer seal for wear, damage, and
peeling. Inspect the clearance between the clutch
end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and the
plates for wear and damage. If the discs are worn
or damaged, replace them as a set. Inspect the
clutch end-plate.
3rd clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
• Check the 2nd accumulator piston, the O-ring and
the springs in the servo valve body for wear and
damage.
• Check the 3rd accumulator piston, the O-ring and
and damage.
14-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:49:47 61TL2000_140_0027

3. Foreign material in separator damage, and inspect the solenoid valves for
plate orifice seizure.
4. 3rd accumulator defective • Check for a clogged orifice in the separator plate.
5. 4th/reverse accumulator defective If the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
6. 3rd clutch defective separator plate orifice.
7. 4th clutch defective • Check the 3rd and the 4th clutch pressures.
and the retainer seal (for 3rd clutch only) for wear,
damage, and peeling. Inspect the clearance
3rd clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
• Check the 3rd accumulator piston, the O-ring and
and damage.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-25

08/04/09 11:49:47 61TL2000_140_0028

3. Foreign material in separator damage, and inspect the solenoid valves for
plate orifice seizure.
4. 4th accumulator defective • Check for a clogged orifice in the separator plate.
5. 5th accumulator defective If the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
6. 4th clutch defective separator plate orifice.
7. 5th clutch defective • Check the 4th and the 5th clutch pressures.
• Inspect the 5th clutch feed pipe. If the 5th clutch
• Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 5th
• Check the 4th and 5th accumulator pistons, the
O-rings, and the springs in the servo valve body
for wear and damage.
Noise from 1. ATF pump worn or binding • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
transmission in all 2. Mainshaft bearing, countershaft converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
shift lever bearing, or secondary shaft The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
positions bearing defective noise or a high pitched squeak.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the main valve body. This will result
in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools.
• Install the main seal flush with the torque
converter housing. If you push it into the torque
converter housing until it bottoms out, it will
block the fluid return passage and result in
damage.
• Inspect the ATF strainer for clogging with
particles of steel or aluminum. If the ATF strainer
is clogged, replace it, and clean the torque
converter, cooler, and lines.
• Inspect the mainshaft, the countershaft, and the
secondary shaft for wear or damage.
14-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:49:47 61TL2000_140_0029

Vehicle does not Torque converter one-way clutch Replace the torque converter.
accelerate above defective
31 mph (50 km/h)
Vibration in all Drive plate defective or • Check for a misinstalled/damaged drive plate.
shift lever transmission misassembled • Check that the idle rpm in gear is the specified idle
positions speed (see page 11-323). If the idle speed is correct,
adjust the engine and the transmission mounts.
Shift lever does 1. Transmission range switch • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
not operate defective or out of adjustment connectors.
smoothly 2. Shift cable broken or out of • Inspect the transmission range switch for operation.
adjustment • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
3. Connection between the shift selector control shaft.
cable and transmission or
body is worn
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
not shift into P adjustment selector control shaft.
2. Connection between the shift • Check the park pawl spring installation and the park
cable and transmission or lever spring installation. If installation is incorrect,
body is worn install the spring correctly. Make sure that the park
3. Park mechanism defective lever stop is not installed upside down. Check the
distance between the park pawl shaft and the park
lever roller pin. If the distance is out of tolerance,
select and install the appropriate park lever stop.
Torque converter 1. Shift solenoid valve E • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
clutch does not defective connectors.
disengage 2. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspect shift solenoid valve E for seizure, and the
solenoid valve A defective O-rings for wear and damage.
3. Torque converter clutch • Inspect the solenoid valve filter/gasket and the
piston defective O-rings for wear and damage, and inspect the
4. Lock-up shift valve defective solenoid valves for seizure.
5. Lock-up control valve • Replace the torque converter.
defective • Check the lock-up control valve in the main valve
body for free movement, and check the lock-up
Torque converter 1. Shift solenoid valve E • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
clutch does not defective connectors.
operate smoothly 2. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspect shift solenoid valve E for seizure, and the
solenoid valve A defective O-rings for wear and damage.
3. Torque converter clutch • Inspect the solenoid valve filter/gasket and the
piston defective O-rings for wear and damage, and inspect the
4. Torque converter check valve solenoid valves for seizure.
defective • Replace the torque converter.
5. Lock-up shift valve defective • Check the lock-up control valve in the main valve
6. Lock-up control valve body for free movement, and check the lock-up
defective control valve spring for wear and damage.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-27

08/04/09 11:49:48 61TL2000_140_0030

Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Torque converter 1. Shift solenoid valve E defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
clutch does not 2. A/T clutch pressure control connectors.
engage solenoid valve A defective • Inspect shift solenoid valve E for seizure, and the
3. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed O-rings for wear and damage.
sensor defective • Inspect the solenoid valve filter/gasket and the
4. Output shaft (countershaft) speed O-rings for wear and damage, and inspect the
sensor defective solenoid valves for seizure.
5. Torque converter clutch piston • Replace the torque converter.
defective • Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
6. Torque converter check valve and the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
defective installation.
7. Lock-up shift valve defective • Check the lock-up control valve in the main valve
8. Lock-up control valve defective body for free movement, and check the lock-up
A/T gear position 1. Transmission range switch • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
indicator does not defective or out of adjustment connectors.
indicate shift lever 2. Shift cable broken or out of • Inspect the transmission range switch operation.
positions adjustment • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
3. Connection between the shift the selector control shaft.
cable and transmission or body is
worn
Speedometer and Output shaft (countershaft) speed • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
odometer do not sensor defective connectors.
work • Inspect the transmission range switch operation.
• Check the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor installation.
The engine does VTEC rocker arm defective Check the engine VTEC rocker arms.
not rev to high rpm,
and the
transmission
upshifts at low rpm
(engine at normal
operating
temperature)
14-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:09 61TL2000_140_0031
＊０１
PADDLE SHIFTER − (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
PADDLE SHIFTER ＋ (UPSHIFT SWITCH)
DRIVER’S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
PARK PIN SWITCH SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
＊０２
SPEED SENSOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
Test, page 14-240
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
(Behind shift solenoid
valve cover)
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION Test, page 14-231
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH Replacement, page 14-236
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE (Behind shift solenoid
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C valve cover)
Replacement, page 14-247 Replacement, page 14-236
SHIFT SOLENOID
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE VALVE A
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (Behind shift solenoid
Test, page 14-243 SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT SOLENOID valve cover)
Replacement, page 14-247 VALVE E VALVE D Test, page 14-231
(Behind shift solenoid (Behind shift solenoid Replacement, page 14-236
valve cover) valve cover)
Test, page 14-231 Test, page 14-231 ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Replacement, Replacement, (Behind shift solenoid valve cover)
page 14-236 page 14-236 Test/Replacement, page 14-251
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-29
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:50:09 61TL2000_140_0032
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a three-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically
controlled unit which provides five speeds forward and one in reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the
engine.
Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches

The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. The converter housing (pump)
is connected to the engine crankshaft and turns as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which meshes with the starter drive gear when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter
assembly serves as a flywheel while transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft, the transmission has three
parallel shafts; the mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary shaft. The mainshaft is in line with the engine
crankshaft, and includes the 4th and 5th clutches, and gears for 5th, 4th, reverse, and idler. The mainshaft reverse gear
is integral with the mainshaft 4th gear. The countershaft includes the gears for 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, reverse, park,
and the final drive. The final drive gear is integral with the countershaft. The countershaft 4th gear and the
countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft providing 4th or reverse gear, depending on which way
the selector is moved. The secondary shaft includes the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
idler. The idler shaft is located between the mainshaft and the secondary shaft, and the idler gear transmits power
between the mainshaft and the secondary shaft. The gears on the mainshaft and the secondary shaft are in constant
mesh with those on the countershaft. When certain combinations of gears in the transmission are engaged by the
clutches, power is transmitted through the mainshaft, then to the secondary shaft to the countershaft, or through
mainshaft to countershaft to provide drive.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and shift solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located in
the engine compartment.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, and the servo body. They are bolted to the
torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, shift valves A, B, C, and E, the relief valve,
the lock-up control valve, the cooler check valve, the servo control valve, and the ATF pump gears. The regulator valve
body contains the regulator valve, the torque converter check valve, the lock-up shift valve, and the 1st and 3rd
accumulators. The servo body contains the servo valve, shift valve D, the accumulators for 2nd, 4th, and 5th, and shift
solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E. Fluid from the regulator passes through the manual valve to the various control
valves. The 1st, 3rd, and 5th clutches receive fluid from their respective feed pipes, and the 2nd and 4th clutches
receive fluid from the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism

To shift gears, the PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
A, B, and C, while receiving input signals from various sensors and switches located throughout the vehicle. The shift
solenoid valves shift the positions of the shift valves to switch the port leading hydraulic pressure to the clutch. A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C regulate their respective pressure, and pressurize the clutches to
engage them and their corresponding gears. The pressures of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves also
apply to the shift valves to switch the port.
Lock-up Mechanism
The lock-up mechanism operates in D (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears) and S (2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears). The pressurized
fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch
piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as
the engine crankshaft. Together with the hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the timing and volume of the lock-up
mechanism. When shift solenoid valve E is turned on by the PCM, shift solenoid valve E pressure switches the lock-up
shift valve on and off. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the lock-up control valve control the degree of
lock-up.
14-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４００００００００ＣＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:50:09 61TL2000_140_0033
Gear Selection
The shift lever has five positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D: DRIVE 1st through 5th gear ranges with
automatic shift mode and D-paddle shift mode, S: DRIVE 1st through 4th gear ranges with automatic shift mode and
1st through 5th gear ranges with sequential sportshift mode.
Position Description
P: PARK Front wheels locked; the park pawl engaged with the park gear on the
countershaft. All clutches are released.
R: REVERSE Reverse; the reverse selector engaged with the countershaft reverse gear and
the 4th clutch engaged.
N: NEUTRAL All clutches are released.
D: DRIVE General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, then 5th
gear, depending on the vehicle speed and the throttle position. Downshifts
through 4th, 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism
operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears.
S: DRIVE Automatic Shift Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving, up-hill and
Mode down-hill driving; starts off in 1st gear, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, then 4th,
(1st through 4th) depending on the vehicle speed and the accelerator pedal position. Downshifts
through 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism
operates in 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears.
Sequential Manual gear shift driving; the vehicle can start off in 1st gear, and does not
Sportshift Mode upshift automatically. The vehicle can also start off in 2nd gear, and does not
(1st through 5th) upshift and downshift automatically. Downshifts automatically to 1st on
deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th
gears.
Starting is possible only in P and N because of a slide-type neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transmission (A/T) Gear Position Indicator

The A/T gear position indicator in the gauge control module shows which shift lever position has been selected
without having to look down at the shift lever.
Shift Indicator and M Indicator

When the transmission is switched into the sequential sportshift mode, the shift indicator in the gauge control module
display the gear selected, and the M indicator next to the shift indicator comes on. The shift indicator also displays the
gear selected in the D-paddle shift mode, but the M indicator does not come on.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-31

08/04/09 11:50:09 61TL2000_140_0034

Clutches and Gears
The five-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and the steel plates together, locking them so they do not slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged
clutch pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston
releases the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the end of the secondary shaft, opposite the end cover.
The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 3rd clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 5th clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe
within the mainshaft.
5th Clutch
The 5th clutch engages/disengages 5th gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 5th clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 5th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.
Gear operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
• 4th gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
• 5th gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
• Reverse gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
• Idler gear is splined with the mainshaft, and rotates with the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft:

• Final drive gear is integral with the countershaft.
• 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 5th, and park gears are splined with the countershaft, and rotate with the countershaft.
• 4th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages 4th gear and reverse
gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined to the countershaft so that 4th gear and the
reverse gear engage with the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft:

• 1st gear engages/disengages with the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch.
• 2nd gear engages/disengages with the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
• 3rd gear engages/disengages with the secondary shaft by the 3rd clutch.
• Idler gear is splined with the secondary shaft, and rotates with the secondary shaft.
The idler gear on the idler shaft transmits power between the mainshaft and the secondary shaft.
The reverse idler gear transmits power from the mainshaft reverse gear to the countershaft reverse gear, and changes
rotational direction of the countershaft to reverse.
14-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０９０００００ＣＡＡＴ０１
08/04/09 11:50:10 61TL2000_140_0035
Transmission Cutaway View

＊０１
COUNTERSHAFT 3RD GEAR TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
5TH GEAR
MAINSHAFT RING GEAR
4TH GEAR 5TH
REVERSE CLUTCH
IDLER GEAR
MAINSHAFT 4TH
REVERSE GEAR CLUTCH
REVERSE IDLER
GEAR SHAFT PARK GEAR
MAINSHAFT
MAINSHAFT
IDLER GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER SHAFT FINAL DRIVE

GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
5TH GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER SHAFT 2ND GEAR
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY
SHAFT
SECONDARY COUNTERSHAFT
SHAFT IDLER 1ST GEAR
GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
REVERSE
SELECTOR SECONDARY
HUB SHAFT
2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
REVERSE
SELECTOR
3RD 1ST
CLUTCH CLUTCH
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
SECONDARY ASSEMBLY
SHAFT 3RD GEAR
SECONDARY
SHAFT
1ST GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN
GEAR
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-33

08/04/09 11:50:10 61TL2000_140_0036

Power Flow
P Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
N Position
Engine power transmitted from the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the idler shaft idler gear, and the
secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the
countershaft.
In this position, the position of the reverse selector differs according to whether the shift lever shifted from D or R:
• When shifted from D, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft 4th gear and the reverse selector hub, and
4th gear engages with the countershaft.
• When shifted from R, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft reverse gear and the reverse selector hub,
and the reverse gear engages with the countershaft.
＊０２
REVERSE
SELECTOR HUB
TORQUE
MAINSHAFT CONVERTER
IDLER GEAR PARK GEAR REVERSE
SELECTOR
MAINSHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
IDLER GEAR COUNTERSHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT SECONDARY SHAFT

IDLER GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
14-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０９０００００ＣＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 11:50:10 61TL2000_140_0037
In 1st Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft.
• The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the idler shaft idler gear and the secondary shaft idler gear.
• The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
＊０３
TORQUE
CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT MAINSHAFT COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER GEAR 1ST GEAR
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
IDLER SHAFT
IDLER SHAFT COUNTERSHAFT

IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST CLUTCH
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-35

08/04/09 11:50:11 61TL2000_140_0038

Power Flow (cont’d)
In 2nd Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the
secondary shaft.
• The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
＊０４
TORQUE
CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT COUNTERSHAFT
MAINSHAFT 2ND GEAR
IDLER GEAR
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
IDLER SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT 2ND CLUTCH

IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:11 61TL2000_140_0039
In 3rd Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the secondary shaft 3rd gear with the
secondary shaft.
• The secondary shaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
＊０５
MAINSHAFT TORQUE
CONVERTER
COUNTERSHAFT
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
IDLER GEAR
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
IDLER SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
3RD GEAR
3RD CLUTCH
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-37

08/04/09 11:50:11 61TL2000_140_0040

In 4th Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 4th gear and
the reverse selector hub while the shift lever is in forward range (D and S).
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft.
＊０６
MAINSHAFT TORQUE
4TH GEAR CONVERTER
4TH CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR HUB
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:11 61TL2000_140_0041
In 5th Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft 5th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 5th gear drives the countershaft 5th gear and the countershaft.
＊０７
5TH CLUTCH TORQUE
CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT MAINSHAFT
5TH GEAR
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
5TH GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-39

08/04/09 11:50:12 61TL2000_140_0042

R Position
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft reverse gear
and the reverse selector hub while the shift lever is in R.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
• The rotation direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed by the reverse idler gear.
• The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector, which drives the reverse selector hub.
＊０８
REVERSE MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR TORQUE
IDLER GEAR 4TH CLUTCH CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR HUB
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:12 61TL2000_140_0043
Electronic Control System

Functional Diagram
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions.
The PCM receives input signals from sensors, switches, and other control units, processes data, and outputs signals
for the engine control system and the A/T control system. The A/T control system includes shift control, grade logic
control, clutch pressure control, and lock-up control.
The PCM switches the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves ON and OFF to control
gear selection and torque converter clutch lock-up.
＊０１
PCM
Engine RPM Signal
Accelerator Pedal Position

Sensor Signal (ETCS)
Throttle Position Gauge Control Module

Sensor Signal PGM-FI Control F-CAN A/T Gear Position Indicator
System
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor Signal
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal
A/T Control System
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal Shift Solenoid Valve A
Service Check Signal Shift Control Shift Solenoid Valve B
Grade Logic Control Shift Solenoid Valve C

• Ascending Control
Transmission • Descending
Range Control Shift Solenoid Valve D
Switch Automatic
Signal Five-speed
Shift Solenoid Valve E and Reverse
A/T Clutch Pressure

Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Control Solenoid Valve A
Speed Sensor Signal
Clutch Pressure A/T Clutch Pressure
Control Control Solenoid Valve B
Output Shaft (Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal A/T Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve C
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Signal Lock-up
Lock-up Control ON/OFF
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Signal Lock-up
Self-diagnosis/ Conditions
Fail-safe Function Vehicle Speed Signal
Brake Pedal Position Communication and Data Link Connector
Switch Signal Output Function
Cruise Control
Downshift Request Signal Shift Lock Control Shift Lock Solenoid
Paddle Shifter ＋/− (Upshift/

Downshift Switch) Signal
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-41
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６０００００ＣＡＡＴ０３
08/04/09 11:50:12 61TL2000_140_0044

Electronic Control System (cont’d)
Shift Control
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors and switches, and
it actuates shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E to control gear selection.
A grade logic control system has been adopted to control shifting in D, and in S with automatic shift mode. The PCM
compares actual driving conditions with programmed driving conditions, based on the input from the accelerator
pedal position sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal
position switch signal, the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor signal, the throttle position sensor signal, and the
shift lever position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope.
＊０２
PCM Gauge Control Module
Engine RPM Signal A/T Gear Position

Engine RPM Indicator
Control
Paddle Shifter ＋/−
(Upshift/Downshift
Switch) Signal Shift Position F-CAN
Control
Fail-safe Control
Transmission
Range
Switch Signal
Actual Driving
Shift Position
Accelerator Pedal Position Read of ATF Comparison with Signals

Sensor Signal Temperature
Shift Solenoid
Valve A
Output Shaft (Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal Master Target of Shift Solenoid
Shifting Position Valve B
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Shift Solenoid
Speed Sensor Signal Valve C
Correction to
ATF Temperature Shifting Mode Shift Solenoid
Sensor Signal Valve D
Grade Logic Control Shift Solenoid
• Ascending Mode Valve E
Throttle Position • Descending Mode
Sensor Signal
Brake Pedal Position

Switch Signal Calculation of
Gradient
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal
Correction for Engine
Coolant Temperature
Barometric Pressure Sensor Signal Data
Sensor Signal
Correction for Cruise
Control Signal Data
Cruise Control by Downshift Request
Downshift Request Signal
Signal
VSA Modulator-control Correction for VSA

Unit Signal Modulator-control
Unit Signal Data
14-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:13 61TL2000_140_0045
The PCM turns shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E ON and OFF to control gear selection. The combination of driving
signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E are in the following table.
Position Gear Position Shift Solenoid Valve

A B C D E
D and S Shifting from N OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Stays in 1st ON ON ON OFF OFF
Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Stays in 2nd OFF ON OFF ON OFF or ON
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd OFF ON ON ON OFF or ON
Stays in 3rd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF or ON
Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF or ON
Stays in 4th ON OFF OFF OFF OFF or ON
D Shifting gears between 4th and 5th ON OFF OFF ON OFF or ON
Stays in 5th ON OFF ON ON OFF or ON
N Neutral OFF ON ON OFF OFF
R Shifting from P and N OFF ON OFF OFF ON
Stays in reverse ON ON OFF OFF ON
Reverse inhibit control OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
P Park OFF ON OFF OFF ON
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-43

08/04/09 11:50:13 61TL2000_140_0046

Grade Logic Control: Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in D, the system extends the engagement area of 2nd, 3rd,
and 4th gears to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th
gears, and between 4th and 5th gears. The PCM does this so the vehicle can run smoothly and have more power when
needed.
NOTE: Shift commands stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th
and 5th gears, enable it to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient.
＊０３
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule
100 %
1ST 2ND 2ND 3RD 3RD 4TH
Throttle opening
: FLAT ROAD MODE

: GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
50 4TH 5TH
: MEDIUM ASCENDING MODE
: STEEP ASCENDING MODE

: HEAVY STEEP ASCENDING MODE
0
Vehicle speed
Grade Logic Control: Descending Control

When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in D, the upshift speed from 4th to 5th gear, from 3rd to
4th gear, and from 2nd to 3rd gear (when the throttle is closed) becomes higher than the set speed for flat road driving
to extend 4th gear, 3rd gear, and 2nd gear driving area. This, in combination with engine braking from the
deceleration lock-up, achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are three descending modes
with different 4th gear driving areas, 3rd gear driving areas, and 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of
a gradient stored in the PCM. When the vehicle is in 5th gear or 4th gear, and you are decelerating when you are
applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will downshift to lower gear. When you accelerate, the
transmission will then return to a higher gear.
＊０４
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule
100 %
1ST 2ND 2ND 3RD 3RD 4TH 4TH 5TH
: FLAT ROAD MODE

Throttle opening
: GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE

50
: MEDIUM DESCENDING MODE
: STEEP DESCENDING MODE
0
Vehicle speed
14-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:13 61TL2000_140_0047
Shift-Hold Control
When negotiating winding roads, the throttle is suddenly released and the brakes are applied, as is the case when
decelerating at the entrance of a curve, shift-hold control keeps the transmission in its current (lower) gear as it
negotiates the corner and accelerates out.
When the vehicle is driven aggressively on a winding road, the PCM will extend the engagement time of 3rd gear and
4th gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears. This allows the driver to
have more control for both acceleration and deceleration.
The PCM monitors the average change in the vehicle speed and throttle over time. When these values exceed those
for normal driving conditions, the upshift from 3rd to 4th gear and 4th to 5th gear is delayed. This gives more control
over power, and the engine braking when the driver is driving aggressively around winding roads. The transmission
will resume the normal upshift pattern after the PCM determines that normal driving has resumed.
＊０５
: Throttle released and brakes applied
Operation pattern of ON
OFF
accelerator
5th 5 5 5
Shift pattern of 4th 4
3rd 3 3 3
conventional
automatic transmission
5th
Shift pattern of 4th
3rd
Shift-hold Control
automatic transmission
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-45

08/04/09 11:50:13 61TL2000_140_0048

Shift Control - Manual Shift Mode
The transmission is provided with a D-paddle shift mode in D, and with a sequential sportshift mode in S. Both modes
are entered by pressing the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) or the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) while driving.
D-Paddle Shift Mode

When the transmission is switched into the D-paddle shift mode by pressing the paddle shifters while driving in D, the
transmission can shift into a lower gear by pressing the paddle shifter − (downshift switch), and it can shift into a
higher gear by pressing the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch). When the transmission shifts into a lower gear or a
higher gear by pressing the paddle shifters, the shift indicator in the gauge control module displays the number of
current gear selected. This number of the gear goes off when the transmission downshifts automatically, or when the
transmission upshifts automatically while coasting.
The transmission stays in 5th gear if the paddle shifter ＋ is pressed when driving in 5th gear, and the shift indicator
displays ‘‘5’’ for 2 seconds, then goes off. The transmission stays in 1st gear if the paddle shifter − is pressed when
driving in 1st gear, and the shift indicator displays ‘‘1’’ for 2 seconds, then goes off.
The transmission stays in the current gear and does not upshift to the next higher gear if the paddle shifter ＋ is
pressed while driving below the minimum allowable speed, and the shift indicator blinks the number of the next
higher gear several times, then returns to the number of the current gear.
＊０６
SHIFT INDICATOR
14-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:13 61TL2000_140_0049
S Position Automatic Shift Mode and Sequential Sportshift Mode

The S position has two shifting modes; the automatic shift mode and the sequential sportshift mode. In the S position
automatic shift mode, the transmission upshifts and downshifts automatically from 1st through 4th gear, and the
paddle shifters are ready to be activated to switch to the sequential sportshift mode. In the automatic shift mode, the
shift indicator and the M indicator in the gauge control module do not come on.
When the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) or the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) is pressed, the automatic shift
mode is canceled and the sequential sportshift mode comes into operation. The shift indicator displays the number of
the selected gear, and the M indicator comes on. In the sequential sportshift mode, the driver can shift up and down
manually from 1st through 5th gear by using the paddle shifters, much like a manual transmission. The paddle shifters
are installed on the back of the steering wheel, and the driver can shift gears by pressing the paddle shifters without
taking either hand off the steering wheel.
In the sequential sportshift mode, the transmission must be shifted up and down by pressing the paddle shifters.
However, the transmission cannot downshift and stays in the current gear if the paddle shifter − is pressed while the
vehicle is coasting at a speed that would cause the engine to over-rev by downshifting the transmission, and the shift
indicator blinks the number of the selected gear several times, then returns to the number of the current gear. If the
vehicle speed reaches an appropriate speed while the shift indicator is blinking the number of the selected gear, the
transmission downshifts and the shift indicator displays the selected gear. The transmission also cannot upshift and
stays in the current gear if the paddle shifter ＋ is pressed while driving below an appropriate upshifting speed, the
shift indicator blinks the number of the selected gear several times, then returns to the number of the current gear. If
the vehicle speed reaches an appropriate upshift speed while the shift indicator is blinking the number of the selected
gear, the transmission upshifts and the shift indicator displays the selected gear.
This mode has automatic downshifting areas so the vehicle can run smoothly with more power to cope with upcoming
acceleration. When coasting in 5th gear or 4th gear, the transmission downshifts to the next lower gear if the vehicle
slows down to the programmed speed, or by pressing the brake pedal.
When the transmission decelerates to a stop, the transmission shifts to 1st gear automatically. The transmission can
be shifted to 2nd gear by pressing the paddle shifter ＋ while the vehicle is stopped, and the vehicle can start off in 2nd
gear.
The sequential sportshift mode is canceled when moving the shift lever to any position other than S.
＊０７
’’M’’ INDICATOR
SHIFT INDICATOR
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-47

08/04/09 11:50:14 61TL2000_140_0050

Clutch Pressure Control
The PCM actuates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C to control the clutch pressure. When shifting
between lower and higher gears, the clutch pressure regulated by A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B,
and C engages and disengages the clutch smoothly.
The PCM receives input signals from the various sensors and switches, processes data, and outputs current to A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C.
＊０８
PCM
Ignition Timing PGM-FI

Requirement Control
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) System
Speed Sensor Signal
Output Shaft
(Countershaft) Actual Decision of
Speed Sensor Signal
Driving Shift Shifting
Position Mode
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
A/T Clutch
Master Target of Current Pressure Control
Controlling Current Feedback Solenoid Valves
A, B, and C
Manifold Absolute Correction of

Pressure Sensor Signal Data
Correction for Engine Barometric Pressure

Engine RPM Signal Torque Signal Data Sensor Signal
2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Correction for
Pressure Switch Signal Hydraulic Pressure
Applying Timing
3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Signal Correction for Engine
Coolant Temperature
Sensor Data
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal Correction for ATF
Temperature Sensor
Signal Data
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal Correction for Sequential
Sportshift Mode and
D-paddle Shift Mode
Position Driving
Paddle Shifter ＋/− Condition Data
(Upshift/Downshift
Switch) Signal
14-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:14 61TL2000_140_0051
Lock-up Control
Shift solenoid valve E controls the hydraulic pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up ON and OFF. When
the PCM actuates shift solenoid valve E and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to start lock-up. A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A regulates and applies hydraulic pressure to the lock-up control valve to control the
amount of the lock-up.
The lock-up mechanism operates in D (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears), and S (2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears).
＊０９
PCM
Engine Coolant
Temperature Engine Coolant
Sensor Signal Temperature Control
Shifting Position
Paddle Shifter ＋/− Control
(Upshift/Downshift
Switch) Signal
Gradient Control
Transmission Range by Magnitude
Switch Signal
Barometric Pressure Fail-safe Control

Sensor Signal
Accelerator Pedal Actual

Position Sensor Signal Driving
Shift
Position
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
Lock-up Control
• Lock-up ON/OFF Shift Solenoid

Control Valve E
Output Shaft Correction • Lock-up Condition
(Countershaft) from ATF Control
Speed Sensor Signal Temperature
Sensor Data
Driving
Input Shaft Shift
(Mainshaft) Position
Speed Sensor Signal Information
Master Target of
ATF Temperature Controlling Current
Sensor Signal
A/T Clutch Pressure
Current Feedback Control Solenoid
Engine RPM Signal Valve A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-49

08/04/09 11:50:14 61TL2000_140_0052

Self-diagnosis
If the PCM detects the failure of a signal from a sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve or from another control unit, it stores
a Temporary DTC or a DTC. Depending on the failure, a DTC is stored in either the first or the second drive cycle. When
a DTC is stored, the PCM blinks the D indicator and/or turns on the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by a signal sent to
the gauge control module via F-CAN.
• One Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve, or from another control unit, the
PCM stores a DTC for the failure and blinks the D indicator and/or turns on the MIL immediately.
• Two Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve, or from another control unit in
the first drive cycle, the PCM stores a Temporary DTC. The D indicator and the MIL do not turns on at this time. If the
failure continues in the second drive cycle, the PCM stores a DTC and blinks the D indicator and/or turns on the MIL.
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve, or from another control unit, the
PCM ignores that signal and substitutes a pre-programmed value for them that allow the automatic transmission to
continue driving. This causes a DTC to be stored and the D indicator to blink and/or the MIL to come on.
14-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:15 61TL2000_140_0053
PCM A/T Control System Electrical Connections

＊１０
IGNITION SWITCH A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
BATTERY CONTROL SOLENOID
BAT IG1 C10 PCM B48 VALVE A
IG1 LS A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
SHIFT LOCK CONTROL SOLENOID
IG1 HOT in ON (II) SOLENOID VALVE B
and START (III) B40
A28 LS B
SLS
REVERSE A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
RELAY CIRCUIT A1 CONTROL SOLENOID
VB SOL B26 VALVE C
LS C
BACK-UP PGM-FI
LIGHTS MAIN RELAY SHIFT SOLENOID
(FI-MAIN) VALVE A
B11
A7 SH A
MRLY
A9 SHIFT SOLENOID
IGP VALVE B
BRAKE PEDAL B12
SH B
POSITION SWITCH
A42 SHIFT SOLENOID
BK SW VALVE C
B21
BRAKE LIGHTS SH C
A32
SCS SHIFT SOLENOID
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) B27 VALVE D
SH D
SHIFT SOLENOID
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE VALVE E
B25
A3 SH E
F-CAN CAN H
TRANSCEIVER A4
CAN CONTROLLER CAN L
B28
ATFT ATF
TEMPERATURE
SHIFT A/T GEAR POSITION SENSOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR DRIVE CIRCUIT
B34
DRIVE SG2
CIRCUIT B18 INPUT SHAFT
P R N D S NM (MAINSHAFT)
B19 SPEED SENSOR
VCC2
C14
A/T DIMMING CIRCUIT SG1
B38 OUTPUT SHAFT
NC (COUNTERSHAFT)
C13 SPEED SENSOR
VCC1
DRIVER’S MULTIPLEX A18
CONTROL UNIT (MICU) APSA
B14 A36
ATP P SG4
B15 A26 ACCELERATOR
ATP R VCC4 PEDAL
A19 POSITION (APP)
B13 APSB
TRANSMISSION ATP N A35 SENSOR
RANGE SG5
A25
SWITCH B22 VCC5
ATP D
2ND CLUTCH
B16 TRANSMISSION FLUID
ATP S PRESSURE SWITCH
B8
B29 OP2SW
ATP FWD
3RD CLUTCH
B23 TRANSMISSION FLUID
ATP RVS PRESSURE SWITCH
PADDLE SHIFTER ＋ (UPSHIFT SWITCH) B9
OP3SW
A47
SUPP B10
PG1
B1
PADDLE SHIFTER − (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) PG2
C44
A48 LG1
SDNP C48
LG2
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
A □ (49P) B △ (49P) C ○ (49P)

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-51

08/04/09 11:50:15 61TL2000_140_0054

PCM A/T Control System Inputs and Outputs
＊１１
A □ (49P) B △ (49P) C ○ (49P)
PCM CONNECTOR A □ (49P)

Terminal Wire Color Terminal Name Description Signal
Number
A1 WHT/RED VB SOL (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valves With ignition switch LOCK (0): About 0 V
A3 WHT CAN H (CAN Sends and receives With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses (About 2.5 V)
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL communication signal
HIGH)
A4 RED CAN L (CAN Sends and receives With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses (About 2.5 V)
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL communication signal
LOW)
A7 RED/BLK MRLY (PGM-FI MAIN Drives PGM-FI main relay 1 With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V
RELAY 1) Power source for DTC With ignition switch LOCK (0): Battery voltage
memory
A9 YEL/BLK IGP (POWER SOURCE) Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
With ignition switch LOCK (0): About 0 V
A18 YEL/BLK APS A (ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor A signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) fully pressed: About 4.8 V
SENSOR A) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: About 1.0 V
A19 BLK APS B (ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor B signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) fully pressed: About 2.4 V
SENSOR B) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: About 0.5 V
A25 BRN/WHT VCC5 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
voltage With ignition switch LOCK (0): About 0 V
A26 RED/BLK VCC4 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
voltage With ignition switch LOCK (0): About 0 V
A28 PNK SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in P, brake pedal
SOLENOID) pressed, and accelerator pedal released: About 0 V
A32 ORN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With the service check signal shorted using HDS:
SIGNAL) About 0 V
With the service check signal opened: About 5.0 V
A35 GRN SG5 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
A36 BLU/RED SG4 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
A42 LT GRN BK SW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: About 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage
A47 LT BLU SUPP (PADDLE SHIFTER ＋ Detects paddle shifter ＋ With paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) pressed:
(UPSHIFT SWITCH)) (upshift switch) signal About 0 V
With paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) released:
Battery voltage
A48 PUR SDNP (PADDLE SHIFTER − Detects paddle shifter − With paddle shifter − (downshift switch) pressed:
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)) (downshift switch) signal About 0 V
With paddle shifter − (downshift switch) released:
Battery voltage
14-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:15 61TL2000_140_0055
PCM CONNECTOR B △ (49P)

Number
B1 BLK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 0.5 V at all times
B8 BLU/RED OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH Detects 2nd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 2nd clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 2nd clutch pressure: About 0 V
B9 BLU/WHT OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH Detects 3rd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 3rd clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 3rd clutch pressure: About 0 V
B10 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 0.5 V at all times
B11 BLU/BLK SH A (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in R, D and S (in 1st, 4th, and
VALVE A) valve A 5th gears): Battery voltage
With engine running in P, N, D and S (in 2nd and 3rd
gears): About 0 V
B12 GRN/WHT SH B (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in P, R, N, D and S (in 1st and
VALVE B) valve B 2nd gears): Battery voltage
With engine running in D and S (3rd, 4th, and 5th
gears): About 0 V
B13 RED/BLK ATP N (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In N: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH N) switch N position signal In any position other than N: Around battery voltage
B14 BLU/BLK ATP P (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In P: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH P) switch P position signal In any position other than P: Around battery voltage
B15 WHT ATP R (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R) switch R position signal In any position other than R: Around battery voltage
B16 RED ATP S (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In S: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH S) switch S position signal In any position other than S: Battery voltage
B18 WHT/RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor With engine running in N: About 2.5 V (pulses)
SENSOR) signal
B19 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
(cont’d)
14-53
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 11:50:15 61TL2000_140_0056

PCM A/T Control System Inputs and Outputs (cont’d)
＊１２
A □ (49P) B △ (49P) C ○ (49P)
PCM CONNECTOR B △ (49P)

Number
B21 GRN SH C (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in N, D and S (in 1st, 3rd, and
VALVE C) valve C 5th gears): Battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, D and S (in 2nd and 4th
gears): About 0 V
B22 YEL/GRN ATP D (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D) switch D position signal In any position other than D: Battery voltage
B23 RED/WHT ATP RVS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH RVS) switch R position signal In any position other than R: Battery voltage
B25 YEL SH E (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve E With engine running in P and R: Battery voltage
VALVE E) With engine running in N, D and S (in 1st gear):
About 0 V
B26 BLU/YEL LS C (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C
SOLENOID VALVE C)
B27 GRN/RED SH D (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in D and S (in 2nd and 5th
VALVE D) valve D gears): Battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, N, D and S (in 1st, 3rd,
and 4th gears): About 0 V
B28 RED/YEL ATFT (ATF TEMPERATURE Detects ATF temperature With ignition switch ON (II): About 0.2−4.8 V
SENSOR) sensor signal depending on ATF temperature
B29 BLU/YEL ATP FWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D and S: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH FWD) switch D and S signal In any position other than D and S: Battery voltage
B34 GRN/BLK SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
B38 BLK/WHT NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V or about
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor 5.0 V
SENSOR) signal With driving: About 2.5 V (pulses)
B40 BRN LS B (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B)
B48 RED/BLK LS A (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve A
SOLENOID VALVE A)
14-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:16 61TL2000_140_0057
PCM CONNECTOR C ○ (49P)

Number
C10 BLK/RED IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition switch With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
signal With ignition switch LOCK (0): About 0 V
C13 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
C14 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
C44 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 0.5 V at all times
C48 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 0.5 V at all times
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-55

08/04/09 11:50:16 61TL2000_140_0058

Hydraulic Controls
Valve Bodies
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, and the servo body. The ATF pump is driven
by splines on the end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows through the regulator valve
to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve, directing pressure to the shift valves
and to each of the clutches via the shift solenoid valves. Shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E are bolted on the servo
body. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C are mounted on the outside of the transmission housing.
＊０１
SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT SOLENOID A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
VALVE A VALVE D CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE B
SHIFT SOLENOID
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
VALVE B CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE C
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
SERVO BODY A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
REGULATOR
VALVE BODY
MAIN VALVE BODY
14-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０８０００００ＣＡＡＴ０４
08/04/09 11:50:16 61TL2000_140_0059
Main Valve Body

The main valve body contains the manual valve, shift valves A, B, C, and E, the relief valve, the lock-up control valve,
the cooler check valve, the servo control valve, the ATF pump drive gear, and the ATF pump driven gear. The primary
function of the main valve body is to switch fluid pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure going to the
hydraulic control system.
＊０２
MAIN VALVE BODY SHIFT VALVE A
SHIFT VALVE B
MANUAL VALVE SHIFT VALVE C
RELIEF VALVE
SERVO CONTROL VALVE COOLER CHECK VALVE
SHIFT VALVE E
LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
ATF PUMP DRIVE GEAR
ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
Regulator Valve Body

The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the torque converter check valve, the lock-up shift valve, and
the 1st and 3rd accumulators.
＊０３
3RD ACCUMULATOR
1ST ACCUMULATOR
REGULATOR VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-57

08/04/09 11:50:17 61TL2000_140_0060

Hydraulic Controls (cont’d)
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while
also providing fluid to the lubrication system and the torque converter. The fluid from the ATF pump flows through B
and C. Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure in the A cavity pushes the
regulator valve toward the valve spring side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the
torque converter and the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator
valve returns under spring force. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the
regulator valve changes, and the amount of fluid from C through torque converter also changes. This operation is
continuous, maintaining the line pressure.
＊０４
To TORQUE To LUBRICATION and
CONVERTER To RELIEF VALVE
VALVE SPRING
ORIFICE
A
B C
From ATF PUMP
REGULATOR VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are regulated by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined with the stator in the torque converter, and the stator shaft arm end contacts the regulator
spring cap. When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (torque converter range), stator torque reaction acts on the
stator shaft, and the stator shaft arm end pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to
the reaction. The stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which
is regulated by the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum when the stator torque reaction reaches its
maximum.
＊０５
TORQUE CONVERTER
REGULATOR STATOR
VALVE BODY
REGULATOR VALVE
REGULATOR
SPRING CAP
STATOR SHAFT
STATOR SHAFT
ARM END
14-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:37 61TL2000_140_0061
Servo Body
The servo body contains the servo valve, shift valve D, the accumulators for 2nd, 4th, and 5th, and shift solenoid
valves A, B, C, D, and E.
＊０６
SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A VALVE D
SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT SOLENOID

VALVE B VALVE E
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
SERVO BODY
SERVO VALVE SHIFT VALVE D
Accumulator
The accumulators are located in the regulator valve body and the servo body. The regulator valve body contains the
1st and 3rd accumulators, and the servo body contains the 2nd, 4th, and 5th accumulators.
＊０７
2ND ACCUMULATOR
5TH ACCUMULATOR
SERVO BODY
1ST ACCUMULATOR
4TH ACCUMULATOR
REGULATOR
VALVE BODY
3RD ACCUMULATOR
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-59

08/04/09 11:50:37 61TL2000_140_0062

Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure
that is regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator valve enters the torque
converter through the lock-up shift valve, and it is discharged from the torque converter. The torque converter check
valve prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM switches the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The shift solenoid valve intercepts line pressure from the ATF
pump via the manual valve when the shift solenoid valve is OFF. When the shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the
PCM, line pressure changes to shift solenoid valve pressure at the shift solenoid valve, then the shift solenoid valve
pressure flows to the shift valve. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift
valve, and switches the port of the hydraulic circuit. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
A, B, and C. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulate hydraulic pressure, and applies pressure to the
clutches to engage smoothly. The clutches receive optimum clutch pressure which is regulated by the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valves for comfortable driving and shifting under all conditions.
Hydraulic Pressure at the Port for use in the hydraulic circuit:

Port Hydraulic Pressure Port Hydraulic Pressure
No. No.
1 Line SB Shift solenoid valve B
3 Line SC Shift solenoid valve C
3’ Line SD Shift solenoid valve D
4 Line SE Shift solenoid valve E
4’ Line 10 1st clutch
4’’ Line 20 2nd clutch
7 Line 30 3rd clutch
1A Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 40 4th clutch
1B Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 50 5th clutch
3A Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 55 A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
3B Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 55’ A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
3C Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 56 A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
5A Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 57 A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
5B Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 90 Torque converter
5C Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 91 Torque converter
5D Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 92 Torque converter
5E Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B 93 ATF cooler
5F Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 94 Torque converter
or B
5G A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B 95 Lubrication
5H A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C 96 Torque converter
5J A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C 97 Torque converter
5K A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C 99 Suction
5L A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C X Drain
5N A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C HX High position drain
SA Shift solenoid valve A AX Air drain
14-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０８０００００ＣＡＡＴ０５
08/04/09 11:50:38 61TL2000_140_0063
N Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and positions of the shift valves
are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A: OFF, and shift valve A remains on the right side
• Shift solenoid valve B: ON, and shift valve B moves to the left side
• Shift solenoid valve C: ON, and shift valve C moves to the left side
• Shift solenoid valve D: OFF, and shift valve D remains on the left side
• Shift solenoid valve E: OFF, and shift valve E remains on the left side
Line pressure (1) flows to the shift solenoid valves and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. Under this
condition, hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE: When used, ‘‘left’’ or ‘‘right’’ indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
＊０８ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
3RD 1ST 1ST 4TH 5TH 5TH CLUTCH 2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION CLUTCH CLUTCH ACCUMULATOR CLUTCH CLUTCH ACCUMULATOR
FLUID PRESSURE TRANSMISSION
SWITCH FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
30 ACCUMULATOR ACCUMULATOR ACCUMULATOR
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
X XX 5A X X 56 5E SA
10
SERVO CONTROL A: OFF
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: ON
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
5B 3C 5G 5E 5C SB SHIFT X
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
LOCK-UP X 5N 50 30 1A 55’ 5F SA SD 5L 5J 1A 55’
SHIFT VALVE SHIFT 55
7 55 96 92 93 SE SHIFT VALVE D
VALVE A XX 1B X 20 X 57 X 1 X X X AX
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CONVERTER MANUAL VALVE 1B 5A 3 7 1 4
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
COOLER LOCK-UP IDLER GEAR
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL MAINSHAFT 4’ 4’’
CHECK X 3B 3A CONTROL SOLENOID VALVES
VALVE 93 VALVE COUNTERSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-61

08/04/09 11:50:39 61TL2000_140_0064

Hydraulic Flow (cont’d)
1st gear shifting from N position
The shift solenoid valves remain the same as in N when shifting to D from N. The manual valve is moved to the D
position, and uncovers the port of line pressure (4) leading to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. Hydraulic
pressure to the 1st clutch from A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A is created as shift solenoid valve A OFF,
and B and C remains ON. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55) changes to 1st clutch pressure
(10) at shift valve B, and flows to the 1st clutch. The 1st clutch is engaged gently when shifting to D from N.
＊０９ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: ON
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
14-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:40 61TL2000_140_0065
Driving in 1st gear in D and S with automatic shift mode

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, B and C remain ON, and D and E remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve A
pressure (SA) is applied to the right side of shift valve A. Shift valve A is moved to the left side to uncover the line
pressure port leading to the 1st clutch, and to cover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure port.
Fluid flows to the 1st clutch by way of:

Line pressure (1) → Shift valve D−Line pressure (1A) → Shift valve A−Line pressure (1B) → Manual valve−Line
pressure (5A) → Shift valve C−Line pressure (5B) → Shift valve B−1st clutch pressure (10) → 1st clutch
1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, and the 1st clutch is engaged securely.
＊１０ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
SERVO CONTROL A: ON
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: ON
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-63

08/04/09 11:50:41 61TL2000_140_0066

Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear in D and S with automatic shift mode
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, B and C remain
ON, and D and E remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) in the right side of shift valve A is released. Shift
valve A is moved to the right side uncovering the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B pressure port
leading to the 1st and 2nd clutches. The PCM actuates the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves to regulate
hydraulic pressure. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55) changes to 1st clutch pressure (10) at
shift valve B. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to (5E) at shift valve C and to (5F) at
shift valve B, and becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve A. The 1st and 2nd clutches are engaged gently.
＊１１ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: ON
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
14-64 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:42 61TL2000_140_0067
Driving in 2nd gear in D and S with automatic shift mode

The PCM turns shift solenoid valves C OFF, D ON, A and E remain OFF, and B remains ON. Shift solenoid valve C
pressure (SC) in the right side of shift valve C is released. Shift valve C moves to the right side to switch the ports. This
movement covers the ports to block A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure at shift valves C and A, and
uncover the line pressure port leading to the 2nd clutch.
Fluid flows to 2nd clutch by way of:

Line pressure (1) → Manual valve−Line pressure (4) → Shift valve C−Line pressure (5E) → Shift valve B−Line
pressure (5F) → Shift valve A−2nd clutch pressure (20) → 2nd clutch
2nd clutch pressure (20) is applied to the 2nd clutch, and the 2nd clutch is engaged securely.
＊１２ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: ON
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-65

08/04/09 11:50:43 61TL2000_140_0068

Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear in D and S with automatic shift mode
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, A and E remain
OFF, and B and D remain ON. Shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Shift
valve C is moved to the left side uncovering the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C pressure ports
leading to the 2nd and 3rd clutches. The PCM actuates the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves to regulate
hydraulic pressure. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to 2nd clutch pressure (20) at
shift valve A. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (57) changes to (5H) at shift valve C and to (5K) at
shift valve B, and becomes 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A. The 2nd and 3rd clutches are engaged gently.
＊１３ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: ON
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: ON
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
14-66 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:44 61TL2000_140_0069
Driving in 3rd gear in D and S with automatic shift mode

The PCM turns shift solenoid valves B and D OFF, A and E remain OFF, and C remains ON. Shift solenoid valve B
pressure (SB) in the right side of shift valve B is released, and shift valve B is moved to the right side. Shift solenoid
valve D pressure (SD) in the left side of shift valve D is released, and shift valve D is moved to the left side. This valve
movement causes A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure port leading to the 3rd clutch.
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (57) changes to (5J) to be directed to shift solenoid valve D and
to (5K) at shift valve B, and becomes 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A. 3rd clutch pressure (30) is applied to the 3
rd clutch, and the 3rd clutch is engaged securely.
＊１４ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: OFF
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: ON
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-67

08/04/09 11:50:45 61TL2000_140_0070

Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear in D and S with automatic shift mode
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and A, B, D, and
E remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) in the right side of shift valve C is released. Shift valve C is moved
to the right side uncovering the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C pressure ports leading to the 3rd
and 4th clutches. The PCM actuates the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves to regulate hydraulic pressure. A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (57) changes to 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A. A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to (5G) at shift valve C, and becomes 4th clutch pressure (40)
at shift valve B. The 3rd and 4th clutches are engaged gently.
＊１５ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: OFF
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
14-68 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:46 61TL2000_140_0071
Driving in 4th gear in D and S with automatic shift mode

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and B, C, D, and E remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) is
applied to the right side of shift valve A. Shift valve A is moved to the left side to cover the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A and C pressure ports leading to the 2nd and 3rd clutches.
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to (5G) at shift valve C, and becomes 4th clutch
pressure (40) at shift valve B. 4th clutch pressure (40) is held high by A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B, and
the 4th clutch is engaged securely.
＊１６ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
SERVO CONTROL A: ON
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: OFF
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-69

08/04/09 11:50:46 61TL2000_140_0072

Shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear in D with automatic shift mode
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve D ON, A remains ON,
and B, C, and E remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD) is applied to the left side of shift valve D. Shift valve
D is moved to the right side uncovering the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure port leading to the
5th clutch. The PCM controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves to regulate hydraulic pressure. A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to 4th clutch pressure (40) at shift valve B. A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve C pressure (57) changes to (5L) at shift valve D and to (5N) at shift valve B, and becomes 5th
clutch pressure (50) at shift valve A. The 4th and 5th clutches are engaged gently.
＊１７ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
SERVO CONTROL A: ON
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: OFF
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: ON
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
14-70 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:47 61TL2000_140_0073
Driving in 5th gear in D with automatic shift mode

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, A and D remain ON, and B and E remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve C
pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Shift valve C is moved to the left side. The directs A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B pressure to shift valve B where it is blocked. The pressure in the 4th clutch is
released through shift valve C.
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (57) changes to (5L) at shift valve D and to (5N) at shift valve B.
5th clutch pressure (50) is held high by A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, and the 5th clutch is engaged
securely.
＊１８ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
SERVO CONTROL A: ON
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: OFF
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: ON
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: ON
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: OFF
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-71

08/04/09 11:50:48 61TL2000_140_0074

R Position: Shifting to R position from P or N position
When shifting to R, the PCM turns shift solenoid valves B and E ON, and A, C, and D are turned OFF. Shift solenoid
valve B pressure (SB) is applied to the right side of shift valve B, and shift valve B is moved to the left side. Shift
solenoid valve E pressure (SE) is applied to the left side of shift valve E, and shift valve E is moved to the right side.
Line pressure (1) changes to (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the servo valve via shift valve E. The servo valve is
moved to the reverse range position. Movement of shift valves B and E, and the servo valve creates 4th clutch
pressure line between the 4th clutch and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. 4th clutch pressure (40) is
applied to the 4th clutch, and the 4th clutch is engaged gently.
＊１９ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: ON
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
14-72 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:49 61TL2000_140_0075
R Position: Driving in reverse gear

After starting off in reverse gear, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, B and E remain ON, and C and D remain
OFF. Shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) is applied to the right side of shift valve A to cover the A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A pressure port, and to uncover the line pressure port leading to the 4th clutch creating full line
pressure. The 4th clutch is engaged securely with line pressure.
Reverse Inhibitor Control

When R is selected while the vehicle is moving forward, the PCM commands shift solenoid valve A to turn OFF, and E
to remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) is not applied to shift valve A so that line pressure (3A) is not
applied to the servo valve. Also shift solenoid valve E pressure (SE) is not applied to shift valve E so that line pressure
(3’) is not applied to the servo valve. The servo valve cannot be shifted to the reverse position, and hydraulic pressure
is not applied to the 4th clutch from the servo valve for reverse; as a result, power is not transmitted to the reverse
direction.
＊２０ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
SERVO CONTROL A: ON
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: ON
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-73

08/04/09 11:50:50 61TL2000_140_0076

P Position
The PCM turns shift solenoid valves B and E ON, and A, C, and D OFF. Line pressure (1) flows to the shift solenoid
valves and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. Line pressure (3) changes to (3’) at shift valve E, and flows to
the servo valve. The servo valve is moved to the reverse/park position. Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the
clutches.
＊２１ 3RD CLUTCH 2ND
SWITCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
95 30 10 95 40 50 95
30 3RD 10 40 4TH 50 20 2ND 20
20
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVES
10
5H 5C 5B 5G 4 SC
VALVE 1
57 57 X
X 4’ 4 3
91 SHIFT
VALVE
C B: ON
90 SB
X
94 SC
SHIFT
C: OFF
3C X
VALVE 5L 5H 1
B VALVE E
SE X 3B 3’ 3 4
D: OFF
X 5N 5K 5J 10 X 40 5F
SD
X
SE
E: ON
1
X 55’ X
94 91 5K
A
1
56
TORQUE X X AX
B
CHECK 4’’
90 96 55 97 AX
VALVE 90 90 57
HX 3A X 3A
AX
HX X X AX
C
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
4
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR 3’
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95 SERVO VALVE
ATF
X X
COOLER
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
14-74 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:51 61TL2000_140_0077
Lock-up System
The lock-up mechanism of the torque converter clutch operates in D (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears) and S (2nd, 3rd, and
4th gears). The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the
torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates
at the same speed as the engine. Together with the hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the timing and volume of the
lock-up mechanism. When shift solenoid valve E is turned on by the PCM, shift solenoid valve E pressure switches the
lock-up shift valve on and off. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the lock-up control valve control the
degree of lock-up.
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained off, and
fluid entering from the chamber between the pump and the stator exerts pressure through the torque converter clutch
piston against the torque converter cover. The torque converter clutch piston engages with the torque converter cover;
the torque converter clutch lock-up is ON, and the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine.
＊０１
Power flow TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH PISTON
DAMPER SPRING
The power flows by way of:
TURBINE
Engine
↓
Drive plate
↓ TORQUE To ATF cooler
Torque converter cover CONVERTER INLET OUTLET
↓ COVER
Torque converter clutch piston
↓
Damper spring
↓
Turbine
↓
Mainshaft
MAINSHAFT
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up OFF (Disengaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid entered from the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston passes
through the torque converter and goes out through the chambers between the turbine and the stator, and between the
pump and the stator. As a result, the torque converter clutch piston moves away from the torque converter cover, and
the torque converter lock-up clutch is released; the torque converter clutch lock-up is OFF.
＊０２
Power flow TURBINE
PUMP
The power flows by way of:
Engine
↓
Drive plate TORQUE To ATF cooler
↓ CONVERTER
Torque converter cover COVER INLET
↓
Pump
↓
Turbine
↓
Mainshaft
MAINSHAFT
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-75
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４７４００００００ＣＡＡＴ０６
08/04/09 11:50:51 61TL2000_140_0078

Lock-up System (cont’d)
No Lock-up
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve E OFF, and shift solenoid valve E pressure (SE) is not applied to the lock-up shift
valve. The lock-up shift valve remains to the right to uncover the torque converter pressure ports leading to the left
side of the torque converter and releasing pressure from the right side of the torque converter. Torque converter
pressure (92) changes to (94) at the lock-up shift valve, and enters into the left side of the torque converter to
disengage the torque converter clutch. This keeps the torque converter clutch piston keeps away from the torque
converter cover and the torque converter clutch lock-up is OFF.
＊０３
TORQUE
CONVERTER
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E

SE
OFF
1 X
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
91 55
X X AX
90
1
94
X 55’ SHIFT VALVE A and D

94 91
LOCK-UP
SHIFT VALVE
7 55 96 92 93 SE
MANUAL VALVE
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CHECK AX
VALVE 90 96 55 97
90 90
HX
AX
HX
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT
CHECK CONTROL MAINSHAFT

FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95
ATF X
COOLER X
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
14-76 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:52 61TL2000_140_0079
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve E ON, and shift
solenoid valve E pressure (SE) is applied to the right side of the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is moved to
the left side to switch the torque converter pressure (91) port, which goes to the right side of the torque converter, and
the port of torque converter pressure (94) is released from the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter
pressure (91) flows to the right side of the torque converter to engage the torque converter clutch. The PCM also
controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to regulate A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure.
A/T clutch pressure solenoid valve A (55) is applied to the lock-up shift valve and the lock-up control valve. The
position of the lock-up control valve depends on A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55) and torque
converter pressure released from the torque converter. The lock-up control valve controls the amount of torque
converter clutch lock-up until fluid between the clutch piston and the torque converter cover is fully released; the
torque converter clutch is in partial lock-up.
＊０４
TORQUE
CONVERTER

SE
ON
1
X
91 55
X X AX
90
1
94
X SHIFT VALVE A and D

55’ 94 91
LOCK-UP
SHIFT VALVE
7 55 96 92 93 SE
MANUAL VALVE
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CHECK AX
VALVE 90 96 55 97
90 90
HX
AX
HX
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT

FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95
ATF X
COOLER X
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-77

08/04/09 11:50:52 61TL2000_140_0080

Lock-up System (cont’d)
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed increases, the PCM sends a signal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to increase
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55), and the lock-up control valve is moved to the left by the
increased pressure. Then torque converter pressure (94) from the left side of the torque converter is completely
released at the lock-up control valve, and torque converter pressure (91) engages the torque converter clutch securely;
the torque converter clutch is in full lock-up.
＊０５
TORQUE
CONVERTER

SE
ON
1
X
91 55
X X AX
90
1
94
X SHIFT VALVE A and D

55’ 94 91
LOCK-UP
SHIFT VALVE
7 55 96 92 93 SE
MANUAL VALVE
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CHECK AX
VALVE 90 96 55 97
90 90
HX
AX
HX
X 93 X 93 92 IDLER
X X SHAFT

FINAL DRIVE
GEAR
SECONDARY
SHAFT
95 7
92 95
ATF X
COOLER X
RELIEF VALVE 1 1
99 REGULATOR VALVE
ATF PUMP
14-78 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:52 61TL2000_140_0081
Shift Lock System

The shift lock system prevents the shift lever from mis-shifting. The shift lock solenoid is usually OFF. After starting
the engine in P, the shift lever cannot move to any other position from P because the shift lock stop stops the lock pin
unless the brake pedal is pressed. When the brake pedal is pressed and the accelerator pedal is not pressed, the shift
lock solenoid is ON; the shift lock solenoid plunger in the shift lock solenoid pulls the shift lock stop to release the lock
pin. Pressing the shift lever button allows the shift lever to move to any other position. When the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal are pressed at the same time, the shift lock system is not unlocked.
＊０１
P POSITION
LOCK PIN
SELECT LEVER GATE

SHIFT LOCK STOP
SHIFT LOCK SHIFT LOCK

SOLENOID: OFF SOLENOID: ON
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

PLUNGER
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-79
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４００００００００ＣＡＡＴ０７
08/04/09 11:50:52 61TL2000_140_0082

Shift Lock System (cont’d)
When the shift lock system does not operate for a mechanical or electrical trouble, you can unlock the shift lock
temporarily by inserting the ignition key into the shift lock release hole and pressing the shift lock release. The shift
lock release is pressed, the shift lock stop releases the lock pin, and the shift lever can move to any other position.
＊０２
IGNITION KEY
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE
LOCK PIN
SELECT LEVER GATE
SHIFT LOCK STOP
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
14-80 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:53 61TL2000_140_0083
Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System

＊０１
PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 1 (FI-MAIN)
RED/BLK
No. 17 (15 A)
YEL/BLK
IGNITION SWITCH DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY No. 1 (100 A) No. 3-1 (50 A) BAT IG1 C5 No. 9 (20 A) F2
WHT BLU YEL
No. 10 (10 A) F12
No. 12 (15 A) WHT/RED
RED/BLU IG1 HOT in ON (II) No. 5 (7.5 A) P20
and START (III) BRN
17
BRN BRN
POWERTRAIN CONTROL 16
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE MODULE (PCM)
15 12 V
BRN
P VB SOL A1
WHT/RED
A/T IG1 C10 9
GEAR R BLK/RED YEL
POSITION
INDICATOR N
DRIVE IGP A9
CIRCUIT D YEL/BLK
MRLY A7
S RED/BLK
ATP RVS B23
A/T DIMMING CIRCUIT RED/WHT
CAN ATP FWD B29
CONTROLLER BLU/YEL
5V ATP S B16
SHIFT RED
INDICATOR ATP D B22
DRIVE YEL/GRN
CIRCUIT
CAN H 22 A3 CAN H
WHT WHT ATP N B13
F-CAN RED/BLK
TRANSCEIVER 21 A4 CAN L ATP R B15
CAN L
RED RED WHT
PG 1 ATP P B14
SG 17 BLU/BLK
9 15
14
BRN BLK 16
17
G501 G502 13 11 BLK
6 BLU/
WHT BLK
DATA LINK 14
CONNECTOR RED BLU/
9 A32 SCS WHT WHT
(DLC) G101
ORN 7 5 4 9 3 8 6 10 1
C106
1 5 GRY/ BLU/ YEL/
RED BRN RED WHT PNK BLK
WHT RED
LT GRN BLK/ RED/ BLU WHT/
2 6 A28 SLS BLU BLK RED
BLK PNK 1 2 8 3 9 4 7 6 5
SHIFT LOCK ST FWD RVS E
SOLENOID N D
R S
1 2 A42 BK SW P
RED/BLU LT GRN LT GRN
BRAKE
PEDAL
POSITION DRIVER’S MULTIPLEX
SWITCH INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT
(MICU) TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
(built into the driver’s REVERSE STARTER
under-dash fuse/relay box) RELAY CUT RELAY
A □ (49P) B △ (49P) C ○ (49P)

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-81
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４００００００００ＥＡＡＴ０８
08/04/09 11:50:54 61TL2000_140_0084

Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System (cont’d)
＊０２
OUTPUT SHAFT APS A A18 1
(COUNTERSHAFT) 5V YEL/BLK
SPEED SENSOR SG4 A36 2
1 C13 VCC1 BLU/RED
YEL/RED VCC4 A26 3 ACCELERATOR
2 B38 NC RED/BLK PEDAL
BLK/WHT APS B A19 4 POSITION (APP)
C14 SG1 BLK SENSOR
3
GRN/WHT SG5 A35 5
GRN
INPUT SHAFT VCC5 A25 6
(MAINSHAFT) BRN/WHT
SPEED SENSOR PADDLE SHIFTER ＋
(UPSHIFT SWITCH)
1 B19 VCC2
YEL/BLU 12 V 4
CABLE BLK BLK
2 B18 NM REEL
WHT/RED
SUPP A47 8 14 14 3
3 B34 SG2 LT BLU LT BLU WHT BLK
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
2
RED GRN
GRN/BLK GRN/ 1 RED/

ATF RED BLK
TEMPERATURE RIGHT
SENSOR
7 PADDLE SHIFTER −
WHT BRN (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
6 B28 ATFT G501 2 12 4
WHT RED/YEL BLK BLK
SHIFT SOLENOID SDNP A48 7 15 15 3

VALVE A LT GRN PUR ORN BLK
B11 SH A GAUGE
5 CONTROL 9 4 2
BLU BLU/BLK RED RED GRN
MODULE
SHIFT SOLENOID PASSENGER’S 10 3 GRN/ 1 RED/

VALVE B UNDER-DASH GRY RED BLK
FUSE RELAY LEFT
2 B12 SH B BOX No. 6 (7.5 A) 2RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
ORN GRN/WHT FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
OP2SW B8
BLU/RED
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
1 B21 SH C FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
GRN GRN
OP3SW B9
BLU/WHT
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
8 B27 SH D LS A B48 1 A/T CLUTCH

YEL GRN/RED RED/BLK
PRESSURE
CONTROL
2 SOLENOID
SHIFT SOLENOID BLK
VALVE E VALVE A
3 B25 SH E LS B B40 1 A/T CLUTCH

RED YEL BRN
PRESSURE
CONTROL
2 SOLENOID
B10 PG1 BLK VALVE B
BLK
B1 PG2 LS C B26 1 A/T CLUTCH
BLK BLU/YEL
PRESSURE
C44 LG1 CONTROL
BRN/YEL 2 SOLENOID
BLK VALVE C
C48 LG2
BRN/YEL
G101 G101
A □ (49P) B △ (49P) C ○ (49P)

14-82 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:54 61TL2000_140_0085
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P062F: Powertrain Control Module 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P062F in the DTCs
(PCM) Internal Control Module Keep Alive MENU with the HDS.
Memory (KAM) Error
Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-234). If any other
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 7,
NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the
SYSTEM with the HDS. PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 14-8), then go to step 6. If the PCM was
Is DT C P062F indicated in the PGM-F I substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
SY ST EM? COMPLETED, go to step 6.
YES−Go to the DTC P062F troubleshooting in the

PGM-FI SYSTEM (see page 11-148).
NO−Go to step 4.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T

SYSTEM with the HDS.
Is DT C P062F indicated in the A/ T SY ST EM?
YES−Go to step 5.

time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were
indicated, go to the indicated DTC’s
troubleshooting.

good PCM (see page 14-8).
6. Start the engine, and wait for at least 2 minutes.

Is DT C P062F indicated in the A/ T SY ST EM?

terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-8), then
go to step 6. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
1.
NO−Go to step 8.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-83
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０６２ＦＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:50:54 61TL2000_140_0086

DTC P0705: Short in Transmission Range 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Switch Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input)
9. Measure the voltage between transmission range
NOTE: switch connector terminals No. 2 and No. 5.
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and ＊０１
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
ATP P (BLK/BLU) GND (BLK)

4. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position. Is there around battery voltage?
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0705 in the DTCs YES−Go to step 15.
MENU with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 10.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent

intermittent short to body ground in the wires
between the transmission range switch and the
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 3.
7. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page

14-304).
Is the transmission range switch OK ?
YES−With the transmission range switch

connector disconnected, go to step 8.
NO−Replace the transmission range switch

14-84 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７０５ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:50:54 61TL2000_140_0087
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Check for continuity between transmission range
switch connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. ＊０３
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
GND (BLK)
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
＊０２
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
ATP P (BLU/BLK)
Terminal side of female terminals NO−Repair open in the wire between transmission
range switch connector terminal No. 5 and body
Is there continuity? ground (G101), or repair poor body ground (G101),
then go to step 45.
YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal B14 and the
transmission range switch, then go to step 45.
NO−Go to step 14.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-85

08/04/09 11:50:55 61TL2000_140_0088

15. Measure the voltage between transmission range 19. Check for continuity between PCM connector
switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 8. terminal B15 and body ground.
＊０４＊０５
ATP R (WHT)
GND (BLK)
ATP R (WHT)

Is there around battery voltage? Is there continuity?
YES−Go to step 20. YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire

NO−Go to step 16. transmission range switch, then go to step 45.
14-86 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:50:55 61TL2000_140_0089
＊０６＊０７
ATP N (RED/BLK)
ATP N (RED/BLK) GND (BLK)

Is there around battery voltage? Is there continuity?

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-87

08/04/09 11:50:55 61TL2000_140_0090

＊０８＊０９
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
GND (BLK)
ATP D (YEL/GRN)
ATP D (PNK)

14-88 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:26 61TL2000_140_0091
＊１０＊１１
ATP S (RED)
ATP S (BLU) GND (BLK)


(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-89

08/04/09 11:51:26 61TL2000_140_0092

＊１２＊１３
GND (BLK)
ATP FWD (BLU/YEL)
ATP FWD (YEL/RED)

14-90 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:26 61TL2000_140_0093
＊１４＊１５
GND (BLK)
ATP RVS (RED/WHT)
ATP RVS (WHT/RED)

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-91

08/04/09 11:51:26 61TL2000_140_0094

45. Reconnect all connectors. 56. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
46. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is DT C P07 05 indicated?
47. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES−Check for intermittent short to body ground
in the wires between the transmission range switch
48. Start the engine. and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 14-8), then go to step
49. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever 54. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
each position. NO−Go to step 57.
50. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 57. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0705 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
YES−Check for intermittent short to body ground
in the wires between the transmission range switch YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
and the PCM, then go to step 1. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO−Go to step 51. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 56,
51. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0705 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS. NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? between the transmission range switch and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other good PCM (see page 14-8), then go to step 54. If the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 50, PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 54.
NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for

between the transmission range switch and the
PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT

55. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
each position.
14-92 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:26 61TL2000_140_0095
DTC P0706: Open in Transmission Range 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Switch Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 11. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle with the shift lever
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). in D until the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem (40 km/h), then slow down and stop the wheels.
transmission. 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
3. Raise the front of the vehicle, make sure it is
securely supported, and allow the front wheels to NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, troubleshooting
rotate freely, or raise the vehicle on a lift. is complete. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 11.
4. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the
VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle with the shift lever 13. Shift the shift lever to D, and check the Forward
in D until the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph Switch (ATP FWD) and A/T D Switch in the Data List
(40 km/h), then slow down and stop the wheels. with the HDS.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs Are F orward Switch ( AT P F W D) and A/ T D
MENU with the HDS. Switch ON?
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? YES−Go to step 14.
NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent 14. Shift the shift lever to S, and check the Forward
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for Switch (ATP FWD) and A/T S Switch in the Data List
poor connections or loose terminals between the with the HDS.
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4. Are F orward Switch ( AT P F W D) and A/ T S
Switch ON?
7. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-304). NO−Go to step 18.
Is the transmission range switch OK ?
YES−Go to step 8.

8. Adjust the shift cable (see page 14-298).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-93
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７０６ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:51:27 61TL2000_140_0096

16. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the 22. Measure the voltage between transmission range
VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle with the shift lever switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 7.
in D until the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph ＊０２
(40 km/h), then slow down and stop the wheels. TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR

MENU with the HDS.
GND (BLK)

ATP FWD (YEL/RED)
poor connections or loose terminals between the Wire side of female terminals
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the HDS
19. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector. NO−Repair open in the wire between the
transmission range switch and PCM connector
20. Check for continuity between transmission range terminal B29, then go to step 25.
＊０１ 23. Measure the voltage between transmission range
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 9.
＊０３
GND (BLK) TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
ATP D (PNK)

YES−Go to step 21. Is there battery voltage?
NO−Repair open in the wire between the YES−Go to step 24.

transmission range switch and body ground (G101),
or repair poor body ground (G101), then go to step NO−Repair open in the wire between the
25. transmission range switch and PCM connector
terminal B22, then go to step 25.
14-94 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:27 61TL2000_140_0097
24. Measure the voltage between transmission range 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
switch connector terminals No. 4 and No. 5.
＊０４ Is DT C P07 06 indicated?
terminals between the transmission range switch
and the PCM, then go to step 1.
ATP S (BLU) GND (BLK) NO−Go to step 30.

MENU with the HDS.

Is there battery voltage? go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
YES−Go to step 31. NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals between the
NO−Repair open in the wire between the transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
transmission range switch and PCM connector step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
terminal B16, then go to step 25. step 28.
25. Reconnect all connectors. 31. Reconnect all connectors.
26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 32. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
27. Clear the DTC with the HDS. good PCM (see page 14-8).
28. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the 33. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the
VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle with the shift lever VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle with the shift lever
in D until the vehicle speed reaches 30 mph in D until the vehicle speed reaches 30 mph
(48 km/h), then slow down and stop the wheels. (48 km/h), then slow down and stop the wheels.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-95

08/04/09 11:51:27 61TL2000_140_0098


and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
33. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 35.

MENU with the HDS.
YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the

transmission range switch and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-96 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:27 61TL2000_140_0099
DTC P0711: Problem in ATF Temperature 5. Check the ATF Temp Sensor in the Data List with
Sensor Circuit the HDS.
NOTE: Does the AT F temperature read about the same as

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and ECT Sensor?
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES−Go to step 14.
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the NO−Replace the ATF temperature sensor
transmission. (see page 14-251), then go to step 6.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Reconnect all connectors.
2. Check the ATF Temp Sensor in the Data List with 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the HDS.
Does the AT F temperature exceed the ambient air
temperature? 9. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
YES−Record the ATF temperature. Leave the
engine off for at least 30 minutes, then go to step 3. 10. Allow the engine coolant temperature to cool to the
ambient air temperature.
NO−Record the ATF temperature. Test the stall
speed RPM (see page 14-226) three times, then go 11. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal
to step 3. operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on),
and wait for at least 20 seconds, then drive the
3. Check the ATF Temp Sensor in the Data List with vehicle at speeds over 19 mph (31 km/h) for at least
the HDS. 5 minutes.
Did the AT F temperature change? 12. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES−Leave the engine off for at least 30 minutes, Is DT C P07 11 indicated?

then go to step 4.
NO−Replace the ATF temperature sensor terminals between the ATF temperature sensor and
(see page 14-251), then go to step 6. the PCM, then go to step 1.
4. Check the ECT Sensor in the Data List with the HDS. NO−Go to step 13.
Does the ECT Sensor read about the same as the 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0711 in the DTCs
ambient air temperature? MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 5. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
NO−Leave the engine off until the ECT Sensor YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
reads the same as the ambient air temperature, Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 12,
then go to step 5. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.

connections or loose terminals between the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 9.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-97
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７１１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:51:27 61TL2000_140_0100

15. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal

16. Allow the engine coolant temperature to cool to the

ambient air temperature.

operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on),
and wait for at least 20 seconds, then drive the
vehicle at speeds over 19 mph (31 km/h) for at least
5 minutes.

terminals between the ATF temperature sensor and
the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
NO−Go to step 19.

MENU with the HDS.


temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-8), then go to step 15. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 15.
14-98 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:27 61TL2000_140_0101
DTC P0712: Short in ATF Temperature Sensor 10. Check for continuity between shift solenoid wire
Circuit harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
＊０１
NOTE: SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR
transmission. ATFT (RED/YEL)
2. Check the ATF Temp Sensor voltage in the Data List

with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals
Is the AT F T emp Sensor voltage 0.07 V or less?

YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this between PCM connector terminal B28 and shift
time. Check for an intermittent short to body solenoid wire harness connector terminal No. 6,
ground in the ATFT wire between the ATF then go to step 11.
temperature sensor and the PCM.
NO−Go to step 17.
4. Disconnect the shift solenoid wire harness

connector.
6. Check the ATF Temp Sensor voltage in the Data List

with the HDS.
Is the AT F T emp Sensor voltage 0.07 V or less?
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Replace the ATF temperature sensor

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-99
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７１２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:51:27 61TL2000_140_0102

12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is DT C P07 12 indicated?
in the wire between the ATF temperature sensor
14. Start the engine with the shift lever in P, and wait and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
for at least 20 seconds. known-good PCM (see page 14-8), then go to step
NO−Go to step 21.
YES−Check for intermittent short to body ground MENU with the HDS.
in the wire between the ATF temperature sensor
and the PCM, then go to step 1. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
NO−Go to step 16. YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0712 in the DTCs original PCM (see page 11-234). If any other
MENU with the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 20,
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other intermittent short to body ground in the wire
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 15, between the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM.
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 14-8), then go to step 19. If the PCM
NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
intermittent short to body ground in the wire NOT COMPLETED, go to step 19.
between the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM,
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT

19. Start the engine with the shift lever in P, and wait
14-100 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:27 61TL2000_140_0103
DTC P0713: Open in ATF Temperature Sensor 7. Check the ATF Temp Sensor voltage in the Data List
Circuit with the HDS.
NOTE: Does the AT F T emp Sensor voltage exceed

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 4.93 V ?
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the NO−Replace the ATF temperature sensor
transmission. (see page 14-251), then go to step 21.
2. Check the ATF Temp Sensor voltage in the Data List 9. Remove the jumper wire from the shift solenoid
with the HDS. wire harness connector.
Does the AT F T emp Sensor voltage exceed 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4.93 V ?
11. Measure the voltage between shift solenoid wire
YES−Go to step 3. harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
＊０２
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR
between the ATF temperature sensor and the
PCM.

ATFT (RED/YEL)
connector.
5. Connect shift solenoid wire harness connector

terminals No. 6 and No. 7 with a jumper wire. Wire side of female terminals
＊０１
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR
NO−Go to step 17.

ATFT (RED/YEL) SG2 (GRN/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-101
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７１３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:51:28 61TL2000_140_0104

14. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). 19. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
15. Connect shift solenoid wire harness connector 20. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal No. 7 and body ground with a jumper wire. terminal B28 and shift solenoid wire harness
＊０３ connector terminal No. 6.
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR ＊０５
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
HARNESS CONNECTOR
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE ATFT ATFT (RED/YEL)

(RED/YEL)
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of Terminal side of

female terminals female terminals

terminal B34 and body ground. Is there continuity?
＊０４
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) YES−Go to step 27.
NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal B28 and the ATF temperature

SG2 (GRN/BLK)

connector terminal B34 and the ATF temperature YES−Check for poor connections or loose
sensor, then go to step 21. terminals between the ATF temperature sensor and
the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 26.
14-102 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:28 61TL2000_140_0105
26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0713 in the DTCs 31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0713 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS. MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 25, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. original PCM (see page 11-234). If any other
NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step connections or loose terminals between the ATF
24. temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
27. Reconnect all connectors. 14-8), then go to step 29. If the PCM was substituted,
28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest go to step 29.

terminals between the ATF temperature sensor and
the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
NO−Go to step 31.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-103

08/04/09 11:51:28 61TL2000_140_0106

DTC P0716: Problem in Input Shaft 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
DTC P0717: Problem in Input Shaft
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No Signal 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
Input)
NOTE: terminal C44 and body ground, and between
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and terminal C48 and body ground.
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review ＊０１
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
transmission.
1. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor installation (see page 14-248). LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)

securely supported, and allow the front wheels to
rotate freely, or raise the vehicle on a lift. Is there continuity?
5. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the YES−Go to step 11.
VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle with the shift lever
in D, and at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for at NO−Repair open in the wires between PCM
least 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels. connector terminals C44, C48, and body ground
(G101) (see page 22-20), or repair poor body
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 or P0717 in the ground (G101), then go to step 26.
YES−Go to step 7.

poor connections or loose terminals between the
input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM.
14-104 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７１６ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:51:28 61TL2000_140_0107
11. Connect PCM connector C (49P). 18. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B19 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
12. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 1.
sensor connector. ＊０３
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) INPUT SHAFT
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
14. Measure the voltage between input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 1
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
and body ground.
＊０２ VCC2 (YEL/BLU)

SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
Terminal side of Wire side of

VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
Wire side of female terminals NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal B19 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 26.
19. Measure the voltage between input shaft
YES−Go to step 19. (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 3.
NO−Go to step 15. ＊０８
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR

NM (WHT/RED) SG2 (GRN/BLK)
YES−Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor (see page 14-248), then go to step 26.
NO−Go to step 20.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-105

08/04/09 11:51:29 61TL2000_140_0108

20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 24. Check for continuity between PCM connector
21. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. sensor connector terminal No. 3.
＊０５
22. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
23. Check for continuity between input shaft SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
and body ground.
＊０４
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) SG2
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR (GRN/BLK)
SG2
(GRN/BLK)

NM (WHT/RED) female terminals female terminals

Is there continuity? (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 26.

between PCM connector terminal B18 and the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 26.
NO−Go to step 24.
14-106 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:29 61TL2000_140_0109
25. Check for continuity between PCM connector 26. Reconnect all connectors.
sensor connector terminal No. 2. 27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
＊０７
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) INPUT SHAFT 28. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR 29. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the
CONNECTOR
in D, and at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for at
NM (WHT/RED) least 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
NM
(WHT/RED)

female terminals female terminals YES−Check for poor connections or loose
terminals between the input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 31.
31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 or P0717 in the
NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM DTCs MENU with the HDS.
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 26. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?


connections or loose terminals between the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then
go to step 29.


in D, and at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for at
least 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-107

08/04/09 11:51:29 61TL2000_140_0110


speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
1.
NO−Go to step 36.



shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
14-108 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:29 61TL2000_140_0111
DTC P0718: Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Sensor Intermittent Failure
8. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review terminal C44 and body ground, and between
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). terminal C48 and body ground.
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem ＊０１
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
transmission.

LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
3. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, at
speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h), and let the
transmission shift through all five gears.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0718 in the DTCs Terminal side of female terminals
MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? Is there continuity?
NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent NO−Repair open in the wires between PCM
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for connector terminals C44, C48, and body ground
poor connections or loose terminals between the (G101) (see page 22-20), or repair poor body
input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. ground (G101), then go to step 23.
6. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact.
Are the input shaf t ( mainshaf t) speed sensor

connector terminals OK ?
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Repair the connector terminals, then go to

step 23.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-109
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７１８ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:51:29 61TL2000_140_0112

10. Connect PCM connector C (49P). 13. Measure the voltage between input shaft
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). and body ground.
＊０３
12. Measure the voltage between input shaft INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
and body ground.
＊０２
NM (WHT/RED)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
YES−Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor (see page 14-248), then go to step 23.
NO−Go to step 14.
NO−Go to step 19.
14-110 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:30 61TL2000_140_0113
＊０５
16. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
17. Check for continuity between input shaft SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
and body ground.
＊０４ NM (WHT/RED)
NM
(WHT/RED)

NM (WHT/RED) female terminals female terminals

Is there continuity? (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 23.

between PCM connector terminal B18 and the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 23.
NO−Go to step 18.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-111

08/04/09 11:51:30 61TL2000_140_0114

20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 24. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
21. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). 25. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
22. Check for continuity between PCM connector 26. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, at
terminal B19 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h), and let the
sensor connector terminal No. 1. transmission shift through all five gears.
＊０６
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR Is DT C P07 18 indicated?
CONNECTOR

VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 28.

female terminals female terminals MENU with the HDS.

YES−Go to step 29. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,
connector terminal B19 and the input shaft NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 23. connections or loose terminals between the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then
go to step 26.
14-112 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:30 61TL2000_140_0115



1.
NO−Go to step 33.

MENU with the HDS.


shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-113

08/04/09 11:51:30 61TL2000_140_0116

DTC P0721: Problem in Output Shaft 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
DTC P0722: Problem in Output Shaft
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
Signal Input)
NOTE: terminal C44 and body ground, and between
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and terminal C48 and body ground.
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review ＊０１
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
transmission.
1. Check for proper output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor installation (see page 14-248). LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)

securely supported, and allow the front wheels to
rotate freely, or raise the vehicle on a lift. Is there continuity?
5. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the YES−Go to step 11.
in D, and with the engine speed above 2,000 rpm NO−Repair open in the wires between PCM
for at least 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the connector terminals C44, C48, and body ground
wheels. (G101) (see page 22-20), or repair a poor body
ground (G101), then go to step 26.
YES−Go to step 7.

output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the
step 5.
14-114 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７２１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:51:30 61TL2000_140_0117
11. Connect PCM connector C (49P). 18. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C13 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
12. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 1.
sensor connector. ＊０３
OUTPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
No. 1 and body ground. VCC1
＊０２ (YEL/RED)

Wire side of Terminal side of

VCC1 (YEL/RED)
Wire side of female terminals NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal C13 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 26.
YES−Go to step 19. (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 3.
NO−Go to step 15. ＊０６
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR

NC (BLK/WHT) SG1 (GRN/WHT)
YES−Replace the output shaft (countershaft)

speed sensor (see page 14-248), then go to step 26.
NO−Go to step 20.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-115

08/04/09 11:51:31 61TL2000_140_0118

terminal C14 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
＊０５
22. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P). OUTPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
(COUNTERSHAFT)
23. Check for continuity between output shaft SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
SG1 (GRN/WHT)
＊０４ SG1
(GRN/WHT)

NC (BLK/WHT) female terminals female terminals

NO−Repair open in the wire between the output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector and
Is there continuity? PCM connector terminal C14, then go to step 26.

output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then go
to step 26.
NO−Go to step 24.
14-116 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:51:31 61TL2000_140_0119
25. Check for continuity between PCM connector 26. Reconnect all connectors.
terminal B38 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No. 2. 27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
＊０７
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) OUTPUT SHAFT 28. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR 29. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the
CONNECTOR
in D, at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for at least
10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
NC
(BLK/WHT) 30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NC (BLK/WHT)

female terminals female terminals YES−Check for poor connections or loose
terminals between the output shaft (countershaft)
NO−Go to step 31.
NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM DTCs MENU with the HDS.
connector terminal B38 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 26. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?


connections or loose terminals between the output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM,


in D, at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for at least
10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-117

08/04/09 11:51:31 61TL2000_140_0120


1.
NO−Go to step 36.



shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
14-118 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:03 61TL2000_140_0121
DTC P0723: Output Shaft (Countershaft) 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Speed Sensor Intermittent Failure
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review terminal C44 and body ground, and between
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). terminal C48 and body ground.
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem ＊０１
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
transmission.

LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
3. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, with
the engine speed above 2,000 rpm, and let the
MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? Is there continuity?
NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent NO−Repair open in the wires between PCM
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for connector terminals C44, C48, and body ground
poor connections or loose terminals between the (G101) (see page 22-20), or repair poor body
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the ground (G101), then go to step 23.
step 3.
6. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact.
Are the output shaf t ( countershaf t) speed sensor

connector terminals OK ?
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Repair the connector terminals, then go to

step 23.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-119
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７２３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:03 61TL2000_140_0122

10. Connect PCM connector C (49P). 13. Measure the voltage between output shaft
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). No. 2 and body ground.
＊０３
12. Measure the voltage between output shaft OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
＊０２
NC (BLK/WHT)
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
YES−Replace the output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor (see page 14-248), then go to step 23.
NO−Go to step 14.
NO−Go to step 19.
14-120 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:03 61TL2000_140_0123
terminal B38 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
＊０５
16. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
17. Check for continuity between output shaft SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
＊０４
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) NC
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR (BLK/WHT)
NC (BLK/WHT)

NC (BLK/WHT) female terminals female terminals

connector terminal B38 and the output shaft
Is there continuity? (countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 23.

output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then go
to step 23.
NO−Go to step 20.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-121

08/04/09 11:52:03 61TL2000_140_0124

20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 24. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
21. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 25. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
22. Check for continuity between PCM connector 26. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, at
terminal C13 and output shaft (countershaft) speed speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h), and let the
sensor connector terminal No. 1. transmission shift through all five gears.
＊０６
OUTPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) 27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR Is DT C P07 23 indicated?
CONNECTOR

VCC1 (YEL/RED)
VCC1 terminals between the output shaft (countershaft)
(YEL/RED) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 28.

female terminals female terminals MENU with the HDS.

YES−Go to step 29. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,
connector terminal C13 and the output shaft NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
(countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 23. connections or loose terminals between the output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM,
14-122 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:03 61TL2000_140_0125



1.
NO−Go to step 33.

MENU with the HDS.


shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-123

08/04/09 11:52:03 61TL2000_140_0126

DTC P0731: Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st 6. Measure the 1st clutch pressure (see page 14-227).
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit (1st Gear Incorrect
Ratio) Is the 1st clutch pressure within the service
limits?
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Shift valves B and C are stuck. Repair these
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace the
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). transmission, then go to step 12.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
proper level, and check for fluid leaks.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-255) through a
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or 9. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear, with the shift
excessive clutch material. lever in D, at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h), and
with the engine speed above 1,000 rpm for at least
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive 12 seconds.
clutch material?
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 12.
NO−Replace the ATF (see page 14-255), then go to
step 4. YES−Repair the 1st clutch, or replace the
transmission, then go to step 12.
4. Test stall speed in D (see page 14-226).
NO−Go to step 11.
Does the stall speed test within the service limits?
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Shift valves A and D are stuck. Repair these

valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace the
5. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-227).
Is the line pressure within the service limit?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Repair the ATF pump and the regulator valve,

or replace the transmission, then go to step 12.
14-124 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７３１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:03 61TL2000_140_0127

MENU with the HDS.

NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, repair the 1st

clutch, or replace the transmission, then go to step
12. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 9.
12. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear, with the shift

lever in D, at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h), and
12 seconds.

speed sensor and the output shaft (countershaft)
NO−Go to step 14.

MENU with the HDS.


shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 4. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 12.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-125

08/04/09 11:52:04 61TL2000_140_0128

DTC P0732: Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd 6. Measure the 2nd clutch pressure (see page 14-227).
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit (2nd Gear Incorrect
Ratio) Is the 2nd clutch pressure within the service
limits?
NO−Shift valves A and B are stuck. Repair these
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace the
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). transmission, then go to step 12.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or 9. Test-drive the vehicle in 2nd gear, with the shift
excessive clutch material. lever in D, at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h), and
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive 12 seconds.
clutch material?
step 4. YES−Repair the 2nd clutch, or replace the
4. Test stall speed in D (see page 14-226).
NO−Go to step 11.
Is the stall speed within the service limits?
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Shift valve C is stuck. Repair shift valve C and

the hydraulic circuit, or replace the transmission,
then go to step 12.
Is the line pressure within the service limit?
YES−Go to step 6.

14-126 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７３２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:04 61TL2000_140_0129

MENU with the HDS.

NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, repair the 2nd

step 9.
12. Test-drive the vehicle in 2nd gear, with the shift

12 seconds.

NO−Go to step 14.

MENU with the HDS.


to step 12.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-127

08/04/09 11:52:04 61TL2000_140_0130

DTC P0733: Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit (3rd Gear Incorrect
Ratio) 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 8. Test-drive the vehicle in 3rd gear, with the shift
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review lever in D, at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h), and
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). with the engine speed above 1,000 rpm for at least
12 seconds.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 9. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the Is DT C P07 33 indicated?

YES−Repair the 3rd clutch, or replace the
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-255) through a transmission, then go to step 11.
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or
excessive clutch material. NO−Go to step 10.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive

clutch material?

step 4.
Is the line pressure within the service limits?
YES−Go to step 5.

5. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure (see page 14-227).
Is the 3rd clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Shift valves A and D are stuck. Repair these

14-128 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７３３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:04 61TL2000_140_0131

MENU with the HDS.

NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, repair the 3rd

step 8.
11. Test-drive the vehicle in 3rd gear, with the shift

12 seconds.

NO−Go to step 13.

MENU with the HDS.


to step 11.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-129

08/04/09 11:52:04 61TL2000_140_0132

DTC P0734: Problem in 4th Clutch and 4th 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit (4th Gear Incorrect
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 8. Test-drive the vehicle in 4th gear, with the shift
12 seconds.

YES−Repair the 4th clutch, or replace the

clutch material?

step 4.
YES−Go to step 5.

5. Measure the 4th clutch pressure (see page 14-227).
Is the 4th clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Shift valves B and C are stuck. Repair these

14-130 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７３４ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:04 61TL2000_140_0133

MENU with the HDS.

NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, repair the 4th

step 8.
11. Test-drive the vehicle in 4th gear, with the shift

12 seconds.

NO−Go to step 13.

MENU with the HDS.


to step 11.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-131

08/04/09 11:52:04 61TL2000_140_0134

DTC P0735: Problem in 5th Clutch and 5th 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit (5th Gear Incorrect
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 8. Test-drive the vehicle in 5th gear, with the shift
12 seconds.

YES−Repair the 5th clutch, or replace the

clutch material?

step 4.
YES−Go to step 5.

5. Measure the 5th clutch pressure (see page 14-227).
Is the 5th clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Shift valves A, B, and/or D are stuck. Repair

these valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace
the transmission, then go to step 11.
14-132 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７３５ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:04 61TL2000_140_0135

MENU with the HDS.

NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, repair the 5th

step 8.

12 seconds.

NO−Go to step 13.

MENU with the HDS.


to step 11.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-133

08/04/09 11:52:04 61TL2000_140_0136

DTC P0741: Torque Converter Clutch 7. Run the engine until the ECT Sensor temperature
Hydraulic Circuit Stuck OFF reaches 176 °F (80 °C) by monitoring the
temperature with the HDS.
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review 8. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Valve A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A with
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating the HDS.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
Does the HDS indicate NORMAL?
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. YES−Go to step 9.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-255) through a NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or valve A (see page 14-242), then go to step 11.
excessive clutch material.
9. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road with a steady
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive speed at 60 mph (96 km/h) for at least 20 seconds.
clutch material?
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 13. MENU with the HDS.
NO−Replace the ATF (see page 14-255), then go to Does the HDS indicate F AILED?
step 4.
YES−Repair the faulty torque converter clutch
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). mechanism, the torque converter clutch hydraulic
circuit, the lock-up shift valve, or the lock-up control
5. Clear the DTC with the HDS. valve, or replace the transmission, then go to step
13.
6. Select Shift Solenoid Valve E in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve E NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent
operates with the HDS. failure, the system is OK at this time. If the HDS
Is a clicking sound heard?
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Replace shift solenoid valve E (see page

14-134 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７４１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:04 61TL2000_140_0137
13. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road with a steady

speed at 60 mph (96 km/h) for at least 20 seconds,
or test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under
the same conditions as those indicated by the
freeze data.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 15.

MENU with the HDS.

NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 5. If

the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 13.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-135

08/04/09 11:52:04 61TL2000_140_0138

DTC P0747: A/T Clutch Pressure Control 9. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid
Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON Valve A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data the HDS.
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Does the HDS indicate NORMAL?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). time.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the NO−Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. according to the test result, if the HDS has not
determined the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-255) through a any part is replaced, go to step 11.
excessive clutch material. 10. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A (see page 14-240).
clutch material? Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
work properly?
YES−Repair the hydraulic system related to shift
NO−Replace the ATF (see page 14-255), then go to valves B and E, or replace the transmission, then
step 4. go to step 13.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A (see page 14-242), then go to step 11.
6. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and
let the transmission shift through all five gears. 12. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0747 in the DTCs 13. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and
MENU with the HDS. let the transmission shift through all five gears.
YES−Go to step 8.

failure, the system is OK at this time. If the HDS
14-136 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７４７ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0139
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 15.

MENU with the HDS.


-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-137

08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0140

DTC P0752: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON 9. Select Shift Solenoid Valve A in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve A
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data operates with the HDS.
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Is a clicking sound heard?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating YES−Go to step 10.

NO−Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 14-236), then go to step 12.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-255) through a let the transmission shift through all five gears.
excessive clutch material. 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0752 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
clutch material? Does the HDS indicate F AILED?
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 14. YES−Repair shift valve A, or replace the
step 4. NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 10.
6. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and 13. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
let the transmission shift through all five gears.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0752 in the DTCs let the transmission shift through all five gears.
MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 8.

14-138 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７５２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0141
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 16.

MENU with the HDS.


-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-139

08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0142

DTC P0756: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF 9. Select Shift Solenoid Valve B in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve B
DTC P0757: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON operates with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is a clicking sound heard?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating NO−Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 14-236), then go to step 12.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 10. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. let the transmission shift through all five gears.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-255) through a 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0756 or P0757 in the
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or DTCs MENU with the HDS.
excessive clutch material.
clutch material? YES−Repair shift valve B, or replace the
NO−Replace the ATF (see page 14-255), then go to failure, the system is OK at this time. If the HDS
step 4. indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 10.
6. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and 14. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and
let the transmission shift through all five gears. let the transmission shift through all five gears.

YES−Go to step 8.

14-140 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７５６ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0143
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 16.



-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-141

08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0144

DTC P0761: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF 9. Select Shift Solenoid Valve C in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C

NO−Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
MENU with the HDS.
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 14. YES−Repair shift valve C, or replace the
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0761 in the DTCs let the transmission shift through all five gears.
MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 8.

14-142 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７６１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0145
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 16.

MENU with the HDS.


-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-143

08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0146

DTC P0771: Shift Solenoid Valve E Stuck OFF 9. Select Shift Solenoid Valve E in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve E

NO−Replace shift solenoid valve E (see page
MENU with the HDS.
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 14. YES−Repair shift valve E, or replace the
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0771 in the DTCs let the transmission shift through 1st to 3rd gears.
MENU with the HDS. Then drive the vehicle at speeds over 19 mph
(30 km/h) for at least 20 seconds.
YES−Go to step 8.

14-144 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７７１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0147
Is DT C P07 7 1 indicated?
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 16.

MENU with the HDS.


-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-145

08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0148

Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF Valve B in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with
DTC P0777: A/T Clutch Pressure Control the HDS.
Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). time.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating NO−Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). according to the test result, if the HDS has not
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the any part was replaced, go to step 11.
10. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-255) through a B (see page 14-243).
excessive clutch material. Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
work properly?
clutch material? YES−Repair the hydraulic system related to shift
valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 13. step 13.
NO−Replace the ATF (see page 14-255), then go to NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
step 4. valve B (see page 14-247), then go to step 11.

YES−Go to step 8.

14-146 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７７６ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0149
Is DT C P07 7 6 or P07 7 7 indicated?
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 15.



-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-147

08/04/09 11:52:05 61TL2000_140_0150

DTC P0780: Shift Control System 7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NOTE: Is DT C P07 80 indicated?

any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review YES−If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). good PCM (see page 14-8), then go to step 6. If the
• This code is stored whenever DTCs P1730, P1731, PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
P1732, P1733, and P1734 are detected.
NO−Go to step 8.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. MENU with the HDS.
3. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
4. Check for other Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
along with DTC P0780. original PCM (see page 11-234). If any other
NOTE: DTC P0780 means there is one or more A/T go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
DTCs regarding the shift control system.
NO−If the PCM was updated and the HDS
Are there other DT Cs? indicates FAILED, substitute a known-good PCM
YES−Go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
• P1730 (see page 14-211)
• P1731 (see page 14-213)
• P1732 (see page 14-215)
• P1733 (see page 14-217)
• P1734 (see page 14-219)
NO−Go to step 5.


14-148 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７８０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:39 61TL2000_140_0151
Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF Valve C in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with
DTC P0797: A/T Clutch Pressure Control the HDS.
Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). time.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating NO−Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). according to the test result, if the HDS has not
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the any part was replaced, go to step 11.
10. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-255) through a C (see page 14-245).
excessive clutch material. Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
work properly?
clutch material? YES−Repair the hydraulic system related to shift
valves B and C, or replace the transmission, then
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 13. go to step 13.
NO−Replace the ATF (see page 14-255), then go to NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
step 4. valve C (see page 14-247), then go to step 11.

YES−Go to step 8.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-149
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０７９６ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:39 61TL2000_140_0152

YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 15.



14-150 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:39 61TL2000_140_0153
DTC P0842: Short in 2nd Clutch Transmission 10. Check the 2nd Pressure Switch in the Data List with
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch the HDS.
ON Is the 2nd Pressure Switch OF F ?
NOTE: YES−Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and pressure switch (see page 14-249), then go to step
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review 15.
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem NO−Go to step 11.
transmission. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
3. Check the 2nd Pressure Switch in the Data List with 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector
the HDS when not in 2nd gear. terminal B8 and body ground.
＊０１
Is the 2nd Pressure Switch OF F ?
OP2SW (BLU/RED)
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Go to step 7.


lever in D for at least 2 seconds.
MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 7. between PCM connector terminal B8 and the 2nd
clutch transmission fluid pressure switch, then go
NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent to step 15.
intermittent short to body ground in the wire NO−Go to step 22.
between the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
8. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-151
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０８４２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:39 61TL2000_140_0154

16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is DT C P0842 indicated?
in the wire between the 2nd clutch transmission
18. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
19. Test-drive the vehicle in 2nd gear, with the shift go to step 1.
lever in D for at least 2 seconds. Then drive in 4th
gear for at least 2 seconds. NO−Go to step 27.
MENU with the HDS.
in the wire between the 2nd clutch transmission YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
fluid pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
1. original PCM (see page 11-234). If any other
21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0842 in the DTCs NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for
MENU with the HDS. intermittent short to body ground in the wire
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? switch and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 20, 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. 24.

intermittent short to body ground in the wire
switch and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS



gear for at least 2 seconds.
14-152 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:39 61TL2000_140_0155
DTC P0843: Open in 2nd Clutch Transmission 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 9. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
OFF pressure switch connector.

any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review 11. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). transmission fluid pressure switch connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminal and body ground.
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the ＊０１
transmission. 2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR
3. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal OP2SW (BLU/RED)

4. Move the shift lever into S while pressing the brake

pedal, upshift to 2nd gear by pressing the paddle
shifter ＋ (upshift switch), and check that the Shift Wire side of female terminals
Control indicates 2 in the Data List with the HDS.
5. Check the 2nd Pressure Switch in the Data List with Is there about 5 V ?
the HDS .
YES−Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
Is the 2nd Pressure Switch ON? pressure switch (see page 14-249), then go to step
16.
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 12.
NO−Go to step 8.


MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 8.

2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 6.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-153
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０８４３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:40 61TL2000_140_0156

12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 20. Test-drive the vehicle in 2nd gear, with the shift
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. gear for at least 2 seconds.
14. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). 21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector Is DT C P0843 indicated?

terminal B8 and the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector terminal. YES−Check for poor connections or loose
＊０２ terminals between the 2nd clutch transmission
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) 2ND CLUTCH fluid pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step
TRANSMISSION FLUID 1.
PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
NO−Go to step 22.
OP2SW (BLU/RED) OP2SW 22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0843 in the DTCs
(BLU/RED) MENU with the HDS.

female terminals female terminals Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 21,
Is there continuity? NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals between the 2nd
YES−Go to step 23. clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and the
PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM COMPLETED, go to step 19.
connector terminal B8 and the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step 23. Reconnect all connectors.
16.
16. Reconnect all connectors. software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
18. Clear the DTC with the HDS. operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
19. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal 26. Test-drive the vehicle in 2nd gear, with the shift
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). lever in D for at least 2 seconds. Then drive in 4th
14-154 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:40 61TL2000_140_0157

terminals between the 2nd clutch transmission
fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 28.

MENU with the HDS.


connections or loose terminals between the 2nd
clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and the
good PCM (see page 14-8), then go to step 25. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-155

08/04/09 11:52:40 61TL2000_140_0158

DTC P0847: Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission 10. Check the 3rd Pressure Switch in the Data List with
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch the HDS.
ON Is the 3rd Pressure Switch OF F ?
NOTE: YES−Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and pressure switch (see page 14-250), then go to step
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review 15.
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem NO−Go to step 11.
transmission. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
3. Check the 3rd Pressure Switch in the Data List with 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector
the HDS when not in 3rd gear. terminal B9 and body ground.
＊０１
Is the 3rd Pressure Switch OF F ?
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Go to step 7.


MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 7. between PCM connector terminal B9 and the 3rd
clutch transmission fluid pressure switch, then go
NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent to step 15.
intermittent short to body ground in the wire NO−Go to step 22.
between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
8. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid

14-156 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０８４７ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:40 61TL2000_140_0159
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is DT C P0847 indicated?
in the wire between the 3rd clutch transmission
18. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
19. Test-drive the vehicle in 3rd gear, with the shift go to step 1.
gear for at least 2 seconds. NO−Go to step 27.
MENU with the HDS.
in the wire between the 3rd clutch transmission YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
fluid pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
1. original PCM (see page 11-234). If any other
21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0847 in the DTCs NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for
MENU with the HDS. intermittent short to body ground in the wire
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? switch and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 20, 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. 24.

switch and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS



-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-157

08/04/09 11:52:40 61TL2000_140_0160

DTC P0848: Open in 3rd Clutch Transmission 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 9. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
OFF pressure switch connector.

any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review 11. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). transmission fluid pressure switch connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminal and body ground.
transmission. 3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR
3. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal OP3SW (BLU/WHT)


lever in S with the sequential shift mode, and check
that the Shift Control indicates 3 in the Data List Wire side of female terminals
with the HDS.
5. Check the 3rd Pressure Switch in the Data List with Is there about 5 V ?
the HDS.
YES−Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
Is the 3rd Pressure Switch ON? pressure switch (see page 14-250), then go to step
16.
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 12.
NO−Go to step 8.


MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 8.

3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 6.
14-158 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０８４８ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:40 61TL2000_140_0161
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 20. Test-drive the vehicle in 3rd gear, with the shift
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. gear for at least 2 seconds.
14. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). 21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector Is DT C P0848 indicated?

terminal B9 and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector terminal. YES−Check for poor connections or loose
＊０２ terminals between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) 3RD CLUTCH pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step 1.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE NO−Go to step 22.
SWITCH CONNECTOR

OP3SW (BLU/WHT) OP3SW MENU with the HDS.
(BLU/WHT)

female terminals female terminals go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.

Is there continuity? connections or loose terminals between the 3rd
YES−Go to step 23. PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
connector terminal B9 and the 3rd clutch 23. Reconnect all connectors.
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step
16. 24. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
16. Reconnect all connectors. good PCM (see page 14-8).
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 25. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal
19. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal lever in D for at least 2 seconds. Then drive in 4th
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). gear for at least 2 seconds.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-159

08/04/09 11:52:40 61TL2000_140_0162


terminals between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 28.

MENU with the HDS.


connections or loose terminals between the 3rd
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
14-160 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:41 61TL2000_140_0163
DTC P0962: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 10. Disconnect PCM connectors A (49P) and C (49P).
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the 12. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
transmission. terminals A1 and C44.
＊０１
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). PCM CONNECTORS
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. VB SOL (WHT/RED)
3. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second.

A (49P) C (49P) LG1 (BRN/YEL)
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 5.
5. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid Is there battery voltage?

Valve A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A with YES−Go to step 13.
the HDS.
NO−Check for a blown fuse No. 10 (10 A) in the
Does the HDS indicate NORMAL? driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open in the wire between PCM connector
YES−Go to step 6. terminal A1 and the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay
box, then go to step 20.
NO−Go to step 8.
6. In the Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve
Control menu, select A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A at 1.0 A.

MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 8.

poor connections or loose terminals between A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the
step 5.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-161
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９６２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:41 61TL2000_140_0164

14. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 17. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
valve A connector.
18. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure
15. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 1
pressure control solenoid valve A connector and body ground.
terminals No. 1 and No. 2. ＊０４
＊０２ A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
LS A (RED/BLK)

Is there 3−10 ? YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire

between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
YES−Go to step 16. A connector terminal No. 1 and body ground, then
go to step 20.
NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A (see page 14-242), then go to step 20. NO−Go to step 19.
16. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure 19. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2 control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 1
and body ground. and PCM connector terminal B48.
＊０３＊０５
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A CONNECTOR
GND (BLK) LS A (RED/BLK)

LS A (RED/BLK)

NO−Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch
NO−Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector
pressure control solenoid valve A and body ground terminal No. 1 and PCM connector terminal B48,
(G101) (see page 22-20), or repair poor body then go to step 20.
14-162 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:41 61TL2000_140_0165
23. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second. 28. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second.
terminals between A/T clutch pressure control terminals between A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was
NO−Go to step 25. 14-8), then go to step 28. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
MENU with the HDS. NO−Go to step 30.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? 30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0962 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 24, Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
connections or loose terminals between A/T clutch original PCM (see page 11-234). If any other
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM, Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 29,
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
connections or loose terminals between A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-163

08/04/09 11:52:41 61TL2000_140_0166

DTC P0963: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0963 in the DTCs
Control Solenoid Valve A MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Does the HDS indicate F AILED?

any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review YES−Go to step 8.
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
transmission. poor connections or loose terminals between A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 5.
9. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. valve A connector.
Is DT C P0963 indicated? 10. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch

pressure control solenoid valve A connector
YES−Go to step 8. terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
＊０１
NO−Go to step 5. A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
5. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid
Valve A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test
the HDS.
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 8. Terminal side of male terminals

Control menu, select A/T clutch pressure control Is there 3−10 ?
solenoid valve A at 0.2 A.

valve A (see page 14-242), then go to step 12.
14-164 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９６３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:41 61TL2000_140_0167
11. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure 12. Reconnect all connectors.
control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2
and body ground. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
＊０２
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL 14. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

GND (BLK)

terminals between A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 17.
Is there continuity? 17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0963 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
pressure control solenoid valve A and body ground YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
(G101) (see page 22-20), or repair poor body Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 16,
ground (G101), then go to step 12. go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.

pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM,

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-165

08/04/09 11:52:42 61TL2000_140_0168


solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 22.

MENU with the HDS.


pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
14-166 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:42 61TL2000_140_0169
Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit
NOTE: valve B connector.
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review 10. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). pressure control solenoid valve B connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
transmission. A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
Is DT C P0966 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES−Go to step 8.
Is there 3−10 ?
NO−Go to step 5.
Valve B in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with valve B (see page 14-247), then go to step 16.
the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate NORMAL? control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
NO−Go to step 8. SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR

solenoid valve B at 1.0 A. GND (BLK)

MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? Wire side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 8.
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for YES−Go to step 12.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and the NO−Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to pressure control solenoid valve B and body ground
step 5. (G101) (see page 22-20), or repair poor body
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-167
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９６６ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:42 61TL2000_140_0170

12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 15. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 1
13. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). and PCM connector terminal B40.
＊０４
14. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 1 CONTROL SOLENOID
and body ground. VALVE B CONNECTOR
＊０３
LS B (BRN)
LS B (BRN)
LS B (BRN)
Is there continuity? NO−Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch

pressure control solenoid valve B connector
YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire terminal No. 1 and PCM connector terminal B40,
between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve then go to step 16.
B connector terminal No. 1 and body ground, then
go to step 16.
NO−Go to step 15.
14-168 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:42 61TL2000_140_0171
solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
MENU with the HDS.
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM, Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 25,
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-169

08/04/09 11:52:42 61TL2000_140_0172

Control Solenoid Valve B MENU with the HDS.

clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and the
step 5.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. valve B connector.
Is DT C P0967 indicated? 10. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch

pressure control solenoid valve B connector
＊０１
Valve B in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with
the HDS.
YES−Go to step 6.

solenoid valve B at 0.2 A.

valve B (see page 14-247), then go to step 12.
14-170 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９６７ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:42 61TL2000_140_0173
control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2
＊０２

GND (BLK)

solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 17.
MENU with the HDS.
pressure control solenoid valve B and body ground YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM,

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-171

08/04/09 11:52:43 61TL2000_140_0174


solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 22.

MENU with the HDS.


pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
14-172 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:43 61TL2000_140_0175
Control Solenoid Valve C Circuit
NOTE: valve C connector.
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review 10. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). pressure control solenoid valve C connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
transmission. A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR
Is DT C P097 0 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES−Go to step 8.
Is there 3−10 ?
NO−Go to step 5.
Valve C in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with valve C (see page 22-20), then go to step 16.
the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate NORMAL? control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
NO−Go to step 8. SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR

solenoid valve C at 1.0 A. GND (BLK)

MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? Wire side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 8.
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for YES−Go to step 12.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and the NO−Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to pressure control solenoid valve C and body ground
step 5. (G101) (see page 22-20), or repair poor body
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-173
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９７０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:43 61TL2000_140_0176

12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 15. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 1
13. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). and PCM connector terminal B26.
＊０４
14. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 1 CONTROL SOLENOID
and body ground. VALVE C CONNECTOR
＊０３
LS C (BLU/YEL)
LS C (BLU/WHT)
LS C (BLU/YEL)
Is there continuity? NO−Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch

pressure control solenoid valve C connector
YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire terminal No. 1 and PCM connector terminal B26,
between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve then go to step 16.
C connector terminal No. 1 and body ground, then
go to step 16.
NO−Go to step 15.
14-174 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:52:43 61TL2000_140_0177
Is DT C P097 0 indicated? Is DT C P097 0 indicated?
solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
MENU with the HDS.
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM, Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 25,
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-175

08/04/09 11:52:43 61TL2000_140_0178

Control Solenoid Valve C MENU with the HDS.

clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and the
step 5.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. valve C connector.
Is DT C P097 1 indicated? 10. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch

pressure control solenoid valve C connector
＊０１
Valve C in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test
the HDS.
YES−Go to step 6.

solenoid valve C at 0.2 A.

valve C (see page 14-247), then go to step 12.
14-176 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９７１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:52:43 61TL2000_140_0179
control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2
＊０２

GND (BLK)

solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 17.
MENU with the HDS.
pressure control solenoid valve C and body ground YES−Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM,

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-177

08/04/09 11:52:43 61TL2000_140_0180


solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 22.

MENU with the HDS.


pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
14-178 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:53:22 61TL2000_140_0181
DTC P0973: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0973 in the DTCs
Circuit MENU with the HDS.

transmission. intermittent short to body ground in the wire
between shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 5.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear, with the shift 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
lever in D for at least 1 second.
10. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
11. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
Is DT C P097 3 indicated? terminals B11 and C44.
＊０１
YES−Go to step 8. PCM CONNECTORS
NO−Go to step 5. SH A (BLU/BLK)
5. Select Shift Solenoid Valve A in the Miscellaneous

Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the
HDS.
B (49P) C (49P) LG1 (BRN/YEL)
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 8.
6. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear, with the shift Is there less than 12 ?
NO−Go to step 22.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-179
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９７３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:53:23 61TL2000_140_0182

12. Disconnect the shift solenoid wire harness 16. Reconnect all connectors.
connector.
terminals B11 and C44. 18. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
＊０２
PCM CONNECTORS 19. Start the engine with the shift lever in P, and wait
for at least 1 second. Then test-drive the vehicle in
SH A (BLU/BLK) 1st gear, with the shift lever in D for at least
1 second.

in the wire between shift solenoid valve A and the
Terminal side of female terminals PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 21.

YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire MENU with the HDS.
between PCM connector terminal B11 and the shift
solenoid wire harness connector, then go to step Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
16.
NO−Go to step 14. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 20,
14. Inspect shift solenoid valve A and the shift solenoid
wire harness (see page 14-231). NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for
15. Replace either shift solenoid valve A or the shift between shift solenoid valve A and the PCM, then
solenoid wire harness (see page 14-236), go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
whichever failed the test, then go to step 19. go to step 19.
14-180 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:53:23 61TL2000_140_0183

1st gear, with the shift lever in D for at least
1 second.

in the wire between shift solenoid valve A and the
NO−Go to step 26.

MENU with the HDS.


between shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-181

08/04/09 11:53:23 61TL2000_140_0184

DTC P0974: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve A 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0974 in the DTCs

transmission. poor connections or loose terminals between shift
solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the HDS indicates
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NOT COMPLETED, go to step 5.
3. Start the engine with the shift lever in P, and wait 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
for at least 1 second.
＊０１
NO−Go to step 5. SH A (BLU/BLK)
5. Select Shift Solenoid Valve A in the Miscellaneous

Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the
HDS.
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 8.
6. Start the engine with the shift lever in P, and wait Is there 12−25 ?
NO−Go to step 12.
14-182 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９７４ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:53:23 61TL2000_140_0185
12. Disconnect the shift solenoid wire harness 14. Remove the shift solenoid wire harness (see page
connector. 14-236).
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector 15. Check for continuity between shift solenoid wire
terminal B11 and shift solenoid wire harness harness connector terminal No. 5 and the shift
connector terminal No. 5. solenoid valve A connector terminal.
＊０２＊０３
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE
HARNESS CONNECTOR VALVE A HARNESS CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
SH A (BLU/BLK)
SH A (BLU)
SH A (BLU/BLK)
Wire side of Terminal side of Wire side of Terminal side of

female terminals female terminals female terminals male terminals
YES−Go to step 14. YES−Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page

connector terminal B11 and the shift solenoid wire NO−Replace the shift solenoid wire harness
harness connector, then go to step 16. (see page 14-236), then go to step 19.
1 second.

terminals between shift solenoid valve A and the
NO−Go to step 21.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-183

08/04/09 11:53:23 61TL2000_140_0186

connections or loose terminals between shift
solenoid valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. If NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 19. connections or loose terminals between shift
solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was
22. Reconnect all connectors. updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known- go to step 24.
1 second.

terminals between shift solenoid valve A and the
NO−Go to step 26.
14-184 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:53:24 61TL2000_140_0187
DTC P0976: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0976 in the DTCs

between shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the
3. Start the engine with the shift lever in P, and wait 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
＊０１
NO−Go to step 5. SH B (GRN/WHT)
5. Select Shift Solenoid Valve B in the Miscellaneous

Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the
HDS.
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 8.
6. Start the engine with the shift lever in P, and wait Is there less than 12 ?
NO−Go to step 22.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-185
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９７６ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:53:24 61TL2000_140_0188

12. Disconnect the shift solenoid wire harness 14. Inspect shift solenoid valve B and the shift solenoid
connector. wire harness (see page 14-231).
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector 15. Replace either shift solenoid valve B or the shift
terminals B12 and C44. solenoid wire harness (see page 14-236),
＊０２ whichever failed the test, then go to step 19.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B (GRN/WHT)
for at least 1 second. Test-drive the vehicle with the
shift lever in D through 1st to 3rd gears, then drive
in 3rd gear for at least 1 second.
Is there continuity? Is DT C P097 6 indicated?
YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire YES−Check for intermittent short to body ground
between PCM connector terminal B12 and the shift in the wire between shift solenoid valve B and the
solenoid wire harness connector, then go to step PCM, then go to step 1.
16.
NO−Go to step 21.
NO−Go to step 14.
MENU with the HDS.


between shift solenoid valve B and the PCM, then
go to step 19.
14-186 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:53:24 61TL2000_140_0189


in the wire between shift solenoid valve B and the
NO−Go to step 26.

MENU with the HDS.


between shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-187

08/04/09 11:53:24 61TL2000_140_0190

DTC P0977: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0977 in the DTCs

solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates
3. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
through 1st to 3rd gears, then drive in 3rd gear for
at least 1 second. 10. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 11. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
terminals B12 and C44.
Is DT C P097 7 indicated? ＊０１
PCM CONNECTORS
YES−Go to step 8.
SH B (GRN/WHT)
NO−Go to step 5.
5. Select Shift Solenoid Valve B in the Miscellaneous

Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the
HDS.
NO−Go to step 8.
Is there 12−25 ?
6. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D
through 1st to 3rd gears, then drive in 3rd gear for YES−Go to step 22.
at least 1 second.
NO−Go to step 12.
14-188 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９７７ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:53:24 61TL2000_140_0191
connector. 14-236).
connector terminal No. 2. solenoid valve B connector terminal.
＊０２＊０３
SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE
HARNESS CONNECTOR VALVE B HARNESS CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
SH B (GRN/WHT) SH B (ORN)
SH B (GRN/WHT)
Wire side of Terminal side of Wire side of Terminal side of

female terminals female terminals female terminals male terminals
YES−Go to step 14. YES−Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page


terminals between shift solenoid valve B and the
NO−Go to step 21.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-189

08/04/09 11:53:24 61TL2000_140_0192

solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. If NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was

terminals between shift solenoid valve B and the
NO−Go to step 26.
14-190 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:53:25 61TL2000_140_0193
DTC P0979: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0979 in the DTCs

between shift solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the
3. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear, with the shift 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
＊０１
NO−Go to step 5. SH C (GRN)
5. Select Shift Solenoid Valve C in the Miscellaneous

Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the
HDS.
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 8.
6. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear, with the shift Is there less than 12 ?
NO−Go to step 22.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-191
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９７９ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:53:25 61TL2000_140_0194

12. Disconnect the shift solenoid wire harness 14. Inspect shift solenoid valve C and the shift solenoid
connector. wire harness (see page 14-231).
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector 15. Replace either shift solenoid valve C or the shift
terminals B21 and C44. solenoid wire harness (see page 14-236),
＊０２ whichever failed the test, then go to step 19.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH C (GRN)
1 second.
Is there continuity? Is DT C P097 9 indicated?
YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire YES−Check for intermittent short to body ground
between PCM connector terminal B21 and the shift in the wire between shift solenoid valve C and the
solenoid wire harness connector, then go to step PCM, then go to step 1.
16.
NO−Go to step 21.
NO−Go to step 14.
MENU with the HDS.


between shift solenoid valve C and the PCM, then
go to step 19.
14-192 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:53:25 61TL2000_140_0195

1 second.

in the wire between shift solenoid valve C and the
NO−Go to step 26.

MENU with the HDS.


between shift solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-193

08/04/09 11:53:25 61TL2000_140_0196

DTC P0980: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Circuit
NOTE:
＊０１
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. VB SOL (BLK/YEL)


NO−Go to step 5.
Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the YES−Go to step 13.
HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard? driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
NO−Go to step 8.

MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 8.

poor connections or loose terminals between shift
solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates
14-194 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９８０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:53:25 61TL2000_140_0197
14. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). 18. Remove the shift solenoid wire harness (see page
14-236).
terminals B21 and C44. 19. Check for continuity between shift solenoid wire
＊０２ harness connector terminal No. 1 and the shift
PCM CONNECTORS solenoid valve C connector terminal.
＊０４
SH C (GRN) SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE
VALVE C HARNESS CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
SH C (GRN)

female terminals male terminals
Is there 12−25 ?
NO−Go to step 16. YES−Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page

connector. NO−Replace the shift solenoid wire harness
terminal B21 and shift solenoid wire harness 20. Reconnect all connectors.
HARNESS CONNECTOR 22. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
SH C (GRN)
SH C (GRN)
1 second.
terminals between shift solenoid valve C and the
Is there continuity? PCM, then go to step 1.

connector terminal B21 and the shift solenoid wire
harness connector, then go to step 20.
(cont’d)
14-195
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 11:53:26 61TL2000_140_0198

solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. If NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was
1 second.

terminals between shift solenoid valve C and the
NO−Go to step 30.
14-196 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:53:26 61TL2000_140_0199
DTC P0982: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve D 10. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
Circuit
NOTE: terminals B27 and C44.
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review PCM CONNECTORS
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem B (49P) C (49P)
transmission.

SH D (GRN/RED) LG1 (BRN/YEL)

lever in D for at least 1 second. Terminal side of female terminals

Is there less than 12 ?
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 22.
NO−Go to step 5.
5. Select Shift Solenoid Valve D in the Miscellaneous connector.
Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve D with the
HDS. 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Is a clicking sound heard? ＊０２
PCM CONNECTORS
YES−Go to step 6.
B (49P) C (49P)
NO−Go to step 8.

MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? Terminal side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 8.
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
intermittent short to body ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal B27 and the shift
between shift solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the solenoid wire harness connector, then go to step
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 5. 16.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-197
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９８２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:53:26 61TL2000_140_0200

14. Inspect shift solenoid valve D and the shift solenoid 22. Reconnect all connectors.
wire harness (see page 14-231).
15. Replace either shift solenoid valve D or the shift software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
solenoid wire harness (see page 14-236), good PCM (see page 14-8).
whichever failed the test, then go to step 19.
16. Reconnect all connectors. for at least 1 second. Then test-drive the vehicle in
2nd gear, with the shift lever in D for at least
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1 second.
18. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
19. Start the engine with the shift lever in P, and wait Is DT C P0982 indicated?
2nd gear, with the shift lever in D for at least YES−Check for intermittent short to body ground
1 second. in the wire between shift solenoid valve D and the
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. good PCM (see page 14-8), then go to step 24. If the
NO−Go to step 26.
in the wire between shift solenoid valve D and the 26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0982 in the DTCs
PCM, then go to step 1. MENU with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 21. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0982 in the DTCs YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
MENU with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 25,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 20, NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. intermittent short to body ground in the wire
between shift solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the
NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
intermittent short to body ground in the wire (see page 14-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was
between shift solenoid valve D and the PCM, then substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, COMPLETED, go to step 24.
go to step 19.
14-198 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:53:26 61TL2000_140_0201
DTC P0983: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve D 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Circuit
NOTE:
＊０１
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. VB SOL (BLK/YEL)


NO−Go to step 5.
5. Select Shift Solenoid Valve D in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve D with the YES−Go to step 13.
HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard? driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
NO−Go to step 8.

MENU with the HDS.
YES−Go to step 8.

poor connections or loose terminals between shift
solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the HDS indicates
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-199
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９８３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:53:27 61TL2000_140_0202

14. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). 18. Remove the shift solenoid wire harness (see page
14-236).
terminals B27 and C44. 19. Check for continuity between shift solenoid wire
＊０２ harness connector terminal No. 8 and the shift
PCM CONNECTORS solenoid valve D connector terminal.
＊０４
B (49P) C (49P) SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE SHIFT SOLENOID
HARNESS CONNECTOR VALVE D
CONNECTOR
SH D (YEL)

male terminals female terminals
Is there 12−25 ?
NO−Go to step 16. YES−Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page

connector. NO−Replace the shift solenoid wire harness
terminal B27 and shift solenoid wire harness 20. Reconnect all connectors.
HARNESS CONNECTOR 22. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
1 second.
SH D (GRN/RED) SH D (GRN/RED)
terminals between shift solenoid valve D and the
Is there continuity? PCM, then go to step 1.

connector terminal B27 and the shift solenoid wire
harness connector, then go to step 20.
14-200
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 11:53:27 61TL2000_140_0203
solenoid valve D and the PCM, then go to step 1. If NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the PCM was
1 second.

terminals between shift solenoid valve D and the
NO−Go to step 30.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-201

08/04/09 11:53:27 61TL2000_140_0204

DTC P0985: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve E 10. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
Circuit
NOTE: terminals B25 and C44.
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review PCM CONNECTORS
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem B (49P) C (49P)
transmission.

SH E (YEL) LG1 (BRN/YEL)

for at least 1 second. Terminal side of female terminals

Is there less than 12 ?
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 22.
NO−Go to step 5.
5. Select Shift Solenoid Valve E in the Miscellaneous connector.
Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve E with the
HDS. 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Is a clicking sound heard? ＊０２
PCM CONNECTORS
YES−Go to step 6.
B (49P) C (49P)
NO−Go to step 8.

MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? Terminal side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 8.
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
intermittent short to body ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal B25 and the shift
between shift solenoid valve E and the PCM. If the solenoid wire harness connector, then go to step
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 5. 16.
14-202 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９８５ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:53:27 61TL2000_140_0205
14. Inspect shift solenoid valve E and the shift solenoid 22. Reconnect all connectors.
wire harness (see page 14-231).
15. Replace either shift solenoid valve E or the shift software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
solenoid wire harness (see page 14-236), good PCM (see page 14-8).
whichever failed the test, then go to step 19.
16. Reconnect all connectors. for at least 1 second. Then shift to N, and wait for at
least 1 second.
for at least 1 second. Then shift to N, and wait for at YES−Check for intermittent short to body ground
least 1 second. in the wire between shift solenoid valve E and the
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. good PCM (see page 14-8), then go to step 24. If the
NO−Go to step 26.
in the wire between shift solenoid valve E and the 26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0985 in the DTCs
PCM, then go to step 1. MENU with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 21. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0985 in the DTCs YES−If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
MENU with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 25,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 20, NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for
go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting. intermittent short to body ground in the wire
between shift solenoid valve E and the PCM. If the
NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
intermittent short to body ground in the wire (see page 14-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was
between shift solenoid valve E and the PCM, then substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, COMPLETED, go to step 24.
go to step 19.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-203

08/04/09 11:53:27 61TL2000_140_0206

DTC P0986: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve E 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0986 in the DTCs

solenoid valve E and the PCM. If the HDS indicates
3. Start the engine. Shift the shift lever to N, and wait 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Is DT C P0986 indicated? terminals B25 and C44.
＊０１
NO−Go to step 5. B (49P) C (49P)
5. Select Shift Solenoid Valve E in the Miscellaneous

Test Menu, and test shift solenoid valve E with the
HDS.
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 8.
6. Start the engine. Shift the shift lever to N, and wait Is there 12−25 ?
NO−Go to step 12.
14-204 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９０９８６ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:53:28 61TL2000_140_0207
connector. 14-236).
connector terminal No. 3. solenoid valve E connector terminal.
＊０２＊０３
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE SHIFT SOLENOID WIRE SHIFT SOLENOID
HARNESS CONNECTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR VALVE E
CONNECTOR
SH E (YEL) SH E (RED)
SH E (YEL)
Terminal side of Wire side of Terminal side of Wire side of

female terminals female terminals male terminals female terminals
YES−Go to step 14. YES−Replace shift solenoid valve E (see page

for at least 1 second. Then shift to N, and wait for at
least 1 second.

terminals between shift solenoid valve E and the
NO−Go to step 21.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-205

08/04/09 11:53:28 61TL2000_140_0208

solenoid valve E and the PCM, then go to step 1. If NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
solenoid valve E and the PCM. If the PCM was
for at least 1 second. Then shift to N, and wait for at
least 1 second.

terminals between shift solenoid valve E and the
NO−Go to step 26.
14-206 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:53:28 61TL2000_140_0209
DTC P16C0: PCM A/T Control System

Incomplete Update
NOTE:
• This code is indicated when PCM updating is
incomplete.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) while updating the PCM. If you turn
the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
before completion, the PCM can be damaged.
1. Update the PCM (see page 11-233).
Is DT C P16C0 indicated?
YES−Replace the PCM (see page 11-234).
NO−PCM updating is complete.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-207
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９１６Ｃ０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:53:28 61TL2000_140_0210

DTC P1717: Open in Transmission Range 6. Check for continuity between transmission range
Switch ATP RVS Switch Circuit switch connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
＊０１
NOTE: TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review GND (BLK)
transmission.
2. Shift the shift lever to R, and check the A/T R Switch

in the Data List with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals
Is the A/ T R Switch ON?

YES−Go to step 3.
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Check for proper transmission range switch
installation (see page 14-306), adjust the shift cable NO−Repair open in the wire between transmission
(see page 14-298), then recheck. range switch connector terminal No. 5 and body
ground (G101) (see page 22-20), or repair poor
3. Check the Reverse Switch (ATP RVS) in the Data body ground (G101), then go to step 10.
List with the HDS.
Is the Reverse Switch ( AT P RV S) ON?
YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6.
time. ＊０２
NO−Go to step 4.

GND (BLK)
5. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
ATP RVS (WHT/RED)
YES−Go to step 9.

connector terminal B23 and the transmission range
switch, then go to step 10.
14-208 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９１７１７ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:04 61TL2000_140_0211
9. Check for continuity between transmission range 14. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6 when
the shift lever is in R, and when the shift lever is Is DT C P17 17 indicated?
shifted to any position other than R.
＊０３ YES−Check for poor connections or loose
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR terminals between the transmission range switch
and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 15.

GND

MENU with the HDS.

ATP RVS
Terminal side of male terminals Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 14,
Is there continuity when the shif t lever is in R, and NO−If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
no continuity when the shif t lever is shif ted to any connections or loose terminals between the
position other than R? transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
YES−Go to step 16. step 13.
NO−Replace the transmission range switch 16. Reconnect all connectors.

10. Reconnect all connectors. software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known-
18. Start the engine with the shift lever in P. Shift to N
12. Clear the DTC with the HDS. from P, then shift to R, and wait for at least
2 seconds.
13. Start the engine with the shift lever in P. Shift to N
from P, then shift to R, and wait for at least
2 seconds.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-209

08/04/09 11:54:04 61TL2000_140_0212


and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
NO−Go to step 20.

MENU with the HDS.


transmission range switch and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
14-210 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:54:04 61TL2000_140_0213
DTC P1730: Problem in Shift Control System: 9. Select Shift Solenoid Valve A in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve A
• Shift Solenoid Valves A or D Stuck OFF operates with the HDS.
• Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
• Shift Valves A, B, or D Stuck Is a clicking sound heard?
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data YES−Go to step 10.
the General Troubleshooting Information (see page NO−Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
14-4). 14-236), then go to step 14.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 10. Select Shift Solenoid Valve B in the Miscellaneous
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve B
operates with the HDS.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. Is a clicking sound heard?
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-255) through a YES−Go to step 11.
excessive clutch material. NO−Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
clutch material? 11. Select Shift Solenoid Valve D in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve D
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 14. operates with the HDS.
NO−Replace the ATF (see page 14-255), then go to Is a clicking sound heard?
step 4.
NO−Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
5. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 14-236), then go to step 14.
Does the HDS indicate F AILED? Does the HDS indicate F AILED?
YES−Go to step 8. YES−Repair the hydraulic system related to shift

valves A, B, and D, or replace the transmission,
NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent then go to step 14.
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6. NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 12.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-211
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９１７３０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:04 61TL2000_140_0214

YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 16.

MENU with the HDS.


14-212 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:54:04 61TL2000_140_0215
DTC P1731: Problem in Shift Control System: 9. Select Shift Solenoid Valve E in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve E
• Shift Solenoid Valve E Stuck ON operates with the HDS.
• Shift Valve E Stuck
• A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Stuck Is a clicking sound heard?
OFF
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review NO−Replace shift solenoid valve E (see page
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 14-236), then go to step 12.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 10. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Valve A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the the HDS.
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
excessive clutch material. time.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive NO−Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
clutch material? according to the test result, if the HDS has not
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 14. any part was replaced, go to step 12.
NO−Replace the ATF (see page 14-255), then go to 11. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
step 4. A (see page 14-240).
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
work properly?
6. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and valve E, or replace the transmission, then go to step
let the transmission shift through all five gears. 14.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1731 in the DTCs NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
MENU with the HDS. valve A (see page 14-242), then go to step 12.
YES−Go to step 8.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-213
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９１７３１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:04 61TL2000_140_0216


YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 16.

MENU with the HDS.


14-214 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:54:04 61TL2000_140_0217
DTC P1732: Problem in Shift Control System: 9. Select Shift Solenoid Valve B in the Miscellaneous
• Shift Solenoid Valves B or C Stuck ON operates with the HDS.
NO−Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 14-236), then go to step 13.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. operates with the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-255) through a Is a clicking sound heard?
excessive clutch material. YES−Go to step 11.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive NO−Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
clutch material? 14-236), then go to step 13.
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 13. 11. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and
step 4. 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1732 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
6. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and valves B and C, or replace the transmission, then
let the transmission shift through all five gears. go to step 13.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1732 in the DTCs NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent
MENU with the HDS. failure, the system is OK at this time. If the HDS
YES−Go to step 8.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-215
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９１７３２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:04 61TL2000_140_0218

YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 15.

MENU with the HDS.


14-216 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:54:05 61TL2000_140_0219
DTC P1733: Problem in Shift Control System: 9. Select Shift Solenoid Valve D in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve D
• Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck ON operates with the HDS.
• Shift Valve D Stuck
• A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Stuck Is a clicking sound heard?
OFF
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review NO−Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 14-236), then go to step 15.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 10. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Valve C in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the the HDS.
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or YES−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
excessive clutch material. time.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive NO−Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
clutch material? according to the test result, if the HDS has not
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 15. any part was replaced, go to step 12.
NO−Replace the ATF (see page 14-255), then go to 11. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
step 4. C (see page 14-245).
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Does A/ T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
work properly?
6. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and valve D, or replace the transmission, then go to
let the transmission shift through all five gears. step 15.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1733 in the DTCs NO−Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
MENU with the HDS. C (see page 14-247), then go to step 15.
YES−Go to step 8.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-217
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９１７３３ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:05 61TL2000_140_0220


YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 17.

MENU with the HDS.


14-218 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:54:05 61TL2000_140_0221
DTC P1734: Problem in Shift Control System: 9. Select Shift Solenoid Valve B in the Miscellaneous
• Shift Solenoid Valves B or C Stuck OFF operates with the HDS.
NO−Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 14-236), then go to step 13.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the Test Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. operates with the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 4 on page 14-255) through a Is a clicking sound heard?
excessive clutch material. YES−Go to step 11.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive NO−Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
clutch material? 14-236), then go to step 13.
YES−Replace the transmission, then go to step 13. 11. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and
step 4. 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1734 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
6. Test-drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D, and valves B and C, or replace the transmission, then
let the transmission shift through all five gears. go to step 13.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1734 in the DTCs NO−If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent
MENU with the HDS. failure, the system is OK at this time. If the HDS
YES−Go to step 8.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-219
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００９１７３４ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:05 61TL2000_140_0222

YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 15.

MENU with the HDS.


14-220 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:54:05 61TL2000_140_0223
DTC U0029: F-CAN Malfunction (F-CAN BUS- 6. Start the engine, and wait for at least 2 minutes.
OFF (PCM))
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data SYSTEM with the HDS.
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Is DT C U0029 indicated in the A/ T SY ST EM?
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES−Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-8), then
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI 1.
NO−Go to step 8.
Is DT C U0029 indicated in the PGM-F I SY ST EM?
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0029 in the DTCs
YES−Go to the DTC U0029 troubleshooting in the MENU with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 4.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
SYSTEM with the HDS. original PCM (see page 11-234). If any other
Is DT C U0029 indicated in the A/ T SY ST EM? go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.
connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were (see page 14-8), then go to step 6. If the PCM was
indicated, go to the indicated DTC’s substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
troubleshooting. COMPLETED, go to step 6.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-221
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００Ｕ００２９ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:05 61TL2000_140_0224

DTC U0122: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VSA 6. Start the engine, and wait for at least 2 minutes.
Modulator-Control Unit)
terminals between the VSA modulator-control unit
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI 6. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 4.
connections or loose terminals between the VSA
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this modulator-control unit and the PCM. If the PCM
time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
indicated, go to the indicated DTC’s (see page 14-8), then go to step 6. If the PCM was
troubleshooting. substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-222 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００Ｕ０１２２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:05 61TL2000_140_0225
DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Gauge 6. Start the engine, and wait for at least 2 minutes.
Control Module)
terminals between the gauge control module and
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI 6. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 4.
connections or loose terminals between the gauge
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this control module and the PCM. If the PCM was
time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
indicated, go to the indicated DTC’s 14-8), then go to step 6. If the PCM was substituted,
troubleshooting. go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 6.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-223
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｋ７７１０００Ｕ０１５５ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:05 61TL2000_140_0226
Road Test
1. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal 6. Prepare the HDS to take a HIGH SPEED SNAPSHOT
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). (refer to the HDS user’s guide for more details if
needed):
2. Apply the parking brake, and block both rear
wheels. Start the engine, then shift to D while • Select the High Speed icon.
pressing the brake pedal. Press the accelerator • Select these parameters:
pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should – Vehicle Speed
not stall. – Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed (rpm)
– Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed (rpm)
3. Repeat step 2 in all shift lever positions. – Engine Speed
– Relative TP Sensor
4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the – APP Sensor A (V)
driver’s side of the dashboard. – ATF Temp Sensor (V)
＊０１ – Battery Voltage
– Shift Control
– Brake Switch
• Set the Trigger Type to Parameter.
• Adjust the Parameter setting to APP Sensor A
above 1.2 V.
• Set the recording time to 60 seconds.
• Set the trigger point to −30 seconds.
7. Find a suitable level road. When you are ready to

begin the test, press OK on the HDS.
8. Monitor the HDS and accelerate quickly until the

APP Sensor A reads 1.3 V. Maintain a steady
throttle until the transmission shifts to 5th gear,
A then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and go to the A/T 9. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded
Data List. Make sure the HDS communicates with or increase the recording time setting as necessary
the PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit and repeat step 8.
10. Adjust the parameter setting to 2.4 V. Test-drive the
vehicle again. While monitoring the HDS,
accelerate quickly until the APP Sensor A reads
2.5 V. Maintain a steady throttle until the
transmission shifts to 5th gear (or a reasonable
speed), then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
11. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded

or increase the recording time setting as necessary
and repeat step 10.
12. Accelerate quickly until the accelerator pedal is to

the floor. Maintain a steady pedal until the
transmission shifts to 3rd gear, then slow to a stop,
and save the snapshot.
14-224 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４００００００００ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:06 61TL2000_140_0227
13. Review each snapshot individually, and compare 14. Drive the vehicle in 4th or 5th gear in S with the
the Shift Control, the APP Sensor A voltage, and the sequential sportshift mode, then decelerate and
Vehicle Speed to the table. downshift to 2nd gear. The vehicle should
immediately begin to slow down from the engine
Upshift: D position braking, then slow to a stop.
APP Sensor A voltage: 1.3 V
1st → 2nd 9−11 mph (14−18 km/h) 15. Shift to R, accelerate from a stop at full throttle
2nd → 3rd 17−21 mph (27−33 km/h) momentarily, and check for abnormal noise and
3rd → 4th 27−32 mph (43−51 km/h) clutch slippage.
4th → 5th 40−46 mph (64−74 km/h)
Lock-up ON 30−35 mph (48−56 km/h) 16. Park the vehicle on an upward slope (about
APP Sensor A voltage: 2.5 V 16-degrees), apply the parking brake, and shift into
1st → 2nd 24−27 mph (38−44 km/h) P. Release the brake; the vehicle should not move.
2nd → 3rd 41−47 mph (66−76 km/h)
3rd → 4th 65−73 mph (105−117 km/h) NOTE: Always use the parking brake to hold the
4th → 5th 109−119 mph (176−192 km/h) vehicle when stopped on an incline in gear.
Lock-up ON 121−132 mph (194−212 km/h) Depending on the grade of the incline, the vehicle
Fully-opened throttle could roll backwards if the brake is released.
1st → 2nd 39−45 mph (62−72 km/h)
2nd → 3rd 65−73 mph (105−117 km/h)
3rd → 4th 102−112 mph (164−180 km/h)
Downshift: D position
Lock-up OFF 29−34 mph (47−55 km/h)
5th → 4th 29−35 mph (47−57 km/h)
4th → 3rd 18−22 mph (29−35 km/h)
3rd → 1st 4−8 mph (7−13 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle
5th → 4th 113−123 mph (182−198 km/h)
4th → 3rd 83−91 mph (133−147 km/h)
3rd → 2nd 51−58 mph (82−94 km/h)
2nd → 1st 25−31 mph (40−50 km/h)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-225

08/04/09 11:54:06 61TL2000_140_0228
Stall Speed Test

1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the 8. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test
proper level (see page 14-254). with the shift lever in S and R.
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels. NOTE:
• Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the at a time.
driver’s side of the dashboard. • Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic
＊０１ purposes only.
• Stall speed test results should be the same in D,
S, and R.
• Do not test stall speed with the A/T pressure
gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm

Specification: 2,100 rpm
Service Limit: 1,950−2,250 rpm
9. If the stall speeds are out of the service limit,

problems and probable causes are listed in the
table.
Problem Probable Causes

A Stall speed rpm high • ATF pump output
in D, S, and R low
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and go to the A/T • Clogged ATF strainer
Data List. Make sure the HDS communicates with • Regulator valve stuck
the PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit • Slipping clutch
troubleshooting (see page 11-210). Stall speed rpm high Slippage 4th clutch
in R
5. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF. Stall speed rpm low • Engine output low
in D, S, and R • Engine throttle valve
6. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal closed
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). • Torque converter
one-way clutch
7. Shift to D while pressing the brake pedal firmly, slipping
then press the accelerator pedal for 6 to 8 seconds,
and note the engine speed. Do not move the shift
lever or remove your foot off the brake pedal, while
raising the engine speed.
14-226 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６０００００ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:06 61TL2000_140_0229
Pressure Test
Special Tools Required 7. Connect the A/T pressure gauge to the line
• A/T oil pressure gauge set pressure inspection port (A). Do not allow dust or
07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 other foreign particles to enter the port while
• A/T pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A connecting the A/T oil pressure gauge.
• A/T pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 ＊０２
A/T OIL PRESSURE
GAUGE SET
NOTE: 07406-0020400 or
• Disable the VSA by pressing the VSA OFF switch. 07406-0020401
• VSA DTC(s) may come on during the test-drive. If the
VSA DTC(s) come on, clear the DTC(s) with the HDS.
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the

proper level (see page 14-254).
A/T PRESSURE A/T PRESSURE
HOSE, 2,210 mm HOSE ADAPTER
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking 07MAJ-PY4011A 07MAJ-PY40120
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of (3 required) (3 required)
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
3. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
5. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the A

driver’s side of the dashboard.
＊０１

9. Measure the line pressure at the line pressure

inspection port (A) while holding the engine speed
A at 2,000 rpm with the shift lever in P or N.
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and go to the A/T NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if
Data List. Make sure the HDS communicates with measurements are made in shift lever positions
the PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit other than P or N.
Pressure Fluid Pressure
Standard Service Limit
Line (A) 927−985 kPa 877 kPa
(9.45−10.05 kgf/cm2, (8.95 kgf/cm2,
134−143 psi) 127 psi)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-227
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０８０００００ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:54:06 61TL2000_140_0230
Pressure Test (cont’d)

10. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the A/T oil 14. Start the engine, and shift to S.
pressure gauge from the line pressure inspection
port. 15. Shift to 1st gear by pressing the paddle shifter −
(downshift switch) if needed, and measure the 1st
11. Install the sealing bolt in the line pressure clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure
inspection port with a new sealing washer, and inspection port (B) while holding the engine speed
tighten the sealing bolt to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, at 2,000 rpm.
13 lbf·ft). Do not reuse the old sealing washer.
16. Upshift to 2nd gear by pressing the paddle shifter
12. Connect the A/T oil pressure gauge to the 1st clutch ＋ (upshift switch), and measure the 2nd clutch
pressure inspection port (B). pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection port
＊０３ (C) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
Pressure Fluid Pressure

B
1st clutch 917−995 kPa 867 kPa
(B) (9.35−10.15 kgf/cm2, (8.85 kgf/cm2,
2nd clutch 132−144 psi) 126 psi)
(C)
17. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the A/T oil
pressure gauge from the 1st and 2nd clutch
pressure inspection ports.
18. Install the sealing bolts in the 1st and 2nd clutch
pressure inspection ports with new sealing
washers, and tighten the sealing bolts to 18 N·m
13. Remove the intake air duct (see step 2 on page 9-3), (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft). Do not reuse the old sealing
and connect the A/T oil pressure gauge to the 2nd washers.
clutch pressure inspection port (C). Then
temporarily install the intake air duct.
＊０４
C
14-228 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:54:07 61TL2000_140_0231
19. Connect the A/T oil pressure gauge to the 3rd 21. Start the engine, and shift to S.
clutch pressure inspection port (D) and the 5th
clutch pressure inspection port (F). 22. Upshift to 3rd gear by pressing the paddle shifter ＋
＊０５ (upshift switch), and measure the 3rd clutch
pressure at the 3rd clutch pressure inspection port
D (D) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
23. Upshift to 4th gear by pressing the paddle shifter ＋

(upshift switch), and measure the 4th clutch
pressure at the 4th clutch pressure inspection port
(E) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
24. Upshift to 5th gear by pressing the paddle shifter ＋

(upshift switch), and measure the 5th clutch
pressure at the 5th clutch pressure inspection port
(F) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
F Pressure Fluid Pressure

20. Connect the A/T oil pressure gauge to the 4th clutch 3rd clutch 917−995 kPa 867 kPa
pressure inspection port (E). (D) (9.35−10.15 kgf/cm2, (8.85 kgf/cm2,
＊０６ 4th clutch 132−144 psi) 126 psi)
(E)
5th clutch
(F)
E
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-229

08/04/09 11:54:07 61TL2000_140_0232
Pressure Test (cont’d)

25. Bring the engine back to an idle, then apply the 29. If the pressures are out of the service limit, the
brake pedal to stop the wheels from rotating. problems and probable causes are listed in the
table.
26. Shift to R, then release the brake pedal. Measure
the 4th clutch pressure at the 4th clutch pressure Problem Probable causes
inspection port (E) while holding the engine speed No or low line • Torque converter
at 2,000 rpm. pressure • ATF pump
• Regulator valve
Pressure Fluid Pressure • Torque converter
Standard Service Limit check valve
4th clutch 917−995 kPa 867 kPa • Clogged ATF strainer
(E) in R (9.35−10.15 kgf/cm2, (8.85 kgf/cm2, No or low 1st clutch • 1st clutch
132−144 psi) 126 psi) pressure • O-rings
No or low 2nd clutch • 2nd clutch
27. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the A/T oil pressure • O-rings
pressure gauge from the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch No or low 3rd clutch • 3rd clutch
pressure inspection ports. pressure • O-rings
No or low 4th clutch • 4th clutch
28. Install the sealing bolts in the 3rd, 4th, and 5th pressure • O-rings
clutch pressure inspection ports with new sealing No or low 5th clutch • 5th clutch
washers, and tighten the sealing bolts to 18 N·m pressure • O-rings
(1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft). Do not reuse the old sealing No or low 4th clutch • Servo valve
washers. pressure in R • 4th clutch
• O-rings
31. Install the splash shield.
32. Check the ATF level (see page 14-254).
14-230 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:54:07 61TL2000_140_0233
Shift Solenoid Valve Test

1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the 7. Disconnect the shift solenoid wire harness
driver’s side of the dashboard. connector.
＊０１＊０２
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the

11-210).
3. Select Shift Solenoid Valves A, B, C, D, and E in the
Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 8. Measure the resistance between each of the
following terminals and body ground.
4. Check that shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E
operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should be • No. 1 terminal: Shift solenoid valve C
heard. • No. 2 terminal: Shift solenoid valve B
• No. 3 terminal: Shift solenoid valve E
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. • No. 5 terminal: Shift solenoid valve A
The test is complete, disconnect the HDS. • No. 8 terminal: Shift solenoid valve D
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 5.
Standard: 12−25
5. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of • If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 9.
• If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 10.
9. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive
terminal to each shift solenoid wire harness
connector terminal individually. A clicking sound
should be heard.
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK,

and the test is complete, reconnect the connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-231
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６５４８０１ＦＥＡＴ４０
08/04/09 11:54:07 61TL2000_140_0234
Shift Solenoid Valve Test (cont’d)

10. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the 17. Remove the ATF dipstick, and remove the bolts
transmission fluid (ATF). securing the ATF cooler line (A). Remove the
＊０３ harness clamp (B), then remove the ATF dipstick
B
Replace. guide tube (C).
＊０４
6 x 1.0 mm
C 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
A
A
18 x 1.5 mm
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)
11. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer

(B).
12. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-79). B

remove the PCM (see page 11-234).
14. Remove the battery base (see step 9 on page

11-366).
14-232 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:54:07 61TL2000_140_0235
18. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), the 19. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve connectors.
dowel pins (B), and the gasket (C). ＊０６
C
＊０５
D A
C
Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
A (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft) 20. Measure the resistance of each shift solenoid valve
between the connector terminals and body ground.
Standard: 12−25
• If the resistance is within the standard, go to step

21.
21. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery

terminal to body ground, and connect another
jumper wire from the positive battery terminal to
each solenoid valve terminal individually.
• If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 22.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-233

08/04/09 11:54:08 61TL2000_140_0236
Shift Solenoid Valve Test (cont’d)

22. Disconnect the shift solenoid wire harness 24. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per shift solenoid
connector (A), replace the shift solenoid wire valve) (G) on the shift solenoid valves.
harness (B) and the O-ring (C), then go to step 29.
＊０７ NOTE: A new shift solenoid valve comes with new
O-rings. If you install a new shift solenoid valve,
use the O-rings provided with it.
25. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector),

A shift solenoid valve D (black connector), and shift
solenoid valve E (black connector) by holding the
shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting
bracket contacts the servo body.
C NOTE: Do not hold the shift solenoid valve

Replace. connector to install the shift solenoid valve. Be sure
6 x 1.0 mm to hold the shift solenoid valve body.
B 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft) 26. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure
23. Remove the mounting bolts (F), then hold the shift the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift
solenoid valve body, and remove the shift solenoid solenoid valve D.
valves.
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before
NOTE: Do not hold the connector to remove the installing shift solenoid valve D. If shift solenoid
shift solenoid valves. valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid
＊０８ valve D, it may damage the hydraulic control
G system.
C F
27. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by
G
the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift
E solenoid valve E.
G
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve B before
F
installing shift solenoid valve E. If shift solenoid
B
G valve B is installed before installing shift solenoid
D valve E, it may damage the hydraulic control
system.
G F
6 x 1.0 mm
A 12 N·m 28. Install the shift solenoid valve mounting bolts.
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
C 29. Connect the shift solenoid valve connectors:
B • BLU wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.

E • ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
A • GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
D • YEL wire connector to shift solenoid valve D.
• RED wire connector to shift solenoid valve E.
14-234
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 11:54:08 61TL2000_140_0237
30. Install a new gasket, the dowel pins, and the shift
solenoid valve cover.
31. Install a new O-ring on the ATF dipstick guide tube,

then install the guide tube with the bolts.
32. Check the shift solenoid wire harness connector for

rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary. Then
connect the connector securely.
33. Secure the ATF cooler line with the bolts.
34. Install the harness clamp on its bracket.
36. Install the battery base (see step 9 on page 11-366).
37. Connect PCM connectors A, B, and C, then install

the PCM (see page 11-234).

22-79).
41. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-255).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-235

08/04/09 11:54:08 61TL2000_140_0238
Shift Solenoid Valve and Shift Solenoid Wire Harness Replacement

1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking 10. Remove the ATF dipstick, and remove the bolts
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of securing the ATF cooler line (A). Remove the
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. harness clamp (B), then remove the ATF dipstick
guide tube (C).
2. Remove the left front wheel. ＊０２
6 x 1.0 mm
C 12 N·m
3. Remove the splash shield. (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the

transmission fluid (ATF).
＊０１
B
Replace.
B
A
18 x 1.5 mm
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)

(B).


11-366).
14-236 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６５４８０１ＫＢＡＴ４０
08/04/09 11:54:09 61TL2000_140_0239
11. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), the 12. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve connectors.
dowel pins (B), and the gasket (C).
＊０３ • If replacing the shift solenoid wire harness, go to
step 13.
• If replacing the shift solenoid valve(s), go to step
14.
＊０４
C
E
B
C
Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm D
12 N·m A
A (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)

connector (A), then replace the shift solenoid wire
harness (B) and the O-ring (C) with new ones. Go to
step 21.
＊０５
C
Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm
B 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-237

08/04/09 11:54:09 61TL2000_140_0240
Shift Solenoid Valve and Shift Solenoid Wire Harness Replacement (cont’d)
14. Remove the mounting bolts (F), then hold the shift 16. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector),
solenoid valve body and remove the shift solenoid shift solenoid valve D (black connector), and shift
valves. solenoid valve E (black connector) by holding the
shift solenoid valve body; make sure the mounting
NOTE: Do not hold the connector to remove the bracket contacts the servo body.
shift solenoid valve.
＊０６ NOTE: Do not hold the shift solenoid valve
G connector to install the shift solenoid valve. Be sure
C
to hold the shift solenoid valve body.
F
G
17. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by
E the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift
G
solenoid valve D.
F
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve A before
B
G installing shift solenoid valve D. If shift solenoid
D valve A is installed before installing shift solenoid
valve D, it may damage the hydraulic control
G F system.
6 x 1.0 mm
A 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 18. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by
C holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure
the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift
B solenoid valve E.
E
A NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve B before
D installing shift solenoid valve E. If shift solenoid
valve B is installed before installing shift solenoid
valve E, it may damage the hydraulic control
system.
15. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per shift solenoid
valve) (G) on the shift solenoid valve. 19. Install the shift solenoid valve mounting bolts.
NOTE: A new shift solenoid valve comes with new 20. Connect the shift solenoid valve connectors:
O-rings. If you install a new shift solenoid valve,
use the O-rings provided with it. • BLU wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.
• ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
• GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
• YEL wire connector to shift solenoid valve D.
14-238
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 11:59:29 61TL2000_140_0241

then install the guide tube with the bolts.
23. Check the shift solenoid wire harness connector for

rust, dirt, or oil, clean or repair if necessary. Then
connect the connector securely.
24. Secure the ATF cooler line with the bolts.
25. Install the harness clamp on its bracket.


22-79).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-239

08/04/09 11:59:30 61TL2000_140_0242
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test

1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the 6. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
driver’s side of the dashboard. valve A connector.
＊０１＊０２
A
7. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the pressure control solenoid valve A connector
HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
11-210). Standard: 3−10
3. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid • If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
Valve A in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the 8.
HDS. • If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
4. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-242).
with the HDS.
8. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
Disconnect the HDS. valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the another jumper wire from the positive battery
instructions on the HDS. terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does valve A connector terminal No. 1.
not determine the cause, go to step 5.
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK, and
5. Remove the intake air duct (see step 2 on page 9-3). the test is complete, go to step 18.
14-240 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６１２２２３ＦＥＡＴ２０
08/04/09 11:59:30 61TL2000_140_0243
9. Remove the bolts securing the ATF cooler inlet line 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
brackets (B), then remove A/T clutch pressure terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
control solenoid valve A. valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect
＊０３ another jumper wire from the positive battery
6 x 1.0 mm terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
12 N·m valve A connector terminal No. 1. Make sure A/T
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves.
＊０４
E
Replace. C
A
F
Replace.
B
D
13. Disconnect one of the jumper wires, and check the

valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve
6 x 1.0 mm body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
12 N·m
B (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
10. Remove the ATF pipe (C), the ATF joint pipes (D), A.
the O-rings (E), and the gasket (F).
14. Clean the mounting surface and the fluid passage
11. Check the fluid passage of A/T clutch pressure of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
control solenoid valve A for contamination. body and the transmission housing.
15. Install a new gasket on the transmission housing,

and install the ATF pipe and the ATF joint pipes.
Install new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes.
NOTE: Be sure to install a new gasket with the blue

side toward the transmission housing.
16. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
17. Secure the ATF cooler inlet line brackets with the
bolts.
18. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or

repair if necessary. Then connect the connector
securely.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-241

08/04/09 11:59:30 61TL2000_140_0244
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Replacement

1. Remove the intake air duct (see step 2 on page 9-3). 10. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean
or repair if necessary. Then connect the connector
2. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid securely.
valve A connector.
3. Remove the bolts securing the ATF cooler inlet line
brackets (B).
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
E
Replace. C
A
F
Replace.
B
D
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
4. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve

A.
5. Remove the ATF pipe (C), the ATF joint pipes (D),
the O-rings (E), and the gasket (F).
6. Clean the mounting surface and the fluid passages

of the transmission housing.

and install the ATF pipe and the ATF joint pipes.
Install new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes.

8. Install a new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve A.
9. Secure the ATF cooler inlet line brackets with the

bolts.
14-242 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６１２２２３ＫＢＡＴ２０
08/04/09 11:59:31 61TL2000_140_0245
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test

1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the 7. Remove the battery base (see step 9 on page
driver’s side of the dashboard. 11-366).
＊０５
valve B connector.
＊０６

11-210).
3. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid pressure control solenoid valve B connector
Valve B in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
4. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B Standard: 3−10

with the HDS.
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. 10.
Disconnect the HDS. • If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
instructions on the HDS. (see page 14-247).
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does
not determine the cause, go to step 5. 10. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
5. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-79). valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect
another jumper wire from the positive battery
6. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C, then terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
remove the PCM (see page 11-234). valve B connector terminal No. 1.

the test is complete, then go to step 19.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-243
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６１２２２３ＦＥＡＴ３０
08/04/09 11:59:31 61TL2000_140_0246
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test (cont’d)

11. Remove the harness clamp (A) from the clamp 14. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
bracket (D). Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
control solenoid valve C connector, then remove valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C. another jumper wire from the positive battery
＊０７ terminal to connector terminal No. 1. Make sure
G
Replace. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves.
＊０８
F
Replace. E
D
C
B
B 15. Disconnect one of the jumper wires, and check the

body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
A replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
6 x 1.0 mm B and C.
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
of the solenoid valve body and the transmission
12. Remove the ATF joint pipes (E), the O-rings (F), and housing.
the gasket (G).
13. Check the fluid passage of A/T clutch pressure and install the ATF joint pipes. Install new O-rings
control solenoid valves B and C for contamination. over the ATF joint pipes.

18. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B

and C, and install the harness clamp to the clamp
bracket.
19. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or

repair if necessary. Then connect the connectors
securely.


22-79).
14-244 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:59:31 61TL2000_140_0247
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test

1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the 7. Remove the battery base (see step 9 on page
driver’s side of the dashboard. 11-366).
＊０９
valve C connector.
＊１０

11-210).
3. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid pressure control solenoid valve C connector
Valve C in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
4. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C Standard: 3−10

with the HDS.
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. 10.
Disconnect the HDS. • If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
instructions on the HDS. (see page 14-247).
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does
not determine the cause, go to step 5. 10. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
5. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-79). valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect
another jumper wire from the positive battery
6. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C, then terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
remove the PCM (see page 11-234). valve C connector terminal No. 1.

the test is complete, then go to step 19.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-245
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６１２２２３ＦＥＡＴ３１
08/04/09 11:59:32 61TL2000_140_0248
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test (cont’d)

11. Remove the harness clamp (A) from the clamp 14. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
bracket (D). Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
control solenoid valve B connector, then remove valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C. another jumper wire from the positive battery
＊１１ terminal to connector terminal No. 1. Make sure
G
Replace. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves.
＊１２
F
Replace. E
D
C C
B 15. Disconnect one of the jumper wires, and check the

body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
A replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
6 x 1.0 mm B and C.
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
of the solenoid valve body and the transmission
12. Remove the ATF joint pipes (E), the O-rings (F), and housing.
the gasket (G).
13. Check the fluid passage of A/T clutch pressure and install the ATF joint pipes. Install new O-rings
control solenoid valves B and C for contamination. over the ATF joint pipes.

18. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B

and C, and install the harness clamp to the clamp
bracket.
19. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or

repair if necessary. Then connect the connectors
securely.


22-79).
14-246 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:59:32 61TL2000_140_0249
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B and C Replacement

1. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-79). 6. Clean the mounting surface and the fluid passages
of the transmission housing.
remove the PCM (see page 11-234). 7. Install a new gasket on the transmission housing,
and install the ATF joint pipes. Install new O-rings
3. Remove the battery base (see step 9 on page over the ATF joint pipes.
11-366).
4. Remove the harness clamp (A) from the clamp side toward the transmission housing.
bracket (D). Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valves B and C connectors, then 8. Install new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves valves B and C, and install the harness clamp to the
B and C. clamp bracket.
＊０２
G
Replace. 9. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean
or repair if necessary. Then connect the connectors
securely.
F 10. Install the battery base (see step 9 on page 11-366).

Replace. E
D 11. Connect PCM connectors A, B, and C, then install

22-79).
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
5. Remove the ATF joint pipes (E), the O-rings (F), and
the gasket (G).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-247
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６１２２２３ＫＢＡＴ３０
08/04/09 11:59:32 61TL2000_140_0250
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed

Sensor Replacement Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the intake air duct (see step 2 on page 9-3). 1. Remove the intake air duct (see step 2 on page 9-3).
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-364). 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-364).
3. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 3. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector, and remove the input shaft sensor connector, and remove the output shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor (A). (countershaft) speed sensor (A) and the speed
＊０１ sensor washer (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m ＊０１
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm A
A 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
B
Replace.
C
Replace.
4. Install a new O-ring (B) on a new input shaft

(mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission
housing. 4. Install a new O-ring (C) on a new output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, then install the output
5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean shaft (countershaft) speed sensor with the speed
or repair if necessary. Then connect the connector sensor washer in the transmission housing.
securely.
5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean
6. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-364). or repair if necessary. Then connect the connector
securely.
6. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-364).
14-248 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６３４６１５ＫＢＡＴ１０ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６４３８２１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 11:59:32 61TL2000_140_0251
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement

2. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch connector, and remove the 2nd
clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A) and
the sealing washer (B).
＊０１
B
Replace.
A
20 N·m
(2.0 kgf·m,
14.5 lbf·ft)
3. Install a new 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch with a new sealing washer, and tighten the
2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch to the
specified torque by turning the metal part, not the
plastic part.

securely.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-249
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６１０１０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:59:33 61TL2000_140_0252
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement

1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking 6. Install the engine undercover.
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of ＊０３

＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
3. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch connector, then remove the 3rd
clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A) and
the sealing washer (B).
＊０２
A
20 N·m
(2.0 kgf·m,
14 lbf·ft)
B
Replace.
4. Install a new 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch with a new sealing washer, and tighten the
3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch to the
specified torque by turning the metal part, not the
plastic part.

securely.
14-250 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６１０１１１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:59:33 61TL2000_140_0253
ATF Temperature Sensor Test/Replacement

1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking 10. Remove the ATF dipstick, and remove the bolts
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of securing the ATF cooler line (A). Remove the
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. harness clamp (B), then remove the ATF dipstick
guide tube (C).
2. Remove the left front wheel. ＊０２
6 x 1.0 mm
C 12 N·m
3. Remove the splash shield. (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the

transmission fluid (ATF).
＊０１
B
Replace.
B
A
18 x 1.5 mm
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)

(B).


11-366).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-251
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６１３０４１ＦＨＡＴ１０
08/04/09 11:59:33 61TL2000_140_0254
ATF Temperature Sensor Test/Replacement (cont’d)

11. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), the 12. Disconnect the shift solenoid wire harness
dowel pins (B), and the gasket (C). connector (A), then remove the shift solenoid wire
＊０３ harness (B) from the transmission housing.
＊０４
A
C
Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm
B 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
6 x 1.0 mm 8.7 lbf·ft)
12 N·m
A (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft) 13. Measure the ATF temperature sensor resistance
between shift solenoid wire harness connector
terminals No. 6 and No. 7.
Standard: 50 −25 k
• If the resistance is within the standard, install the

shift solenoid wire harness and a new O-ring in
the transmission housing, then go to step 16.
14-252 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:59:34 61TL2000_140_0255
14. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve connectors 18. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
from the shift solenoid valves. Then replace the repair if necessary. Then connect the connector
ATF temperature sensor/shift solenoid wire securely.
harness assembly (F), and the O-ring (G) with new
ones. 19. Secure the ATF cooler line with the bolts.
NOTE: The ATF temperature sensor is not available 20. Install the harness clamp on its clamp bracket.
separately from the shift solenoid wire harness.
＊０５ 21. Install the battery base (see step 9 on page 11-366).
C
22. Connect PCM connector A, B, and C, then install the
E
B
22-79).
D

G A
Replace.
F
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
15. Connect the shift solenoid valve connectors:
• BLU wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.

• ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
• GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
• YEL wire connector to shift solenoid vlave D.

then install the guide tube with the bolt.
14-253
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 11:59:34 61TL2000_140_0256
ATF Level Check

NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. If the ATF level is below the lower mark, check for
fluid leaks at the transmission, and the ATF cooler
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground. hoses and lines. If a problem is found, fix it before
filling the transmission with ATF.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
the engine off. Do not allow the engine to warm up below the lower mark, one or more of these
more than two cycles of the cooling fan. symptoms may occur:
• Transmission damage will result.
NOTE: Check the ATF level within 60−90 seconds • Vehicle does not move in any gear.
after turning the engine off. Higher ATF level may • Vehicle accelerates poorly, and flares when
be indicated if the radiator fan comes on twice or starting off in D, S, and R.
more. • Vibration when the engine is idling.
3. Remove the ATF dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the 7. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF
ATF dipstick guide tube, and wipe it with a clean to proper level (see step 4 on page 14-255).
cloth.
＊０１ NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
above the upper mark, the vehicle may creep
forward while in N, or have problem shifting.
A
8. If necessary, fill the transmission with ATF through
the dipstick guide tube opening (A) to bring the
fluid level between the upper mark and the lower
mark of the dipstick. Do not fill the fluid above the
upper mark. Always use genuine Acura ATF-Z1
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Acura ATF can affect shift quality.
＊０３
C
B
4. Insert the dipstick into the guide tube aligning the

notch (B) with the guide tab (C).
5. Remove the dipstick and check the ATF level. It

should be between the upper mark (A) and the
lower mark (B).
＊０２ A
9. Insert the dipstick into the guide tube aligning the

notch with the guide tab.
A
14-254 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４０００１３００１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:59:34 61TL2000_140_0257
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 5. Remove the ATF dipstick, and refill the
transmission with the recommended fluid amount
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. through the ATF dipstick guide tube opening (A) to
bring the fluid level between the upper mark and
2. Warm up the engine to normal operating the lower mark of the dipstick. Always use genuine
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn Acura ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF).
the engine off. Using a non-Acura ATF can affect shift quality.
3. Remove the engine undercover. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:

＊０１ 2.5 L (2.6 US qt) at change
6.5 L (6.9 US qt) at overhaul
＊０３
A
4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic
transmission fluid (ATF). Then reinstall the drain
plug with a new sealing washer (B). 6. Insert the dipstick (A) into the guide tube (B)
＊０２ aligning the notch (C) with the guide tab (D).
B ＊０４
Replace.
A
18 x 1.5 mm D
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft) C
7. Check the ATF level (see page 14-254).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-255
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４０００１３００１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:59:35 61TL2000_140_0258
ATF Replacement (cont’d)

8. Install the engine undercover. 10. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
＊０５ (A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
＊０６
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
A
9. If the maintenance minder required to replace the
ATF, reset the maintenance minder (see page 3-7), 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the
and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go
minder did not require you to replace the ATF, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page
to step 10. 11-210).
13. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGE MENU with

the HDS.

the HDS.
15. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 3 RESET, and

reset the ATF life with the HDS.
14-256 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:59:35 61TL2000_140_0259
Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the intake air duct (see step 2 on page 9-3).
• Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000015
• Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-364).
These special tools are available through the Acura 7. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C, then
Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857. remove the PCM (see page 11-234).
NOTE: 8. Remove the battery base (see step 9 on page

• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted 11-366).
surfaces.
• Special tool Reds engine support hanger AAR-T1256 9. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and make sure it is
must be used with the side engine mount installed. securely supported.
1. Secure the hood in the wide open position with the 10. Remove the front wheels.
support rod.
12. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic
3. Remove the front grille cover. transmission fluid (ATF).
＊０２
4. Remove the vacuum hose (A) from its clamps (B), A
then remove the strut brace (C). 18 x 1.5 mm
49 N·m
＊０１ (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)
C A B
B
Replace.

(B).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-257
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４０００００ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 11:59:35 61TL2000_140_0260

14. Disconnect these connectors: 16. Disconnect these connectors:
• A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A • Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
connector (A) connector (A)
• 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch • Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector
connector (B) (B)
＊０３ • A/F sensor connector (C)
D • Transmission range switch subharness
connector (D)
＊０４
G D
C
B H
C
A
B
D
F
A
17. Remove the A/F sensor connector from its bracket

15. Remove the harness clamps (C) from the clamp (E).
brackets (D).
18. Remove the transmission range switch subharness
connector from its bracket (F).
19. Remove the harness cover bracket bolt (G), and

remove the harness cover bracket with the harness
cover (H) from the ATF filter bracket (I).
14-258 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:59:36 61TL2000_140_0261
20. Disconnect these connectors: 22. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF
cooler lines (B). Turn the end of the ATF cooler
• 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch hoses up to prevent ATF from flowing out, then
connector (A) plug the ATF cooler hoses and lines.
• A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B ＊０６
connector (B) B
• A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
connector (C)
• Shift solenoid wire harness connector (D)
＊０５
C
B
A
23. Remove the bolts (A) securing the ATF cooler line
A bracket (B).
E F
D
＊０７
E B
B
21. Remove the harness clamps (E) from the clamp

brackets (F).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-259

08/04/09 11:59:36 61TL2000_140_0262

24. Remove the ignition coil cover. 27. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) to
＊０８ the vehicle, and attach the hook (A) to the slotted
hole in the engine hanger adapter (VSB02C000015).
Tighten the wing nut (B) by hand to lift and support
the engine.
NOTE:
• Be careful when working around the windshield.
• Be careful not to damage the hood opener cable
when installing the engine support hanger at the
front bulkhead.
＊１０
25. Remove the harness cover bracket bolts (A).

＊０９ AAR-T1256
VSB02C000015 B
A
VSB02C000015
26. Attach the engine hanger adapter (VSB02C000015)

to the threaded hole located on the rear side of the
cylinder head.
14-260 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:59:37 61TL2000_140_0263
28. Remove the vacuum hose (A) from the vacuum 31. Remove the rear engine mount bolts (A).
tube (B), and remove the vacuum hose from its ＊１３
A
clamp (C).
＊１１
D
E
32. Remove the rear engine mount upper base bracket

(A) with the rear engine mount (B).
＊１４
B
29. Remove the front engine mount stop (D) and the
clamp bracket (E), and remove the front engine
mount bolt (F). A B
30. Remove the upper transmission mount bracket

bolts (A) and the transmission ground cable bolt (B).
NOTE: Do not remove the TORX bolt (C) from the

upper transmission mount. If the TORX bolt is
removed, the upper transmission mount must be
replaced as an assembly.
＊１２
A C
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-261

08/04/09 11:59:37 61TL2000_140_0264

33. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolts (A) 34. Remove the bolts (B) with the springs and the self-
and the washers (8) (B). locking nuts (C).
＊１７
Driver’s side
＊１５ D
A C
B
B
A
D C B
Passenger’s side
＊１６ 35. Remove exhaust pipe A and the gaskets (D).
A
14-262 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:59:38 61TL2000_140_0265
36. Remove the damper fork mounting nuts (A) while 39. Remove the torque converter cover (A), and
holding the mounting bolts (B), then remove the remove the drive plate bolts (B) (8) while rotating
damper fork mounting bolts. the crankshaft pulley.
＊１８＊１９
B
A
E
C A
D
40. Remove the shift cable cover (A).
＊２０
B
37. Remove the cotter pins (C), then remove the castle
nuts (D).
E
38. Separate the knuckle ball joints from the lower
C
arms (E) (see page 18-11).
F
D
41. Remove the spring clip (B) and the control pin (C),
and separate the shift cable end (D) from the
selector control lever (E). Remove the shift cable
bracket bolts (F).
42. Hang the shift cable to the body with a strap.
NOTE: Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
(cont’d)
14-263
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 11:59:38 61TL2000_140_0266

43. Remove the transmission lower mount nuts. 46. Attach the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016)
＊２１ to the front subframe by looping the strap (A) over
the front of the front subframe, then secure the
strap with the stop (B), then tighten the wing nut (C).
＊２３
A
C
B
44. Loosen the front subframe mid-mount bolts (A). VSB02C000016

＊２２
A 47. Raise a jack and line up the slots in the arms with
the bolt holes on the corner of the jack base, then
tighten the bolts.
48. Remove the four bolts securing the stiffeners (A)

and the four bolts securing the front subframe (B),
then lower the front subframe.
＊２４
45. Secure the steering gearbox to the body with a

strap. B
14-264 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:59:39 61TL2000_140_0267
49. Place a jack under the transmission. 52. Remove the intermediate shaft. Coat all precision
machined surfaces with clean engine oil, then put
50. Remove the transmission lower mount. plastic bags over the intermediate shaft ends.
＊２５＊２７
53. Remove the rear engine mount bracket.

51. Remove the left side driveshaft from the differential ＊２８
and the right side driveshaft from the intermediate
shaft. Coat all precision machined surfaces with
clean engine oil, then put plastic bags over the
driveshaft ends. Hang the driveshafts to the body
with a strap.
＊２６
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-265

08/04/09 11:59:39 61TL2000_140_0268

54. Remove the front engine mount bracket. 57. Lower the transmission by loosening the wing nut
＊２９ on the engine support hanger, and tilt the engine
just enough for the transmission to clear the side
frame. Check that the transmission is completely
free of the vacuum hoses, the ATF and coolant
hoses, and the electrical wiring.
58. Place the jack under the transmission.
59. Remove the front and lower transmission housing

mounting bolts.
＊３１
55. Remove the jack.
56. Remove the upper transmission housing mounting

bolts.
＊３０
60. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor cover.

＊３２
14-266 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 11:59:40 61TL2000_140_0269
61. Remove the rear transmission housing mounting

bolts.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the CKP sensor

and the sensor harness.
＊３３
62. Check once again that the transmission is free of

vacuum hoses, ATF and coolant hoses, and
electrical wiring.
63. Slide the transmission away from the engine to

remove it from the vehicle.
64. Remove the torque converter, the O-ring, and the

dowel pins.
＊３４
65. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it is

damaged.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-267

08/04/09 11:59:40 61TL2000_140_0270
Transmission Installation
Special Tools Required 5. Install the rear transmission housing mounting
• Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000015 bolts.
• Front subframe adapter VSB02C000016 NOTE: Be careful not to damage the crankshaft
• Subframe alignment pin 070AG-SJAA10S position (CKP) sensor and the sensor harness.
These special tools are available through the Acura ＊０２
Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857. 12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
1. If you did not clean the ATF cooler when you

removed the transmission, and you are installing
an overhauled or remanufactured transmission,
clean the ATF cooler (see page 14-281).
2. Install a new O-ring (A) on the torque converter (B),

then install the torque converter on the mainshaft
(C).
＊０１
6. Install the CKP sensor cover.
＊０３
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
B C
A
3. Install the 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (D) in the torque

converter housing.
4. Place the transmission on a jack, and raise the

transmission to the engine level, then fit the
transmission to the engine.
14-268 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:01 61TL2000_140_0271
7. Install the front and lower transmission housing 11. Install the front engine mount bracket.
mounting bolts. ＊０６
12 x 1.25 mm
＊０４ 64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
12 x 1.25 mm
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
8. Remove the jack.

12. Install the rear engine mount bracket.
9. Install the upper transmission housing mounting ＊０７
12 x 1.25 mm
bolts. 88 N·m (9.0 kgf·m, 65 lbf·ft)
＊０５ Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
10. Place the jack under the transmission.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-269

08/04/09 12:00:02 61TL2000_140_0272

13. Install new set ring (A) on the intermediate shaft (B). 16. Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts
＊０８ the transmission (differential) with solvent, and dry
with compressed air. Then install the left driveshaft.
Be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission. Turn the steering knuckle
fully outward, and slide the driveshaft into the
differential until you feel its set ring fully engage
the side gear.
17. Apply the recommended grease to the right

driveshaft inboard-joint splines.
A
18. Slide the right driveshaft over the intermediate
B shaft splines until you feel the driveshaft fully
10 x 1.25 mm engage the intermediate shaft set ring.
C 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
19. Install the transmission lower mounts.
14. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft ＊１０
10 x 1.25 mm
contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent, 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
and dry with compressed air. Apply ATF to the Replace.
intermediate shaft splines (C), then install the
intermediate shaft. Be sure not to allow dust or
other foreign particles to enter the transmission.
15. Install new set ring (A) on the left driveshaft (B).
＊０９
14-270 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:02 61TL2000_140_0273
20. Set the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016) to 21. Raise the front subframe up to the body, then
the front subframe by looping the strap (A) over the loosely install new front subframe mounting bolts
front of the front subframe, then secure the strap (A), the stiffener mounting bolts (B), and new
with the stop (B), then tighten the wing nut (C). stiffener mounting bolts (C).
＊１１
NOTE: Be careful when connecting these items:
• Front engine mount and its bracket
• Transmission lower mount and front subframe
• Damper forks and lower arms
＊１２
A
C
B
VSB02C000016
B
A C C B
14 x 1.5 mm 12 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
103 N·m 93 N·m A 54 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, (9.5 kgf·m, (5.5 kgf·m,
75.9 lbf·ft) 69 lbf·ft) 40 lbf·ft)
Replace. Replace.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-271

08/04/09 12:00:02 61TL2000_140_0274

22. Loosely tighten the front subframe mounting bolt 27. Check that the positioning holes and slots are
(A) in the right rear stiffener until the front aligned using the subframe alignment pin.
subframe insulator contacts the body; insert the
subframe alignment pin (070AG-SJAA10S) through 28. Tighten the rear and front stiffener mounting bolts
the positioning slot (B) on the right rear stiffener, to the specified torque.
through the positioning hole (C) on the front
subframe, and into the positioning hole on the 29. Remove the jack and the front subframe adapter.
body.
＊１３ 30. Replace the front subframe mid-mount mounting
A
14 x 1.5 mm bolts.
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft) ＊１４
Replace.
C
12 x 1.25 mm
93 N·m
Replace.
070AG-SJAA10S 10 x 1.25 mm
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)
Replace.
23. Loosely tighten the front subframe mounting bolt
in the left rear stiffener in the same manner in step 31. Install the transmission lower mount nuts.
22. ＊１５
24. Reinsert the subframe alignment pin through the

positioning slot on the right rear stiffener, through
the positioning hole on the front subframe, and into
the positioning hole on the body, then tighten the
front subframe mounting bolt to the specified
torque.
25. Tighten the front subframe mounting bolt in the left

rear stiffener in the same manner in step 24.
26. Tighten the front subframe mounting bolts in the

right front stiffener and the left front stiffener to the
specified torque.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
14-272 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:03 61TL2000_140_0275
32. Connect the damper forks (A) and the lower arms 34. Loosely install new upper transmission mount
(B) with new damper fork mounting bolts (C), then bracket bolts (A).
loosely tighten the new mounting nuts (D). ＊１７
A
＊１６ 6 x 1.0 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
D A
12 x 1.25 mm 9.8 N·m 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft)
Replace. (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) Replace.
C
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
B
B
G
Replace.
F
14 x 1.5 mm
78−80 N·m
(8.0−9.0 kgf·m, 58−65 lbf·ft)
33. Connect the knuckle ball joints (E) and the lower 35. Install the transmission ground cable (B).
arms, then install the castle nuts (F).
36. Loosely install a new front engine mount bolt (A).
NOTE: Do not install the cotter pin (G) onto the ＊１８
castle nut until the castle nut tightened to the
specified torque.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-273

08/04/09 12:00:03 61TL2000_140_0276

37. Set the washers (A) in the positions shown. Loosely 39. Install the rear engine mount upper base bracket
install new steering gearbox bolts, then tighten the (A) with the rear engine mount (B).
bolts in the numbered sequence shown. ＊２１
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
Driver’s side (5.5 kgf·m,
＊１９ 40 lbf·ft)
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm 14 x 1.5 mm
74 N·m 74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft)
(7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft) Replace. A
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
(5.5 kgf·m,
40 lbf·ft)
40. Install new rear engine mount bolts (A).

A ＊２２
Passenger’s side
＊２０
14 x 1.5 mm 14 x 1.5 mm
74 N·m 74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft)
(7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft) Replace.
Replace.
A
10 x 1.25 mm B
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) 12 x 1.25 mm
Replace. Replace.
41. Loosely install a new rear engine mount bolt (B).
38. Check all of the steering gearbox mounting bolts,

and retighten if necessary.
14-274 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:04 61TL2000_140_0277
42. Apply molybdenum grease to the hole in the 45. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate with
bushing (A) in the shift cable end (B). Attach the the eight bolts (A). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as
shift cable end to the selector control lever (C), then necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified
insert the control pin (D) into the control lever hole torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
through the shift cable end, and secure the control pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
pin with the spring clip (E). Do not bend the shift crankshaft rotates freely.
cable excessively. ＊２４
A
＊２３ 6 x 1.0 mm
Properly installed: C 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
E E
6 x 1.0 mm
B 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
46. Install the torque converter cover (B).

F
A
B
G
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm (1.0 kgf·m,
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 7.2 lbf·ft)
43. Install the shift cable bracket (F).
44. Install the shift cable cover (G).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-275

08/04/09 12:00:04 61TL2000_140_0278

47. Install exhaust pipe A with new gaskets (B) 51. Install the ignition coil cover.
(see page 9-7). ＊２７
6 x 1.0 mm
＊２５ 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
B
Replace.
A
52. Tighten the front engine mount bolt (A).

＊２８
12 x 1.25 mm
B 10 x 1.25 mm 8 x 1.25 mm 78 N·m (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft)
Replace. 33 N·m 22 N·m
(3.4 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft) (2.2 kgf·m,
F
48. Remove the engine support hanger.
49. Remove the engine hanger adapter B

(VSB02C000015). C
G
＊２６
A VSB02C000015
A
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
(5.5 kgf·m,
E 40 lbf·ft)
D
53. Install the front mount stop (B) with the vacuum
hose clamp bracket (C).
6 x 1.0 mm 54. Install the vacuum hose (D) to the vacuum tube (E),
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) and install the vacuum hose on its clamp (F) at the
mark (G).
50. Install the harness cover bracket (A).
55. Tighten the rear engine mount bolt to 78 N·m
(8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft).
56. Tighten the upper transmission mount bolts to

59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft).
14-276 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:05 61TL2000_140_0279
57. Install the ATF cooler line brackets (A). 59. Connect these connectors:
＊２９
A
• 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
connector (A)
• A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
connector (B)
• A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
connector (C)
• Shift solenoid wire harness connector (D)
＊３１
C
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, F
8.7 lbf·ft)
A
58. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
lines (B), and secure the hoses with the clips (C)
(see page 14-283).
＊３０
B
A
E
D F
B E
60. Install the harness clamps (E) on the clamp

brackets (F).
C
B
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-277

08/04/09 12:00:05 61TL2000_140_0280

61. Connect these connectors: 63. Connect these connectors:
• A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A • Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
connector (A) connector (A)
• 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch • Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector
connector (B) (B)
＊３２ • A/F sensor connector (C)
D • Transmission range switch subharness
connector (D)
＊３３
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
C
B D
C
G
A
B
H
D
A E
62. Install the harness clamps (C) on the clamp 64. Install the transmission range switch subharness
brackets (D). connector on its bracket (E).
65. Install the A/F sensor connector on its bracket (F).
66. Install the harness cover bracket (G) on the ATF

filter bracket (H).
14-278 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:05 61TL2000_140_0281
67. Install the battery base (see step 9 on page 11-366). 73. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-255).
68. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-364). 74. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all gears three times
69. Install the intake air duct (see step 9 on page 9-6). while pressing the brake pedal.
70. Connect PCM connectors A, B, and C, then install 75. Check the shift lever operation, the A/T gear
the PCM (see page 11-234). position indicator operation, and the shift cable
adjustment.
22-79). 76. Place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise
the front suspension to load it with the vehicle’s
72. Loosely install the front strut brace mounting nuts weight. Do not place the jack against the ball joint
(A), and install the vacuum hose (B) on its clamps pin of the knuckle.
(C). Tighten the damper fork mounting nut while
＊３４ holding the mounting bolt to 64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m,
A A
8 x 1.25 mm B C 8 x 1.25 mm 47 lbf·ft).
77. Tighten the ball joint mounting castle nuts to

78−80 N·m (8.0−9.0 kgf·m, 58−65 lbf·ft), then
install new cotter pins onto the castle nuts, then
bend the cotter pin ends (see step 6 on page 18-21).
78. Tighten the front strut brace mounting nuts to

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft).
81. Install the front grille cover.
82. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment

(see page 18-5).
83. Start the engine with the shift lever in P or N, and

warm it up to normal operating temperature (the
radiator fan comes on).
84. Turn the engine off, and check the ATF level
(see page 14-254).
85. Do the road test (see page 14-224).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-279

08/04/09 12:00:05 61TL2000_140_0282
Drive Plate Removal and Installation

1. Remove the transmission assembly (see page
14-257).
2. Remove the drive plate (A) and the washer (B) from
the engine.
＊０１
A
12 x 1.0 mm
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft)
3. Install the drive plate and the washer on the engine,

and tighten the eight bolts in a crisscross pattern in
at least two steps.
4. Install the transmission assembly (see page 14-268).
14-280 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４２２２５１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:06 61TL2000_140_0283
ATF Cooler Cleaning

Special Tools Required 2. Plug the cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded
• ATF cooler cleaner GHTTTCF6H electrical outlet.
• Magnetic nonbypass spin-on filter GTHGNBP2
These special tools are available through the Acura
Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857. Make sure the outlet has no other appliances
(light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords)
Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler
automatic transmission, you must thoroughly clean the cleaner into an extension cord or drop light;
ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to you could damage the unit.
do so could cause a repeat automatic transmission ＊０２
failure.
The cleaning procedure involves heated ATF-Z1

delivered under high pressure (100 psi). Check the
RED HOSE
security of all hoses and connections. Always wear
safety glasses or a face shield, along with gloves and BLUE HOSE
protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on
your skin, rinse with water immediately.
110 V
ELECTRICAL
OUTLET
• Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result AIR PURGE SHOP
VALVE AIR LINE
in burns and other serious injuries.
• Always wear eye protection and protective 3. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON; the green
clothing, and follow this procedure. indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Wait
1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating
temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use
1. Check the fluid in the cooler cleaner tank. (The fluid when the temperature gauge reads 140 ° to 150 °F.)
level should be 4.5 inches from the top of the filler
neck.) Adjust the level if needed; do not overfill. NOTE: If the red indicator above the HEAT toggle
Use only Acura ATF-Z1; do not use any additives. switch comes on, the fluid level in the tank is too
＊０１ low for the tank heater to work (see step 1 of this
FILTER/BREATHER procedure).
TUBE
TANK
FILLER 4. Select the appropriate pair of fittings, and attach
NECK them to the radiator, to the hoses, or to the banjo
bolts for flow through the ATF cooler cleaner.
TO HOSE
＊０３
TO BANJO BOLT
4.5 inches TO RADIATOR
VEHICLE
COOLER CLEANER
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-281
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４０００１３０１１ＬＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:06 61TL2000_140_0284
ATF Cooler Cleaning (cont’d)

5. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the 12. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the
line that normally goes to the external filter on the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running,
transmission). open and close the air purge valve periodically.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the
6. Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. 5-minute cleaning period, leave the air purge valve
open.
7. Connect a shop air hose (regulated to 100 to
125 psi) to the air purge valve. NOTE: While the pump is running with the air
purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming
from the filler/breather tube vents.
The quick-connect fitting has a one-way
check valve to keep ATF from entering your 13. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR
shop’s air system. Do not remove or replace toggle switch to OFF. Leave the air purge valve
the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and
the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if hoses of residual ATF, then close the valve.
your coupler is not compatible.
14. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF
8. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON; the green cooler lines.
indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Let the
pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, 15. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other.
open and close the air purge valve periodically to
cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. 16. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the Disconnect and stow the coupler if used.
5-minute cleaning period, leave the air purge valve
open. 17. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF
cooler inlet and outlet lines.
NOTE: While the pump is running with the air
purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming 18. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet.
from the filler/breather tube vents.
＊０４ Tool Maintenance
Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner

working properly:
• Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters

once a year or when you notice a restriction in the
OPEN ATF flow.
• Check the level and condition of the fluid in the tank
before each use.
• Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty.
＊０５
FILLER CAP
CLOSED
9. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR

toggle switch to OFF; the green indicator goes off.
Leave the air purge valve open for at least
15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual
ATF, then close the valve.
HEATER
10. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF
cooler. Now connect the red hose to the cooler inlet MAGNETIC
line. NONBYPASS
TANK SPIN-ON FILTER
11. Now connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line.
14-282 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:06 61TL2000_140_0285
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement

Exploded View
＊０１
B
D
C
J
N
E
G H
I
M F
K
Bottom view
NOTE: When installing the hose clamps, make sure not to interfere to the surrounding parts.
1. Install the ATF cooler hoses over the ATF cooler lines with the clips at appropriate points in reference to the
following list. Align the pink paint mark (J) to the upside, and the white paint mark (K) to the downside.
Point Distance from Hose End to Clip (L) Hose End Contact Point
A 6−8 mm (0.24−0.31 in.) ATF Filter
B 6−8 mm (0.24−0.31 in.) Bulge
C
D
E
F
G
H 2−4 mm (0.08−0.16 in.) Bulge
I
2. Secure the ATF cooler hose with the clamp (M) at the pink paint line (N).
3. Refill the transmission with ATF to the proper level (see page 14-255).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-283
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４０００１３０１２ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:07 61TL2000_140_0286
ATF Filter Replacement

NOTE: The ATF filter is not a scheduled maintenance 6. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF
item. Replace the filter only if it is leaking, or filter (B).
contaminated, or when the transmission is being ＊０３
6 x 1.0 mm
overhauled or replaced with a remanufactured unit. 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking C 8.7 lbf·ft)
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of
A
＊０１
B
3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the 7. Remove the ATF filter holder (C), and remove the
transmission fluid (ATF). ATF filter.
＊０２
A 8. Install a new ATF filter, and secure it with its holder
18 x 1.5 mm and bolt.
49 N·m
9. Install the ATF cooler hoses to the ATF filter, and
secure the ATF cooler hoses with the clips
(see page 14-283).
B
Replace.

(B).
14-284 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４０００１３０１５ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:07 61TL2000_140_0287
10. Install the engine undercover.

＊０４
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
12. Refill the transmission with ATF to the proper level

(see page 14-255).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-285

08/04/09 12:00:07 61TL2000_140_0288
Shift Lever Removal

1. Remove the center console (see page 20-113). 5. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A)
counterclockwise (B) until it stops, and push the
2. Move the shift lever to R. retainer lock (C) into the socket holder retainer to
lock the retainer.
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. ＊０３
＊０１ A
6. Slide (A) the socket holder (B) to remove the shift

4. Unlock the retainer (A). cable (C) from the shift cable bracket (D). Do not
＊０２ remove the shift cable by pulling the shift cable
guide (E).
＊０４
D
C
A
B E
14-286 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１４１２２８２ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:08 61TL2000_140_0289
7. Disconnect the shift lever 6P connector (A), and

remove the shift lever 6P connector from the shift
lever bracket base (B).
＊０５
B
C
C
8. Remove the shift lever mounting bolts (C), then

remove the shift lever assembly (D).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-287

08/04/09 12:00:08 61TL2000_140_0290
Shift Lever Installation

1. Install the shift lever assembly (A) while aligning 4. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it.
the pins (B) with the positioning hole (C) of the A/T Pull the shift cable back one step from the P
gear position indicator panel base. position so that the shift position is in R. Do not
＊０１ hold the shift cable guide (B) to adjust the shift
C cable.
＊０２
A
B
A
B
D 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that

the R position indicator comes on.
＊０３
E
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
2. Connect the shift lever 6P connector (D).
3. Install the shift lever 6P connector on the shift lever

bracket base (E).
14-288 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１４１２２８２ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:08 61TL2000_140_0291
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Align the clearance (A) between the socket holder
(B) and the socket holder retainer (C) with the
7. Place the shift lever in R, then insert a 6.0 mm opening (D) in the shift cable bracket (E), then slide
(0.24 in.) pin (A) into the positioning hole (B) on the the holder into the bracket while installing the shift
shift lever positioning guide, and into the cable end (F) over the mounting stud (G) by
positioning hole on the shift lever bracket. Use only aligning its square hole with the square fitting (H) at
a 6.0 mm pin with no burrs. the bottom of the stud. Do not install the shift cable
＊０４ by holding the shift cable guide (I).
NOTE: When the socket holder is installed in the

shift cable bracket, the retainer lock is unhinged
and releases the holder retainer lock, then the
holder retainer returns under spring force to secure
the shift cable.
＊０５
G
H
B
A
D
A
B
C I
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-289

08/04/09 12:00:09 61TL2000_140_0292
Shift Lever Installation (cont’d)

9. Push the retainer lock (A) fully to lock the socket 12. Install and tighten the nut (A) on the shift cable end.
holder retainer (B), and make sure that the retainer ＊０８
lock fits into the hinged-joint (C). If the retainer lock B
does not fit with the edge of the hinged-joint, rotate
the holder retainer counterclockwise while pushing
the retainer lock until it locks.
＊０６
A
8 x 1.25 mm
C A 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
13. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (B) that was
installed to hold the shift lever.
B 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Move the shift

lever to each position, and check that the A/T gear
position indicator follows the transmission range
A switch.
15. Shift the shift lever to P, and check that the shift
10. Check that the shift cable end is properly installed lock works properly. Push the shift lock release, and
on the mounting stud. check that the shift lever releases, and also check
＊０７ that the shift lever locks when it is shifted back to P.
Improperly installed:
Shift cable
16. Install the center console (see page 20-113).
end positions
out of the
mounting stud.
Shift cable end

rides on the
bottom of the
mounting stud.
Properly installed:
11. If the cable end is out of position on the mounting

stud, remove the shift cable from the bracket, and
reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable
end on the mounting stud while the shift cable is on
the bracket.
If the shift cable end rides on the bottom of the
mounting stud, rotate the stud and align the square
fitting with the hole.
14-290 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:09 61TL2000_140_0293
Shift Lever Knob Replacement

1. Grasp the shift lever boot ring, and slip it out of the 2. Wrap the end of a flat-tip screwdriver with tape, pry
shift lever knob. the shift lever knob cover locks (A), and remove the
＊０１ shift lever knob cover (B).
＊０２
B
D
A
C
5 x 0.8 mm
2.5 N·m
E (0.25 kgf·m,
1.8 lbf·ft)
Apply non-hardening
thread lock sealant.
3. Remove the screws (C), and remove the shift lever

knob (D).
4. Apply silicone grease to the top (D) of the shift lever

rod.
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on

hands or gloves.
5. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the

screw threads.
6. Install a new shift lever knob on the shift lever, and

secure it with the screws.
7. Install the shift lever knob cover on the shift lever

knob.
8. Slide the shift lever boot ring over the shift lever
knob until it snaps on.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-291
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１４１２２８７ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:09 61TL2000_140_0294
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly

NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially if you
have silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
＊０１
SCREWS
5 x 0.8 mm
2.5 N·m (0.25 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)
Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant.
SHIFT LEVER SHIFT LEVER ROD

SHIFT LEVER KNOB KNOB COVER
SILICONE GREASE
SHIFT LOCK SHIFT LOCK RELEASE
RELEASE SPRING
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE LID
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE SHAFT
A/T GEAR POSITION HARNESS WIRE TIE
INDICATOR
PANEL
PARK PIN SWITCH
SHIFT LEVER/ SILICONE GREASE

SHIFT LEVER HARNESS WIRE TIE
POSITIONING GUIDE/
SHIFT LEVER
SHIFT LEVER BRACKET ASSEMBLY
BOOT SCREW
0.4 N·m
(0.04 kgf·m, 0.29 lbf·ft)
Apply non-hardening
SHIFT LOCK STOP
A/T GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT BULB SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
PLUNGER
SPRING
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
SILICONE GREASE PLUNGER
A/T GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR
PANEL BASE 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) SHIFT LEVER
BRACKET
BASE
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
14-292 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１４１２２８２ＭＦＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:00:10 61TL2000_140_0295
Shift Lever Boot and A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Base Replacement
1. Remove the shift lever assembly (see page 14-286). 5. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel (A),
from the A/T gear position indicator panel base (B).
2. Remove the shift lever knob (see page 14-291). ＊０２
A
3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light
socket (A) from the A/T gear position indicator
panel base (B).
＊０１
6. Release the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever boot

using a screwdriver.
＊０３
A A
4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel base

from the shift lever bracket (C).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-293
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１４１２２８ＣＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:10 61TL2000_140_0296
Shift Lever Boot and A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Base Replacement
(cont’d)
7. Replace the shift lever boot (A) or the A/T gear 10. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel base
position indicator panel base (B). (A) on the shift lever bracket (B).
＊０４
NOTE: Take care not to pinch the harness.
＊０５
8. Install the shift lever boot on the A/T gear position B

indicator panel base.
9. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel. C
11. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light

socket (C) in the A/T gear position indicator panel
base.
12. Route the A/T gear position indicator panel light

harness as shown. Take the slack out of the
harness, and secure the harness at the guide.
13. Install the shift lever knob (see page 14-291).
14. Install the shift lever assembly (see page 14-288).
14-294 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:11 61TL2000_140_0297
Shift Cable Replacement

1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking 6. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A)
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of counterclockwise (B) until it stops, and push the
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. retainer lock (C) into the socket holder retainer to
lock the retainer.
2. Remove the center console (see page 20-113). ＊０３
A
3. Move the shift lever to R.
B
4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end.
＊０１

cable (C) from the shift cable bracket (D).
Do not remove the shift cable by pulling the shift
cable guide (E).
＊０４
5. Unlock the retainer (A). D
＊０２
C
A
A
B E
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-295
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１４１２２８１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:11 61TL2000_140_0298
Shift Cable Replacement (cont’d)

8. Remove the shift cable cover (A). 10. Remove the heat shield.
＊０５＊０６
B
E
C
F
D
11. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable bracket

A (A).
＊０７
9. Remove the spring clip (B) and the control pin (C),
and separate the shift cable end (D) from the
selector control lever (E). Remove the shift cable
bracket (F).
D
6 x 1.0 mm C
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
B
12. Remove the shift cable grommet (B), and pull out
the shift cable (C).
13. Insert a new shift cable through the grommet hole

(D), and install the grommet in its hole. Do not bend
the shift cable excessively.
14. Secure the shift cable grommet.
14-296 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:11 61TL2000_140_0299
15. Secure the shift cable bracket with the bolt.
16. Apply molybdenum grease to the hole in the

bushing (A) in the shift cable end (B). Attach the
shift cable end to the selector control lever (C), then
insert the control pin (D) into the selector control
lever hole through the shift cable end, and secure
the control pin with the spring clip (E). Do not bend
the shift cable excessively.
＊０８
Properly installed: C
E E
A
B
G
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm (1.0 kgf·m,
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 7.2 lbf·ft)
17. Install the shift cable bracket (F).
18. Install the shift cable cover (G).
19. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust
the shift cable (see page 14-298).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-297

08/04/09 12:00:12 61TL2000_140_0300
Shift Cable Adjustment

1. Remove the center console (see page 20-113). 5. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A)
counterclockwise (B) until it stops, and push the
2. Move the shift lever to R. retainer lock (C) into the socket holder retainer to
lock the retainer.
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. ＊０３
＊０１ A

4. Unlock the retainer (A). cable (C) from the shift cable bracket (D). Do not
＊０２ remove the shift cable by pulling the shift cable
guide (E).
＊０４
D
C
A
B E
14-298 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１４１２２８１ＭＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:41 61TL2000_140_0301
7. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it. 10. Place the shift lever in R, then insert a 6.0 mm
Pull the shift cable back one step from the P (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the positioning hole (B) on the
position so that the shift position is in R. Do not shift lever positioning guide, and into the
hold the shift cable guide (B) to adjust the shift positioning hole on the shift lever bracket. Use only
cable. a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin with no burrs.
＊０５＊０７
B
A
B
A
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that
the R position indicator comes on.
＊０６
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-299

08/04/09 12:00:42 61TL2000_140_0302
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont’d)

11. Check that the shift lever is secured in R. 13. Push the retainer lock (A) fully to lock the socket
holder retainer (B), and make sure that the retainer
12. Align the clearance (A) between the socket holder lock fits into the hinged-joint (C). If the retainer lock
(B) and the socket holder retainer (C) with the does not fit with the edge of the hinged-joint, rotate
opening (D) in the shift cable bracket (E), then slide the holder retainer counterclockwise while pushing
the holder into the bracket while installing the shift the retainer lock until it locks.
cable end (F) over the mounting stud (G) by ＊０９
aligning its square hole with the square fitting (H) at
the bottom of the stud. Do not install the shift cable
by holding the shift cable guide (I).
NOTE: When the socket holder is installed in the

shift cable bracket, the retainer lock is unhinged
and releases the holder retainer lock, then the C A
holder retainer returns under spring force to secure
the shift cable.
＊０８
G
B
F
H A
14. Check that the shift cable end is properly installed

E on the mounting stud.
＊１０
Improperly installed:
D Shift cable
A end positions
out of the
mounting stud.
Shift cable end

rides on the
B bottom of the
C I mounting stud.
Properly installed:
15. If the cable end is out of position on the mounting

stud, remove the shift cable from the bracket, and
reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable
end on the mounting stud while the shift cable is on
the bracket.
If the shift cable end rides on the bottom of the
mounting stud, rotate the stud and align the square
fitting with the hole.
14-300 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:42 61TL2000_140_0303
16. Install and tighten the nut (A) on the shift cable end.
＊１１
B
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
17. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (B) that was
installed to hold the shift lever.
18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Move the shift

lever to each position, and check that the A/T gear
position indicator follows the transmission range
switch.
19. Shift the shift lever to P, and check that the shift
lock works properly. Push the shift lock release, and
check that the shift lever releases, and also check
that the shift lever locks when it is shifted back to P.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-301

08/04/09 12:00:44 61TL2000_140_0304
A/T Gear Position Indicator
＊０１
A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

SHIFT INDICATOR, M INDICATOR
F-CAN Communication Circuit
Troubleshooting, page 11-199
Gauge Control Module Self-diagnostic Function
Indicator Drive Circuit Check, page 22-293
Communication Line Check, page 22-294
PADDLE SHIFTER −
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
Circuit Troubleshooting, A/T GEAR POSITION
page 14-310 INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT HARNESS
Illumination Circuit Replacement, page 14-318
Troubleshooting,
page 14-314 PADDLE SHIFTER ＋ (UPSHIFT SWITCH)
Replacement, Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-308
page 14-317 DRIVER’S Illumination Circuit
DATA LINK UNDER-DASH Troubleshooting, page 14-312
CONNECTOR (DLC) FUSE/RELAY BOX Replacement, page 14-316
＊０２
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Test, page 14-304
14-302 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:45 61TL2000_140_0305
Circuit Diagram
＊０１
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH
IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A) No. 3-1 (50 A) BAT IG1 C5 No. 9 (20 A) F2
WHT BLU YEL
No. 10 (10 A) F12
WHT/RED
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE IG1 HOT in ON (II) No. 5 (7.5 A)
and START (III) P20
15
BRN
P
A/T POWERTRAIN CONTROL
GEAR R MODULE (PCM)
POSITION PG1 B10
INDICATOR N BLK
DRIVE
CIRCUIT D PG2 B1
BLK
S LG1 C44
BRN/YEL
A/T DIMMING CIRCUIT
CAN 2 LG2 C48
CONTROLLER RED BRN/YEL
SHIFT 5V
INDICATOR 12 V
DRIVE VB SOL A1 G101
CIRCUIT WHT/RED
CAN H 22 A3 CAN H IG1 C10 9
WHT BLK/RED YEL
F-CAN
TRANSCEIVER CAN L 21 A4 CAN L
RED ATP RVS B23
PG 1 RED/WHT
SG 17 ATP FWD B29
BLU/YEL
BRN BLK ATP S B16
RED
6 ATP D B22
WHT YEL/GRN
DATA LINK 14 G501 G502
CONNECTOR RED ATP N B13
(DLC) 9 A32 SCS RED/BLK
ORN ATP R B15
WHT
4 ATP P B14
A/T GEAR RED/BLK RED BLU/BLK
POSITION
INDICATOR PASSENGER’S 9 15
3 UNDER-DASH
PANEL LIGHT RED/BLK GRY 14
FUSE/RELAY BOX
PADDLE SHIFTER ＋ No. 6 (7.5 A)
(UPSHIFT SWITCH) 16
4 17
BLK BLK
13 11 BLK
3 14 14 8 A47 SUPP BLU/
BLK WHT LT BLU LT BLU BLK
BLU/ WHT
2 WHT G101
GRN RED 7 5 4 9 3 8 6 10 1
C106
RED/ 1 GRN/ BLK/ RED/ WHT/
LT GRN BLU
BLK RED BLU BLK RED
RIGHT GRY/ BLU/ WHT PNK YEL/ BLK
RED WHT RED
PADDLE SHIFTER − 1 2 8 3 9 4 7 6 5
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
4 12 2 ST N D FWD RVS E
BLK BLK BRN R S
A48 SDNP P
3 15 15 G501 7
BLK ORN PUR LT GRN
2 4 9
GRN RED RED
RED/ 1 GRN/ 3 10
GRY
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
BLK RED PASSENGER’S REVERSE STARTER
LEFT CABLE UNDER-DASH RELAY CUT RELAY
REEL FUSE/RELAY
BOX No. 6 (7.5 A)
RED
A □ (49P) B △ (49P) C ○ (49P)

-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-303
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７０００００ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:46 61TL2000_140_0306
Transmission Range Switch Test

1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking 5. Check for continuity between the terminals at the
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of harness connector. There should be continuity
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. between the terminals in the following table for
each switch position.
Transmission Range Switch Subharness
3. Disconnect the transmission range switch Connector
subharness connector (A), then remove the ＊０２
connector from the clamp bracket (B). Position/Connector Terminal/Signal Connections
＊０１ 3 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 4 5
D
ATP ATP
B GND − D R P FWD NP S N ATP
RVS
P
R
N
D
S
6. Transmission range switch test is completed if the

test results are OK, go to step 13.
If there is no continuity between any terminals, go
A to step 7.
C
7. Remove the transmission range switch cover.
＊０３
4. Remove the harness clamps (C) from the clamp

bracket (D).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
14-304 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７５９８１１ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:46 61TL2000_140_0307
8. Disconnect the transmission range switch 11. Remove the transmission range switch, and check
connector. the end of the selector control shaft (A).
＊０４
Selector Control Shaft Specifications:
Width (B): 6.1−6.2 mm (0.240−0.244 in.)
End Gap (C): 1.8−2.0 mm (0.07−0.08 in.)
＊０６
A
C
9. Check for continuity between the terminals at the

transmission range switch connector. There should B
be continuity between the terminals in the
following table for each transmission range switch 12. If the measurement of the selector control shaft
position. end is within the standard, replace the transmission
range switch (see page 14-306).
Transmission Range Switch Connector If the measurement is out of the standard, repair
＊０５ the selector control shaft end, and recheck the
Position/Connector Terminal/Signal Connections transmission range switch continuity.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean
ATP ATP ATP D
NP
P N S GND RVS FWD R − or repair if necessary, then connect the connector
P securely.
R 14. Install the harness clamps to the clamp bracket.

N
D
S
10. If the transmission range switch continuity check is

OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch
subharness, then go to step 13.
If there is no continuity between any terminals, go
to step 11.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-305

08/04/09 12:00:46 61TL2000_140_0308
Transmission Range Switch Replacement

1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of position. If necessary, move the shift lever from P
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. to N.
2. Remove the left front wheel. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to
adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft
3. Move the shift lever to N. tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty
signal or position due to play between the selector
4. Remove the transmission range switch cover. control shaft and the transmission range switch.
＊０１＊０３
7. Set a new transmission range switch (A) to the N

position. Align the cutouts (B) on the rotary-frame
with the neutral positioning cutouts (C) on the
transmission range switch. Then put a 2.0 mm
5. Disconnect the transmission range switch (0.08 in.) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to
connector (A), then remove the transmission range hold the transmission range switch in the N
switch (B). position.
＊０２
NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) feeler
gauge blade or equivalent to hold the transmission
range switch in the N position.
＊０４
D
A
A B
14-306 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７５９８１１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:47 61TL2000_140_0309
8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on 10. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the repair if necessary, then connect the transmission
N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade (C). range switch connector securely.
＊０５
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Move the shift
lever through all positions, and check the
transmission range switch synchronization with the
A/T gear position indicator.
12. Check that the engine will start with the shift lever
in P and N, and will not start in any other shift lever
position.
C 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the

shift lever is in R.
A
14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start
B
the engine, and check the shift lever operation.
15. Install the transmission range switch cover (A).

＊０７
9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch

while you continue to hold the N position. Do not
move the transmission range switch when A
tightening the bolts.Then remove the feeler gauge.
＊０６
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm 16. Install the left front wheel.

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-307

08/04/09 12:00:47 61TL2000_140_0310
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Circuit Troubleshooting

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Check for continuity between paddle shifter ＋
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the (upshift switch) connector terminals No. 3 and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before No. 4 when pressing the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift
doing repair or service. switch) and when the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift
switch) is released.
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-6). ＊０２
PADDLE SHIFTER ＋
2. Check for continuity between cable reel subharness (UPSHIFT SWITCH) CONNECTOR
20P connector terminals No. 14 and No. 12 when
pressing the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) and
when the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) is
released.
SUPP (BLK) GND (BLK)
＊０１
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS 20P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK) SUPP (WHT)

Is there continuity when pressing the paddle
shif ter ＋ ( upshif t switch) and no continuity when
the paddle shif ter ＋ ( upshif t switch) is released?
YES−Replace the cable reel subharness.

NO−Replace the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch)
(see page 14-316).
shif ter ＋ ( upshif t switch) and no continuity when 5. Remove the cable reel (see page 24-163).
the paddle shif ter ＋ ( upshif t switch) is released?
6. Check for continuity between cable reel 20P
YES−Go to step 5. connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
＊０３
NO−Go to step 3. CABLE REEL 20P CONNECTOR
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch)

GND (BRN)
connector.
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Repair open in the wire between cable reel

20P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground
(G501), or repair poor body ground (G501).
14-308 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７４４８５２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:47 61TL2000_140_0311
7. Check for continuity between cable reel 20P 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
＊０４ 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
CABLE REEL 20P CONNECTOR
12. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
13. Connect cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 14

＊０６
SUPP (LT BLU)
Wire side of female terminals SUPP (LT BLU)

JUMPER WIRE
YES−Repair short to body ground in wire between

cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 14 and PCM Wire side of female terminals
connector terminal A47.
NO−Go to step 8. 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector

8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and shift to S. ＊０７
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
9. Measure the voltage between cable reel 20P
＊０５
SUPP (LT BLU)

GND (BRN)
SUPP (LT BLU) Terminal side of female terminals
YES−Check for loose or poor connections at PCM
connector terminal A47. If the connection is OK,
Is there battery voltage? substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-8) and
recheck.
YES−Replace the cable reel (see page 24-163).
NO−Go to step 10. connector terminal A47 and the cable reel 20P
connector.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-309

08/04/09 12:00:48 61TL2000_140_0312
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Circuit Troubleshooting

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Check for continuity between paddle shifter −
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the (downshift switch) connector terminals No. 3 and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before No. 4 when pressing the paddle shifter −
doing repair or service. (downshift switch) and when the paddle shifter −
(downshift switch) is released.
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-6). ＊０９
PADDLE SHIFTER −
2. Check for continuity between cable reel subharness (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) CONNECTOR
20P connector terminals No. 15 and No. 12 when
pressing the paddle shifter − (downshift switch)
and when the paddle shifter − (downshift switch)
is released.
SDNP (BLK) GND (BLK)
＊０８
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS 20P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK) SDNP (ORN)

shif ter − ( downshif t switch) and no continuity
when the paddle shif ter − ( downshif t switch) is
released?
Wire side of female terminals YES−Replace the cable reel subharness.
NO−Replace the paddle shifter − (downshift

Is there continuity when pressing the paddle switch) (see page 14-317).
shif ter − ( downshif t switch) and no continuity
when the paddle shif ter − ( downshif t switch) is 5. Remove the cable reel (see page 24-163).
released?
6. Check for continuity between cable reel 20P
YES−Go to step 5. connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
＊１０
NO−Go to step 3. CABLE REEL 20P CONNECTOR
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) GND (BRN)

connector.
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Repair open in the wire between cable reel

20P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground
(G501), or repair poor body ground (G501).
14-310 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７４４８５２ＦＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:00:48 61TL2000_140_0313
7. Check for continuity between cable reel 20P 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
＊１１ 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
13. Connect cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 15

＊１３
SDNP (PUR)
Wire side of female terminals SDNP (PUR)

JUMPER WIRE

between cable reel 20P connector terminal No. 15 Wire side of female terminals
and PCM connector terminal A48.
NO−Go to step 8. 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector

8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and shift to S. ＊１４
9. Measure the voltage between cable reel 20P
＊１２
SDNP (LT GRN)

GND (BRN)
SDNP (PUR) Terminal side of female terminals
YES−Check for loose or poor connections at PCM
connector terminal A48. If the connection is OK,
Is there battery voltage? substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-8) and
recheck.
YES−Replace the cable reel (see page 24-163).
NO−Go to step 10. connector terminal A48 and the cable reel 20P
connector.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-311

08/04/09 12:00:48 61TL2000_140_0314
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Illumination Circuit Troubleshooting

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Check the No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger’s
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the under-dash fuse/relay box.
doing repair or service. Is the f use OK ?
1. Remove the driver’s airbag (see page 24-150). YES−Repair open in the wire between paddle
shifter ＋ (upshift switch) connector terminal No. 1
2. Disconnect the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) and the passenger’s under-dash fuse/relay box.
connector.
NO−Go to step 7.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and turn the
combination light switch to the SMALL (PARKING) 7. Check for continuity between paddle shifter ＋
position. (upshift switch) connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
4. Measure the voltage between paddle shifter ＋＊０２
(upshift switch) connector terminal No. 1 and body PADDLE SHIFTER ＋
ground. (UPSHIFT SWITCH) CONNECTOR
＊０１
PADDLE SHIFTER ＋
(UPSHIFT SWITCH) CONNECTOR
ILL＋ (GRN/RED)
ILL＋ (GRN/RED)

Is there battery voltage? between paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch)
connector terminal No. 1 and the passenger’s
YES−Go to step 8. under-dash fuse/relay box.
NO−Go to step 5. NO−Install a new No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in the

passenger’s under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and turn the step 4.
combination light switch to the OFF position.
14-312 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７４４８５ＡＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:48 61TL2000_140_0315
8. Disconnect the gauge control module connector.
9. Check for continuity between paddle shifter ＋

(upshift switch) connector terminal No. 2 and
gauge control module connector terminal No. 2.
＊０３
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR
ILL− (RED)
ILL− (RED)
PADDLE SHIFTER ＋
(UPSHIFT SWITCH) CONNECTOR
YES−Check the illumination control circuit in the

gauge control module self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-292). If the test results are OK, replace
the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) (see page
14-316).
NO−Repair open in the wire between paddle

shifter ＋ (upshift switch) connector terminal No. 2
and the gauge control module.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-313

08/04/09 12:00:49 61TL2000_140_0316
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Illumination Circuit Troubleshooting

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Check the No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger’s
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the under-dash fuse/relay box.
doing repair or service. Is the f use OK ?
1. Remove the driver’s airbag (see page 24-150). YES−Repair open in the wire between paddle
shifter − (downshift switch) connector terminal
2. Disconnect the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) No. 1 and the passenger’s under-dash fuse/relay
connector. box.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and turn the NO−Go to step 7.
combination light switch to the SMALL (PARKING)
position. 7. Check for continuity between paddle shifter −
(downshift switch) connector terminal No. 1 and
4. Measure the voltage between paddle shifter − body ground.
(downshift switch) connector terminal No. 1 and ＊０２
body ground. PADDLE SHIFTER −
＊０１ (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) CONNECTOR
PADDLE SHIFTER −
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) CONNECTOR
ILL＋ (GRN/RED)
ILL＋ (GRN/RED)

Is there battery voltage? YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire

between paddle shifter − (downshift switch)
YES−Go to step 8. connector terminal No. 1 and the passenger’s
NO−Go to step 5.
NO−Install a new No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in the
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and turn the passenger’s under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to
combination light switch to the OFF position. step 4.
14-314 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７４４８５９ＦＡＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:00:49 61TL2000_140_0317
8. Disconnect the gauge control module connector.
9. Check for continuity between paddle shifter −

(downshift switch) connector terminal No. 2 and
gauge control module connector terminal No. 2.
＊０３
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR
ILL− (RED)
ILL− (RED)
PADDLE SHIFTER −
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) CONNECTOR
YES−Check the illumination control circuit in the

gauge control module self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-292). If the test results are OK, replace
the paddle shifter − (downshift switch) (see page
14-317).
NO−Repair open in the wire between paddle

shifter − (downshift switch) connector terminal
No. 2 and the gauge control module.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-315

08/04/09 12:00:49 61TL2000_140_0318
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Replacement

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 7. Disconnect the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch)
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the connector. Remove the screw (A) securing the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) (B).
doing repair or service. ＊０２
C
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-6). 2.5 N·m
(0.25 kgf·m,
1.8 lbf·ft)
2. Remove the two screws (A) securing the steering Replace.
wheel rear cover (B).
＊０１
B
C
A
B
8. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the TORX bolt (C),

then remove the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch).
G 9. Install the new paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) on

the steering wheel.
10. Connect the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch)

A
connector securely, and install the connector in the
connector holder.
11. Tighten a new TORX bolt to the specified torque.
12. Connect the connectors to the steering wheel trim.

Install the steering wheel trim with the screws and
D the snap-fit portions.
G
13. Install the steering wheel rear cover with the

screws.
E 14. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-8).

F
3. Release the locks (C) of the steering wheel rear

cover, and remove the steering wheel rear cover.
4. Remove the four screws (D) securing the steering

wheel trim (E).
5. Pull the snap-fit portions (F) (3) up carefully, then

remove the steering wheel trim.
6. Disconnect the connectors (G) from the steering

wheel trim.
14-316 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７４４８５１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:50 61TL2000_140_0319
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Replacement

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 7. Disconnect the paddle shifter − (downshift switch)
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the connector. Remove the screw (A) securing the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before paddle shifter − (downshift switch) (B).
doing repair or service. ＊０４
A B
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-6).
2. Remove the two screws (A) securing the steering

wheel rear cover (B).
＊０３
B
C
C
2.5 N·m
(0.25 kgf·m,
1.8 lbf·ft)
Replace.
8. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the TORX bolt (C),

then remove the paddle shifter − (downshift
switch).
G
9. Install the new paddle shifter − (downshift switch)
on the steering wheel.
A
10. Connect the paddle shifter − (downshift switch)
connector securely, and install the connector in the
connector holder.
11. Tighten a new TORX bolt to the specified torque.
12. Connect the connectors to the steering wheel trim.

D Install the steering wheel trim with the screws and
G
the snap-fit portions.
13. Install the steering wheel rear cover with the

screws.
E
F
14. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-8).
3. Release the locks (C) of the steering wheel rear

cover, and remove the steering wheel rear cover.
4. Remove the four screws (D) securing the steering

wheel trim (E).
5. Pull the snap-fit portions (F) (3) up carefully, then

remove the steering wheel trim.
6. Disconnect the connectors (G) from the steering

wheel trim.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-317
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７４４８５１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:00:50 61TL2000_140_0320
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Light Harness Replacement

NOTE: The A/T gear position indicator panel light 6. Remove the harness wire ties (A) and the light bulb
harness, the park pin switch, and the shift lock solenoid (B), and remove the park pin switch (C).
harness are not available separately. Replace the A/T ＊０２
B
gear position indicator panel light harness, the park pin
switch, and the shift lock solenoid harness as a set. A
1. Remove the shift lever assembly (see page 14-286).

D
2. Remove the shift lever knob (see page 14-291).

(see page 14-293). C
4. Release the lock (A) of the shift lock release (B),

then remove the shift lock release and the release
spring (C).
＊０１ A
B 0.4 N·m
(0.04 kgf·m,
0.29 lbf·ft)
Apply non-hardening
A 7. Replace the A/T gear position indicator panel light

harness (D).

screw threads. Install the new park pin switch, and
C
secure the park pin switch with the screw.
5. Remove the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-331).
14-318 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７１２２４９ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:50 61TL2000_140_0321
9. Install the shift lock release spring (A) in the shift 12. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel base
lock release (B). (A) on the shift lever bracket (B), and connect the
＊０３ shift lock solenoid connector to the shift lock
solenoid. Then install the shift lock solenoid
(see page 14-331).
NOTE: Take care not to pinch the harnesses.

＊０５
B
B
10. Install the shift lock release and the release spring
on the shift lock release shaft end.
11. Make sure that the release spring end (A) is C

installed in the shift lock release (B), and the other
end (C) of the release spring is on the stop (D). B
＊０４
B
C
A
D 13. Route the harnesses as shown. Take the slack out

of the harnesses, and secure the harnesses with the
harness wire ties (C).
C 14. Install the light bulb in the bulb socket (D), then
install the bulb socket in the A/T gear position
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-319

08/04/09 12:00:50 61TL2000_140_0322
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Replacement

3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel (A)

from the A/T gear position indicator panel base (B),
and replace it with new one.
＊０１
A
4. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel.
14-320 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０７１２２４７ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:53 61TL2000_140_0323
A/T Interlock System
＊０１
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-328
Key Interlock Solenoid Test, page 14-330
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Shift Lock System Circuit
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH Troubleshooting, page 14-323
FUSE/RELAY BOX
DATA LINK CONNECTOR

(DLC)
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID PARK PIN SWITCH
Shift Lock System Circuit Key Interlock System Circuit
Troubleshooting, page 14-323 Troubleshooting, page 14-328
Shift Lock Stop, Shift Lock Stop Cushion
Shift Lock Release, Release Spring,
Release Shaft Replacement, page 14-333
＊０２
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-321
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４３６４０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:53 61TL2000_140_0324
Circuit Diagram
＊０１
UNDER-HOOD
BATTERY No. 9 (20 A)
No. 1 (100 A) No. 3-1 (50 A) BAT IG1 C5 F2
WHT BLU
No. 10 (10 A) F12
No. 12 (15 A)
IG1 HOT in ON (II) No. 5 (7.5 A) P20
and START (III) 5 1
BRN RED
RED/BLU POWERTRAIN CONTROL SLS A28 6 2

MODULE (PCM) PNK BLK
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL SHIFT LOCK
POSITION (APP) SOLENOID
SENSOR
1 A18 APSA 12 V
YEL/BLK
2 A36 SG4 VB SOL A1
BLU/RED 5V WHT/RED
3 A26 VCC4 IG1 C10 9
RED/BLK BLK/RED YEL
4 A19 APSB ATP RVS B23
BLK RED/WHT
ATP FWD B29
5 A35 SG5 BLU/YEL
GRN ATP S B16
RED
6 A25 VCC5 ATP D B22
BRN/WHT YEL/GRN
1
BRAKE
PEDAL ATP N B13
POSITION RED/BLK
ATP R B15
2 SWITCH WHT
A42 BK SW ATP P B14
LT GRN BLU/BLK
9 15
B10 PG1 14
BLK
16
B1 PG2
BLK 23 17
C44 LG1 13 11 BLK
BRN/YEL BLU/
C48 LG2 BLK
BRN/YEL BLU/
WHT WHT
G101
7 5 4 9 3 8 6 10 1
C106
GRY/ BLK/ RED/ BLU WHT/
G101 RED RED
BLU BLK
GRN LT GRN BLU/ WHT PNK YEL/ BLK
WHT RED
1 2 8 3 9 4 7 6 5
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX ST FWD RVS E
N D
R S
F3 F4
LT GRN BK SW ATP P P
1 Q18
WHT KEY SW
KEY REVERSE
SWITCH 2 RELAY
BLK
STARTER TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

3 G501 Q14 Q13 CUT RELAY 1
BLU KEY SOL P-PIN SW WHT GRN
KEY
INTERLOCK DRIVER’S
SOLENOID 4 UNDER-DASH
PUR 2
FUSE/RELAY DRIVER’S MULTIPLEX BLK GRN
BOX No. 18 (7.5 A) INTEGRATED CONTROL
UNIT (MICU) PARK PIN
G503 SWITCH
A □ (49P) B △ (49P) C ○ (49P)

14-322 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４３６４０００００ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:00:54 61TL2000_140_0325
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the 8. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid
driver’s side of the dashboard. connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
＊０１＊０２
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
IG1 (RED)
A Is there battery voltage?
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the YES−Go to step 9.
to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page NO−Check for a blown No. 5 (7.5 A) fuse in the
11-210). driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open in the wire between the shift lock
3. Select Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the solenoid connector and the driver’s under-dash
Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift fuse/relay box.
lock solenoid operates with the HDS.
9. Shift the shift lever to P, and press the brake pedal.
Does the shif t lock solenoid work properly? Do not press the accelerator.
YES−Go to step 16. 10. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 while pressing
NO−Go to step 5. the brake pedal.
＊０３
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector

(see page 14-331). IG1 (RED) SLS (BLK)
NO−Go to step 12.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-323
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４３６４５５２０１ＦＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:00:54 61TL2000_140_0326
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

11. Release the brake pedal, and measure the voltage 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
between shift lock solenoid connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2. The shift lever must be in P. 13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
＊０４
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR 14. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

terminal A28 and shift lock solenoid connector
terminal No. 2.
IG1 (RED) SLS (BLK) ＊０５
SHIFT LOCK PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
SOLENOID CONNECTOR
SLS (BLK)
Is there battery voltage? SLS (PNK)

between PCM connector terminal A28 and the shift female terminals female terminals
lock solenoid.
NO−Check the shift lock mechanism. If the Is there continuity?

mechanism is OK, replace the shift lock solenoid
(see page 14-331). YES−Update the PCM if it does not have the least
good PCM (see page 14-8) and recheck. If the
symptom goes away with a known-good PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-234).

connector terminal A28 and the shift lock solenoid
connector.
14-324 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:54 61TL2000_140_0327
16. Monitor the Brake Switch in the Data List with the 21. Monitor the A/T P Switch in the Data List with the
HDS, and press the brake pedal. HDS with the shift lever in P.
Is the brake switch ON? Is there A/ T P Switch ON?
NO−If the brake lights come on, go to step 17. If NO−Go to step 22.
the brake lights do not work, repair the faulty brake
light circuit. 22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 23. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
20. Measure the voltage between PCM connector switch connector terminals No. 2 and No. 5.
terminal A42 and body ground while pressing the ＊０７
brake pedal and when the brake pedal is released. TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
＊０６
ATP P (BLK/BLU) GND (BLK)
BK SW (LT GRN)

Is there around battery voltage?
Is there battery voltage while pressing the brake YES−Go to step 26.
pedal, and about 0 V when the pedal is released?
NO−Go to step 27.
YES−Update the PCM if it does not have the least
software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known- 26. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
good PCM (see page 14-8) and recheck. If the 14-304).
replace the original PCM (see page 11-234). Is the transmission range switch OK ?
NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM YES−Check for poor connections and loose
connector terminal A42 and the brake pedal terminals at the transmission range switch
position switch. connector.

(see page 14-306).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-325

08/04/09 12:00:54 61TL2000_140_0328
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

terminal B14 and transmission range switch
28. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. connector terminal No. 2.
＊０９
29. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
＊０８ ATP P (BLU/BLK)
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) ATP P (BLK/BLU)
ATP P (BLU/BLK)


Is there continuity? connector terminal B14 and the transmission range
switch connector.
transmission range switch connector.
NO−Go to step 31.
14-326 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:00:55 61TL2000_140_0329
32. Check for continuity between transmission range

＊１０
GND (BLK)
YES−Update the PCM if it does not have the least

good PCM (see page 14-8) and recheck. If the
replace the original PCM (see page 11-234).
NO−Repair open in the wire between transmission

range switch connector terminal No. 5 and body
ground (G101), or repair poor body ground
(G101).
33. Check the APP SENSOR in the Data List with the
HDS. Do not press the accelerator.
Is the accelerator pedal position sensor opening

11 % or above, or the sensor voltage 1.60 V or
above?
YES−Check the APP SENSOR (see page 11-279).
NO−Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-8)

and recheck.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-327

08/04/09 12:00:55 61TL2000_140_0330
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 8. Check for continuity between shift lever 6P
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before ＊０２
doing repair or service. SHIFT LEVER 6P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I). The

shift lever must be in P.
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector. P-PIN (WHT)
3. Check if the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK

(0).
Can the ignition switch be turned to LOCK ( 0)?

YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock Is there continuity?

assembly (see page 17-15).
4. Make sure the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). between shift lever 6P connector terminal No. 1
and the driver’s MICU.
5. Move the shift lever out of P.
NO−Go to step 9.
6. Check for continuity between steering lock
assembly connector terminal No. 3 and body 9. Shift the shift lever to P.
ground.
＊０１ 10. Check for continuity between shift lever 6P
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. Do not push
the shift lever button.
＊０３
SHIFT LEVER 6P CONNECTOR
KEY SOL (BLU)
P-PIN (GRN) GND (GRN)
Is there continuity? Terminal side of male terminals

between the key interlock solenoid and the driver’s Is there continuity?
MICU.
YES−Replace the park pin switch (see page
NO−Go to step 7. 14-335).
7. Remove the shift lever assembly (see page 14-286). NO−Go to step 11.
14-328 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４３６４３６０２１ＦＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:01:25 61TL2000_140_0331
11. Disconnect driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box

connector F (33P).
13. Measure the voltage between driver’s under-dash

fuse/relay box connector F (33P) terminal No. 4 and
body ground.
＊０４
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/
RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (33P)
ATP P (GRN)
Is there about 0 V when the shif t lever is in P, and

is there battery voltage when the shif t lever is out
of P?
YES−Substitute a known-good driver’s under-dash

fuse/relay box and recheck.
NO−Repair open or short to body ground in the

wire between PCM connector terminal B14, the
transmission range switch, and the driver’s under-
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-329

08/04/09 12:01:25 61TL2000_140_0332
Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Lock Solenoid Test

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the driver’s side of the dashboard.
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before ＊０１
doing repairs or service.
1. Remove these items:
• Lower steering column cover (see page 20-132)

• Driver’s dashboard lower cover (see page
20-118)
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I).
4. Connect the positive battery terminal to steering

lock assembly connector terminal No. 4, and
connect the negative battery terminal to No. 3 A
terminal. Check that the ignition key cannot be
turned to LOCK (0). Release the battery terminals, 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the
and check that the key can be turned to the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go
LOCK (0) position and removed from the cylinder. to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page
＊０１ 11-210).
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR
3. Select Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the
Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift
lock solenoid operates with the HDS.
4. Check that the shift lever can be moved out of P

when the Shift Lock Solenoid is ON. Move the shift
lever back to P, and check that it locks with the Shift
Lock Solenoid is OFF.
5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift

Terminal side of male terminals lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when
the shift lock release is released.
5. If the key interlock solenoid works improperly, 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, go
replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock to the shift lock system troubleshooting (see page
assembly (see page 17-15). 14-323).
6. Install these items:
• Lower steering column cover (see page 20-132)

• Driver’s dashboard lower cover (see page
20-118)
14-330 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４３６４３６００１ＦＥＡＴ１０ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４３６４５５１０１ＦＥＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:01:25 61TL2000_140_0333
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement

1. Remove the shift lever assembly (see page 14-286). 3. Insert a 6 mm pin (A) into the guide hole (B), and
push the shift lock solenoid (C) out.
2. Release the lock tabs retaining the shift lock ＊０２
solenoid using thin-bladed screwdrivers. E
＊０１
F
C
A
D
B
4. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (D).
5. Replace the shift lock solenoid, the solenoid

plunger (E), and the plunger spring (F) assembly.
6. Apply silicone grease to the tip (G) of the shift lock

stop and the solenoid plunger.

hands or gloves.
7. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector.
8. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of

the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the
shift lock stop, then push the shift lock solenoid into
the shift lever securely.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-331
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４３６４５５１０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:25 61TL2000_140_0334
Shift Lock Stop, Shift Lock Stop Cushion Replacement

2. Remove the shift lock stop (A) and the stop cushion
(B) as a set.
＊０１
A
B
C
3. Apply silicone grease to the pin (C) on the shift

lever bracket, and install new shift lock stop over
the pin.

hands or gloves.
4. Install the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-331).
14-332 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４３６４５５１５１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:26 61TL2000_140_0335
Shift Lock Release, Release Spring, and Release Shaft Replacement

1. Remove the shift lever assembly (see page 14-286). 7. Install the shift lock release spring (A) in the shift
lock release (B).
2. Remove the shift lever knob (see page 14-291). ＊０２
C

(see page 14-293).

spring (C).
＊０１
B
E
F B
A A
D
C
8. Install the shift lock release shaft (C) in the shift
5. Release the lock (D) of the shift lock release shaft lever, and install the shift lock release and the
(E), and remove the release shaft (F). release spring on the release shaft end.
6. Replace the shift lock release, the release spring, or 9. Make sure that the release spring end (A) is
the release shaft. installed in the shift lock release (B), and the other
end (C) of the release spring is on the stop (D).
＊０３
B
10. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel base

(see page 14-293).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-333
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４３６４１２２８ＧＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:26 61TL2000_140_0336
Park Pin Switch Test

1. Remove the center console (see page 20-113).
2. Disconnect the shift lever 6P connector.
3. Shift the shift lever to P, and check for continuity

between connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
There should be no continuity.
＊０１
Terminal side of
male terminals
4. Shift out of P, and check for continuity between

There should be continuity.
5. If the park pin switch tests OK, go to step 6.

If the park pin switch fails the test, replace the park
pin switch (see page 14-335).
14-334 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４３６４４５４０１ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:26 61TL2000_140_0337
Park Pin Switch Replacement

NOTE: The park pin switch, the A/T gear position 6. Remove the harness wire ties (A) and the light bulb
indicator panel light harness, and the shift lock solenoid (B), and remove the park pin switch (C).
harness are not available separately. Replace the park ＊０２
B
pin switch, the A/T gear position indicator panel light
harness, and the shift lock solenoid harness as a set. A

(see page 14-293). C

spring (C).
＊０１ A
D
B 0.4 N·m
(0.04 kgf·m,
0.29 lbf·ft)
Apply non-hardening
A 7. Replace the park pin switch.

screw threads (D). Install the new park pin switch,
and secure the park pin switch with the screw.
C
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-335
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４３６４４５４０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:27 61TL2000_140_0338
Park Pin Switch Replacement (cont’d)

9. Install the shift lock release spring (A) in the shift 12. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel base
lock release (B). (A) on the shift lever bracket (B), and connect the
＊０３ shift lock solenoid connector to the shift lock
solenoid. Then install the shift lock solenoid
(see page 14-331).
NOTE: Take care not to pinch the harness.

＊０５
B
B
10. Install the shift lock release and the release spring
on the shift lock release shaft end.
11. Make sure that the release spring end (A) is C

installed in the shift lock release (B), and the other
end (C) of the release spring is on the stop (D).
＊０４
B
C
A
D 13. Route the harnesses as shown. Take the slack out

of the harnesses, and secure the harnesses with the
harness wire ties (C).
C 14. Install the light bulb in the bulb socket (D), then
install the bulb socket in the A/T gear position
14-336 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:01:27 61TL2000_140_0339
Transmission End Cover
End Cover Removal

Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101
1. Remove the ATF cooler inlet line bracket bolts (D), the ATF filter bracket bolts (E), the ATF cooler inlet line banjo
bolt (F), and the seal washers, and remove the ATF cooler line/ATF filter (G) and the filter brackets (H).
＊０１
M
Q
P
L
N
B, C
J
I
K
A
F
H
G H
E
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-337
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４２４２５１ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:28 61TL2000_140_0340
End Cover Removal (cont’d)

2. Remove the ATF cooler outlet line bracket bolt (I), 11. Cut the lock tab (A) off each shaft locknut (B) using
the ATF cooler outlet line banjo bolt (J), and the a chisel (C). Then remove the locknuts and the
sealing washers, and remove the ATF cooler outlet conical spring washers from each shaft.
line (K).
NOTE:
3. Remove the ATF dipstick guide tube (L) with the • Countershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
O-ring. left-hand threads.
• Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
4. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve transmission.
A, the ATF joint pipes, the O-rings, the ATF pipe, • Clean the old mainshaft and the countershaft
and the gasket. locknuts; they are used to install the press fit idler
gear on the mainshaft, and the park gear on the
5. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid countershaft.
valves B and C with the harness clamp bracket, the ＊０３
ATF joint pipes, the O-rings, and the gasket.
6. Remove the transmission range switch cover (M).

C
7. Remove the transmission range switch subharness
clamps (N) from the clamp bracket (O), and remove B
the transmission range switch (P).
8. Remove the end cover (15 bolts) (Q), the dowel pins,
the O-rings, and the end cover gasket.
9. Install the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft.

＊０２
A
12. Remove the mainshaft holder from the mainshaft.
07GAB-PF50101
10. Engage the park pawl with the park gear.
14-338 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:01:28 61TL2000_140_0341
Park Lever Stop Inspection and

Adjustment
13. Set a two-jaw (or three-jaw) puller (A) on the
countershaft (B) with a spacer (C) between the
puller and the countershaft, then remove the park 1. Set the park lever in the P position.
gear (D).
＊０４ 2. Measure the distance (A) between the park pawl
A shaft (B) and the park lever roller pin (C).
Standard: 57.7−58.7 mm (2.27−2.31 in.)

＊０１
C
C
A
B
14. Install a puller (A) with two 6 x 1.0 mm bolts (B) on

the mainshaft idler gear (C). Set a spacer (D)
between the puller and the mainshaft (E), then B
remove the mainshaft idler gear.
＊０５
G 3. If the measurement is out of standard, select and

F
M H install the appropriate park lever stop (A) from the
table.
L
I ＊０２
B
A
K
B C
J N
C
D E
A
15. Remove the park pawl (F), the park pawl spring (G),
the park pawl shaft (H), and the stop shaft (I).
16. Remove the bolt (J) and the lock washer (K), then PARK LEVER STOP
remove the park lever stop (L), the park lever (M), Mark Part Number B C
and the park lever spring (N) from the selector 1 24537-PA9-003 11.00 mm 11.00 mm
control shaft. (0.433 in.) (0.433 in.)
2 24538-PA9-003 10.80 mm 10.65 mm
(0.425 in.) (0.419 in.)
3 24539-PA9-003 10.60 mm 10.30 mm
(0.417 in.) (0.406 in.)
4. After replacing the park lever stop, make sure the

distance is within tolerance.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-339
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４４５００１ＭＣＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:01:28 61TL2000_140_0342
Idler Gear Shaft Bearing Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal


• Adjustable bearing puller, 25−40 mm • Driver 07749-0010000
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A • Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-001A800
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the end cover (B).
＊０１
1. Remove the idler gear shaft bearing (A) from the
end cover (B) using the 25−40 mm adjustable A
bearing puller and a commercially available
3/8 ’’-16 slide hammer (C).
＊０１
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
B
2. Install a new oil seal flush to the end cover using

the driver and the 22 x 24 mm attachment.
＊０２
B 07749-0010000
A
2. Install a new bearing in the end cover using the

driver and the 52 x 55 mm attachment.
＊０２
07749-0010000
07746-001A800
07746-0010400
14-340 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４３４０８１ＫＢＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４１７２５６ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:29 61TL2000_140_0343
Selector Control Shaft Bearing ATF Feed Pipe Replacement

Replacement
1. Remove the snap rings (A), the ATF feed pipes (B),
and the feed pipe flanges (C) from the end cover (D).
• Driver 07749-0010000 NOTE: Replace the end cover, if the 1st clutch ATF
• Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-001A800 feed pipe (E) replacement is required.
＊０１
A
1. Remove the oil seal from the end cover, then
remove the bearing. C
＊０１ G
F
A
B
C
F
E
G
2. Install a new bearing flush to the end cover using D

the driver and the 22 x 24 mm attachment.
＊０２ 2. Install new O-rings (F) over the ATF feed pipes.
07749-0010000 3. Install the ATF feed pipes in the end cover by

aligning the feed pipe tabs with the indentations in
the end cover.
4. Install new O-rings (G) in the end cover, then install

the feed pipe flanges over the ATF feed pipes.
5. Secure the ATF feed pipes and the feed pipe

flanges with the snap rings.
07746-001A800
3. Install a new oil seal.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-341
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４１７２５４ＫＢＡＴ００ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４１３０１３ＫＢＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:01:30 61TL2000_140_0344
Transmission Housing
Housing and Shaft Assembly Removal

Housing puller 07HAC-PK40102
1. Remove the ATF feed pipe (A) from the idler gear shaft, and remove the ATF lubrication pipe (B) from the
transmission housing.
＊０１
A B
J
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
C
REVERSE
SHAFT FORK E
G
REVERSE SELECTOR
D
F
NEEDLE BEARING
2. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (C), the dowel pins (D), and the gasket (E).
3. Disconnect the connectors from the shift solenoid valves, and remove the shift solenoid wire harness (F) with the
O-ring.
4. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (G) with the O-ring, and remove the output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor (H) with the O-ring and the washer (I).
5. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts (19 bolts) (J) and the transmission hanger (K).
14-342 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４５９８０１ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:30 61TL2000_140_0345
6. Align the spring pin (A) on the selector control shaft 8. Remove the countershaft reverse gear and the
(B) with the transmission housing groove (C) by needle bearing.
turning the selector control shaft with the selector
control lever. 9. Remove the lock bolt securing the reverse shift fork,
then remove the reverse shift fork with the reverse
NOTE: Do not squeeze the end of the selector selector together.
control shaft tips together when turning the
selector control shaft. 10. Remove the selector control lever from the selector
＊０２ control shaft.
11. Unlock the detent spring (A) from the detent arm
(B).
＊０３
07HAC-PK40102 A
A
B
B
C
7. Install the housing puller over the mainshaft, then
remove the transmission housing.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-343

08/04/09 12:01:30 61TL2000_140_0346
Housing and Shaft Assembly Removal (cont’d)

12. Remove the selector control shaft (A) from the 14. Remove the mainshaft subassembly (A), the
torque converter housing. countershaft subassembly (B), and the secondary
＊０４ shaft subassembly (C) together. Do not bump the
countershaft on the baffle plate (D).
＊０５
B A
C
A
D
E
13. Turn the detent arm (B) away from the
countershaft (C).
15. Remove the baffle plate.
16. Remove the differential assembly (E).
14-344 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:01:31 61TL2000_140_0347
Bearing Removal
Special Tools Required 3. To remove the secondary shaft bearing and the
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 idler gear shaft bearing, expand each snap ring
• Driver 07749-0010000 using snap ring pliers, then drive the bearing out
• Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 using the driver and the 42 x 47 mm attachment.
＊０２
1. Remove the idler gear shaft (see page 14-373) 07749-0010000
when removing the mainshaft bearing and the idler
gear shaft bearing.
NOTE: If you are only removing the countershaft

bearing, the idler gear shaft removal is not needed.
2. To remove the mainshaft bearing and the

countershaft bearing from the transmission
housing, expand each snap ring using snap ring
pliers, then drive the bearing out using the driver
and the 78 x 80 mm attachment.
07746-0010300
NOTE: Do not remove the snap ring unless it’s
necessary to clean the grooves in the transmission
housing.
＊０１
07749-0010000
07NAD-PX40100
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-345
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１２３９５１１ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:31 61TL2000_140_0348
Bearing Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Expand each snap ring of the secondary shaft
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 bearing (A) and the idler gear shaft bearing (B)
• Driver 07749-0010000 using the snap ring pliers, and install the bearings
• Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 part-way into the transmission housing using the
driver and the 42 x 47 mm attachment.
1. Install the bearings in the direction shown. ＊０２
B 07749-0010000
2. Expand each snap ring using snap ring pliers, and
install the mainshaft bearing (A) and the
countershaft bearing (B) part-way into the
transmission housing using the driver and the
78 x 80 mm attachment.
＊０１
07749-0010000 07NAD-PX40100 A
A
07746-0010300
B
5. Release the snap ring pliers, then push the

bearings down into the transmission housing until
the snap ring snaps in place around it.
6. After installing the bearings check that the snap

rings (A) are seated in the bearing and the
3. Release the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing transmission housing grooves, and that the snap
down into the transmission housing until the snap ring end gaps (B) are correct.
ring snaps in place around it. ＊０３
B: 0−7 mm (0−0.28 in.)
7. Install the idler gear shaft (see page 14-373).
14-346 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１２３９５１１ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:31 61TL2000_140_0349
Reverse Idler Gear Removal and Installation

1. Remove the bolt (A) securing the reverse idler gear 1. Install the reverse idler gear in the transmission
shaft holder (B). housing.
＊０１
A
2. Lightly coat the reverse idler gear shaft (A), needle
C
bearing (B), and new O-rings (C) with lithium
grease.
＊０３
B D F
D
E
C
B
2. Install a 5 x 0.8 mm bolt (C) in the reverse idler gear
shaft (D), and pull it to remove the reverse idler
gear shaft and the reverse idler gear shaft holder C
together.
3. Assemble new O-rings and the needle bearing on
3. Remove the reverse idler gear (A). the reverse idler gear shaft, then install the reverse
＊０２ idler gear shaft in the reverse idler gear shaft
holder (D). Align the D-shaped cut out (E) of the
A reverse idler gear shaft with the D-shaped area (F)
of the reverse idler gear shaft holder.
4. Install the reverse idler gear shaft/holder assembly

on the transmission housing.
＊０４
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-347
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４０００１２２７１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:32 61TL2000_140_0350
Valve Body
Valve Body and ATF Strainer Removal

1. Remove the ATF feed pipes (A) and the ATF joint pipes (B).
＊０１
D A
X
W
A F
B E
H
O
L
M
I
N
K
P
T Q
J
R
T
U
S
2. Remove the ATF strainer (C) (two bolts).
3. Remove the regulator valve body (D) (eight bolts).
14-348 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４８０１３９３０１ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:32 61TL2000_140_0351
4. Remove the stator shaft (E) and the stator shaft 11. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
stop (F), then remove the regulator separator plate the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or
(G) and the two dowel pins (H). damaged.
5. Remove the servo body (I) (12 bolts), then remove 12. Remove the O-rings (W) (X) from the stator shaft
the servo separator plate (J) and the two dowel and the ATF strainer. Install new ones when
pins (K). installing the valve bodies.
6. Remove the cooler check valve spring (L) and the

cooler check valve (M), then remove the main valve
body (N) (three bolts). Do not let the two check balls
(O) fall out, and do not use a magnet to remove the
check balls, it may magnetize them.
7. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft (P), then

remove the ATF pump driven gear (Q) and the ATF
pump drive gear (R).
8. Remove the main separator plate (S) and the two

dowel pins (T).
9. Remove the ATF magnet (U), clean and reinstall it

in the torque converter housing (V).
10. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B)
thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it
is in good condition and that the inlet opening is
not clogged.
＊０２
B
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-349

08/04/09 12:01:32 61TL2000_140_0352
Valve Body
Valve Body Repair

NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of 5. Remove the ＃600 paper. Thoroughly wash the
the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with
bores. Use this procedure to free the valves. compressed air.
1. Soak a sheet of ＃600 abrasive paper in ATF for 6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
about 30 minutes. should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
own weight. If not, repeat step 4, then retest. If the
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a ＊０２
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
soaked ＃600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked ＃600 paper and

insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve.
Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits
the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the
paper as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and does not

require much polishing to remove any burrs.
＊０１
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the
valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
14-350 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４８０１３９３０１ＬＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:32 61TL2000_140_0353
Valve Body Valve Installation

1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and the springs in the sequence

shown for the main valve body (see page 14-352),
the regulator valve body (see page 14-354), and the
servo body (see page 14-355). Refer to the
following valve cap illustrations, and install each
valve cap so the end shown facing up will be facing
the outside of the valve body.
＊０１
3. Install all the springs and the seats. Insert the

spring (A) in the valve, then install the valve in the
valve body (B). Push the spring in using a
screwdriver, then install the spring seat (C).
＊０２
A B
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-351
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４８０１３９３０１ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:33 61TL2000_140_0354
Valve Body
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls, it may magnetize the balls.
3. Inspect the valve body for scoring and damage.
4. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, do the valve body repair procedure (see page 14-350).
5. Coat all parts with ATF during assembly.

＊０１
A SPRING SEAT
SHIFT VALVE A
B RELIEF VALVE
SHIFT VALVE B
C
SHIFT VALVE C VALVE SLEEVE
CHECK BALL D
ROLLER
SERVO CONTROL VALVE
MANUAL VALVE
LOCK-UP
F E CONTROL
VALVE
COOLER CHECK
VALVE
VALVE CAP SHIFT VALVE E CHECK BALL
G
MAIN VALVE BODY
VALVE CAP CLIP H
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
A Shift valve A spring 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
B Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
C Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
D Relief valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 9.6 (0.378) 34.1 (1.343) 10.2
E Lock-up control valve spring 0.65 (0.026) 7.1 (0.280) 23.1 (0.909) 12.7
F Cooler check valve spring 0.85 (0.033) 6.6 (0.260) 27.0 (1.063) 11.3
G Servo control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2
H Shift valve E spring 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
14-352 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４８０１３９３０１ＭＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:33 61TL2000_140_0355
ATF Pump Inspection

1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), the driven gear 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
(B), and the ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the gear (A) and the driven gear (B).
main valve body (D). Lubricate all parts with ATF,
and install the ATF pump driven gear with its ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance
grooved and chamfered side facing up. Standard (New)
＊０１ ATF Pump Drive Gear:
A B
0.210−0.265 mm (0.0083−0.0104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear:
0.070−0.125 mm (0.0028−0.0049 in.)
＊０２
C
D 3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure
the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
gear (A) and the main valve body (B) using a
straight edge (C) and a feeler gauge (D).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)

Clearance
＊０３
C B
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-353
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４８０１１３０２１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:33 61TL2000_140_0356
Valve Body
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

3. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, do the valve body repair procedure (see page 14-350).
4. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
6. Replace the O-rings with new ones.
7. When reassembling the valve body, align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the hole in the valve body, then
press the spring cap into the valve body, and tighten the stop bolt.
＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
REGULATOR ACCUMULATOR COVER
SPRING CAP
3RD ACCUMULATOR
F PISTON
STOP BOLT
6 x 1.0 mm G
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
A 8.7 lbf·ft)
B H
D
SPRING SEAT 1ST ACCUMULATOR
C PISTON
O-RING
TORQUE CONVERTER Replace.
CHECK VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
E REGULATOR VALVE BODY
VALVE CAP
VALVE CAP CLIP
A Stator reaction spring 4.5 (0.177) 35.4 (1.394) 30.3 (1.193) 1.92
B Regulator valve spring A 1.85 (0.073) 14.7 (0.579) 83.0 (3.268) 16.9
C Regulator valve spring B 1.6 (0.063) 9.2 (0.362) 44.0 (1.732) 12.5
D Torque converter check valve spring 1.2 (0.047) 8.6 (0.339) 33.8 (1.331) 12.2
E Lock-up shift valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 6.6 (0.260) 35.5 (1.398) 18.2
F 3rd accumulator spring 2.5 (0.098) 14.6 (0.575) 29.4 (1.157) 4.9
G 1st accumulator spring A 2.4 (0.094) 18.6 (0.732) 49.0 (1.929) 7.1
H 1st accumulator spring B 2.3 (0.091) 12.2 (0.480) 31.5 (1.240) 6.6
14-354 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４８０１５０７０１ＭＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:33 61TL2000_140_0357
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

3. Check shift valve D for free movement. If it fails to slide freely, do the valve body repair procedure (see page
14-350).
4. When removing and installing the shift solenoid valves, refer to the shift solenoid valves removal and installation
(see page 14-356).
6. Replace the O-rings with new ones.

＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
E 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
ACCUMULATOR COVER
2ND ACCUMULATOR PISTON D
C F
B 5TH ACCUMULATOR PISTON
4TH ACCUMULATOR PISTON O-RING

O-RING Replace.
Replace.
O-RING
Replace. SERVO BODY
A
SHIFT VALVE D
SERVO VALVE/SHIFT FORK SHAFT
SPRING SEAT
O-RING
Replace.
A Shift valve D spring 0.8 (0.031) 5.6 (0.220) 28.1 (1.106) 15.9
B 4th accumulator spring B 2.3 (0.091) 12.2 (0.480) 31.5 (1.240) 6.6
C 4th accumulator spring A 2.4 (0.094) 18.6 (0.732) 49.0 (1.929) 7.1
D 2nd accumulator spring B 2.1 (0.083) 10.8 (0.425) 34.0 (1.339) 8.2
E 2nd accumulator spring A 2.1 (0.083) 16.6 (0.654) 48.7 (1.917) 8.4
F 5th accumulator spring 2.5 (0.098) 14.6 (0.575) 29.9 (1.177) 4.9
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-355
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４８０１５４５０１ＭＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:34 61TL2000_140_0358
Valve Body
Shift Solenoid Valve Removal and Installation

NOTE: 5. Install shift solenoid valve E by holding the shift
• Do not hold the shift solenoid valve connector to solenoid valve body; be sure that the mounting
remove and to install the shift solenoid valves. Hold bracket contacts the servo body.
the shift solenoid valve body.
• Do not install the shift solenoid valve A before 6. Install shift solenoid valve B by holding the shift
installing the shift solenoid valve D, and do not install solenoid valve body; be sure that the mounting
shift solenoid valve B before shift solenoid valve E. If bracket contacts the bracket on shift solenoid
shift solenoid valves A and B are installed before shift valve E.
solenoid valves D and E, it may damage the hydraulic
control system. 7. Install shift solenoid valve C by holding the shift
solenoid valve body; be sure that the mounting
1. Remove the shift solenoid valves by holding the bracket contacts the servo body.
solenoid valve body.
2. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per shift solenoid

valve) (F) on the shift solenoid valves.
NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new

O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the
O-rings provided with it.
＊０１
A 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
D
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
F F (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
E 8.7 lbf·ft)
3. Install shift solenoid valve D by holding the shift

bracket contacts the servo body.
4. Install shift solenoid valve A by holding the shift

bracket contacts the bracket on shift solenoid
valve D.
14-356 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０６５４８０１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:34 61TL2000_140_0359
Torque Converter Housing
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Install a new oil seal flush with the torque converter
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25−40 mm housing using the driver and the 72 x 75 mm
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A attachment.
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 NOTE: Do not drive the oil seal into the torque
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 converter housing until it bottoms out; it will block
the fluid return passage and cause transmission
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and the oil seal damage.
using the adjustable bearing puller and a ＊０３
commercially available 3/8 ’’-16 slide hammer (A).
＊０１
07749-0010000 07746-0010600
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
2. Install a new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in

the torque converter housing using the driver and
the 62 x 68 mm attachment.
＊０２
07749-0010000 07746-0010500
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-357
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１２３９５２１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:35 61TL2000_140_0360
Countershaft Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required 4. Install the countershaft bearing securely in the
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25−40 mm torque converter housing using the driver and the
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A 62 x 68 mm attachment.
• Driver 07749-0010000 ＊０３
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
07749-0010000
1. Remove the countershaft bearing using the
adjustable bearing puller and a commercially
available 3/8 ’’-16 slide hammer (A).
＊０１ 07746-0010500
5. Make sure that the bearing outer race notch-cut (A)

is installed at a height of 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
(B) above the torque converter housing surface (C).
Do not install the countershaft bearing higher than
0.05 mm (0.002 in.) above the torque converter
housing surface.
＊０４
A
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
2. Remove the ATF guide plate (A), and check it for B

wear and damage. If the guide plate is worn or
damaged, replace it. C
＊０２
B
A
3. Install the ATF guide plate in the torque converter

housing, and install a new countershaft bearing (B).
14-358 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０９１７４２４ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:54 61TL2000_140_0361
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required 4. Install new O-rings (A) on the ATF guide collar (B),
• Driver 07749-0010000 then install the ATF guide collar in the torque
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 converter housing.
＊０３
1. Remove the set plate bolt, then remove the lock C
B
washer (A) and the bearing set plate (B).
＊０１
A 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
A
Replace.
5. Install a new secondary shaft bearing (C) in the

direction shown.
6. Install the secondary shaft bearing using the driver

and the 62 x 68 mm attachment, and install it
securely in the torque converter housing.
＊０４
07749-0010000
2. Remove the secondary shaft bearing (A) by heating
the torque converter housing to about 212 °F
(100 °C) using a heat gun (B). Do not heat the
torque converter housing more than 212 °F
(100 °C).
NOTE: Let the torque converter housing cool to

normal temperature before installing the
secondary shaft bearing.
＊０２
B
07746-0010500
7. Check that the bearing groove aligns with the

torque converter housing surface, then install the
bearing set plate with aligning the bearing groove.
8. Install a new lock washer and the set plate bolt,

then bend the lock tab of the lock washer against
the bolt head.
3. Remove the ATF guide collar with the O-rings.

Clean and dry the ATF guide collar surfaces in the
torque converter housing if necessary.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-359
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１３５４２０２ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:55 61TL2000_140_0362
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement

• Driver 07749-0010000
• Oil seal driver attachment 07947-ZV00100
1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the torque converter

housing (B).
＊０１
A
2. Install a new oil seal (A) in the torque converter

housing to a depth (B) of 0.5−1.5 mm
(0.02−0.06 in.) below the torque converter housing
surface using the driver and the oil seal driver
attachment.
＊０２
07749-0010000
A
07947-ZV00100
14-360 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４１７２５８ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:55 61TL2000_140_0363
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Inspect the thrust needle bearings and the needle bearings for galling and rough movement.
＊０１
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)
24 x 1.25 mm
226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft)→ 0 →
THRUST NEEDLE BEARING 167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, 123 lbf·ft)
Replace.
CONICAL SPRING
WASHER
4TH GEAR Replace.
IDLER GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
4TH GEAR COLLAR

TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
4TH/5TH CLUTCH
O-RINGS
Replace.
THRUST WASHER, 41 x 68 mm
Selective part
MAINSHAFT
NEEDLE BEARING
5TH GEAR
SEALING RINGS,
29 mm
Replace.
NEEDLE BEARING
SET RING
2. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
3. Check the shaft bearing surface for scoring and excessive wear.
4. Before installing new O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent the O-ring damage.
5. Lubricate all parts with ATF during assembly.
6. Install the conical spring washer and the 41 x 68 mm thrust washer in the direction shown.
7. Replace the locknut and the conical spring washer with new ones when assembling the transmission.
8. Check the clearance of 5th gear (see page 14-362).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-361
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１２０００００ＭＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:55 61TL2000_140_0364
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft 5th Gear Axial Clearance Inspection

1. Remove the mainshaft transmission housing 5. Set the dial indicator (A) on 5th gear (B).
bearing (see page 14-345). ＊０２
2. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), 5th gear (B),

the needle bearing (C), the thrust needle bearing
(D), the 41 x 68 mm thrust washer (E), the 4th/5th
clutch (F), the 4th gear collar (G), and the
transmission housing bearing (H) on the mainshaft
(I). Do not install the O-rings during inspection. THRUST WASHER,
＊０１ 41 x 68 mm
K
B
L
24 x 1.25 mm J
29 N·m
(3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft) H
G A
6. Lift 5th gear (A) up while holding the mainshaft,

and use the dial indicator (B) to read the 5th gear
F axial clearance.
＊０３
D E
B
A
I
7. Measure the 5th gear axial clearance in at least
three places while moving 5th gear. Use the
average as the actual clearance.
Standard: 0.04−0.10 mm (0.002−0.004 in.)
3. Install the idler gear (J) on the mainshaft with a

press, then install the conical spring washer (K) and
the locknut (L).
4. Tighten the locknut to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft).
14-362 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１２３９４２１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:56 61TL2000_140_0365
8. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the

41 x 68 mm thrust washer and measure its
thickness (A).
＊０４
9. Select and install a new thrust washer, then

recheck.
No. Part Number Thickness
1 90414-RCT-000 4.450 mm (0.1752 in.)
2 90415-RCT-000 4.475 mm (0.1762 in.)
3 90416-RCT-000 4.500 mm (0.1772 in.)
4 90417-RCT-000 4.525 mm (0.1781 in.)
5 90418-RCT-000 4.550 mm (0.1791 in.)
6 90419-RCT-000 4.575 mm (0.1801 in.)
7 90420-RCT-000 4.600 mm (0.1811 in.)
8 90421-RCT-000 4.625 mm (0.1821 in.)
9 90422-RCT-000 4.650 mm (0.1831 in.)
10 90423-RCT-000 4.675 mm (0.1841 in.)
11 90424-RCT-000 4.700 mm (0.1850 in.)
12 90425-RCT-000 4.725 mm (0.1860 in.)
13 90426-RCT-000 4.750 mm (0.1870 in.)
14 90427-RCT-000 4.775 mm (0.1880 in.)
15 90428-RCT-000 4.800 mm (0.1890 in.)
10. After replacing the thrust washer, make sure the

clearance is within the standard.
11. Disassemble the installed parts from the mainshaft.
12. Reinstall the transmission housing bearing in the

-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-363

08/04/09 12:01:56 61TL2000_140_0366
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Inspect the needle bearings for galling and rough movement.
＊０１
24 x 1.25 mm
226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft)→ 0 →
167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, 123 lbf·ft)
REVERSE GEAR Replace.
Left-hand threads
CONICAL SPRING
WASHER
Replace.
NEEDLE BEARING
REVERSE SELECTOR HUB REVERSE

SELECTOR
PARK GEAR
4TH GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
SET RING TRANSMISSION

HOUSING BEARING
COLLAR,
COTTERS, 31 mm 35 x 47 x 7.8 mm
3RD GEAR
COLLAR,
37 x 41 x 54.3 mm
5TH GEAR
1ST GEAR
2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
5. Install the conical spring washer, the reverse selector, the 35 x 47 x 7.8 mm collar, and all gears in the direction
shown.
6. Replace the locknut and the conical spring washer with new ones when assembling the transmission. The
countershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
7. Some reverse selector hubs and 3rd gears are press-fitted to the countershaft; special tools are needed to remove
them (see page 14-365) and to install them (see page 14-366).
14-364 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０９０００００ＭＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:56 61TL2000_140_0367
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and 3rd Gear Removal

1. Install a commercially available bearing separator 3. Set on the countershaft (A) on a press with a spacer
on 4th gear (A). Set the countershaft (B) on a press (B) between the press and the countershaft, and
with a spacer (C) between the press and the remove 3rd gear (C).
countershaft, and remove the reverse selector hub ＊０２
(D).
B
NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-

fitted, and can be removed without using the A
C
bearing separator and a press.
＊０１
C
D
B
4. Remove the 37 x 41 x 54.3 mm collar, 5th gear, 1st

gear, and 2nd gear.
2. Remove the needle bearing, the set ring, the

35 x 47 x 7.8 mm collar, and the 31 mm cotters.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-365
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０９１７４５１ＫＡＡＴ５０
08/04/09 12:01:56 61TL2000_140_0368
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft 3rd Gear and Reverse Selector Hub Installation

Special Tools Required 4. Slide the reverse selector hub (A) over the
Driver, handle 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 countershaft, then press it in place using the 40 mm
driver handle and a press.
1. Install 2nd gear, 1st gear, 5th gear, and the
37 x 41 x 54.3 mm collar on the countershaft. NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-
fitted, and can be installed without using the 40 mm
2. Slide 3rd gear (A) over the countershaft, and press driver and a press.
it in place using the 40 mm driver handle and a ＊０２
press.
＊０１
07746-0030100
07746-0030100
A
A
3. Install the 31 mm cotters, the 35 x 47 x 7.8 mm

collar, the set ring, the needle bearing, and 4th gear.
14-366 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０９１７４５１ＫＣＡＴ５０
08/04/09 12:01:57 61TL2000_140_0369
Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Inspect the thrust needle bearings and the needle bearings for galling and rough movement.
＊０１
24 x 1.25 mm
226 N·m
(23 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft) → 0 →
167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, 123 lbf·ft)
Replace.
Left-hand threads

CONICAL
SPRING
IDLER GEAR WASHER
Replace.
3RD GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
SECONDARY SHAFT TRANSMISSION
THRUST NEEDLE HOUSING BEARING
BEARING
SEALING RINGS, 3RD GEAR COLLAR

29 mm
Replace.
THRUST NEEDLE 1ST/3RD CLUTCH

BEARING
NEEDLE BEARING
O-RINGS
Replace.
2ND GEAR
THRUST WASHER,
THRUST NEEDLE 40 x 51.5 mm
BEARING Selective part
THRUST WASHER,
37 x 58 mm THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
Selective part
O-RINGS 1ST GEAR
Replace.
NEEDLE BEARING
2ND CLUTCH

SET RING
4. Before installing new O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring damage.
6. Install the conical spring washer, and the idler gear in the direction shown.
7. Replace the locknut and the conical spring washer with new ones when assembling the transmission. The locknut
has left-hand threads.
8. Check the clearance of 2nd gear (see page 14-369) and 1st gear (see page 14-371).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-367
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１３０００００ＭＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:57 61TL2000_140_0370
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Removal and Installation

Special Tools Required Installation
Attachment, 42 mm I.D. 07QAD-P0A0100
Install the idler gear (A) in the direction shown on the
Removal secondary shaft (B) using the 42 mm I.D. attachment
and a press.
Place a spacer (A) on the secondary shaft (B), and set a ＊０２
puller (C) under the idler gear (D), then remove the idler
07QAD-P0A0100
gear.
＊０１
A
C
14-368 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１３５４２１５ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:57 61TL2000_140_0371
Secondary Shaft 2nd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection

1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), the needle 2. Measure the clearance between the snap ring (A)
bearing (B), 2nd gear (C), the thrust needle bearing and the 2nd clutch guide (B) using a feeler gauge
(D), the 37 x 58 mm thrust washer (E), and the 2nd (C), in at least three places. Use the average as the
clutch (F) on the secondary shaft (G), then secure actual clearance.
them with the set ring (H). Do not install the O-rings
during inspection. Standard: 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.)
＊０１＊０２
G
C
C
D ＊０３
B THRUST WASHER,
E A 37 x 58 mm
F
H
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-369
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１３５４１８１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:57 61TL2000_140_0372
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft 2nd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont’d)

3. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the
37 x 58 mm thrust washer, and measure its
thickness.

recheck.
1 90511-PRP-010 3.900 mm (0.154 in.)
2 90512-PRP-010 3.925 mm (0.155 in.)
3 90513-PRP-010 3.950 mm (0.156 in.)
4 90514-PRP-010 3.975 mm (0.156 in.)
5 90515-PRP-010 4.000 mm (0.157 in.)
6 90516-PRP-010 4.025 mm (0.158 in.)
7 90517-PRP-010 4.050 mm (0.159 in.)
8 90518-PRP-010 4.075 mm (0.160 in.)
9 90519-PRP-010 4.100 mm (0.161 in.)
10 90520-PRP-010 4.125 mm (0.162 in.)
11 90521-PRP-010 4.150 mm (0.163 in.)
12 90522-PRP-010 4.175 mm (0.164 in.)
13 90523-PRP-000 4.200 mm (0.165 in.)
14 90524-PRP-000 4.225 mm (0.166 in.)
15 90525-PRP-000 4.250 mm (0.167 in.)
16 90526-PRP-000 4.275 mm (0.168 in.)
17 90527-PRP-000 4.300 mm (0.169 in.)
18 90528-PRP-000 4.325 mm (0.170 in.)
19 90529-PRP-000 4.350 mm (0.171 in.)
20 90530-PRP-000 4.375 mm (0.172 in.)
5. After replacing the thrust washer, make sure the

clearance is within standard.
6. Disassemble the installed parts from the secondary

shaft.
14-370 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:01:58 61TL2000_140_0373
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection

Special Tools Required ＊０２
Attachment, 42 mm I.D. 07QAD-P0A0100 07QAD-P0A0100
1. Remove the secondary shaft transmission housing

J
bearing (see page 14-345).
I
2. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), the needle
bearing (B), 1st gear (C), the thrust needle bearing
(D), the 40 x 51.5 mm thrust washer (E), the 1st/3rd
clutch (F), and the 3rd gear collar (G) on the
secondary shaft (H). Do not install the O-rings
during inspection.
＊０１
L
24 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
J 3. Install the idler gear (I), then install the

transmission housing bearing (J) on the idler gear
using the 42 mm I.D. attachment and a press.
I
4. Install the conical spring washer (K) and the locknut
G (L), then tighten the locknut to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft).
F 5. Turn the secondary shaft assembly upside down,

and set the dial indicator (A) on 1st gear (B).
E ＊０３
A
D
C
B
A
B
H THRUST WASHER,
40 x 51.5 mm
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-371
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１３５４１７１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:58 61TL2000_140_0374
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont’d)

6. Lift 1st gear (A) up while holding the secondary 8. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the
shaft, and use the dial indicator (B) to read the 1st 40 x 51.5 mm thrust washer and measure its
gear axial clearance. thickness.
＊０４
recheck.
THRUST WASHER, 40 x 51.5 mm

1 90503-RCT-000 4.80 mm (0.189 in.)
2 90504-RCT-000 4.85 mm (0.191 in.)
3 90505-RCT-000 4.90 mm (0.193 in.)
B 4 90506-RCT-000 4.95 mm (0.195 in.)
5 90507-RCT-000 5.00 mm (0.197 in.)
6 90508-RCT-000 5.05 mm (0.199 in.)
A 10. After replacing the thrust washer, make sure the

clearance is within standard.
11. Disassemble the installed parts from the secondary

shaft.
12. Reinstall the transmission housing bearing in the

7. Measure the 1st gear axial clearance in at least
three places while moving 1st gear. Use the
Standard: 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.)
14-372 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:01:58 61TL2000_140_0375
Idler Gear Shaft Removal and Installation

1. Remove the snap ring (A), the cotter retainer (B),
and the 17 mm cotters (C). Do not distort the snap
ring.
＊０１
D
2. Remove the idler gear shaft/idler gear assembly (D)

from the transmission housing.
3. Check the snap ring and the cotter retainer for wear
and damage. Replace them if they are worn,
distorted, or damaged.
4. Install the idler gear shaft/idler gear assembly in

the reverse order of removal.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-373
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４３４０７１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:01:59 61TL2000_140_0376
Shafts and Clutches
Idler Gear/Idler Gear Shaft Replacement

Special Tools Required 4. Replace the idler gear and/or the idler gear shaft,
• Driver 07749-0010000 and attach the idler gear shaft to the idler gear.
• Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100 ＊０３
1. Remove the snap ring from the idler gear/idler

shaft assembly. Do not distort the snap ring.
＊０１
5. Install the idler gear shaft (A) in the idler gear (B)
using the driver, the 32 x 35 mm attachment, and a
press.
＊０４
2. Check the snap ring for wear and damage. Replace
it if it is worn, distorted, or damaged. 07749-0010000
3. Remove the idler gear shaft (A) from the idler gear
(B) using the driver, the 32 x 35 mm attachment,
and a press.
07746-0010100
＊０２
A
07749-0010000
07746-0010100
6. Install the snap ring.
14-374 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４３４０６５ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:01:59 61TL2000_140_0377
Clutch Disassembly
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), the clutch discs
Clutch spring compressor set 07LAE-PX40000 (B) (6), the clutch wave-plates (C) (5), the flat-plate
(D), and the waved spring (E) from the 2nd clutch
1. Remove the snap ring using a screwdriver. drum (F).
＊０１＊０３
A
2. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), the clutch discs

(B) (5), the clutch wave-plates (C) (4), the clutch flat- F
plate (D), and the waved spring (E) from the 1st
clutch drum (F).
＊０２ D
A
5. Make a reference mark on the flat-plate.
B
C 6. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), the clutch discs

(B) (6), the clutch wave-plates (C) (5), the clutch flat-
plate (D), and the waved spring (E) from the 3rd
clutch drum (F).
＊０４
E A
C
F
3. Make a reference mark on the clutch flat-plate. E
7. Make reference marks on the clutch flat-plate.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-375
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１３１００４１ＬＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:00 61TL2000_140_0378
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont’d)

8. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), the clutch discs 10. Install the clutch spring compressor set.
(B) (4), the clutch wave-plates (C) (4), and the waved ＊０７
07LAE-PX40000
spring (D) from the 4th clutch drum (E).
＊０５
A
B
C
9. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), the clutch discs

(B) (4), the clutch wave-plates (C) (4), and the waved
spring (D) from the 5th clutch drum (E).
＊０６
A
B 11. Set the clutch spring compressor set (A) on the

spring retainer (B) of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd clutches
C
so that it pushes on the clutch return spring (C).
＊０８
D
A
E
14-376 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:00 61TL2000_140_0379
12. Be sure the clutch spring compressor set (A) is 14. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can
adjusted to have full contact with the spring be removed.
retainer (B) on the 4th and 5th clutches. ＊１１
＊０９
15. Remove the snap ring using snap ring pliers.

13. Check the placement of the clutch spring ＊１２
compressor set. If either end of the clutch spring
compressor set is set over an area of the spring
retainer which is unsupported by the return spring,
the spring retainer may be damaged.
＊１０
16. Remove the clutch spring compressor set.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-377

08/04/09 12:02:01 61TL2000_140_0380
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont’d)

17. Remove the snap ring (A), the spring retainer (B), 19. 1st, 2nd, and 3rd clutches:
and the return spring (C). Remove the clutch piston (A), then remove the
＊１３ O-ring (B) from the clutch piston, and remove the
A
O-ring (C) from the clutch drum (D).
B ＊１５
A
18. Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum (A), and D
apply air pressure to the fluid passage to remove
the piston (B). Place a finger tip on the other
passage while applying air pressure.
＊１４
20. 4th and 5th clutches:
Remove the clutch piston (A), then remove the
outer O-ring (B) and the inner O-ring (C) from the
clutch piston.
＊１６
A
A
B
14-378 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:01 61TL2000_140_0381
Clutch Inspection
1. Inspect the 4th and 5th clutch pistons and the clutch 7. Inspect the clutch discs, the clutch plates, and the
piston check valves (A). clutch end-plate for wear, damage, and
＊０１ discoloration.
A Standard Thickness
Clutch Discs: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
Clutch Plates:
1st Clutch Wave-plates: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
Flat-plate: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
2nd Clutch Wave-plates: 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
3rd Clutch Wave-plate: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
4th Clutch (wave-plates): 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
5th Clutch (wave-plates): 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
2. If the clutch piston check valve is loose or damaged, 8. If the clutch discs are worn or damaged, replace
replace the clutch piston. them as a set. If the clutch discs are replaced, do
the clutch clearance inspection (see page 14-381).
3. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
9. If any clutch plate is worn, damaged, or discolored,
4. If the spring retainer is worn or damaged, replace it. replace the damaged plate with a new plate, and
inspect the other wave-plates for a phase
5. Check the oil seal (A) on the spring retainer of the difference (see page 14-380). If the clutch plate is
1st, 2nd, and 3rd clutches for wear, damage, and replaced, do the clutch clearance inspection
peeling. (see page 14-381).
＊０２
10. If the clutch end-plate is worn, damaged, or
A discolored, do the clutch clearance inspection
(see page 14-381), then replace the clutch end-plate.
6. If the oil seal is worn, damaged, or peeling, replace

the spring retainer.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-379
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１３１００４１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:01 61TL2000_140_0382
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Wave-plate Phase Difference Inspection

1. Place the clutch wave-plate (A) on a surface plate,
and set a dial indicator (B) on the wave-plate.
＊０１
E B
C I
D G
F H
2. Find the bottom (C) of a phase difference of the

wave-plate, zero the dial indicator and make a
reference mark on the bottom of the wave-plate.
3. Rotate the wave-plate about 60-degrees apart from

the bottom while holding the wave-plate by its
circumference. The dial indicator should be at the
top (D) of a phase difference. Do not rotate the
wave-plate while holding its surface, always rotate
it while holding its edges.
4. Read the dial indicator. The dial indicator reads the

phase difference (E) of the wave-plate between
bottom and top.
Standard Phase Difference:

1st Clutch: 0.15−0.20 mm (0.006−0.008 in.)
2nd Clutch: 0.1−0.2 mm (0.004−0.008 in.)
3rd Clutch: 0.1−0.2 mm (0.004−0.008 in.)
4th Clutch: 0.1−0.2 mm (0.004−0.008 in.)
5th Clutch: 0.1−0.2 mm (0.004−0.008 in.)
5. Rotate the wave-plate about 60-degrees. The dial

indicator should be at the bottom of a phase
difference (F and G), and zero the dial indicator.
6. Measure the phase difference at the other two tops

(H and I) of the wave-plate by following steps 3 thru
5.
7. If two of the three measurements are within the

standard, the wave-plate is OK. If two of the three
measurements are out of the standard, replace the
wave-plate.
14-380 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１２１２２３１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:02 61TL2000_140_0383
Clutch Clearance Inspection

Special Tools Required 4. Install the waved spring (A) in the 2nd clutch drum
Clutch compressor attachment 07ZAE-PRP0100 (B). Install the flat-plate (C), then starting with the
clutch disc, alternately install the clutch discs (D) (6)
1. Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch discs, the clutch and the wave-plates (E) (5), then install the clutch
plates, and the clutch end-plate for wear and end-plate (F) with the flat side toward the top disc.
damage (see page 14-379), and inspect the clutch ＊０３
wave-plate phase difference (see page 14-380), if F
necessary.
2. Install the clutch piston in the clutch drum. Do not

install the O-rings during inspection.
＊０１
E
B
D
3. Install the waved spring (A) in the 1st clutch drum 5. Install the waved spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum
(B). Install the clutch flat-plate (C), then starting (B). Install the clutch flat-plate (C), then starting
with the clutch disc, alternately install the clutch with the clutch disc, alternately install the clutch
discs (D) (5) and the clutch wave-plates (E) (4), then discs (D) (6) and the clutch wave-plates (E) (5), then
install the clutch end-plate (F) with the flat side install the clutch end-plate (F) with the flat side
toward the top disc. toward the top disc.
＊０２＊０４
F F
A
B E
D
B E
C
D
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-381
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１２１２２１１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:02 61TL2000_140_0384
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont’d)

6. Install the waved spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum 8. Install the snap ring using a screwdriver.
(B). Starting with the clutch wave-plate, alternately ＊０７
install the clutch wave-plates (C) (4) and the clutch
discs (D) (4), then install the clutch end-plate (E)
with the flat side toward the top disc.
＊０５
E
B
D
C
9. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch end-plate (B).
＊０８
A
7. Install the waved spring (A) in the 5th clutch drum

(B). Starting with the clutch wave-plate, alternately
install the clutch wave-plates (C) (4) and the clutch
discs (D) (4), then install the clutch end-plate (E)
with the flat side toward the top disc.
＊０６
E
B
C
B
D
C
10. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch end-plate
lifted up to the snap ring (C).
14-382 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:03 61TL2000_140_0385
11. Release the clutch end-plate to lower the clutch 14. If the clearance is out of the standard, select a new
end-plate, then put the clutch compressor clutch end-plate from the following table.
attachment on the clutch end-plate (A). ＊１０
＊０９
B
C 147 N
(15 kgf, 07ZAE-PRP0100
33 lbf)
D 1ST CLUTCH END-PLATES

Mark Part Number Thickness (t)
1 22571-RZH-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
2 22572-RZH-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
12. Press the clutch compressor attachment down with 3 22573-RZH-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
147 N (15 kgf, 33 lbf) (B) using a force gauge, and 4 22574-RZH-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
read the dial indicator (C). 5 22575-RZH-003 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
6 22576-RZH-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
13. The dial indicator reads the clearance (D) between 7 22577-RZH-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
the clutch end-plate and the top disc (E). Take 8 22578-RZH-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
measurements in at least three places, and use the 9 22579-RZH-003 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
2ND CLUTCH END-PLATES
Clearance between Clutch End-Plate and Top Disc Mark Part Number Thickness (t)
Standard: 10 22569-RZH-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
1st Clutch: 1.38−1.58 mm (0.054−0.062 in.) 11 22570-RZH-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
2nd Clutch: 1.14−1.34 mm (0.045−0.053 in.) 1 22571-RZH-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
3rd Clutch: 1.23−1.43 mm (0.048−0.056 in.) 2 22572-RZH-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
4th Clutch: 0.93−1.13 mm (0.037−0.044 in.) 3 22573-RZH-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
5th Clutch: 0.93−1.13 mm (0.037−0.044 in.) 4 22574-RZH-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
5 22575-RZH-003 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
6 22576-RZH-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
7 22577-RZH-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-383

08/04/09 12:02:03 61TL2000_140_0386
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont’d)

3RD CLUTCH END-PLATES
1 22551-RZH-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22552-RZH-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22553-RZH-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22554-RZH-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22555-RZH-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22556-RZH-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22557-RZH-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22558-RZH-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22559-RZH-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
4TH and 5TH CLUTCH END-PLATES

1 22581-R91-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22582-R91-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22583-R91-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22584-R91-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22585-R91-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22586-R91-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22587-R91-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22588-R91-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22589-R91-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
15. Install a new clutch end-plate, and recheck the

clearance. If the thickest clutch end-plate is
installed, but the clearance is still over the service
limit, replace the clutch discs and the clutch plates.
14-384 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:03 61TL2000_140_0387
1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clutch Reassembly

Special Tools Required 3. Install the clutch piston (A) in the clutch drum (B).
Clutch spring compressor set 07LAE-PX40000 Apply pressure and rotate to ensure proper seating.
Lubricate the piston O-ring with ATF before
NOTE: Hold the spring compressor set in a vise with installing. Do not pinch the O-ring by installing the
soft jaws. Be careful not to damage the clutch drum. piston with too much force.
＊０２
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for at least B
30 minutes.
A
2. Install a new O-ring (A) in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd
clutch pistons (B), and install a new O-ring (C) on
the clutch drums (D).
＊０１
B
4. Set the return spring (A) and the spring retainer (B)
on the clutch piston, and position the snap ring (C)
on the spring retainer.
C ＊０３
C
D
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-385
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１３１００４１ＬＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:03 61TL2000_140_0388
Shafts and Clutches
1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clutch Reassembly (cont’d)

5. Install the clutch spring compressor set. 7. Compress the return spring carefully until the snap
＊０４ ring can be installed. Check that the spring retainer
07LAE-PX40000
(A) is properly installed on the clutch hub (B). If
improperly installed, change the position of the
spring compressor set and the spring retainer.
NOTE: Insert the spring retainer so it can be

adjusted (center of tolerance) to prevent damaging
the spring retainer oil seal.
＊０６
B
6. Set the clutch spring compressor set (A) on the
spring retainer (B) so that it compresses the clutch
return spring (C).
NOTE: Coat the circumference of the spring

retainer and areas where the spring retainer 8. Install the snap ring using snap ring pliers.
contacts the clutch piston with ATF before ＊０７
installation.
＊０５
A

C
14-386 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:04 61TL2000_140_0389
10. Make sure the oil seal of the spring retainer (A) is 11. Install the wave spring (A) in the 1st clutch drum (B).
properly installed on the clutch piston (B). If the oil Install the clutch flat-plate (C), then starting with the
seal was damaged or cracked, replace the spring clutch disc, alternately install the clutch discs (D) (5)
retainer. and the wave-plates (E) (4). Install the clutch end-
＊０８ plate (F) with the flat side toward the top disc.
Improperly installed: ＊０９
B F
A A
Properly installed:
B
B E
D
12. Install the wave spring (A) in the 2nd clutch drum
(B). Install the clutch flat-plate (C), then starting
with the clutch disc, alternately install the clutch
discs (D) (6) and the wave-plates (E) (5). Install the
clutch end-plate (F) with the flat side toward the top
disc.
＊１０
F
B E
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-387

08/04/09 12:02:04 61TL2000_140_0390
Shafts and Clutches
1st, 2nd, and 3rd Clutch Reassembly (cont’d)

13. Install the wave spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum
(B). Install the clutch flat-plate (C), then starting
with the clutch disc, alternately install the clutch
discs (D) (6) and the wave-plates (E) (5). Install the
clutch end-plate (F) with the flat side toward the top
disc.
＊１１
F
B
E
D
C
14. Install the snap ring using a screwdriver to secure

the clutch end-plate.
＊１２
15. Check that the clutch piston moves by applying air

pressure into fluid passage.
14-388 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:20 61TL2000_140_0391
4th and 5th Clutch Reassembly

Special Tools Required 4. Set the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B) on
Clutch spring compressor set 07LAE-PX40000 the clutch piston, and position the snap ring (C) on
the spring retainer.
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for at least ＊０３
C
30 minutes.
B
2. Install new O-rings (A) on the clutch piston (B). Do
not twist the O-rings.
＊０１
A
A
5. Install the clutch spring compressor set.

＊０４
07LAE-PX40000
3. Install the clutch piston (A) in the clutch drum (B)

while applying pressure and rotating to ensure
proper seating. Do not pinch the O-ring.
＊０２
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-389
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１２１０２５１ＬＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:21 61TL2000_140_0392
Shafts and Clutches
4th and 5th Clutch Reassembly (cont’d)

6. Be sure the clutch spring compressor set (A) is 8. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can
adjusted to have full contact with the spring be installed.
retainer (B). ＊０７
＊０５
9. Install the snap ring using snap ring pliers.

7. Check the placement of the clutch spring ＊０８
compressor set. If either end of the clutch spring
compressor set is set over an area of the spring
retainer that is unsupported by the return spring,
the retainer may be damaged.
＊０６
14-390 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:21 61TL2000_140_0393
11. Install the wave spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum 13. Install the snap ring using a screwdriver to secure
(B). Starting with the clutch wave-plate, alternately the clutch end-plate.
install the wave-plates (C) (4) and the clutch discs ＊１１
(D) (4). Install the clutch end-plate (E) with the flat
side toward the top disc.
＊０９
E
B
14. Check that the clutch piston moves by applying air
D pressure into fluid passage.
12. Install the wave spring (A) in the 5th clutch drum
(B). Starting with the clutch wave-plate, alternately
install the wave-plates (C) (4) and the clutch discs
(D) (4). Install the clutch end-plate (E) with the flat
side toward the top disc.
＊１０
E
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-391

08/04/09 12:02:22 61TL2000_140_0394
Valve Body
Valve Body and ATF Strainer Installation

Exploded View
＊０３
Torque Specifications:
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm ATF FEED PIPES,
Eight Bolts 8 x 198 mm
6 x 1.0 mm REGULATOR
Two Bolts 6 x 1.0 mm VALVE BODY
One Bolt
ATF STRAINER
ATF FEED PIPE, O-RING

O-RING 8 x 220 mm Replace.
Replace.
STATOR SHAFT STOP
ATF JOINT STATOR SHAFT

PIPES
REGULATOR
6 x 1.0 mm SEPARATOR PLATE
CHECK BALL
12 Bolts
DOWEL PINS,
Two Pins
COOLER CHECK
VALVE SPRING
COOLER CHECK
VALVE
SERVO BODY
8 x 1.25 mm
Three Bolts
CHECK BALL
ATF PUMP DRIVE GEAR MAIN VALVE BODY

DOWEL PINS,
Two Pins ATF PUMP DRIVEN
GEAR SHAFT
ATF PUMP DRIVEN
SERVO SEPARATOR GEAR
PLATE
ATF MAGNET
DOWEL PINS,
Two Pins
MAIN
SEPARATOR
PLATE
TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING
14-392 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４８０１３９３０１ＫＣＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:02:22 61TL2000_140_0395
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 5. If the ATF pump drive gear and the ATF pump
following procedures. driven gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the
main valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump
1. Make sure that the ATF magnet is clean and driven gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the
installed in the torque converter housing. specified torque, then recheck. Failure to align the
ATF pump driven gear shaft correctly will result in
2. Install the main separator plate (A) and the two a seized ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven
dowel pins on the torque converter housing. Then gear shaft.
install the ATF pump drive gear (B), the ATF pump
driven gear (C), and the ATF pump driven gear 6. Make sure that the two check balls and the cooler
shaft (D). Install the ATF pump driven gear with its check valve are in the main valve body, then install
grooved and chamfered side facing down. the cooler check valve spring in the cooler check
＊０４ valve.
D B
7. Install the servo separator plate and the two dowel
pins on the main valve body.
8. Install the servo body (12 bolts).
9. Install a new O-ring on the ATF strainer, and install

A
the ATF strainer (two bolts) on the servo body.
＊０６
BAFFLE PLATE BOLT HOLE
3. Install the main valve body (three bolts).
4. Make sure the ATF pump drive gear (A) rotates

smoothly in the normal operating direction, and the
ATF pump driven gear shaft (B) moves smoothly in
the axial and normal operating direction.
＊０５
6 x 1.0 mm ATF STRAINER BOLT HOLE

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
10. Install the regulator separator plate and the two

dowel pins on the main valve body.
11. Install a new O-ring on the stator shaft, and install

the stator shaft and the stator shaft stop.
12. Install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
13. Install the ATF joint pipes (one bolt).

A B
14. Install the ATF feed pipes in the regulator valve
body and the servo body.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-393

08/04/09 12:02:23 61TL2000_140_0396
Shaft Assembly and Housing Installation

Exploded View
＊０１
Torque Specifications
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) TRANSMISSION HOUSING
MOUNTING BOLTS
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
19 Bolts ATF LUBRICATION
COUNTERSHAFT PIPE
REVERSE GEAR ATF FEED PIPE
LOCK WASHER SHIFT SOLENOID
Replace. VALVE COVER
TRANSMISSION
14 N·m HOUSING
(1.4 kgf·m,
10 lbf·ft)
REVERSE GEAR
SELECTOR
NEEDLE O-RING 6 x 1.0 mm
BEARING Replace.
COUNTERSHAFT 6 x 1.0 mm
SUBASSEMBLY
INPUT SHAFT 6 x 1.0 mm

(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
SHIFT SOLENOID
OUTPUT SHAFT WIRE HARNESS
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
O-RING
Replace.
DETENT
SPRING TRANSMISSION
HANGER
6 x 1.0 mm
O-RING
Replace.
SELECTOR MAINSHAFT
CONTROL SUBASSEMBLY
SHAFT BAFFLE
LOCK PLATE
WASHER
Replace. SENSOR WASHER
6 x 1.0 mm
SECONDARY
SHAFT
SUBASSEMBLY
14 N·m
(1.4 kgf·m,
10 lbf·ft)
DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY
SELECTOR
CONTROL LEVER TORQUE CONVERTOR HOUSING
14-394 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４５９８０１ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:23 61TL2000_140_0397
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 6. If the detent arm was removed, install the detent
following procedure. arm (A) with the arm collar (B) on the servo body
(C), and install a new lock washer (D) by aligning its
1. Install the differential assembly in the torque cutout (E) with the projection (F) of the servo body.
converter housing. Install and tighten the bolt, then bend the lock tab
of the lock washer against the bolt head.
2. Install the baffle plate on the servo body (see step 9 ＊０３
6 x 1.0 mm
on page 14-393). 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
D
3. Assemble the mainshaft, the countershaft, and the Replace.
secondary shaft.
4. Join the mainshaft subassembly (A), the

countershaft subassembly (B), and the secondary
shaft subassembly (C) together. Then install them
in the torque converter housing. Do not bump the
countershaft on the baffle plate (D).
＊０２
B A B
A
C
C F
D
E
5. Make sure the countershaft subassembly and the

differential assembly (E) are clear of the baffle plate.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-395

08/04/09 12:02:24 61TL2000_140_0398
Shaft Assembly and Housing Installation (cont’d)

7. Install the selector control shaft (A) in the torque 9. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered
converter housing aligning the manual valve lever hole (B) is facing the fork bolt hole (C) of the
pin (B) on the selector control shaft with the guide reverse shift fork (D).
of the manual valve (C). Pull the manual valve ＊０６
E
gently when aligning the manual valve with the Replace.
selector control shaft.
＊０４
C
A
6 x 1.0 mm
14 N·m
(1.4 kgf·m, B
10 lbf·ft) A
8. Hook the detent spring (A) to the detent arm (B). 10. Install the reverse shift fork and the reverse
＊０５ selector together on the shift fork shaft and the
countershaft subassembly. Secure the reverse shift
fork to the shift fork shaft with the lock bolt and a
new lock washer (E), then bend the lock tab of the
lock washer against the bolt head.
A
11. Install the needle bearing and the countershaft
reverse gear on the countershaft subassembly.
12. Install the reverse idler gear in the transmission

housing (see page 14-347), if it was removed.
13. Install the idler gear shaft/idler gear assembly

B (see page 14-373), if it was removed.
14-396 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:24 61TL2000_140_0399
14. Install the three dowel pins (A) and a new gasket (B) 17. Wrap a screwdriver tip with tape to prevent
on the torque converter housing (C). damage to the reverse idler gear teeth. Engage the
＊０７ reverse idler gear with reverse gears by rotating
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) the reverse idler gear using the screwdriver.
E ＊０８
A
D
B
18. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts,
A and tighten the 19 bolts to 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft) in at least two steps, in a crisscross pattern.
15. Align the spring pin of the selector control shaft (D)
with the transmission housing groove (E) by
turning the selector control shaft. Do not squeeze
the end of the selector control shaft tips together
when turning the selector control shaft. If the tips
are squeezed together, it will cause a faulty shift
position signal or position due to the play between
the selector control shaft and the transmission
range switch.
16. Place the transmission housing (F) on the torque

converter housing. Do not install the mainshaft and
countershaft speed sensors before installing the
transmission housing on the torque converter
housing.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-397

08/04/09 12:02:25 61TL2000_140_0400
Shaft Assembly and Housing Installation (cont’d)

19. Install a new O-ring (A) on the input shaft 22. Connect the shift solenoid wire harness connectors
(mainshaft) speed sensor (B), and install the input to the shift solenoid valves:
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission
housing. • BLU wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.
＊０９ • ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
A
B Replace. • GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
• YEL, WHT, and WHT wire connector to shift
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m solenoid valve D.
(1.2 kgf·m, • RED wire connector to shift solenoid valve E.
8.7 lbf·ft)
23. Install a new gasket (A) and the two dowel pins (B),
then secure the shift solenoid valve cover (C) with
the bolts.
＊１１
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
C (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm E
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) B
20. Install a new O-ring (C) on the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor (D), and install the
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor with the
sensor washer (E) in the transmission housing.
A
Replace.
21. Install the shift solenoid wire harness (F) in the
transmission housing with a new O-ring (G).
＊１０ B
RED BLU
ORN
D
GRN YEL,
WHT, WHT
A
B 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
C F
G
Replace.
E
14-398 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:26 61TL2000_140_0401
End Cover Installation

Exploded View
＊０１
Torque Specifications
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH COVER TRANSMISSION
END COVER
6 x 1.0 mm
TRANSMISSION 6 x 1.0 mm
28 N·m 12 Bolts
RANGE SWITCH (2.9 kgf·m,
21 lbf·ft) TRANSMISSION
END COVER GASKET
Replace.
O-RING
CONICAL SPRING Replace.
WASHERS
Replace. ATF DIPSTICK
GUIDE TUBE
6 x 1.0 mm
PARK GEAR 6 x 1.0 mm
6 x 1.0 mm
LOCK PARK
WASHER LEVER STOP
Replace. MAINSHAFT
PARK IDLER GEAR 6 x 1.0 mm
LEVER
14 N·m STOP
(1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft) SHAFT
ATF JOINT HARNESS CLAMP
PIPES BRACKET
PARK PAWL
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVES B and C
28 N·m
(2.9 kgf·m,
PARK PAWL 21 lbf·ft)
SPRING
ATF JOINT PIPES 6 x 1.0 mm
PARK PAWL A/T CLUTCH
SHAFT PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
6 x 1.0 mm
PARK LEVER
SPRING 6 x 1.0 mm
ATF PIPE
SHIFT CABLE 6 x 1.0 mm
COVER BRACKET
28 N·m 6 x 1.0 mm
(2.9 kgf·m,
21 lbf·ft)
ATF FILTER BRACKET

ATF FILTER BRACKET
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-399
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１０４２４２５１ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:26 61TL2000_140_0402
End Cover Installation (cont’d)

Special Tool Required 4. Install the park lever spring (A), the park lever (B),
Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101 and the park lever stop (C) on the selector control
shaft (D), then install the lock bolt with a new lock
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the washer (E). Do not bend the lock tab of the lock
following procedure. washer until step 18.
＊０４
L
1. Install the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft. K
＊０２
H
J
G
F
B
C
E
Replace. I
07GAB-PF50101
6 x 1.0 mm
14 N·m
(1.4 kgf·m,
10 lbf·ft)
2. Lubricate the following parts with ATF: D M
• Splines and threads of the mainshaft. 5. Install the park pawl shaft (F), the park pawl spring
• Splines of the mainshaft idler gear. (G), the park pawl (H), and the stop shaft (I) on the
• The old conical spring washer and the old locknut. transmission housing.
3. Install the mainshaft idler gear (A), the old conical 6. Lubricate the following parts with ATF:
spring washer (B), and the old locknut (C) on the
mainshaft (D), and tighten the locknut to 226 N·m • Threads and splines of the countershaft.
(23.0 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft). • The old conical spring washer and the old locknut.
• Areas where the park gear contacts the conical
NOTE: spring washer.
• Do not tap the mainshaft idler gear to install.
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do 7. Install the park gear (J), the old conical spring
not use an impact wrench. washer (K), and the old locknut (L) on the
＊０３ countershaft (M).
C
8. Lift the park pawl up, and engage it with the park
B gear, then tighten the locknut to 226 N·m
(23.0 kgf·m, 166 lbf·ft).
A
NOTE:
D • Do not tap the park gear to install.
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench.
• Countershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
9. Remove the locknuts and the conical spring

washers from the mainshaft and the countershaft.
14-400 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:27 61TL2000_140_0403
10. Lubricate the threads of the shafts, new locknuts, 15. Install the selector control lever (A) on the selector
and new conical spring washers with ATF. control shaft (B), and install the bolt with a new lock
washer (C), then bend the lock tab of the lock
11. Install new conical spring washers (A) with facing washer against the bolt head.
stamped mark side up in the direction shown, and ＊０７
C
install a new mainshaft locknut (B), a new Replace.
countershaft locknut (C), and a new secondary
shaft locknut (D).
＊０５
C B
Left-hand Replace.
threads A
Replace. Replace.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
D 14 N·m
Left-hand (1.4 kgf·m,
threads 10 lbf·ft)
Replace.
16. Set the park lever in the P position, then check that
12. Tighten the locknuts to 167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, the park pawl (A) engages the park gear (B).
123 lbf·ft). ＊０８
C
NOTE:
• Be sure to install the conical spring washers in
the direction shown.
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench.
• Countershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
left-hand threads.
A B
13. Remove the mainshaft holder from the mainshaft.
14. Stake the locknuts into the shafts to a depth (A) of

0.7−1.3 mm (0.03−0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch
(B).
＊０６
B
17. If the park pawl does not engage fully, do the park
lever stop inspection and adjustment (see page
14-339).
18. Tighten the lock bolt, and bend the lock tab of the
lock washer (C) against the bolt head.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-401

08/04/09 12:02:27 61TL2000_140_0404

19. Install the ATF feed pipe (A) into the idler gear shaft, 23. Move the selector control shaft (A) from the P
and install the ATF lubrication pipe (B) into the position to the N position by turning the selector
transmission housing. control shaft on the torque converter side.
＊０９
A NOTE: Do not squeeze the end of the selector
control shaft tips together when turning the shaft. If
B the tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty
shift position signal or position due to the play
between the selector control shaft and the
transmission range switch.
＊１１
20. Install a new gasket (A) on the transmission

A
housing, and install the two dowel pins (B) and new
O-rings (C) over the top of the ATF feed pipes.
＊１０
E
28 N·m F
(2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft) 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m 24. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the
(1.2 kgf·m,
H 8.7 lbf·ft) neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission
6 x 1.0 mm range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) feeler
12 N·m gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold in the N
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft) position.
D
NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade or
equivalent to hold the transmission range switch in
the N position.
E C ＊１２
Replace. D
G
B
B
B
A
Replace.
C
21. Install the end cover (D), and tighten the three
special bolts (E) and the 6 x 1.0 mm bolts (F) A
(12 bolts).
22. Install the harness clamp bracket (G) on the end

cover with the bolt (H).
14-402 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:28 61TL2000_140_0405
25. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on 27. Connect the transmission range switch connector
the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the (A) securely, then install the harness clamps (B) on
N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade (C). the clamp bracket (C).
＊１３＊１５
6 x 1.0 mm
C 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, D
8.7 lbf·ft)
A
A
B C
26. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch

while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do
not move the transmission range switch when
tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. 28. Install the transmission range switch cover (D).
＊１４
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-403

08/04/09 12:02:28 61TL2000_140_0406

29. Clean the mounting surface and the fluid passage 32. Clean the mounting surface and the fluid passage
of the transmission housing and A/T clutch of the transmission housing, and A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A. pressure control solenoid valves B and C.
＊１６＊１７
B 6 x 1.0 mm
Replace. 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
D
E
Replace.
A
B, C
C
E
6 x 1.0 mm Replace.
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) D
A
30. Install a new gasket (B) on the transmission Replace.
housing, and install the ATF pipe (C) and the ATF
joint pipes (D). 33. Install a new gasket (A) and the ATF joint pipes (D)
on the transmission housing, and install new
NOTE: Be sure to install a new gasket with the blue O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.
31. Install a new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes, side toward the transmission housing.
and install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A. 34. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B
and C, with the harness clamp bracket (F).
14-404 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:29 61TL2000_140_0407
35. Install a new O-ring (A) on the ATF dipstick guide 36. Install the ATF filter bracket (A) on the transmission
tube (B) then install the guide tube with the bolts. housing, then install the ATF cooler line/ATF filter
＊１８ (B) with the banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers
A 6 x 1.0 mm
Replace. (D). Secure the ATF filter with its bracket (E).
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) ＊１９
H
28 N·m
I (2.9 kgf·m,
B
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m A
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
F
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
B (1.2 kgf·m,
D C E 8.7 lbf·ft)
Replace. 28 N·m
37. Secure the line brackets (F) with the bolts.
38. Install the ATF cooler outlet line (G) with the banjo
bolt (H) and new sealing washers (I).
39. Install the breather cap (A) on the breather pipe (B).
＊２０
40. Install the dipstick.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-405

08/04/09 12:02:30 61TL2000_140_0408
A/T Differential
Component Location Index Backlash Inspection

＊０１ 1. Install both axles into the A/T differential, then
THRUST SHIM, 76 mm
Preload Inspection, place the axles on V-blocks.
page 14-411
THRUST WASHER, 76.2 mm
2. Check the backlash of the pinion gears (A) using a
dial indicator (B).
BEARING OUTER RACE
Replacement, page 14-409 Standard: 0.05−0.15 mm (0.002−0.006 in.)
CARRIER BEARING ＊０１
B
A
A
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
Replacement,
page 14-407
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection,
page 14-406
3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the
CARRIER BEARING differential carrier (see page 14-407).
BEARING OUTER RACE

THRUST WASHER, 80 mm
14-406 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１６０００００ＤＡＡＴ００ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１６１９６４１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:31 61TL2000_140_0409
Carrier Bearing Replacement Differential Carrier and Final Driven

Gear Replacement
Attachment, 40 mm 07LAD-PW50601
1. Remove the final driven gear (A) from the
NOTE: differential carrier (B).
• The bearing and the bearing outer race should be
replaced as a set. NOTE: Differential carrier bolts have left-hand
• Inspect and adjust the carrier bearing preload threads.
whenever bearing is replaced. ＊０１
10 x 1.0 mm
• Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the 101 N·m
bearing is OK, removal is not necessary. (10.3 kgf·m, 74.5 lbf·ft)
A
1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) using a
commercially available puller (B), a bearing
separator (C), and a spacer (D).
＊０１
B
B
D
A
2. Install the final driven gear in the direction shown
2. Install new carrier bearings using the 40 mm on the differential carrier.
attachment with the small end and a press. Press
the carrier bearing on securely so there is no 3. Secure the final driven gear and the differential
clearance between the carrier bearing and the carrier with the bolts. Tighten the bolts to the
differential carrier. specified torque in a crisscross pattern in at least
＊０２ two steps.
07LAD-PW50601
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-407
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１６１９６１１ＫＢＡＴ００ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１６１９６２１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:02:31 61TL2000_140_0410
A/T Differential
Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Install a new oil seal (A) flush with the transmission
• Driver 07749-0010000 housing using the driver and the oil seal driver
• Oil seal driver attachment 07947-SD90101 attachment.
• Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101 ＊０３
07749-0010000
1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing.
＊０１
07947-SD90101
A
2. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter Replace.
housing.
＊０２ 4. Install a new oil seal (A) flush with the torque
converter housing using the driver and the oil seal
driver attachment.
＊０４
07749-0010000
07JAD-PH80101
A
Replace.
14-408 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１６１９６３１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:31 61TL2000_140_0411
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement

Special Tools Required 2. Remove the bearing outer race (A) and the 80 mm
• Driver 07749-0010000 thrust washer (B) from the torque converter
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 housing (C).
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 ＊０２
A
NOTE:
• The bearing and the bearing outer race should be
replaced as a set. B
• Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the
outer race is replaced.
• Do not reuse the thrust shim on the torque converter
housing.
• Adjust bearing preload after replacing the bearing
and the outer race.
C
• Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), the 76.2 mm

thrust washer (B), and the 76 mm thrust shim (C)
from the transmission housing (D) by heating the
transmission housing to about 212 °F (100 °C) using
a heat gun (E). Do not heat the transmission 3. Install the 80 mm thrust washer and a new bearing
housing more than 212 °F (100 °C). outer race in the torque converter housing.
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room 4. Install the bearing outer race securely in the torque
temperature before installing the bearing outer converter housing using the driver and the
race. 78 x 80 mm attachment.
＊０１＊０３
07749-0010000
E
07NAD-PX40100
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-409
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１６１９６０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:32 61TL2000_140_0412
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement (cont’d)

5. Install the 76 mm thrust shim (A), the 76.2 mm
thrust washer (B), and a new bearing outer race (C)
in the transmission housing (D).
NOTE: Be sure to install the 76.2 mm thrust washer

with the ‘‘41382 RKY’’ mark facing downward.
＊０４
C
6. Install the bearing outer race securely so there is no

clearance between the bearing outer race, the
76.2 mm thrust washer, the 76 mm thrust shim and
the transmission housing, using the driver and the
＊０５
07749-0010000
07746-0010600
14-410 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:32 61TL2000_140_0413
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection

Special Tools Required 2. Install the 76 mm thrust shim (A) in the
• Driver 07749-0010000 transmission housing (B). If you replace the 76 mm
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 thrust shim with a new one, use the same thickness
• Preload inspection tool 07HAJ-PK40201 shim as the old one.
＊０２
D
NOTE:
• If the transmission housing, the torque converter
housing, the differential carrier, the carrier bearing C
and the outer race, or the thrust shim were replaced,
the bearing preload must be adjusted.
• Coat all parts with ATF during installation. A
• Do not reuse the thrust shim from the torque
converter housing.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), the 76.2 mm

thrust washer (B), and the 76 mm thrust shim (C)
from the transmission housing (D) by heating the B
transmission housing to about 212 °F (100 °C) using
a heat gun (E). Do not heat the transmission
housing more than 212 °F (100 °C).
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room 3. Install the 76.2 mm thrust washer (C) and the
temperature before adjusting the bearing preload. bearing outer race (D) in the transmission housing.
＊０１
NOTE: Be sure to install the 76.2 mm thrust washer
E
with the ‘‘41382 RKY’’ mark facing downward.
4. Install the bearing outer race securely so there is no

clearance between the bearing outer race, the
76.2 mm thrust washer, the 76 mm thrust shim, and
the transmission housing, using the driver and the
＊０３
D
07749-0010000
07746-0010600
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-411
ＴＬ２９ＡＡ１Ｅ１０４１１６１９６１１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:02:33 61TL2000_140_0414
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont’d)

5. Install the differential assembly (A) in the torque 7. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions
converter housing (B), and install the gasket (C) and to seat the bearings.
the dowel pins (D) on the torque converter housing.
＊０４ 8. Measure the starting torque of the differential
10 x 1.25 mm assembly in both directions using the preload
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
inspection tool, a torque wrench (A), and a socket
(B) at normal room temperature.
E
Standard
New Bearing: 2.7−3.9 N·m
(28−40 kgf·cm, 24−35 lbf·in.)
Reused Bearing: 2.5−3.6 N·m
(25−37 kgf·cm, 22−32 lbf·in.)
F ＊０５
A
B
07HAJ-PK40201
A
6. Install the transmission housing (E) and the

transmission hanger (F), then tighten the bolts.
14-412 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:02:33 61TL2000_140_0415
9. If the starting torque is out of standard, remove the THRUST SHIM, 76 mm (cont’d)
76 mm thrust shim and select a 76 mm thrust shim No. Part Number Thickness
from the following table. Install a new 76 mm thrust A 41428-PAX-000 1.575 mm (0.062 in.)
shim and recheck. To increase the starting torque, B 41429-PAX-000 1.625 mm (0.064 in.)
increase the thickness of the 76 mm thrust shim. To C 41430-PAX-000 1.675 mm (0.066 in.)
decrease the starting torque, decrease the D 41431-PAX-000 1.725 mm (0.068 in.)
thickness of the 76 mm thrust shim. Changing the E 41432-PAX-000 1.775 mm (0.070 in.)
76 mm thrust shim to the next size will increase or F 41433-PAX-000 1.825 mm (0.072 in.)
decrease starting torque about 0.3−0.4 N·m G 41434-PAX-000 1.875 mm (0.074 in.)
(3−4 kgf·cm, 2−3 lbf·in.). H 41435-PAX-000 1.925 mm (0.076 in.)
I 41436-PAX-000 1.975 mm (0.078 in.)
THRUST SHIM, 76 mm J 41437-PAX-000 2.025 mm (0.080 in.)
No. Part Number Thickness K 41438-PAX-000 2.075 mm (0.082 in.)
S 41438-PX4-700 2.05 mm (0.080 in.) L 41439-PAX-000 2.125 mm (0.084 in.)
T 41439-PX4-700 2.10 mm (0.082 in.) M 41440-PAX-000 2.175 mm (0.086 in.)
U 41440-PX4-700 2.15 mm (0.084 in.) N 41441-PAX-000 2.225 mm (0.088 in.)
A 41441-PK4-000 2.20 mm (0.086 in.) O 41442-PAX-000 2.275 mm (0.090 in.)
B 41442-PK4-000 2.25 mm (0.088 in.) P 41443-PAX-000 2.325 mm (0.092 in.)
C 41443-PK4-000 2.30 mm (0.090 in.) Q 41444-PAX-000 2.375 mm (0.094 in.)
D 41444-PK4-000 2.35 mm (0.092 in.) R 41445-PAX-000 2.425 mm (0.095 in.)
E 41445-PK4-000 2.40 mm (0.094 in.) S 41446-PAX-000 2.475 mm (0.097 in.)
F 41446-PK4-000 2.45 mm (0.096 in.) T 41447-PAX-000 2.525 mm (0.099 in.)
G 41447-PK4-000 2.50 mm (0.098 in.) U 41448-PAX-000 2.575 mm (0.101 in.)
H 41448-PK4-000 2.55 mm (0.099 in.) V 41449-PAX-000 2.625 mm (0.103 in.)
I 41449-PK4-000 2.60 mm (0.101 in.) W 41450-PAX-000 2.675 mm (0.105 in.)
J 41450-PK4-000 2.65 mm (0.103 in.) X 41451-PAX-000 2.725 mm (0.107 in.)
K 41451-PK4-000 2.70 mm (0.105 in.) Y 41452-PAX-000 2.775 mm (0.109 in.)
L 41452-PK4-000 2.75 mm (0.107 in.) Z 41453-PAX-000 2.825 mm (0.111 in.)
M 41453-PK4-000 2.80 mm (0.109 in.) 0A 41454-PAX-000 2.875 mm (0.113 in.)
N 41454-PK4-000 2.85 mm (0.111 in.) 0B 41455-PAX-000 2.925 mm (0.115 in.)
O 41455-PK4-000 2.90 mm (0.113 in.) 0C 41456-PAX-000 2.975 mm (0.117 in.)
P 41456-PK4-000 2.95 mm (0.115 in.) 0D 41457-PAX-000 3.025 mm (0.119 in.)
Q 41457-PK4-000 3.00 mm (0.117 in.)
R 41458-PK4-000 3.05 mm (0.119 in.)
0A 41428-PRP-000 1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
0B 41429-PRP-000 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
0C 41430-PRP-000 1.65 mm (0.065 in.)
0D 41431-PRP-000 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
0E 41432-PRP-000 1.75 mm (0.069 in.)
0F 41433-PRP-000 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
0G 41434-PRP-000 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
0H 41435-PRP-000 1.90 mm (0.075 in.)
0I 41436-PRP-000 1.95 mm (0.077 in.)
0J 41437-PRP-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-413

08/04/09 12:23:03 61TL2000_160_0001
Driveline/Axle
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools ................................................................. 16-2
Driveshaft Inspection ................................................... 16-4
Driveshaft Removal ...................................................... 16-4
Driveshaft Disassembly ............................................... 16-7
Dynamic Damper Replacement .................................. 16-10
Driveshaft Reassembly ................................................ 16-11
Driveshaft Installation .................................................. 16-20
Intermediate Shaft Removal ........................................ 16-23
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly ................................. 16-24
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly .................................. 16-26
Intermediate Shaft Installation .................................... 16-29
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１６０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:23:04 61TL2000_160_0002
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools
07GAD-PH70201 Oil Seal Driver, 64 mm 1
07MAC-SL0A202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
07MAD-PR90100 Installer Attachment, 45 mm 1
07NAF-SR30101 Half Shaft Base 1
07XAC-001030A Threaded Adapter, 26 x 1.5 mm 1
07746-0030400 Inner Bearing Driver Attachment, 35 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 1
07947-SB00100 Oil Seal Driver, 44.5 mm 1
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１

ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１６０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:23:06 61TL2000_160_0003
＊０１
DYNAMIC DAMPER
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
Removal, page 16-23 DRIVESHAFT
Disassembly, page 16-24 Inspection, page 16-4
Reassembly, page 16-26 Removal, page 16-4
Installation, page 16-29 Disassembly, page 16-7
Reassembly, page 16-11
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２２６６０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:23:06 61TL2000_160_0004
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Inspection Driveshaft Removal

1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot Special Tools Required
(B) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is
found, replace the boot and boot bands. 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
＊０１
C
A 2. Remove the front wheels.
B
3. Pry up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B),

then remove the nut.
＊０１
D
F
2. Check the driveshaft for cracks and damage. If any B

damage is found, replace the driveshaft.
3. Check the inboard joint (E) and the outboard joint

(F) for cracks and damage. If any damage is found,
A
replace the inboard joint or the outboard joint as an
assembly.
4. Drain the transmission fluid, then reinstall the drain
4. Hold the inboard joint and turn the front wheel by plug with a new sealing washer:
hand, then make sure the joint is not excessively
loose. If necessary, replace the inboard joint or the • Manual transmission (see page 13-13)
outboard joint as an assembly. • Automatic transmission (see page 14-255)
5. Hold the stabilizer link joint pin (A) with a hex

wrench (B), and remove the flange nut (C).
Separate the front stabilizer link (D) from the lower
arm.
＊０２
A

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２２６６０００００ＭＡＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２２６６０００００ＫＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:23:06 61TL2000_160_0005
6. Remove the damper fork mounting nut (A), the 8. Pull the knuckle outward, and separate the
damper fork mounting bolt (B), and the damper outboard joint from the front hub using a plastic
pinch bolt (C), then remove the damper fork (D). hammer.
＊０３＊０５
C
D
A
B
9. Left driveshaft: Pry the inboard joint (A) from the
differential with a prybar. Remove the driveshaft as
an assembly.
7. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the knuckle ball NOTE:
joint, and remove the castle nut (B), then separate • Do not pull on the driveshaft (B), or the inboard
the ball joint from the lower arm (C) using the ball joint may come apart. Pull the inboard joint
joint remover (see page 18-11). straight out to avoid damaging the oil seal.
NOTE: prybar.
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when ＊０６
installing the remover.
A
• Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry
between the lower arm and the knuckle. You
could damage the ball joint.
＊０４
B
07MAC-SL0A202
A
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:23:07 61TL2000_160_0006
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Removal (cont’d)

10. Right driveshaft: Drive the inboard joint (A) off of 12. Remove the set ring (A) from the intermediate shaft.
the intermediate shaft using a drift and a hammer. ＊０９
Remove the driveshaft as an assembly.
NOTE: Do not pull on the driveshaft (B), or the

inboard joint may come apart.
＊０７
A
B
A
11. Remove the set ring (A) from the left driveshaft
inboard joint.
＊０８

08/04/09 12:23:06 61TL2000_160_0004
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Inspection Driveshaft Removal

1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot Special Tools Required
(B) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is
found, replace the boot and boot bands. 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
＊０１
C
A 2. Remove the front wheels.
B
3. Pry up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B),

then remove the nut.
＊０１
D
F
2. Check the driveshaft for cracks and damage. If any B

damage is found, replace the driveshaft.
3. Check the inboard joint (E) and the outboard joint

(F) for cracks and damage. If any damage is found,
A
replace the inboard joint or the outboard joint as an
assembly.
4. Drain the transmission fluid, then reinstall the drain
4. Hold the inboard joint and turn the front wheel by plug with a new sealing washer:
hand, then make sure the joint is not excessively
loose. If necessary, replace the inboard joint or the • Manual transmission (see page 13-13)
outboard joint as an assembly. • Automatic transmission (see page 14-255)
5. Hold the stabilizer link joint pin (A) with a hex

wrench (B), and remove the flange nut (C).
Separate the front stabilizer link (D) from the lower
arm.
＊０２
A

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２２６６０００００ＭＡＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２２６６０００００ＫＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:23:06 61TL2000_160_0005
6. Remove the damper fork mounting nut (A), the 8. Pull the knuckle outward, and separate the
damper fork mounting bolt (B), and the damper outboard joint from the front hub using a plastic
pinch bolt (C), then remove the damper fork (D). hammer.
＊０３＊０５
C
D
A
B
9. Left driveshaft: Pry the inboard joint (A) from the
differential with a prybar. Remove the driveshaft as
an assembly.
7. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the knuckle ball NOTE:
joint, and remove the castle nut (B), then separate • Do not pull on the driveshaft (B), or the inboard
the ball joint from the lower arm (C) using the ball joint may come apart. Pull the inboard joint
joint remover (see page 18-11). straight out to avoid damaging the oil seal.
NOTE: prybar.
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when ＊０６
A
＊０４
B
07MAC-SL0A202
A
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:23:07 61TL2000_160_0006
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Removal (cont’d)

10. Right driveshaft: Drive the inboard joint (A) off of 12. Remove the set ring (A) from the intermediate shaft.
the intermediate shaft using a drift and a hammer. ＊０９
Remove the driveshaft as an assembly.
NOTE: Do not pull on the driveshaft (B), or the

inboard joint may come apart.
＊０７
A
B
A
11. Remove the set ring (A) from the left driveshaft
inboard joint.
＊０８

08/04/09 12:23:07 61TL2000_160_0007
Driveshaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required Low profile type
• Threaded adapter, 26 x 1.5 mm 07XAC-001030A ＊０３
• Slide hammer, 5/8’’-18 UNF, commercially available
• Puller, commercially available
• Boot band pliers, commercially available E
Inboard Joint Side

1. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage
the boot. F
• If the boot band is a welded type (A), cut the boot

band.
• If the boot band is a double loop type (B), lift up
the band end (C), and push it into the clip (D).
• If the boot band is a low profile type (E), pinch the
boot band using commercially available boot 2. Make marks (A) on each roller (B) and the inboard
band pliers (F). joint (C) to identify the locations of the rollers to the
grooves in the inboard joint. Then remove the
Welded type inboard joint on a clean shop towel (D). Be careful
＊０１ not to drop the rollers when separating them from
the inboard joint.
NOTE: Do not engrave or scribe any marks on the

A
rolling surface.
＊０４
C
Double loop type
＊０２
C D
B
A
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２２６６０００００ＬＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:23:07 61TL2000_160_0008
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Disassembly (cont’d)

3. Make marks (A) on the rollers (B) and the spider (C) Outboard Joint Side
to identify the locations of the rollers on the spider,
then remove the rollers. 1. Remove the boot bands (A). Lift up the three tabs
(B) with a screwdriver. Be careful not to damage
NOTE: Do not engrave or scribe any marks on the the boot.
rolling surface. ＊０７
＊０５
B B
F
E
C A
D A
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard
4. Remove the circlip (D). joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
＊０８
5. Make marks (E) on the spider and driveshaft (F) to
identify the position of the spider on the shaft. A
6. Remove the spider.
NOTE: If necessary, use a commercially available

puller.
7. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape

(A) to prevent damaging the boot.
＊０６
8. Remove the inboard boot. Be careful not to damage

the boot.
9. Remove the vinyl tape.

08/04/09 12:23:08 61TL2000_160_0009
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and 8. Remove the stop ring from the driveshaft.
the outboard joint inner race. ＊１１
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same

level as the outboard joint rim (C).
＊０９
B
A
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape

(A) to prevent damaging the boot.
＊１２
5. Securely clamp the driveshaft in a bench vise with

a shop towel.
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the

26 x 1.5 mm threaded adapter (B) and a
A
commercially available 5/8’’-18 UNF slide hammer
(C).
＊１０
B
07XAC-001030A
10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to

damage the boot.
C 11. Remove the vinyl tape.

A
7. Remove the driveshaft from the bench vise.

08/04/09 12:23:08 61TL2000_160_0010
Driveline/Axle
Dynamic Damper Replacement

1. Remove the inboard joint (see page 16-7). 5. Adjust the specified distance (A) between the
outboard joint side and the dynamic damper edge.
2. Remove the dynamic damper band (see step 1 on
page 16-7). NOTE: Check the type of dynamic damper by its
shape.
3. Remove the dynamic damper (A).
Dynamic damper type 1
Dynamic damper type 1 ＊０３
A
＊０１

＊０４
A

＊０２
Model Left/Right Dynamic Specified

Driveshaft Damper Distance (A)
A
Type
M/T Left ――― ―――
Right 1 295.5−300.5 mm
(11.63−11.83 in.)
A/T Left 1 298.5−303.5 mm
(11.75−11.95 in.)
Right 2 292.5−297.5 mm
(11.52−11.71 in.)
6. Install the dynamic damper band (see step 10 on

page 16-14).
4. Install the new dynamic damper.
7. Install the inboard joint (see page 16-12).
NOTE: Be careful not to swap the dynamic dampers.
Check the type of dynamic damper by its shape.
Model Left/Right Dynamic

Driveshaft Damper (A)
Type
M/T Left ―――
Right 1
A/T Left 1
Right 2
16-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２２６６２２５０２ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:23:08 61TL2000_160_0011
Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
＊０１
INBOARD JOINT ROLLERS
SPIDER DOUBLE LOOP BANDS
CIRCLIP (Replacement parts only)
Replace. Replace.
SET RING
Replace.
INBOARD BOOT
Right driveshaft Use the grease included

in the inboard boot set.
Use the grease included
DYNAMIC DAMPER
LOW PROFILE BANDS
Replace.
DOUBLE LOOP BAND

(Replacement part only)
Replace.
DRIVESHAFT
STOP RING
LOW PROFILE BAND Replace.
Replace.
EAR CLAMP BANDS

Replace.
OUTBOARD JOINT
OUTBOARD BOOT

in the outboard boot set.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-11
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２２６６０００００ＬＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:23:09 61TL2000_160_0012
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Reassembly (cont’d)

Special Tools Required 3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning
• Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent, commercially the marks (B) you made on the spider and the end
available of the driveshaft.
• Boot band pliers, Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent, ＊０３
commercially available B
• Boot band pliers, commercially available C
Replace.

this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side A
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent

damaging the inboard boot.
＊０２
A
4. Install a new circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove.

Always rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure
it is fully seated.
5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) with the high
shoulders facing outward and note these items:
• Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on

the spider by aligning the marks (C) you made.
• Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the
2. Install the inboard boot onto the driveshaft, then rollers from falling off.
remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the ＊０４
inboard boot.
C
16-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:23:09 61TL2000_160_0013
6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease 8. Fit the boot ends (A) onto the driveshaft (B) and the
included in the new inboard boot set. inboard joint (C).
＊０７
Grease quantity
Inboard joint:
M/T model: 110−120 g (3.9−4.2 oz)
A/T model: 150−160 g (5.3−5.6 oz)
＊０５

C A
A
7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft and note

these items:
• Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by

aligning the marks (A) you made on the inboard
joint and the rollers.
• Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint is
pointing up to prevent it from falling off.
＊０６
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-13

08/04/09 12:23:09 61TL2000_160_0014
Driveline/Axle

9. Adjust the length (A) of the driveshafts to the figure 11. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the
as shown, then adjust the boots to halfway inboard joint, then install a new double loop band
between full compression and full extension. Bleed (A) onto the boot (B).
excess air from the boots by inserting a flat-tipped
screwdriver between the boot and the joint. NOTE: Pass the end of the new double loop band
through the clip (C) twice in the direction of the
Left driveshaft forward rotation of the driveshaft.
＊０８＊１０
A A
Replace.
Right driveshaft
＊０９
A
12. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.

Model Left/Right Specified Length (A)
Driveshaft 13. Mark position (A) on the band 10−14 mm
M/T Left 559−564 mm (0.4−0.6 in.) from the clip (B).
(22.01−22.20 in.) ＊１１
Right 481−486 mm
B
(18.94−19.13 in.)
A/T Left 554−559 mm
(21.81−22.01 in.) A
Right 480−485 mm
(18.90−19.09 in.)
10. Install new boot bands.
• For the double loop type, go to step 11.

• For the low profile type, go to step 20.
16-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:23:10 61TL2000_160_0015
14. Thread the free end of the band through the nose 17. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
section of the commercially available boot band free end of the band to leave a 5−10 mm
tool KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on (0.2−0.4 in.) tail protruding from the clip.
the winding mandrel (B). ＊１４
＊１２
18. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a

hammer.
NOTE:
15. Using a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot • Make sure the band and the clip do not interfere
band tool, tighten the band until the marked spot with anything on the vehicle and the band does
(C) on the band meets the edge of the clip. not move.
• Clean any grease remaining on the surrounding
16. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of surfaces.
the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the ＊１５
A
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
＊１３
90 degrees
19. Repeat steps 11 through 18 for the band on the

other end of the boot.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-15

08/04/09 12:23:10 61TL2000_160_0016
Driveline/Axle

20. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot Outboard Joint Side
(B), then hook the tab (C) of the band.
＊１６ 1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
B
A damaging the outboard boot.
Replace. ＊１８
B
Replace.
C
21. Close the hook portion of the band with

commercially available boot band pliers (A), then
hook the tabs (B) of the band. 2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and the
＊１７ outboard boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be
careful not to damage the outboard boot.
3. Install a new stop ring (A) in the driveshaft groove

(B).
＊１９
B
22. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot, A
Replace.
and repeat steps 20 and 21.
16-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:23:10 61TL2000_160_0017
4. Pack about 35 g (1.2 oz) grease included in the new 6. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the
outboard boot set into the driveshaft hole in the driveshaft and joint, and tap or hit them from a
outboard joint. height of about 10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface.
NOTE: If you are installing a new outboard joint, NOTE: Do not use a hammer as excessive force
the grease is already installed. may damage the driveshaft. Be careful not to
＊２０ damage the threaded section (A) of the outboard
joint.
＊２２

in the outboard boot set. A
5. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)

10 cm
until the stop ring (C) is close to the joint. (4 in.)
＊２１
A
B 7. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) you

made with the outboard joint rim (B).
＊２３
A
C
Push.
Push.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-17

08/04/09 12:23:11 61TL2000_160_0018
Driveline/Axle

8. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the remaining joint 10. Inspect the length (A) of the driveshafts to the
grease included in the new outboard boot set. figure as shown, then adjust the boots to halfway
between full compression and full extension.
Total grease quantity
Outboard joint: 140−150 g (4.9−5.3 oz) Left driveshaft
＊２４＊２６
A
Right driveshaft
＊２７
A

in the outboard boot set.
9. Fit the boot ends (A) onto the driveshaft (B) and the
outboard joint (C). Bleed any excess air from the Model Left/Right Specified Length (A)
boot by inserting a flat-tipped screwdriver between Driveshaft
the boot and the joint. M/T Left 559−564 mm
＊２５ (22.01−22.20 in.)
Right 481−486 mm
(18.94−19.13 in.)
A/T Left 554−559 mm
(21.81−22.01 in.)
Right 480−485 mm
(18.90−19.09 in.)
A
B
16-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:23:11 61TL2000_160_0019
11. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with

commercially available boot band pliers Kent-
Moore J-35910 or equivalent (B).
＊２８
12. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion

of the band. If the clearance is not within the
standard, close the ear portion of the band tighter.
＊２９
6.0 mm
(0.24 in.) MAX.
3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX.
13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 for the band on the other

end of the boot.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-19

08/04/09 12:23:11 61TL2000_160_0020
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Installation
NOTE: Before starting installation, make sure the 3. Install a new set ring (A) onto the set ring groove
mating surfaces of the joint and the splined section are (B) of the intermediate shaft.
clean. ＊０３
1. Apply about 5 g (0.18 oz) moly 60 paste

(P/N 08734-0001) to the contact area (A) of the
outboard joint and the front wheel bearing.
A
NOTE: The paste helps to prevent noise and Replace.
vibration.
＊０１
4. Apply 0.5−1.0 g (0.02−0.04 oz) of super high temp

A urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the whole splined
(P/N 08734-0001) surface (A) of the right driveshaft. After applying
grease, remove the grease from the splined
grooves at intervals of 2−3 splines and from the
2. Install a new set ring (A) onto the set ring groove set ring groove (B) so that air can bleed from the
(B) of the left driveshaft inboard joint. intermediate shaft.
＊０２＊０４
A
(P/N 08798-9002)
A
Replace.
16-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２２６６０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:23:12 61TL2000_160_0021
5. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the 8. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball
differential thoroughly with solvent or brake joint tapered section and threads, then install the
cleaner, and dry with compressed air. knuckle (A) onto the lower arm (B). Be careful not to
damage the ball joint boot (C). Wipe off the grease
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent. before tightening the nut at the ball joint. Torque
the castle nut (D) to the lower torque specification,
6. Insert the inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with
differential (B) or intermediate shaft (C) until the set the ball joint pin hole.
ring (D) locks in the groove (E).
NOTE:
NOTE: Insert the driveshaft horizontally to prevent • Make sure the ball joint boot is not damaged or
damaging the oil seal. cracked.
• Do not align the nut by loosening it.
Left ＊０７
＊０５
A D
A
E
Front
C
B
B
Right Front
＊１２ D
A 14 x 1.5 mm
78−88 N·m
C D (8.0−9.0 kgf·m, E
58−65 lbf·ft) Replace.
9. Install a new cotter pin (E) into the ball joint pin
hole, and bend the cotter pin as shown.
7. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub on

the knuckle.
＊０６
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-21

08/04/09 12:23:12 61TL2000_160_0022
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Installation (cont’d)

10. Install the damper fork (A) over the driveshaft and 13. Place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise
onto the lower arm. Install the damper in the the suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight.
damper fork so the aligning tab (B) is aligned with
the slot in the damper fork. Loosely install the NOTE: Do not put the floor jack under the ball joint.
damper pinch bolt (C).
＊０８ 14. Tighten the damper pinch bolt and the damper fork
mounting nut while holding the damper fork
C
10 x 1.25 mm mounting bolt to the specified torque values.
49 N·m
(5.0 kgf·m, 15. Apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating
36 lbf·ft)
surface of the new spindle nut (A).
＊１０
B
A
26 x 1.5 mm
328 N·m
E A (33.5 kgf·m,
12 x 1.25 mm 242 lbf·ft)
64 N·m Replace.
(6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
Replace.
D
Replace.
11. Loosely install a new damper fork mounting bolt

(D) and a new damper fork mounting nut (E).
B
12. Connect the front stabilizer link (A) to the lower arm,
and loosely install a new flange nut. Hold the
stabilizer link joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), 16. Install the spindle nut, then tighten it. After
and tighten the new flange nut (D). tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
＊０９ shoulder (B) against the driveshaft.
B
A wheel, then install the front wheels.
18. Turn the front wheel by hand, and make sure there
is no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts.
C
19. Refill the transmission with the recommended

D transmission fluid:
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m
(4.0 kgf·m, • Manual transmission (see page 13-13)
29 lbf·ft) • Automatic transmission (see page 14-255)
Replace.
20. Remove the floor jack, then lower the vehicle on
the lift.
21. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if

necessary (see page 18-5).
16-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:23:13 61TL2000_160_0023
Intermediate Shaft Removal

1. Drain the transmission fluid. Reinstall the drain 4. Remove the flange bolt (A) and the two dowel bolts
plug using a new sealing washer: (B).
＊０２
2. Remove the right driveshaft (see page 16-4).

A
3. M/T model: Remove the CKP sensor cover (A) from B
the engine block.
＊０１
5. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) from the

differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal
until it is clear of the differential to prevent
damaging the oil seal (B).
＊０３
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-23
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２３６５０００００ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:23:13 61TL2000_160_0024
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly

Special Tools Required 3. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the
• Half shaft base 07NAF-SR30101 intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the half shaft
• Oil seal driver, 44.5 mm 07947-SB00100 base (C) and a press. Be careful not to damage the
bearing support ring (D) on the intermediate shaft
1. Remove the heat shield (A). during disassembly.
＊０１＊０３
PRESS
B
A
D
A
C
07NAF-SR30101
2. Remove the outer seal (A) and the external snap
ring (B) from the intermediate shaft (C). 4. Remove the internal snap ring (A) from the bearing
＊０２ support (B).
C
B ＊０４
B A
A
16-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２３６５０００００ＬＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:23:13 61TL2000_160_0025
5. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the

bearing support (B) using the 44.5 mm oil seal
driver (C), the half shaft base (D), and a press.
＊０５
PRESS
C
07947-SB00100
D
07NAF-SR30101
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-25

08/04/09 12:23:13 61TL2000_160_0026
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly

Exploded View
＊０１
FLANGE BOLT
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, HEAT SHIELD FLANGE BOLT
7.2 lbf·ft) 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT RING
DOWEL BOLTS
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m
(4.0 kgf·m,
29 lbf·ft)
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT BEARING

INTERMEDIATE SHAFT Replace.
INTERNAL SNAP RING
BEARING SUPPORT RING

EXTERNAL SNAP RING
OUTER SEAL
(P/N 08798-9002) Replace.
FLANGE BOLT
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m BEARING SUPPORT
(4.0 kgf·m,
29 lbf·ft)
SET RING
Replace.
Pack the interior of the

outer seal.
16-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２３６５０００００ＬＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:23:14 61TL2000_160_0027
Special Tools Required 3. Install the internal snap ring (A) in the groove (B) of
• Oil seal driver, 64 mm 07GAD-PH70201 the bearing support.
• Half shaft base 07NAF-SR30101 ＊０３
• Inner bearing driver attachment, 35 mm
07746-0030400
• Driver handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
• Installer attachment, 45 mm 07MAD-PR90100 B

this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry

them with compressed air.
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent. A
2. Press the new intermediate shaft bearing (A) into 4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the new shaft
the bearing support (B) using the 52 x 55 mm bearing (B) using the 35 mm inner bearing driver
bearing driver attachment (C), the 15 x 135L driver attachment (C) and a press.
handle (D), the half shaft base (E), and a press. ＊０４
＊０２ PRESS
PRESS
D
07749-0010000
A
C
07746-0010400
B
B
E A
07NAF-SR30101 Replace.
C
07746-0030400
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-27

08/04/09 12:23:14 61TL2000_160_0028
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly (cont’d)

5. Install the external snap ring (A) in the groove of 7. Install the heat shield (A).
the intermediate shaft (B). ＊０７
＊０５
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
B A
6. Install a new outer seal (A) into the bearing support

(B) using the 45 mm installer attachment (C),
64 mm oil seal driver (D), the half shaft base (E),
and a press. Press the seal until it is
4 ± 0.2 mm (0.16 ± 0.008 in) below the surface of
the bearing support end.
＊０６
PRESS
D
07GAD-PH70201
A
C Replace.
07MAD-PR90100
Pack the interior

of the outer seal.
E
07NAF-SR30101
16-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:23:14 61TL2000_160_0029
Intermediate Shaft Installation

1. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft 5. Install the right driveshaft (see page 16-20).
contacts the differential thoroughly with solvent or
brake cleaner, and dry with compressed air. 6. M/T model: Install the CKP sensor cover (A) to the
engine block.
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent. ＊０３
2. Install a new set ring (A) onto the set ring groove
(B) of the intermediate shaft (C).
＊０１
D
A
C A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
3. Insert the intermediate shaft into the differential
correctly. 7. Refill the transmission with the recommended
transmission fluid:
NOTE: Insert the intermediate shaft carefully to
prevent damaging the oil seal (D). • Manual transmission (see page 13-13)
4. Install the flange bolt (A) and two dowel bolts (B).
＊０２ 8. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
B necessary (see page 18-5).
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) A
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m 9. Test-drive the vehicle.
(4.0 kgf·m,
29 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-29
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｅ１６２３６５０００００ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:14 61TL2000_170_0002
Steering
Steering
Special Tools ................................................................. 17-2
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check ....................... 17-4
Power Assist Check ...................................................... 17-4
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection ................. 17-5
Steering Wheel Removal ............................................. 17-6
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly ................ 17-7
Steering Wheel Installation ......................................... 17-8
Steering Column Removal and Installation ............... 17-9
Steering Column Inspection ........................................ 17-13
Steering Lock Replacement ......................................... 17-15
Rack Guide Adjustment ............................................... 17-16
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement .......................... 17-17
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement ...................... 17-18
EPS (Electrical Power Steering) Components

General Troubleshooting Information ....................... 17-20
Memorizing the Torque Sensor Neutral Position ...... 17-23
DTC Troubleshooting Index ........................................ 17-24
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 17-28
DTC Troubleshooting ................................................... 17-31
Symptom Troubleshooting ......................................... 17-60
Steering Gearbox Removal and Installation .............. 17-63
Rack End Removal and Installation ............................ 17-79
Torque Sensor Replacement ....................................... 17-83
Rack Guide Removal/Installation ................................ 17-84
EPS Control Unit Removal/Installation ....................... 17-85
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１７０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:15 61TL2000_170_0003
Steering
Special Tools
07MAA-SL00100 Locknut Wrench, 40 mm 1
07MAK-PY30100 Subhanger Stay 1
07965-SA50500 Front Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 1
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１

ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１７０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:17 61TL2000_170_0004
＊０１
DRIVER’S AIRBAG
Replacement,
page 24-150
STEERING WHEEL
Removal, page 17-6
Disassembly/Reassembly,
page 17-7
STEERING COLUMN
Steering Lock Replacement, page 17-15
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-16
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement, page 17-17
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement, page 17-18
EPS Component Location Index, page 17-19
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ０００００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:18 61TL2000_170_0005
Steering
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Power Assist Check

Check
NOTE: This test should be done with original equipment
tires and wheels at the correct tire pressure.
1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position.
2. Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel
left and right without moving the front wheels. 2. Attach a commercially available spring scale to the
steering wheel. With the engine idling and the
• If the play is within the limit, the gearbox and the vehicle on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as
linkage are OK. shown, and read it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
• If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide ＊０１
(see page 17-16). If the play is still excessive after
rack guide adjustment, inspect the steering
linkage and gearbox (see page 17-5).
Rotational play: 0−10 mm (0−0.39 in.)

＊０１
3. If the scale reads no more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 lbf),

the power assist is OK. If it reads more, check these
items:
• Steering linkage (see page 17-5)

• Rack guide adjustment (see page 17-16)
• EPS system (see page 17-20)

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ００００００５７１６１ＭＡＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ０００００００００００ＭＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:38:18 61TL2000_170_0006
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
＊０１
STEERING COLUMN
Inspect for loose
mounting hardware.
BOOT
Inspect for damage
and deterioration.
STEERING JOINTS
Check for a loose joint bolt, or
faulty movement.
BALL JOINT BOOT

STEERING GEARBOX TIE-ROD LOCKNUT Inspect for damage
Inspect for loose mounting hardware. Check for loose locknut. and deterioration.
GEARBOX MOUNT CUSHIONS
Inspect for deterioration.
TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT
Inspect for faulty movement
and damage.
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ００００００５７１３１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:19 61TL2000_170_0007
Steering
Steering Wheel Removal

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Install a commercially available steering wheel
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the puller (A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before steering wheel from the steering column shaft by
doing repairs or service. turning the pressure bolt (C) of the puller.
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure Note these items when removing the steering
(see page 22-78). wheel:
• Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering
2. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
the driver’s airbag from the steering wheel • If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel
(see page 24-150). hub more than five threads, the bolts will hit the
cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install
3. Disconnect the cable reel subharness connector (A). a pair of jam nuts five threads up on each puller
＊０１ bolt.
B
＊０２
D C
4. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (B).
6. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the
steering wheel bolt and the steering wheel from the
steering column.
＊０３

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ００００００５７１６１ＫＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:38:19 61TL2000_170_0008
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly
＊０１
A : Screw, 3 B : Screw, 7 C : Screw, 2 D : Screw, 6 E : Screw, 2 F : Screw, 2
HFL-VOICE CONTROL SWITCH AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH

LID
D
B
D
B
SET PLATE CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
B
B
D B
D
D
D
STEERING WHEEL TRIM MULTI-INFORMATION B

SWITCH
PADDLE SHIFTER −
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
LID
DAMPER
E PADDLE SHIFTER ＋
(UPSHIFT SWITCH)
E
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS

HORN SPRING
F
C
A
C
B
A
A
HARNESS GUIDE
HORN PLATE
STEERING WHEEL
2.5 N·m REAR COVER
(0.25 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft) F
STEERING WHEEL ACCESS PANEL
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ００００００５７１６１ＭＦＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:20 61TL2000_170_0009
Steering
Steering Wheel Installation

1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the 3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A), and tighten it to
front wheels are pointing straight ahead, then the specified torque. Connect the cable reel
center the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the subharness connector (B). Make sure the wire
cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it harness is routed and fastened properly.
counterclockwise about three full turns. The arrow ＊０３
mark (B) on the cable reel label point should point
straight up. A
39 N·m
＊０１ (4.0 kgf·m,
B A 29 lbf·ft)
4. Install the driver’s airbag (see page 24-150).

(see page 22-78), and do these tasks:
2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal
canceling sleeve (B) as shown. Install the steering • Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that
wheel on to the steering column shaft, making sure the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds
the steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of and then goes off.
the cable reel and the tabs of the turn signal • Make sure the horn and turn signal switches
canceling sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel work properly.
or steering column shaft when installing the • Make sure the steering wheel switches work
steering wheel. properly.
＊０２
6. After installation, check the steering wheel spoke
angle. If the steering spoke angles to the right and
A left are not equal (steering wheel is not centered),
correct the engagement of the wheel/column shaft
splines.
B D C

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ００００００５７１６１ＫＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:20 61TL2000_170_0010
Steering Column Removal and Installation

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 7. Loosen the upper steering joint bolt (A), and
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the remove the lower steering joint bolt (B). Disconnect
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before the steering joint (C) by moving the steering joint
doing repairs or service. toward the column. Do not disconnect the steering
joint from the column shaft (D).
Removal
NOTE:
1. Adjust the steering column to the full tilt down • If the center guide (E) is in place and has not
position, and to the full telescopic out position. moved, leave it in place.
• If the center guide has come off, discard it.
2. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure ＊０２
D A
(see page 22-78). 8 x 1.25 mm
3. Remove the driver’s airbag (see page 24-150) and

the steering wheel (see page 17-6).
C
4. Remove the driver’s dashboard undercover
(see page 20-119).
5. Remove the column covers (see page 20-132).
6. Remove the steering joint cover (A).

＊０１
A
E
B
8 x 1.25 mm
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ００００００５７１０１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:21 61TL2000_170_0011
Steering
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont’d)

8. Disconnect the wire harness connectors from the combination switch assembly/cable reel (A).
＊０３
A
B
8 x 1.25 mm
16 N·m (1.6 kgf·m, 12 lbf·ft)
9. Remove the combination switch assembly from the steering column shaft by removing the three screws (B).
10. Disconnect the connectors from the ignition switch, and release the wire harness clips from the steering column.
11. Remove the steering column (C) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts.
17-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:38:21 61TL2000_170_0012
Installation 3. Slip the lower end of the steering joint (A) onto the
pinion shaft (B).
1. Install the steering column in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items: NOTE:
• Pinion shaft with center guide: Install steering
• Make sure the wires are not caught or pinched by joint by aligning the center guide (C).
any parts. • Pinion shaft without center guide: Position the
• Tighten the three screws (A) in the sequence steering column by aligning the gap (D) with the
shown. angle.
＊０４＊０５
A FRONT
35±20 °
A
A
D
2. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-11

08/04/09 12:38:22 61TL2000_170_0013
Steering
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont’d)

4. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the 7. Install the steering joint cover (A).
groove (B) around the pinion shaft, then loosely ＊０７
install the lower steering joint bolt (C). Be sure that A
the joint bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion
shaft.
＊０６
D
8 x 1.25 mm
28 N·m (2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)
8. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-8) and the

driver’s airbag (see page 24-150).

(see page 22-78), and do these tasks:
C • Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that

8 x 1.25 mm
28 N·m the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds
A B (2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft) and then goes off.
• Make sure the horn and turn signal switches
5. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the work properly.
steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the lower • Make sure the steering wheel switches work
joint bolt to the specified torque. properly.
6. Tighten the upper steering joint bolt (D) to the 10. After installation, do these checks:
specified torque.
• Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If the
steering spoke angles to the right and left are not
equal (steering wheel and rack are not centered),
correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft
splines.
• Set the steering column to the center tilt position,
and to the center telescopic position, then do the
front toe inspection (see page 18-5).
17-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:38:22 61TL2000_170_0014
Steering Column Inspection

Inspection
1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-9).
2. Do these checks:
• Check for loose bearing mounting nuts (A). If they are loose, replace the column as an assembly.
• Check the steering column ball bearings (B) and the steering joints (C) for play and proper movement. If any
bearing is noisy or has excessive play, replace the steering column as an assembly.
• Check the sliding capsules (D) for distortion or breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace the steering
column as an assembly.
• Check the tilt mechanism and telescopic mechanism for movement and damage.
＊０１
D
D
B
3. Install the steering column (see page 17-11).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-13
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ００００００５７１０１ＭＡＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:38:22 61TL2000_170_0015
Steering
Steering Column Inspection (cont’d)

Check of Tilting Force Check of Telescoping Force
1. Set the steering wheel in the straight ahead driving 1. Set the steering wheel in the straight ahead driving
position, and loosen the lock lever fully. position, and loosen the lock lever fully.
2. Attach the spring scale to the highest point of the 2. Attach the spring scale to the center point of the
steering wheel, and tilt the steering column to the steering wheel as shown.
lowest position. ＊０３
＊０２
Upward
Downward 3. Pull the spring scale, and read the force required to
move the steering column during telescoping.
3. Pull the spring scale straight up, and read the force Telescoping force:
required to move the steering column. Standard: 110 N (11.2 kgf, 24.7 lbf) max.
4. Attach the spring scale to the lowest point of the 4. If the measurement is higher than specified,
steering wheel. replace the steering column as an assembly
(see page 17-9).
5. Pull the spring scale straight down, and read the
force required to move the steering column.
Tilting force (upward/downward):

Standard: 70 N (7.1 kgf, 15 lbf) max.
6. If the measurement is higher than specified,

replace the steering column as an assembly
(see page 17-9).
17-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:38:23 61TL2000_170_0016
Steering Lock Replacement

Check of Lock Lever Force 1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-9).
1. Move the lock lever (A) from the loosened position 2. Center-punch each of the two shear bolts, and drill
to the locked position three to five times, then their heads off with a 5.0 mm (3/16 in.) drill bit. Be
release the lock lever. Adjust the steering column careful not to damage the switch body when
to the center tilt position and also to the full removing the shear bolts.
telescopic out position, and hold the steering wheel. ＊０１
＊０４
3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body.
10 mm
4. Install the switch body without the key inserted.
(0.39 in.)
5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.
6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper

operation of the steering wheel lock and that the
2. Using a push gauge, push the lock lever at 10 mm ignition key turns freely.
(0.39 in.) from its end, and measure the force
required to move lock lever. 7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
twist off.
Lock lever force: ＊０２
50−70 N (5.1−7.1 kgf, 11−16 lbf) min. A
3. If the measurement is higher than specified,

replace the steering column as an assembly
(see page 17-9).
8. Rewrite the new immobilizer control unit-receiver

(see page 22-391), and make sure the immobilizer
system works properly.
9. Install the steering column (see page 17-11).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-15
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ００００００５７１４１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:23 61TL2000_170_0017
Steering
Rack Guide Adjustment

Special Tools Required 4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 N·m
Locknut wrench, 40 mm 07MAA-SL00100 (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft), then loosen it.
＊０３
10±5 °
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the

locknut wrench, then remove the rack guide screw
(B).
＊０１
07MAA-SL00100
A B
25 N·m
(2.5 kgf·m,
18 lbf·ft)
B
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 5.9 N·m

(0.6 kgf·m, 4 lbf·ft), then back it off to the specified
angle.
Specified return angle: 10±5 °

3. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw
(A), and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or 6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench,
Loctite 5699) to the middle of the threads (B). and tighten the locknut by hand until it’s fully
Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering seated.
gearbox.
7. Install the locknut wrench on the locknut (B), and
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes has passed after hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench.
applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and Tighten the locknut to the specified torque.
residue, and reapply new sealant.
＊０２ 8. Check for unusual steering effort through the
complete turning range.
9. Check the steering wheel rotation play (see page

17-4) and the power assist (see page 17-4).
17-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ００００００５７１５１ＭＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:24 61TL2000_170_0018
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement

Special Tools Required 6. Install the new tie-rod ball joint boot (A) using the
Front hub dis/assembly tool 07965-SA50500 front hub dis/assembly tool. The boot must not
have a gap at the boot installation sections (B).
1. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle After installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered
(see step 10 on page 17-64). section for grease contamination, and wipe it if
necessary.
2. Remove the tie-rod end from the rack end. ＊０２
07965-SA50500
3. Remove the tie-rod ball joint boot from the tie-rod
end, and wipe the old grease off the ball pin.
4. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh
multipurpose grease.
＊０１
B C
A
A B
E
7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.
D 8. Connect the tie-rod ball joint to the knuckle (see

5. Pack the interior of the new tie-rod ball joint boot 9. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
(B) and lip (C) with fresh multipurpose grease. necessary (see page 18-5).
Note these items when installing new grease:

• Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and
the tapered section (E) of the ball pin.
• Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
to enter the boot.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-17
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ００００００５９５０１ＫＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:38:24 61TL2000_170_0019
Steering
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement

1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-63). 4. Apply a mild soap and water solution to the new
gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place it on
2. Position a 36 mm socket wrench (A) on the flange the gearbox mounting cushion hole.
part of the gearbox housing with a washer (B), a ＊０２
10 x 150 mm flange bolt (C) and a 10 mm nut (D) as B
shown.
＊０１
A
C
B
B
5. Position the 36 mm socket wrench on the flange

A D part of the gearbox housing with a washer, a flange
bolt, and the nut as shown.
6. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the

nut until the mount cushion edges (B) properly fit
on the gearbox flange surface.
3. Hold the flange bolt with a wrench, and tighten the
nut with a wrench. Remove the gearbox mount 7. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-71).
cushion (E).
17-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ００００００５７１１８ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:25 61TL2000_170_0020
EPS Components

＊０１
STEERING GEARBOX
Rack End Removal and Installation, page 17-79
Rack Guide Removal/Installation, page 17-84
＊０２
EPS CONTROL UNIT

DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) Removal/Installation, page 17-85
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-19
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:26 61TL2000_170_0021
EPS Components

EPS Indicator When DTC 51-01, 51-02 or 51-06 is stored in the control
unit, the EPS indicator will stay on until the DTC is
Under normal conditions, the EPS indicator (A) comes erased. When a problem is detected and the EPS
on when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), then indicator comes on, there are cases when the indicator
goes off after the engine is started. This indicates that stays on until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0),
the LED and its circuit are operating correctly. and cases when the indicator goes off automatically
If there is a failure in the system after the engine is when the system returns to normal. Even though the
started, the EPS indicator will stay on, and the power system is operating normally, the EPS indicator will
assist is turned off or restricted. come on under the following conditions:
＊０１
• The vehicle speed decreases abruptly from 12 mph
A
(20 km/h) or more (by applying brake), and it is less
than 1 mph (1 km/h) and engine speed is 1,650 rpm
(2,150 rpm if within 5 minutes of starting engine) or
above for 5 seconds (continuously) after the abrupt
deceleration.
• While turning the steering wheel with the vehicle
stopped for 20 seconds, and the engine speed is
1,650 rpm (2,150 rpm if within 5 minutes of starting
engine) or above for at least 10 seconds.
• When the engine speed is 500 rpm or less, and the
vehicle is traveling at a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) or
more for about 3 seconds.
To determine the actual cause of the problem, question

the client about the conditions during which the
When the EPS indicator comes on, the control unit problem occurred, taking the above conditions into
memorizes the DTC. In this case, the control unit will consideration.
not activate the EPS system after the engine starts
again, but it keeps the EPS indicator on. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
• If the CPU cannot be activated, or it fails, the EPS
indicator comes on, but the DTC is not memorized.
• The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However,
when the same DTC is detected more than once, the
most recent DTC is written over the prior DTC,
therefore only one occurrence is memorized.
• The lowest DTC is indicated first. The DTCs are
indicated in ascending order, not in the order that
they occurred.
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-
volatile memory) therefore the memorized DTCs
cannot be erased by disconnecting the battery. Do the
specified procedures to clear the DTCs.
17-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１００００００００ＢＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:26 61TL2000_170_0022
Self-diagnosis Torque Sensor Neutral Position

Self-diagnosis can be classified into three categories: The EPS control unit stores the torque sensor neutral
position in the EEPROM. The torque sensor neutral
• Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts position must be memorized whenever the gearbox, the
and until the EPS indicator goes off. torque sensor, or the EPS control unit is replaced.
• Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to NOTE: The torque sensor neutral position is not
LOCK (0). effected when erasing the DTCs.
• Steering diagnosis: Done during regular diagnosis
while turning the steering wheel. How to Troubleshoot DTCs
The EPS control unit does these functions when a The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
problem is detected by self-diagnosis: of the problem is still present and the EPS indicator is
still on. Following the procedure when the EPS
1. Turns on the EPS indicator. indicator does not come on can result in incorrect
diagnosis.
2. Memorizes the DTC.
1. Question the client about the conditions when the
3. Stops power assist and manual steering operation problem occurred, and try to reproduce the same
resumes. conditions for troubleshooting. Find out when the
EPS indicator came on, such as while turning, after
NOTE: For DTCs 11-01, 11-02, 12-01, 21-01, 21-02, turning, when the vehicle was at a certain speed,
22-01, 35-04, 36-02, and 37-01 the EPS indicator will etc.
go off automatically, and the system returns to
normal. 2. When the EPS indicator does not come on during
the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done based on
Restriction on Power Assist Operation the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor terminal
contact, etc., in the affected circuit before you start
Repeated extreme steering force, such as turning the troubleshooting.
steering wheel continuously back-and-forth with the
vehicle stopped, causes an increase of power 3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTC and test-drive
consumption in the EPS motor. The increase of electric the vehicle. Be sure the EPS indicator does not
current causes the EPS motor to heat up. Because this come on.
heat adversely affects the system, the control unit
monitors the electric current draw of the EPS motor.
When the control unit detects heat build-up in the EPS

motor, it reduces the electric current to the EPS motor
gradually to protect the system, and it restricts the
power assist operation. The EPS indicator does not
come on during this function.
When steering torque is not applied to the steering

wheel, or when the ignition is turned to LOCK (0) and
the EPS motor cools, the control unit will restore the
power assist gradually until it’s fully restored (after
about 8 minutes).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-21

08/04/09 12:38:26 61TL2000_170_0023
EPS Components

How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic How to Retrieve DTCs
System)
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the
1. If the system indicators stay on, connect the HDS to HDS to the data link connector (DLC) under the
the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
＊０２ 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

and the EPS control unit. If it doesn’t troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the

DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC troubleshooting. Do the all
systems DTC check, and troubleshoot any
powertrain DTCs first.
How to Clear DTCs

A
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). HDS to the data link connector (DLC) under the
and the EPS control unit. If it doesn’t, troubleshoot 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for all and the EPS control unit. If it doesn’t troubleshoot
systems, and note them. Then refer to the indicated the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
DTC’s troubleshooting, and do the appropriate
troubleshooting procedure. 4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts
on the HDS.
NOTE:
• The HDS can read the DTC, the current data, and 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
other system data.
• For specific operations, refer to the Help menu
that came with the HDS.
17-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:38:27 61TL2000_170_0024
Memorizing the Torque Sensor Neutral Position

The torque sensor neutral position must be memorized
whenever the steering gearbox, the torque sensor, the
EPS motor, or the EPS control unit is replaced. Note that
the torque sensor neutral position is not affected when
erasing the DTC.
NOTE: The torque sensor is temperature sensitive.

When memorizing the torque sensor neutral position,
the ambient temperature must be above 68 °F (20 °C).

HDS to the DLC (data link connector) (A) located
under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
＊０１

and the EPS control unit. If it doesn’t, troubleshoot
4. From the EPS MENU, select MISCELLANEOUS

TEST, then TORQUE SENSOR LEARN, and follow
the screen prompts on the HDS.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific

instructions.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-23
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１０００２５１４１ＭＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:27 61TL2000_170_0025
EPS Components

DTC Detection Item Note
11-01 Low/High IG1-terminal Voltage (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-31)
11-02 Low/High IG1-terminal Voltage (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-32)
12-01 Low/High VBU Voltage (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-33)
21-01 Excessive Change of the Vehicle Speed Signal (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-35)
21-02 Comparison between the Vehicle Speed and the Engine Speed Signal (see page 17-35)
(Regular Diagnosis)
22-01 Engine Speed Signal (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-37)
31-01 No Writing the Torque Sensor Neutral Position (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-38)
32-01 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Current Sensor) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-39)
32-02 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Current Sensor) (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-39)
32-07 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Current Sensor) (Steering Diagnosis) (see page 17-39)
32-08 Current Sensor (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-40)
32-09 Current Sensor (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-40)
33-01 Lower FET Stuck ON (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-41)
33-02 Upper FET Stuck ON (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-43)
33-06 Lower FET Stuck ON (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-41)
33-07 Upper FET Stuck ON (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-43)
34-01 Power Relay Stuck ON (IG Switch is in LOCK (0)) (see page 17-44)
34-02 Fail-safe Relay Stuck ON (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-45)
35-01 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (CPU) (Initial Diagnosis/Regular (see page 17-39)
Diagnosis)
35-02 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (EEPROM) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-39)
35-04 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (CPU Communication) (Regular (see page 17-39)
Diagnosis)
35-05 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (EPS Motor/EPS CPU) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-46)
35-07 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (INHL/INHR Ports) (Initial Diagnosis/ (see page 17-39)
Regular Diagnosis)
36-02 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (INH Output Circuit) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-39)
37-01 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Step-up Circuit) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-39)
51-01 Low/High Voltage for the Torque Sensor (VT1 and VT2) (Regular (see page 17-46)
Diagnosis)
51-02 Torque Sensor (VT3 Differential-amplification Function) (Regular (see page 17-50)
Diagnosis)
51-03 Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2 Rapid Change) (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-50)
51-06 Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2 Average) (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-50)
51-07 Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2 Initial Check) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-50)
61-04 Open/Short in the EPS Motor Harness (Steering Diagnosis) (see page 17-53)
71-01 EPS Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/COS Signals) (Steering Diagnosis) (see page 17-55)
71-02 EPS Motor Angle Sensor (Neutral Position Learning of SIN/COS) (Initial (see page 17-55)
Diagnosis)
71-03 EPS Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/COS Signals) (Steering Diagnosis) (see page 17-55)
71-04 EPS Motor Angle Sensor (Check Signals) (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-58)
NOTE:
• Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts and until the EPS indicator goes off.
• Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
• Steering diagnosis: Done during regular diagnosis while turning the steering wheel.
17-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１００００００００ＧＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:27 61TL2000_170_0026

HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210)
EPS control unit or the vehicle
EPS indicator does not come on Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 17-60)
EPS indicator does not go off, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 17-61)
DTCs are stored
EPS indicator is not on, no DTCs are 1. Check the EPS motor power wires between the EPS control unit
stored, but there is no power assist or and the EPS motor for a short to body ground. Repair as needed.
power assist is down 2. If the EPS motor power wires are OK, replace the steering gearbox
(short in the EPS motor) (see page 17-63).
3. Check the power and body ground connections at the EPS control
unit.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-25
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１００００００００ＨＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:38:27 61TL2000_170_0027
EPS Components
System Description
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (2P)
＊０１
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Signal

number (Terminal name)
1 BLK PG Ground for the actuator EPS ―――
(Power ground) motor
2 WHT ＋B Power source for the actuator Battery voltage at all times
(Plus battery) EPS motor
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (2P)

＊０２

1 WHT MW Drives the actuator EPS motor ―――
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (2P)

＊０３

1 RED MU Drives the actuator EPS motor ―――
2 BLK MV Drives the actuator EPS motor ―――
17-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１００００００００ＣＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:28 61TL2000_170_0028
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector D (28P)

＊０４

1 WHT CAN-H CAN communication circuit ―――
(CAN-HI)
3 YEL NEP Detects engine speed signal With engine running: pulses
(Engine speed pulse)
7 ORN SCS Detects service check connector ―――
(Service check signal) signal
8 LT GRN VS2 Detects torque sensor signal
(Voltage sensor 2)
9 RED PVF Drives the torque sensor
(Voltage fade)
10 PNK VS1 Detects torque sensor signal
(Voltage sensor 1)
12 PNK S1 Detects motor angle sensor
(Signal 1)
13 BLU R1 Detects motor angle sensor
(EPS Motor angle signal
sensor 1)
14 BRN H-S2 Detects motor angle sensor
(Signal 2)
15 RED CAN-L CAN communication circuit
(CAN-LO)
16 WHT IG-1 Power source for activating the With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
(Ignition 1) system
17 LT BLU K-LINE Communicates with HDS With service check signal opened: about 5.0 V
(Data link connector)
26 GRN S3 Detects motor angle sensor ―――
(Signal 3)
27 PNK R2 Detects motor angle sensor
(EPS Motor angle signal
sensor 2)
28 BLU H-S4 Detects motor angle sensor
(Signal 4)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-27

08/04/09 12:38:28 61TL2000_170_0029
EPS Components
Circuit Diagram
＊９０
BATTERY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
WHT
No. 2-1 DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH
(EPS) (70 A) FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 1 No. 3-1 IGNITION SWITCH
(MAIN) (100 A) (IG MAIN) (50 A) 2 IG1 5 C5 No. 6 (7. 5 A) P7
WHT BLU WHT
No. 5 (7. 5 A) P20
BRN
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
15
BRN
EPS IG1
INDICATOR
22
WHT
CAN-H
21
RED
CAN-L
ECM/PCM
A29
BLK
A3
WHT
A4
RED
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
(DLC)
6
WHT
14
RED
9
ORN
7
LT BLU
16
WHT ＋B
4
BRN
G501
17-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１００００００００ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:38:29 61TL2000_170_0030
＊９０
EPS CONTROL UNIT
STEERING GEARBOX
POWER RELAY
A2
WHT EPS MOTOR
＋B ANGLE-SENSOR
D13 5
BLU
D16 R1 R1
WHT
IG1 D27 2
PNK
R2 R2
D12 4
PNK
S1 S1
D26 1
GRN
S3 S3
D14 6
BRN
S2 S2
D28 3
BLU
S4 S4
D3
BLK YEL
NEP FAIL-SAFE EPS MOTOR
RELAY
B1 3
WHT
MW MW
FAIL-SAFE
RELAY
C1 2
RED
MU MU
CURRENT CURRENT
SENSOR SENSOR C2 1
BLK
MV MV
D1 A1
WHT BLK
PG TORQUE
CAN-H CAN SENSOR
CONTROLLER G203
D15
RED
CAN-L D10 1 1
PNK PNK
D7 VS1 VS1
ORN
SCS D9 2 2
RED RED
D17 PVF PVF
LT BLU
K-LINE
D8 3 3
LT GRN LT GRN
VS2 VS2
6
BLK BRN
: 12 V
:5V 5
BLK BLK
4
BLK BLK
G301 G302
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-29

08/04/09 12:39:13 61TL2000_170_0031
EPS Components
Circuit Diagram (cont’d)

＊０１
EPS CONTROL UNIT EPS CONTROL UNIT EPS CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A (2P) CONNECTOR B (2P) CONNECTOR C (2P)
EPS CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR D (28P)
MOTOR-ANGLE SENSOR TORQUE SENSOR MOTOR 3P

6P CONNECTOR 3P CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
17-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:39:14 61TL2000_170_0032
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11-01: Low/High IG1-terminal Voltage 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(Initial Diagnosis)
10. Wait at least 60 seconds.
11. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. connector D (28P) terminal No. 16 and body ground.
＊０１
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P)

IG1 (WHT)
Is DT C 11-01 indicated?
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Check for loose terminals or poor connections.
If the connections are good, the system is OK at
this time. Is there battery voltage?
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES−Check for loose terminals in the EPS control
unit connectors and repair if necessary. If no poor
8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P). connections are found, replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-85).
NO−If there is no voltage, or the voltage is lower

than specified, repair an open or high resistance in
the wire between the No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in the
driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box and EPS control
unit. If the wire checks OK, check the battery
(see page 22-77), and troubleshoot the alternator
regulator circuit (see page 4-25).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-31
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ１１０１ＦＡＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:39:14 61TL2000_170_0033
EPS Components

DTC 11-02: Low/High IG1-terminal Voltage 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(Regular Diagnosis)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. connector D (28P) terminal No. 16 and body ground.
＊０１

IG1 (WHT)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Check for loose terminals or poor connections.
If the connections are good, the system is OK at
this time. Is there battery voltage?
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES−Check for loose terminals in the EPS control
unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P). connections are found, replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-85).
NO−If there is no voltage, or the voltage is lower

than specified, repair an open or high resistance in
the wire between the No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in the
driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box and EPS control
unit. If the wire checks OK, check the battery
(see page 22-77), and troubleshoot the alternator
regulator circuit (see page 4-25).
17-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ１１０２ＦＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:39:14 61TL2000_170_0034
DTC 12-01: Low/High VBU Voltage (Regular 6. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
Diagnosis) connector A (2P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
＊０１
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (2P)
2. Check the BATTERY in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

＋B (WHT)

at the EPS control unit.
NO−Go to step 3.
4. Check the No. 2-1 (EPS) (70 A) fuse in the under- Is there continuity?
Is the f use blown? between the EPS control unit and the No. 2-1 (EPS)
(70 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Install a new No. 2-1 (EPS) (70 A) fuse in the
NO−Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 13. under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 7.
5. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (2P). 7. Reconnect EPS control unit connector A (2P).
YES−Replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-85).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-33
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ１２０１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:14 61TL2000_170_0035
EPS Components

13. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (2P).

connector A (2P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
＊０２
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (2P)
＋B (WHT)
YES−Check for loose terminals in the EPS control

connections are found, replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-85).
NO−Repair open in the wire between the EPS

control unit and the No. 2-1 (EPS) (70 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
17-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:39:14 61TL2000_170_0036
DTC 21-01: Excessive Change of the Vehicle 8. Start the engine, and check the tachometer.
Speed Signal (Regular Diagnosis)
Is the tachometer working correctly?
DTC 21-02: Comparison between the Vehicle
Speed and the Engine Speed Signal (Regular YES−Go to step 10.
Diagnosis)
NO−Go to step 9.
NOTE:
• If the MIL is on, troubleshoot the fuel and emissions 9. Check for DTCs in the gauge control module with
systems first. the HDS.
• Even though the system is operating normally, the
EPS indicator will come on caused by the detecting Is DT C indicated?
condition of DTC 21-01 or DTC 21-02 when you raise
the engine speed with the vehicle stopped. YES−Troubleshooting the indicated DTC(s).
• Clear the DTC related to the ABS or ABS/VSA.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). latest software (see page 11-233), or substitute a
2. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands step 1 and recheck. If the ECM/PCM was updated
in the proper locations (see page 1-8), and allow all and DTCs are not indicated, troubleshooting is
wheels to rotate freely. complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted and
DTCs are not indicated, replace the original ECM/
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). PCM (see page 11-234).
4. Turn off the VSA function by using the VSA OFF

switch.
5. Start the engine, then run the vehicle in 4th gear

(M/T), or D position (A/T).
6. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the EPS DATA LIST

with the HDS.
Is the vehicle speed indicated?
YES−The system is OK at this time.
NO−Go to step 7.
7. Check for DTCs in the fuel and emissions systems

(M/T) or A/T system (A/T) with the HDS.
Is DT C P07 20 ( M/ T ), P07 21 ( A/ T ), P07 22 ( A/ T ),

or P07 23 ( A/ T ) indicated?
YES−Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s).
NO−Go to step 8.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-35
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ２１０１ＦＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:39:15 61TL2000_170_0037
EPS Components

10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector D (28P) terminal No. 15 and ECM/PCM
11. Short the SCS line with the HDS. connector A (49P) terminal No. 4.
＊０２
12. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P) and
ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
CAN-L (RED)
13. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector D (28P) terminal No. 1 and ECM/PCM
connector A (49P) terminal No. 3.
＊０１
CAN-H (WHT)
CAN-L (RED)

CAN-H (WHT)
YES−Replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-85).

Is there continuity? control unit and the ECM/PCM.

control unit and the ECM/PCM.
17-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:39:15 61TL2000_170_0038
DTC 22-01: Engine Speed Signal (Initial 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Diagnosis)
8. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: If the MIL indicator is on, troubleshoot the fuel
and emissions systems first. 9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
1. Start the engine. 10. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
2. Check the ENGINE SPEED in the EPS DATA LIST ＊０２
with the HDS. EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P)
Is there 0 rpm at idle?

NEP (YEL)
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−The system is OK at this time.

6. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit Is there continuity?

＊０１ YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P) between the EPS control unit and the ECM/PCM.
NO−Go to step 11.

NEP (YEL)
Is there any voltage?

(see page 17-85).
NO−Go to step 7.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-37
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ２２０１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:15 61TL2000_170_0039
EPS Components

11. Check for continuity between EPS control unit DTC 31-01: No Writing the Torque Sensor
connector D (28P) terminal No. 3 and the ECM/PCM Neutral Position (Initial Diagnosis)
connector A (49P) terminal No. 29.
4. Do the memorizing of the torque sensor neutral

position (see page 17-23).
NEP (BLK)
NEP (YEL) 6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P) YES−Replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-85).
Is there continuity? NO−The system is OK at this time.

step 1 and recheck. If the ECM/PCM was updated
and DTCs are not indicated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted and
DTCs are not indicated, replace the original ECM/

control unit and the ECM/PCM.
17-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ３１０１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:16 61TL2000_170_0040
DTC 32-01: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit DTC 32-07: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit
(Current Sensor) (Initial Diagnosis) (Current Sensor) (Steering Diagnosis)
DTC 32-02: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(Current Sensor) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 35-01: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit
(CPU) (Initial Diagnosis/Regular Diagnosis) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
DTC 35-02: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit 4. Start the engine.
(EEPROM) (Initial Diagnosis)
5. Turn the steering wheel to the right or left, and wait
DTC 35-04: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit 10 seconds or more.
(CPU Communication) (Regular Diagnosis)
(INHL/INHR Ports) (Initial Diagnosis/Regular Is DT C 32-07 indicated?
Diagnosis)
DTC 36-02: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
(INH Output Circuit) (Initial Diagnosis) connections are found, replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-85).
(Step-up Circuit) (Initial Diagnosis) NO−Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are
no DTCs, the system is OK at this time.
Is DT C 32-01, 32-02, 35-01, 35-02, 35-04, 35-07 ,

36-02, or 37 -01 indicated?

(see page 17-85).
NO−Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are

-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-39
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ３２０１ＦＡＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ３２０７ＦＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:39:16 61TL2000_170_0041
EPS Components

DTC 32-08: Current Sensor (Regular 8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector B (2P) and
Diagnosis) connector C (2P).
DTC 32-09: Current Sensor (Initial Diagnosis) 9. Check for continuity between the following
terminals of the EPS control unit connector B (2P)
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). and connector C (2P).
＊０１
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. EPS CONTROL UNIT EPS CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR B CONNECTOR C
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). No. 1 No. 1
No. 1 No. 2
4. Start the engine. No. 1
No. 2
5. Turn the steering wheel to the right or left, and wait EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (2P)
10 seconds or more. Wire side of female terminals

MW
(WHT)
Is DT C 32-08 or 32-09 indicated?
YES−Go to step 7.
MU
NO−Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are (RED)
no DTCs, the system is OK at this time. MV
(BLK)
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (2P)

unit connectors and EPS motor connectors, and
repair if necessary. If no poor connections are
found, replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-85).
NO−Go to step 10.
17-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ３２０８ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:16 61TL2000_170_0042
10. Disconnect the EPS motor 3P connector. DTC 33-01: Lower FET Stuck ON (Initial
Diagnosis)
11. On the EPS motor side, check for continuity
between the EPS motor 3P connector terminals DTC 33-06: Lower FET Stuck ON (Regular
No. 1 and No. 2, No. 1 and No. 3, and No. 2 and Diagnosis)
No. 3 individually.
EPS MOTOR 3P CONNECTOR

MU (RED)

MW (WHT) MV (BLK)
Is DT C 33-01 or 33-06 indicated?
Terminal side of female terminals YES−Go to step 6.

Is there continuity? no DTCs, the system is OK at this time.
YES−Repair open in the wire between the EPS 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
control unit and EPS motor.
7. Disconnect EPS control unit connector B (2P) and
NO−Open in the EPS motor wire, or EPS motor connector C (2P).
internal circuit, replace the steering gearbox
(see page 17-63).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-41
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ３３０１ＦＡＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:39:17 61TL2000_170_0043
EPS Components

8. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS 9. Disconnect the EPS motor 3P connector.
control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1,
connector C (2P) terminal No. 1, and connector C 10. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
(2P) terminal No. 2 individually. control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1,
＊０１ connector C (2P) terminal No. 1, and connector C
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (2P)
(2P) terminal No. 2 individually.
＊０３
MW (WHT)
MW (WHT)

＊０２
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (2P)
＊０４
MU (RED)
MV (BLK)
MW (RED)
MV (BLK)

NO−Check for loose terminals in the EPS control YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor between the EPS control unit and EPS motor.
(see page 17-85). NO−Short to body ground in the EPS motor wire;
or a short in the EPS motor internal circuit, replace
the steering gearbox (see page 17-63).
17-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:39:17 61TL2000_170_0044
DTC 33-02: Upper FET Stuck ON (Initial 9. Measure the voltage between body ground and
Diagnosis) EPS control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1,
connector C (2P) terminal No. 1, and connector C
DTC 33-07: Upper FET Stuck ON (Regular (2P) terminal No. 2 individually.
Diagnosis) ＊０１

MW (WHT)
Is DT C 33-02 or 33-07 indicated? Wire side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 6.
＊０２
NO−Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (2P)
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). MU (RED)

MV (BLK)
connector C (2P).
NO−Check for loose terminals in the EPS control

unit connectors and the EPS motor connectors, and
repair if necessary. If no poor connections are
found, replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-85).
11. Disconnect the EPS motor 3P connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-43
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ３３０２ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:18 61TL2000_170_0045
EPS Components

13. Measure the voltage between body ground and DTC 34-01: Power Relay Stuck ON (Ignition
EPS control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1, Switch is in LOCK (0))
(2P) terminal No. 2 individually. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
＊０３
MW (WHT) 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Wire side of female terminals unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
(see page 17-85).
＊０４
MU (RED)
MV (BLK)
YES−Repair short to power in the wire between

the EPS control unit and the EPS motor.
NO−Short to power in the EPS motor wire; or a

short in the EPS motor internal circuit, replace the
steering gearbox (see page 17-63).
17-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ３４０１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:18 61TL2000_170_0046
DTC 34-02: Fail-safe Relay Stuck ON (Initial 9. Measure the voltage between body ground and
Diagnosis) EPS control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1,
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (2P) terminal No. 2 individually.
＊０１
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (2P)
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). MW (WHT)
YES−Go to step 6.
＊０２
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (2P)

connector C (2P). MU (RED)
MV (BLK)

the EPS control unit and the EPS motor.
NO−Replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-85).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-45
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ３４０２ＦＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:39:18 61TL2000_170_0047
EPS Components

DTC 35-05: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit DTC 51-01: Low/High Voltage for the Torque
(EPS Motor/EPS CPU) (Initial Diagnosis) Sensor (VT1 and VT2) (Regular Diagnosis)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Check the ADVT1 in the EPS DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is the voltage at 1.45 −4.10 V ?
YES−Go to step 3.
5. Wait 10 seconds or more.
NO−Go to step 4.
3. Check the ADVT2 in the EPS DATA LIST with the
Is DT C 35-05 indicated? HDS.
YES−Check for loose terminals in the EPS control Is the voltage at 1.56−4.28 V ?
connections are found, replace the EPS control unit YES−Check for loose terminals or poor
(see page 17-85). connections. If the connections are good, the
system is OK at this time.
no DTCs, the system is OK at this time. NO−Go to step 4.
17-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ３５０５ＦＡＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ５１０１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:18 61TL2000_170_0048
5. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P). 7. Measure the resistance between EPS control unit
connector D (28P) terminals No. 8 and No. 9.
6. Measure the resistance between EPS control unit ＊０２
connector D (28P) terminals No. 9 and No. 10. EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P)
＊０１
VS2 (LT GRN) PVF (RED)
PVF (RED)
VS1 (PNK)

Is the resistance between 12−15 ?
Is the resistance between 12−15 ? YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 11.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-47

08/04/09 12:39:19 61TL2000_170_0049
EPS Components

8. Check for continuity between EPS control unit 9. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector from
connector D (28P) terminal No. 9 and body ground. the steering gearbox.
＊０３
＊０４
PVF (RED)
PVF (RED)
Is there continuity? Wire side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 9.
unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
connections are found, replace the EPS control unit between the torque sensor and the EPS control
(see page 17-85). unit.
NO−Faulty torque sensor (short in the sensor

internal circuit), replace the torque sensor
(see page 17-83).
17-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:39:19 61TL2000_170_0050
11. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector from 13. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector from
the steering gearbox. the steering gearbox.
12. On the sensor side, measure the resistance 14. On the sensor side, measure the resistance
between torque sensor 3P connector terminals between torque sensor 3P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2. No. 2 and No. 3.
＊０５＊０６
TORQUE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR TORQUE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VS1 VS2
PVF PVF
Terminal side of male terminals Terminal side of male terminals
Is the resistance between 12−15 ? Is the resistance between 12−15 ?
YES−Repair open or short between the PNK and YES−Repair open or short between the WHT/GRN
RED wires in the torque sensor circuit between the and RED wires in the torque sensor circuit between
torque sensor and the EPS control unit. the torque sensor and the EPS control unit.
NO−Faulty torque sensor (short or open in the NO−Faulty torque sensor (short or open in the
internal circuit), replace the torque sensor internal circuit), replace the torque sensor
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-49

08/04/09 12:39:19 61TL2000_170_0051
EPS Components

DTC 51-02: Torque Sensor (VT3 Differential- 7. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P).
amplification Function) (Regular Diagnosis)
8. Measure the resistance between EPS control unit
DTC 51-03: Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2 Rapid connector D (28P) terminals No. 9 and No. 10.
Change) (Regular Diagnosis) ＊０１
DTC 51-06: Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2
Average) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 51-07: Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2 Initial

Check) (Initial Diagnosis) PVF (RED)
VS1 (GRN)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS

YES−Go to step 9.
Is DT C 51-02, 51-03, 51-06, or 51-07 indicated?
NO−Go to step 13.
YES−Go to step 6.
9. Measure the resistance between EPS control unit
NO−Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are connector D (28P) terminals No. 8 and No. 9.
no DTCs, the system is OK at this time. ＊０２
VS2 (LT GRN) PVF (RED)
NO−Go to step 15.
17-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ５１０２ＦＡＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:39:20 61TL2000_170_0052
10. Check for continuity between EPS control unit 12. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector D (28P) terminal No. 9 and body ground. connector D (28P) terminal No. 9 and body ground.
＊０３＊０４
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P) EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P)
PVF (RED) PVF (RED)

between the torque sensor and the EPS control
NO−Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit.
connections are found, replace the EPS control unit NO−Faulty torque sensor (short in the sensor
(see page 17-85). internal circuit), replace the torque sensor
(see page 17-83).
11. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector from
the steering gearbox.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-51

08/04/09 12:39:20 61TL2000_170_0053
EPS Components

13. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector from 15. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector from
the steering gearbox. the steering gearbox.
14. On the sensor side, measure the resistance 16. On the sensor side, measure the resistance
between torque sensor 3P connector terminals between torque sensor 3P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2. No. 2 and No. 3.
＊０５＊０６
TORQUE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR TORQUE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VS1 VS2
PVF PVF
Terminal side of male terminals Terminal side of male terminals
Is the resistance between 12−15 ? Is the resistance between 12−15 ?
YES−Repair open or short between the PNK and YES−Repair open or short between the RED and
RED wires in the torque sensor circuit between the LT GRN wires in the torque sensor circuit between
torque sensor and the EPS control unit. the torque sensor and the EPS control unit.
NO−Faulty torque sensor (short or open in the NO−Faulty torque sensor (short or open in the
internal circuit), replace the torque sensor internal circuit), replace the torque sensor
17-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:39:20 61TL2000_170_0054
DTC 61-04: Open/Short in the EPS Motor 9. Check for continuity between the following
Harness (Steering Diagnosis) terminals of the EPS control unit connector B (2P)
and connector C (2P).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ＊０１
EPS CONTROL UNIT EPS CONTROL UNIT
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CONNECTOR B CONNECTOR C
No. 1 No. 1
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). No. 1 No. 2
No. 1
4. Start the engine. No. 2

5. Turn the steering wheel to the right or left, and wait Wire side of female terminals
10 seconds or more.
MW
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. (WHT)
YES−Go to step 7. MU
(RED)
NO−Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are MV
no DTCs, the system is OK at this time. (BLK)
8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector B (2P) and Is there continuity?

connector C (2P).
NO−Go to step 13.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-53
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ６１０４ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:21 61TL2000_170_0055
EPS Components

10. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS 12. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1, control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1,
connector C (2P) terminal No. 1, and connector C connector C (2P) terminal No. 1, and connector C
(2P) terminal No. 2 individually. (2P) terminal No. 2 individually.
＊０２＊０４
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (2P) EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (2P)
MW (WHT) MW (WHT)
＊０３＊０５
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (2P) EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (2P)
MU (RED) MU (RED)
MV (BLK) MV (BLK)

between the EPS control unit and the EPS motor.
unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor NO−Short to the body ground in the EPS motor
connections are found, replace the EPS control unit wire, or the EPS motor internal circuit, replace the
(see page 17-85). steering gearbox (see page 17-63).
11. Disconnect the EPS motor 3P connector.
17-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:39:21 61TL2000_170_0056
13. Disconnect the EPS motor 3P connector. DTC 71-01: EPS Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/
COS Signals) (Steering Diagnosis)
14. On the EPS motor side, check for continuity
between EPS motor 3P connector terminals No. 1 DTC 71-02: EPS Motor Angle Sensor (Neutral
and No. 2, No. 1 and No. 3, and No. 2 and No. 3 Position Learning of SIN/COS) (Initial
individually. Diagnosis)
＊０６
EPS MOTOR 3P CONNECTOR DTC 71-03: EPS Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/
COS Signals) (Steering Diagnosis)
MU (RED)

MW (WHT) MV (BLK)
Terminal side of male terminals 5. Turn the steering wheel to the right or left, and wait
10 seconds or more.
Is there continuity? 6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES−Repair open in the wire between the EPS Is DT C 7 1-01, 7 1-02, or 7 1-03 indicated?
control unit and the EPS motor.
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Replace the steering gearbox (see page 17-63).
The fault is an open in the EPS motor wire harness NO−Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are
or the EPS motor internal circuit. no DTCs, the system is OK at this time.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-55
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ７１０１ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:22 61TL2000_170_0057
EPS Components

9. Measure the resistance between the following 10. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
terminals of EPS control unit connector D (28P). control unit connector D (28P) terminal No. 12,
＊０１ terminal No. 13, terminal No. 14, terminal No. 26,
terminal No. 27, and terminal No. 28 individually.
＊０２
No. 13 (R1) No. 27 (R2) EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P)
No. 12 (S1) No. 26 (S3)
No. 14 (S2) No. 28 (S4) S1 (PNK)
R1 (BLU)
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P) S2 (BRN)
R1 (BLU)
S1 (PNK) S2
(BRN)
S3 (GRN)
R2 (PNK)
S4
S3 (GRN) (BLU) S4 (BLU)
R2 (PNK)
Is the resistance between R1-R2 5 −50 , S1-S3 Wire side of female terminals
10−100 , and S2-S4 10−100 ?
NO−Go to step 13.
(see page 17-85).
17-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:39:22 61TL2000_170_0058
11. Disconnect the EPS motor angle sensor 6P 13. Disconnect the EPS motor angle sensor 6P
connector. connector.
12. On the sensor side, check for continuity between 14. On the sensor side, measure the resistance
body ground and EPS motor angle sensor 6P between the following terminals of the EPS motor
connector terminal No. 1, terminal No. 2, terminal angle sensor 6P connector.
No. 3, terminal No. 4, terminal No. 5, and terminal ＊０４
No. 6 individually. EPS MOTOR ANGLE SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
＊０３
No. 5 (R1) No. 2 (R2)
EPS MOTOR ANGLE SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR No. 4 (S1) No. 1 (S3)
No. 6 (S2) No. 3 (S4)
R2 (PNK)
EPS MOTOR ANGLE SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
S3 (GRN) S4 (BLU)
R2 (PNK)
S2 (BRN)
S3 (GRN) S4 (BLU)
S1 R1
(PNK) (BLU)
Terminal side of male terminals S1 (PNK) S2 (BRN)

R1 (BLU)

YES−Faulty EPS motor angle sensor (internal Is the resistance between R1-R2 5 −50 , S1-S3
failure), or short to body ground in the wire (sensor 10−100 , and S2-S4 10−100 ?
side), replace the steering gearbox (see page 17-63).
YES−Open, or short to body ground in the wire
between the EPS motor angle sensor 6P connector
NO−Repair short to body ground in the wire and the EPS control unit.
and the EPS control unit. NO−Faulty EPS motor angle sensor (internal
failure), or short to body ground in the wire (sensor
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-57

08/04/09 12:39:22 61TL2000_170_0059
EPS Components

DTC 71-04: EPS Motor Angle Sensor (Check 9. Measure the resistance between the EPS control
Signals) (Regular Diagnosis) unit connector D (28P) terminal No. 13 and No. 27.
＊０１
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P)
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). R1 (BLU)

R2 (PNK)
5. Turn the steering wheel to the right or left, and wait
10 seconds or more.
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals
Is DT C 7 1-04 indicated?
Is the resistance between 5 −50 ?
YES−Go to step 7.
no DTCs, the system is OK at this time. NO−Go to step 13.
EPS control unit connector D (28P) No. 13 terminal
8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P). and the No. 27 terminal individually.
＊０２
R1 (BLU)
R2 (PNK)

(see page 17-85).
17-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７２２０００Ｒ７１０４ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:23 61TL2000_170_0060
11. Disconnect the EPS motor angle sensor 6P 13. Disconnect the EPS motor angle sensor 6P
connector. connector.
12. On the sensor side, check for continuity between 14. On the sensor side, measure the resistance
body ground and EPS motor angle sensor 6P between the EPS motor angle sensor 6P connector
connector No. 2 terminal and the No. 5 terminal terminals No. 2 and No. 5.
individually. ＊０４
＊０３ EPS MOTOR ANGLE SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
EPS MOTOR ANGLE SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
R2 (PNK)
R2 (PNK)
R1 (BLU)
R1 (BLU)

Is the resistance between 5 −50 ?

YES−Open, or short to body ground in the wire
YES−Faulty EPS motor angle sensor (internal between the EPS motor angle sensor 6P connector
failure), or short to body ground in the wire (sensor and EPS control unit.
NO−Faulty EPS motor angle sensor (internal
failure), or short to body ground in the wire (sensor
NO−Repair short to body ground in the wire side), replace the steering gearbox (see page 17-63).
and the EPS control unit.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-59

08/04/09 12:39:53 61TL2000_170_0061
EPS Components
Symptom Troubleshooting
EPS indicator does not come on
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the
EPS indicator.
Does the EPS indicator come on?
NO−Troubleshoot the gauge control module

(see page 22-292).
17-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１００００００００ＦＡＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:39:54 61TL2000_170_0062
EPS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 7. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit
are stored connector D (28P) terminal No. 16 and body ground.
＊０２
2. Check the No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver’s under-

Is the f use blown?

IG1 (WHT)
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 5.
3. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P). Wire side of female terminals

connector D (28P) terminal No. 16 and body ground. Is there battery voltage?
＊０１
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P) YES−Go to step 8.

control unit and driver’s under-dash fuse/relay
box.

IG1 (WHT)
9. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (2P).

Wire side of female terminals connector A (2P) terminal No. 1 and body ground.
＊０３
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (2P)

PG (BLK)
between the EPS control unit and the No. 6 (7.5 A)
fuse in the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box.
NO−Install a new No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver’s

under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 6.


control unit and body ground (G203).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-61
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１００００００００ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:54 61TL2000_170_0063
EPS Components

11. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P 13. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector. connector D (28P) terminal No. 15 and gauge
control module 32P connector terminal No. 21.
12. Check for continuity between EPS control unit ＊０５
connector D (28P) terminal No. 1 and gauge control Wire side of female terminals
module 32P connector terminal No. 22.
＊０４
CAN-H (WHT)
CAN-L (RED)
CAN-L (RED)

CAN-H (WHT) Wire side of female terminals
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR Is there continuity?

Is there continuity? unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
YES−Go to step 13. (see page 17-85).
NO−Repair open in the wire between the EPS NO−Repair open in the wire between the EPS
control unit and gauge control module. control unit and gauge control module.
17-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:39:55 61TL2000_170_0064
Steering Gearbox Removal and Installation

Special Tools Required 6. Loosen the upper steering joint bolt (A), and
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 remove the lower steering joint bolt (B). Disconnect
• Subframe alignment pin 070AG-SJAA10S the steering joint (C) by moving the steering joint
• Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000015 toward the column. Do not disconnect the steering
• Front subframe adapter VSB02C000016 joint from the column shaft (D).
• Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256 ＊０２
D A
• Subhanger stay 07MAK-PY30100 8 x 1.25 mm
Program, 888-424-6857.
Note these items during removal: C

• Use solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off the
end of the steering gearbox. Avoid any electrical
parts. Blow dry with compressed air.
• Be sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint, or damage to the
cable reel can occur.
• Lower the front subframe from the body, and remove
the steering gearbox through the gap produced by
lowering the front subframe.
Removal B
8 x 1.25 mm
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure 7. Remove the center guide (A) (if equipped) from the
(see page 22-78). top of the pinion shaft (B), and discard it. The center
guide is for factory assembly use only.
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and support it with safety ＊０３
stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8).

A
4. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-6).
5. Remove the steering joint cover (A).

＊０１ B
A
8. Apply vinyl tape to the splines on the pinion shaft.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-63
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１０００５７１１１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:39:56 61TL2000_170_0065
EPS Components
Steering Gearbox Removal and Installation (cont’d)

9. Secure the hood in the wide open position (support 14. Remove the P/S heat shield (A).
rod in the lower hole). ＊０６
＊０４
A
6 x 1.0 mm
15. Disconnect the EPS motor angle sensor 6P

connector (A).
＊０７
D
10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod ball joint, C
then remove the nut (B) on both sides.
＊０５
07MAC-SL0A202
16. Disconnect the EPS motor 3P connector (B) by

pushing the lock (C) and pulling down the lever (D).
Wrap the connectors with vinyl tape to avoid
B contamination from grease or water.
12 x 1.25 mm
A
Replace.
11. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the
ball joint remover on both sides (see page 18-11).
13. Remove the front grille cover (see page 20-202).
17-64
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 12:39:56 61TL2000_170_0066
17. Disconnect the EPS subharness 6P connector (A). 18. Remove the flange bolts (A) and washers (B) from
Wrap the connectors with vinyl tape to avoid the steering gearbox.
contamination from grease or water. ＊０９
＊０８
A
A
14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
＊１０
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-65

08/04/09 12:39:57 61TL2000_170_0067
EPS Components

19. Attach the subhanger stay (A) to the water outlet 21. Remove the rear engine mount (A).
special nut (B) with a spacer (C) and a 10 x 1.25 mm
bolt (D). A/T
＊１１＊１３
A 10 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
07MAK-PY30100 Replace. Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
D
C
B
A
20. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T-1256) to
the vehicle, and attach the hook (A) to the engine
hanger adapter (VSB02C000015). Tighten the wing M/T
nut (B) by hand, and lift and support the engine. ＊１４
12 x 1.25 mm A
＊１２ Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
AAR-T-1256 B Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
VSB02C000015
A
17-66 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:39:58 61TL2000_170_0068
22. A/T: Remove the upper base bracket (A) from the 27. Remove the ground cable (A) from the front
base bracket (B). subframe.
＊１５＊１６
12 x 1.25 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
A 28. Attach the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016)

B to the subframe by looping the strap (A) over the
front of the subframe, then secure the strap with
23. Raise the vehicle on a lift. the stop (B), then tighten the wing nut (C).
＊１７
24. Remove the front splash shield (see page 20-214).
25. Remove exhaust pipe A (see page 9-7).
26. A/T: Disconnect the shift cable from the selector

control lever (see step 9 on page 14-296).
A
B
C
VSB02C000016
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-67

08/04/09 12:39:58 61TL2000_170_0069
EPS Components

29. Remove the transmission lower mount bolts (A). 31. Remove the flange bolts (A) from the front
＊１８ subframe front stiffeners (B).
＊２０
B C
14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
20 mm (13/16 in.)
A
12 x 1.25 mm
30. Remove the front subframe middle mounts (A).
＊１９
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace. 32. Loosen the front subframe mounting bolts (C) so
they are about 20 mm (13/16 in.) from the mounting
surface. Do not loosen the front subframe
mounting bolts more than necessary.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
17-68 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:39:59 61TL2000_170_0070
33. Remove the flange bolts (A) and front subframe 35. Carefully move the steering gearbox (A) toward the
mounting bolts (B) from the front subframe rear driver’s side until the pinion shaft clears the
stiffeners (C). fenderwell opening on the body.
＊２１＊２３
A B
12 x 1.25 mm 14 x 1.5 mm
Replace. Replace.
36. Remove the steering gearbox (A) through the
34. Lower the jack slowly until the front subframe has fenderwell opening on the driver’s side.
dropped about 70 mm (2 3/4 in.). ＊２４
＊２２
A
70 mm (2 3/4 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-69

08/04/09 12:40:00 61TL2000_170_0071
EPS Components

37. Remove the pinion shaft grommet (A) from the top
of torque sensor (B).
＊５０
A
38. Remove the EPS subharness (A) from the steering

gearbox (B).
＊５１
6 x 1.0 mm
17-70 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:40:00 61TL2000_170_0072
Installation 4. Install the pinion shaft grommet (A). Align the

square hole (B) in the pinion shaft grommet with
1. Before installing the steering gearbox, make sure the lug portion (C) on the torque sensor. The
that no grease is on the mating surface of the grommet must not have a gap at the mating
steering gearbox and the front subframe. To surface of the grommet and torque sensor.
prevent the gearbox mounting bolts from ＊２６
A
loosening after the installation, remove any grease
from the bolt holes.
2. Wrap vinyl tape around the splines on the pinion

shaft (A).
＊２５
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
B B
5. Turn the lip (A) of the pinion shaft grommet.

＊２７
A
3. Install the EPS subharness (B) to the steering

gearbox (C).
6. Slide the steering gearbox (B) between the front

subframe and the body from the driver’s side.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-71

08/04/09 12:40:01 61TL2000_170_0073
EPS Components

7. Carefully move the steering gearbox (A) toward the 10. Align the front subframe using the 15.7 mm end of
passenger’s side until the pinion shaft clears the the subframe alignment pin. Vertically install the
wheelwell opening on the body. subframe alignment pin, and align the right-rear
＊２８ corner of the front subframe and vehicle frame
holes, then loosely tighten the subframe mounting
bolt (A) unit the front subframe contacts the body
A
frame.
＊３０
070AG-SJAA10S
A
14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
8. Continue moving the steering gearbox toward the
passenger’s side until the steering gearbox is in 11. Loosely tighten the left-rear subframe mounting
position. bolt with the same procedure as the right-rear
using the subframe alignment pin.
9. Install the front subframe front stiffeners (A) and
the front subframe rear stiffeners (B), then loosely 12. Tighten the right-rear subframe mounting bolt (A)
install the new front subframe mounting bolts (C), to the specified torque with the subframe
new flange bolts (D), and flange bolts (E). alignment pin installed.
＊２９＊３１
E
12 x 1.25 mm
A A
C 070AG-SJAA10S
14 x 1.5 mm C
Replace. A
B 14 x 1.5 mm
B 103 N·m
VSB02C000016 (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft)
D Replace.
D C 12 x 1.25 mm
12 x 1.25 mm 14 x 1.5 mm Replace.
Replace. Replace. 13. Tighten the left-rear subframe mounting bolt to the
specified torque with the subframe alignment pin
installed.
17-72 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:40:02 61TL2000_170_0074
14. Tighten the subframe mounting bolts (A) to the 17. Install the front subframe middle mounts (A) with
specified torque. new mounting bolts, and tighten them to the
＊３２ specified torque.
B
12 x 1.25 mm ＊３４
54 N·m 10 x 1.25 mm
(5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) 49 N·m
(5.0 kgf·m,
36 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft)
Replace.
15. Tighten the flange bolts (B) to the specified torque.

12 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
16. Tighten the flange bolts (A) to the specified torque. Replace.
＊３３
18. Install the transmission lower mount bolts (A), and
tighten them to the specified torque.
＊３５
A
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
(5.5 kgf·m,
40 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A
12 x 1.25 mm
93 N·m
Replace.
19. Remove the transmission jack supporting the front

subframe.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-73

08/04/09 12:40:03 61TL2000_170_0075
EPS Components

20. Install the ground cable (A) to the front subframe. 26. Install the rear engine mount (A) with new
＊３６ mounting bolts, and tighten them to the specified
6 x 1.0 mm torque.
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) A/T
＊３８
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A
21. A/T: Connect the shift cable to the selector control

12 x 1.25 mm
lever (see step 16 on page 14-297). 78 N·m
(8.0 kgf·m,
22. Install the exhaust pipe A (see page 9-7). 58 lbf·ft)
Replace.
23. Install the front splash shield (see page 20-214).
24. Lower the vehicle.

10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
25. A/T: Install the upper base bracket (A) to the base Replace.
bracket (B) with a new mounting bolt (C) and
mounting bolts (D), then tighten them to the M/T
specified torque. ＊３９
12 x 1.25 mm
＊３７ 78 N·m (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft)
C
12 x 1.25 mm Replace.
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
78 N·m
(8.0 kgf·m,
A 58 lbf·ft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
A 78 N·m (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft)
Replace.
B
D
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
17-74 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:40:03 61TL2000_170_0076
27. Remove the engine support hanger and the hanger 29. Install the washers (A) and new flange bolts to the
adapter. steering gearbox, then loosely tighten the flange
bolts.
28. Remove the subhanger stay (A) from the water
outlet special nut (B). NOTE: Make sure that the washers are in the
＊４０ correct position.
A ＊４１
07MAK-PY30100
A
A
B
＊４２
14 x 1.5 mm 14 x 1.5 mm
74 N·m 74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft)
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54 lbf·ft)
Replace.
30. Tighten the steering gearbox mounting bolts to the

specified torque in the shown.
NOTE: Check all of the steering gearbox mounting

bolts, and retighten if necessary.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-75

08/04/09 12:40:04 61TL2000_170_0077
EPS Components

31. Connect the EPS subharness 6P connector (A). 34. Install the P/S heat shield (A) with the flange bolts,
＊４３ and tighten them to the specified torque.
A ＊４５
32. Remove the vinyl tape, then connect the torque 6 x 1.0 mm
sensor 6P connector (A) to the steering gearbox. 9.8 N·m
＊４４ (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
B
A 36. Install the front grille cover (see page 20-202).
37. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball

joint tapered section and threads. Reconnect the
tie-rod ball joint (A) to the knuckle. Install the nut (B),
and tighten it to the specified torque.
＊４６
33. Pull up the lever (B) of the EPS motor 3P connector

(C), then confirm the connector is fully seated.
B
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m C
38. Install a new cotter pin (C), and bend it as shown.
17-76
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 12:40:05 61TL2000_170_0078
39. Install the front wheels, then set the wheels in the 41. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the
straight ahead position. groove (B) around the pinion shaft, then loosely
install the lower steering joint bolt (C). Be sure that
NOTE: Before installing the wheel, clean the mating the joint bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion
surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the shaft.
wheel. ＊４８
D
8 x 1.25 mm
40. Slip the lower end of the steering joint (A) onto the 28 N·m (2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)
pinion shaft (B) taking care to align the gap (C)
within the angle.
NOTE: Pick up the tabs (D) of the pinion shaft

grommet, and turn up the lip of the pinion shaft
grommet securely in place. Make sure that light
does not enter from the space between the pinion
shaft grommet and the body.
＊４７
FRONT
35±20 ° C
8 x 1.25 mm
28 N·m
A A B (2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)
42. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the

C steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the lower
joint bolt to the specified torque.
43. Tighten the upper steering joint bolt (D) to the

specified torque.
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-77

08/04/09 12:40:05 61TL2000_170_0079
EPS Components

44. Install the steering joint cover (A). 47. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure
＊４９ (see page 22-78), and do these tasks:
A
• Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that
the SRS indicator cames on for about 6 seconds
and then goes off.
• Make sure the horn and turn signal switches
work properly.
• Make sure the steering wheel switches work
properly.
48. After installation, do these checks:
• Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the

steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times.
• Check that the EPS indicator does not come on.
• Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If steering
45. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-8). spoke angles to the right and left are not equal
(steering wheel and rack are not centered),
46. With the tires raised off the ground, check for the correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft
following symptoms by turning the steering wheel serrations, then adjust the front toe by turning
fully to the right and left several times. the tie-rod ends, if necessary.
• Do the torque sensor neutral position
Symptom Probable cause memorization (see page 17-23).
Rubbing sound Steering column joint • Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
coming from the is contacting the cover. necessary (see page 18-5).
lower steering
column area.
Grating sound from Poor engagement of
the lower steering the pinion shaft
column area, or a serrations.
rough feeling during
steering.
Noise from around Poor engagement of
the steering wheel the SRS cable reel with
during steering. the steering wheel, or a
damaged cable reel.
17-78 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:40:05 61TL2000_170_0080
Rack End Removal and Installation

Exploded view
＊０１
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
SNAP RING
TORQUE SENSOR COIL

If the coil is faulty, replace
the torque sensor core/pinion
shaft as an assembly. The coil
PAN SCREW is not available separately.
DRAIN WASHER
TORQUE SENSOR CORE/PINION SHAFT

If the torque sensor core is faulty,
replace the pinion shaft as an assembly.
The core is not available separately.
O-RING
Replace.
LOCKNUT
STEERING GEARBOX ASSEMBLY RACK GUIDE SCREW
(EPS MOTOR)
If the gearbox is faulty, replace SPRING
it as an assembly.
RACK GUIDE
RACK END
93 N·m
Inspect for faulty
movement and damage.
RUBBER STOP
Replace.
LOCK WASHER
Replace.
BOOT BAND
Replace. GEARBOX MOUNTING CUSHION
LOCKNUT Inspect for damage
44 N·m and deterioration.
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) BOOT
Inspect for damage
and deterioration.
TIE-ROD CLIP
BALL JOINT BOOT
TIE-ROD END Inspect for damage and deterioration.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-79
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１０００５７１４５ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:40:06 61TL2000_170_0081
EPS Components
Rack End Removal and Installation (cont’d)

Removal 3. Unbend the lock washers (A).
＊０４
NOTE: Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
to enter the steering gearbox.
1. Remove the boot bands (A), and discard them.

Remove the tie-rod clips (B), and pull the boots
away from the ends of the steering gearbox.
＊０２
A A
Replace.
B
4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the steering
rack (B) with one wrench, and unscrew both rack
ends (C) with another wrench. Be careful not to
damage the rack surface with the wrench.
＊０５
2. Hold the gearbox housing using a C-clamp (A) and

wooden blocks (B) as shown. Do not clamp the
cylinder part of the gearbox housing in a vise.
＊０３
C
D
Replace.
E
Replace. B
5. Remove the lock washer (D) and rubber stop (E).
B A
17-80 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:40:07 61TL2000_170_0082
Installation 4. Bend the lock washer (A) back against the flat spots
on the rack end joint housing.
1. Hold the gearbox housing using a C-clamp (A) and ＊０８
wooden blocks (B) as shown. Do not clamp the
cylinder part of the gearbox housing in the vise.
＊０６
5. Apply multipurpose grease to the circumference of

B
the rack end joint housing (A).
A
＊０９
2. Install a new rubber stop (A) and a new lock washer

(B). Align the lock washer tabs (C) with the slots (D)
on the rack end (E) while holding the lock washer in
place. Repeat this step for the other side of the rack.
＊０７
A
B
93 N·m
6. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot

grooves (B) on the rack end.
C NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on

hands or gloves.
B
Replace.
A
Replace. D E
3. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack

with one wrench, and tighten both rack ends with
another wrench. Be careful not to damage the rack
surface with the wrench.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-81

08/04/09 12:40:07 61TL2000_170_0083
EPS Components
Rack End Removal and Installation (cont’d)

7. Clean off any grease or contamination from the 10. Close the ear position (A) of the boot band (B) with
boot installation grooves (A) around on the commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or
gearbox housing. Install the boots (B) on the rack equivalent (C).
ends with the tie-rod clips (C), and fit the boot end ＊１２
in the installation grooves in the housing properly.
＊１０
B
C C
B
Replace.
2.0 mm
(0.08 in.)
D
A 11. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
8. After installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (D) of the rack end. 12. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.
9. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A) 13. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-71).
with the holes (B) of the band.
＊１１
17-82 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:40:08 61TL2000_170_0084
Torque Sensor Replacement

Note these items during replacement: 5. Remove the snap ring (B), then remove the torque
• Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to sensor core/pinion shaft (C) and O-ring (D).
enter the gearbox.
• Do not try to disassemble the torque sensor coil and 6. Coat the new O-ring with grease, and carefully fit it
torque sensor core. If the sensor core are faulty, on the gearbox housing.
replace the pinion shaft as an assembly.
• If the torque sensor (pinion shaft assembly) is 7. Apply grease to the needle bearing (E) in the
replaced, the EPS control unit must memorize the gearbox housing.
torque sensor neutral position (see page 17-23).
8. Install the torque sensor core/pinion shaft
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-63). assembly on the gearbox housing while engaging
the gear teeth. Tighten the flange bolts to the
2. Center the steering rack within its stroke. specified torque.
3. Remove the rack guide (see page 17-84). 9. Install the rack guide (see page 17-84).
4. Remove the torque sensor coil (A). 10. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-71).
＊０１
9.8 N·m 11. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-16). After
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) C adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding the rack right and left.
D
Replace.
A
B
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-83
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１０００２５１４１ＫＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:40:08 61TL2000_170_0085
EPS Components
Rack Guide Removal/Installation

NOTE: During removal/installation, do not allow dust, 3. Install the spring onto the gearbox housing.
dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the steering
gearbox. 4. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw
and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or Loctite
1. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide 5699) to the middle of the threads. Loosely install
screw (B), the spring (C), and the rack guide (D). the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox.
＊０１
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes has passed after
applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and
residue, and reapply new sealant.
5. Loosely install the locknut.
6. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-16). After

D adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding the rack right and left.
C
2. Apply steering grease to the sliding surface and the

circumference of the rack guide, and install it onto
the gearbox housing. Wipe the grease off the
threaded section of the gearbox housing.
17-84 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１０００５７１５１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:40:08 61TL2000_170_0086
EPS Control Unit Removal/Installation

1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure 6. Install the EPS control unit in the reverse order of
(see page 22-78). removal.
2. Remove these items: 7. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure

(see page 22-78).
• Passenger’s dashboard undercover (see page
20-129). 8. Do the torque sensor neutral position
• Passenger’s front door sill trim (see page 20-76). memorization (see page 17-23).
• Passenger’s kick panel (see step 3 on page 20-76).
• Passenger’s under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 9. After installation, start the engine, allow it to idle,
22-76). and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock
• Harness clip (E) from the EPS control unit bracket. several times. Check that the EPS indicator does
＊０１ not come on.
E
C B D A
F
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) C B D A
3. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (2P),

connector B (2P), connector C (2P), and connector D
(28P).
4. Remove the bolts (F) from the EPS control unit (G).
5. Remove the EPS control unit.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-85
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｆ１８１０００２５１２１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:30 61TL2000_180_0001
Suspension
Suspension ....................................................... 18-2

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ...... 18-51
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１８０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:30 61TL2000_180_0003
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension

Special Tools ................................................................. 18-2
Wheel Alignment .......................................................... 18-5
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection ............................ 18-8
Wheel Runout Inspection ............................................ 18-8
Wheel Bolt Replacement ............................................. 18-9
Ball Joint Removal ....................................................... 18-11
Ball Joint Boot Inspection/Replacement .................... 18-12
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement ................ 18-13
Upper Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-19
Lower Arm Removal/Installation ................................ 18-21
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation ........................... 18-24
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ......................................... 18-25
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation .................. 18-25
Damper/Spring Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly .................................... 18-28
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement .................... 18-32
Upper Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-37
Lower Arm A Replacement ......................................... 18-39
Control Arm Replacement ........................................... 18-40
Lower Arm B Replacement .......................................... 18-41
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation ........................... 18-42
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ......................................... 18-43
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation .................. 18-44
Damper/Spring Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly .................................... 18-47
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１８０１ＺＣＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:20:31 61TL2000_180_0004
Special Tools
07GAD-SD40101 Bearing Driver Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 1
07GAF-SD4A100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 1
070AF-TA0A100 Bushing Driver 1
070AF-TA0A220 Bushing Receiver Set 1
070AG-SJA0300 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide, 45 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle 1
07965-SD90100 Support Base 1
07974-SA50700 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide, 39 x 41 mm 1
０１
０１
０１
, ,
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１
０１

ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１８０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:33 61TL2000_180_0005

Front Suspension
＊０１
DAMPER/SPRING
Removal, page 18-25
Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly,
page 18-28
UPPER ARM
BALL JOINT
Boot Inspection/Replacement,
page 18-12
KNUCKLE/HUB/
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Knuckle/Hub Replacement,
page 18-14
Wheel Bearing Replacement,
page 18-17
BALL JOINT
page 18-12
STABILIZER BAR
Replacement,
page 18-25
STABILIZER LINK
page 18-24
LOWER ARM
Compliance Bushing Replacement, page 18-23
WHEEL BOLT
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:36 61TL2000_180_0006

Rear Suspension
＊０１
DAMPER/SPRING
Removal, page 18-44
Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly,
page 18-47
UPPER ARM
BALL JOINT
page 18-12
KNUCKLE/
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement,
page 18-33
Knuckle Replacement,
page 18-34
STABILIZER BAR
STABILIZER LINK
LOWER ARM B
Replacement,
page 18-41
LOWER ARM A
Replacement,
page 18-39
CONTROL ARM
WHEEL BOLT

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ４４１００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:36 61TL2000_180_0007
Wheel Alignment
The suspension can be adjusted for front and rear toe. 6. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a tire with
your hands, and move it up and down and right and
Pre-Alignment Checks left to check for movement.)
＊０１
For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel
alignment, do these checks:
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect

measurement.
2. Make sure the suspension is not modified.
3. Make sure the fuel tank is full, and that the spare
tire, the jack, and the tools are in place on the
vehicle.
4. Check the tire size and tire pressure.
Tire size:
Front/Rear: P225/50R17 93V
7. Before doing alignment inspections, be sure to
Tire pressure (at cold): remove all extra weight from the vehicle, and no
Front/Rear: 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2, 33 psi) one should be inside the vehicle (driver or
passengers).
5. Check the runout of the wheels and tires (see page
18-8). 8. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to
stabilize the suspension.
9. Check that the steering column is set at the center

tilt and telescopic position.
Caster Inspection
Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Check the caster angle.
Caster angle: 3 ° 47 ’ ＋10 ’−50 ’

(Maximum difference between the right and
left side: 0 ° 30 ’)
• If the measurement is within specifications,

measure the camber angle.
• If the measurement is not within specifications,
check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ０００００００００００ＭＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:36 61TL2000_180_0008
Wheel Alignment (cont’d)

Camber Inspection Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment
Use commercially available computerized four wheel Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Check the camber angle. 1. Set the steering column to the middle tilt and
telescopic positions. Center the steering wheel
Camber angle: spokes, and install a steering wheel holder tool.
Front: 0 ° 00 ’ ±30 ’
Rear: −1 ° 00 ’ ±30 ’ 2. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight
(Maximum difference between the right and left ahead.
side: 0 ° 30 ’)
Front toe-in: 0±2 mm (0±0.08 in.)
• If the measurement is within specifications,
measure the toe-in. • If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
• If the measurement is not within specifications, • If no adjustment is required, go to rear toe
check for bent or damaged suspension inspection/adjustment.
components.
3. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8).
4. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the

flat surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end with a
wrench, and turn both tie-rods (C) until the front toe
is within specifications.
＊０２
C
B
A
14 x 1.5 mm
44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
5. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts to the

specified torque value. Reposition the rack-end
boot if it is twisted or displaced.
6. Go to rear toe inspection/adjustment.

08/04/09 12:20:36 61TL2000_180_0009
Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment Turning Angle Inspection

Use commercially available computerized four wheel Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the
measurement. brake, and measure the turning angle of both
wheels.
2. Check the toe.
Turning angle:
Rear toe-in: 2±2 mm (0.08±0.08 in.) Inward: 38 ° 58 ’ ±2 °
Outward (reference): 31 ° 28 ’
• If adjustment is required, go to step 3. ＊０４
• If no adjustment is required, go to turning angle
inspection.

4. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the rear control arm

(B), and loosen the self-locking nut (C).
＊０３
B
2. If the measurement is not within the specifications,

even up both sides of the tie-rod threaded section
length while adjusting the front toe. If it is correct,
C but the turning angle is not within the
12 x 1.25 mm specifications, check for bent or damaged
57 N·m suspension components.
Replace. A
5. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and

lightly tighten it.
NOTE: Always use a new self-locking nut whenever

it has been tightened to the specified torque.
6. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt

until the toe is correct.
7. While holding the adjusting bolt, tighten the self-

locking nut to the specified torque value.
8. Go to turning angle inspection.

08/04/09 12:20:37 61TL2000_180_0010
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection Wheel Runout Inspection

1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands
in the proper locations (see page 1-8). in the proper locations (see page 1-8).
2. Remove the wheels. 2. Check for a bent or deformed wheel.
3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts. 3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure the
Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the axial runout by turning the wheel.
brake disc securely against the hub.
Front and rear wheel axial runout:
Front Standard: 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.)
＊０１ Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
＊０１
A
108 N·m
(11.0 kgf·m, 79.6 lbf·ft)
Rear
＊０２
108 N·m A
(11.0 kgf·m, 79.6 lbf·ft)
4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against

the hub flange.
5. Measure the bearing end play while moving the

brake disc inward and outward.
Wheel bearing end play:

Front/Rear: 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than

the standard, replace the wheel bearing or the hub
bearing unit.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００６５２０１ＭＡＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１００００００００ＭＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:20:37 61TL2000_180_0011
Wheel Bolt Replacement

4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and Special Tools Required
measure the radial runout. Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
Front and rear wheel radial runout:

Standard: 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.) • Do not use a hammer or air or electric impact
Service limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) tools to remove and install the wheel bolts.
＊０２ • Be careful not to damage the threads of the
wheel bolts.
Front
1. Remove the front hub (see page 18-14).
2. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using
a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic
press attachments (C) or equivalent tools.
NOTE: Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean

the mating surfaces on the bolt and the hub.
＊０１
Press
5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification,
check the wheel bearing end play (see page 18-8), A
and make sure the mating surfaces on the brake
disc and the inside of the wheel are clean. B
6. If the bearing end play is within the specification

but the wheel runout is more than the service limit,
replace the wheel.
C C
3. Insert the new wheel bolt into the hub while

aligning the splined surfaces on the hub hole with
the wheel bolt.
NOTE:
• Degrease all around the wheel bolt.
• Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in
relation to the hub disc surface.
4. Install the wheel bolt using a hydraulic press until

the wheel bolt shoulder is fully seated.
5. Install the front hub (see page 18-14).
NOTE: If you cannot tighten the wheel nut to the

specified torque value when installing the wheel,
replace the front hub as an assembly.
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１０００６５２３１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:37 61TL2000_180_0012
Wheel Bolt Replacement (cont’d)

Rear 4. Insert the new wheel bolt (A) into the hub (B) while
aligning the splined surfaces (C) on the hub hole
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands with the wheel bolt. Adjust the measurement (D)
in the proper locations (see page 1-8). with the washers (P/N 94101-12800 or equivalent)
(E), then install a nut (P/N 90304-SC2-000 or
2. Remove the rear brake disc (see page 19-30). equivalent) (F) hand-tight.
3. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using NOTE:
the ball joint remover (C), and keep the jaw (D) of • Degrease all around the wheel bolt and the
ball joint remover vertical against the wheel bolt threaded section of the nut.
(see page 18-11). • Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in
relation to the hub disc surface.
NOTE: • Do not install the nut and washers that have been
• If the angle of the remover against the wheel bolt used as tools on a vehicle.
is not square, readjust the ball joint remover by ＊０３
turning the head (E) of the adjusting bolt (F). D
11−14 mm
• Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the (0.43−0.55 in.) F G
mating surfaces on the bolt and the hub. C
＊０２
B
D
A
B
E F
A
E
5. Tighten the nut until the wheel bolt is drawn fully

into the hub. Do not exceed the maximum torque
limit. Make sure there is no gap (G) between the
bolt and the hub.
C Limited torque:
07MAC-SL0A202 108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m, 79.6 lbf·ft) max.
6. Install the rear brake disc (see page 19-30).
NOTE:
• If you cannot tighten the wheel nut to the
specified torque value when installing the wheel,
replace the rear hub bearing unit as an assembly.
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
18-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:20:37 61TL2000_180_0013
Ball Joint Removal

Special Tools Required 3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the ball
• Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 joint remover as shown. Insert the jaws carefully,
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 making sure not to damage the ball joint boot.
Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the adjusting bolt
(B).
Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball
joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (C) securely to a
the ball joint connection to disconnect it. suspension arm or the subframe (D). Do not fasten
it to a brake line or wire harness.
1. Install a hex nut (A) onto the threads of the ball joint ＊０３
(B). Make sure the nut is flush with the ball joint pin
end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the C
ball joint pin.
＊０１
A D
07MAC-SL0A102 or E
07MAC-SL0A202 B
A
B
4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the
2. Apply grease to the ball joint remover on the areas head of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown
shown (A). This will ease installation of the tool and to allow the jaw (E) to pivot.
prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads.
＊０２ 5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the
A
B
ball joint pin pops loose from the ball joint
connecting hole. If necessary, apply penetrating
type lubricant to loosen the ball joint pin.
NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on

the pressure bolt.
6. Remove the ball joint remover, then remove the

nut from the end of the ball joint pin, and pull the
ball joint out of the ball joint connecting hole.
Inspect the ball joint boot, and replace it if
damaged.
07MAC-SL0A102 or 07MAC-SL0A202
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-11
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００１４２０１ＫＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:38 61TL2000_180_0014
Ball Joint Boot Inspection/Replacement

Special Tools Required 7. The front knuckle ball joint or the rear upper arm
• Ball joint boot clip guide, 45 mm 070AG-SJA0300 ball joint: Adjust the depth by turning the ball joint
• Ball joint boot clip guide, 39 x 41 mm 07974-SA50700 boot clip guide (A) until its base is just above the
groove around (B) the bottom of the boot. Then
1. Check the ball joint boot for weakness, damage, slide the clip (C) over the tool and into position on
cracks, and grease leaks. the boot.
＊０２
NOTE: C
• If the ball joint boot is damaged with grease leaks,
replace the appropriate part.
• If the ball joint boot is soft and cracked without
grease leaks, go to step 2. Replace the A
appropriate ball joint boot. 070AG-SJA0300
2. Disconnect the appropriate ball joint connection,

and remove the component including the ball joint:
B
• The front knuckle (see page 18-14).
• The front upper arm (see page 18-19).
• The rear upper arm (see page 18-37).
3. Remove the boot clip and the boot. 8. The front upper arm ball joint: Adjust the ball joint
boot clip guide with the adjusting bolt (A) until its
4. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with base is just above the groove around (B) the
grease. Keep the grease off of the boot-to-housing bottom of the boot. Then slide the clip (C) over the
mating surfaces (B). ball joint boot clip guide and into position on the
＊０１ boot.
A
＊０３
C
D 07974-SA50700
C B
5. Pack fresh grease into the base (C). Do not let dirt 9. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the
or other foreign materials get into the boot. exposed portion of the ball joint pin.
6. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it 10. Install all the removed parts.
gently to force out any air, then wipe the grease off
the tapered portion of the ball joint pin (D).
18-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００１４２０２ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:38 61TL2000_180_0015
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement

Exploded View
＊０１
KNUCKLE
Check for deformation and damage.
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Replace. SPLASH GUARD
Check for corrosion,
deformation, and damage.
Replace if rusted.
SNAP RING
FRONT KNUCKLE RING

Check for deformation
and damage.
Replace. 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
BALL JOINT BOOT CLIP

Check for deterioration
and damage.
COTTER PIN
Replace.
CASTLE NUT
14 x 1.5 mm
78−88 N·m
(8.0−9.0 kgf·m, 58−65 lbf·ft)
FRONT BRAKE DISC
Check for wear, damage, and rust.
FLAT SCREW
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
FRONT HUB
Check for damage and cracks.
SPINDLE NUT
26 x 1.5 mm
329 N·m (33.5 kgf·m, 242 lbf·ft)
Replace.
Apply a small amount of engine oil

to the seating surface of the nut.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-13
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００３６４０１ＫＢＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:20:38 61TL2000_180_0016
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont’d)

Special Tools Required 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A).
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 ＊０３
• Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SD4A100 A
8 x 1.25 mm
• Bearing driver attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 22 N·m
• Driver handle 07749-0010000 (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
• Bearing driver attachment, 78 x 90 mm
07GAD-SD40101
• Support base 07965-SD90100
Knuckle/Hub Replacement
B
12 x 1.25 mm C
2. Remove the wheel nuts and the front wheel. 108 N·m
＊０２ (11.0 kgf·m, 79.6 lbf·ft)
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts

(B), then remove the caliper assembly (C) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper
assembly or the brake hose, use a short piece of
wire to hang the caliper assembly from the
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose
excessively.
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bracket

(A) and the wheel speed sensor (B) from the
knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel speed sensor
connector.
＊０４
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
108 N·m
(11.0 kgf·m, 79.6 lbf·ft)
A
18-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:20:39 61TL2000_180_0017
6. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B). 11. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the knuckle ball
＊０５ joint, then remove the castle nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, insert the new cotter pin

into the ball joint pin hole from the front to the rear
of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. Check
the ball joint pin hole direction before connecting
the ball joint.
＊０７
B FRONT
26 x 1.5 mm
329 N·m
(33.5 kgf·m,
242 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A
FRONT
7. Remove the front brake disc (see page 19-18).
8. Check the front hub for damage and cracks.

07MAC-SL0A202
9. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball
B A
joint, then remove the nut (B). 14 x 1.5 mm Replace.
78−88 N·m
(8.0−9.0 kgf·m,
NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin 58−65 lbf·ft)
after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown.
＊０６ 12. Disconnect the knuckle ball joint from the lower
arm using the ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
07MAC-SL0A202
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
B
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
A
Replace.
10. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the

knuckle using the ball joint remover (see page
18-11).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-15

08/04/09 12:20:39 61TL2000_180_0018
Front Suspension

13. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper arm ball 16. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of
joint, then remove the castle nut (B). removal, and note these items:
NOTE: During installation, insert the new cotter pin • First install all of the components, and lightly
into the ball joint pin hole from the front to the rear tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the
of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. Check suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight
the ball joint pin hole direction before connecting before fully tightening to the specified torque
the ball joint. values. Do not place the jack against the ball joint
＊０８ pin of the knuckle.
connecting the knuckle.
• Before connecting the ball joint, degrease the
threaded section and the tapered portion of the
ball joint pin, the ball joint connecting hole, and
the threaded section and the mating surfaces of
the castle nut.
• Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
07MAC-SL0A202 specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
B align the castle nut by loosening it.
10 x 1.25 mm • Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
44−52 N·m
(4.5−5.3 kgf·m, • Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
FRONT A 33−38 lbf·ft) amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
Replace. nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
14. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the • Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
knuckle using the ball joint remover (see page surfaces of the front hub and the inside of the
18-11). brake disc.
15. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (A) from the surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the
knuckle (B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) with a wheel.
soft face hammer while drawing the hub outward,
then remove the knuckle/hub. 17. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
NOTE:
• Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The
driveshaft inboard joint may come apart.
• During installation, apply grease to the mating
surfaces of the wheel bearing and the driveshaft
outboard joint (see step 1 on page 16-20).
＊０９
A
B
C
18-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:20:40 61TL2000_180_0019
Wheel Bearing Replacement 3. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B)
from the knuckle (C).
1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the ＊１２
C
hub dis/assembly tool and a hydraulic press. Hold
the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic B
press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to damage
or deform the splash guard (D). Hold onto the hub
to keep it from falling when pressed clear.
＊１０
07GAF-SD40100
Press
6 x 1.0 mm
B A
D
4. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B)
using the bearing driver attachment, the driver
C handle, and a press.
A ＊１３
Press
07749-0010000
2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the

hub (B) using the hub dis/assembly tool, a 07746-0010600
commercially available bearing separator (C), and a
press.
＊１１
Press
07GAF-SD40100
B
A
C
A
5. Wash the knuckle and the hub thoroughly in high

flash point solvent before reassembly.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-17

08/04/09 12:20:40 61TL2000_180_0020
Front Suspension

6. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) 7. Check the front knuckle ring (A) for damage or
using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the deformation, and replace it if necessary.
bearing driver attachment, the support base, and a
press. NOTE: When installing the new front knuckle ring,
position the knuckle ring notch portion (B) toward
NOTE: cut out (C) near the ball joint in the knuckle, and
• Install the wheel bearing with the wheel speed align the center of the knuckle ring ledge portion
sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), (D) with the center of the wheel sensor hole (E) on
toward the inside of the knuckle. the knuckle as shown.
• Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and ＊１５
A
other foreign material from the encoder surface.
B
• Keep any magnetic tools away from the encoder
surface.
• Be careful not to damage the encoder surface
when you insert the wheel bearing.
＊１４
D Press
E
INSIDE C
0 ° ±5 °
E D
07GAD-SD40101 07965-SD90100
8. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B).
＊１６
B
C
A
D
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
9. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws

(D) to the specified torque value.
18-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:20:40 61TL2000_180_0021
Upper Arm Replacement

10. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the Special Tools Required
bearing driver attachment, the driver handle, the Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
support base, and a hydraulic press. Be careful not
to damage the splash guard (C). 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
＊１７ safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8).
Press
07749-0010000 2. Remove the front wheel.
3. Remove the front damper/spring (see page 18-25).

07746-0010600
4. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper arm ball
B joint, then remove the castle nut (B).
＊０１
C
A
07965-SD90100
07MAC-SL0A202
B
A 10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
5. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the

18-11).
6. Remove the upper arm mounting bolts (A), then

remove the upper arm (B).
＊０２
A
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-19
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００６２２０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:41 61TL2000_180_0022
Front Suspension
Upper Arm Replacement (cont’d)

7. Install the upper arm (A), and lightly tighten the 11. Place the floor jack under the lower arm, and raise
new upper arm mounting bolts (B), then connect the suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight.
the knuckle, and lightly tighten the castle nut (C).
12. Tighten the castle nut (A) on the upper arm ball
NOTE: joint to the specified torque value.
connecting the knuckle. NOTE:
• Before connecting the ball joint, degrease the • Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
threaded section and the tapered portion of the specification, then tighten it only far enough to
ball joint pin, the ball joint connecting hole, the align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
threaded section and the mating surfaces of the align the castle nut by loosening it.
castle nut. • Insert the new cotter pin (B) into the ball joint pin
＊０３ hole from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and
E bend its end as shown. Check the ball joint pin
hole direction before connecting the ball joint.
40 mm (1.6 in.) ＊０４
D
A
C 10 x 1.25 mm
10 x 1.25 mm 44−52 N·m
(4.5−5.3 kgf·m,
33−38 lbf·ft)
B
B FRONT Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft)
Replace.
8. Place a floor jack under the lower arm, and raise inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
the suspension until the clearance between the top
(D) of the upper arm ball joint and the backside of 14. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
the fender cut out point (E) is 40 mm (1.6 in.), then necessary (see page 18-5).
tighten the upper arm mounting bolts to the
NOTE: To measure the specified clearance,

temporarily remove the front inner fender
(see page 20-213).
9. Lower the floor jack
10. Install the front damper/spring (see page 18-26).
18-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:20:41 61TL2000_180_0023
Lower Arm Removal/Installation

Special Tools Required 6. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the knuckle ball
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 joint, then remove the castle nut (B).
• Bushing driver 070AF-TA0A100
• Bushing receiver set 070AF-TA0A220 NOTE: During installation, insert the new cotter pin
into the ball joint pin hole from the front to the rear
Removal/Installation of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. Check
the ball joint pin hole direction before connecting
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with the ball joint.
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). ＊０２
2. Remove the front wheel.

FRONT
3. Remove the front splash shield (see page 20-213).
4. Remove the damper pinch bolt (A) and the damper

fork mounting nut (B) while holding the mounting
bolt (C), then remove the damper fork (D) from the
FRONT
damper and the lower arm.
NOTE:
• During installation, insert the aligning tab (E) on
07MAC-SL0A202
the damper unit into the slot (F) of the damper
fork.
B A
• Use the new damper fork mounting bolt and the 14 x 1.5 mm Replace.
new mounting nut, and torque the nut while 78−88 N·m
(8.0−9.0 kgf·m,
holding the bolt during reassembly. 58−65 lbf·ft)
＊０１
A 7. Disconnect the knuckle ball joint from the lower
10 x 1.25 mm
49 N·m arm using the ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
NOTE:
E • Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
D
F
B
12 x 1.25 mm C
Replace.
5. Disconnect the stabilizer link from the lower arm

(see page 18-24).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-21
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００３７７０１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:41 61TL2000_180_0024
Front Suspension
Lower Arm Removal/Installation (cont’d)

8. Remove the lower arm mounting bolts, and 9. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of
remove the lower arm (A). removal, and note these items:
NOTE: Use new lower arm mounting bolts during • First install all of the components, and lightly
reassembly. tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the
＊０３ suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight
before fully tightening it to the specified torque
values. Do not place the jack against the ball joint
pin of the knuckle.
the castle nut.
specification, then tighten it only far enough to
A align the castle nut by loosening it.
12 x 1.25 mm • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
14 x 1.5 mm 64 N·m surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the
88 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
(9.0 kgf·m, 65 lbf·ft) Replace. wheel.
Replace.
18-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:20:42 61TL2000_180_0025
Compliance Bushing Replacement 3. Press out the compliance bushing (A) with the
bushing driver, the bushing receiver set
1. Remove the lower arm. (attachment A), and a hydraulic press, and remove
the bushing from the lower arm (B).
2. Mark alignment marks (A) on the bottom of the
lower arm next to the aligning marks (B) on the NOTE: Be careful not to damage the inside of the
compliance bushing. bushing hole on the lower arm.
＊０６
NOTE: The compliance bushing has a specific Press
installation position. Turn the lower arm so that its
bottom side is up. Position the bushing identifying 070AF-TA0A100
mark (C) face up and near the tab (D) on the lower
arm. Then align the bushing aligning marks on the
bushing and the lower arm.
If the alignment marks are gone, align the angle (E)
between the lower arm and the bushing as shown. A
Aligning the marking position

＊０４
A B
A B
070AF-TA0A220
C (Attachment A)
D
Aligning the angle (reference)

＊０５
FRONT
E
23 °15 ’ ±3 °
C D
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-23

08/04/09 12:20:42 61TL2000_180_0026
Front Suspension
Lower Arm Removal/Installation Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation

(cont’d)
4. Clean the mating surfaces of the new compliance
bushing (A) and the lower arm (B). 2. Remove the front wheel.
＊０７
Press
D 3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and the flange nut
E
070AF-TA0A100 (B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a
hex wrench (D), then remove the stabilizer link (E).
＊０１
F A
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N·m
(3.9 kgf·m,
A E 28 lbf·ft)
Replace.
H
UPPER SIDE B
in the VEHICLE
C
2±0.5 mm
(0.08±0.02 in.)
B G
10 x 1.25 mm
070AF-TA0A220 39 N·m D
(Attachment B) (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
Replace. C
070AF-TA0A220 4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (F) and
(Attachment A)
the lower arm (G) with the joint pins set at the
5. Make sure of the compliance bushing installation center of their range of movement.
direction, align the bushing aligning marks with the
lower arm, then press in the bushing into the lower NOTE: The stabilizer link has a paint mark (H). The
arm using the bushing driver, the bushing receiver left stabilizer link is marked with yellow paint, and
set (attachments A and B), and a hydraulic press. the right stabilizer link is marked with white paint.
NOTE: 5. Install the new self-locking nut and the new flange
• Press in the bushing from the bottom side of the nut, and tighten them to the specified torque values
lower arm. while holding the respective joint pin with a hex
• After installation, check the protrusion (C) of the wrench.
bushing outer sleeve (D) through the lower arm
bushing hole (E). 6. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
6. Install the lower arm.
8. After 5 minutes of driving, tighten the self-locking

nut again to the specified torque value.
18-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００５６８６１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:20:42 61TL2000_180_0027
Stabilizer Bar Replacement Damper/Spring Removal and

Installation
Removal
3. Disconnect both tie-rod ball joints from the knuckle safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8).
4. Disconnect both stabilizer links from the stabilizer
bar (see page 18-24). 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bracket
mounting bolt (A).
5. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing ＊０１
holders (B), then remove the bushings (C) and the
stabilizer bar (D).
NOTE: During installation, align the paint marks (E)

on the stabilizer bar with the side of the bushings.
＊０１
A
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
B (4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
A
6 x 1.0 mm

E fork mounting nut (B) while holding the mounting
＊０２
A
10 x 1.25 mm
D C
6. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of

removal, and note these items:
C
Replace.
• Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
bar.
• Note the direction of installation for the bushings.
• Refer to stabilizer link removal/installation to
B
connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page 12 x 1.25 mm
18-24). Replace.
wheel.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-25
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００５６８５１ＫＢＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００１９１０１ＫＤＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:20:43 61TL2000_180_0028
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation (cont’d)

5. Remove the front strut brace mounting nuts (A). Installation
＊０３
A
8 x 1.25 mm 1. Position the damper/spring (A) in the body with the
aligning tab (B) facing inside.
B
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
＊０５
6. Remove the damper mounting nuts (B) from the

top of the damper. Do not let the damper/spring
drop down under its own weight. B
7. Remove the damper/spring (A). 2. Loosely install the new damper mounting nuts (A)
to the top of the damper.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body. ＊０６
B A
＊０４ 8 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 55 N·m
(5.6 kgf·m,
41 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A
3. Loosely install the front strut brace mounting nuts

(B).
18-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:20:43 61TL2000_180_0029
onto the lower arm (B). Install the aligning tab (C) the suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight.
on the damper unit into the slot (D) of the damper
fork. 8. Tighten the damper pinch bolt and the damper fork
＊０７ mounting nut while holding the mounting bolt to
E the specified torque values.
10 x 1.25 mm
49 N·m
(5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft) 9. Tighten the damper mounting nuts and front strut
brace mounting nuts on top of the damper to the
specified torque values.
C
A
D 10. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bracket (A).
＊０８
A
G B F
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
Replace. 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
5. Loosely install the damper pinch bolt (E) into the (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
damper fork.
6. Connect the damper fork and the lower arm with 11. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
the new damper fork mounting bolt (F), then lightly inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
tighten the new mounting nut (G).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-27

08/04/09 12:20:42 61TL2000_180_0027
Stabilizer Bar Replacement Damper/Spring Removal and

Installation
Removal
3. Disconnect both tie-rod ball joints from the knuckle safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8).
4. Disconnect both stabilizer links from the stabilizer
bar (see page 18-24). 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bracket
mounting bolt (A).
5. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing ＊０１
holders (B), then remove the bushings (C) and the
stabilizer bar (D).

on the stabilizer bar with the side of the bushings.
＊０１
A
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
B (4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
A
6 x 1.0 mm

E fork mounting nut (B) while holding the mounting
＊０２
A
10 x 1.25 mm
D C
6. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of

C
Replace.
• Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
bar.
• Note the direction of installation for the bushings.
• Refer to stabilizer link removal/installation to
B
connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page 12 x 1.25 mm
18-24). Replace.
wheel.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-25
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００５６８５１ＫＢＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００１９１０１ＫＤＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:20:43 61TL2000_180_0028
Front Suspension

5. Remove the front strut brace mounting nuts (A). Installation
＊０３
A
8 x 1.25 mm 1. Position the damper/spring (A) in the body with the
aligning tab (B) facing inside.
B
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
＊０５
6. Remove the damper mounting nuts (B) from the

top of the damper. Do not let the damper/spring
drop down under its own weight. B
7. Remove the damper/spring (A). 2. Loosely install the new damper mounting nuts (A)
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body. ＊０６
B A
＊０４ 8 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 55 N·m
(5.6 kgf·m,
41 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A
3. Loosely install the front strut brace mounting nuts

(B).
18-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:20:43 61TL2000_180_0029
onto the lower arm (B). Install the aligning tab (C) the suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight.
on the damper unit into the slot (D) of the damper
fork. 8. Tighten the damper pinch bolt and the damper fork
＊０７ mounting nut while holding the mounting bolt to
E the specified torque values.
10 x 1.25 mm
49 N·m
(5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft) 9. Tighten the damper mounting nuts and front strut
brace mounting nuts on top of the damper to the
specified torque values.
C
A
D 10. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bracket (A).
＊０８
A
G B F
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
Replace. 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
5. Loosely install the damper pinch bolt (E) into the (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
damper fork.
6. Connect the damper fork and the lower arm with 11. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
the new damper fork mounting bolt (F), then lightly inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
tighten the new mounting nut (G).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-27

08/04/09 12:20:43 61TL2000_180_0030
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

Exploded View
＊０９
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
Replace.
DAMPER MOUNTING WASHER
Check for deformation.
DAMPER MOUNTING BUSHING
Check for weakness
and damage.
DAMPER MOUNTING COLLAR
DAMPER MOUNTING BASE

Check for weakness
and damage.
DAMPER SPRING
Check for damage.
SPRING MOUNTING CUSHION
and damage.
BUMP STOP PLATE
BUMP STOP
Check for weakness,
oil contamination, and damage.
DUST COVER PLATE
DUST COVER LOWER MOUNT
and damage.
DUST COVER END/SLEEVE

Check for deterioration and damage.
DAMPER UNIT
Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
and smooth operation.
18-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ２０２０００１９１０１ＭＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:14 61TL2000_180_0031
NOTE: When compressing the damper spring, use a Inspection

commercially available strut spring compressor
(Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent) 1. Reassemble all the parts, except for the damper
according to the manufacturer’s instructions. spring.
Disassembly 2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and

check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the self- both compression and extension. The damper
locking nut (A) while holding the damper shaft with should extend smoothly and constantly when
a hex wrench (B). Do not compress the damper compression is released. If it does not, the gas is
spring more than necessary to remove the self- leaking and the damper should be replaced.
locking nut. ＊０３
＊０２
B
A
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring 3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding
compressor, then disassemble the damper as during these tests.
shown in the Exploded View.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-29

08/04/09 12:21:14 61TL2000_180_0032
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont’d)

Reassembly 5. Position the tab (A) on the spring mounting cushion
facing forward but toward the inside of the vehicle.
1. Install the spring mounting cushion (A) on the
damper mounting base (B) by aligning the tab (C) Left
and notch (D). ＊０６
＊０４ FRONT
A
B
D
B
D 0 ° ±3 °
A C
C Right
＊０７
2. Install all the parts except the damper mounting FRONT
A
washer and the self-locking nut onto the damper
unit by referring to the Exploded View. B
D
3. Compress the damper spring using a strut spring
compressor. Do not compress the spring
excessively. 0 ° ±3 °
4. Align the lower end (A) of the damper spring with

the stepped part (B) of the dust cover lower mount
and the lower spring seat on damper unit.
C
＊０５
6. Align the angle of the stud (B) on the damper
mounting base (C) with the aligning tab (D) on the
bottom of the damper unit as shown.
18-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:14 61TL2000_180_0033
7. Install the damper mounting washer (A) and the

new self-locking nut (B).
＊０８
C
A
B
10 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
Replace.
8. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wench (C), and

tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque
value.
9. Remove the damper/spring from the strut spring

compressor.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-31

08/04/09 12:21:14 61TL2000_180_0034
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement

Exploded View
＊０１
KNUCKLE
Check for deformation
and damage.
WASHERS
Check for deformation and damage.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
O-RING
Replace. REAR BRAKE DISC
Check for wear,
damage, and rust.
12 x 1.5 mm
98.1 N·m
(10.0 kgf·m, 72.3 lbf·ft)
SPLASH GUARD
Check for corrosion,
deformation,
and damage.
Replace if rusted.
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Check for faulty movement
and wear.
FLAT SCREW
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
18-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ４４１０００３６４０１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:21:15 61TL2000_180_0035
Special Tools Required 6. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).
Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 ＊０４
A
8 x 1.25 mm
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement 22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
2. Remove the wheel nuts, and the rear wheel.

＊０２
B
12 x 1.25 mm
C 108 N·m
(11.0 kgf·m,
79.6 lbf·ft)

(B), then remove the caliper assembly (C) from the
assembly or the brake hose, use a short piece of
wire to hang the caliper assembly from the
108 N·m undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose
(11.0 kgf·m, excessively.
79.6 lbf·ft)
8. Remove the two washers (A).

3. Release the parking brake lever fully.
NOTE: During installation, make sure the washers
4. Loosen the parking brake cable adjusting nut are installed between the brake caliper bracket and
(see page 19-8). the knuckle.
＊０５
5. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the arm (B). Then
disconnect the parking brake cable from the lever
(C).
＊０３
A
B
C A
8 x 1.25 mm 9. Remove the rear brake disc (see page 19-30).
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-33

08/04/09 12:21:15 61TL2000_180_0036
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont’d)

10. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B). Knuckle Replacement
＊０６
1. Remove the hub bearing unit.
2. Remove the splash guard (A).

＊０７
B
Replace.
12 x 1.5 mm
98.1 N·m
(10.0 kgf·m, 72.3 lbf·ft)
A
11. Check the hub bearing unit for damage and cracks. A 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
12. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items: 3. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball
joint, then remove the castle nut (B).
• Use a new O-ring on reassembly.
• After installing the brake caliper, make sure the NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin as
clearance between lower arm B and the parking shown after tightening the new castle nut.
brake cable is more than 5 mm (0.20 in.). ＊０８
• Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
surfaces of the hub bearing unit and the brake
disc.
07MAC-SL0A102
• Do the parking brake adjustment (see page 19-8).
wheel.

B
14 x 1.5 mm
69−78 N·m
(7.0−8.0 kgf·m,
51−58 lbf·ft)
Replace. A
4. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the

18-11).
NOTE:
• During installation, to connect the ball joint, raise
up the suspension with a jack (see step 9 on page
18-38).
18-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:16 61TL2000_180_0037
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A) from the 8. Remove the control arm mounting self-locking nut
knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel speed sensor (A) and the washer (B).
connector.
＊０９ NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut during
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m reassembly.
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) ＊１１
A
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m
(6.0 kgf·m, B
43 lbf·ft) FRONT
Replace.
6. Remove the self-locking nut (A) while holding the
joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), then disconnect 9. Remove the lower arm A mounting bolt (A), and the
the stabilizer link (D) from the knuckle, and remove lower arm B mounting bolt (B), then remove the
the brake hose bracket (E). knuckle (C).
NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut during NOTE: Use new mounting bolts during reassembly.
reassembly. ＊１２
C
＊１０
F
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
Replace.
B
A 12 x 1.25 mm
10 x 1.25 mm 59 N·m
44 N·m (6.0 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft) Replace.
Replace.
B
A
12 x 1.25 mm
C 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft)
Replace.
D
7. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (F).
NOTE: Use the new mounting bolt during

reassembly.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-35

08/04/09 12:21:16 61TL2000_180_0038
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont’d)

10. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
and note these items:
• First install all of the components, and lightly

tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight
before fully tightening to the specified torque
values.
the castle nut.
align the castle nut by loosening it.
surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.

18-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:16 61TL2000_180_0039
Upper Arm Replacement

Special Tools Required 7. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts
Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 (A), then remove the caliper assembly (B) from the
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with assembly or the brake hose, use a short piece of
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). wire to hang the caliper assembly from the
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose
2. Remove the rear wheel. excessively.
3. Remove the rear damper/spring (see page 18-44). NOTE: Make sure the washers (C) position on
reassembly, if they are removed (see step 8 on
4. Release the parking brake lever fully. page 18-33).
＊０２
5. Loosen the parking brake cable adjusting nut
(see page 19-8).
6. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the arm (B). Then
disconnect the parking brake cable from the lever
A
(C). 12 x 1.25 mm
＊０１ 108 N·m
B (11.0 kgf·m,
79.6 lbf·ft)
8. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball
joint, then remove the castle nut (B).
A
C 8 x 1.25 mm NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin as
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, shown after tightening the new castle nut.
16 lbf·ft) ＊０３
07MAC-SL0A102
B
14 x 1.5 mm
69−78 N·m
(7.0−8.0 kgf·m, A
51−58 lbf·ft)
Replace.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-37
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ４４１０００６２２０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:17 61TL2000_180_0040
Rear Suspension
Upper Arm Replacement (cont’d)

9. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the 11. Remove the upper arm mounting bolts (A), then
knuckle using the ball joint remover (see page remove the upper arm (B).
18-11).
NOTE: Use new mounting bolts during reassembly.
NOTE: ＊０６
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when B
• During installation, to connect the ball joint,
position a floor jack under the connecting point
of the knuckle and lower arm A, and raise the
suspension with the jack.
＊０４
A
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft)
Replace.
A
12. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items;
• First install all of the components, and lightly

suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight
10. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bracket before fully tightening to the specified torque
(A). values.
＊０５ • Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m connecting the knuckle.
(2.2 kgf·m, • Before connecting the ball joint, degrease the
16 lbf·ft) threaded section and the tapered portion of the
the castle nut.
A • Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
align the castle nut by loosening it.
• After installing the brake caliper, make sure the
clearance between lower arm B and the parking
brake cable is more than 5 mm (0.20 in.).
wheel.

18-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:17 61TL2000_180_0041
Lower Arm A Replacement

1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 5. Install lower arm A in the reverse order of removal,
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). and note these items:
2. Remove the rear wheel. • First install all of the components, and lightly
3. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolt (B). suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight
＊０１ before fully tightening to the specified torque
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft) values.
Replace. • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
wheel.

UPPER
A
B
8 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m 59 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) (6.0 kgf·m,
43 lbf·ft)
Replace.
4. Remove the lower arm A mounting bolts, then

remove lower arm A.
NOTE: Use new mounting bolts during reassembly.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-39
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ４４１０００３７７０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:17 61TL2000_180_0042
Rear Suspension
Control Arm Replacement

1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 6. Install the control arm in the reverse order of
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). removal, and note these items:
3. Remove the control arm mounting self-locking nut suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight
(A) and the washer (B) from the knuckle side. before fully tightening to the specified torque
values.
NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut during • Position the extended surfaces of the cam on the
reassembly. adjusting bolt and the adjusting cam plate facing
＊０１ down.
A
12 x 1.25 mm • Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and
C
Replace. 59 N·m the adjusting cam plate with the marked
FRONT (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft) positions on the frame when tightening the self-
Replace.
locking nut.
B • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
wheel.

E
12 x 1.25 mm F
57 N·m OUTSIDE
Replace.
4. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (C) and

the adjusting cam plate (D) with the frame.
5. Remove the self-locking nut (E) while holding the

adjusting bolt, then remove the adjusting cam plate,
the adjusting bolt, and the control arm (F).
NOTE: Use a new adjusting bolt and a new self-

locking nut during reassembly.
18-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ４４１０００１７２５１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:17 61TL2000_180_0043
Lower Arm B Replacement

1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 4. Install lower arm B in the reverse order of removal,
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). and note these items:
3. Remove the lower arm B mounting bolts, then suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight
remove lower arm B. before fully tightening to the specified torque
values.
NOTE: Use new mounting bolts during reassembly. • Make sure the clearance between lower arm B
＊０２ and the parking brake cable is more than 5 mm
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (0.20 in.).
(6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft) • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
Replace. surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.

12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft)
Replace.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-41
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ４４１０００３７７０１ＫＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:21:18 61TL2000_180_0044
Rear Suspension
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation

1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 6. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
2. Remove the rear wheel. 7. Test-drive the vehicle.
3. Remove the flange nut (A) and the self-locking nut 8. After 5 minutes of driving, tighten the self-locking
(B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a nuts again to the specified torque values.
hex wrench (D), then remove the stabilizer link (E).
＊０１
A
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) G
Replace.
D
H
E
F
B
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 lbf·ft)
Replace.
4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (F) and

the knuckle adding in the brake hose bracket (G)
with the joint pins set at the center of their range of
movement.
NOTE:
• The stabilizer link has a paint mark (H). The paint
mark indicates the difference between the left
and right stabilizer links.
• Install the end of the stabilizer link with the paint
mark in the upper position.
5. Install the new self-locking nuts, and tighten them

to the specified torque values while holding the
respective joint pin with a hex wrench.
18-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ４４１０００５６８６１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:18 61TL2000_180_0045
Stabilizer Bar Replacement

1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 5. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). removal, and note these items:
2. Remove the rear wheels. • Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
bar.
3. Disconnect both stabilizer links from the stabilizer • Note the direction of installation for the bushing.
bar (see page 18-42). • Refer to the stabilizer link removal/installation to
connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
4. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing 18-42).
holders (B), then remove the bushings (C) and the • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
stabilizer bar (D). surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
on the stabilizer bar with the side of the bushings. 6. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
＊０１ necessary (see page 18-5).
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
E (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
FRONT
C
B D
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-43
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ４４１０００５６８５１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:18 61TL2000_180_0046
Rear Suspension
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation

Removal 4. Remove the damper mounting nuts (A) from the
top of the damper.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with ＊０２
A
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). 10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
2. Remove the rear wheel.
3. Fold down the rear seat-back, then remove the lid

(A).
NOTE: Lift up the tab (B) inside underneath the lid

first using a flat-tipped screwdriver, then release
the hooks.
＊０１
5. Remove the self-locking nut (A) while holding the

joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), then disconnect
the stabilizer link (D) from the knuckle, and remove
the brake hose bracket (E).
NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut during

reassembly.
A ＊０３
F
12 x 1.25 mm
B Replace.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
6. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (F).
NOTE: Use the new mounting bolt during

reassembly.
18-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ４４１０００１９１０２ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:18 61TL2000_180_0047
7. Remove the damper/spring (A) by lowering the rear Installation

suspension.
1. Lower the rear suspension, and position the
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body. damper/spring (A) in the body with the welded nut
＊０４ (B) on the bottom of the damper facing forward.
NOTE:
A
• Be careful not to damage the body.
• Make sure the damper is installed in the correct
direction.
＊０５
A
FRONT
2. Loosely install the new damper mounting nuts (A)

＊０６
A
10 x 1.25 mm
55 N·m
Replace.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-45

08/04/09 12:21:19 61TL2000_180_0048
Rear Suspension

3. Loosely install the new damper lower mounting 7. Install the lid (A), and set the rear seat-back to the
bolt (A) on the bottom of the damper. Connect the original position.
stabilizer link (B) to the brake hose bracket (C) to the ＊０８
knuckle, and loosely install the new self-locking nut
(D).
＊０７
A
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
Replace.
D
10 x 1.25 mm A
44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
Replace. 8. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
E inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.

F necessary (see page 18-5).
4. Place a floor jack under the connecting point of the

knuckle and lower arm A, and raise the suspension
to load with the vehicle’s weight.
5. Tighten the damper lower mounting bolt and the

self-locking nut while holding the joint pin (E) with
the hex wrench (F) to the specified torque values.
6. Tighten the damper mounting nuts on top of the

damper to the specified torque value.
18-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:19 61TL2000_180_0049
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

Exploded View
＊０１
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
Replace.
DAMPER MOUNTING WASHER


Check for weakness
and damage.
DAMPER MOUNTING COLLAR
DAMPER MOUNTING BASE


Check for weakness
and damage.
DAMPER SPRING
Check for damage. SPRING MOUNTING
CUSHION
and damage.
DUST COVER PLATE
BUMP STOP PLATE
DUST COVER END/SLEEVE BUMP STOP

Check for deterioration Check for weakness,
and damage. oil contamination, and damage.
DUST COVER LOWER MOUNT

Check for deterioration and damage.
DAMPER UNIT
Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
and smooth operation.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-47
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ４４１０００１９１０２ＭＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:19 61TL2000_180_0050
Rear Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont’d)

NOTE: When compressing the damper spring, use a Inspection
commercially available strut spring compressor
(Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent) 1. Reassemble all parts, except for the damper spring.
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and
Disassembly check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the self- should extend smoothly and constantly when
locking nut (A) while holding the damper shaft with compression is released. If it does not, the gas is
a hex wrench (B). Do not compress the damper leaking and the damper should be replaced.
spring more than necessary to remove the self- ＊０３
locking nut.
＊０２
B
A
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring 3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding
compressor, then disassemble the damper as during these tests.
shown in the Exploded View.
18-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:20 61TL2000_180_0051
Reassembly 5. Align the angle of the stud (A) on the damper

mounting base (B) with the welded nut (C) on the
1. Install the spring mounting cushion (A) on the bottom of the damper unit as shown.
damper mounting base (B) by aligning the tabs (C) ＊０６
Left Right
and notches (D).
＊０４ FRONT FRONT
B
C
A A
D 8 ° ±3 ° 8 ° ±3 °
D
C
6. Install the damper mounting washer (A), and
loosely install the new self-locking nut (B).
2. Install all the parts except the damper mounting ＊０７
C
washer and the self-locking nut onto the damper
A
unit by referring to the Exploded View.
3. Compress the damper spring using a strut spring

compressor. Do not compress the spring
excessively.
4. Align the lower end (A) of the damper spring with

the stepped part (B) of the dust cover lower mount
and the lower spring seat on the damper unit.
＊０５
B
10 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m(3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
Replace.
7. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench (C), and

tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque
value.
8. Remove the damper/spring from the strut spring

compressor.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-49

08/04/09 12:21:20 61TL2000_180_0052
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１８０１ＺＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:21:20 61TL2000_180_0053
Suspension
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID ................... 18-57
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 18-66
TPMS Control Unit Replacement ................................ 18-93
Initiator Replacement ................................................... 18-94
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement ............................ 18-95
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１８０１ＺＣＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:21:22 61TL2000_180_0054
TPMS
＊０１
RIGHT-REAR INITIATOR
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR


RIGHT-FRONT LEFT-REAR INITIATOR

INITIATOR Replacement, page 18-94
Replacement,
page 18-94
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR LEFT-FRONT INITIATOR


TPMS CONTROL UNIT
18-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/14 13:17:54 61TL2000_180_0055

System Indicator The Low Tire Pressure Indicator
The system has seven indicators. • If the system detects low tire pressure in any of the
four tires, the low tire pressure indicator and the
• The low tire pressure indicator (A) appropriate tire indicator(s) come on, as well as the
• The message indicator (B) message indicator.
• The TPMS indicator (C) • If the control unit detects a problem in the system
• The right-front (RF) tire indicator (D) during an indication of low tire pressure, it will turn
• The left-front (LF) tire indicator (E) off the tire indicator(s), store the DTC(s), and turn on
• The right-rear (RR) tire indicator (F) the TPMS indicator and the low tire pressure
• The left-rear (LR) tire indicator (G) indicator after blinking.
＊０１
A The TPMS Indicator
B • If a problem in the system is detected, the TPMS

indicator comes on, as well as the message indicator,
and the low tire pressure indicator comes on after
blinking for about 75 seconds.
• If low tire pressure and a problem in the system are
detected, the TPMS indicator comes on, as well as the
message indicator, and the low tire pressure indicator
comes on after blinking for about 75 seconds.
If the system is OK, the TPMS indicator and the low tire
pressure indicator should come on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II), and then go off 2 seconds
later. If they don’t, there is a problem with the system.
E D
C G F
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-53
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７００００００００ＢＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:22 61TL2000_180_0056
TPMS

DTC 11, 13, 15, 17 Problems That Are Not System Faults
If the system detects low tire pressure in any of the four • Tire Sealant
tires, the low tire pressure indicator and the appropriate Fluid sealant used to repair a punctured tire can
tire indicator(s) with the message indicator come on, damage the tire pressure sensor mounted on each
and the control unit sets one or more of these codes: wheel. It can prevent the system from detecting the
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17. When the tire pressure returns to correct tire pressure, which sets a DTC 11, 13, 15 or
normal, and TPMS control unit receives the normal 17 even though the system is normal.
pressure signal from, the tire pressure sensor, control • Cold Weather
unit turns off the indicators. When the weather is extremely cold, about −40 °F
(−40 °C) or colder, the output of the lithium battery in
each tire pressure sensor may drop far enough that
Pressure Changing by Temperature the control unit sets a DTC for low battery voltage (31,
33, 35, or 37) even though the system is normal.
Tire pressures will increase slightly as the temperature • Non-TPMS Wheels (including spare tire)
in the tires rises during driving. Vehicles equipped with TPMS must use wheels made
Pressures will can increase or decrease slightly with for the system. Every TPMS wheel has an exclusive
changes in outside air temperature. A temperature mark; do not use any other type of wheel.
change of about 18 °F (10 °C) will change tire pressure When a flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the
by about 10 kPa (0.1 kgf/cm2, 1.5 psi). If the temperature TPMS indicator comes on (DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38)
drops, tire pressure could decrease just enough to turn because the system is no longer receiving the signal
on the low tire pressure indicator and tire indicator(s), from the flat tire’s transmitter.
but later, the tire temperature increases, the tire This is not a problem with spare tire.
pressure could increase enough to turn indicator off. To
resolve a complaint of such intermittent indications,
confirm and clear the stored DTC(s) and check the tire
pressures.
Then explain to the client how temperature changes
can affect the system.
＊０４ psi
(kgf/cm2, kPa)
38
(2. 6, 260)
35
(2. 4, 240)
32
(2. 2, 220)
29
(2. 0, 200)
26
(1. 8, 180)
23
(1. 6, 160)
20
(1. 4, 140)
−20 0 20 40 60
−4 32 68 104 140
18-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:22 61TL2000_180_0057
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is Set How to Troubleshoot DTCs

• When the system detects a problem, the TPMS DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of
control unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode, the problem is still present and the TPMS indicator and
and does not alert the driver to low tire pressures. the low tire pressure indicator (starts blinking) are still
• If the TPMS control unit loses power, or fails, the on. Do not use a troubleshooting procedure unless the
TPMS indicator and the low tire pressure indicator system has set the DTC listed for it.
(starts blinking) comes on, but no DTC are set.
• The memory can hold all the DTCs that could NOTE: For DTCs 11, 13, 15, and 17 (tire low tire
possibly be set. However, when the same DTC is pressure), the TPMS indicator comes on and the low
detected more than once, the most recent one tire pressure indicator blinks only if the DTCs are
overwrites the previous one, so only the latest DTC of caused by a system problem rather than low tire
each type is stored. pressure.
• DTCs are indicated in ascending order, not in the
order they occurred. 1. Ask the client to describe the conditions when the
• Set DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (nonvolatile indicators came on or blinked, and try to reproduce
memory), they cannot be cleared by disconnecting the same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out if
the battery. To clear a DTC, connect the HDS (Honda the client checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC), since the indicator came on.
and follow the screen prompts.
2. If an indicator does not come on during the test-
drive, check for loose terminals, poor contact due
to damaged terminals, etc. before you start
troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, repair and clear the DTCs,

and test-drive the vehicle. Make sure no indicators
come on.
4. Check for DTCs from other control units DTCs that

are connected via F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
related to F-CAN, the most likely cause was that the
ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with the TPMS
control unit connector disconnected. Clear the
DTCs. Check for PGM-FI and TPMS codes, and
troubleshoot those first.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-55

08/04/09 12:21:23 61TL2000_180_0058
TPMS

How to Retrieve DTCs How to Clear DTCs
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the
HDS (Honda Diagnostic System) to the data link HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver’s side under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
of the dashboard. ＊０３
＊０２
A
A
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and TPMS control unit. If it doesn’t, troubleshoot
and TPMS control unit. If it doesn’t, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the on the HDS.
refer to the DTC troubleshooting. NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
18-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:23 61TL2000_180_0059
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID

Memorizing a Tire Pressure Sensor ID Memorize the ID with the HDS
When a tire pressure sensor is replaced, the sensor ID The HDS can memorize the ID of a new tire pressure
must be memorized by the TPMS control unit. sensor or a previously memorized ID.
NOTE: To ensure the control unit memorizes the correct 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the
ID, the vehicle with the new sensor must be at least 10 ft HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located
(3 m) away from other vehicles that have tire pressure under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
sensors. ＊０１
Memorizing a Sensor ID Automatically

After rotating the tires or replacing a tire pressure
sensor, drive the vehicle for at least 40 seconds at a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or more, and all the sensor
IDs will be memorized automatically.
NOTE:
• When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the HDS
to memorize IDs.
• After the IDs are memorized, reduce the pressure in
all four tires to less than the appropriate specification,
and check to see that the four tire indicators come on.
A

and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn’t,
4. Memorize the ID of the tire pressure sensor by

following the screen prompts on the HDS.
NOTE:
• See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.
• When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the
HDS to memorize IDs.
• After the IDs are memorized, reduce the pressure
in all four tires to less than the appropriate
specification, and check to see that the four tire
indicators come on.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-57
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１０００００ＢＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:23 61TL2000_180_0060
TPMS

DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting
11 Right-front Tire Low Air Pressure (see page 18-69)
13 Left-front Tire Low Air Pressure (see page 18-69)
15 Right-rear Tire Low Air Pressure (see page 18-69)
17 Left-rear Tire Low Air Pressure (see page 18-69)
21 Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature (see page 18-70)
22 Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature (see page 18-70)
23 Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature (see page 18-70)
24 Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature (see page 18-70)
31 Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage (see page 18-71)
32 Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Transmission Failure (see page 18-71)
33 Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage (see page 18-71)
34 Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Transmission Failure (see page 18-71)
35 Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage (see page 18-71)
36 Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Transmission Failure (see page 18-71)
37 Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage (see page 18-71)
38 Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Transmission Failure (see page 18-71)
41 Abnormal Signal Reception Error (see page 18-76)
45 Initiator Circuit Short Detection (see page 18-77)
51 Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error (see page 18-79)
53 Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error (see page 18-79)
55 Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error (see page 18-79)
57 Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error (see page 18-79)
61 Right-front Initiator Circuit Open Detection (see page 18-83)
63 Left-front Initiator Circuit Open Detection (see page 18-83)
65 Right-rear Initiator Circuit Open Detection (see page 18-83)
67 Left-rear Initiator Circuit Open Detection (see page 18-83)
81 TPMS Control Unit Failure (see page 18-86)
83 No VSP Signal (see page 18-86)
85 F-CAN Communication Failure (see page 18-87)
91 Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error (see page 18-88)
93 Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error (see page 18-88)
95 Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error (see page 18-88)
97 Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error (see page 18-88)
18-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１０００００ＧＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:53 61TL2000_180_0061

HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210)
TPMS control unit or the vehicle
Low tire pressure indicator does not come Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-89)
on, and no DTCs are stored
Low tire pressure indicator does not go off, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-90)
and no DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-90)
DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-91)
DTCs are stored
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-59
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１０００００ＨＢＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:21:53 61TL2000_180_0062
TPMS
System Description
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 20P Connector
＊０１

1 WHT CAN H (F-CAN F-CAN communication Ignition switch ON (II): pulses
communication circuit
signal high)
4 BLK GND (Ground) Ground for the TPMS Less than 0.1 V at all times
control unit
5 BLU LF LF SIG. Detects the signal from For the first 5 seconds after turning the
(LF low the left-front initiator ignition switch ON (II): pulses 4.5−6.5 V
frequency After 40 seconds with ignition switch ON (II):
signal) less than 0.1 V
6 PNK RF LF SIG. Detects the signal from For the first 5 seconds after turning the
(RF low the right-front initiator ignition switch ON (II): pulses 4.5−6.5 V
7 LT BLU K-LINE (Data link Communications with ―――
connector) the HDS
8 BRN IG1 (Ignition Power source for Ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
switch 1) activating the system Ignition switch in LOCK (0): less than 0.1 V
10 WHT ＋B (Battery Power source for the Battery voltage at all times
positive) TPMS control unit
18-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１０００００ＣＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:53 61TL2000_180_0063
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 20P Connector (cont’d)
＊０２

11 RED CAN L (F-CAN F-CAN communication Ignition switch ON (II): pulses
communication circuit
signal low)
15 BRN LF GND Ground for the For the first 5 seconds after turning the
(LF low initiators ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.1 V
frequency
ground)
16 ORN LR LF SIG. Detects the signal from For the first 5 seconds after turning the
(LR low the left-rear initiator ignition switch ON (II): pulses 4.5−6.5 V
17 GRY RR LF SIG. Detects the signal from For the first 5 seconds after turning the
(RR low the right-rear initiator ignition switch ON (II): pulses 4.5−6.5 V
20 PUR LF PWR. Power source for the For the first 5 seconds after turning the
(LF low initiators ignition switch ON (II): pulses 0.3−6.5 V
power) About 0.3 V
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-61

08/04/09 12:21:53 61TL2000_180_0064
TPMS

System Structure
Whenever the engine is running, the TPMS control unit continuously monitors all four tire pressure sensors and the
system. If it detects low pressure in a tire, it alerts the driver by turning on the low tire pressure indicator and the
appropriate tire indicator. If it detects a problem in the system, it turns on the TPMS indicator and the low tire pressure
indicator (starts blinking).
Initiators
Mounted on the top of each wheel well, each initiator sends a start/stop signal to the tire pressure sensor in the tire
below it.
Control unit
Mounted over the accelerator pedal module, the control unit sends signals to the initiators and receives signals from
the tire pressure sensor to verify pressure sensor IDs every time the engine starts. It also receives signals from the
transmitters inside the tire pressure sensors, and it continuously monitors and controls the system.
Indicators
All indicators are in the gauge control module: The low tire pressure indicator (LED indicator), tire indicators (on the
multi-information display) to show which tire is affected, and the TPMS indicator (on the multi-information display)
that comes on only if there’s a problem with the system. The message indicator (LED indicator) comes on when there
is one or more indicators on in the multi-information display. When two or more tire pressures are low, the low tire
pressure indicator comes on about 5 seconds before the appropriate tire indicator. Once low pressure is detected, the
system scans all four pressure sensors to ensure that it turns on the correct tire indicator.
＊０３
Initiator Initiator
(low frequency) Vehicle (low frequency)
Tire Pressure Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor

(sensor-transmitter) (sensor-transmitter)
Gauge Control Module
Indicators
(LED and multi-
information
display drive)
Communication
via F-CAN
Wheel Wheel
(TPMS type) (TPMS type)
Control Unit
(with radio
frequency
antenna)
Wheel Wheel
(TPMS type) (TPMS type)
Tire Pressure Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor

(sensor-transmitter) (sensor-transmitter)
Initiator Initiator
(low frequency) (low frequency)
18-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:53 61TL2000_180_0065
Tire pressure sensor

Each sensor is an integrated unit made up of the tire valve stem, a pressure sensor, and a transmitter. The unit is
attached to the inside of the wheel, around the valve stem. The sensor transmits internal tire information one time per
60 seconds to the control unit. When the TPMS control unit receives a tire pressure reading of less than 183 kPa
(1.9 kgf/cm2, 27 psi), the TPMS control unit then turns on the low tire pressure indicator and the appropriate tire(s)
indicator. When that tire’s pressure is increased to more than 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi), the transmitter sends the
tire pressure reading to the control unit, and the control unit turns the indicators off.
Wheels
The TPMS will not work unless TPMS type wheels are installed on the vehicle. There are two different type of wheels
used. The original equipment wheels have a ‘‘TPMS’’ mark (A) on them, and counterweights (B) are mounted to the
opposite side of the tire pressure sensor (C), and counterbalance the weight of the sensor.
＊０４
C C
B B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-63

08/04/09 12:21:54 61TL2000_180_0066
TPMS

System Communication
• When the vehicle is running, a RF (radio frequency) band wave signal is transmitted from each tire pressure sensor
to the control unit.
• When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the initiators send a LF (low frequency) band wave signal to the tire
pressure sensors, switching them from sleep mode to normal function mode. When the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0), the sensors switch from normal function mode back to sleep mode to extend their battery life.
• Each tire pressure sensor has its own ID to prevent jamming by similar systems on other vehicles. After memorizing
all the sensor IDs, the control unit recognizes only those specific signals.
• An ID can be memorized manually or automatically. Each initiator is hardwired to the control unit. Every time the
ignition is turned to ON (II), the control unit asks each initiator to wake up the appropriate tire pressure sensor. The
transmitters in the tire pressure sensors then transmit the sensor IDs, and the control unit receives and memorizes
them. The control unit then knows which ID belongs to each tire location. This recurring ID confirmation prevents
any confusion in the system as a result of normal tire rotation.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the brackets on the TPMS control unit and the front/rear initiators. Misalignment of the
control unit and initiators could interfere with sending and receiving signals.
＊０５
Control Unit
(with Radio Frequency Antenna)
Initiator Tire Pressure Sensor

(Low Frequency Initiator) (Sensor-Transmitter)
18-64 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:54 61TL2000_180_0067
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-65
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１８０１ＺＡＡＴ０３
08/04/09 12:21:54 61TL2000_180_0068
TPMS
Circuit Diagram
＊９０
BATTERY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 1 (100 A) No. 3-5 (30 A) F19 No. 29 (10 A) N14

BLK/RED WHT
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 3-1 (50 A) 2 IG1 5 C5 No. 5 (7.5 A) P20
WHT BLU BRN
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
POWER CIRCUIT
LOW TIRE PRESSURE

INDICATOR
22
WHT WHT
INDICATOR
DRIVER
MESSAGE INDICATOR CIRCUIT
21
RED RED
TPMS INDICATOR
LF TIRE INDICATOR
RF TIRE INDICATOR
LR TIRE INDICATOR
RR TIRE INDICATOR
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
ECM/PCM
A3
WHT
A4
RED
6
WHT
14
RED
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC) 7
LT BLU
4
BLK
G501
18-66 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１０００００ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:54 61TL2000_180_0069
＊９０
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
10
WHT
＋B
8
BRN
IG1
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
1
WHT
CAN H
CAN
CONTROLLER
11
RED
CAN L
INITIATOR
LEFT-FRONT 1 20
PUR PUR
LF PWR. LF PWR.
LF SIGNAL 2 5
DRIVER BLU
CIRCUIT LF LF SIG.
3
BRN
LF GND
INITIATOR PUR
RIGHT-FRONT 1
PUR
LF PWR.
LF SIGNAL 2 6
DRIVER PNK
CIRCUIT RF LF SIG.
3
BRN
LF GND
INITIATOR PUR
LEFT-REAR 1
BRN BRN
LF PWR.
LF SIGNAL 2 16
DRIVER PNK ORN
CIRCUIT LR LF SIG.
3
GRN
LF GND
INITIATOR PUR
RIGHT-REAR 1
WHT BRN
LF PWR.
LF SIGNAL 2 17
DRIVER GRN GRY
CIRCUIT RR LF SIG.
3 15
RED BRN
LF GND LF GND
7
LT BLU
K-LINE
4
BLK
GND
: 12 V
G503 :5V
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-67

08/04/09 12:21:54 61TL2000_180_0070
TPMS

＊０１
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR N (16P) FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR P (20P)
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
18-68 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:54 61TL2000_180_0071
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Tire Low Air Pressure 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: If low tire pressure is detected, the control unit 5. Check the RF, LF, RR, or LR TIRE PRESSURE in the
will set one or more of these DTCs, and turn on the low TPMS DATA LIST with the HDS, and compare it
tire pressure indicator and the appropriate tire with the measured actual tire pressure.
indicator(s). If the low tire pressure and tire indicators
come on due to true low tire pressure, and the client NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor
corrects it before bringing the vehicle in, the DTCs will transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
have been stored, but all the indicators will be off. (0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). still displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous
sentence until NORMAL is shown.
2. Make sure the tires are inflated to the specified tire
pressure listed on the doorjamb sticker. Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within
40 kPa ( 0.4 kgf / cm2 , 6 psi) of the actual tire
3. Test-drive the vehicle. pressure?
Does the low tire pressure indicator go of f ? YES−Check for loose terminals and poor
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
YES−The system is OK at this time. Check for and substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
repair the cause of air loss. (see page 18-93), and recheck.
NO−Go to step 4. NO−Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly

mounted. Replace the appropriate tire pressure
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-69
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１１１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:55 61TL2000_180_0072
TPMS

DTC 21, 22, 23, 24: Tire Pressure Sensor 6. Check the RF, LF, RR, or LR TIRE PRESSURE
Abnormally High Temperature SENSOR TEMPERATURE in the TPMS DATA LIST
with the HDS.
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor
2. Check the tire indicated by the DTCs you retrieved. transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
NOTE: An abnormal rise in the internal temperature switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is
of the tires can be caused by: still displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous
• Excessive braking sentence until NORMAL is shown.
• Failure to release the parking brake (rear tires
only) Is 17 6 °F ( 80 °C) or more indicated?
• Leaving the vehicle running while parked
• Improper assembly of a wheel and tire YES−Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
(see page 18-95).
DTC Tire location
21 Right-front NO−Check for loose terminals and poor
22 Left-front connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
23 Right-rear substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
24 Left-rear (see page 18-93), and recheck.
4. Make sure the tires have cooled down.
Does the T PMS indicator go of f within one

minute?
YES−The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC

with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 6.
18-70 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１２１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:55 61TL2000_180_0073
DTC 31, 33, 35, 37: Tire Pressure Sensor Low DTC 32, 34, 36, 38: Tire Pressure Sensor
Battery Voltage Transmission Failure
NOTE: This problem occurs when the temperature NOTE:
around the sensor is −40 °F ( −40 °C) or less. Note that • Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device interfering
the diagnosis must be made in a place where ambient with the RF signal from the sensors when turning the
temperature is −4 °F ( −20 °C) or more. ignition switch to ON (II).
• Vehicle must be driven for 3 minutes at 15 mph
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (24 km/h) or more for DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38 to set.
Does the T PMS indicator go of f within one 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
minute?
2. Check the indicated location to make sure the
YES−The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC wheel is a TPMS type with the tire pressure sensor.
with the HDS.
DTC Tire location
NO−Go to step 2. 32 Right-front
34 Left-front
2. Check the RF, LF, RR, or LR TIRE PRESSURE 36 Right-rear
SENSOR BATTERY VOLTAGE in the TPMS DATA 38 Left-rear
LIST with the HDS.
Is a T PMS type wheel with a tire pressure sensor
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor mounted on the vehicle?
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition YES−Go to step 3.
still displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous NO−Install a TPMS type wheel, and memorize the
sentence until NORMAL is shown. sensor ID. Drive the vehicle above 15 mph
(24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or memorize
DTC Tire location the ID with the HDS (see page 18-57).
31 Right-front
33 Left-front 3. Test-drive the vehicle.
35 Right-rear
37 Left-rear 4. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the TPMS DATA LIST
with the HDS.
Is LOW indicated?
YES−Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
(see page 18-95). YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Check for loose terminals and poor NO−Go to step 5.

substitute a known-good TPMS control unit 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(see page 18-93), and recheck.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-71
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１３１０ＦＡＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１３２０ＦＡＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:21:55 61TL2000_180_0074
TPMS

7. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is DT C 85 indicated? 12. Substitute a wheel with a known-good tire pressure

sensor on the vehicle.
YES−Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page
18-87). 13. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or
NO−Check for loose terminals and poor memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-57).
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
16. Check TPMS DATA LIST for RF, LF, RR, and LR TIRE
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changing to
NORMAL with the HDS.
10. Check TPMS DATA LIST for RF, LF, RR, or LR TIRE
PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changing to NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor
NORMAL with the HDS. transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK still displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition sentence until NORMAL is shown.
still displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous DTC Tire location
sentence until NORMAL is shown. 32 Right-front
34 Left-front
DTC Tire location 36 Right-rear
32 Right-front 38 Left-rear
34 Left-front
36 Right-rear Is NORMAL indicated within one f ull turn of the
38 Left-rear tire?
Is NORMAL indicated within one f ull turn of the YES−Replace the tire pressure sensor on the
tire? original wheel (see page 18-95).
YES−The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC NO−Go to step 17.
with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 11.
18-72 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:55 61TL2000_180_0075
18. Replace the appropriate initiator with a known- 22. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector.
good initiator (see page 18-94).
DTC Initiator location
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 32 Right-front
34 Left-front
20. Check TPMS DATA LIST for RF, LF, RR, and LR TIRE 36 Right-rear
PRESSURE SENSOR TRANSMITTER STATUS 38 Left-rear
changing to NORMAL with the HDS.
23. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK 24. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition 20P connector terminal No. 20 and the appropriate
switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is initiator 3P connector terminal No. 1 (see table).
still displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous
sentence until NORMAL is shown. DTC Initiator location
32 Right-front
DTC Tire location 34 Left-front
32 Right-front 36 Right-rear
34 Left-front 38 Left-rear
36 Right-rear ＊０１
38 Left-rear TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
Is NORMAL indicated within one f ull turn of the
tire?
YES−Replace the tire appropriaate initiator LF PWR.

(see page 18-94). (PUR)
NO−Go to step 21.

LF PWR.
21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). (WHT)
RIGHT-
REAR
LF PWR. (BRN)
LEFT-REAR
LF PWR. (PUR)
RIGHT-FRONT
LF PWR. (PUR)
LEFT-FRONT
INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
NO−Repair open in the wire between the TPMS

control unit and the appropriate initiator.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-73

08/04/09 12:21:55 61TL2000_180_0076
TPMS

25. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 26. Check for continuity between the appropriate TPMS
20P connector terminal No. 15 and the appropriate control unit 20P connector terminal and the
initiator 3P connector terminal No. 3 (see table). appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No. 2
(see table).
32 Right-front DTC TPMS Control Initiator location
34 Left-front Unit 20P
36 Right-rear Connector
38 Left-rear Terminal
＊０２ 32 No. 6 Right-front
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 34 No. 5 Left-front
36 No. 17 Right-rear
38 No. 16 Left-rear
＊０３
LF GND (BRN)
LEFT-FRONT RIGHT-FRONT
LF LF SIG. (BLU) RF LF SIG.

(PNK)
LF GND (BRN)
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
LEFT-FRONT 20P CONNECTOR
LF GND (BRN)
LF LF SIG. (BLU) RF LF SIG. (PNK)
RIGHT-FRONT
LF GND (GRN)
LEFT-REAR
LR LF SIG. (ORN) RR LF SIG. (GRY)
LF GND (RED)
RIGHT-REAR
INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR RR LF SIG.

LR LF SIG. (PNK) (GRN)
LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR
YES−Go to step 26. INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
control unit and the appropriate initiator. Is there continuity?

18-74 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:56 61TL2000_180_0077
27. Check for continuity between body ground and the 29. Measure voltage between body ground and the
appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector
terminal (see table). terminal (see table).
DTC TPMS Control Unit 20P DTC TPMS Control Unit 20P
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
32 No. 6 32 No. 6
34 No. 5 34 No. 5
36 No. 17 36 No. 17
38 No. 16 38 No. 16
＊０４＊０５
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
LF LF SIG. (BLU) RF LF SIG. (PNK) LF LF SIG. (BLU) RF LF SIG. (PNK)
LR LF SIG. (ORN) RR LF SIG. (GRY) LR LF SIG. (ORN) RR LF SIG. (GRY)
Is there continuity? Is there battery voltage?
YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire YES−Repair short to power in the wire between
between the TPMS control unit and the appropriate the TPMS control unit and the appropriate
initiator. initiator.
NO−Go to step 28. NO−Replace the TPMS control unit (see page
18-93).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-75

08/04/09 12:21:56 61TL2000_180_0078
TPMS

DTC 41: Abnormal Signal Reception Error 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NOTE: Is DT C 85 indicated?
• Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device interfering
with the RF signal from the sensors when turning the YES−Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page
ignition switch to ON (II). 18-87).
• If DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38 is also set, troubleshoot those
DTCs first. NO−Check for loose terminals and poor
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
2. Check all four wheels to make sure they are the
TPMS type with the tire pressure sensor. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is each wheel a T PMS type with a tire pressure 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
sensor mounted on the vehicle?
10. Check TPMS DATA LIST for LF, RF, LR, and RR TIRE
YES−Go to step 3. PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changing to
NO−Install a TPMS type wheel, and memorize the
sensor ID. Drive the vehicle above 15 mph NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor
(24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or memorize transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
the ID with the HDS (see page 18-57). (0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
3. Test-drive the vehicle. still displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous
sentence until NORMAL is shown.
4. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the TPMS DATA LIST
with the HDS. Is NORMAL indicated within one f ull turn of the
tire?
YES−Go to step 8. with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 5. NO−Check for loose terminals and poor

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
18-76 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１４１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:56 61TL2000_180_0079
DTC 45: Initiator Circuit Short Detection 9. Check for continuity between body ground and
TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No. 20.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ＊０２
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the

ignition switch to ON (II) again.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. LF PWR. (PUR)
Is DT C 45 indicated?
YES−Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the TPMS control unit and the initiators.
TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No. 20. NO−Go to step 10.
＊０１
10. On each individual initiator, check for continuity
between body ground and initiator 3P connector
terminal No. 1.
NOTE: Check the initiators when mounted on the

vehicle.
LF PWR. (PUR) ＊０３

LF PWR.
YES−Go to step 8.
8. Disconnect all four of the initiator 3P connectors.

YES−Replace the appropriate initiator (see page

18-94).
NO−Check for loose terminals and poor

substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-77
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１４５０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:56 61TL2000_180_0080
TPMS

11. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 14. On each individual initiator, check for continuity
20P connector terminals No. 15 and No. 20. between initiator 3P connector terminals No. 1 and
＊０４ No. 3.
＊０６
LF GND LF PWR. (PUR)

(BRN) LF PWR. LF GND

NO−Go to step 15. 18-94).
12. Disconnect all four of the initiator 3P connectors. NO−Check for loose terminals and poor
13. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
20P connector terminals No. 15 and No. 20. (see page 18-93), and recheck.
＊０５
16. Measure voltage between body ground and TPMS

control unit 20P connector terminal No. 15.
＊０７
LF GND LF PWR. (PUR) TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
(BRN)

LF GND
(BRN)
YES−Repair short in the wire between TPMS

control unit 20P connector terminals No. 15 (LF
GND line) and No. 20 (LF PWR. line).
NO−Go to step 14. Is there battery voltage?

the TPMS control unit and the initiators.
NO−Check for loose terminals and poor

18-78 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:56 61TL2000_180_0081
DTC 51, 53, 55, 57: Tire Pressure Sensor 5. Check TPMS DATA LIST for RF, LF, RR, or LR TIRE
Registration Error PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changing to
NOTE: These DTCs will only set during initialization
with the HDS. NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). (0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
2. Check the DTC indicated to the tire location to make still displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous
sure the wheel is a TPMS type with the tire sentence until NORMAL is shown.
pressure sensor.
DTC Tire location
DTC Tire location 51 Right-front
51 Right-front 53 Left-front
53 Left-front 55 Right-rear
55 Right-rear 57 Left-rear
57 Left-rear
Is a T PMS type wheel with a tire pressure sensor tire?
mounted on the vehicle?
YES−Go to step 3. with the HDS.
NO−Install a TPMS type wheel, and memorize the NO−Go to step 6.

sensor ID. Drive the vehicle above 15 mph
(24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or memorize 6. Substitute a wheel with a known-good tire pressure
the ID with the HDS (see page 18-57). sensor on the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-57).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-79
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１５１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:57 61TL2000_180_0082
TPMS

10. Check TPMS DATA LIST for RF, LF, RR, or LR TIRE 12. Replace the appropriate initiator with a known-
PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changing to good initiator (see page 18-94).
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK 14. Check TPMS DATA LIST for RF, LF, RR, and LR TIRE
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition PRESSURE SENSOR TRANSMITTER STATUS
switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is changing to NORMAL with the HDS.
sentence until NORMAL is shown. NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor
DTC Tire location (0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
51 Right-front switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is
53 Left-front still displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous
55 Right-rear sentence until NORMAL is shown.
57 Left-rear
DTC Tire location
Is NORMAL indicated within one f ull turn of the 51 Right-front
tire? 53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
YES−Replace the tire pressure sensor on the 57 Left-rear
original wheel (see page 18-95).
NO−Go to step 11. tire?
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES−Replace the appropriate initiator (see page
18-94).
NO−Go to step 15.
18-80 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:57 61TL2000_180_0083
16. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector. 19. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
20P connector terminal No. 15 and the appropriate
DTC Initiator location initiator 3P connector terminal No. 3 (see table).
51 Right-front
53 Left-front DTC Initiator location
55 Right-rear 51 Right-front
57 Left-rear 53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
17. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. 57 Left-rear
＊０２
18. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
20P connector terminal No. 20 and the appropriate
initiator 3P connector terminal No. 1 (see table).

51 Right-front LF GND (BRN)
53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear
＊０１
LF GND (BRN)
LEFT-FRONT
LF GND (BRN)
LF PWR. RIGHT-FRONT
(PUR)
LF GND (GRN)
LEFT-REAR
LF PWR.
(WHT) LF GND (RED)
RIGHT- RIGHT-REAR
REAR
LF PWR. (BRN) INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
LEFT-REAR
LF PWR. (PUR)
RIGHT-FRONT YES−Go to step 20.
LF PWR. (PUR) NO−Repair open in the wire between the TPMS

LEFT-FRONT control unit and the appropriate initiator.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-81

08/04/09 12:21:57 61TL2000_180_0084
TPMS

20. Check for continuity between the appropriate TPMS 21. Check for continuity between body ground and the
control unit 20P connector terminal and the appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector
appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No. 2 terminal (see table).
(see table).
DTC TPMS Control Unit 20P
DTC TPMS Control Initiator location Connector Terminal
Unit 20P 51 No. 6
Connector 53 No. 5
Terminal 55 No. 17
51 No. 6 Right-front 57 No. 16
53 No. 5 Left-front ＊０４
55 No. 17 Right-rear TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
57 No. 16 Left-rear
＊０３

LF LF SIG. (BLU) RF LF SIG.
(PNK)
TPMS CONTROL UNIT

20P CONNECTOR

between the TPMS control unit and the appropriate
LR LF SIG. (ORN) RR LF SIG. (GRY) initiator.
NO−Go to step 22.
RR LF SIG. 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

LR LF SIG. (PNK) (GRN)
LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR

18-82 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:57 61TL2000_180_0085
23. Measure voltage between body ground and the DTC 61, 63, 65, 67: Initiator Circuit Open
appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector Detection
terminal (see table).
DTC TPMS Control Unit 20P
Connector Terminal 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
51 No. 6
53 No. 5 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the
55 No. 17 ignition switch to ON (II) again.
57 No. 16
＊０５ 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS, and note the
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR indicated DTC(s).
Is DT C 61, 63, 65, and/ or 67 indicated?
YES−Go to step 5.

6. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector.
Wire side of female terminals DTC Initiator location

61 Right-front
Is there battery voltage? 63 Left-front
65 Right-rear
YES−Repair short to power in the wire between 67 Left-rear
the TPMS control unit and the appropriate
initiator. 7. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
NO−Replace the TPMS control unit (see page

18-93).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-83
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１６１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:57 61TL2000_180_0086
TPMS

8. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 9. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
20P connector terminal No. 20 and the appropriate 20P connector terminal No. 15 and the appropriate
initiator 3P connector terminal No. 1 (see table). initiator 3P connector terminal No. 3 (see table).
DTC Initiator location DTC Initiator location

61 Right-front 61 Right-front
63 Left-front 63 Left-front
65 Right-rear 65 Right-rear
67 Left-rear 67 Left-rear
＊０１＊０２
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
LF PWR. LF GND (BRN)

(PUR)
LF PWR.
(WHT) LF GND (BRN)
RIGHT-
REAR LEFT-FRONT
LF PWR. (BRN) LF GND (BRN)

LEFT-REAR RIGHT-FRONT
LF PWR. (PUR) LF GND (GRN)

RIGHT-FRONT LEFT-REAR
LF PWR. (PUR) LF GND (RED)

LEFT-FRONT RIGHT-REAR
INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR

NO−Repair open in the wire between the TPMS NO−Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
control unit and the appropriate initiator. control unit and the appropriate initiator.
18-84 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:21:58 61TL2000_180_0087
10. Check for continuity between the appropriate TPMS 11. Check for noted DTC(s) in step 4.
control unit 20P connector terminal and the
appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No. 2 W ere DT C 61, 63, 65, and 67 indicated at the
(see table). same time?
DTC TPMS Control Initiator location YES−Check for loose terminals and poor
Unit 20P connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
Connector substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
Terminal (see page 18-93), and recheck.
61 No. 6 Right-front
63 No. 5 Left-front NO−Go to step 12.
65 No. 17 Right-rear
67 No. 16 Left-rear 12. Swap a known-good initiator with the initiator
＊０３ indicated by the DTC (see page 18-94).
61 Right-front
63 Left-front
RF LF SIG. 65 Right-rear
LF LF SIG. (BLU)
(PNK) 67 Left-rear
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 13. Reconnect all connectors.

20P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
17. Check for DTCs with the HDS, and compare the
indicated DTC with the noted DTC(s) in step 4.
RR LF SIG. DTC Initiator location

LR LF SIG. (PNK) (GRN) 61 Right-front
63 Left-front
65 Right-rear
LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR 67 Left-rear
Wire side of female terminals Does the indicated DT C change between the
initiators that were replaced in step 12?
YES−Go to step 11. 18-94).
NO−Repair open in the wire between the TPMS NO−Check for loose terminals and poor
control unit and the appropriate initiator. connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-85

08/04/09 12:21:58 61TL2000_180_0088
TPMS

DTC 81: TPMS Control Unit Failure DTC 83: No VSP Signal
NOTE: Low battery voltage can cause this DTC. Make NOTE: Check the fuel and emission systems DTCs with
sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition the HDS, and troubleshoot the ECM/PCM and F-CAN
(see page 22-77). communication errors first (see page 11-3).
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the 3. Test-drive the vehicle.
YES−Go to step 5.
18-93). NO−The system is OK at this time.
NO−The system is OK at this time. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES−Go to DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page

18-87).
NO−Go to step 6.
18-86 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１８１０ＦＡＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１８３０ＦＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:21:58 61TL2000_180_0089
7. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the TPMS DATA LIST DTC 85: F-CAN Communication Failure
with the HDS.
NOTE: Check the fuel and emission systems DTCs with
Is the vehicle speed indicated? the HDS, and troubleshoot the ECM/PCM and F-CAN
communication errors first (see page 11-3).
YES−Check for loose terminals and poor
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(see page 18-93), and recheck. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO−Go to step 8. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the
8. Check the speedometer.
4. Wait about 5 seconds.
Does the speedometer register speed?
18-93). Is DT C 85 indicated?
NO−Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the YES−Go to step 6.

known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to NO−The system is OK at this time.
step 1 and recheck. If the ECM/PCM was updated
and DTCs are not indicated, troubleshooting is 6. Test-drive the vehicle.
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted and
DTCs and not indicated, replace the original Does the speedometer work?
ECM/PCM (see page 11-234).
NO−Go to step 7.
Does the speedometer work?

NO−Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and

reconnect all connectors, then check and
troubleshoot the fuel and emissions systems
(see page 11-3).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-87
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１８５０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:21:58 61TL2000_180_0090
TPMS

10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 91, 93, 95, 97: Tire Pressure Sensor
Internal Error
11. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
14. Check for continuity between the TPMS control unit ignition switch to ON (II) again.
20P connector terminals and the ECM/PCM
connector A (49P) terminals individually (see table). 4. Wait about 1 minute.
Terminal TPMS Control ECM/PCM 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Name Unit 20P Connector A
Connector (49P) Terminal NOTE: The tire pressure sensor of the appropriate
Terminal wheel is shown.
CAN L No. 11 No. 4
CAN H No. 1 No. 3 DTC Tire location
＊０１ 91 Right-front
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 93 Left-front
95 Right-rear
CAN H (WHT) 97 Left-rear
Is DT C 91, 93, 95, or 97 indicated?
YES−Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor

(see page 18-95).
CAN L (RED)
CAN H (WHT) CAN L (RED)


connections at the TPMS control unit and G503. If
necessary, substitute a known-good TPMS control
unit (see page 18-93), and recheck.
NO−Repair open in the appropriate wire between

the TPMS control unit and the ECM/PCM.
18-88 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ７９７０００８１９１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:22:10 61TL2000_180_0091
Low tire pressure indicator does not come 4. Check the TIRE PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST
on, and no DTCs are stored with the HDS, and compare it with the actual
measured tire pressure.
2. Check the low pressure indicator for several transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
seconds when the ignition switch is turned to (0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
ON (II). switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is
Did the indicator come on and then go of f ? sentence until NORMAL is shown.
YES−Go to step 3. Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within

40 kPa ( 0.4 kgf / cm2 , 6 psi) of the actual tire
NO−Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control pressure?
module (see page 22-292). If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module (see page YES−Check for loose terminals and poor
22-313), and recheck. connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
3. Lower the pressure in each tire until the low tire (see page 18-93), and recheck.
pressure indicator comes on.
NO−Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
NOTE: (see page 18-95).
• If 5 minutes has passed since the ignition switch
has been turned to ON (II), turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0) and wait 2 minutes, then turn
it back ON (II) again.
• Reinflate the tire before continuing to the next
tire.
• After noting whether the low tire pressure
indicator came on, make sure it goes off when
you reinflate the tire before proceeding to the
next tire.
Does the indicator come on when the pressure

drops below 183 kPa ( 1.9 kgf / cm2, 27 psi) or less?
NO−Go to step 4.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-89
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１０００００ＦＡＡＴ０３
08/04/09 12:22:10 61TL2000_180_0092
TPMS

Low tire pressure indicator does not go off, TPMS indicator does not come on, and no
and no DTCs are stored DTCs are stored
NOTE: If the low tire pressure indicator is turned on at 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
the same time as the TPMS indicator, go to the
following TPMS symptom troubleshooting first: TPMS 2. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored
(see page 18-91). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 4. Check the TPMS indicator when the ignition switch
is turned to ON (II).
2. Check the low tire pressure indicator for several
seconds when the ignition switch is turned to Did the indicator come on?
ON (II).
Did the indicator come on and then blink f or about connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
7 5 seconds? substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
YES−Check for gauge DTCs with the HDS
(see page 22-3) and go to the indicated gauge NO−Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
DTC’s troubleshooting. module (see page 22-292). If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module (see page
NO−Go to step 3. 22-313), and recheck.
6. Check the low tire pressure indicator for several

seconds when the ignition switch is turned to
ON (II).
Did the indicator come on and then blink f or about

7 5 seconds?

18-93).
NO−Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control

module (see page 22-3). If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module (see page
22-313), and recheck.
18-90 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１０００００ＦＡＡＴ０４ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１０００００ＦＡＡＴ０５
08/04/09 12:22:10 61TL2000_180_0093
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 5. Measure voltage between body ground and TPMS
are stored control unit 20P connector terminal No. 10.
＊０１
NOTE: TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
• Check for gauge DTCs with the HDS (see page 22-3).
If the multiple DTCs are present, including B1178,
troubleshoot those DTCs first. If only DTC B1178 is ＋B (WHT)
present, continue with the following troubleshooting.
• If the TPMS control unit was replaced, the TPMS
indicator will be on until all four sensor ID codes are
learned.
2. Check the No. 29 (10 A) fuse in the driver’s under- Wire side of female terminals
Is the f use blown? Is there battery voltage?
YES−Replace the No. 29 (10 A) fuse, and recheck. YES−Go to step 6.

If the fuse blows again, check for a short to body
ground in the wire between the TPMS control unit NO−Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
and the No. 29 (10 A) fuse in the driver’s under- control unit and the No. 29 (10 A) fuse in the driver’s
dash fuse/relay box. under-dash fuse/relay box.
NO−Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 3. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Check the No. 5 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver’s under- 7. Measure voltage between body ground and TPMS
dash fuse/relay box. control unit 20P connector terminal No. 8.
＊０２
Is the f use blown? TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
YES−Replace the No. 5 (7.5 A) fuse, and recheck. If

the fuse blows again, check for a short to body IG1 (BRN)
ground in the wire between the TPMS control unit
and the No. 5 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver’s under-dash
fuse/relay box.
NO−Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 4.

YES−Go to step 8.

control unit and the No. 5 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver’s
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-91
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１０００００ＦＡＡＴ０６
08/04/09 12:22:11 61TL2000_180_0094
TPMS

10. Trun the ignition switch to ON (II).
11. Measure voltage between body ground and TPMS

control unit 20P connector terminal No. 4.
＊０３
GND (BLK)
Is there 0.1 V or more?
YES−Repair open or high resistance in the wire

between the TPMS control unit and body ground
(G503).
NO−Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control

module (see page 22-292). If the gauge control
module is OK, check for loose terminals and poor
substitute a known-good TPMS control (see page
18-93), and recheck.
18-92 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:11 61TL2000_180_0095
TPMS Control Unit Replacement

NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit mounting 4. Remove the TPMS control unit (A) from the bracket
bracket is not bent or twisted as this may affect its (B).
communication with the tire pressure sensors.
NOTE: While separating the TPMS control unit
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). from the bracket, release the hook (C) on the TPMS
control unit using a flat-tipped screwdriver (D), and
2. Remove the flange bolt (A), then remove the TPMS push it up to remove the bracket.
control unit (B) with the bracket (C). ＊０２
NOTE: The TPMS control unit is located over the

accelerator pedal module.
＊０１ B
A
6 x 1.0 mm
D 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
C B
5. Install the TPMS control unit in the reverse order of

removal.
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit is properly

installed. You will hear a click when the TPMS
C control unit is securely mounted on the bracket.
B
3. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connector (D). 6. Connect the HDS, and memorize the tire pressure
sensor IDs (see page 18-57). Do not memorize the
IDs automatically.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-93
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１５９６３１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:22:11 61TL2000_180_0096
TPMS
Initiator Replacement
Front Rear
NOTE: Make sure the initiator mounting bracket is not 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
bent or twisted as this may affect its communication
with the TPMS control unit and the tire pressure sensor. 2. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). 4. Remove the cover (A) with the initiator (B), and
disconnect the initiator connector (C).
3. Remove the front wheel. ＊０２
4. Remove the front inner fender (see page 20-213).
5. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).

＊０１
6 x 1.0 mm
B 9.8 N·m
B A (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
A 5. Separate the cover and the initiator.

6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 6. Install the new initiator in the reverse order of
removal.
6. Remove the initiator (B) from the inner side of the
wheelwell.
7. Install the new initiator in the reverse order of

removal.
18-94 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１５９６２７ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:22:11 61TL2000_180_0097
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement

Removal 5. Position the wheel so the tire machine (A) and tire
iron (B) are next to the valve stem (C) and will move
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands away from it when the machine starts. Then
in the proper locations (see page 1-8). remove the tire from the wheel.
＊０２
2. Remove the wheel with the faulty sensor.
3. Remove the tire valve stem cap and the valve stem
core, and let the tire deflate.
A
4. Remove any balance weights, and then break the
bead loose from the wheel with a commercially
available tire changer (A). C B
Note these items to avoid damaging the tire

pressure sensor:
• Do the outside of the wheel first.
• Position the wheel as shown so the valve
stem (B) is 90 degrees from the bead
breaker (C) as shown. 6. Remove the valve stem nut (A) and the washer (B),
• Do not position the bead breaker of the tire then remove the tire pressure sensor with the valve
changer too close to the rim. stem (C) from the wheel.
＊０１
90 ° NOTE: Check the nut and the washer; if they have
A
deterioration or damage, replace with new ones
during reassembly.
＊０３
A
C
B
C
OUTSIDE
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-95
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｂ５４１７５１５９６３４ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:22:12 61TL2000_180_0098
TPMS
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement (cont’d)

7. Remove and discard the valve stem grommet (A) Installation
from the tire pressure sensor (B).
NOTE:
NOTE: • Use only wheels that have a ‘‘TPMS’’ mark (A) on
• The valve stem grommet might stay in the wheel; them.
make sure you remove it. • The vehicle may be equipped with one of the two
• Always use a new valve stem grommet types of wheels.
whenever the tire pressure sensor has been
removed from the wheel. When only removing a Type 1
tire from the wheel, replace the valve stem ＊０５
grommet if it is possible.
＊０４
A
Replace.
Type 2
＊０６
18-96 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:22:12 61TL2000_180_0099
1. Before installing the tire pressure sensor, clean the 4. Lube the tire bead sparingly with a paste-type tire
mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel. mounting lubricant, and position the wheel so the
tire machine (A) and tire iron (B) are next to the
2. Install the tire pressure sensor (A) and the washer valve stem (C) and will move away from it when
(B) to the wheel (C), and tighten the valve stem nut the machine starts. Then install the tire onto the
(D) finger tight. Make sure the pressure sensor is wheel.
resting on the wheel. ＊０９
NOTE: Install the tire pressure sensor so that the

sensor housing surface (E) does not extend beyond
the protrusion (F) on the wheel to prevent the
sensor housing from being caught on the bead of A
the tire when assembling the tire.
＊０７
A F C C
B
E
OUTSIDE
5. With a dry air source, inflate the tire to 300 kPa

B (3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 psi) to seat the tire bead to the rim,
WHEEL CENTER D then adjust the tire pressure (see page 18-5), and
4 N·m install the valve stem cap.
＊０８ NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is seated on both

F
sides of the rim uniformly.
E E 6. Check and adjust the wheel balance, then install the

wheels on the vehicle.
7. Remove the jack stands, and lower the vehicle.

Torque the wheel nuts to specifications.
8. Connect the HDS, and memorize the pressure

sensor IDs (see page 18-57).
3. Tighten the valve stem nut to the specified torque

while holding the tire pressure sensor.
NOTE:
• Do not use air or electric impact tools to tighten a
valve stem nut.
• Do not twist the tire pressure sensor to adjust its
position with the wheel, as this will damage or
deform the valve stem grommet.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-97

08/04/09 12:33:45 61TL2000_190_0001
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components ................... 19-1

VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)
System Components .................................... 19-41
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１９０１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:33:46 61TL2000_190_0003
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components

Special Tools ................................................................. 19-2
Brake System Inspection and Test .............................. 19-4
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
Adjustment ................................................................ 19-6
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment ................. 19-7
Brake System Bleeding ................................................ 19-9
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram .................... 19-10
Parking Brake Switch Test ........................................... 19-11
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test ...................................... 19-11
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement ........... 19-12
Front Brake Disc Inspection ......................................... 19-16
Front Brake Disc Replacement .................................... 19-18
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul ...................................... 19-19
Master Cylinder Replacement ..................................... 19-20
Master Cylinder Inspection .......................................... 19-21
Brake Booster Test ....................................................... 19-22
Brake Booster Replacement ........................................ 19-23
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement ............ 19-25
Rear Brake Disc Inspection .......................................... 19-28
Rear Brake Disc Replacement ..................................... 19-30
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul ....................................... 19-32
Brake Pedal Replacement ............................................ 19-33
Brake Hose and Line Inspection .................................. 19-34
Brake Hose Replacement ............................................. 19-35
Parking Brake Lever Replacement .............................. 19-37
Parking Brake Cable Replacement .............................. 19-38
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１９０１ＺＣＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:33:46 61TL2000_190_0004
Special Tools
07AAE-SEPA101 Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 1
０１

ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１９０１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:33:51 61TL2000_190_0005
＊０１
MASTER CYLINDER
Brake System Bleeding, page 19-9
BRAKE BOOSTER
Test, page 19-22
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

Circuit Diagram, page 19-10
Parking Brake Switch Test, page 19-11
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test, page 19-11
BRAKE HOSE and LINE

Brake Hose
REAR BRAKE
Pad Inspection and
Disc inspection, page 19-28
Disc Replacement, page 19-30
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-32
FRONT BRAKE
Pad Inspection and Replacement, page 19-12 PARKING BRAKE
Disc inspection, page 19-16 Inspection and Adjustment, page 19-7
Disc Replacement, page 19-18 Lever Replacement, page 19-37
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-19 Cable Replacement, page 19-38
BRAKE PEDAL
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal
Position Switch Adjustment, page 19-6
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:33:51 61TL2000_190_0006
Brake System Inspection and Test

Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.
Component Inspections:
Component Procedure Also check for
Master Cylinder Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging seal at reservoir cap. This is a
• Reservoir or reservoir grommets. sign of fluid contamination.
• Line joints.
• Between master cylinder and booster.
Brake Hoses Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging, twisted, or bent lines.
• Line joints and banjo bolt connections.
• Hoses and lines, also inspect for twisting or
damage.
Caliper Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Seized or sticking caliper pins.
• Piston seal.
• Banjo bolt connections.
• Bleed screw.
VSA Modulator- Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
control Unit • Line joints.
• Modulator-control unit.
Brake System Test

Brake pedal sinks/fades when braking
1. Set the parking brake, and start the engine, then turn off the A/C. Allow the engine to warm up to normal operating
temperature (radiator fan comes on twice).
2. Attach a 50 mm (2 in.) piece of masking tape along the bottom of the steering wheel, and draw a horizontal
reference mark across it.
3. With the transmission in neutral (M/T) or P or N (A/T), press and hold the brake pedal lightly (about the same
pressure needed to keep an A/T-equipped vehicle from creeping), then release the parking brake.
4. While still holding the brake pedal, hook the end of the tape measure behind the brake pedal, then pull the tape up
to the steering wheel. Note the measurement between the brake pedal and the reference mark on the steering
wheel.
5. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal for 3 minutes.
6. Watch the tape measure.
• If the measurement increases 10 mm (3/8 in.) or less, the master cylinder is OK.
• If the measurement increases more than 10 mm (3/8 in.), replace the master cylinder.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３００００００００ＦＧＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:33:51 61TL2000_190_0007
Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration 5. Loosen the hydraulic lines at the master cylinder,
(after a long drive), or high, hard brake pedal then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
correctly.
Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different. YES−Go to step 6.
If the pins are installed in the wrong location, it will
cause vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, and NO−Check the master cylinder reservoir for
possibly uneven tire wear. For proper caliper pin contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
location (see page 19-19). contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
contaminated fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, replace
1. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the the master cylinder (see page 19-20).
pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more
brake pedal applications during an extended test- 6. Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper, then spin
drive. the wheels to check for brake drag.
2. With the engine running, raise the vehicle on a lift, Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
and spin all four wheels by hand.
YES−Check the master cylinder reservoir for
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels? contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
YES−Go to step 3. contaminated fluid. If the brake fluid is OK,
disassemble and repair the caliper on the wheel(s)
NO−Look for other causes of pad wear, high pedal, with brake drag.
or vehicle vibration.
NO−Look for and replace any damaged brake lines.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), press the If all brake lines are OK, replace the VSA
brake pedal several times to deplete the vacuum in modulator-control unit (see page 19-103).
the brake booster, and then spin the wheels again
to check for brake drag.
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Replace the brake booster (see page 19-23).
4. Without removing the brake lines, unbolt and

separate the master cylinder from the brake
booster, then spin the wheels to check for brake
drag.
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Check the brake pedal position switch

adjustment and pedal free play (see page 19-6).
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３００００００００ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:33:52 61TL2000_190_0008
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment

Pedal Height 5. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the
pushrod (B) in or out with pliers until the standard
1. Remove the driver’s dashboard undercover pedal height from the floor is reached. After
(see page 20-119). adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not
adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed.
2. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) ＊０２
counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no
longer touching the brake pedal. Lower
B the pedal
＊０１
A A
15 N·m Raise
(1.5kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) the pedal
90 ° Brake Pedal Position Switch Clearance
6. Lift up on the brake pedal by hand. Push in the

D
brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully
C pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on
B the pedal arm). Turn the switch 45 ° clockwise to
lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position
switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to
3. Remove the footrest (see step 7 on page 20-108), 0.7 mm (0.028 in.) by locking the switch. Make sure
then remove the steering joint cover (see page the brake lights go off when the pedal is released.
17-9). ＊０３
4. Pull back the carpet, and find the cutout (B) in the
insulation. Measure the pedal height (C) at the
center of the pedal pad (D) to the floor without the B
insulation. A
Standard pedal height (with carpet removed):

M/T: 164 mm (6 7/16 in.)
A/T: 173 mm (6 13/16 in.)
0.7 mm (0.028 in)
7. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of

removal.
8. Check the brake pedal free play.

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４８０１ＭＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:33:52 61TL2000_190_0009
Parking Brake Inspection and

Adjustment
Pedal Free Play
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), inspect the Inspection
play (A) at the brake pedal pad (B) by pushing the
brake pedal by hand. If the brake pedal free play is 1. Pull the parking brake lever (A) with 196 N (20 kgf,
out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position 44 lbf) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The
switch (C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, parking brake lever should be locked within the
it may result in brake drag. specified number of clicks.
Free play: 1−5 mm (1/16−3/16 in.) Lever locked clicks: 6 to 8

＊０４＊０１
Pulled back with
196 N
(20 kgf, A
44 lbf)
2. If the number of lever clicks is not as specified,

A adjust the parking brake.
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ０００６０８０００００ＭＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:33:53 61TL2000_190_0010
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment (cont’d)

Adjustment 5. Make sure the lever (A) on the rear brake caliper
contacts the arm (B).
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). NOTE: The parking brake lever will contact the arm
when the parking brake adjusting nut is loosened.
2. Release the parking brake lever fully. ＊０３
3. Remove the console box mat (A), then open the lid
(B).
NOTE: It is easier to use packing tape to remove the

console box mat.
＊０２
B
C
A
B
6. Pull the parking brake lever 1 click.
7. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut until the

parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels
are turned.
4. Loosen the parking brake adjusting nut (C). 8. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check
that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear
wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary.
9. Make sure the parking brake lever is within the

specified number of clicks (6 to 8 clicks).
10. Close the lid, then install the console mat.

08/04/09 12:33:53 61TL2000_190_0011
Brake System Bleeding

NOTE: 4. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed
• Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Acura screw (B), then loosen the bleed screw to allow air
DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed
Using a non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion screw securely.
and shorten the life of the system.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed Front
to contaminate the brake fluid. ＊０３
B
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately with water.
• The reservoir connected to the master cylinder must
be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the
bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each A
wheel location. Add fluid as required.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir (A)

is at the MAX (upper) level line (B).
＊０１
A
Rear
＊０４
B B
2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal

several times, then apply steady pressure. A
3. Start the bleeding at the driver’s side of the front

brake system.
NOTE: Bleed the calipers or the wheel cylinders in

the sequence shown.
＊０２ 5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX
BLEEDING SEQUENCE: (upper) level line.
Front Right Rear Right 6. Repeat the procedure for each brake circuit until
there are no air bubbles in the fluid.
Front Left Rear Left
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３００００００００ＬＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:33:54 61TL2000_190_0012
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram

＊０１
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT 22

WHT VSA MODULATOR-
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR 21 CONTROL UNIT
RED (EBD INDICATOR)
32 31
GRN LT GRN
2 1
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL SWITCH PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
CLOSED: Float down CLOSED: Parking brake applied
OPEN: Float up OPEN: Parking brake released
1
BLK
G302
19-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３００００００００ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:33:54 61TL2000_190_0013
Parking Brake Switch Test Brake Fluid Level Switch Test

NOTE: If both the ABS/VSA indicator and the brake 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
system indicator come on at the same time, check the
VSA system first (see page 19-44). 2. Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and
(2) with the float in the down position and in the up
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-113). position.
2. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) NOTE:

from the parking brake switch (B). • Remove the brake fluid completely from the
＊０１ reservoir. With the float down, there should be
continuity.
• Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX
(upper) level (A). With the float up, there should
be no continuity.
• If both the ABS/VSA indicator and the brake
system indicator come on at the same time,
check the VSA system first (see page 19-44).
• If the parking brake switch and brake fluid level
switch are OK, but the brake system indicator
does not function, do the gauge control module
self-diagnostic function (see page 22-292).
＊０１
A C B
2 1
3. Check for continuity between the switch terminal
(C) and body ground.
A
• With the parking brake lever pulled, there should
be continuity.
• With the parking brake lever released, there
should be no continuity.
NOTE: If the parking brake switch and the brake

fluid level switch are OK, but the brake system
indicator does not function, do the gauge control
module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-292). 3. Reconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
4. Reconnect the parking brake switch connector.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-11
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ０００６０８４５１３１ＦＥＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７４１ＦＥＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:33:55 61TL2000_190_0014
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement

Special Tools Required 5. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the
Brake caliper piston compressor 07AAE-SEPA101 outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:

Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of Standard: 10.5−11.2 mm (0.41−0.44 in.)
material composition, could be hazardous to your Service limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
health. ＊０２
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
Inspection B

A
A
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). C
＊０１
A 6. If any of the brake pad thickness is less than the
8 x 1.25 mm
service limit, replace the front brake pads as a set.
7. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the

flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque
while holding the caliper pin (B) with a wrench. Be
careful not to damage the pin boot.
＊０３
A
10 x 1.0 mm
50 N·m
(5.1 kgf·m,
37 lbf·ft)
B
10 x 1.0 mm D
C
4. Remove the flange bolt (B) while holding the C

8 x 1.25 mm
caliper pin (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to 22 N·m
damage the pin boot, and pivot the caliper (D) up (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for
damage and deterioration.
8. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (C).

19-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７９１ＭＤＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:33:56 61TL2000_190_0015
Replacement 7. Remove the pad retainers (A).

＊０６
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
C
3. Remove the front wheels. A
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).

＊０４
A
8 x 1.25 mm
B
C
8. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove

any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
Verify that the caliper pins (C) move in and out
smoothly. Clean and lube if needed.
B
9. Inspect the brake disc, and check for damage and
D
10 x 1.0 mm cracks (see page 19-16).
C
10. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N

5. Remove the flange bolt (B) while holding the 08798-9010) to the retainers on their mating
caliper pin (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the
damage the pin boot, and pivot the caliper (D) up caliper bracket.
out of the way. Check the hose and the pin boots
for damage and deterioration. 11. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly
paste off the retainers. Keep the assembly paste off
6. Remove the pad shims (A) and the brake pads (B). the brake disc and the brake pads.
＊０５
A
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-13

08/04/09 12:33:56 61TL2000_190_0016
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont’d)

12. Mount the brake caliper piston compressor tool (A) 15. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N
on the caliper body (B). 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the
＊０７ back of the brake pads (B) and the other areas
B
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly
paste off the pad shims and the brake pads. Keep
grease and assembly paste off the brake discs and
the brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake
pads reduce stopping ability.
＊０８
A
07AAE-SEPA101 C
13. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston

compressor tool so the caliper will fit over the
brake pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position
to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
down.
A
NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston;
brake fluid might overflow from the master
cylinder’s reservoir. If brake fluid gets on any A
painted surface, wash it off immediately with water.
B
14. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor tool.
16. Install the brake pads and the pad shims correctly.
Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on
the upper inside. If you are reusing the brake pads,
always reinstall the brake pads in their original
positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking
efficiency.
19-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:33:56 61TL2000_190_0017
17. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the

flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque
while holding the caliper pin (B) with a wrench
being careful not to damage the pin boot.
＊０９
A
10 x 1.0 mm
50 N·m
(5.1 kgf·m,
37 lbf·ft)
C
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
18. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (C).
20. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure

the brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal

stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
21. Add brake fluid as needed.
22. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line

joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then recheck for leaks
(see page 19-34).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-15

08/04/09 12:33:57 61TL2000_190_0018
Front Brake Disc Inspection

Runout 7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish
the brake disc with an American-Honda-approved
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with commercially available on-car brake lathe.
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
NOTE:
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-12). • If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
refinishing, replace it (see page 19-18).
4. Inspect the brake disc surface for damage and • A new brake disc should be refinished if its
cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and runout is greater than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.).
remove all rust.
8. Install the brake pads (see page 19-12).
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts
(B), and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified 9. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
torque to hold the brake disc securely against the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
hub.
＊０１
A 10 mm
B (3/8 in.)
12 x 1.5 mm
108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m, 79.6 lbf·ft)
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as

shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in.)
from the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:

Service limit: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
19-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７２１ＭＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:33:57 61TL2000_190_0019
Thickness and Parallelism 5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with American-Honda-approved commercially available
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). on-car brake lathe.
2. Remove the front wheels. NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
for refinishing, replace it (see page 19-18).
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-12).
4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc
thickness at eight points, about 45 ° apart and 7. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
10 mm (3/8 in.) in from the outer edge of the brake inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest
measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit.
Brake disc thickness:

Standard: 27.9−28.1 mm (1.10−1.11 in.)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
＊０２
10 mm
(3/8 in.)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-17

08/04/09 12:33:57 61TL2000_190_0020
Front Brake Disc Replacement

NOTE: Keep any grease off the brake disc and brake 5. Remove the brake disc flathead screws (A).
pads. ＊０２


C
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 8 x 1.25 mm
＊０１
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
6. Remove the brake disc (B) from the front hub.
C NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the front hub,

B thread two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc
12 x 1.25 mm
108 N·m to push it away from the front hub. Turn each bolt
(11.0 kgf·m, 90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake disc from
79.6 lbf·ft)
binding.
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts 7. Install the brake disc in the reverse order of
(B), then remove the caliper assembly (C) from the removal.
assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire NOTE: Before installing the brake disc, clean the
to hang the caliper assembly from the mating surfaces of the front hub and the inside of
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose the brake disc.
excessively.
8. Inspect the brake disc runout (see page 19-16).

inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
19-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７２１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:33:58 61TL2000_190_0021
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different.
If these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid pad wear, and possibly
uneven tire wear.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
• To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or the pads.
• When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-
Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
• Coat the piston, the piston seal groove, and the caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
• Use recommended greases in the front caliper set.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
• Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the terminal part of the connecotrs and switches, especially if you have
silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
＊０１
: Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
CALIPER PIN BOOT
WEAR INDICATOR PIN Replace.
Install inner pad with
its wear indicator upward.
OUTER PAD SHIM
CALIPER PIN B
12 x 1.25 mm
108 N·m
(11.0 kgf·m,
79.6 lbf·ft)
INNER PAD SHIM B
INNER PAD SHIM A

BRAKE PADS
10 x 1.0 mm
BANJO BOLT 50 N·m
35 N·m BRAKE (5.1 kgf·m, 37 lbf·ft)
(3.6 kgf·m, HOSE CALIPER PIN A
26 lbf·ft) CALIPER
BRACKET
PAD RETAINERS
PISTON
SEALING WASHERS
Replace. PISTON BOOT
Replace.
BLEED SCREW
9 N·m
(0.9 kgf·m,
7 lbf·ft) PISTON SEAL
CALIPER BODY Replace.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-19
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７１１ＬＡＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:33:59 61TL2000_190_0022
Master Cylinder Replacement

3. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may (A).
damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, ＊０２
G
wash it off immediately with water. Replace.
• Be careful not to damage or deform the brake H
lines during removal and installation. MASTER
• Plug the end of a hose and joints to prevent CYLINDER
SIDE
spilling brake fluid.
C
1. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box mount nut
(A) and release the clip (B), then move the under-
hood fuse/relay box (C) aside. E
＊０１
A
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
C
F
A
B D
22 N·m E
15 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, (1.5 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft) 11 lbf·ft)
B
4. Disconnect the brake lines (B) from the master

cylinder (C). To prevent spills, cover the hose joints
with rags or shop towels.
5. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (D) and

the washers (E).
2. Remove the reservoir cap and the brake fluid from 6. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster
the master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. (F). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake
lines when removing the master cylinder.
7. Remove the rod seal (G) from the master cylinder.
NOTE: During installation, set a new rod seal onto

the master cylinder with its grooved side (H)
toward the master cylinder.
19-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７８１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:33:59 61TL2000_190_0023
Master Cylinder Inspection

8. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of 1. Inspect and note these items:
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free
• Coat the inner bore lip and the outer of dirt and other foreign particles.
circumference of the new rod seal with the Shin- • Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder
Etsu silicone grease (P/N 08798-9013). assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly
• Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the with a new part if necessary.
terminal part of the connecotrs and switches, • Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to
especially if you have silicone grease on your contaminate the brake fluid.
hands or gloves. ＊０１
• Check the brake pedal height and free play after RESERVOIR CAP
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if Check for blockage
of vent holes.
RESERVOIR SEAL
9. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box. Check for damage
and deterioration.
10. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
STRAINER
Remove accumulated
11. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag. sediment.
RESERVOIR MASTER CYLINDER

Check for damage. Check for leaks,
rust, and damage.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-21
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７８１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:33:59 61TL2000_190_0024
Brake Booster Test

Functional Test 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) at
the booster. The check valve (B) is built into the
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), press the hose.
brake pedal several times to deplete the vacuum
reservoir, then press the brake pedal hard, and hold NOTE: If the check valve is faulty, replace the brake
it for 15 seconds. If the brake pedal sinks, either the booster vacuum hose/check valve as an assembly.
master cylinder is bypassing internally, or the ＊０１
brake system is leaking. Inspect the brake hoses B A
and lines (see page 19-34).
2. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. If the

brake pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is
operating normally. If the brake pedal height does
not vary, do the brake system test (see page 19-4).
Leak Test
1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then
stop the engine. The brake pedal height should not
vary while pressed for 30 seconds.
• If the pedal height rises, go to step 6. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be
• If it does not rise, go to step 2. vacuum available.
2. Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds. Turn • If no vacuum is available, the check valve is not
the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait working properly. Replace the brake booster
30 seconds. Press the brake pedal several times vacuum hose and the check valve, and retest.
using normal pressure. When the pedal is first • If vacuum is found, go to step 5.
pressed, it should be low. On consecutive
applications, the pedal height should gradually rise. 5. With the ignition switch at LOCK (0), reconnect the
Does the pedal rise on each consecutive vacuum hose to the brake booster.
application?
6. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster
• If it rises, the booster is OK. vacuum hose between the check valve and the
• If it does not rise, go to step 3. booster.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait

30 seconds. Press the brake pedal several times
using normal pressure. When the pedal is first
pressed, it should be low. On consecutive
applications, the pedal height should gradually rise.
• If the pedal position does not vary, inspect the

seal between the master cylinder and the booster.
If the seal is OK, replace the brake booster.
• If the pedal position varies, replace the brake
booster vacuum hose/check valve as an
assembly.
19-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７０１ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:34:00 61TL2000_190_0025
Brake Booster Replacement

1. Remove the cowl cover (see page 20-204). 6. Remove the brake lines (A) from the hose clamp (B).
＊０３
B
3. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-20).
4. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A)

from the brake booster.
＊０１
A
A

(see page 20-119).
8. Remove the lock pin (A) and the clevis pin (B), then
disconnect the yoke from the brake pedal.
5. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box bracket (A), ＊０４
then remove the engine wire harness clamps (B).
＊０２
6 x 1.0 mm B
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) B
C
A 8 x 1.25 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
6 x 1.0 mm B 8.7 lbf·ft)
A 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
9. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (C).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-23
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:34:00 61TL2000_190_0026
Brake Booster Replacement (cont’d)

10. Remove the brake booster (A) from the engine
compartment.
• Be careful not to damage the booster

surfaces and the threads of the booster
stud bolts.
• Be careful not to bend or damage the
brake lines.
NOTE: Use a new brake booster gasket (B)

during reassembly.
＊０５
A
B
Replace.
11. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of

• Install the master cylinder after installing the

brake booster (see page 19-20).
• Check the brake pedal height and free play after
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
• Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
19-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:34:01 61TL2000_190_0027
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement

Replacement
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of 1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health. 2. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
• Avoid breathing dust particles. safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8).
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum 3. Remove the rear wheels.
cleaner.
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).
＊１１
Inspection A
8 x 1.25 mm

2. Remove the rear wheels.
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the
outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
B
8 x 1.0 mm
Brake pad thickness: C D
Standard: 8.3−9.0 mm (0.33−0.35 in.)
＊１０ 5. Remove the flange bolts (B) while holding
respective caliper pin (C) with a wrench. Be careful
not to damage the pin boot, and remove the caliper
(D). Check the hose, the pin boots, and the parking
brake cable boots for damage and deterioration.
NOTE: Do not twist the brake hose and the parking

brake cable to prevent damage.
A
B
C
4. If any of the brake pad thickness is less than the

service limit, replace the rear brake pads as a set.

inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheels.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-25
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７９１ＭＤＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:34:01 61TL2000_190_0028
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont’d)

6. Remove the pad shim (A) and the brake pads (B). 12. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste
＊１２ (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shim (A),
the back of the brake pads (B), and the other areas
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly
paste off the pad shim and the brake pads. Keep
grease and assembly paste off the brake discs and
the pads. Contaminated brake discs or brake pads
reduce stopping ability.
＊１４
C
7. Remove the pad retainers (A). A
＊１３
C B
13. Install the brake pads and pad shim correctly.

Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on
the bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads,
always reinstall the brake pads in their original
positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking
C efficiency.
8. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove

any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
Verify that the caliper pins (C) move in and out
smoothly. Clean and lube if needed.
9. Inspect the brake disc, and check for damage and

cracks (see page 19-28).
10. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste

(P/N 08798-9010) to the retainers on their mating
surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the
caliper bracket.
11. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly

paste off the retainers. Keep the assembly paste off
the brake disc and the brake pads.
19-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:34:02 61TL2000_190_0029
14. Rotate the caliper piston (A) clockwise into the 17. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
cylinder, then align the cutout (B) in the piston with inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheels.
the tab (C) on the inner pad by turning the piston
back. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to 18. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure
avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is the brakes work.
twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal
NOTE: Be careful when moving the piston back in stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
the caliper; brake fluid might overflow from the replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
master cylinder’s reservoir. pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
＊１５
E D
8 x 1.25 mm 8 x 1.0 mm 19. Add brake fluid as needed.
22 N·m 13 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) (1.3 kgf·m, 20. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
9.4 lbf·ft)
joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then recheck for leaks
(see page 19-34).
C B
15. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (D), and
tighten it to the specified torque while holding the
respective caliper pin with a wrench being careful
not to damage the pin boots and parking brake
cable boots.
16. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (E).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-27

08/04/09 12:34:02 61TL2000_190_0030
Rear Brake Disc Inspection

Runout 7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish
the brake disc with an American-Honda-approved
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with commercially available on-car brake lathe.
2. Remove the rear wheels.
NOTE:
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-25). • If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
refinishing, replace it (see page 19-30).
4. Inspect the brake disc surface for damage and • A new brake disc should be refinished if its
cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and runout is greater than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.).
remove all rust.
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts
(B), and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified 9. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
torque to hold the brake disc securely against the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheels.
hub.
＊０３
A
10 mm
(3/8 in.)
B
12 x 1.5 mm
108 N·m
(11.0 kgf·m, 79.6 lbf·ft)
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as

shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in.)
from the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:

19-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７２１ＭＡＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:34:56 61TL2000_190_0031
Thickness and Parallelism 5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with American-Honda-approved commercially available
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). on-car brake lathe.
2. Remove the rear wheels. NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
for refinishing, replace it (see page 19-30).
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-25).
4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc
thickness at eight points, about 45 ° apart and 7. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
10 mm (3/8 in.) in from the outer edge of the brake inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheels.
disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest
measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit.
Brake disc thickness:

Standard: 8.9−9.1 mm (0.35−0.36 in.)
Brake disc parallelism:
0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
＊０４
10 mm
(3/8 in.)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-29

08/04/09 12:34:56 61TL2000_190_0032
Rear Brake Disc Replacement

NOTE: Keep any grease off the brake disc and brake 7. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).
pads. ＊０４
A
8 x 1.25 mm
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 22 N·m
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-8). (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

C

(see page 19-8).
5. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the arm (B).

＊０３
B
D 12 x 1.25 mm
108 N·m
B (11.0 kgf·m,
79.6 lbf·ft)

(B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the
assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire
to hang the caliper assembly from the
C A undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose and the
8 x 1.25 mm parking brake cable excessively.
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft) NOTE: Make sure the plates (D) are in position on
reassembly, if they are removed (see step 8 on
6. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the lever page 18-33).
(C).
19-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７２１ＫＢＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:34:57 61TL2000_190_0033
9. Remove the brake disc flathead screws (A).

＊０５
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
C
8 x 1.25 mm
10. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub bearing
unit.
NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the hub bearing

unit, thread two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake
disc to push it away from the hub bearing unit.
Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the
brake disc from binding.
11. Install the brake disc in the reverse order of


• Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
surfaces of the hub bearing unit and the inside of
the brake disc.
12. Inspect the brake disc runout (see page 19-28).
13. After install the brake caliper, make sure the

clearance between the lower arm B and the parking
brake cable is more than 5 mm (0.20 in.).
inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-31

08/04/09 12:34:57 61TL2000_190_0034
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
• To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or the pads.
• When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a
non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
• Coat the piston, the piston seal groove, and the caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
• Use recommended greases in the rear caliper set.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
• Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the terminal part of the connecotrs and switches, especially if you have
silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
＊０２
: Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
BLEED SCREW
9 N·m
(0.9 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) BRAKE HOSE
ARM
BANJO BOLT
35 N·m
(3.6 kgf·m,
26 lbf·ft)
23 N·m
(2.3 kgf·m, SEALING WASHERS
17 lbf·ft) Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm CALIPER PIN A

108 N·m CALIPER BODY
(11.0 kgf·m, 8 x 1.0 mm
79.6 lbf·ft) 23 N·m PISTON SEAL
Replace. PISTON BOOT
PISTON
PAD RETAINERS
CALIPER PIN B
PLATE
CALIPER BRACKET OUTER PAD SHIM
BRAKE PADS
WEAR INDICATOR
CALIPER PIN PIN BOOT Install inner brake pad
Replace. with its wear indicator
downward.
19-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７１１ＬＡＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:34:58 61TL2000_190_0035
Brake Pedal Replacement

(see page 20-119).
2. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch

connector (A).
＊０１
E
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
G (2.2 kgf·m,
H 16 lbf·ft)
A
C D
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
F 16 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
3. Remove the lock pin (B) and clevis pin (C).
4. Remove the brake pedal support member (D).
5. Remove the brake pedal bracket mounting bolt (E)

and nuts (F).
6. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (G).
7. Remove the brake pedal position switch (H) by

turning it counterclockwise.
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.
9. Adjust the brake pedal and the brake pedal position

switch (see page 19-6).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-33
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４８０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:34:58 61TL2000_190_0036
Brake Hose and Line Inspection

1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and the VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leaks.
Connection Component Connected to Specified Torque Value Note

Point
A Front brake caliper Brake hose 35 N·m (3.6 kgf·m, 26 lbf·ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
B Rear brake caliper Brake hose 35 N·m (3.6 kgf·m, 26 lbf·ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
C Brake hose Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) Flare nut
D Master cylinder Brake line 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) Flare nut
E VSA modulator-control unit Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) Flare nut
(10 mm nut)
Brake line 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
(12 mm nut)
＊０１
B
D
C
E
A A
19-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７５１ＭＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:34:59 61TL2000_190_0037
Brake Hose Replacement

NOTE: 5. Install the brake hose (A) with the mounting bolt (B).
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of ＊０３
dirt and other foreign particles.
A
• Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to
do so.
B
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage 8 x 1.25 mm
the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off 22 N·m
immediately with water. (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
• Plug the end of a hose and joints to prevent spilling
brake fluid. C
10 x 1.0 mm
35 N·m
Front (3.6 kgf·m,
26 lbf·ft)
2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose

(B), then remove the brake hose clip (C).
＊０１ D
A Replace.
6. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with the

banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
7. Install a new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hose

(B) on the bracket, then connect the brake line (C).
Do not twist the brake hose.
＊０４
C
A 10 x 1.0 mm
C Replace. 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
Replace.
3. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the

brake hose (B) from the caliper.
＊０２
8. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake

system (see page 19-9).
C
8 x 1.25 mm 9. Do the following checks:
• Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary.
A • Check the brake hoses for interference and
twisting.
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (C), then inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
remove the brake hose.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-35
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ１４３０００１４７５１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:35:00 61TL2000_190_0038
Brake Hose Replacement (cont’d)

Rear 5. Install the brake hose (A) with the mounting bolt (B).
＊０７
B
1. Remove the rear wheel. 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose 16 lbf·ft)
(B), then remove the brake hose clip (C).
A
＊０５
A
D
Replace.
B C
10 x 1.0 mm
35 N·m
C (3.6 kgf·m, 26 lbf·ft)
Replace.
6. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with the
3. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
brake hose from the caliper.
＊０６ 7. Install a new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hose
(B) on the bracket, then connect the brake line (C).
Do not twist the brake hose.
＊０８
C
10 x 1.0 mm
15 N·m
(1.5kgf·m,
11 lbf·ft)
A
B Replace.
8 x 1.25 mm B
8. After installing the brake hoses, bleed the brake

4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (B), then system (see page 19-9).
remove the brake hose.
9. Do the following checks:
• Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary.
• Check the brake hose for interference and
twisting.
inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
19-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:35:00 61TL2000_190_0039
Parking Brake Lever Replacement

1. Release the parking brake lever fully. 7. Install the parking brake lever in the reverse order
of removal.
2. Remove the center console (see page 20-113).
NOTE: Do not scratch the coating on the link cable
3. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) while handling and assembling the parking brake
from the parking brake switch (B), then remove the lever.
harness clip (C).
＊０１ 8. Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-8).
D
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
1.4 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
(0.14 kgf·m,
1.0 lbf·ft)
C B
A
4. Remove the parking brake lever mount bolts (D).
5. Disconnect the parking brake cables (E) from the

equalizer (F).
6. Remove the parking brake switch.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-37
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ０００６０８４５１２１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:35:01 61TL2000_190_0040
Parking Brake Cable Replacement

Exploded View
＊０１
RIGHT PARKING BRAKE CABLE
Check for faulty movement.
BOOT
and damage.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m LEFT PARKING
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) BRAKE CABLE
Check for faulty
movement.
PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Check for smooth
operation.
ADJUSTING NUT
8 x 1.25 mm
EQUALIZER 22 N·m
LINK CABLE (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
Do not scratch the
coating while handling PARKING BRAKE
and assembling. SWITCH
19-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ０００６０８４５１１１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:35:01 61TL2000_190_0041
NOTE:
• The parking brake cables must not be bent or
distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and
premature cable failure.
• Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this
procedure.

(see page 19-8).
3. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the arm (B).

＊０２
C A
8 x 1.25 mm
D 22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
4. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the lever

(C).
5. Remove the parking brake cable mounting

hardware, then remove the cable.
6. Install the parking brake cable in the reverse order

of removal, and note these items:
• Be careful not to bend or distort the cable and

boot (D).
• Make sure the clearance between the lower arm
B and the parking brake cable is more than 5 mm
(0.20 in.).
• Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-8).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-39

08/04/09 12:35:01 61TL2000_190_0042
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１９０１ＺＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:35:01 61TL2000_190_0043
Brakes
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) System Components

Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 19-58
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement ......................... 19-99
Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration
Sensor Replacement ................................................ 19-100
VSA Sensor Neutral Position Memorization .............. 19-100
VSA OFF Switch Test ................................................... 19-101
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Update .......................... 19-102
VSA Modulator-Control Unit
Removal and Installation ......................................... 19-103
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement ............................ 19-106
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ１９０４ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:35:04 61TL2000_190_0044
VSA System Components
＊０１
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT RIGHT-REAR WHEEL

Update, page 19-102 SPEED SENSOR
Removal and Installation, page 19-103 Replacement, page 19-107
HUB BEARING UNIT

(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL LEFT-REAR WHEEL

SPEED SENSOR SPEED SENSOR
WHEEL BEARING LEFT-FRONT WHEEL

(MAGNETIC ENCODER) SPEED SENSOR
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
19-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:35:05 61TL2000_190_0045
＊０２
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
VSA OFF SWITCH

Test, page 19-101
YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-43

08/04/09 12:35:05 61TL2000_190_0046

System Indicator ABS Indicator
This system has four indicators: The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS function is
lost. The brakes still work like a conventional system.
• ABS indicator (A)
• Brake system indicator (B) Brake System Indicator
• VSA indicator (C)
• VSA activation indicator (D) The brake system indicator comes on when the EBD
＊０１ function is lost, the parking brake is applied, and/or the
A
brake fluid level is low.
C NOTE: If two or more wheel speed sensors fail, the

brake system indicator will come on.
VSA Indicator
D
The VSA indicator comes on when the VSA function is
lost.
VSA Activation Indicator
The VSA activation indicator blinks when the VSA

function is activating. The VSA activation indicator
B comes on and stays on when the VSA is turned OFF by
using the VSA OFF switch, or when the VSA function is
lost.
USA Canada
models models
ABS and VSA Indicators go off
Each indicator will go off after a problem goes away,

but the timing which the VSA modulator-control unit
When the system detects a problem, it will turn the turns off the indicators varies between DTCs.
appropriate indicators on. Depending on the failure, the
VSA modulator-control unit determines which • DTC 61, 62, 84, 158:
indicators are turned on. The indicators go off automatically when the system
When the system is OK, each indicator comes on for returns to normal.
about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch to ON • DTC 25-27, 31-38, 54, 64-66, 68, 81, 83, 86, 91, 104,
(II), then goes off. 105, 121-124:
The indicators stay on until the ignition switch is
turned to LOCK (0) whether or not the system returns
to normal.
• DTC 11-18, 21-24, 51, 52:
The indicators stay on until the vehicle is driven after
the system returns to normal.
19-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１００００００００ＢＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:35:05 61TL2000_190_0047
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) How to Troubleshoot DTCs

• The memory can hold all DTCs. However, when the The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
same DTC is detected more than once, the more of the problem is still present and the ABS and/or VSA
recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, indicator is still on. Following a troubleshooting
when the same problem is detected repeatedly, it is procedure for a code that has been cleared but does not
memorized as a single DTC. reset can result in incorrect diagnosis.
• The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order,
not in the order they occur. 1. Question the client about the conditions when the
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore, problem occurred, and try to reproduce the same
the memorized DTCs cannot be erased by conditions for troubleshooting. Find out when the
disconnecting the battery. Do the specified ABS and/or VSA indicator came on, such as during
procedures to clear the DTCs. activation, after activation, when the vehicle was
traveling at a certain speed, etc. If necessary, have
Self-diagnosis the customer demonstrate the concern.
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories: 2. When the ABS or VSA indicator does not come on
– Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch during the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done
is turned to ON (II) and until the ABS and VSA based on the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor
indicators go off. contact of the terminals, etc. in the circuit indicated
– Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial by the DTC before you start troubleshooting.
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0). 3. After troubleshooting, or the repairs are done, clear
• When the system detects a problem, the VSA the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
modulator-control unit shifts to fail-safe mode. conditions that originally set the DTCs. Make sure
the ABS and VSA indicators do not come on.
Kickback
4. Check for DTCs from other systems which are
The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator- connected via F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir related to F-CAN, the most likely cause was that the
is forced out to the master cylinder, causing kickback at ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with the VSA
the brake pedal. modulator-control unit connector disconnected.
Clear the DTCs. Check for fuel and emissions and
Pump Motor VSA codes first. Be sure to troubleshoot those first.
• The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator- Intermittent Failures
control unit is functioning.
• The VSA modulator-control unit checks the pump The term ‘‘intermittent failure’’ means a system may
motor operation one time after completing initial have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the
diagnosis during regular diagnosis when the vehicle indicator(s) of the system does not come on, check for
is driven over 10 mph (15 km/h). loose connectors or poor contacts in the terminals
related to the circuit that you are troubleshooting.
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding
Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures
are identical to the procedures used on vehicles without
the VSA system (see page 19-9).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-45

08/04/09 12:35:06 61TL2000_190_0048

How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic How to Retrieve DTCs
System)
1. If the system indicators stay on, connect the HDS to HDS to the data link connector (DLC) under the
the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard.

and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn’t
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the

refer to the DTC troubleshooting. Do the all
systems DTC check, and troubleshoot any
powertrain DTCs first.
How to Clear DTCs

A
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). HDS to the data link connector (DLC) under the
and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn’t, 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and the and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn’t
freeze data, for all systems, troubleshoot the troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
powertrain DTCs first and note them. Then refer to
the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting, and do the 4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts
appropriate troubleshooting procedure. on the HDS.
NOTE: 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

• Freeze data indicates the VSA conditions when
the first system malfunction that activated the
indicator was detected.
• The HDS can read the DTC, the freeze data, the
current data, and other system data.
• For specific operations, refer to the Help menu
that came with the HDS.
19-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:35:06 61TL2000_190_0049

DTC Detection Item ABS Brake VSA VSA Note
Indicator System Indicator Activation
Indicator Indicator
1
11 Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-61)
(Short to Power/Short to Body
Ground/Open)
1
12 Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-65)
(Electrical Noise/Intermittent
Interruption)
1
13 Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-61)
Ground/Open)
1
14 Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-65)
Interruption)
1
15 Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-61)
Ground/Open)
1
16 Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-65)
Interruption)
1
17 Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-61)
Ground/Open)
1
18 Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-65)
Interruption)
1
21 Right-front Magnetic Encoder ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-68)
(Wheel Bearing)
1
22 Left-front Magnetic Encoder ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-68)
(Wheel Bearing)
1
23 Right-rear Magnetic Encoder ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-68)
(Wheel Bearing)
1
24 Left-rear Magnetic Encoder ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-68)
(Wheel Bearing)
25 Yaw Rate Sensor ON or OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-69)
26 Lateral Acceleration Sensor ON or OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-69)
27 Steering Angle Sensor OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-72)
31 ABS Solenoid ON ON ON ON (see page 19-76)
1: Brake system indicator turns ON when two or more wheels fail.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-47
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１００００００００ＧＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:35:06 61TL2000_190_0050

DTC Detection Item ABS Brake VSA VSA Note
Indicator System Indicator Activation
Indicator Indicator
51 Motor Lock ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-77)
52 Motor Stuck ON/OFF ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-77)
54 Fail-safe Relay ON ON ON ON (see page 19-79)
61 Low ＋B-FSR Voltage ON ON or OFF ON ON (see page 19-80)
62 High ＋B-FSR Voltage ON ON ON ON (see page 19-80)
64 Sensor Power Voltage ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-80)
65 Brake Fluid Level OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-81)
66 VSA Pressure Sensor (Inside of OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-83)
VSA Modulator-control Unit)
68 Brake Pedal Position Switch OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-84)
81 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF ON (see page 19-86)
83 ECM/PCM Communication OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-87)
84 VSA Sensor Neutral Position OFF OFF OFF ON (see page 19-88)
86 F-CAN Communication OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-89)
91 VSA Operation OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-91)
104 Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-69)
Sensor
105 Hydraulic Unit Temperature OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-92)
Sensor
121 VSA Solenoid ON ON ON ON (see page 19-93)
158 ECU Software Reprogramming ON ON ON OFF (see page 19-94)
19-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:35:06 61TL2000_190_0051

When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for VSA diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) with the HDS. If there
are no DTCs, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

HDS does not communicate with the VSA modulator- Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
control unit or the vehicle
VSA activation indicator does not come on at start-up 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
(bulb check) (see page 22-292).
2. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-103), then retest. If it is OK, the VSA
modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the VSA modulator-control unit was
substituted, replace the original VSA modulator-
control unit (see page 19-103).
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 1. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 19-95).
are stored 2. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
indicator do not come on (see page 22-292).
2. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA 1. Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair
indicator do not go off those first.
2. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
(see page 22-292).
3. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 19-96).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-49
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１００００００００ＨＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:35:07 61TL2000_190_0052
System Description
VSA Modulator-control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 47P Connector
＊０１

Terminal Wire color Terminal Description Signal
number sign
1 RED MR＋B Power source for the motor Battery voltage at all times
relay
5 ORN SVCC Power source for the steering With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
angle sensor
8 WHT IG1 Power source for activating the With ignition switch ON (II):
system battery voltage
10 LT BLU K-LINE Communication with HDS ―――
12 WHT CAN-H F-CAN communication circuit
13 RED CAN-L F-CAN communication circuit
16 BLK GND Ground for the VSA modulator- Less than 0.5 V at all times
control unit
30 BLU STR-Z Detects steering angle sensor ―――
signal
32 WHT FSR ＋B Power source for the fail-safe Battery voltage at all times
relay
33 PUR FR-GND Detects right-front wheel sensor ―――
signal
34 LT GRN FR ＋B Detects right-front wheel sensor
signal
19-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１００００００００ＣＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:35:07 61TL2000_190_0053
Terminal Wire color Terminal Description Signal

number sign
36 BLU RL ＋B Detects left-rear wheel sensor ―――
signal
37 RED RL-GND Detects left-rear wheel sensor
signal
38 LT GRN STR-B Detects steering angle sensor
signal
39 RED WEN Detects write enable signal
40 BRN SGND Ground for the steering angle
sensor
41 GRN STR-A Detects steering angle sensor
signal
42 PUR RR-GND Detects right-rear wheel sensor
signal
43 PNK RR ＋B Detects right-rear wheel sensor
signal
45 ORN FL ＋B Detects left-front wheel sensor
signal
46 GRN FL-GND Detects left-front wheel sensor
signal
47 BLK MR-GND Ground for the pump motor Less than 0.5 V at all times
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-51

08/04/09 12:35:07 61TL2000_190_0054

System Outline
This system is composed of the VSA modulator-control unit, the wheel speed sensors, the steering angle sensor, the
yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor, and the system indicators in the gauge control module. The VSA modulator-
control unit controls the ABS, EBD, TCS, VSA, and brake assist with the brake pressure of each wheel and reduces
engine torque.
＊０２
BRAKE BRAKE
VSA PARKING PEDAL
OFF FLUID
BRAKE LEVEL POSITION
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
SWITCH
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE ECM/PCM
• VSA OFF switch signal • VSA control enable/disable

• Parking brake switch signal • Throttle open angle signal
• Indicator drive signal • Brake fluid level switch signal • Engine torque control request • Engine revolution signal
• Buzzer request signal • TPMS indicator signal • Control mode signal • Brake pedal
position switch signal
YAW RATE-LATERAL • Service check signal
ACCELERATION • Gear position signal
SENSOR
• Yaw rate signal WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

• Lateral acceleration signal
Wheel rotation
pulse signal
STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR
TPMS
CONTROL
Steering angle signal UNIT
TPMS
indicator
signal
CONTROL UNIT
• Solenoid control Brake pressure VSA MODULATOR-

• Motor control signal CONTROL UNIT
MODULATOR UNIT
Communication via F-CAN
19-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:35:08 61TL2000_190_0055
ABS Features
Anti-lock Control
Without ABS, when the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels sometimes lock before the vehicle comes to a
stop. In such an event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability of
the vehicle is reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. With ABS, the system
precisely controls the slip rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, and it thereby ensures
maneuverability and stability of the vehicle. The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the four wheel
speeds, and then it controls the brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip force of tire and road surface

＊０３
COEFFICIENT OF TARGET SLIP RATE
FRICTION
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
RADIAL
DIRECTION
OF THE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
SLIP RATE
Main Control
The control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel speed sensor signals it receives, then it calculates the
vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration
based on the wheel speeds.
The control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid
valve when the slip rate is high.
The hydraulic control has three modes: Pressure intensifying, pressure reducing, and pressure retaining.
＊０４ CONTROL UNIT
Detect Reference
Vehicle Speed Slip Rate
RIGHT-REAR
RIGHT-REAR
WHEEL SPEED Detect Detect ABS Drive RIGHT-REAR
SENSOR Wheel Speed Slip Rate Control Solenoid SOLENOID
LEFT-REAR
LEFT-REAR
WHEEL SPEED Detect Detect ABS Drive LEFT-REAR
RIGHT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT Detect Drive RIGHT-FRONT
WHEEL SPEED Detect ABS
LEFT-FRONT
LEFT-FRONT Detect Detect ABS Drive LEFT-FRONT
WHEEL SPEED Wheel Speed Slip Rate Control SOLENOID
SENSOR Solenoid
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-53

08/04/09 12:35:08 61TL2000_190_0056

EBD Features
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) feature helps control vehicle braking by adjusting the rear brake force in
accordance with the rear wheel load before the ABS operates. Based on the wheel speed sensor signals, the control
unit uses the modulator to control the rear brakes individually. When the rear wheel speed is less than the front wheel
speed, the VSA modulator-control unit retains the current rear brake fluid pressure by closing the inlet valve in the
modulator. As the rear wheel speed increases and approaches the front wheel speed, the VSA modulator-control unit
increases the rear brake fluid pressure by momentarily opening the inlet valve. This whole process is repeated very
rapidly. While this is happening, kickback may be felt at the brake pedal.
＊０５
With EBD under HEAVY LOAD
REAR WHEEL at REAR WHEELS
BRAKE PRESSURE
With EBD under LIGHT LOAD

at REAR WHEELS
Without EBD
FRONT WHEEL BRAKE PRESSURE
TCS Features
When a drive wheel loses traction on a slippery road surface and starts to spin, the VSA modulator-control unit applies
brake pressure to the spinning wheel and sends an engine torque control request to the ECM/PCM to slow the
spinning wheel and keep traction.
＊０６
ANTI-POWER of BRAKE FORCE
DRIVING POWER
TOTAL TRACTION
TOTAL TRACTION
BRAKE FORCE
NORMAL ROAD SURFACE SLIPPERY ROAD SURFACE
19-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:35:08 61TL2000_190_0057
VSA System Features

Oversteer control
Applies the brake to the front and rear outside wheels
＊０７
with VSA
The brake makes the yaw rate opposite

to the turning direction
without VSA
Understeer control
• Applies the brake to the rear inside wheel
• Controls the engine torque when accelerating
＊０８
without VSA
The brake increases the yaw rate toward
the turning direction
The throttle control effect;
with VSA • reduces vehicle speed
• increases cornering force
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-55

08/04/09 12:35:09 61TL2000_190_0058

Brake Assist Features
Brake assist helps ensure that any driver can achieve the full braking potential of the vehicle by increasing brake
system pressure in a panic situation, bringing the vehicle into a full ABS stop.
If during a panic stop the VSA modulator-control unit determines that the brake system pressure increases above a
threshold in less than a certain amount of time, the VSA modulator-control unit engages brake assist.
Because the brake system pressure crossed the pressure threshold before the time threshold had expired, the VSA
modulator-control unit goes into brake assist mode.
＊０９
Brake Pedal
Effort Reduced
Panic Stop with Brake Assist
Pressure
Brake Assist
Begins Panic Stop without Brake Assist
Pressure
Threshold
Normal Stop
Time
Threshold Time
19-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:35:09 61TL2000_190_0059
Modulator Unit
The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, the outlet solenoid valve, the VSA NO (normally open)
solenoid valve, the VSA NC (normally closed) solenoid valve, the reservoir, the pump, and the pump motor.
The hydraulic control has three modes of ABS action; pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
Pressure intensifying mode (VSA) is a combination of the TCS, VSA, and brake assist action.
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type; one channel for each wheel.
＊１０ MASTER
CYLINDER
FL RR RL FR
PRESSURE OUT
OUT SENSOR
IN IN
DAMPING
CHAMBER
MOTOR
VSA NO VSA NC VSA NC VSA NO
RESERVOIR RESERVOIR
IN: INLET SOLENOID VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN)

OUT: OUTLET SOLENOID VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
Mode VSA NO VSA NC Inlet Outlet Brake Fluid

Valve Valve Solenoid Solenoid
Valve Valve
Pressure open closed open closed Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to
intensifying the caliper.
mode
Pressure open closed closed closed Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet
retaining and outlet valves.
mode
Pressure open closed closed open
• Caliper fluid flows through the
reducing outlet valve to the reservoir.
mode • The motor pumps the reservoir fluid
through the damping chamber to
the master cylinder .
Pressure closed open open closed • Master cylinder fluid is pumped out
intensifying by pump with motor through VSA
mode (VSA) NC valve to the caliper.
• Caliper fluid pressure exceeds
master cylinder pressure.
: The motor will continue running until the operation of the one anti-lock brake control is finished with the first
pressure reducing mode.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-57

08/04/09 12:35:10 61TL2000_190_0060
Circuit Diagram
＊９０
BATTERY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH

No. 1 (100 A) No. 3-1 (50 A) 2 5
IG1 C5 No. 6 (7.5 A) P7
WHT BLU WHT WHT
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III)
No. 2-5 (30 A)

RED
No. 2-3 (30 A)
WHT
No. 12 (15 A) 1 2
RED/BLU LT GRN
YAW RATE-
BRAKE PEDAL LATERAL
POSITION SWITCH ACCELERATION
Closed: Brake pedal pressed VSA OFF SWITCH SENSOR
4 1
＋B GRY WHT
5 3
RED WHT
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
2 2
BRN RED
2
BRAKE SYSTEM RED 1 4
INDICATOR BRN BLK
29
BRN
ABS
INDICATOR 22 G501 G503
WHT WHT
21
VSA RED RED
INDICATOR
31
LT GRN
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR 32
GRN
2 1
BRAKE FLUID PARKING
LEVEL SWITCH BRAKE SWITCH DATA LINK
Closed: Low fluid Closed: Parking CONNECTOR (DLC)
1 brake applied
6
WHT
14
RED
12
RED
7
BLK LT BLU
16
WHT ＋B
4
BRN
G302 G501
19-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１００００００００ＥＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:09 61TL2000_190_0061
＊９０
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
8
WHT CPU
IG1
MCU
1
RED
MR ＋B
32
WHT
ECM/PCM FSR ＋B
CPU
A42 STEERING
LT GRN ANGLE FAIL-SAFE
SENSOR RELAY
A3 1 40
WHT BRN
SGND
A4 5 5
RED ORN
SVCC MODULATOR UNIT
A44 3 30
RED BLU VCC
STR-Z
4 38 PRESSURE
LT GRN SENSOR
STR-B
2 41
GRN
STR-A
VSA1
12 NC
WHT WHT
CAN-H CAN
13 CONTROLLER NO
RED RED VSA2
CAN-L
39 NC
RED RED
WEN
10 NO
LT BLU
K-LINE SOLENOIDS
LEFT-FRONT
IN
2 45
ORN
FL ＋B OUT
1 46 RIGHT-FRONT
GRN
FL-GND
IN
2 34 ELECTRIC
WHEEL SPEED LT GRN CURRENT
FR ＋B LIMITATION OUT
SENSOR
1 33
LEFT-REAR
PUR ＋B
FR-GND
IC IN
2 36
BLU
RL ＋B GND OUT
1 37
RED RIGHT-REAR
RL-GND
2 43 IN
PNK
RR ＋B
OUT
1 42
PUR
RR-GND
16 PUMP MOTOR
BLK
GND
47
BLK
MR-GND
G202
: 12 V
:5V
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-59

08/04/09 12:36:09 61TL2000_190_0062

＊０１
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BRAKE PEDAL POSITION
BOX CONNECTOR P (20P) SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
YAW RATE-LATERAL
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR ACCELERATION SENSOR
4P CONNECTOR
VSA OFF SWITCH PARKING BRAKE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR BRAKE FLUID
5P CONNECTOR SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR LEVEL SWITCH
1P CONNECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

5P CONNECTOR
19-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:36:10 61TL2000_190_0063
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Wheel Speed Sensor 8. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
(Short to Power/Short to Body Ground/Open) appropriate wheel speed sensor ＋B and GND
terminals of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). connector individually (see table).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. DTC Appropriate Terminal

＋B GND
3. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 19 mph 11 (Right-front) FR ＋B: FR-GND:
(30 km/h) or more. No. 34 No. 33
13 (Left-front) FL ＋B: FL-GND:
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. No. 45 No. 46
15 (Right-rear) RR ＋B: RR-GND:
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. No. 43 No. 42
17 (Left-rear) RL ＋B: RL-GND:
Is DT C 11, 13, 15, and/ or 17 indicated? No. 36 No. 37
＊０１
YES−Go to step 5. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR

time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel
speed sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator- FR-GND (PUR) FL-GND (GRN)
control unit 47P connector. Refer to intermittent FR ＋B FL ＋B
(LT GRN) (ORN)
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-45).
RL ＋B (BLU) RR ＋B (PNK)
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). RL-GND RR-GND
(RED) (PUR)
6. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P

Is there 0.1 V or more?

the VSA modulator-control unit and the appropriate
wheel speed sensor.
NO−Go to step 9.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-61
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１１１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:10 61TL2000_190_0064

10. Check for continuity between body ground and the 11. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P
appropriate wheel speed sensor ＋B and GND connector.
terminals of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
connector individually (see table). 12. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate wheel speed sensor ＋B and GND
DTC Appropriate Terminal terminals of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
＋B GND connector individually (see table).
11 (Right-front) FR ＋B: FR-GND:
No. 34 No. 33 DTC Appropriate Terminal
13 (Left-front) FL ＋B: FL-GND: ＋B GND
No. 45 No. 46 11 (Right-front) FR ＋B: FR-GND:
15 (Right-rear) RR ＋B: RR-GND: No. 34 No. 33
No. 43 No. 42 13 (Left-front) FL ＋B: FL-GND:
17 (Left-rear) RL ＋B: RL-GND: No. 45 No. 46
No. 36 No. 37 15 (Right-rear) RR ＋B: RR-GND:
＊０２ No. 43 No. 42
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR 17 (Left-rear) RL ＋B: RL-GND:
No. 36 No. 37
＊０３
FR-GND (PUR) FL-GND (GRN)
FR ＋B FL ＋B
(LT GRN) (ORN)
RL ＋B (BLU) RR ＋B (PNK) FR-GND (PUR) FL-GND (GRN)
RL-GND RR-GND FR ＋B FL ＋B
(RED) (PUR) (LT GRN) (ORN)
RL-GND RR-GND
(RED) (PUR)
NO−Go to step 13.
between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
wheel speed sensor.
NO−Replace the wheel speed sensor (see page

19-106).
19-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:36:11 61TL2000_190_0065
13. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P 15. On the harness side, connect the wheel speed
connector. sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 to
14. Check for continuity between the appropriate
wheel speed sensor ＋B and GND terminals of the DTC Appropriate
VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector (see Wheel Speed Sensor
table). 11 Right-front
13 Left-front
DTC Appropriate Terminal 15 Right-rear
＋B GND 17 Left-rear
11 (Right-front) FR ＋B: FR-GND: ＊０５
No. 34 No. 33 WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
13 (Left-front) FL ＋B: FL-GND:
No. 45 No. 46
15 (Right-rear) RR ＋B: RR-GND:
No. 43 No. 42 ＋B GND
17 (Left-rear) RL ＋B: RL-GND:
No. 36 No. 37
＊０４ JUMPER WIRE

FR-GND (PUR) FL-GND (GRN)
FR ＋B FL ＋B
(LT GRN) (ORN)
RL-GND RR-GND
(RED) (PUR)
YES−Repair short in the wires between the VSA

modulator-control unit and the wheel speed
sensor.
NO−Go to step 15.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-63

08/04/09 12:36:11 61TL2000_190_0066

16. Check for continuity between body ground and the 17. Substitute a known-good wheel speed sensor.
appropriate wheel speed sensor ＋B and GND
terminals of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P 18. Reconnect all connectors.
connector individually (see table).
DTC Appropriate Terminal
＋B GND 20. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
11 (Right-front) FR ＋B: FR-GND:
No. 34 No. 33 21. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 19 mph
13 (Left-front) FL ＋B: FL-GND: (30 km/h) or more.
No. 45 No. 46
15 (Right-rear) RR ＋B: RR-GND: NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
No. 43 No. 42
17 (Left-rear) RL ＋B: RL-GND: 22. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
No. 36 No. 37
＊０６ Is DT C 11, 13, 15, and/ or 17 indicated?
NO−Replace the original wheel speed sensor

FR-GND (PUR) FL-GND (GRN) (see page 19-106).
FR ＋B FL ＋B
(LT GRN) (ORN)
23. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
RL ＋B (BLU) RR ＋B (PNK) not have the latest software (see page 19-102). If
RL-GND RR-GND the unit already has the latest software, substitute a
(RED) (PUR)
known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
19-103).
24. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 19 mph

(30 km/h) or more.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
Is DT C 11, 13, 15, and/ or 17 indicated?
NO−Repair open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the wheel speed YES−Check for loose terminals in the VSA
sensor. modulator-control unit 47P connector. If the VSA
modulator-control unit was updated, substitute a
19-103), then retest. If the VSA modulator-control
unit was substituted, go to step 1.
NO−If the VSA modulator-control unit was

updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA
modulator-control unit was substituted, replace the
original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
19-103). If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
19-64 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:36:11 61TL2000_190_0067
DTC 12, 14, 16, 18: Wheel Speed Sensor 3. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for
(Electrical Noise/Intermittent Interruption) damage, debris, and correct installation.
NOTE: If the ABS and the VSA indicators came on DTC Appropriate Note
because of electrical noise, the indicator will go off Magnetic
when you test-drive the vehicle at 9 mph (15 km/h) after Encoder
the system returns to normal. 12 Right-front Remove the driveshaft
14 Left-front outboard joint from the
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). appropriate wheel hub
(see page 18-13).
2. Check that the appropriate wheel speed sensor is 16 Right-rear Remove the hub
properly mounted (see page 19-106). 18 Left-rear bearing unit (see page
18-32).
DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor
12 Right-front Is the magnetic encoder OK ?
14 Left-front
16 Right-rear YES−Go to step 4.
18 Left-rear
NO−Remove the debris from the magnetic
Is the wheel speed sensor installation OK ? encoder, or replace the wheel bearing (front) or the
hub bearing unit (rear):
YES−Go to step 3.
• Front: Replace the front wheel bearing (see page
NO−Reinstall the wheel speed sensor, and check 18-13).
the mounting position (see page 19-106). • Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page
18-32).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-65
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１１２０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:12 61TL2000_190_0068

4. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P ＊０１
connector (see step 4 on page 19-104). VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
DTC 12:
5. Check for continuity between the appropriate
wheel speed sensor GND terminal and other wheel
speed sensor GND terminals of the VSA modulator-
control unit 47P connector (see table). FR-GND RL-GND RR-GND FL-GND
(PUR) (RED) (PUR) (GRN)
DTC Appropriate Other Terminals

Terminal
12 FR-GND: No. 46 No. 42 No. 37
No. 33
14 FL-GND: No. 33 No. 42 No. 37 DTC 14:
No. 46
16 RR-GND: No. 33 No. 46 No. 37
No. 42
FR-GND RL-GND RR-GND FL-GND
18 RL-GND: No. 33 No. 46 No. 42 (PUR) (RED) (PUR) (GRN)
No. 37
DTC 16:
FR-GND RL-GND FL-GND

(PUR) (RED) (GRN)
RR-GND
(PUR)
DTC 18:
FR-GND RR-GND FL-GND

(PUR) (PUR) (GRN)
RL-GND
(RED)
YES−Repair short in the wires between the

appropriate wheel speed sensor and the other
wheel speed sensor.
NO−Go to step 6.
19-66 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:36:12 61TL2000_190_0069
6. Substitute a known-good wheel speed sensor. 12. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
not have the latest software (see page 19-102). If
7. Reconnect all connectors. the unit already has the latest software, substitute a
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 19-103).
9. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 19 mph
(30 km/h) or more.
(30 km/h) or more. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 14. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
11. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is DT C 12, 14, 16, or 18 indicated?
Is DT C 12, 14, 16, or 18 indicated? YES−Check for loose terminals in the VSA
modulator-control unit 47P connector. If the VSA
YES−Go to step 12. modulator-control unit was updated, substitute a
NO−Replace the original wheel speed sensor 19-103), then retest. If the VSA modulator-control
(see page 19-106). unit was substituted, go to step 1.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-67

08/04/09 12:36:12 61TL2000_190_0070

DTC 21, 22, 23, 24: Magnetic Encoder (Wheel 6. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
Bearing) not have the latest software (see page 19-102). If
the unit already has the latest software, substitute a
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
19-103).
3. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more.
(15 km/h) or more.
YES−Check for loose terminals in the VSA
YES−Go to step 5. modulator-control unit 47P connector. If the VSA
NO−The system is OK at this time. known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
5. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for unit was substituted, go to step 1.
damage, debris, and correct installation.
DTC Appropriate Note updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA
Magnetic modulator-control unit was substituted, replace the
Encoder original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
21 Right-front Remove the driveshaft 19-103). If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the
22 Left-front outboard joint from the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
appropriate wheel hub
(see page 18-13).
23 Right-rear Remove the hub
24 Left-rear bearing unit (see page
18-32).
Is the magnetic encoder OK ?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Remove the debris from the magnetic

encoder, or replace the wheel bearing (front) or the
hub bearing unit (rear):
• Front: Replace the front wheel bearing (see page

18-13).
• Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page
18-32).
19-68 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１２１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:12 61TL2000_190_0071
DTC 25: Yaw Rate Sensor 8. Check the YAW/G SENSOR DIAGNOSIS in the VSA
FREEZE DATA with the HDS.
DTC 26: Lateral Acceleration Sensor
Is Y AW / G SENSOR DIAGNOSIS OK ?
DTC 104: Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration
Sensor YES−Go to step 9.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO−Replace the yaw rate-lateral acceleration
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again. 10. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
4P connector (see page 19-100).
Is DT C 25, 26, or 104 indicated?
12. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-lateral
YES−Go to step 8. acceleration sensor 4P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 4.
NO−Go to step 5. ＊０１
YAW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION
5. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners. SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. IG1 (WHT)

GND (BLK)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Wire side of female terminals

time. Check for loose terminals between the yaw
rate-lateral acceleration sensor 4P connector and
the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector. Is there battery voltage?
Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting
(see page 19-45). YES−Go to step 17.
7. Check the size, air pressure, and the amount of NO−Go to step 13.
wear of all four tires, and check the wheel
alignment (see page 18-5). 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is the tire condition and wheel alignment OK ? 14. Disconnect the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box
connector P (20P).
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Make sure the suspension is not modified,

and adjust the wheel alignment correctly, and
recheck by test-driving.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-69
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１２５０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:13 61TL2000_190_0072

15. Check for continuity between yaw rate-lateral 17. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No. 1 connector (see step 4 on page 19-104).
and driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box connector P
(20P) terminal No. 7. 18. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
＊０２ control unit 47P connector terminals No. 12, No. 13,
SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR and yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 4P
Wire side of female terminals connector terminals No. 3, No. 2 individually.
IG1 (WHT) ＊０４
CAN-H (WHT) CAN-L (RED)
WHT
CAN-L (RED)
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY
BOX CONNECTOR P (20P)
Is there continuity? CAN-H (WHT)

YES−Go to step 16. SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
NO−Repair open in the wire between the yaw rate-
lateral acceleration sensor and the driver’s under- Is there continuity?
16. Check for continuity between yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No. 4 NO−Repair open in the wire between the VSA
and body ground. modulator-control unit and the yaw rate-lateral
＊０３ acceleration sensor.
SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
NO−Repair open in the wire between the yaw rate-

lateral acceleration sensor and body ground
(G503).
19-70 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:36:13 61TL2000_190_0073
19. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral 28. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). modulator-control unit 47P connector. If the VSA
22. Clear the DTC with the HDS. known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
23. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization unit was substituted, go to step 1.
(see page 19-100).
24. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners. updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
25. Check for DTCs with the HDS. indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO−Replace the original yaw rate-lateral

acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).

19-103).
27. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-71

08/04/09 12:36:13 61TL2000_190_0074

DTC 27: Steering Angle Sensor 10. Measure the voltage between body ground and
VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector
1. Check the size, air pressure, and the amount of terminals No. 5 and No. 40 individually.
wear of all four tires, and check the wheel ＊０１
alignment (see page 18-5). VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
Is the tire condition and wheel alignment OK ? SVCC (ORN)
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Make sure the suspension is not modified, SGND (BRN)

and adjust the wheel alignment correctly, and
recheck by test-driving.

4. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners. Is there 0.1 V more?
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. YES−Repair short to power in the wire between
the VSA modulator-control unit and the steering
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. angle sensor.
Is DT C 27 indicated? NO−Go to step 11.
YES−Go to step 6.

time. Check for loose terminals between the
steering angle sensor 5P connector and the VSA
modulator-control unit 47P connector. Refer to
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
19-45).
7. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector.

19-72 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１２７０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:14 61TL2000_190_0075
11. Measure the voltage between body ground and 14. Check for continuity between body ground and
VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector
terminals No. 30, No. 38, and No. 41 individually. terminals No. 30, No. 38, and No. 41 individually.
＊０２＊０４
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
STR-B (LT GRN) STR-A STR-Z (BLU) STR-B (LT GRN) STR-A STR-Z (BLU)
(GRN) (GRN)
Is there 0.1 V more? Is there continuity?
YES−Repair short to power in the wire between YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
the VSA modulator-control unit and the steering between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
angle sensor. steering angle sensor.

VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector
terminals No. 5 and No. 40 individually.
＊０３
SVCC (ORN)
SGND (BRN)

steering angle sensor.
NO−Go to step 14.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-73

08/04/09 12:36:14 61TL2000_190_0076

15. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- 16. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
control unit 47P connector terminals No. 5, No. 40 control unit 47P connector terminals No. 30, No. 38,
and steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 41 and steering angle sensor 5P connector
No. 5, No. 1 individually. terminals No. 3, No. 4, and No. 2 individually.
＊０５＊０６
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
SVCC (ORN) STR-Z (BLU)
SGND (BRN) STR-B (LT GRN) STR-A (GRN)
SGND (BRN)
STR-Z (BLU)
STR-B (LT GRN)
SVCC (ORN)
STR-A (GRN)
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
modulator-control unit and the steering angle NO−Repair open in the wire between the VSA
sensor. modulator-control unit and the steering angle
sensor.
19-74 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:36:14 61TL2000_190_0077
17. Substitute a known-good steering angle sensor 23. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
(see page 19-99). not have the latest software (see page 19-102). If
18. Reconnect all connectors. known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
19-103).
Is DT C 27 indicated? modulator-control unit 47P connector. If the VSA
YES−Go to step 23. known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
NO−Check for loose terminals in the steering unit was substituted, go to step 1.
angle sensor 5P connector. If the connections are
OK, replace the steering angle sensor (see page NO−If the VSA modulator-control unit was
19-99). updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-75

08/04/09 12:36:14 61TL2000_190_0078

DTC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38: ABS 5. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
Solenoid not have the latest software (see page 19-102). If
19-103).
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again.
ON (II) again.
Is DT C 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37 , or 38 indicated?
Is DT C 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37 , or 38 indicated?

19-76 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１３１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:14 61TL2000_190_0079
DTC 51: Motor Lock 8. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 1 and body
DTC 52: Motor Stuck ON/OFF ground.
＊０１
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. MR ＋B (RED)

(15 km/h) or more.
Is DT C 51 or 52 indicated? Wire side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 5.
time. Check for loose terminals in the VSA YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
modulator-control unit 47P connector. Refer to between the No. 2-5 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page fuse/relay box and the VSA modulator-control
19-45). unit.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO−Install a new No. 2-5 (30 A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 9.
6. Check the No. 2-5 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box. 9. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
connector.
Is the f use blown?
YES−Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P (15 km/h) or more.
Is DT C 51 or 52 indicated?
YES−Replace the VSA modulator-control unit.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-77
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１５１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:15 61TL2000_190_0080

15. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator- 17. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 1 and body connector.
ground.
MR ＋B (RED)
(15 km/h) or more.
Is there battery voltage? NO−The system is OK at this time.
YES−Go to step 16. 22. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
NO−Repair open in the wire between the No. 2-5 the unit already has the latest software, substitute a
(30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
the VSA modulator-control unit. 19-103).
16. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- 23. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 10 mph
control unit 47P connector terminals No. 47 and (15 km/h) or more.
body ground.
＊０３ NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.

MR-GND
(BLK) modulator-control unit 47P connector. If the VSA
Is there continuity? modulator-control unit was substituted, replace the
YES−Go to step 17. 19-103). If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the
modulator-control unit and body ground (G202).
19-78 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:36:15 61TL2000_190_0081
DTC 54: Fail-safe Relay 5. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the unit already has the latest software, substitute a
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 19-103).
3. Test-drive the vehicle. 6. Test-drive the vehicle.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DT C 54 indicated? Is DT C 54 indicated?
YES−Go to step 5. YES−Check for loose terminals in the VSA

NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this modulator-control unit was updated, substitute a
time. known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page

-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-79
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１５４０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:15 61TL2000_190_0082

DTC 61: Low ＋B-FSR Voltage DTC 64: Sensor Power Voltage
DTC 62: High ＋B-FSR Voltage 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: If the vehicle has high electric load or a weak 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
battery, DTC 61 may be stored when starting the engine.
ON (II) again. Is DT C 64 indicated?
Does the ABS indicator stay on? YES−Go to step 5.
YES−Go to step 4. NO−The system is OK at this time.
NO−The system is OK at this time. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 6. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector.
Is DT C 61 or 62 indicated? 7. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P

YES−Check the battery and the charging system
(see page 4-25). 8. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
NO−Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the ground.
DTC indicated. ＊０１
SVCC (ORN)

steering angle sensor.
NO−Go to step 9.
19-80 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１６１０ＦＡＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１６４０ＦＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:36:15 61TL2000_190_0083
9. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P DTC 65: Brake Fluid Level
connector.
1. Check the brake fluid level in the master cylinder
10. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does reservoir.
the unit already has the latest software, substitute a Is brake f luid level OK ?
11. Test-drive the vehicle. NO−Inspect the brake pads: Front (see page 19-12),
rear (see page 19-25), and replace worn out brake
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. pads, then recheck.
12. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is DT C 64 indicated? 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
YES−Check for loose terminals in the VSA 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
modulator-control unit was updated, substitute a 5. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch 2P
known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page connector.
unit was substituted, go to step 1. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO−If the VSA modulator-control unit was 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
modulator-control unit was substituted, replace the Is DT C 65 indicated?
19-103). If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Replace the reservoir (brake fluid level switch
is included) on the master cylinder (see page 19-20).

connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-81
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１６５０ＦＡＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:36:16 61TL2000_190_0084

10. Check for continuity between brake fluid level 13. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground. Is DT C 65 indicated?
＊０１
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
GRN

Wire side of female terminals 19-103). If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the

between the gauge control module and the brake
fluid level switch.
NO−Go to step 11.

19-103).

ON (II) again.
19-82 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:36:16 61TL2000_190_0085
DTC 66: VSA Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA 5. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
Modulator-control Unit) not have the latest software (see page 19-102). If
19-103).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-83
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１６６０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:16 61TL2000_190_0086

DTC 68: Brake Pedal Position Switch 8. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is DT C 68 indicated?
2. Check for other DTCs. YES−Go to step 9.
Is another DT C indicated? NO−The system is OK at this time.
YES−Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the 9. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal
DTC. circuit (see page 11-321).
NO−Go to step 3. Is the brake pedal position switch circuit OK ?
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES−Go to step 10.
4. Check the brake pedal position switch (see page NO−Repair the brake pedal position switch
22-210), and adjustment (see page 19-6). circuit.
Is the switch and adjustment OK ?
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Adjust the brake pedal position switch. If

necessary, replace the brake pedal position switch
(see page 19-6).
19-84 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１６８０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:16 61TL2000_190_0087
10. Reconnect all connectors. 15. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
11. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest the unit already has the latest software, substitute a
software (see page 11-233), or substitute a known- known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). 19-103).
12. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 16. Test-drive the vehicle.
13. Test-drive the vehicle. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 17. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
14. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is DT C 68 indicated?
Is DT C 68 indicated? YES−Check for loose terminals in the VSA

YES−Check for loose terminals in the ECM/PCM modulator-control unit was updated, substitute a
connector A (49P). If the ECM/PCM was updated, known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), 19-103), then retest. If the VSA modulator-control
then retest. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to unit was substituted, go to step 1.
step 15.
NO−If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, modulator-control unit was substituted, replace the
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-234). original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-85

08/04/09 12:36:16 61TL2000_190_0088

DTC 81: Central Processing Unit (CPU) 6. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
2. Check for other system DTCs. 19-103).
Is another DT C indicated? 7. Test-drive the vehicle.
YES−Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
DTC.
NO−Go to step 3.
4. Test-drive the vehicle. modulator-control unit 47P connector. If the VSA
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. unit was substituted, go to step 1.
Is DT C 81 indicated? NO−If the VSA modulator-control unit was

YES−Go to step 6. modulator-control unit was substituted, replace the
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 19-103). If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the
time. indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
19-86 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１８１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:16 61TL2000_190_0089
DTC 83: ECM/PCM Communication 7. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
2. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 19-103).
Is DT C 86 indicated? 8. Test-drive the vehicle.
YES−Do the troubleshooting for DTC 86. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
NO−Go to step 3. 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Is DT C 83 indicated?
4. Test-drive the vehicle. YES−Check for loose terminals in the VSA

NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. modulator-control unit was updated, substitute a
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 19-103), then retest. If the VSA modulator-control
YES−Go to step 6. updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA
NO−The system is OK at this time. original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
6. Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
the HDS (see page 11-3).
Are any ECM/ PCM DT Cs indicated?
YES−Do the applicable troubleshooting for the

ECM/PCM.
NO−Go to step 7.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-87
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１８３０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:17 61TL2000_190_0090

DTC 84: VSA Sensor Neutral Position 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
1. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization Is DT C 84 indicated?

(see page 19-100).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. modulator-control unit 47P connector. If the VSA
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
ON (II) again. 19-103), then retest. If the VSA modulator-control
Is DT C 84 indicated? updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA
YES−Go to step 5. original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
NO−The system is OK at this time. indicated DTCs troubleshooting.

19-103).

ON (II) again.
19-88 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１８４０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:49 61TL2000_190_0091
DTC 86: F-CAN Communication 6. Check the F-CAN communication lines for
continuity between the VSA modulator-control unit
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). and the appropriate system or sensor (see table).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Component CAN-L CAN-H

Terminal Terminal
3. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds. VSA modulator- 13 12
control unit
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. ECM/PCM A4 A3
Gauge Control 21 22
Is DT C 86 indicated? Module
Yaw Rate-lateral 2 3
YES−Go to step 5. Acceleration
Sensor
NO−Check the COMMU FI ECU, COMMU A/T, ＊０１
COMMU GAUGE, COMMU YAW RATE/G, and
COMMU ACC in the VSA FREEZE DATA with the
HDS. Then check for F-CAN communication lines
continuity to the appropriate system or sensor and
loose terminals in the appropriate system or sensor
connectors.
5. Check the COMMU FI ECU, COMMU A/T, COMMU

GAUGE, COMMU YAW RATE/G, and COMMU ACC
in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there communication error in the system or

sensor?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 9. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-89
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１８６０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:50 61TL2000_190_0092

＊０２ 7. Check for loose terminals in the appropriate system
or sensor connectors.
CAN-L (RED) Are the appropriate system or sensor connectors

OK ?
YES−Go to step 8.
CAN-H (WHT)
NO−Repair or reconnect the connector securely.
8. Check for other system or sensor DTCs with the

HDS.
CAN-L (RED) CAN-H (WHT) Is another DT C indicated?
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR YES−Do the appropriate DTC troubleshooting.
NO−Go to step 9.
＊０３
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR 9. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
CAN-H (WHT) CAN-L (RED) the unit already has the latest software, substitute a
19-103).
10. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds.

CAN-L (RED)

CAN-H (WHT) modulator-control unit was updated, substitute a
SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR 19-103), then retest. If the VSA modulator-control
Wire side of female terminals unit was substituted, go to step 1.
Is there F -CAN communication lines continuity? NO−If the VSA modulator-control unit was
YES−Go to step 7. modulator-control unit was substituted, replace the
NO−Repair open in the appropriate wire. 19-103). If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the
19-90 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:36:50 61TL2000_190_0093
DTC 91: VSA Operation 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES−Check for loose terminals in the VSA
3. Test-drive the vehicle. modulator-control unit was updated, substitute a
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 19-103), then retest. If the VSA modulator-control

19-103).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-91
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８１９１０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:50 61TL2000_190_0094

DTC 105: Hydraulic Unit Temperature Sensor 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

19-103).
19-92 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８Ａ０５０ＦＡＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:36:50 61TL2000_190_0095
DTC 121, 122, 123, 124: VSA Solenoid 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is DT C 121, 122, 123, or 124 indicated?
Is DT C 121, 122, 123, or 124 indicated? updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the VSA
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
time.

19-103).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-93
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８Ａ２１０ＦＡＡＴ０１
08/04/09 12:36:50 61TL2000_190_0096

DTC 158: ECU Software Reprogramming
1. Update the VSA modulator-control unit (see page
19-102).

ON (II) again.

modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary,
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-103), and retest.
19-94 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｋ８０１０００８Ａ５８０ＦＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:50 61TL2000_190_0097
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and 7. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P
no DTCs are stored connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
＊０１
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
2. Check the VSA activation indicator for several

seconds when the ignition switch is turned to
ON (II).
BRN
Does the indicator come on then go of f ?
NO−Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector. Is there continuity?
5. Check the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-101). YES−Repair short to body ground between the
gauge control module and the VSA OFF switch.
Is the V SA OF F switch OK ?
NO−Substitute a known-good gauge control
YES−Go to step 6. module, then go to step 1 and recheck. If it is OK,
replace the original gauge control module
NO−Replace the VSA OFF switch (see page (see page 22-313).
19-101).

connector.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-95
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１００００００００ＦＡＡＴ０４
08/04/09 12:36:51 61TL2000_190_0098

ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and 6. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
VSA indicator do not go off connector.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Reconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
4P connector.
2. Check the No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver’s under-
dash fuse/relay box. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is the f use blown? 9. Check the ABS indicator, the brake system
indicator, and the VSA indicator for several
YES−Go to step 3. seconds when the ignition switch is turned to
ON (II).
Do the indicators come on then go of f ?
connector (see step 4 on page 19-104). YES−Troubleshooting is complete.
4. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor NO−Replace the VSA modulator-control unit
4P connector (see page 19-100). (see page 19-103).
5. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-

ground.
＊０２
IG1 (WHT)

between the No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver’s under-
dash fuse/relay box and the VSA modulator-control
unit or the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor.
NO−Install the new No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver’s

under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 6.
19-96 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１００００００００ＦＡＡＴ０６
08/04/09 12:36:51 61TL2000_190_0099
10. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P 14. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
connector (see step 4 on page 19-104). control unit 47P connector terminal No. 16 and
body ground.
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ＊０４
12. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 8 and body GND (BLK)
ground.
＊０３
IG1 (WHT)

Is there battery voltage? modulator-control unit and body ground (G202).
NO−Repair open in the wire between the No. 6

(7.5 A) fuse in the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay
box and the VSA modulator-control unit.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-97

08/04/09 12:36:51 61TL2000_190_0100

15. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P 17. Reconnect all connectors.
connector.
16. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator- not have the latest software (see page 19-102). If
control unit 47P connector terminal and gauge the unit already has the latest software, substitute a
control module 32P connector terminal (see table). known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
19-103).
Sign VSA Modulator- Gauge Control
control Unit 47P Module 32P 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
Connector Connector ON (II) again.
Terminal Terminal
CAN-L No. 13 No. 21 20. Check the ABS indicator, the brake system
CAN-H No. 12 No. 22 indicator, and the VSA indicator for several
＊０５ seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON
(II).
CAN-L (RED) Do the indicators come on then go of f ?
YES−If the VSA modulator-control unit was

CAN-H (WHT)
19-103).
NO−Check for loose terminals in the VSA

CAN-L (RED) CAN-H (WHT) modulator-control unit was updated, substitute a
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR 19-103), then retest. If the VSA modulator-control
Wire side of female terminals unit was substituted, go to step 1.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the gauge

control module and the VSA modulator-control
unit.
19-98 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:36:52 61TL2000_190_0101
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement

NOTE: Do not damage or drop the combination switch as the steering angle sensor is sensitive to shock and vibration.
1. With the wheels in the straight-ahead position and the steering wheel centered, remove the steering wheel
(see page 17-6).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-132) and the cable reel (see page 24-163).
3. Remove the combination switch assembly (see step 8 on page 17-10).
4. Remove the combination light switch (A) and the wiper/washer switch (B) from the combination switch body
assembly (C).
＊０１
A
C
B
5. Install the combination switch body assembly in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• Do not remove the steering angle sensor from the combination switch body.
• When installing the cable reel, set the turn signal canceling sleeve position so that the arrow points straight up
(see page 24-164).
• Note that the tightening order is specified for the combination switch mounting screws (see page 17-11).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-99
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１０００５７０９１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:52 61TL2000_190_0102
Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration VSA Sensor Neutral Position

Sensor Replacement Memorization
NOTE: NOTE: Do not press the brake pedal during this

• Do not damage or drop the sensor as it is sensitive. procedure.
• Do not use power tools.
1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, with the
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). steering wheel in the straight ahead position.
2. Remove the center console (see page 20-113). 2. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the
HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) under the
3. M/T: Remove the shift lever assembly (see page driver’s side of the dashboard.
13-74). ＊０１
4. Remove the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor

(A) mounting nuts.
＊０１
C
A
A
6 x 1.0 mm 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle

9.8 N·m and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn’t,
(1.0 kgf·m, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
7.2 lbf·ft)
B
5. Select VSA ADJUSTMENT with the HDS, and
follow the screen prompts.
5. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
4P connector (B). NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions.
6. Check for deformation in the bracket (C). If
necessary replace it. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Install the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor in

the reverse order of removal.
8. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization

(see page 19-100).
19-100 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１０００６８０１１ＫＢＡＴ００ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１０００６３６５３ＢＢＡＴ０２
08/04/09 12:36:53 61TL2000_190_0103
VSA OFF Switch Test

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P
connector terminals No. 4 and No. 5. There should
2. Push out the VSA OFF switch (A) from the back of be continuity at all times.
the instrument panel. ＊０３
＊０１ VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR

B
6. Install the VSA OFF switch in the reverse order of

3. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector (B). removal.
4. Check for continuity between the VSA OFF switch

5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There
should be continuity when the switch is pressed,
and no continuity when the switch is released.
＊０２
VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-101
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１０００６３６５１ＦＥＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:53 61TL2000_190_0104
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Update

Special Tools Required 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester the engine.
• Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation
with HDS and CM update software 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
• HDS pocket tester (A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
• GNA-600 and an iN workstation with HDS and CM ＊０１
update software
Use any one of these update tools.
NOTE:
• Use this procedure when you need to update the
VSA modulator-control unit at any time.
• Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version.
• Before you update the VSA modulator-control unit,
make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully charged,
and connect a jumper battery (not a battery charger)
to maintain system voltage.
• Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACC (I)
during the update. If there is a problem with the
update, leave the ignition switch ON (II). A
• To prevent VSA modulator-control unit damage, do
not operate anything electrical (headlights, audio 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
system, brakes, A/C, power windows, door locks, etc.) and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn’t,
during the update. troubleshooting the DLC circuit (see page 11-210).
• To ensure the latest program is installed, do a VSA
modulator-control unit update whenever the VSA 4. Select the update mode, and follow the screen
modulator-control unit is substituted or replaced. prompts to update the VSA modulator-control unit.
• You cannot update a VSA modulator-control unit with
a program it already has. It will only accept a new 5. If the software in the VSA modulator-control unit is
program. the latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLC. If
• High temperature in the engine compartment might the software in the VSA modulator-control unit is
cause the VSA modulator-control unit to become too not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen.
hot to run the update. If the engine has been running
before this procedure, open the hood and cool the 6. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization
engine compartment. procedure (see page 19-100).
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM’s red (＃3) light came on or
was flashing during the update, leave the ignition
switch in ON (II) when you disconnect the HIM from
the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent VSA
modulator-control unit damage.
• DTCs stored in memory are cleared when the VSA
modulator-control unit is updated.
19-102 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１０００６３６３５ＬＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:53 61TL2000_190_0105
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation

NOTE: 2. Remove the suction line mount bolt (A) from the
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage bracket.
the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off ＊０１
A
immediately with water. 6 x 1.0 mm
• Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines 9.8 N·m
during removal and installation. (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
C
• To prevent the brake fluid from dripping, plug and
cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel.
B
Removal
3. Disconnect the receiver line (B) from the clamp (C).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-103
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１０００６３６３５ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:54 61TL2000_190_0106
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation (cont’d)

4. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector (A) by pushing the lock (B) and pulling down the lever
(C); the connector disconnects itself.
＊０２
F
E 15 N·m
D D
22 N·m
G
15 N·m
B I
C 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
A
N
L
J
M 6 x 1.0 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
5. Disconnect the six brake lines from the VSA modulator-control unit.
NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (D) and to the left-front (E), the right-front (F), the left-rear
(G), and the right-rear (H) brake systems.
6. Remove the 6 x 12 mm flange bolts (I) and 6 x 16 mm flange bolt (J), then remove the VSA modulator-control unit
(K) with the bracket (L) from the body.
7. Remove the receiver line (M) from the bracket, then remove the clips (N).
8. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit from the bracket.
19-104 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:36:54 61TL2000_190_0107
Installation
1. Install the VSA modulator-control unit onto the bracket.
2. Install the clips to the bracket, then install the receiver line.
3. Install the bracket with the VSA modulator-control unit to the body.
4. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque.
5. Align the connecting surface of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector to the VSA modulator-control unit.
6. Pull up the lever of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated.
7. Install the suction line mount bolt to the bracket.
8. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
9. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization procedure (see page 19-100).
10. Start the engine, and check that the ABS and the VSA indicators go off.
11. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure that the ABS and the VSA indicators do not come on.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator which could then be induced into
the normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again (see page 19-9).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-105

08/04/09 12:36:54 61TL2000_190_0108
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement

Front
2. Release the clamp (A), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (B).
＊０１
B A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
3. Remove the bolts and the wheel speed sensor (C).
4. Install the wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires.

• If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the wheel bearing, it is faulty.
5. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicators go off.
6. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicators do not come on.
19-106 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｄ５２１０００６５３０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:36:54 61TL2000_190_0109
Rear
2. Release the clamp (A), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (B).
＊０２
22 N·m
A
6 x 1.0 mm C
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
3. Remove the clamps, the bolt, and the wheel speed sensor (C).
4. Install the wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires.

• If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
5. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicators go off.
6. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicators do not come on.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-107

08/04/09 12:29:14 61TL2000_200_0002
Body
Special Tools ............................................... 20-2 Interior Trim
Component Location Index ....................... 20-75
Doors Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas ... 20-76
Component Location Index ....................... 20-3 Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas ... 20-78
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation ..... 20-9 Trim Removal/Installation
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement .... 20-14 - Rear Shelf Area ..................................... 20-88
Front Door Latch Replacement ................. 20-17 Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area ... 20-91
Front Door Glass and Regulator Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid ...... 20-94
Replacement ............................................ 20-19 Sunvisor Removal/Installation .................. 20-96
Front Door Sash Inner Trim Grab Handle Removal/Installation ............ 20-98
Replacement ............................................ 20-21 Headliner Removal/Installation ................. 20-100
Front Door Sash Outer Trim Carpet Replacement ................................... 20-107
Replacement ............................................ 20-22
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Consoles
Replacement ............................................ 20-22 Center Console Panel
Front Door Outer Molding Removal/Installation ............................... 20-111
Replacement ............................................ 20-23 Center Console Removal/Installation ....... 20-113
Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement .... 20-24 Center Console Rear Trim
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation ...... 20-25 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-114
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement ..... 20-29 Console Armrest Removal/Installation ..... 20-115
Rear Door Latch Replacement ................... 20-32 Center Console Inner Box Lid
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Removal/Installation ............................... 20-117
Replacement ............................................ 20-33
Rear Door Pad Replacement ...................... 20-36 Dashboard
Rear Door Sash Inner Trim Driver’s Dashboard Lower Cover
Replacement ............................................ 20-37 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-118
Rear Door Sash Outer Trim Driver’s Pocket Removal/Installation ........ 20-119
Replacement ............................................ 20-38 Driver’s Dashboard Undercover
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Removal/Installation ............................... 20-119
Replacement ............................................ 20-38 Driver’s Outer Dashboard Trim
Rear Door Outer Molding Replacement ... 20-39 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-120
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement ...... 20-41 Center Trim Removal/Installation ............. 20-121
Door Glass Adjustment .............................. 20-42 Center Holder Removal/Installation .......... 20-122
Door Position Adjustment ......................... 20-43 Center Pocket Removal/Installation .......... 20-123
Door Striker Adjustment ............................ 20-45 Dashboard Center Lower Cover
Removal/Installation ............................... 20-123
Mirrors Side Pocket Removal/Installation .............. 20-125
Component Location Index ....................... 20-46 Speaker Lid Removal/Installation ............. 20-125
Power Mirror Replacement ....................... 20-47 Passenger’s Dashboard Trim
Mirror Holder Replacement ....................... 20-48 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-126
Rearview Mirror Replacement .................. 20-49 Glove Box Lock Cylinder Replacement .... 20-126
Glove Box Separator
Glass Removal/Installation ............................... 20-127
Component Location Index ....................... 20-50 Glove Box Removal/Installation ................ 20-128
Windshield Replacement ........................... 20-51 Glove Box Damper Replacement .............. 20-129
Rearview Mirror Harness Cover Base Passenger’s Dashboard Undercover
Replacement ............................................ 20-56 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-129
Rear Window Replacement ....................... 20-57 Dashboard Side Vent
Removal/Installation ............................... 20-130
Moonroof Dashboard Center Vent
Component Location Index ....................... 20-63 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-131
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 20-64 Side Defogger Vent Trim
Glass Position Adjustment ........................ 20-65 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-131
Glass Replacement ..................................... 20-65 Column Cover Removal/Installation ......... 20-132
Wind Deflector Replacement ..................... 20-66 Column Blind Cover
Drain Channel Replacement ...................... 20-67 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-133
Sunshade Replacement ............................. 20-68 Dashboard Replacement ........................... 20-134
Motor Replacement .................................... 20-69 Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement ........ 20-69 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-139
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly
Replacement ............................................ 20-72
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check ... 20-74
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ２００１ＺＣＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:29:15 61TL2000_200_0003
Seats Exterior Trim

Component Location Index ....................... 20-146 Front Grille Cover Replacement ................ 20-202
Front Seat Active Head Restraint Front Grille Replacement ........................... 20-202
Inspection ................................................ 20-147 Front Fender Trim Replacement ............... 20-204
Front Seat Removal/Installation ................ 20-148 Cowl Cover Replacement ........................... 20-204
Front Seat Recline Motor Replacement .... 20-151 Windshield Side Trim Replacement ......... 20-205
Front Seat Lumbar Support Roof Molding Replacement ....................... 20-208
Replacement ............................................ 20-152 Side Sill Protection Tape Replacement .... 20-209
Front Seat Slide Motor Replacement ....... 20-153 Rear License Trim Replacement ............... 20-210
Front Seat Up-down Motor Emblem/Sticker Replacement ................... 20-211
Replacement ............................................ 20-155
Front Seat Frame Replacement ................. 20-159 Fenderwell
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement ........ 20-161 Front Inner Fender Replacement .............. 20-213
Front Seat Cushion Cover Front Splash Shield Replacement ............. 20-214
Replacement ............................................ 20-167 Front Fender Fairing Replacement ........... 20-215
Rear Seat Removal/Installation ................. 20-174 Middle Floor Undercover Replacement ... 20-216
Rear Seat-back Release Lever Rear Undercover Replacement ................. 20-217
Replacement ............................................ 20-178 Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement .............. 20-218
Rear Seat-back Latch/Release Cable Rear Inner Fender Replacement ................ 20-218
Removal/Installation ............................... 20-179 Rear Air Outlet Replacement ..................... 20-219
Rear Seat Armrest Replacement ............... 20-181
Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement ......... 20-182 Openers
Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover Component Location Index ....................... 20-220
Replacement ............................................ 20-184 Hood Opener Cable Replacement ............. 20-221
Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement .... 20-185 Trunk Lid Opener Cable Replacement ...... 20-222
Hood Latch Replacement ........................... 20-224
Bumpers Hood Release Handle Replacement .......... 20-225
Front Bumper Removal/Installation .......... 20-186 Fuel Fill Door Actuator Replacement ........ 20-226
Front Bumper Fog Light Cover Trunk Lid Cylinder Replacement ............... 20-227
Replacement ............................................ 20-188 Trunk Lid Latch Replacement .................... 20-228
Front Bumper Lower Grille
Replacement ............................................ 20-188 Frame
Front Air Spoiler Replacement .................. 20-190 Frame Brace Replacement ......................... 20-230
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation ........... 20-191 Rear Wheelhouse Gusset Replacement ... 20-230
Rear Bumper Exhaust Pipe Trim Subframe Replacement ............................. 20-231
Replacement ............................................ 20-192 Frame Repair Chart .................................... 20-234
Rear Bumper Reflector Replacement ....... 20-193
Hood
Hood Adjustment ....................................... 20-194
Hood Seal Replacement ............................. 20-195
Hood Insulator Replacement ..................... 20-196
Trunk Lid
Trunk Lid Adjustment ................................. 20-197
Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement ......... 20-198
Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement ....... 20-199
Trunk Lid Cushion Replacement ............... 20-199
Fuel Fill Door

Fuel Fill Door Adapter Replacement ......... 20-200
Fuel Fill Door Replacement ........................ 20-201
-DYNOMITE 2009-
08/04/09 12:29:15 61TL2000_200_0004
Body
Special Tools
07AAF-SNAA100 Torsion Bar Assembly Tool 1
０１
０１

ＴＬ２９Ａ０００００００００Ｊ２００１ＰＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:29:16 61TL2000_200_0005
Doors

Front door
＊０１
DOOR GLASS INNER
WEATHERSTRIP
ARMREST
FRONT PULL COURTESY LIGHT
POCKET CAP SUBHARNESS
FRONT DOOR
PULL POCKET
FRONT GRIP
BRACKET A
FRONT SEAT
MEMORY SWITCH
FRONT GRIP (For some models)
BRACKET B DOOR PANEL
page 20-9
FRONT SEAT MEMORY
SWITCH PANEL
TRUNK LID
COURTESY LIGHT OPENER SWITCH
LENS
FRONT GRIP BASE
SWITCH PANEL
POWER MIRROR
SWITCH
Passenger’s side
SWITCH PANEL
POWER WINDOW
FRONT GRIP COVER SWITCH
POWER MIRROR
SWITCH BRACKET
POWER WINDOW
FRONT DOOR SWITCH
SUBHARNESS
TRUNK OPENER CAP
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１２６７０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:29:18 61TL2000_200_0006
Doors

Front door (cont’d)
＊０２
DOOR SASH OUTER TRIM
DOOR SASH INNER TRIM DOOR OUTER MOLDING

DOOR GLASS
DOOR END TRIM OUTER WEATHERSTRIP
HINGE
DOOR
CHECKER
DOOR PANEL HINGE

BRACKET
DOOR
Position Adjustment, page 20-43
SPEAKER
PLASTIC COVER
DOOR WEATHERSTRIP

08/04/09 12:29:20 61TL2000_200_0007
＊０３
GLASS
IMMOBILIZER and Replacement, page 20-19
SECURITY LABEL Adjustment, page 20-42
GLASS RUN CHANNEL
CENTER LOWER CHANNEL
FRONT LOWER CHANNEL
REGULATOR OUTER HANDLE COVER

Replacement,
page 20-19
Passenger’s side
OUTER HANDLE
Replacement,
page 20-14
LOCK CYLINDER
SWITCH (Driver’s)
OUTER HANDLE
SEALS
OUTER HANDLE HOLDER OUTER HANDLE

BASE
LATCH CABLE
LATCH PROTECTOR
INNER HANDLE
STRIKER
INNER HANDLE
LATCH CABLE
INNER HANDLE CAP

08/04/09 12:29:20 61TL2000_200_0008
Doors

Rear door
＊０１
REAR PULL
ARMREST POCKET CAP DOOR GLASS INNER
WEATHERSTRIP
REAR DOOR
PULL POCKET
REAR GRIP
BRACKET B
REAR GRIP
BRACKET A
REAR GRIP BASE
DOOR PANEL
REAR GRIP COVER page 20-25
COURTESY LIGHT
LENS
SWITCH PANEL
POWER WINDOW SWITCH

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２０００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:29:22 61TL2000_200_0009
＊０２
DOOR SASH INNER TRIM DOOR OUTER MOLDING
DOOR WEATHERSTRIP
Replacement,
page 20-41
DOOR GLASS OUTER
WEATHERSTRIP
Replacement,
page 20-38
DOOR SASH OUTER TRIM

Replacement,
page 20-38
HINGE
DOOR
CHECKER
HINGE
DOOR SKIN PAD DOOR

Replacement, Position Adjustment,
page 20-37 page 20-43
DOOR PANEL DOOR PAD
BRACKET Replacement, SPEAKER
page 20-36 (For some models)
PLASTIC COVER
DOOR END TRIM
(cont’d)

08/04/09 12:29:25 61TL2000_200_0010
Doors

Rear door (cont’d)
＊０３
QUARTER GLASS
GLASS
GLASS RUN CHANNEL
ULEV STICKER
REAR LOWER CHANNEL
OUTER HANDLE COVER
OUTER HANDLE
REGULATOR Replacement,
Replacement, page 20-33 page 20-29
OUTER HANDLE HOLDER
LATCH
Replacement,
page 20-32
LATCH CABLE
OUTER HANDLE
SEALS
LATCH PROTECTOR
OUTER HANDLE BASE
INNER HANDLE
STRIKER INNER HANDLE CABLE

CHILD LOCK CAP

INNER HANDLE CAP

08/04/09 12:29:26 61TL2000_200_0011
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation

Special Tools Required 4. Remove the front seat memory switch panel (A).
• KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014
• Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, –1 Insert the appropriate trim tool into the notch
commercially available (B), and pry up on the lower edge of the panel
Available through the Acura Tool and Equipment to detach the clip.
Program; call 888-424-6857 –2 Pull out along the edge of the panel to release
the hooks (C).
–3 Driver’s side with front seat memory switch:
Disconnect the front seat memory switch
NOTE: connector (D).
• Take care not to scratch the door and related parts. ＊０３
Fastener Location
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components. : Clip, 1
1. Remove the tweeter cover (see page 20-47).

C
2. Push on the upper hook (A) with the appropriate
trim tool, then pull back the inner handle cap (B) to
remove it. D
＊０１
A
A
C B
5. Remove the screw.

B ＊０４
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
3. Remove the screws securing the inner handle (A).

＊０２
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
(cont’d)
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１２６７２１４０１ＫＤＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:29:27 61TL2000_200_0012
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont’d)

6. Release the hooks (A), and remove the front pull 8. Remove the screw securing the door panel (A).
pocket cap (B), then remove the screw. ＊０７
Fastener Location
＊０５
Fastener Location : Screw, 1
: Screw, 1 A
A
B
9. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as

possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
–1 Start at the bottom edge of the door panel,

release the clips (B) that are just above the
marks (C) on the edge of the panel with a
commercially available trim pad remover, and
7. Remove the switch panel (A) from the door panel detach the clip (D).
(B). –2 Detach the upper clips (E, F).
–3 Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
–1 Pry up the notch (C), then release the hook (D).
–2 Pull out along the edge of the panel to release NOTE: The inner handle cable (G) and the latch
all of the hooks (E). cable (H) are connected to the inner handle (I).
–3 Detach the clip. Do not pull the door panel up too far, or these
–4 Disconnect the power window switch cables will be damaged.
connector (F). ＊０８
Fastener Locations
＊０６
Fastener Location B, D : Clip, 4 E : Clip, 4 F : Clip, 1
A
: Clip, 1 (White) (Gray) (Orange)
E
D
I
E H
E
C
F
E
B E
B B
F E
E B
A
D
G
A
C
20-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:29:27 61TL2000_200_0013
10. While holding the door panel (A) away from the 12. Disconnect the inner handle cable (A) and the latch
door, remove the inner handle (B) from the door cable (B) from the inner handle (C), then remove
panel. the handle.
–1 Detach the clips by pulling the handle out. –1 Detach the inner handle cable fasteners (D, E),
–2 Slide the handle to release the projections (C) then disconnect the inner handle cable from
of the handle from the grooves (D) in the panel. the cable fasteners.
＊０９ –2 Detach the latch cable fastener (F), and remove
Fastener Locations
the latch cable fastener (G) from the inner
: Clip, 2 A handle by pinching its tabs together.
D
NOTE: If the cable fasteners are damaged or
stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
A ＊１１
C D
A
E
F
C
B
13. Detach the clips (A, B), then remove the door end
trim (C).
11. While holding the door panel (A) away from the NOTE: If the clips or seals are damaged, replace
door, disconnect the driver’s door subharness them with new ones.
connector (B) (driver’s door), the trunk lid opener ＊１２
Fastener Locations
switch connector (C) (driver’s door), the courtesy
A : Clip, 3 B : Clip, 4
light subharness connector (D), and detach the (Brown) (Brown, with seal)
harness clips (E) (driver’s door).
＊１０
B
C
E
B
D E C
A
A B A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-11

08/04/09 12:29:28 61TL2000_200_0014
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont’d)

14. Remove and loosen the screws from the back of the 16. Remove the front grip cover (B) from the door
door panel (A), release the hooks (B), then remove panel (C).
the armrest assembly (C).
＊１３ –1 Remove the screws from the back of the door
Fastener Locations
panel, then remove front grip bracket A.
: Screw, 9 –2 Remove the screws securing the grip cover
from the back of the door panel.
A
–3 Driver’s door: Detach the front door
subharness connector (D), and release the
front door subharness (E) from the harness
holder (F).
–4 Release the hooks (G).
＊１５
Fastener Locations
B : Screw, 8
B
G
C
A
15. Remove the screw, then remove front grip bracket
B. Release the hook (A), then remove the front door
pull pocket (C) from the armrest (D).
＊１４ G
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
B C
E G
F
D
C
D A
20-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:29:29 61TL2000_200_0015
17. Remove the screw, and release the tabs (A), then 19. Install the door panel in the reverse order of
remove the front grip base (B) from the front grip removal, and note these items:
cover (C).
＊１６ • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
Fastener Location
replace them with new ones.
: Screw, 1 • Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new
ones.
• The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable
fastener (B) with the latch in the unlocked
B position as shown.
• Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly, and the cables are connected securely.
• Make sure the window and power door lock
operate properly.
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
A ＊１８
B
A
18. Driver’s door: Release the tabs (A), then remove the
power mirror switch bracket (B) by releasing it from
the projections (C) of the front grip cover (D).
＊１７ 40 mm (1.6 in.)
B
A
D C
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-13

08/04/09 12:29:29 61TL2000_200_0016
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement

NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 5. Remove the maintenance cap (A).
＊０２
• Tweeter cover (see page 20-47)

• Door panel (see page 20-9)
• Door end trim (see step 13 on page 20-11)
2. Raise the glass fully.
3. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector

(A).
＊０１
A
B
C
6. Driver’s door: Pull both side flanges (A) of the

retainer (B) outward, and pull the middle flange
portion (C) of the outer casing cover (D) out, then
disconnect the cylinder cable (E) from the latch.
＊０３
A
4. Remove the rear plug cap (B), then remove the

plastic cover (C) as needed.
E
NOTE: If the plastic cover is damaged or torn,
replace it.
A
E
B
A C
20-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１２６７２１３０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:29:30 61TL2000_200_0017
7. While holding the outer handle cover (A) from 8. Release the hooks (A), then remove the lock
outside of the door, loosen the bolt (driver’s door) cylinder (B) (driver’s door) or the outer handle
until it can be pulled out half-way by hand, or holder (C) (passenger’s door) from the outer handle
remove the bolt (passenger’s door), release the base (D).
hooks (B) of the outer handle cover, then remove
the cover. Driver’s door
＊０６
Driver’s door D
＊０４ A
Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
B B Passenger’s door
＊０７
D
A
A
Passenger’s door
＊０５
Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
B
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-15

08/04/09 12:29:31 61TL2000_200_0018
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont’d)

9. Driver’s door: If the retainer (A) of the lock cylinder 11. Release the hooks (A, B), then remove the outer
cable (B) is damaged, release the hooks (C), then handle front seal (C) and the outer handle rear seal
replace it. (D).
＊０８＊１０
C
A A
B
B
C
B
D
C 12. Remove the outer handle base (A).
–1 Detach the rod fastener (B).

10. Pull the outer handle (A) back, and out as shown to –2 With a clip remover, disconnect the outer
remove it from the door. Take care not to scratch handle rod (C).
the door. –3 Loosen the nut.
＊０９ –4 Release the hook (D), and slide the outer
handle base forward to release the special bolt
(E) from the door panel.
＊１１
Fastener Location
B
: Nut, 1
C
A
6 x 1.0 mm
4.9 N·m
(0.5 kgf·m,
3.6 lbf·ft)
E
A
D C
20-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:29:32 61TL2000_200_0019
Front Door Latch Replacement

13. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
base (B), then replace it with a new one.
＊１２ 1. Remove these items:
B • Tweeter cover (see page 20-47)

• Inner handle (see step 12 on page 20-11)
3. Remove the plastic cover as needed (see steps 3 and 4

on page 20-14).
4. Detach the rod fastener, and disconnect the outer

handle rod from the outer handle base (see step 12
A on page 20-16).
Replace.
5. Driver’s door: Disconnect the cylinder cable from
the latch (see step 6 on page 20-14).
6. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed, and

remove the bolt, then remove the center lower
14. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, channel (B) by pulling it downward.
and note these items: ＊０１
Fastener Location
• Reinstall the lock cylinder (driver’s door) or the : Bolt, 1
outer handle holder (passenger’s door) before
installing the outer handle cover.
• Make sure that the actuator connector is plugged
in properly, and that the cylinder cable and the
outer handle rod are connected securely.
• Make sure the door key cylinder/door locks
operate properly.
• Make sure the door handle works properly.
6 x 1.0 mm
8 N·m
(0.8 kgf·m,
6 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
20-17
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１２６７２０８０１ＫＢＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:29:33 61TL2000_200_0020
Doors
Front Door Latch Replacement (cont’d)

7. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C), 9. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector
then remove the latch through the hole in the door. (A) from the latch (B).
Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (D), the ＊０４
Fastener Location
latch cable (E), and the inner handle cable (F).
＊０２ : Screw, 1
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 3 B : Screw, 1 A
D
B
A
A
A 10. Disconnect the latch cable (A) and the inner handle
6 x 1.0 mm cable (B) from the latch (C).
6 N·m B
(0.6 kgf·m, F ＊０５
4 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
6 N·m A
(0.6 kgf·m,
4 lbf·ft)
8. Remove the foam seals (A, B) from the latch C

protector (C) and the latch (D).
＊０３ A
A C
B
D B
20-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:29:33 61TL2000_200_0021
Front Door Glass and Regulator

Replacement
11. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Before reinstalling the latch protector, clean the
latch and the latch protector surfaces with 1. Remove these items:
isopropyl alcohol where the new foam seals will
be attached. • Tweeter cover (see page 20-47)
• After reinstalling the latch protector to the latch, • Door panel (see page 20-9)
attach the new foam seal to the protector and the
latch. 2. Raise the glass fully.
• Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in
properly and each rod is connected securely. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the door panel
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly. bracket (A).
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the Fastener Locations
＊０１
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed : Screw, 2

(A) and the power mirror connector (B), and detach
the power mirror connector and the harness clip (C).
Remove the plug caps (D).
＊０２
G
B
D C
A
E
F
5. Pass the wire harnesses (E) through the slits (F) in

the plastic cover (G), then remove the plastic cover.

replace it.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-19
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ５４４０００２０３７１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:29:33 61TL2000_200_0022
Doors
Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement (cont’d)

6. Carefully lower the glass (A) until you can see the 7. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B).
bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass ＊０４
Fastener Locations
out through the window slot. Take care not to drop
the glass inside the door. : Bolt, 4 : Nut, 2
(Black)
＊０３
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
B A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
8. Remove the bolts and the nuts, then remove the
regulator through the hole in the door.
20-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:29:34 61TL2000_200_0023
Front Door Sash Inner Trim

Replacement
9. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding
surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown.
＊０５ NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
A 1. Remove these items:

2. Lower the glass fully.
3. Remove the front door sash inner trim (A).
–1 Pull back along the outside edge of the trim to

release the hooks (B) from the door glass
opening flange at the B-pillar portion of the
A
door sash.
–2 Release the hook (C) from the glass run
10. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order channel (D) at the rear corner portion of the
of removal, and note these items: door sash.
–3 Pull back along the outside edge of the trim to
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves release the hooks (E) from the door glass
freely without binding. opening flange at the roof portion and the
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the A-pillar portion of the door sash.
glass and glass run channel when the glass is ＊０１
closed. D
B
• Adjust the position of the glass as necessary
(see page 20-42).
• Do the power window control unit reset
A
procedure (see page 22-244).
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the D
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed C
D E
• Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-43).
• Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. A
• Make sure the power door locks, windows, and
A
power mirror operate properly.
4. Hold the trim up, and align the corner portion of the
trim with the rear corner portion of the door sash,
then set the hook of the trim to the glass run
channel. Set the hooks of the trim along the trim at
the B-pillar portion, the roof portion, and the
A-pillar portion of the door sash.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-21
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１２６７２１５１１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:29:34 61TL2000_200_0024
Doors
Front Door Sash Outer Trim Front Door Glass Outer

Replacement Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door. NOTE:

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the door outer molding (see page 20-23). • Take care not to scratch the door.
• Take care not to damage the rear hook in the
2. Pull the door sash outer trim (A) up to release the weatherstrip because it cannot be replaced
hooks (B) from the door, and release the trim from separately.
between the door glass outer weatherstrip (C) and
the door, then remove the trim. Take care not to 1. Remove these items:
damage the door glass outer weatherstrip.
＊０２ • Tweeter cover (see page 20-47)
B • Door panel (see page 20-9)
• Door panel bracket (see step 3 on page 20-19)
A • Plastic cover, as needed (see steps 4 and 5
on page 20-19)
• Power mirror (see page 20-47)
3. From the inside of the door, slide the clips (A) on

the door glass outer weatherstrip (B) to release the
B hooks (C) from the flanges (D) on the door panel.
＊０１
3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal.
A
D C
A A
(Engaged (Released
position) position)
20-22
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１２６７２１５１１ＫＢＡＴ０１ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１２６７２０３６１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:29:35 61TL2000_200_0025
Front Door Outer Molding

Replacement
4. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the rear hook (A)
out from inside of the door, and pull up the door
glass outer weatherstrip (B), then remove the Special Tools Required
weatherstrip. KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014
＊０２ Available through the Acura Tool and Equipment
NOTE:
B
• If you remove the door outer molding, replace it with
a new one because it will bend during removal.
• Take care not to scratch the door.

• Power mirror (see page 20-47)
A 2. Using a clip remover, detach the clip, then pull back

the door weatherstrip (A), and remove the screw
securing the door outer molding (B).
5. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace ＊０１
Fastener Locations
them with new ones.
: Clip, 1 : Screw, 1
(Black)
6. Before installing the door glass outer weatherstrip,
align the rear hook and the clips of the weatherstrip
to the flanges where the clips should be engaged
by sliding them.
A
7. Push the clip portions of the front door glass outer
weatherstrip into place securely.
8. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
NOTE: When reinstalling the door panel, make sure

the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-23
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１２６７２１２０１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:29:36 61TL2000_200_0026
Doors
Front Door Outer Molding Front Door Weatherstrip

3. While removing the upper edge of the door outer NOTE:

molding (A) from the edge of the sash, cut the • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
double-sided adhesive tape (B) with a utility knife, • Take care not to scratch the door.
then remove the molding from the sash. • Take care not to damage the front upper corner hook
＊０２ and the rear upper corner clip (black) in the
B
weatherstrip because the hook and the clip are not
A
available separately.
• Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
B 1. At the A-pillar, remove the door checker mounting

A bolt (A).
＊０１
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 1 B : Clip, 15 C : Clip, 4
(Left: Orange) (Yellow)
(Right: Green)
D : Clip, 1
(Black)
4. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive E

tape from the sash, then clean the sash surface G
with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
F
5. Install the new door outer molding in the reverse
order of removal, and note these items: D
• Push the adhesive portions into place securely.

• Make sure the upper and lower sides of the
molding are catching the edges of the sash C
properly.
• Push the door weatherstrip clip into place
securely.
B
F
A
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m
(3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
2. Detach the clips (B, C, D) and hook (E), and release

the door weatherstrip (F) from the holder (G) on the
door sash, then remove the weatherstrip.
20-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１２６７２２０５１ＫＢＡＴ５０
08/04/09 12:29:36 61TL2000_200_0027
Rear Door Panel Removal/

Installation
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, • KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014
replace them with new ones. • Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent,
• Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the commercially available
holder securely. Available through the Acura Tool and Equipment
• Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the Program; call 888-424-6857
door checker mounting bolt before installation.
• Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-43).
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the door and related parts.
1. Lower the glass fully.
2. Push on the upper hook (A) with the appropriate

trim tool, then pull back the inner handle cap (B) to
remove it.
＊０１
3. Remove the screws (A) securing the inner handle

(B), and remove the screw (C) securing the door
panel.
Fastener Locations
＊０２
A : Screw, 2 C : Screw, 1
A
C
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-25
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２１４０１ＫＤＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:29:37 61TL2000_200_0028
Doors
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont’d)

4. Release the hooks (A), then remove the rear pull 6. Remove the screw securing the door panel (A).
pocket cap (B), and remove the screw. ＊０５
Fastener Location
＊０３
Fastener Location : Screw, 1
: Screw, 1
A
7. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as

possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
–1 Start at the bottom edge of the door panel,

release the clips that are just above the marks
(B) on the edge of the panel with a
5. Remove the switch panel (A) from the door panel commercially available trim pad remover.
(B). –2 Detach the upper clips.
–3 Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
–1 Pry up the notch (C), then release the hook (D).
–2 Pull out along the edge of the panel to release NOTE: The inner handle cable (C) and the latch
all of the hooks (E). cable (D) are connected to the inner handle (E).
–3 Detach the clip. Do not pull the door panel up too far, or these
–4 Disconnect the power window switch cables will be damaged.
connector (F). ＊０６
Fastener Locations
＊０４
Fastener Location : Clip, 8
: Clip, 1 (Gray)
E
E E
D
F A
A
C B
20-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:29:38 61TL2000_200_0029
8. While holding the door panel (A) away from the 10. Disconnect the inner handle cable (A) and the latch
door, remove the inner handle (B) from the door cable (B) from the inner handle (C), then remove
panel. the handle.
–1 Detach the clips and the hook (C) by pu lling the –1 Detach the inner handle cable fasteners (D, E),
handle out. then disconnect the inner handle cable from
–2 Slide the handle to release the projections (D) the cable fasteners.
of the handle from the grooves (E) in the panel. –2 Detach the latch cable fastener (F), and remove
＊０７ the latch cable fastener (G) from the inner
Fastener Locations
handle by pinching its tabs together.
: Clip, 2
A
NOTE: If the cable fasteners are damaged or
E stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
D
＊０９
A E
A
D
F
C
B 11. Detach the harness clip (A), and detach the clips
(B, C, D), then remove the door end trim (E).
C
NOTE: If the clips or seals are damaged, replace
9. While holding the door panel (A) away from the them with new ones.
door, disconnect the courtesy light bulb socket (B). ＊１０
Fastener Locations
＊０８
B : Clip, 1 C : Clip, 2 D : Clip, 4
(Black) (Gray) (Brown, with seal)
B
D
A
B
D C
E D
C
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-27

08/04/09 12:29:38 61TL2000_200_0030
Doors
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont’d)

12. Remove and loosen the screws from the back of the 14. Remove the rear grip cover (B) from the door panel
door panel (A), release the hooks (B), then remove (C).
the armrest assembly (C).
＊１１ –1 Remove the screws from the back of the door
Fastener Locations
panel, then remove rear grip bracket A.
: Screw, 8 –2 Remove the screws securing the grip cover
from the back of the door panel.
–3 Release the hook (D).
＊１３
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 6
C
C
A
A B
13. Remove the screw, then remove rear grip bracket B.

Release the hook (A), then remove the rear door
pull pocket (C) from the armrest (D).
＊１２
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
D
A
20-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:30:48 61TL2000_200_0031
Rear Door Outer Handle

Replacement
15. Remove the screw, and release the tabs (A), then
remove the rear grip base (B) from the rear grip
cover (C). NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
＊１４
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1

B 2. Raise the glass fully.

(A).
＊０１
C
A
C
B
A
A
16. Install the door panel in the reverse order of
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,

replace them with new ones. 4. Remove the rear plug cap (B), then remove the
• Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new plastic cover (C) as needed.
ones.
• The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable NOTE: Remove the glue from the door surface. If
fastener (B) with the latch in the unlocked the plastic cover is damaged or torn, replace it.
position as shown.
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly, 5. Remove the door pad (see page 20-36).
and the cables are connected securely.
• Make sure the window and power door lock 6. Remove the maintenance cap (A).
operate properly. ＊０２
＊１５
B
A
40 mm (1.6 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-29
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２１３０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:30:49 61TL2000_200_0032
Doors
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont’d)

7. While holding the outer handle cover (A) from 9. Pull the outer handle (A) back, and out as shown to
outside of the door, remove the bolt, release the remove it from the door. Take care not to scratch
hooks (B) of the outer handle cover, then remove the door.
the cover. ＊０５
＊０３
Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
10. Release the hooks (A, B), then remove the outer
handle front seal (C) and the outer handle rear seal
B (D).
B ＊０６
A
8. Release the hooks (A), then remove the outer B

handle holder (B) from the outer handle base (C).
＊０４ C
C
A
A B
D
B
20-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:30:50 61TL2000_200_0033
11. Remove the outer handle base (A). 12. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle
base (B), then replace it with a new one.
–1 Detach the rod fastener (B). ＊０８
–2 With a clip remover, disconnect the outer
handle rod (C). B
–3 Loosen the nut.
–4 Release the hook (D), and slide the outer
handle base forward to release the special bolt
(E) from the door panel.
＊０７
Fastener Location
: Nut, 1
B
A
Replace.
13. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,

C and note these items:
C • Reinstall the outer handle holder before installing

the outer handle cover.
• Make sure the outer handle rod is connected
securely.
• Make sure the door locks operate properly.
E • Make sure the door handle works properly.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
4.9 N·m
(0.5 kgf·m, 3.6 lbf·ft) D
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-31

08/04/09 12:30:50 61TL2000_200_0034
Doors
Rear Door Latch Replacement

NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 7. Remove the foam seals (A, B) from the latch
protector (C) and the latch (D).
1. Remove these items: ＊０２
A C
• Inner handle (see step 10 on page 20-27) B
• Door end trim (see step 11 on page 20-27) D
3. Remove the plastic cover as needed (see step 3 on

page 20-29).
4. Remove the door pad (see page 20-36).
5. Detach the rod fastener, and disconnect the outer

handle rod from the outer handle base (see step 11
on page 20-31).
8. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector
6. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C), (A) from the latch (B).
then remove latch through the hole in the door. ＊０３
Fastener Location
Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (D), the
latch cable (E), and the inner handle cable (F). : Screw, 1
＊０１
Fastener Locations A
A : Screw, 3 B : Screw, 1
B
C
E
A
A
6 x 1.0 mm B
6 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm
6 N·m F
20-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２０８０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:30:51 61TL2000_200_0035
Rear Door Glass and Regulator

Replacement
9. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle
cable (B) from the latch (C).
＊０４ NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
A
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-25).
3. Remove the screws, then remove the door panel

bracket (A).
C ＊０６
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 2
10. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Before reinstalling the latch protector, clean the 4. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector
latch and the latch protector surfaces with (A), and detach the harness clips (B). Remove the
isopropyl alcohol where the new foam seals will plug caps (C).
be attached. ＊０７
F E
• After reinstalling the latch protector to the latch,
attach the new foam seal to the protector and the
latch.
• Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in
properly, and the outer handle rod is connected C
securely. C
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
A
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed B
D
B
D
5. Pass the wire harness (D) through the slits (E) in the
plastic cover (F), then remove the plastic cover.

replace it.
6. Remove the door pad (see page 20-36).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-33
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ５４４０００２０３７１ＫＢＡＴ５０
08/04/09 12:30:52 61TL2000_200_0036
Doors
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement (cont’d)

7. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the 9. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed. Pull
bolts, then remove them. Release the glass from the rear lower channel (B) forward from the quarter
the holder (B), then remove it from the regulator (C), glass seal (C), then release the upper hook (D) from
and carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop the door. Remove the rear lower channel from the
the glass inside the door. rear door glass (E), then pull the channel up to
＊０８ remove it.
Fastener Locations
＊１０
: Bolt, 2
A
C
D
A
B
A
E
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m B
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
8. Remove the bolt (A) from the rear lower channel (B).
Pull the glass run channel (C) away as needed, and
remove the screw (D).
＊０９ 10. Remove the rear lower channel (A) from the glass
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 1 D : Screw, 1
run channel (B).
＊１１
4 x 0.7 mm
4 N·m
(0.4 kgf·m, A
3 lbf·ft)
B C
6 x 1.0 mm
8 N·m
(0.8 kgf·m,
6 lbf·ft)
20-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:30:53 61TL2000_200_0037
11. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the 13. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B).
window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside ＊１４
Fastener Locations
the door.
＊１２ C : Bolt, 4 D : Bolt, 1
A (Black) (Silver)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
C
E
D
12. Remove the quarter glass (A). Take care not to

B
damage the outer weatherstrip (B).
＊１３ A
A
C C C
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
A (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
14. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolt (D).
B Release the hook (E), then remove the regulator
through the hole in the door.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-35

08/04/09 12:30:53 61TL2000_200_0038
Doors
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Rear Door Pad Replacement

Replacement (cont’d)
Door Pad Replacement
15. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding NOTE:
surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
＊１５ • Take care not to scratch the door.

• Plastic cover, as needed (see step 3 on page
20-29)
A 2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, then remove

the door pad (A) from the door.
＊０１
Fastener Locations
: Clip, 3
A
16. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order

of removal, and note these items:
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves

freely without binding.
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel when the glass is
closed.
• Adjust the position of the glass as necessary
(see page 20-42). A
• Do the power window control unit reset
procedure (see page 22-244). 3. Install the pad in the reverse order of removal, and
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the note these items:
around its outside perimeter to seal out water. • Push the clips into place securely.
• Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-43). • When installing the door panel, make sure the
• Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
• Make sure the power door locks and windows around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
operate properly.
20-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２１３９１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:30:54 61TL2000_200_0039
Rear Door Sash Inner Trim

Replacement
Door Skin Pad Replacement
NOTE: NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove these items:
1. Remove these items: • Door end trim (see step 11 on page 20-27)
• Door panel (see page 20-25) 2. Remove the rear door sash inner trim (A).
20-29) –1 Pull back along the outside edge of the trim to
• Door pad (see page 20-36) release the hooks (B) from the door glass
opening flange at the B-pillar portion of the
2. Raise the glass fully. door sash.
–2 Release the hook (C) from the glass run
3. Pull the door skin pad (A) up to release its hooks (B) channel (D) at the front corner of the door sash.
from the edge of the pad holder (C), then remove –3 Pull back along the outside edge of the trim to
the pad. release the hooks (E) from the door glass
＊０２ opening flange at the roof portion and the
B quarter glass portion of the door sash.
C
＊０１
D
A
A
D
E
E D
C
A E
4. Install the pad in the reverse order of removal. B

When installing the door panel, make sure the
around its outside perimeter to seal out water. A
3. Hold the trim up, and align the corner portion of the
trim with the front corner portion of the door sash,
then set the hook of the trim to the glass run
channel. Then set the hooks of the trim along the
trim at the B-pillar portion, roof portion, and the
quarter glass portion of the door sash.
20-37
-DYNOMITE 2009-
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２１５１１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:30:54 61TL2000_200_0040
Doors
Rear Door Sash Outer Trim Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip

1. Remove these items: • Take care not to scratch the door.
• Take care not to damage the front hook in the
• Door panel (see page 20-25) weatherstrip because it is not available separately.
• Plastic cover, as needed (see step 4 on page 1. Remove these items:
20-33)
• Door pad (see page 20-36) • Door panel (see page 20-25)
• Door skin pad (see page 20-37) • Door panel bracket (see step 3 on page 20-33)
• Door glass outer weatherstrip (see page 20-38) • Plastic cover, as needed (see step 4 on page
• Door outer molding (see page 20-39) 20-33)
• Door pad (see page 20-36)
2. Pull the door sash outer trim (A) up to release the • Door skin pad (see page 20-37)
hooks (B) from the door, then remove the trim.
＊０２ 2. Raise the glass fully.
A
hooks (C) from the flanges (D) on the door panel.
＊０１
B
D
C
A
3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal. A A
(Engaged (Released
position) position)
20-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２１５１１ＫＢＡＴ２０ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２０３６１ＫＢＡＴ１１
08/04/09 12:30:55 61TL2000_200_0041
Rear Door Outer Molding

Replacement
4. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the front hook (A)
from inside of the door, then pull up the front
portion of the rear door glass outer weatherstrip (B). Special Tools Required
＊０２ KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014
A
B NOTE:

C
20-33)
5. Release the weatherstrip from the rear door outer • Door pad (see page 20-36)
molding (C) by sliding the weatherstrip forward, • Door skin pad (see page 20-37)
then remove the weatherstrip. • Door glass outer weatherstrip (see page 20-38)
6. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace

them with new ones.
7. Set the rear end of the door glass outer

weatherstrip to the rear door outer molding. Before
installing the weatherstrip, align the clips of the
weatherstrip to the flanges where the clips should
be engaged by sliding them.
8. Push the clip and hook portions of the rear door

glass outer weatherstrip into place securely.

the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-39
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２１２０１ＫＢＡＴ１５
08/04/09 12:30:54 61TL2000_200_0040
Doors
Rear Door Sash Outer Trim Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip

1. Remove these items: • Take care not to scratch the door.
• Take care not to damage the front hook in the
• Door panel (see page 20-25) weatherstrip because it is not available separately.
• Plastic cover, as needed (see step 4 on page 1. Remove these items:
20-33)
• Door pad (see page 20-36) • Door panel (see page 20-25)
• Door skin pad (see page 20-37) • Door panel bracket (see step 3 on page 20-33)
• Door glass outer weatherstrip (see page 20-38) • Plastic cover, as needed (see step 4 on page
• Door outer molding (see page 20-39) 20-33)
• Door pad (see page 20-36)
2. Pull the door sash outer trim (A) up to release the • Door skin pad (see page 20-37)
hooks (B) from the door, then remove the trim.
＊０２ 2. Raise the glass fully.
A
hooks (C) from the flanges (D) on the door panel.
＊０１
B
D
C
A
3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal. A A
(Engaged (Released
position) position)
20-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２１５１１ＫＢＡＴ２０ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２０３６１ＫＢＡＴ１１
08/04/09 12:30:55 61TL2000_200_0041
Rear Door Outer Molding

Replacement
4. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the front hook (A)
from inside of the door, then pull up the front
portion of the rear door glass outer weatherstrip (B). Special Tools Required
＊０２ KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014
A
B NOTE:

C
20-33)
5. Release the weatherstrip from the rear door outer • Door pad (see page 20-36)
molding (C) by sliding the weatherstrip forward, • Door skin pad (see page 20-37)
then remove the weatherstrip. • Door glass outer weatherstrip (see page 20-38)
6. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace

them with new ones.
7. Set the rear end of the door glass outer

weatherstrip to the rear door outer molding. Before
installing the weatherstrip, align the clips of the
weatherstrip to the flanges where the clips should
be engaged by sliding them.
8. Push the clip and hook portions of the rear door

glass outer weatherstrip into place securely.

the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-39
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２１２０１ＫＢＡＴ１５
08/04/09 12:30:55 61TL2000_200_0042
Doors
Rear Door Outer Molding Replacement (cont’d)

2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (A), then pull 3. While removing the upper edge of the door outer
back the door weatherstrip (B), and remove the molding (A) from the edge of the sash, cut the
screws (C, D). double-sided adhesive tape (B) with a utility knife,
＊０１ then remove the molding from the sash. Release
Fastener Locations
the bottom hook (C), then remove the molding.
A : Clip, 3 C : Screw, 1 D : Screw, 2 ＊０２
(Black) B
A B
A
A
B
B C
4. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive

tape from the sash, then clean the sash surface
with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
5. Install the new door outer molding in the reverse

order of removal, and note these items:
B
D
A • Push the adhesive portions and the bottom hook
D portion into place securely.
A • Make sure the upper and lower sides of the
molding are catching the edges of the sash
properly.
• Push the door weatherstrip clips into place
securely.
20-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:30:56 61TL2000_200_0043
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement

NOTE: 2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), and release the door
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. weatherstrip (E) from the holder (F) on the door
• Take care not to scratch the door. sash, then remove the weatherstrip.
• Take care not to damage the front upper corner clip
(black) and the rear upper corner clips (black) in the 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of
weatherstrip because these clips are not available removal, and note these items:
separately.
• Use a clip remover to remove the clips. • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
replace them with new ones.
1. At the B-pillar, remove the door checker mounting • Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the
bolt (A). holder securely.
＊０１ • Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the
Fastener Locations
door checker mounting bolt before installation.
A : Bolt, 1 B : Clip, 14 C : Clip, 4 • Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-43).
(Left: Orange) (Yellow)
(Right: Green)
D : Clip, 3
(Black)
E
D
F
D
D
D
E B
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-41
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１６６２２２０５１ＫＢＡＴ５０
08/04/09 12:30:56 61TL2000_200_0044
Doors
Door Glass Adjustment

NOTE: Check the weatherstrip and the glass run Rear door
channel for damage or deterioration, and replace them ＊０２
if necessary. A
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
• Front door: Tweeter cover (see page 20-47)

• Door panel:
– Front door (see page 20-9)
– Rear door (see page 20-25)
• Door panel bracket:
C
– Front door (see step 3 on page 20-19)
– Rear door (see step 3 on page 20-33)
• Plastic cover:
– Front door (see step 4 on page 20-19)
B
– Rear door (see step 4 on page 20-33) 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
glass mounting bolts (B), then loosen them.
4. Push the glass against the run channel (C), then
Front door tighten the glass mounting bolts.
＊０１
A 5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also make
sure that the glass (A) contacts the glass run
channel (B) evenly.
＊０３
B
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
7. Attach the plastic cover making sure it is sealed

8. Reinstall the door panel bracket:
• Front door (see step 3 on page 20-19)

• Rear door (see step 3 on page 20-33)
20-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ５４４０００２０３７１ＭＢＡＴ２０
08/04/09 12:30:57 61TL2000_200_0045
Door Position Adjustment

9. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and NOTE: Check for a flush fit with the body, then check for
on the sealing area as shown, and note these items: equal gaps between the front, rear, and bottom door
edges and the body. Check that the door and body
• Use a 12 mm (1/2 in.) diameter hose (A). edges are parallel.
• Adjust the rate of water flow as shown (B).
• Do not use a nozzle. 1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when
• Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in.) away from adjusting the doors.
the door (C).
＊０４ 2. Adjust at the hinges (A):
12 mm (1/2 in.)
• Pad a floor jack (B) with shop towels (C), then use
0.5 m (19 in.) the jack to support the door to prevent damage to
the door while adjusting it.
A • On the front door: Remove the front inner fender
(see page 20-213) and the front fender fairing
B (see page 20-215). Loosen the hinge mounting
bolts (D) slightly, and move the door backward or
forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the
300 mm (12 in.) gaps.
C • On the rear door: Loosen the hinge mounting
bolts (E) slightly, and move the door backward or
forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
Front door
＊０５
D A
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m
10. Reinstall the door panel: (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
• Front door (see page 20-9)

• Rear door (see page 20-25)
F
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m
(3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
D
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m F
(3.0 kgf·m, 8 x 1.25 mm
22 lbf·ft) 29 N·m
(3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-43
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ５４４０００２０３７１ＭＢＡＴ２１
08/04/09 12:30:57 61TL2000_200_0046
Doors
Door Position Adjustment (cont’d)

Rear door 4. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. If
＊０６ necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the
F rear of the doors flush with the body.
A 8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m ＊０７
E
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m
C A
F B 5. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts

8 x 1.25 mm and around the hinges.
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
E 6. Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-43).
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
3. If necessary, replace the door mounting bolts with

the adjusting bolts (P/N 90102-SFA-305) made
specifically for door adjustment, then adjust at the
door: Loosen the door mounting bolts (F) slightly,
and move the door up or down as necessary to
equalize the gaps, and move it in or out until it’s
flush with the body.
20-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:30:57 61TL2000_200_0047
Door Striker Adjustment

Make sure the door latches securely without slamming
it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts
are fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or
down, and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (B).

＊０１
A
B
8 x 1.25 mm
18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
2. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the

striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (C). Do
not tap the striker too hard.
3. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door

against the body to be sure the striker allows a
flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the
screws and recheck.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-45
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ１６１２６７２１７０１ＭＢＡＴ２２
08/04/09 12:30:59 61TL2000_200_0048
Mirrors
＊０１
POWER MIRROR
MIRROR HOLDER
TWEETER COVER
＊０２
HARNESS COVER BASE
MIRROR HARNESS
UPPER COVER
MIRROR HARNESS
LOWER COVER
MOUNT
REARVIEW MIRROR
20-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ３４３００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:30:59 61TL2000_200_0049
Power Mirror Replacement

5. While holding the mirror (B), remove the nuts
securing the mirror.
1. Lower the door glass fully.
6. Release the screw portion (A) from the hole in the
2. With your hand, carefully pull the top edge of the door, then remove the mirror (B). Take care not to
tweeter cover (A) out to detach the hooks (B) and scratch the door.
the clips, and remove the cover. Disconnect the ＊０３
door tweeter connector (C). B
＊０１
Fastener Locations
: Clip, 2
C
7. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal,
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.

B
• Replace any damaged clips with new ones.
• Push the clips on the cover into place securely.
3. Remove the front door panel (see page 20-9).
4. Disconnect the connector (A).

＊０２
Fastener Locations
: Nut, 3
5 x 0.8 mm
5 N·m
B (0.5 kgf·m, 4 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-47
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ３４３０００４４０５１ＫＢＡＴ１０
08/04/09 12:31:00 61TL2000_200_0050
Mirrors
Mirror Holder Replacement

NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 5. Before reinstalling the mirror holder to the inner
holder (A) on the actuator, check the actuator rods
1. Carefully push on the top edge of the mirror holder (B) and the actuator boots (C):
(A) by hand.
＊０１ • If each rod is out the actuator hole, insert it
A
B securely.
• Each rod should be covered with a boot. If not,
adjust the boot into the proper position.
＊０３
A
2. Put a shop towel in the opening between the

bottom edge of the mirror holder and the mirror
housing (B) to prevent scratches. Insert a flat-tip
screwdriver wrapped with protective tape to the OK NO GOOD
guide notches (C) of the mirror holder, and detach A A
the bottom clips (D). C B
C
3. While heating the mirror holder (A) from the
opening between the mirror holder and the mirror
housing with a heat gun, carefully pull out the C
A
bottom edge of the mirror holder to separate the
adhesive (B), and then release the side clips (C).
B
B C A
NOTE: Do not heat the resinous parts too much or
you may damage them.
＊０２ 6. Reconnect the mirror defogger connectors.
C
A
E
7. Reattach the hooks on the mirror holder to the
B actuator, then position the mirror holder on the
actuator. Carefully push on the clip portions of the
mirror holder until the mirror holder locks into
C place.
8. Check the actuator operation.

F
4. Separate the mirror holder from the actuator (D) by

releasing the hooks (E), and disconnect the mirror
defogger connectors (F).
20-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ３４３０００４４０２１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:31:00 61TL2000_200_0051
Rearview Mirror Replacement

1. Slide the rearview mirror harness upper cover (A) 3. Using a TORX T20 bit, loosen the screw, then slide
forward to release it from the headliner (B). Pry out the rearview mirror (A) rearward and off the mount
the rearview mirror harness lower cover (C) to (B).
detach the hooks (D), then slide the lower cover ＊０３
Fastener Location
rearward, and remove the lower cover by
detaching the hooks (E) on the rearview mirror : Screw, 1
harness cover base (F).
＊０１
E
E
B 3/8-24 UNF
4 N·m
A
B
C
D
A
2. Disconnect the connector (A).

＊０２ 4. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal,
• Before installing the mirror, remove the TORX

screw, and apply medium strength liquid thread
lock to it.
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-49
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ３４３０００３４６５１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:31:02 61TL2000_200_0052
Glass
＊０１
UPPER CLIP, 2
(Self-adhesive-type, glass side) REARVIEW MIRROR
HARNESS COVER BASE
WINDSHIELD UPPER SEAL Replacement, page 20-56
WINDSHIELD MOLDING
DASHBOARD SEAL, 2
RUBBER DAM A
WINDSHIELD RUBBER DAM B

＊０２
UPPER CLIP, 2
FASTENER, 2 (Self-adhesive-type, glass side)
(Self-adhesive-type, glass side)
(Required for replacement or reinstallation) UPPER RUBBER DAM
FASTENER, 2
(Self-adhesive-type, body side)
(Required for replacement or
reinstallation)
LOWER RUBBER DAM
REAR WINDOW SIDE RUBBER DAM, 2

20-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ５４４００００００００ＤＡＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:31:02 61TL2000_200_0053
Windshield Replacement
NOTE: 4. Pull down the front portion of the headliner
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. (see page 20-100). Take care not to bend the
• Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive headliner excessively, or you may crease or break
with a piano wire. it.
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging the seat.
• When replacing a broken windshield, a commercially 5. Apply protective tape along the edge of the
available windshield cutter can be efficiently used for dashboard and body. Using an awl, make a hole
cutting the adhesive. For details, follow the through the rubber dam and adhesive from inside
instructions of the tool manufacturer. the vehicle at the corner portion of the windshield.
Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and
1. Remove these items: wrap each end around a piece of wood.
• Cowl cover (see page 20-204) 6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
• Rearview mirror (see page 20-49) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
• Front door opening seal, as needed (see step 4 wire as close to the windshield (B) as possible to
on page 20-77) prevent damage to the body and dashboard.
• A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-78) Carefully cut through the rubber dam and adhesive
• Windshield side trim, both sides (see page (C) around the entire windshield.
20-205) ＊０２
A
2. Remove the molding (A) from the upper edge of the
windshield (B). If necessary, cut the molding with a
utility knife. B
＊０１
A
C
B
Cutting positions
＊０３
A B A
3. If the old windshield will be reinstalled, make A

A
alignment marks across the glass and the body
with a grease pencil.
C A
7. Carefully remove the windshield.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-51
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ５４４０００６５５０１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:31:03 61TL2000_200_0054
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont’d)

8. With a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a 12. Attach rubber dam A, the upper clips (B), and the
thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding dashboard seals (C) with adhesive tape to the
surface around the entire windshield opening inside face of the windshield (D) as shown. Before
flange: installing the upper clips, apply primer to the area
where the adhesive tape will be applied to the
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the inside face of the windshield:
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding. • Be sure the rubber dam, the upper clips, and the
• Remove the rubber dams from the body. dashboard seals line up with the alignment
marks (E).
9. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge • Be sure the convex portion (F) of the left and right
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, clips faces the right side.
keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the • Be careful not to touch the windshield where
clean surface. adhesive will be applied.
10. If the old windshield will be reinstalled, use a putty Rubber dam adhesive tape:
knife to scrape off the old adhesive, the upper clips, Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
and the rubber dams from the windshield. Clean Width 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
the inside face and the edge of the windshield with Upper clip adhesive tape:
isopropyl alcohol where new adhesive will be Thickness 0.4 mm (0.016 in.)
applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free Width 10 mm (0.39 in.)
of water, oil, and grease. Dashboard seal adhesive tape:
Thickness 0.4 mm (0.016 in.)
11. If the windshield will be replaced with a new one, Width 13 mm (0.51 in.)
attach the new rearview mirror harness cover base ＊０４
to the inside face of the windshield (see page 20-56). E
A
E 13.5 mm
(0.53 in.)
B
13.5 mm
(0.53 in.)
F
11 mm A
(0.43 in.)
Inside C
B
D
16 mm
(0.63 in.)
Inside E
C
D A
C
A
Inside
A A
D
11 mm D
(0.43 in.) E
20-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:31:03 61TL2000_200_0055
13. Attach rubber dam B with adhesive tape to the 14. Attach the molding (A) with adhesive tape (B) to the
inside surface of the windshield (A) as shown. upper edge of the windshield (C). Be careful not to
touch the windshield where adhesive will be
• Be sure the rubber dam lines up with the applied.
alignment marks (C).
• With the edge (D) of the black ceramic on the Molding adhesive tape:
windshield as a guide, attach rubber dam B to the Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
windshield. Width 4 mm (0.16 in.)
• Be careful not to touch the windshield where ＊０６
adhesive will be applied. 6.5 mm
(0.26 in.) A
Rubber dam adhesive tape: C

Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.) A
Width 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
＊０５ B
B
A
D
53.5 mm
(2.11 in.)
C
B 15. Attach the molding upper seal (A) with adhesive

A
tape to the inside surface of the molding (B) as
shown.
＊０７
B
A Inside
Inside
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-53

08/04/09 12:31:04 61TL2000_200_0056
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont’d)

16. Set the windshield in the opening, and center it. 18. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to
Make alignment marks (A) across the windshield the windshield (A) along the edge of the molding
and the body with a grease pencil at the four points (B) and the rubber dams (C) as shown, then lightly
shown. Make sure the pins (B) of both upper clips wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
(C) contact with the edge of the body holes. Be
careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive • Apply glass primer to the molding.
will be applied. • Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and
＊０８ do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed
up.
C • Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
B If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
A windshield properly, causing a leak after the
windshield is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from the primed surfaces.
＊０９
: Apply glass primer here.
13.5 mm B
(0.53 in.)
C
A
Inside
B
C
Inside
A
17. Remove the windshield.
C
C A
12 mm A
(0.47 in.)
Inside
20-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:31:04 61TL2000_200_0057
19. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body 21. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
primer to any exposed paint or metal around the to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) to the
primer dry for at least 10 minutes: windshield (B) along the edge of the molding (C)
and rubber dams (D) as shown. Apply the adhesive
• Do not apply body primer to any remaining within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer.
original adhesive on the flange. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
• Be careful not to mix up the body and glass ＊１２
primer sponges. 2 mm (0.08 in.)
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. 13 mm
A
＊１０ (0.51 in.)
: Apply body primer to any exposed paint as A C
shown. 2 mm 8 mm 2 mm
20 mm (0.08 in.) (0.31 in.) (0.08 in.) Overlap
(0.79 in.) D 0.5 mm
Inside (0.02 in.)
A D
4 mm C
(0.16 in.) Inside B
B
20 mm
(0.79 in.)
20 mm D
(0.79 in.)
D
20 mm
(0.79 in.)
B
D
2 mm A
20. Cut a ‘‘V’’ in the end of the nozzle (A) on the (0.08 in.)
adhesive cartridge as shown.
＊１１ A
Inside
D B
2 mm (0.08 in.)
2 mm
(0.08 in.)
13 mm (0.51 in.)
A
8 mm (0.31 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-55

08/04/09 12:31:05 61TL2000_200_0058
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont’d) Rearview Mirror Harness Cover

Base Replacement
22. Use suction cups to hold the windshield over the
opening, align it with the alignment marks made in
step 16, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly NOTE:
push on the windshield until its edges are fully • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
seated on the adhesive all the way around. • Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive
with piano wire.
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for
about an hour until the adhesive is dry. 1. Remove the rearview mirror (see page 20-49).
23. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty 2. Carefully cut through the adhesive tape under the
knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted rearview mirror harness cover base using the piano
surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop wire, then remove the base.
towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
3. Use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old
24. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the adhesive tape from the windshield. Clean the
windshield and check for leaks. Mark leaking areas, inside face of the windshield with isopropyl alcohol
and let the windshield dry, then seal with sealant. where new rearview mirror harness cover base is
Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after to be applied. Make sure the installing surface is
windshield installation. If the vehicle has to be used kept free of water, oil and grease.
within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
4. If the old rearview mirror harness cover base (A)
25. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. will be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all
of the old adhesive tape from the base. Clean the
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following base surface with isopropyl alcohol. Apply primer
things for 2 to 3 days: to the area where the new double-sided adhesive
• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. tape (B) will be applied to the base, and attach the
• Twist the body excessively (such as when going adhesive tape to the base.
in and out of driveways at an angle or driving
over rough, uneven roads). Adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
Width 7 mm ( 0.28 in.)
＊０１
: Apply primer here.
2 mm
(0.08 in.)
1 mm
(0.04 in.)
20-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ３４３０００４９８５１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:31:05 61TL2000_200_0058
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont’d) Rearview Mirror Harness Cover

Base Replacement
22. Use suction cups to hold the windshield over the
opening, align it with the alignment marks made in
step 16, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly NOTE:
push on the windshield until its edges are fully • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
seated on the adhesive all the way around. • Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive
with piano wire.
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for
about an hour until the adhesive is dry. 1. Remove the rearview mirror (see page 20-49).
23. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty 2. Carefully cut through the adhesive tape under the
knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted rearview mirror harness cover base using the piano
surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop wire, then remove the base.
towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
3. Use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old
24. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the adhesive tape from the windshield. Clean the
windshield and check for leaks. Mark leaking areas, inside face of the windshield with isopropyl alcohol
and let the windshield dry, then seal with sealant. where new rearview mirror harness cover base is
Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after to be applied. Make sure the installing surface is
windshield installation. If the vehicle has to be used kept free of water, oil and grease.
within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
4. If the old rearview mirror harness cover base (A)
25. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. will be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all
of the old adhesive tape from the base. Clean the
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following base surface with isopropyl alcohol. Apply primer
things for 2 to 3 days: to the area where the new double-sided adhesive
• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. tape (B) will be applied to the base, and attach the
• Twist the body excessively (such as when going adhesive tape to the base.
over rough, uneven roads). Adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
Width 7 mm ( 0.28 in.)
＊０１
: Apply primer here.
2 mm
(0.08 in.)
1 mm
(0.04 in.)
20-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ３４３０００４９８５１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:31:05 61TL2000_200_0059
Rear Window Replacement

5. Before installing the rearview mirror harness cover NOTE:
base, apply primer to the area where the harness • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
cover base will be applied to the inside face of the • Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive
windshield. Let the primer dry at least 10 minutes, with a piano wire.
then attach it to the windshield within 12 hours. • Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
＊０２ • Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines,
: Apply primer here. window antenna grid lines, and terminals.
7 mm
(0.28 in.) 1. Remove these items:
• Trunk lid
• Rear seat cushion (see page 20-176)
• Rear seat side bolster, both sides (see page
20-177)
• Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 4 on
76 mm
page 20-78)
(2.99 in.) • C-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-85)
• Rear center seat belt lower anchor (see page
24-8)
10.5 mm • Rear bulkhead cover (see page 20-88)
(0.41 in.) • Rear shelf (see page 20-88)
6. Attach the rearview mirror harness cover base (A) 2. Disconnect the window antenna connectors (A) and
with adhesive tape (B) to the inside face of the the rear window defogger connectors (B).
windshield as shown, then press the adhesive ＊０１
A
portions into place securely.
＊０３
B
A 8.5 mm
(0.33 in.)
7. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. B
3. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, make

alignment marks across the glass and the body
with a grease pencil.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-57
ＴＬ２９Ａ００Ｊ５４４０００５０４６１ＫＢＡＴ００
08/04/09 12:31:06 61TL2000_200_0060
Glass
Rear Window Replacement (cont’d)

4. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (A) by 7. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
detaching the clips. Take care not to bend the back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
headliner excessively, or you may crease or break wire as close to the rear window (B) as possible to
it. prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut
＊０２ through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear
Fastener Locations
window.
: Clip, 2 ＊０４
(Gray)
A
C
B
A
5. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside Cutting positions
edges of the body. Using an awl, make a hole ＊０５
through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the A
C
corner portion of the rear window. Push a piece of A
piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end
around a piece of wood.
6. Remove the lower rubber dam (A) from the lower

edge of the rear window (B). If necessary, cut the
rubber dam with a utility knife.
＊０３
B
B A A
B A
A
20-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:32:18 61TL2000_200_0061
8. Carefully remove the rear window. 12. Apply primer to the edge of the rear window (A)
where the lower rubber dam adhesive tape will be
9. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth attached as shown. Attach the lower rubber dam
to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the (B) with adhesive tape (C) to the lower edge of the
bonding surface around the entire rear window rear window:
opening flange:
• After installing the rubber dam, cut the ends (D)
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the of the rubber dam as shown.
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper • Be careful not to touch the windshield where
bonding. adhesive will be applied.
• Remove the fasteners from the body.
Lower rubber dam adhesive tape:
10. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge Thickness 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, Width 4 mm (0.16 in.)
keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the ＊０６
surface. : Apply primer here.
A
11. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, use a
putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the D A
fasteners, and the rubber dams from the rear
window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the
rear window with isopropyl alcohol where new
adhesive will be applied. Make sure the bonding
B
surface is kept free of water, oil, and grease.
149 mm 149 mm
(5.87 in.) 149 mm (5.87 in.)
(5.87 in.)
B
Inside Inside
A
A
5 mm
(0.2 in.) C
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-59

08/04/09 12:32:19 61TL2000_200_0062
Glass

13. Attach the upper rubber dam (A), the side rubber 14. Attach the fasteners with adhesive tape to the rear
dams (B), the upper clips (C), and the fasteners (D) window opening flange (A) of the body on both
with adhesive tape to the inside face of the rear sides.
window (E) as shown. Before installing the upper
clips, apply primer to the area where the adhesive Fastener adhesive tape:
tape will be applied to the inside face of the Thickness 0.6 mm (0.024 in.)
windshield: Width 7.5 mm (0.3 in.)
＊０８
Fastener Locations
• First attach the upper rubber dam, then attach the
side rubber dams around the edge of the rear : Fastner, 2
window. Be sure the top of the side rubber dam
contacts with the bottom of the upper rubber
dam. If necessary, cut the excess rubber dams.
• Be sure the upper clips and the fasteners line up
A
with the alignment marks (F).
• Be sure the convex portion (G) of the left and
right clips faces the right side.
• Be careful not to touch the rear window where
adhesive will be applied.
Upper clip adhesive tape:

Width 10 mm (0.39 in.)
Rubber dam adhesive tape:
Width 3.5 mm (0.14 in.) 15. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it.
Fastener adhesive tape: Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window
Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.) and the body with a grease pencil at the four points
Width 7 mm (0.28 in.) shown. Make sure the pins (B) of both upper clips
＊０７ (C) contact with the edge of the body holes. Be
A careful not to touch the rear window where
adhesive will be applied.
2 mm
19 mm (0.08 in.) ＊０９
F (0.75 in.)
C
C B
A G A
C B
2 mm
(0.08 in.)
B
F
2 mm
(0.08 in.)
D 16. Remove the rear window.

E
20-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:32:19 61TL2000_200_0063
17. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to 18. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body
the rear window (A) along the edge of the rubber primer to any exposed paint or metal around the
dams (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the
gauze or cheesecloth: primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
• With the printed dots (C) on the rear window as a • Do not apply body primer to any remaining
guide, apply the glass primer to both corner original adhesive on the flange.
portions of the rear window. • Be careful not to mix up the body and glass
• Do not apply body primer to the rear window, primer sponges.
and do not get body and glass primer sponges • Never touch the primed surfaces with your
mixed up. hands.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. ＊１１
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear : Apply body primer to any exposed paint as
shown.
window properly, causing a leak after the rear
20 mm
window is installed. (0.79 in.)
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away 2 mm 20 mm
2 mm (0.08 in.) (0.79 in.)
from the primed surfaces. (0.08 in.)
＊１０
: Apply glass primer here.
12 mm
(0.47 in.)
B
B
12 mm Inside A
(0.47 in.) B
Inside A
B
20 mm
(0.79 in.)
B B
C
6 mm 6 mm
(0.24 in.) (0.24 in.)
B
19. Cut a ‘‘V’’ in the end of the nozzle (A) on the
adhesive cartridge as shown.
C
＊１２
6 mm 2 mm (0.08 in.)
Inside A (0.24 in.) B
A B
12 mm 13 mm (0.51 in.)
(0.47 in.)
B
A
8 mm (0.31 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-61

08/04/09 12:32:20 61TL2000_200_0064
Glass

20. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets 21. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the
to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a opening, align it with the alignment marks you
caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) to the made in step 15, and set it down on the adhesive.
rear window (B) along the edge of the rubber dams Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are
(C) as shown: fully seated on the adhesive all the way around.
• With the printed dots (D) on the rear window as a NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for
guide, apply the adhesive to both corner portions about an hour until the adhesive is dry.
of the rear window.
• Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after 22. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty
applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
bead at each corner. surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel
＊１３ dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
2 mm (0.08 in.)
A
23. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
13 mm
(0.51 in.) rear window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas, let the rear window dry, then seal with
8 mm (0.31 in.) 2 mm sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours
C B (0.08 in.) after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to
A C
C 2 mm be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
2 mm (0.08 in.) C slowly.
Inside
(0.08 in.)
A 24. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.

2 mm
Inside B (0.08 in.)
A C
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following
things for 2 to 3 days:
D • Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.
• Twist the body excessively (such as when going
2 mm
(0.08 in.) over rough, uneven roads).
2 mm
(0.08 in.)
C
C
C B
A Inside 2 mm
(0.08 in.)
2 mm
(0.08 in.) 2 mm C D
B
(0.08 in.)
C
20-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

08/04/09 12:32:23 61TL2000_200_0065
Moonroof
＊０１
DRAIN CHANNEL

Manual Shop Acura TSX 2009 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Shop Acura TSX 2009 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

08/04/14 13:35:11 61TL2000_000_0002

2009 TSX - P/NO. 61TL200

How to Use This Manual General Information

First Edition 06/2008 HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD. *Restraints

As sections with * include SRS components;

Chassis and Paint Codes .................................. 1-2

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations .... 1-5

Lift and Support Points .................................... 1-8

Parts Marking .................................................... 1-11

Chassis and Paint Codes

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

Engine Number Paint Code

Identification Number Locations

Engine Number Automatic Manual

1-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations

MONITOR NOTICE FRONT SEAT BELT

DRIVER AIRBAG ROOF-SIDE

-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-5

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont’d)

AIR CONDITIONING RADIATOR CAP BATTERY

1-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Under-hood Emission Control Label

-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-7

Lift and Support Points

2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle

3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the

1-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Flat-bed Equipment − The operator loads the vehicle

To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is

The towing hooks can be used with a winch to pull the

-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-9

If the vehicle cannot be transported by a flat-bed, it

It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles

1-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-11

Standards and Service Limits

Standards and Service Limits

2-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-3

Standards and Service Limits

2-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-5

Standards and Service Limits

2-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Manual Transmission and M/T Differential

B 24.03−24.08 mm (0.946−0.948 in.) ―――

Mainshaft I.D. 28.00−28.01 mm (1.102−1.103 in.) 28.02 mm (1.103 in.)

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-7

Standards and Service Limits

2-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-9

Standards and Service Limits

2-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-11

Standards and Service Limits

2-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-13